This commit was manufactured by cvs2svn to create branch 'rtems-addon-

packages-4-9-branch'. Sprout from ncurses-gnu 2002-12-19 15:34:54 UTC Eric Norum <WENorum@lbl.gov> 'Latest ncurses add-on' Cherrypick from addons 2002-06-28 21:58:41 UTC Eric Norum <WENorum@lbl.gov> 'Useful add-on libraries': README RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.avl RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.common RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.site avl-1.4.0/AUTHORS avl-1.4.0/COPYING avl-1.4.0/ChangeLog avl-1.4.0/INSTALL avl-1.4.0/Makefile.am avl-1.4.0/Makefile.in avl-1.4.0/NEWS avl-1.4.0/README avl-1.4.0/THANKS avl-1.4.0/TODO avl-1.4.0/aclocal.m4 avl-1.4.0/avl.c avl-1.4.0/avl.h avl-1.4.0/avl.html avl-1.4.0/avl.info avl-1.4.0/avl.texinfo avl-1.4.0/avl.text avl-1.4.0/avlt.c avl-1.4.0/avlt.h avl-1.4.0/avltr.c avl-1.4.0/avltr.h avl-1.4.0/configure avl-1.4.0/configure.in avl-1.4.0/install-sh avl-1.4.0/missing avl-1.4.0/mkinstalldirs avl-1.4.0/rb.c avl-1.4.0/rb.h avl-1.4.0/texinfo.tex avl-1.4.0/thread-test.c examples/avl/BuildTests.sh examples/avl/Makefile examples/avl/README examples/avl/init.c examples/ncurses/BuildTests.sh examples/ncurses/Makefile examples/ncurses/README examples/ncurses/init.c examples/readline/.gdbinit examples/readline/Makefile examples/readline/init.c examples/readline/rlgeneric.c ncurses-5.2/ANNOUNCE ncurses-5.2/Ada95/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/Ada95/README ncurses-5.2/Ada95/TODO ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/gen.c ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/html.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/normal.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/table.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-aux.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_user_data.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-forms-form_user_data.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-forms.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-menus-item_user_data.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-menus-menu_user_data.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-menus.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-mouse.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-panels-user_data.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses-panels.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/gen/terminal_interface-curses.ads.m4 ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/README ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/explain.txt ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/rain.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/rain.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-curses_demo-attributes.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-curses_demo-attributes.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-curses_demo-mouse.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-curses_demo-mouse.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-curses_demo.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-curses_demo.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-explanation.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-explanation.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-form_demo-aux.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-form_demo-aux.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-form_demo-handler.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-form_demo-handler.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-form_demo.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-form_demo.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-function_key_setting.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-function_key_setting.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-header_handler.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-header_handler.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-helpers.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-helpers.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-keyboard_handler.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-keyboard_handler.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-manifest.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-menu_demo-aux.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-menu_demo-aux.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-menu_demo-handler.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-menu_demo-handler.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-menu_demo.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-menu_demo.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-my_field_type.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-my_field_type.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-text_io_demo.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample-text_io_demo.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/sample.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/status.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/status.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/tour.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/samples/tour.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-aux.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alpha.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alpha.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alphanumeric.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alphanumeric.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration-ada.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration-ada.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-intfield.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-intfield.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-ipv4_address.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-ipv4_address.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-numeric.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-numeric.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-regexp.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-regexp.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user-choice.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user-choice.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_user_data.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms-form_user_data.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-forms.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-menus-item_user_data.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-menus-menu_user_data.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-menus.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-mouse.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-panels-user_data.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-panels.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-aux.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-aux.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-complex_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-complex_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-decimal_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-decimal_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-enumeration_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-enumeration_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-fixed_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-fixed_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-float_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-float_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-integer_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-integer_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-modular_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-modular_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses-text_io.ads ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface-curses.adb ncurses-5.2/Ada95/src/terminal_interface.ads ncurses-5.2/INSTALL ncurses-5.2/MANIFEST ncurses-5.2/Makefile.glibc ncurses-5.2/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/Makefile.os2 ncurses-5.2/NEWS ncurses-5.2/README ncurses-5.2/README.emx ncurses-5.2/README.glibc ncurses-5.2/TO-DO ncurses-5.2/aclocal.m4 ncurses-5.2/announce.html.in ncurses-5.2/c++/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/c++/NEWS ncurses-5.2/c++/PROBLEMS ncurses-5.2/c++/README-first ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesapp.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesapp.h ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesf.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesf.h ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesm.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesm.h ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesmain.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesp.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesp.h ncurses-5.2/c++/cursespad.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesw.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursesw.h ncurses-5.2/c++/cursslk.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/cursslk.h ncurses-5.2/c++/demo.cc ncurses-5.2/c++/edit_cfg.sh ncurses-5.2/c++/etip.h.in ncurses-5.2/c++/headers ncurses-5.2/c++/internal.h ncurses-5.2/c++/modules ncurses-5.2/config.guess ncurses-5.2/config.sub ncurses-5.2/configure ncurses-5.2/configure.in ncurses-5.2/convert_configure.pl ncurses-5.2/dist.mk ncurses-5.2/doc/hackguide.doc ncurses-5.2/doc/html/Ada95.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/files.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/files/T.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/A.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/B.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/C.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/D.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/E.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/F.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/G.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/H.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/I.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/K.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/L.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/M.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/N.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/O.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/P.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/Q.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/R.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/S.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/T.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/U.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/V.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/funcs/W.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/index.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/main.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/table.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-aux__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-aux__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alpha__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alpha__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alphanumeric__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-alphanumeric__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration-ada__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration-ada__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-enumeration__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-intfield__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-intfield__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-ipv4_address__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-ipv4_address__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-numeric__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-numeric__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-regexp__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-regexp__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user-choice__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user-choice__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types-user__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_types__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_user_data__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-field_user_data__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-form_user_data__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms-form_user_data__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-forms__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-menus-item_user_data__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-menus-item_user_data__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-menus-menu_user_data__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-menus-menu_user_data__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-menus__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-menus__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-mouse__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-mouse__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-panels-user_data__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-panels-user_data__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-panels__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-panels__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-aux__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-aux__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-complex_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-complex_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-decimal_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-decimal_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-enumeration_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-enumeration_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-fixed_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-fixed_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-float_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-float_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-integer_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-integer_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-modular_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io-modular_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses-text_io__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses__adb.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface-curses__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ada/terminal_interface__ads.htm ncurses-5.2/doc/html/announce.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/hackguide.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/index.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/clear.1.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_addstr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_border.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_clear.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_inchstr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_overlay.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_refresh.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_scanw.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_scroll.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_slk.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_terminfo.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_touch.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/curs_window.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/keyok.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/term.5.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/term.7.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/tput.1.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/tset.1.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/man/wresize.3x.html ncurses-5.2/doc/html/ncurses-intro.html ncurses-5.2/doc/ncurses-intro.doc ncurses-5.2/form/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/form/READ.ME ncurses-5.2/form/fld_arg.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_attr.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_current.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_def.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_dup.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_ftchoice.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_ftlink.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_info.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_just.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_link.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_max.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_move.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_newftyp.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_opts.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_pad.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_page.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_stat.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_type.c ncurses-5.2/form/fld_user.c ncurses-5.2/form/form.h ncurses-5.2/form/form.priv.h ncurses-5.2/form/frm_cursor.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_data.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_def.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_driver.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_hook.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_opts.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_page.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_post.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_req_name.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_scale.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_sub.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_user.c ncurses-5.2/form/frm_win.c ncurses-5.2/form/fty_alnum.c ncurses-5.2/form/fty_alpha.c ncurses-5.2/form/fty_enum.c ncurses-5.2/form/fty_int.c ncurses-5.2/form/fty_ipv4.c ncurses-5.2/form/fty_num.c ncurses-5.2/form/fty_regex.c ncurses-5.2/form/headers ncurses-5.2/form/llib-lform ncurses-5.2/form/modules ncurses-5.2/include/Caps ncurses-5.2/include/MKhashsize.sh ncurses-5.2/include/MKncurses_def.sh ncurses-5.2/include/MKparametrized.sh ncurses-5.2/include/MKterm.h.awk.in ncurses-5.2/include/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/include/capdefaults.c ncurses-5.2/include/curses.h.in ncurses-5.2/include/edit_cfg.sh ncurses-5.2/include/headers ncurses-5.2/include/nc_alloc.h ncurses-5.2/include/nc_panel.h ncurses-5.2/include/ncurses_cfg.hin ncurses-5.2/include/ncurses_defs ncurses-5.2/include/term_entry.h ncurses-5.2/include/termcap.h.in ncurses-5.2/include/tic.h ncurses-5.2/include/unctrl.h.in ncurses-5.2/install-sh ncurses-5.2/man/MKterminfo.sh ncurses-5.2/man/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/man/captoinfo.1m ncurses-5.2/man/clear.1 ncurses-5.2/man/curs_addch.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_addchstr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_addstr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_attr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_beep.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_bkgd.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_border.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_clear.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_color.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_delch.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_deleteln.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_extend.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_getch.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_getstr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_getyx.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_inch.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_inchstr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_initscr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_inopts.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_insch.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_insstr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_instr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_kernel.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_mouse.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_move.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_outopts.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_overlay.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_pad.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_print.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_printw.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_refresh.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_scanw.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_scr_dump.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_scroll.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_slk.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_termattrs.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_termcap.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_terminfo.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_touch.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_trace.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_util.3x ncurses-5.2/man/curs_window.3x ncurses-5.2/man/default_colors.3x ncurses-5.2/man/define_key.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_cursor.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_data.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_driver.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_attributes.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_buffer.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_info.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_just.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_new.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_opts.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_userptr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_field_validation.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_fieldtype.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_hook.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_new.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_new_page.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_opts.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_page.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_post.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_requestname.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_userptr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/form_win.3x ncurses-5.2/man/infocmp.1m ncurses-5.2/man/infotocap.1m ncurses-5.2/man/keybound.3x ncurses-5.2/man/keyok.3x ncurses-5.2/man/make_sed.sh ncurses-5.2/man/man_db.renames ncurses-5.2/man/manlinks.sed ncurses-5.2/man/menu.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_attributes.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_cursor.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_driver.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_format.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_hook.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_items.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_mark.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_new.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_opts.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_pattern.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_post.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_requestname.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_spacing.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_userptr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/menu_win.3x ncurses-5.2/man/mitem_current.3x ncurses-5.2/man/mitem_name.3x ncurses-5.2/man/mitem_new.3x ncurses-5.2/man/mitem_opts.3x ncurses-5.2/man/mitem_userptr.3x ncurses-5.2/man/mitem_value.3x ncurses-5.2/man/mitem_visible.3x ncurses-5.2/man/ncurses.3x ncurses-5.2/man/panel.3x ncurses-5.2/man/resizeterm.3x ncurses-5.2/man/term.5 ncurses-5.2/man/term.7 ncurses-5.2/man/terminfo.head ncurses-5.2/man/terminfo.tail ncurses-5.2/man/tic.1m ncurses-5.2/man/toe.1m ncurses-5.2/man/tput.1 ncurses-5.2/man/tset.1 ncurses-5.2/man/wresize.3x ncurses-5.2/menu/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/menu/READ.ME ncurses-5.2/menu/eti.h ncurses-5.2/menu/headers ncurses-5.2/menu/llib-lmenu ncurses-5.2/menu/m_attribs.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_cursor.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_driver.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_format.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_global.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_hook.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_cur.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_nam.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_new.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_opt.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_top.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_use.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_val.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_item_vis.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_items.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_new.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_opts.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_pad.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_pattern.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_post.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_req_name.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_scale.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_spacing.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_sub.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_userptr.c ncurses-5.2/menu/m_win.c ncurses-5.2/menu/menu.h ncurses-5.2/menu/menu.priv.h ncurses-5.2/menu/mf_common.h ncurses-5.2/menu/modules ncurses-5.2/misc/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/misc/chkdef.cmd ncurses-5.2/misc/cleantic.cmd ncurses-5.2/misc/cmpdef.cmd ncurses-5.2/misc/emx.src ncurses-5.2/misc/form.def ncurses-5.2/misc/form.ref ncurses-5.2/misc/indent.pro ncurses-5.2/misc/makedef.cmd ncurses-5.2/misc/makellib ncurses-5.2/misc/menu.def ncurses-5.2/misc/menu.ref ncurses-5.2/misc/ncurses.def ncurses-5.2/misc/ncurses.ref ncurses-5.2/misc/panel.def ncurses-5.2/misc/panel.ref ncurses-5.2/misc/run_tic.in ncurses-5.2/misc/shlib ncurses-5.2/misc/tabset/std ncurses-5.2/misc/tabset/stdcrt ncurses-5.2/misc/tabset/vt100 ncurses-5.2/misc/tabset/vt300 ncurses-5.2/misc/tdlint ncurses-5.2/misc/terminfo.src ncurses-5.2/mk-0th.awk ncurses-5.2/mk-1st.awk ncurses-5.2/mk-2nd.awk ncurses-5.2/mkinstalldirs ncurses-5.2/ncurses/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/ncurses/README ncurses-5.2/ncurses/SigAction.h ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/MKkeyname.awk ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/MKlib_gen.sh ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/MKunctrl.awk ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/README ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/define_key.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/keybound.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/keyok.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_addch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_addstr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_beep.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_bkgd.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_box.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_chgat.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_clear.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_clearok.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_clrbot.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_clreol.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_color.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_colorset.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_delch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_delwin.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_dft_fgbg.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_echo.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_endwin.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_erase.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_flash.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_freeall.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_getch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_getstr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_hline.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_immedok.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_inchstr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_initscr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_insch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_insdel.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_insstr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_instr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_isendwin.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_leaveok.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_mouse.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_move.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_mvwin.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_newterm.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_newwin.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_nl.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_overlay.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_pad.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_printw.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_redrawln.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_refresh.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_restart.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_scanw.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_screen.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_scroll.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_scrollok.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_scrreg.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_set_term.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slk.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkatr_set.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkatrof.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkatron.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkatrset.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkattr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkclear.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkcolor.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkinit.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slklab.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkrefr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slkset.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_slktouch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_touch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_ungetch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_vline.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_wattroff.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_wattron.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_winch.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/lib_window.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/memmove.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/nc_panel.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/resizeterm.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/safe_sprintf.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/sigaction.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/tries.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/version.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/vsscanf.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/base/wresize.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/curses.priv.h ncurses-5.2/ncurses/fifo_defs.h ncurses-5.2/ncurses/llib-lncurses ncurses-5.2/ncurses/modules ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/MKcaptab.awk ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/MKfallback.sh ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/MKnames.awk ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/README ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/access.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/add_tries.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/alloc_entry.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/alloc_ttype.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/captoinfo.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/comp_error.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/comp_expand.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/comp_hash.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/comp_parse.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/comp_scan.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/doalloc.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/free_ttype.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/getenv_num.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/home_terminfo.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/init_keytry.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/keys.list ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_acs.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_baudrate.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_cur_term.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_data.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_has_cap.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_kernel.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_longname.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_napms.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_options.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_print.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_raw.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_setup.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_termcap.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_termname.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_tgoto.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_ti.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_tparm.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_tputs.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/lib_ttyflags.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/make_keys.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/name_match.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/parse_entry.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/read_entry.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/read_termcap.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/setbuf.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/strings.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tinfo/write_entry.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/README ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/lib_trace.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/lib_traceatr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/lib_tracebits.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/lib_tracechr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/lib_tracedmp.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/lib_tracemse.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/trace_buf.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/trace_tries.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/trace/trace_xnames.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/MKexpanded.sh ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/hardscroll.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/hashmap.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/lib_mvcur.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/lib_tstp.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/lib_twait.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/lib_vidattr.c ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/tty_display.h ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/tty_input.h ncurses-5.2/ncurses/tty/tty_update.c ncurses-5.2/panel/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/panel/headers ncurses-5.2/panel/llib-lpanel ncurses-5.2/panel/modules ncurses-5.2/panel/p_above.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_below.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_bottom.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_delete.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_hidden.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_hide.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_move.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_new.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_replace.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_show.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_top.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_update.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_user.c ncurses-5.2/panel/p_win.c ncurses-5.2/panel/panel.c ncurses-5.2/panel/panel.h ncurses-5.2/panel/panel.priv.h ncurses-5.2/progs/MKtermsort.sh ncurses-5.2/progs/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/progs/capconvert ncurses-5.2/progs/clear.c ncurses-5.2/progs/clear.sh ncurses-5.2/progs/dump_entry.c ncurses-5.2/progs/dump_entry.h ncurses-5.2/progs/infocmp.c ncurses-5.2/progs/modules ncurses-5.2/progs/progs.priv.h ncurses-5.2/progs/tic.c ncurses-5.2/progs/toe.c ncurses-5.2/progs/tput.c ncurses-5.2/progs/tset.c ncurses-5.2/sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/Makefile ncurses-5.2/sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/alpha/configure ncurses-5.2/sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/configure ncurses-5.2/sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/edit_man.sed ncurses-5.2/sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/edit_man.sh ncurses-5.2/sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/run_tic.sh ncurses-5.2/tack/COPYING ncurses-5.2/tack/HISTORY ncurses-5.2/tack/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/tack/README ncurses-5.2/tack/ansi.c ncurses-5.2/tack/charset.c ncurses-5.2/tack/color.c ncurses-5.2/tack/control.c ncurses-5.2/tack/crum.c ncurses-5.2/tack/edit.c ncurses-5.2/tack/fun.c ncurses-5.2/tack/init.c ncurses-5.2/tack/menu.c ncurses-5.2/tack/modes.c ncurses-5.2/tack/modules ncurses-5.2/tack/output.c ncurses-5.2/tack/pad.c ncurses-5.2/tack/scan.c ncurses-5.2/tack/sync.c ncurses-5.2/tack/sysdep.c ncurses-5.2/tack/tack.1 ncurses-5.2/tack/tack.c ncurses-5.2/tack/tack.h ncurses-5.2/tar-copy.sh ncurses-5.2/test/Makefile.in ncurses-5.2/test/README ncurses-5.2/test/blue.c ncurses-5.2/test/bs.6 ncurses-5.2/test/bs.c ncurses-5.2/test/cardfile.c ncurses-5.2/test/cardfile.dat ncurses-5.2/test/configure ncurses-5.2/test/configure.in ncurses-5.2/test/ditto.c ncurses-5.2/test/dots.c ncurses-5.2/test/filter.c ncurses-5.2/test/firework.c ncurses-5.2/test/firstlast.c ncurses-5.2/test/gdc.6 ncurses-5.2/test/gdc.c ncurses-5.2/test/hanoi.c ncurses-5.2/test/hashtest.c ncurses-5.2/test/keynames.c ncurses-5.2/test/knight.c ncurses-5.2/test/lrtest.c ncurses-5.2/test/modules ncurses-5.2/test/ncurses.c ncurses-5.2/test/ncurses_tst.hin ncurses-5.2/test/newdemo.c ncurses-5.2/test/railroad.c ncurses-5.2/test/rain.c ncurses-5.2/test/tclock.c ncurses-5.2/test/test.priv.h ncurses-5.2/test/testaddch.c ncurses-5.2/test/testcurs.c ncurses-5.2/test/testscanw.c ncurses-5.2/test/tracemunch ncurses-5.2/test/view.c ncurses-5.2/test/worm.c ncurses-5.2/test/xmas.c Cherrypick from master 2008-08-21 14:34:47 UTC Joel Sherrill <joel.sherrill@OARcorp.com> '2008-08-21 Joel Sherrill <joel.sherrill@OARcorp.com>': ChangeLog RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.bfd RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.libtecla RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.ncurses RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.ncurses-5.3 RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.readline-4.3 RTEMS_Makefiles/Makefile.zlib SUPPORT VERSION bit bit_bfd libtecla-1.4.1/CHANGES libtecla-1.4.1/INSTALL libtecla-1.4.1/LICENSE.TERMS libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.in libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.rules libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.stub libtecla-1.4.1/PORTING libtecla-1.4.1/README libtecla-1.4.1/RELEASE.NOTES libtecla-1.4.1/config.guess libtecla-1.4.1/config.sub libtecla-1.4.1/configure libtecla-1.4.1/configure.in libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.c libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.h libtecla-1.4.1/cplmatch.c libtecla-1.4.1/demo.c libtecla-1.4.1/demo2.c libtecla-1.4.1/direader.c libtecla-1.4.1/direader.h libtecla-1.4.1/enhance.c libtecla-1.4.1/expand.c libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.c libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.h libtecla-1.4.1/getline.c libtecla-1.4.1/getline.h libtecla-1.4.1/hash.c libtecla-1.4.1/hash.h libtecla-1.4.1/history.c libtecla-1.4.1/history.h libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.c libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.h libtecla-1.4.1/html/changes.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/cpl_complete_word.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/ef_expand_file.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/enhance.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/gl_get_line.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/index.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/libtecla.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/pca_lookup_file.html libtecla-1.4.1/html/release.html libtecla-1.4.1/install-sh libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.c libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.h libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.h libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.map libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_file_start.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_literal_escapes.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_set_check_fn.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_add_completion.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_complete_word.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_file_completions.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_last_error.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_list_completions.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_record_error.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_CplFileConf.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_ExpandFile.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_GetLine.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PathCache.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PcaPathConf.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_WordCompletion.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_expand_file.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_last_error.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_list_expansions.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/enhance.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_change_terminal.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_clear_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_configure_getline.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_customize_completion.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_echo_mode.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_get_line.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_group_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_ignore_signal.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_last_signal.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_limit_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_load_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_lookup_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_prompt_style.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_range_of_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_resize_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_save_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_show_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_size_of_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_state_of_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_terminal_size.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_toggle_history.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_trap_signal.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_watch_fd.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla_version.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_CplFileConf.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_ExpandFile.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_GetLine.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PathCache.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PcaPathConf.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_WordCompletion.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_last_error.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_lookup_file.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_path_completions.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_scan_path.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_set_check_fn.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_file_start.3 libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_literal_escapes.3 libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.c libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.h libtecla-1.4.1/pcache.c libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.c libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.h libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.c libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.h libtecla-1.4.1/update_html libtecla-1.4.1/update_version libtecla-1.4.1/version.c ncurses-5.3/config.sub ncurses-5.3/misc/run_tic.sh readline-4.3.orig/CHANGELOG readline-4.3.orig/CHANGES readline-4.3.orig/COPYING readline-4.3.orig/INSTALL readline-4.3.orig/MANIFEST readline-4.3.orig/Makefile.in readline-4.3.orig/README readline-4.3.orig/USAGE readline-4.3.orig/aclocal.m4 readline-4.3.orig/ansi_stdlib.h readline-4.3.orig/bind.c readline-4.3.orig/callback.c readline-4.3.orig/chardefs.h readline-4.3.orig/compat.c readline-4.3.orig/complete.c readline-4.3.orig/config.h.in readline-4.3.orig/configure readline-4.3.orig/configure.in readline-4.3.orig/display.c readline-4.3.orig/doc/Makefile.in readline-4.3.orig/doc/hist.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/history.0 readline-4.3.orig/doc/history.3 readline-4.3.orig/doc/history.dvi readline-4.3.orig/doc/history.html readline-4.3.orig/doc/history.info readline-4.3.orig/doc/history.ps readline-4.3.orig/doc/history_3.ps readline-4.3.orig/doc/hstech.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/hsuser.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/manvers.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/readline.0 readline-4.3.orig/doc/readline.3 readline-4.3.orig/doc/readline.dvi readline-4.3.orig/doc/readline.html readline-4.3.orig/doc/readline.info readline-4.3.orig/doc/readline.ps readline-4.3.orig/doc/readline_3.ps readline-4.3.orig/doc/rlman.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/rltech.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/rluser.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/rluserman.dvi readline-4.3.orig/doc/rluserman.html readline-4.3.orig/doc/rluserman.info readline-4.3.orig/doc/rluserman.ps readline-4.3.orig/doc/rluserman.texinfo readline-4.3.orig/doc/texi2dvi readline-4.3.orig/doc/texi2html readline-4.3.orig/doc/texinfo.tex readline-4.3.orig/emacs_keymap.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/Inputrc readline-4.3.orig/examples/Makefile.in readline-4.3.orig/examples/excallback.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/fileman.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/histexamp.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/manexamp.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/readlinebuf.h readline-4.3.orig/examples/rl.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/rlcat.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/rlfe.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/rltest.c readline-4.3.orig/examples/rlversion.c readline-4.3.orig/funmap.c readline-4.3.orig/histexpand.c readline-4.3.orig/histfile.c readline-4.3.orig/histlib.h readline-4.3.orig/history.c readline-4.3.orig/history.h readline-4.3.orig/histsearch.c readline-4.3.orig/input.c readline-4.3.orig/isearch.c readline-4.3.orig/keymaps.c readline-4.3.orig/keymaps.h readline-4.3.orig/kill.c readline-4.3.orig/macro.c readline-4.3.orig/mbutil.c readline-4.3.orig/misc.c readline-4.3.orig/nls.c readline-4.3.orig/parens.c readline-4.3.orig/posixdir.h readline-4.3.orig/posixjmp.h readline-4.3.orig/posixstat.h readline-4.3.orig/readline.c readline-4.3.orig/readline.h readline-4.3.orig/rlconf.h readline-4.3.orig/rldefs.h readline-4.3.orig/rlmbutil.h readline-4.3.orig/rlprivate.h readline-4.3.orig/rlshell.h readline-4.3.orig/rlstdc.h readline-4.3.orig/rltty.c readline-4.3.orig/rltty.h readline-4.3.orig/rltypedefs.h readline-4.3.orig/rlwinsize.h readline-4.3.orig/savestring.c readline-4.3.orig/search.c readline-4.3.orig/shell.c readline-4.3.orig/shlib/Makefile.in readline-4.3.orig/signals.c readline-4.3.orig/support/config.guess readline-4.3.orig/support/config.sub readline-4.3.orig/support/install.sh readline-4.3.orig/support/mkdirs readline-4.3.orig/support/mkdist readline-4.3.orig/support/shlib-install readline-4.3.orig/support/shobj-conf readline-4.3.orig/support/wcwidth.c readline-4.3.orig/tcap.h readline-4.3.orig/terminal.c readline-4.3.orig/text.c readline-4.3.orig/tilde.c readline-4.3.orig/tilde.h readline-4.3.orig/undo.c readline-4.3.orig/util.c readline-4.3.orig/vi_keymap.c readline-4.3.orig/vi_mode.c readline-4.3.orig/xmalloc.c readline-4.3.orig/xmalloc.h readline-4.3/CHANGELOG-ReadLine readline-4.3/CHANGES readline-4.3/COPYING readline-4.3/ChangeLog readline-4.3/INSTALL readline-4.3/MANIFEST readline-4.3/Makefile.in readline-4.3/README readline-4.3/USAGE readline-4.3/aclocal.m4 readline-4.3/ansi_stdlib.h readline-4.3/bind.c readline-4.3/callback.c readline-4.3/chardefs.h readline-4.3/compat.c readline-4.3/complete.c readline-4.3/config.h.in readline-4.3/configure readline-4.3/configure.in readline-4.3/display.c readline-4.3/doc/Makefile.in readline-4.3/doc/hist.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/history.3 readline-4.3/doc/hstech.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/hsuser.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/manvers.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/readline.3 readline-4.3/doc/rlman.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/rltech.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/rluser.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/rluserman.texinfo readline-4.3/doc/texi2dvi readline-4.3/doc/texi2html readline-4.3/doc/texinfo.tex readline-4.3/emacs_keymap.c readline-4.3/examples/Inputrc readline-4.3/examples/Makefile.in readline-4.3/examples/excallback.c readline-4.3/examples/fileman.c readline-4.3/examples/histexamp.c readline-4.3/examples/manexamp.c readline-4.3/examples/readlinebuf.h readline-4.3/examples/rl.c readline-4.3/examples/rlcat.c readline-4.3/examples/rlfe.c readline-4.3/examples/rltest.c readline-4.3/examples/rlversion.c readline-4.3/funmap.c readline-4.3/histexpand.c readline-4.3/histfile.c readline-4.3/histlib.h readline-4.3/history.c readline-4.3/history.h readline-4.3/histsearch.c readline-4.3/input.c readline-4.3/isearch.c readline-4.3/keymaps.c readline-4.3/keymaps.h readline-4.3/kill.c readline-4.3/macro.c readline-4.3/mbutil.c readline-4.3/misc.c readline-4.3/nls.c readline-4.3/parens.c readline-4.3/posixdir.h readline-4.3/posixjmp.h readline-4.3/posixstat.h readline-4.3/readline.c readline-4.3/readline.h readline-4.3/rlconf.h readline-4.3/rldefs.h readline-4.3/rlmbutil.h readline-4.3/rlprivate.h readline-4.3/rlshell.h readline-4.3/rlstdc.h readline-4.3/rltty.c readline-4.3/rltty.h readline-4.3/rltypedefs.h readline-4.3/rlwinsize.h readline-4.3/savestring.c readline-4.3/search.c readline-4.3/shell.c readline-4.3/shlib/Makefile.in readline-4.3/signals.c readline-4.3/support/config.guess readline-4.3/support/config.sub readline-4.3/support/install.sh readline-4.3/support/mkdirs readline-4.3/support/mkdist readline-4.3/support/shlib-install readline-4.3/support/shobj-conf readline-4.3/support/wcwidth.c readline-4.3/tcap.h readline-4.3/terminal.c readline-4.3/text.c readline-4.3/tilde.c readline-4.3/tilde.h readline-4.3/undo.c readline-4.3/util.c readline-4.3/vi_keymap.c readline-4.3/vi_mode.c readline-4.3/xmalloc.c readline-4.3/xmalloc.h readline-doc-4.3/MANIFEST.doc readline-doc-4.3/doc/history.0 readline-doc-4.3/doc/history.dvi readline-doc-4.3/doc/history.html readline-doc-4.3/doc/history.info readline-doc-4.3/doc/history.ps readline-doc-4.3/doc/history_3.ps readline-doc-4.3/doc/readline.0 readline-doc-4.3/doc/readline.dvi readline-doc-4.3/doc/readline.html readline-doc-4.3/doc/readline.info readline-doc-4.3/doc/readline.ps readline-doc-4.3/doc/readline_3.ps readline-doc-4.3/doc/rluserman.dvi readline-doc-4.3/doc/rluserman.html readline-doc-4.3/doc/rluserman.info readline-doc-4.3/doc/rluserman.ps zlib-1.1.4/ChangeLog zlib-1.1.4/FAQ zlib-1.1.4/INDEX zlib-1.1.4/Make_vms.com zlib-1.1.4/Makefile zlib-1.1.4/Makefile.in zlib-1.1.4/Makefile.riscos zlib-1.1.4/README zlib-1.1.4/adler32.c zlib-1.1.4/algorithm.txt zlib-1.1.4/amiga/Makefile.pup zlib-1.1.4/amiga/Makefile.sas zlib-1.1.4/compress.c zlib-1.1.4/configure zlib-1.1.4/contrib/README.contrib zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm386/gvmat32.asm zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm386/gvmat32c.c zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm386/mkgvmt32.bat zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm386/zlibvc.def zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm386/zlibvc.dsp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm386/zlibvc.dsw zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm586/README.586 zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm586/match.S zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm686/README.686 zlib-1.1.4/contrib/asm686/match.S zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi/zlib.mak zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi/zlibdef.pas zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/d_zlib.bpr zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/d_zlib.cpp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/readme.txt zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/zlib.bpg zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/zlib.bpr zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/zlib.cpp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/zlib.pas zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/zlib32.bpr zlib-1.1.4/contrib/delphi2/zlib32.cpp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/iostream/test.cpp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/iostream/zfstream.cpp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/iostream/zfstream.h zlib-1.1.4/contrib/iostream2/zstream.h zlib-1.1.4/contrib/iostream2/zstream_test.cpp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/ChangeLogUnzip zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/Makefile zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/miniunz.c zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/minizip.c zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/readme.txt zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/unzip.c zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/unzip.def zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/unzip.h zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/zip.c zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/zip.def zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/zip.h zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/zlibvc.def zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/zlibvc.dsp zlib-1.1.4/contrib/minizip/zlibvc.dsw zlib-1.1.4/contrib/untgz/Makefile zlib-1.1.4/contrib/untgz/makefile.w32 zlib-1.1.4/contrib/untgz/untgz.c zlib-1.1.4/contrib/visual-basic.txt zlib-1.1.4/crc32.c zlib-1.1.4/deflate.c zlib-1.1.4/deflate.h zlib-1.1.4/descrip.mms zlib-1.1.4/example.c zlib-1.1.4/gzio.c zlib-1.1.4/infblock.c zlib-1.1.4/infblock.h zlib-1.1.4/infcodes.c zlib-1.1.4/infcodes.h zlib-1.1.4/inffast.c zlib-1.1.4/inffast.h zlib-1.1.4/inffixed.h zlib-1.1.4/inflate.c zlib-1.1.4/inftrees.c zlib-1.1.4/inftrees.h zlib-1.1.4/infutil.c zlib-1.1.4/infutil.h zlib-1.1.4/maketree.c zlib-1.1.4/minigzip.c zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.b32 zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.bor zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.dj2 zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.emx zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.msc zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.tc zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.w32 zlib-1.1.4/msdos/Makefile.wat zlib-1.1.4/msdos/zlib.def zlib-1.1.4/msdos/zlib.rc zlib-1.1.4/nt/Makefile.emx zlib-1.1.4/nt/Makefile.gcc zlib-1.1.4/nt/Makefile.nt zlib-1.1.4/nt/zlib.dnt zlib-1.1.4/os2/Makefile.os2 zlib-1.1.4/os2/zlib.def zlib-1.1.4/trees.c zlib-1.1.4/trees.h zlib-1.1.4/uncompr.c zlib-1.1.4/zconf.h zlib-1.1.4/zlib.3 zlib-1.1.4/zlib.h zlib-1.1.4/zlib.html zlib-1.1.4/zutil.c zlib-1.1.4/zutil.h
author: cvs2git <rtems-devel@rtems.org> 2008-08-21 14:34:48 +0000
committer: cvs2git <rtems-devel@rtems.org> 2008-08-21 14:34:48 +0000
commit: 5a4a15a5c7e2320e083fd1767dfceb41813a7d21 (patch)
tree: 210dd35969b617b4b2284f27b3cb402f4c7edac4 /libtecla-1.4.1
parent: Latest ncurses add-on (diff)
download: rtems-addon-packages-5a4a15a5c7e2320e083fd1767dfceb41813a7d21.tar.bz2
114 files changed, 39366 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/CHANGES b/libtecla-1.4.1/CHANGES
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45073e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/CHANGES
@@ -0,0 +1,1492 @@
+In the following log, modification dates are listed using the European
+convention in which the day comes before the month (ie. DD/MM/YYYY).
+The most recent modifications are listed first.
+
+25/05/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu  (based on suggestions by Paul Smith)
+           pathutil.c
+             Apparently, under QNX pathconf("/",_PC_PATH_MAX) returns
+             EINVAL. At Paul's suggestion I have modified the code to
+             silently substitute the existing MAX_PATHLEN_FALLBACK
+             value if pathconf() returns an error of any kind.
+           homedir.c
+             Under QNX, sysconf(_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX) also apparently
+             returns EINVAL, so as with pathconf() I modified the code
+             to substitute a fallback default, rather than
+             complaining and failing.
+           enhance.c
+             Paul told me that the inclusion of sys/termios.h was
+             causing compilation of enhance.c to fail under QNX. This
+             line is a bug.  The correct thing to do is include
+             termios.h without a sub-directory prefix, as I was
+             already doing futher up in the file, so I have just
+             removed the errant include line.
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c configure.in configure
+             Mac OS X doesn't have a term.h or termcap.h, but it does
+             define prototypes for tputs() and setupterm(), so the
+             default prototypes that I was including if no headers
+             where available, upset it. I've removed these prototypes.
+             I also now conditionally include whichever is found of
+             curses.h and ncurses/curses.h for both termcap and
+             terminfo (before I wasn't including curses.h when
+             termcap was selected).
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           Updated version number to 1.4.1, ready for a micro
+           release.
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           html/index.html
+             Added Mac OS X and Cygwin to the list of systems that
+             can compile libtecla.
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             Under Mac OS X, the tputs() callback function returns
+             void, instead of the int return value used by other
+             systems. This declaration is now used if both __MACH__
+             and __APPLE__ are defined. Hopefully these are the
+             correct system macros to check. Thanks for Stephan
+             Fiedler for providing information on Mac OS X.
+
+11/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure getline.c
+             Some systems don't have term.h, and others have it hidden
+             in an ncurses sub-directory of the standard system include
+             directory. If term.h can't be found, simply don't include
+             it. If it is in an ncurses sub-directory, include
+             ncurses/term.h instead of term.h.
+
+04/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             Use ranlib on systems that need it (Mac OS X).  Also,
+             make all components of the installation directories where
+             needed, instead of assuming that they exist.
+
+04/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             When the tab completion binding was unbound from the tab
+             key, hitting the tab key caused gl_get_line() to ring the
+             bell instead of inserting a tab character. This is
+             problematic when using the 'enhance' program with
+             Jython, since tabs are important in Python. I have
+             corrected this.
+
+10/12/2001 Version 1.4.0 released.
+
+10/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             If the TIOCGWINSZ ioctl doesn't work, as is the case when
+             running in an emacs shell, leave the size unchanged, rather
+             than returning a fatal error.
+
+07/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure
+             Now that the configure version of CFLAGS is included in
+             the makefile, I noticed that the optimization flags -g
+             and -O2 had been added. It turns out that if CFLAGS isn't
+             already set, the autoconf AC_PROG_CC macro initializes it
+             with these two optimization flags. Since this would break
+             backwards compatibility in embedded distributions that
+             already use the OPT= makefile argument, and because
+             turning debugging on needlessly bloats the library, I now
+             make sure that CFLAGS is set before calling this macro.
+
+07/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           enhance.c
+             Use argv[0] in error reports instead of using a
+             hardcoded macro.
+
+07/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             The cut buffer wasn't being cleared after being
+             used as a work buffer by gl_load_history().
+
+06/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure
+             I removed my now redundant definition of SUN_TPUTS from
+             CFLAGS. I also added "-I/usr/include" to CFLAGS under
+             Solaris to prevent gcc from seeing conflicting versions
+             of system header files in /usr/local/include.
+
+06/12/2001 Markus Gyger (logged here by mcs)
+           Lots of files.
+             Lots of corrections to misspellings and typos in the
+             comments.
+           getline.c
+             Markus reverted a supposed fix that I added a day or two
+             ago. I had incorrectly thought that in Solaris 8, Sun had
+             finally brought their declaration of the callback
+             function of tputs() into line with other systems, but it
+             turned out that gcc was pulling in a GNU version of
+             term.h from /usr/local/include, and this was what
+             confused me.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           Makefile.in
+             I added @CFLAGS@ to the CFLAGS assignment, so that
+             if CFLAGS is set as an environment variable when
+             configure is run, the corresponding make variable
+             includes its values in the output makefile.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_last_signal.3
+             I added a function that programs can use to find out
+             which signal caused gl_get_line() to return EINTR.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             When the newline action was triggered by a printable
+             character, it failed to display that character. It now
+             does. Also, extra control codes that I had added, to
+             clear to the end of the display after the carriage return,
+             but before displaying the prompt, were confusing expect
+             scripts, so I have removed them. This step is now done
+             instead in gl_redisplay() after displaying the full input
+             line.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             A user convinced me that continuing to invoke meta
+             keybindings for meta characters that are printable is a
+             bad idea, as is allowing users to ask to have setlocale()
+             called behind the application's back. I have thus changed
+             this. The setlocale configuration option has gone, and
+             gl_get_line() is now completely 8-bit clean, by default.
+             This means that if a meta character is printable, it is
+             treated as a literal character, rather than a potential
+             M-c binding.  Meta bindings can still be invoked via
+             their Esc-c equivalents, and indeed most terminal
+             emulators either output such escape pairs by default when
+             the meta character is pressed, or can be configured to do
+             so. I have documented how to configure xterm to do this,
+             in the man page.
+
+03/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             gl_get_line() by default now prints any 8-bit printable
+             characters that don't match keybindings. Previously
+             characters > 127 were only printed if preceded by the
+             literal-next action.  Alternatively, by placing the
+             command literal_if_printable in the tecla configuration
+             file, all printable characters are treated as literal
+             characters, even if they are bound to action functions.
+
+             For international users of programs written by
+             programmers that weren't aware of the need to call
+             setlocale() to support alternate character sets, the
+             configuration file can now also contain the single-word
+             command "setlocale", which tells gl_get_line() to remedy
+             this.
+
+27/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           demo.c demo2.c enhance man3/gl_get_line.3
+             All demos and programs now call setlocale(LC_CTYPE,"").
+             This makes them support character sets of different
+             locales, where specified with the LC_CTYPE, LC_ALL, or
+             LANG environment variables. I also added this to the demo
+             in the man page, and documented its effect.
+
+27/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             When displaying unsigned characters with values over
+             127 literally, previously it was assumed that they would
+             all be displayable. Now isprint() is consulted, and if it
+             says that a character isn't printable, the character code
+             is displayed in octal like \307. In non-C locales, some
+             characters with values > 127 are displayable, and
+             isprint() tells gl_get_line() which are and which aren't.
+
+27/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c pathutil.c history.c enhance.c demo2.c
+             All arguments of the ctype.h character class functions
+             are now cast to (int)(unsigned char). Previously they
+             were cast to (int), which doesn't correctly conform to
+             the requirements of the C standard, and could cause
+             problems for characters with values > 127 on systems
+             with signed char's.
+
+26/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           man3/enhance.3 man3/libtecla.3
+             I started writing a man page for the enhance program.
+
+26/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules INSTALL
+             It is now possible to specify whether the demos and other
+             programs are to be built, by overriding the default
+             values of the DEMOS, PROGRAMS and PROGRAMS_R variables.
+             I have also documented the BINDIR variable and the
+             install_bin makefile target.
+
+22/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_ignore_signal.3 man3/gl_trap_signal.3
+             Signal handling has now been modified to be customizable.
+             Signals that are trapped by default can be removed from
+             the list of trapped signals, and signals that aren't
+             currently trapped, can be added to the list. Applications
+             can also specify the signal and terminal environments in
+             which an application's signal handler is invoked, and
+             what gl_get_line() does after the signal handler returns.
+
+13/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             Added half-bright, reverse-video and blinking text to the
+             available prompt formatting options.
+           getline.c
+             Removed ^O from the default VT100 sgr0 capability
+             string.  Apparently it can cause problems with some
+             terminal emulators, and we don't need it, since it turns
+             off the alternative character set mode, which we don't
+             use.
+           getline.c
+             gl_tigetstr() and gl_tgetstr() didn't guard against the
+             error returns of tigetstr() and tgetstr() respectively.
+             They now do.
+
+11/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_prompt_style.3
+             Although the default remains to display the prompt string
+             literally, the new gl_prompt_style() function can be used
+             to enable text attribute formatting directives in prompt
+             strings, such as underlining, bold font, and highlighting
+             directives.
+
+09/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           enhance.c Makefile.rules configure.in configure
+             I added a new program to the distribution that allows one
+             to run most third party programs with the tecla library
+             providing command-line editing.
+
+08/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           libtecla.h getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3 history.c history.h
+             I added a max_lines argument to gl_show_history() and
+             _glh_show_history(). This can optionally be used to
+             set a limit on the number of history lines displayed.
+           libtecla.h getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a new function called gl_replace_prompt(). This
+             can be used by gl_get_line() callback functions to
+             request that a new prompt be use when they return.
+
+06/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I implemented, bound and documented the list-history
+             action, used for listing historical lines of the current
+             history group.
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_echo_mode.3
+             I wrote functions to specify and query whether subsequent
+             lines will be visible as they are being typed.
+
+28/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             For those cases where a terminal provides its own
+             high-level terminal editing facilities, you can now
+             specify an edit-mode argument of 'none'. This disables
+             all tecla key bindings, and by using canonical terminal
+             input mode instead of raw input mode, editing is left up
+             to the terminal driver.
+
+21/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           libtecla.h getline.c history.c history.h
+           man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_history_info.3
+             I added the new gl_state_of_history(),
+             gl_range_of_history() and gl_size_of_history()
+             functions for querying information about the
+             history list.
+           history.c
+             While testing the new gl_size_of_history()
+             function, I noticed that when the history buffer
+             wrapped, any location nodes of old lines between
+             the most recent line and the end of the buffer
+             weren't being removed. This could result in bogus
+             entries appearing at the start of the history list.
+             Now fixed.
+
+20/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           libtecla.h getline.c history.c history.h
+           man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_lookup_history.3
+             I added a function called gl_lookup_history(), that
+             the application can use to lookup lines in the history
+             list.
+           libtecla.h getline.c history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+             gl_show_history() now takes a format string argument
+             to control how the line is displayed, and with what
+             information. It also now provides the option of either
+             displaying all history lines or just those of the
+             current history group.
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             gl_get_line() only archives lines in the history buffer
+             if the newline action was invoked by a newline or
+             carriage return character.
+
+16/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           history.c history.h getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map
+           man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_resize_history.3
+           man3/gl_limit_history.3 man3/gl_clear_history.3
+           man3/gl_toggle_history.3
+	     I added a number of miscellaneous history configuration
+	     functions. You can now resize or delete the history
+	     buffer, limit the number of lines that are allowed in the
+	     buffer, clear either all history or just the history of
+	     the current history group, and temporarily enable and
+	     disable the history mechanism.
+
+13/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             tputs_fp is now only declared if using termcap or
+             terminfo.
+           getline.c libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_terminal_size.3
+             I added a public gl_terminal_size() function for
+             updating and querying the current size of the terminal.
+           update_version configure.in libtecla.h
+             A user noted that on systems where the configure script
+             couldn't be used, it was inconvenient to have the version
+             number macros set by the configure script, so they are
+             now specified in libtecla.h. To reduce the likelihood
+             that the various files where the version number now
+             appears might get out of sync, I have written the
+             update_version script, which changes the version number
+             in all of these files to a given value.
+
+01/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a max_lines argument to gl_save_history(), to
+             allow people to optionally place a ceiling on the number
+             of history lines saved. Specifying this as -1 sets the
+             ceiling to infinity.
+
+01/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in configure
+             Under digital unix, getline wouldn't compile with
+             _POSIX_C_SOURCE set, due to type definitions needed by
+             select being excluded by this flag. Defining the
+             _OSF_SOURCE macro as well on this system, resolved this.
+
+30/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c libtecla.h history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_group_history.3
+             I implemented history streams. History streams
+             effectively allow multiple history lists to be stored in
+             a single history buffer. Lines in the buffer are tagged
+             with the current stream identification number, and
+             lookups only consider lines that are marked with the
+             current stream identifier.
+           getline.c libtecla.h history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_show_history.3
+             The new gl_show_history function displays the current
+             history to a given stdio output stream.
+
+29/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Previously new_GetLine() installed a persistent signal
+             handler to be sure to catch the SIGWINCH (terminal size
+             change) signal between calls to gl_get_line(). This had
+             the drawback that if multiple GetLine objects were
+             created, only the first GetLine object used after the
+             signal was received, would see the signal and adapt to
+             the new terminal size. Instead of this, a signal handler
+             for sigwinch is only installed while gl_get_line() is
+             running, and just after installing this handler,
+             gl_get_line() checks for terminal size changes that
+             might have occurred while the signal handler wasn't
+             installed.
+           getline.c
+             Dynamically allocated copies of capability strings looked
+             up in the terminfo or termcap databases are now made, so
+             that calls to setupterm() etc for one GetLine object
+             don't get trashed when another GetLine object calls
+             setupterm() etc. It is now safe to allocate and use
+             multiple GetLine objects, albeit only within a single
+             thread.
+           
+28/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           version.c Makefile.rules
+             I added a function for querying the version number of
+             the library.
+
+26/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I added the new gl_watch_fd() function, which allows
+             applications to register callback functions to be invoked
+             when activity is seen on arbitrary file descriptors while
+             gl_get_line() is awaiting keyboard input from the user.
+
+           keytab.c
+             If a request is received to delete a non-existent
+             binding, which happens to be an ambiguous prefix of other
+             bindings no complaint is now generated about it being
+             ambiguous.
+
+23/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+           libtecla.map demo.c
+             I added new public functions for saving and restoring the
+             contents of the history list. The demo program now uses
+             these functions to load and save history in ~/.demo_history.
+
+23/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             On trying the demo for the first time on a KDE konsole
+             terminal, I discovered that the default M-O binding
+             to repeat history was hiding the arrow keys, which are
+             M-OA etc. I have removed this binding. The M-o (ie the
+             lower case version of this), is still bound.
+
+18/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3 libtecla.map
+             Automatic reading of ~/.teclarc is now postponed until
+             the first call to gl_get_line(), to give the application
+             the chance to specify alternative configuration sources
+             with the new function gl_configure_getline(). The latter
+             function allows configuration to be done with a string, a
+             specified application-specific file, and/or a specified
+             user-specific file. I also added a read-init-files action
+             function, for re-reading the configuration files, if any.
+             This is by default bound to ^X^R. This is all documented
+             in gl_get_line.3.
+
+08/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             It is now possible to bind actions to key-sequences
+             that start with printable characters. Previously
+             keysequences were required to start with meta or control
+             characters. This is documented in gl_get_line.3.
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             A customized completion function can now arrange for
+             gl_get_line() to return the current input line whenever a
+             successful completion has been made. This is signalled by
+             setting the last character of the optional continuation
+             suffix to a newline character. This is documented in
+             gl_get_line.3.
+
+05/07/2001 Bug reported by Mike MacFaden, fixed by mcs
+
+           configure.in
+             There was a bug in the configure script that only
+             revealed itself on systems without termcap but not
+             terminfo (eg. NetBSD). I traced the bug back to a lack of
+             sufficient quoting of multi-line m4 macro arguments in
+             configure.in, and have now fixed this and recreated the
+             configure script.
+
+05/07/2001 Bug reported and patched by Mike MacFaden (patch modified
+           by mcs to match original intentions).
+
+           getline.c
+             getline.c wouldn't compile when termcap was selected as
+             the terminal information database. setupterm() was being
+             passed a non-existent variable, in place of the term[]
+             argument of gl_control_strings(). Also if
+             gl_change_terminal() is called with term==NULL, "ansi"
+             is now substituted.
+
+02/07/2001 Version 1.3.3 released.
+
+27/06/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c expand.c cplmatch.c
+             Added checks to fprintf() statements that write to the
+             terminal.
+           getline.c
+             Move the cursor to the end of the line before suspending,
+             so that the cursor doesn't get left in the middle of the
+             input line.
+           Makefile.in
+             On systems that don't support shared libraries, the
+             distclean target of make deleted libtecla.h. This has
+             now been fixed.
+           getline.c
+             gl_change_terminal() was being called by gl_change_editor(),
+             with the unwanted side effect that raw terminal modes were
+             stored as those to be restored later, if called by an
+             action function. gl_change_terminal() was being called in
+             this case to re-establish terminal-specific key bindings,
+             so I have just split this part of the function out into
+             a separate function for both gl_change_editor() and
+             gl_change_terminal() to call.
+
+12/06/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Signal handling has been improved. Many more signals are
+             now trapped, and instead of using a simple flag set by a
+             signal handler, race conditions are avoided by blocking
+             signals during most of the gl_get_line() code, and
+             unblocking them via calls to sigsetjmp(), just before
+             attempting to read each new character from the user.
+             The matching use of siglongjmp() in the signal
+             handlers ensures that signals are reblocked correctly
+             before they are handled. In most cases, signals cause
+             gl_get_line() to restore the terminal modes and signal
+             handlers of the calling application, then resend the
+             signal to the application. In the case of SIGINT, SIGHUP,
+             SIGPIPE, and SIGQUIT, if the process still exists after
+             the signals are resent, gl_get_line() immediately returns
+             with appropriate values assigned to errno. If SIGTSTP,
+             SIGTTIN or SIGTTOU signals are received, the process is
+             suspended. If any other signal is received, and the
+             process continues to exist after the signal is resent to
+             the calling application, line input is resumed after the
+             terminal is put back into raw mode, the gl_get_line()
+             signal handling is restored, and the input line redrawn.
+           man/gl_get_line(3)
+             I added a SIGNAL HANDLING section to the gl_get_line()
+             man page, describing the new signal handling features.
+
+21/05/2001 Version 1.3.2 released.
+
+21/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             When vi-replace-char was used to replace the character at
+             the end of the line, it left the cursor one character to
+             its right instead of on top of it. Now rememdied.
+           getline.c
+             When undoing, to properly emulate vi, the cursor is now
+             left at the leftmost of the saved and current cursor
+             positions.
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             Implemented find-parenthesis (%), delete-to-paren (M-d%),
+             vi-change-to-paren (M-c%), copy-to-paren (M-y%).
+           cplfile.c pcache.c
+             In three places I was comparing the last argument of
+             strncmp() to zero instead of the return value of
+             strncmp().
+
+20/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             Implemented and documented the vi-repeat-change action,
+             bound to the period key. This repeats the last action
+             that modified the input line.
+
+19/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I documented the new action functions and bindings
+             provided by Tim Eliseo, plus the ring-bell action and
+             the new "nobeep" configuration option.
+           getline.c
+             I modified gl_change_editor() to remove and reinstate the
+             terminal settings as well as the default bindings, since
+             these have editor-specific differences. I also modified
+             it to not abort if a key-sequence can't be bound for some
+             reason. This allows the new vi-mode and emacs-mode
+             bindings to be used safely.
+           getline.c
+             When the line was re-displayed on receipt of a SIGWINCH
+             signal, the result wasn't visible until the next
+             character was typed, since a call to fflush() was needed.
+             gl_redisplay_line() now calls gl_flush_output() to remedy
+             this.
+
+17/05/2001 mcs@astro.catlech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Under Linux, calling fflush(gl->output_fd) hangs if
+             terminal output has been suspended with ^S. With the
+             tecla library taking responsability for reading the stop
+             and start characters this was a problem, because once
+             hung in fflush(), the keyboard input loop wasn't entered,
+             so the user couldn't type the start character to resume
+             output.  To remedy this, I now have the terminal process
+             these characters, rather than the library.
+
+12/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             The literal-next action is now implemented as a single
+             function which reads the next character itself.
+             Previously it just set a flag which effected the
+             interpretation of the next character read by the input
+             loop.
+           getline.c
+             Added a ring-bell action function. This is currently
+             unbound to any key by default, but it is used internally,
+             and can be used by users that want to disable any of the
+             default key-bindings.
+
+12/05/2001 Tim Eliseo    (logged here by mcs)
+
+           getline.c
+             Don't reset gl->number until after calling an action
+             function. By looking at whether gl->number is <0 or
+             not, action functions can then tell whether the count
+             that they were passed was explicitly specified by the
+             user, as opposed to being defaulted to 1.
+           getline.c
+             In vi, the position at which input mode is entered
+             acts as a barrier to backward motion for the few
+             backward moving actions that are enabled in input mode.
+             Tim added this barrier to getline.
+           getline.c
+             In gl_get_line() after reading an input line, or
+             having the read aborted by a signal, the sig_atomic_t
+             gl_pending_signal was being compared to zero instead
+             of -1 to see if no signals had been received.
+             gl_get_line() will thus have been calling raise(-1),
+             which luckily didn't seem to do anything. Tim also
+             arranged for errno to be set to EINTR when a signal
+             aborts gl_get_line().
+           getline.c
+             The test in gl_add_char_to_line() for detecting
+             when overwriting a character with a wider character,
+             had a < where it needed a >. Overwriting with a wider
+             character thus overwrote trailing characters. Tim also
+             removed a redundant copy of the character into the
+             line buffer.
+           getline.c
+             gl_cursor_left() and gl->cursor_right() were executing
+             a lot of redundant code, when the existing call to the
+             recently added gl_place_cursor() function, does all that
+             is necessary.
+           getline.c
+             Remove redundant code from backward_kill_line() by
+             re-implimenting in terms of gl_place_cursor() and
+             gl_delete_chars().
+           getline.c
+             gl_forward_delete_char() now records characters in cut
+             buffer when in vi command mode.
+           getline.c
+             In vi mode gl_backward_delete_char() now only deletes
+             up to the point at which input mode was entered. Also
+             gl_delete_chars() restores from the undo buffer when
+             deleting in vi insert mode.
+           getline.c
+             Added action functions, vi-delete-goto-column,
+             vi-change-to-bol, vi-change-line, emacs-mode, vi-mode,
+             vi-forward-change-find, vi-backward-change-find,
+             vi-forward-change-to, vi-backward-change-to,
+             vi-change-goto-col, forward-delete-find, backward-delete-find,
+             forward-delete-to, backward-delete-to,
+             delete-refind, delete-invert-refind, forward-copy-find,
+             backward-copy-find, forward-copy-to, backward-copy-to
+             copy-goto-column, copy-rest-of-line, copy-to-bol, copy-line,
+             history-re-search-forward, history-re-search-backward.
+
+06/05/2001 Version 1.3.1 released.
+
+03/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in
+             Old versions of GNU ld don't accept version scripts.
+             Under Linux I thus added a test to try out ld with
+             the --version-script argument to see if it works.
+             If not, version scripts aren't used.
+           configure.in
+             My test for versions of Solaris earlier than 7
+             failed when confronted by a three figure version
+             number (2.5.1). Fixed.
+
+30/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             In vi mode, history-search-backward and
+             history-search-forward weren't doing anything when
+             invoked at the start of an empty line, whereas
+             they should have acted like up-history and down-history.
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             When shared libraries are being created, the build
+             procedure now arranges for any alternate library
+             links to be created as well, before linking the
+             demos. Without this the demos always linked to the
+             static libraries (which was perfectly ok, but wasn't a
+             good example).
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             On systems on which shared libraries were being created,
+             if there were no alternate list of names, make would
+             abort due to a Bourne shell 'for' statement that didn't
+             have any arguments. Currently there are no systems who's
+             shared library configurations would trigger this
+             problem.
+           Makefile.rules
+             The demos now relink to take account of changes to the
+             library.
+           configure.in configure
+             When determining whether the reentrant version of the
+             library should be compiled by default, the configure
+             script now attempts to compile a dummy program that
+             includes all of the appropriate system headers and
+             defines _POSIX_C_SOURCE. This should now be a robust test
+             on systems which use C macros to alias these function
+             names to other internal functions.
+           configure.in
+             Under Solaris 2.6 and earlier, the curses library is in
+             /usr/ccs/lib. Gcc wasn't finding this. In addition to
+             remedying this, I had to remove "-z text" from
+             LINK_SHARED under Solaris to get it to successfully
+             compile the shared library against the static curses
+             library.
+           configure.in
+             Under Linux the -soname directive was being used
+             incorrectly, citing the fully qualified name of the
+             library instead of its major version alias. This will
+             unfortunately mean that binaries linked with the 1.2.3
+             and 1.2.4 versions of the shared library won't use
+             later versions of the library unless relinked.
+
+30/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             In gl_get_input_line(), don't redundantly copy the
+             start_line if start_line == gl->line.
+
+30/04/2001 Version 1.3.0 released.
+
+28/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in
+             I removed the --no-undefined directive from the Linux
+             LINK_SHARED command. After recent patches to our RedHat
+             7.0 systems ld started reporting some internal symbols of
+             libc as being undefined.  Using nm on libc indicated that
+             the offending symbols are indeed defined, albeit as
+             "common" symbols, so there appears to be a bug in
+             RedHat's ld. Removing this flag allows the tecla shared
+             library to compile, and programs appear to function fine.
+           man3/gl_get_line.3
+             The default key-sequence used to invoke the
+             read-from-file action was incorrectly cited as ^Xi
+             instead of ^X^F.
+
+26/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             A new vi-style editing mode was added. This involved
+             adding many new action functions, adding support for
+             specifying editing modes in users' ~/.teclarc files,
+             writing a higher level cursor motion function to support
+             the different line-end bounds required in vi command
+             mode, and a few small changes to support the fact that vi
+             has two modes, input mode and command mode with different
+             bindings.
+
+             When vi editing mode is enabled, any binding that starts
+             with an escape or a meta character, is interpreted as a
+             command-mode binding, and switches the library to vi
+             command mode if not already in that mode. Once in command
+             mode the first character of all keysequences entered
+             until input mode is re-enabled, are quietly coerced to
+             meta characters before being looked up in the key-binding
+             table. So, for example, in the key-binding table, the
+             standard vi command-mode 'w' key, which moves the cursor
+             one word to the right, is represented by M-w. This
+             emulates vi's dual sets of bindings in a natural way
+             without needing large changes to the library, or new
+             binding syntaxes. Since cursor keys normally emit
+             keysequences which start with escape, it also does
+             something sensible when a cursor key is pressed during
+             input mode (unlike true vi, which gets upset).
+
+             I also added a ^Xg binding for the new list-glob action
+             to both the emacs and vi key-binding tables. This lists
+             the files that match the wild-card expression that
+             precedes it on the command line.
+
+             The function that reads in ~/.teclarc used to tell
+             new_GetLine() to abort if it encountered anything that it
+             didn't understand in this file. It now just reports an
+             error and continues onto the next line.
+           Makefile.in:
+             When passing LIBS=$(LIBS) to recursive invokations of
+             make, quotes weren't included around the $(LIBS) part.
+             This would cause problems if LIBS ever contained more
+             than one word (with the supplied configure script this
+             doesn't happen currently). I added these quotes.
+           expand.c man3/ef_expand_file.3:
+             I wrote a new public function called ef_list_expansions(),
+             to list the matching filenames returned by
+             ef_expand_file().
+
+             I also fixed the example in the man page, which cited
+             exp->file instead of exp->files, and changed the
+             dangerous name 'exp' with 'expn'.
+           keytab.c:
+             Key-binding tables start with 100 elements, and are
+             supposedly incremented in size by 100 elements whenever
+             the a table runs out of space. The realloc arguments to
+             do this were wrong. This would have caused problems if
+             anybody added a lot of personal bindings in their
+             ~/.teclarc file. I only noticed it because the number of
+             key bindings needed by the new vi mode exceeded this
+             number.
+           libtecla.map
+             ef_expand_file() is now reported as having been added in
+             the upcoming 1.3.0 release.
+
+25/03/2001 Markus Gyger  (logged here by mcs)
+
+           Makefile.in:
+             Make symbolic links to alternative shared library names
+             relative instead of absolute.
+           Makefile.rules:
+             The HP-UX libtecla.map.opt file should be made in the
+             compilation directory, to allow the source code directory
+             to be on a readonly filesystem.
+           cplmatch.c demo2.c history.c pcache.c
+             To allow the library to be compiled with a C++ compiler,
+             without generating warnings, a few casts were added where
+             void* return values were being assigned directly to
+             none void* pointer variables.
+
+25/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           libtecla.map:
+             Added comment header to explain the purpose of the file.
+             Also added cpl_init_FileArgs to the list of exported
+             symbols. This symbol is deprecated, and no longer
+             documented, but for backwards compatibility, it should
+             still be exported.
+           configure:
+             I had forgotten to run autoconf before releasing version
+             1.2.4, so I have just belatedly done so.  This enables
+             Markus' changes to "configure.in" documented previously,
+             (see 17/03/2001).
+
+20/03/2001 John Levon   (logged here by mcs)
+
+           libtecla.h
+             A couple of the function prototypes in libtecla.h have
+             (FILE *) argument declarations, which means that stdio.h
+             needs to be included. The header file should be self
+             contained, so libtecla.h now includes stdio.h.
+
+18/03/2001 Version 1.2.4 released.
+
+           README html/index.html configure.in
+             Incremented minor version from 3 to 4.
+
+18/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             The fix for the end-of-line problem that I released a
+             couple of weeks ago, only worked for the first line,
+             because I was handling this case when the cursor position
+             was equal to the last column, rather than when the cursor
+             position modulo ncolumn was zero.
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             The demos are now made by default, their rules now being
+             int Makefile.rules instead of Makefile.in.
+           INSTALL
+             I documented how to compile the library in a different
+             directory than the distribution directory.
+             I also documented features designed to facilitate
+             configuring and building the library as part of another
+             package.
+
+17/03/2001 Markus Gyger (logged here by mcs)
+
+           getline.c
+             Until now cursor motions were done one at a time. Markus
+             has added code to make use the of the terminfo capability
+             that moves the cursor by more than one position at a
+             time. This greatly improves performance when editing near
+             the start of long lines.
+           getline.c
+             To further improve performance, Markus switched from
+             writing one character at a time to the terminal, using
+             the write() system call, to using C buffered output
+             streams. The output buffer is only flushed when
+             necessary.
+           Makefile.rules Makefile.in configure.in
+             Added support for compiling for different architectures
+             in different directories. Simply create another directory
+             and run the configure script located in the original
+             directory.
+           Makefile.in configure.in libtecla.map
+             Under Solaris, Linux and HP-UX, symbols that are to be
+             exported by tecla shared libraries are explicitly specified
+             via symbol map files. Only publicly documented functions
+             are thus visible to applications.
+           configure.in
+             When linking shared libraries under Solaris SPARC,
+             registers that are reserved for applications are marked
+             as off limits to the library, using -xregs=no%appl when
+             compiling with Sun cc, or -mno-app-regs when compiling
+             with gcc. Also removed -z redlocsym for Solaris, which
+             caused problems under some releases of ld.
+           homedir.c  (after minor changes by mcs)
+             Under ksh, ~+ expands to the current value of the ksh
+             PWD environment variable, which contains the path of
+             the current working directory, including any symbolic
+             links that were traversed to get there. The special
+             username "+" is now treated equally by tecla, except
+             that it substitutes the return value of getcwd() if PWD
+             either isn't set, or if it points at a different
+             directory than that reported by getcwd().
+
+08/03/2001 Version 1.2.3 released.
+
+08/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             On compiling the library under HP-UX for the first time
+             I encountered and fixed a couple of bugs:
+
+             1. On all systems except Solaris, the callback function
+                required by tputs() takes an int argument for the
+                character that is to be printed. Under Solaris it
+                takes a char argument. The callback function was
+                passing this argument, regardless of type, to write(),
+                which wrote the first byte of the argument.  This was
+                fine under Solaris and under little-endian systems,
+                because the first byte contained the character to be
+                written, but on big-endian systems, it always wrote
+                the zero byte at the other end of the word. As a
+                result, no control characters were being written to
+                the terminal.
+             2. While attempting to start a newline after the user hit
+                enter, the library was outputting the control sequence
+                for moving the cursor down, instead of the newline
+                character. On many systems the control sequence for
+                moving the cursor down happends to be a newline
+                character, but under HP-UX it isn't. The result was
+                that no new line was being started under HP-UX.
+
+04/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in Makefile.in Makefile.stub configure config.guess
+           config.sub Makefile.rules install-sh PORTING README INSTALL
+             Configuration and compilation of the library is now
+             performed with the help of an autoconf configure
+             script. In addition to relieving the user of the need to
+             edit the Makefile, this also allows automatic compilation
+             of the reentrant version of the library on platforms that
+             can handle it, along with the creation of shared
+             libraries where configured. On systems that aren't known
+             to the configure script, just the static tecla library is
+             compiled. This is currently the case on all systems
+             except Linux, Solaris and HP-UX. In the hope that
+             installers will provide specific conigurations for other
+             systems, the configure.in script is heavily commented,
+             and instructions on how to use are included in a new
+             PORTING file.
+
+24/02/2001 Version 1.2b released.
+
+22/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             It turns out that most terminals, but not all, on writing
+             a character in the rightmost column, don't wrap the
+             cursor onto the next line until the next character is
+             output. This library wasn't aware of this and thus if one
+             tried to reposition the cursor from the last column,
+             gl_get_line() thought that it was moving relative to a
+             point on the next line, and thus moved the cursor up a
+             line. The fix was to write one extra character when in
+             the last column to force the cursor onto the next line,
+             then backup the cursor to the start of the new line.
+           getline.c
+             On terminal initialization, the dynamic LINES and COLUMNS
+             environment variables were ignored unless
+             terminfo/termcap didn't return sensible dimensions. In
+             practice, when present they should override the static
+             versions in the terminfo/termcap databases. This is the
+             new behavior. In reality this probably won't have caused
+             many problems, because a SIGWINCH signal which informs of
+             terminal size changes is sent when the terminal is
+             opened, so the dimensions established during
+             initialization quickly get updated on most systems.
+
+18/02/2001 Version 1.2a released.
+
+18/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Three months ago I moved the point at which termios.h
+             was included in getline.c. Unfortunately, I didn't notice
+             that this moved it to after the test for TIOCGWINSZ being
+             defined. This resulted in SIGWINCH signals not being
+             trapped for, and thus terminal size changes went
+             unnoticed. I have now moved the test to after the 
+             inclusion of termios.h.
+
+12/02/2001 Markus Gyger     (described here by mcs)
+
+           man3/pca_lookup_file.3 man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/ef_expand_file.3 man3/cpl_complete_word.3
+             In the 1.2 release of the library, all functions in the
+             library were given man pages. Most of these simply
+             include one of the above 4 man pages, which describe the
+             functions while describing the modules that they are in.
+             Markus added all of these function names to the lists in
+             the "NAME" headers of the respective man pages.
+             Previously only the primary function of each module was
+             named there.
+
+11/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             On entering a line that wrapped over two or more
+             terminal, if the user pressed enter when the cursor
+             wasn't on the last of the wrapped lines, the text of the
+             wrapped lines that followed it got mixed up with the next
+             line written by the application, or the next input
+             line. Somehow this slipped through the cracks and wasn't
+             noticed until now. Anyway, it is fixed now.
+
+09/02/2001 Version 1.2 released.
+
+04/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           pcache.c libtecla.h
+             With all filesystems local, demo2 was very fast to start
+             up, but on a Sun system with one of the target
+             directories being on a remote nfs mounted filesystem, the
+             startup time was many seconds. This was due to the
+             executable selection callback being applied to all files
+             in the path at startup. To avoid this, all files are now
+             included in the cache, and the application specified
+             file-selection callback is only called on files as they
+             are matched. Whether the callback rejected or accepted
+             them is then cached so that the next time an already
+             checked file is looked at, the callback doesn't have to
+             be called. As a result, startup is now fast on all
+             systems, and since usually there are only a few matching
+             file completions at a time, the delay during completion
+             is also usually small. The only exception is if the user
+             tries to complete an empty string, at which point all
+             files have to be checked. Having done this once, however,
+             doing it again is fast.
+           man3/pca_lookup_file.3
+             I added a man page documenting the new PathCache module.
+           man3/<many-new-files>.3
+             I have added man pages for all of the functions in each
+             of the modules. These 1-line pages use the .so directive
+             to redirect nroff to the man page of the parent module.
+           man Makefile update_html
+             I renamed man to man3 to make it easier to test man page
+             rediction, and updated Makefile and update_html
+             accordingly. I also instructed update_html to ignore
+             1-line man pages when making html equivalents of the man
+             pages.
+           cplmatch.c
+             In cpl_list_completions() the size_t return value of
+             strlen() was being used as the length argument of a "%*s"
+             printf directive. This ought to be an int, so the return
+             value of strlen() is now cast to int. This would have
+             caused problems on architectures where the size of a
+             size_t is not equal to the size of an int.
+
+02/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Under UNIX, certain terminal bindings are set using the
+             stty command. This, for example, specifies which control
+             key generates a user-interrupt (usually ^C or ^Y). What I
+             hadn't realized was that ASCII NUL is used as the way to
+             specify that one of these bindings is unset. I have now
+             modified the code to skip unset bindings, leaving the
+             corresponding action bound to the built-in default, or a
+             user provided binding.
+
+28/01/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           pcache.c libtecla.h
+             A new module was added which supports searching for files
+             in any colon separated list of directories, such as the
+             unix execution PATH environment variable. Files in these
+             directories, after being individually okayed for
+             inclusion via an application provided callback, are
+             cached in a PathCache object. You can then look up the
+             full pathname of a given filename, or you can use the
+             provided completion callback to list possible completions
+             in the path-list. The contents of relative directories,
+             such as ".", obviously can't be cached, so these
+             directories are read on the fly during lookups and
+             completions. The obvious application of this facility is
+             to provide Tab-completion of commands, and thus a
+             callback to place executable files in the cache, is
+             provided.
+           demo2.c
+             This new program demonstrates the new PathCache
+             module. It reads and processes lines of input until the
+             word 'exit' is entered, or C-d is pressed. The default
+             tab-completion callback is replaced with one which at the
+             start of a line, looks up completions of commands in the
+             user's execution path, and when invoked in other parts of
+             the line, reverts to normal filename completion. Whenever
+             a new line is entered, it extracts the first word on the
+             line, looks it up in the user's execution path to see if
+             it corresponds to a known command file, and if so,
+             displays the full pathname of the file, along with the
+             remaining arguments.
+           cplfile.c
+             I added an optional pair of callback function/data
+             members to the new cpl_file_completions() configuration
+             structure. Where provided, this callback is asked
+             on a file-by-file basis, which files should be included
+             in the list of file completions. For example, a callback
+             is provided for listing only completions of executable
+             files.
+           cplmatch.c
+             When listing completions, the length of the type suffix
+             of each completion wasn't being taken into account
+             correctly when computing the column widths. Thus the
+             listing appeared ragged sometimes. This is now fixed.
+           pathutil.c
+             I added a function for prepending a string to a path,
+             and another for testing whether a pathname referred to
+             an executable file.
+
+28/01/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           libtecla.h cplmatch.c man/cpl_complete_word.3
+             The use of a publically defined structure to configure
+             the cpl_file_completions() callback was flawed, so a new
+             approach has been designed, and the old method, albeit
+             still supported, is no longer documented in the man
+             pages. The definition of the CplFileArgs structure in
+             libtecla.h is now accompanied by comments warning people
+             not to modify it, since modifications could break
+             applications linked to shared versions of the tecla
+             library. The new method involves an opaque CplFileConf
+             object, instances of which are returned by a provided
+             constructor function, configured with provided accessor
+             functions, and when no longer needed, deleted with a
+             provided destructor function. This is documented in the
+             cpl_complete_word man page. The cpl_file_completions()
+             callback distinguishes what type of configuration
+             structure it has been sent by virtue of a code placed at
+             the beginning of the CplFileConf argument by its
+             constructor.
+
+04/01/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1j)
+
+           getline.c
+             I added upper-case bindings for the default meta-letter
+             keysequences such as M-b. They thus continue to work
+             when the user has caps-lock on.
+           Makefile
+             I re-implemented the "install" target in terms of new
+             install_lib, install_inc and install_man targets. When
+             distributing the library with other packages, these new
+             targets allows for finer grained control of the
+             installation process.
+
+30/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I realized that the recall-history action that I
+             implemented wasn't what Markus had asked me for. What he
+             actually wanted was for down-history to continue going
+             forwards through a previous history recall session if no
+             history recall session had been started while entering
+             the current line. I have thus removed the recall-history
+             action and modified the down-history action function
+             accordingly.
+
+24/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             I modified gl_get_line() to allow the previously returned
+             line to be passed in the start_line argument.
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a recall-history action function, bound to M^P.
+             This recalls the last recalled history line, regardless
+             of whether it was from the current or previous line.
+
+13/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1i)
+
+           getline.c history.h history.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I implemented the equivalent of the ksh Operate action. I
+             have named the tecla equivalent "repeat-history". This
+             causes the line that is to be edited to returned, and
+             arranges for the next most recent history line to be
+             preloaded on the next call to gl_get_line(). Repeated
+             invocations of this action thus result in successive
+             history lines being repeated - hence the
+             name. Implementing the ksh Operate action was suggested
+             by Markus Gyger. In ksh it is bound to ^O, but since ^O
+             is traditionally bound by the default terminal settings,
+             to stop-output, I have bound the tecla equivalent to M-o.
+
+01/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1h)
+
+           getline.c keytab.c keytab.h man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a digit-argument action, to allow repeat
+             counts for actions to be entered. As in both tcsh
+             and readline, this is bound by default to each of
+             M-0, M-1 through to M-9, the number being appended
+             to the current repeat count. Once one of these has been
+             pressed, the subsequent digits of the repeat count can be
+             typed with or without the meta key pressed. It is also
+             possible to bind digit-argument to other keys, with or
+             without a numeric final keystroke. See man page for
+             details.
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             Markus noted that my choice of M-< for the default
+             binding of read-from-file, could be confusing, since
+             readline binds this to beginning-of-history. I have
+             thus rebound it to ^X^F (ie. like find-file in emacs).
+
+           getline.c history.c history.h man/gl_get_line.3
+             I have now implemented equivalents of the readline
+             beginning-of-history and end-of-history actions.
+             These are bound to M-< and M-> respectively.
+
+           history.c history.h
+             I Moved the definition of the GlHistory type, and
+             its subordinate types from history.h to history.c.
+             There is no good reason for any other module to
+             have access to the innards of this structure.
+
+27/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1g)
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a "read-from-file" action function and bound it
+             by default to M-<. This causes gl_get_line() to
+             temporarily return input from the file who's name
+             precedes the cursor.
+             
+26/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c keytab.c keytab.h man/gl_get_line.3
+             I have reworked some of the keybinding code again.
+
+             Now, within key binding strings, in addition to the
+             previously existing notation, you can now use M-a to
+             denote meta-a, and C-a to denote control-a. For example,
+             a key binding which triggers when the user presses the
+             meta key, the control key and the letter [
+             simultaneously, can now be denoted by M-C-[, or M-^[ or
+             \EC-[ or \E^[.
+
+             I also updated the man page to use M- instead of \E in
+             the list of default bindings, since this looks cleaner.
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a copy-region-as-kill action function and
+             gave it a default binding to M-w.
+
+22/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           *.c
+             Markus Gyger sent me a copy of a previous version of
+             the library, with const qualifiers added in appropriate
+             places. I have done the same for the latest version.
+             Among other things, this gets rid of the warnings
+             that are generated if one tells the compiler to
+             const qualify literal strings.
+
+           getline.c getline.h glconf.c
+             I have moved the contents of glconf.c and the declaration
+             of the GetLine structure into getline.c. This is cleaner,
+             since now only functions in getline.c can mess with the
+             innards of GetLine objects. It also clears up some problems
+             with system header inclusion order under Solaris, and also
+             the possibility that this might result in inconsistent
+             system macro definitions, which in turn could cause different
+             declarations of the structure to be seen in different files.
+
+           hash.c
+             I wrote a wrapper function to go around strcmp(), such that
+             when hash.c is compiled with a C++ compiler, the pointer
+             to the wrapper function is a C++ function pointer.
+             This makes it compatible with comparison function pointer
+             recorded in the hash table.
+
+           cplmatch.c getline.c libtecla.h
+             Markus noted that the Sun C++ compiler wasn't able to
+             match up the declaration of cpl_complete_word() in
+             libtecla.h, where it is surrounded by a extern "C" {}
+             wrapper, with the definition of this function in
+             cplmatch.c. My suspicion is that the compiler looks not
+             only at the function name, but also at the function
+             arguments to see if two functions match, and that the
+             match_fn() argument, being a fully blown function pointer
+             declaration, got interpetted as that of a C function in
+             one case, and a C++ function in the other, thus
+             preventing a match.
+
+             To fix this I now define a CplMatchFn typedef in libtecla.h,
+             and use this to declare the match_fn callback.
+
+20/11/2000 (Changes suggested by Markus Gyger to support C++ compilers):
+           expand.c
+             Renamed a variable called "explicit" to "xplicit", to
+             avoid conflicts when compiling with C++ compilers.
+           *.c
+             Added explicit casts when converting from (void *) to
+             other pointer types. This isn't needed in C but it is
+             in C++.
+           getline.c
+             tputs() has a strange declaration under Solaris. I was
+             enabling this declaration when the SPARC feature-test
+             macro was set. Markus changed the test to hinge on the
+             __sun and __SVR4 macros.
+           direader.c glconf.c stringrp.c
+             I had omitted to include string.h in these two files.
+
+           Markus also suggested some other changes, which are still
+           under discussion. With the just above changes however, the
+           library compiles without complaint using g++.
+
+19/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.h getline.c keytab.c keytab.h glconf.c
+           man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added support for backslash escapes (include \e
+             for the keyboard escape key) and literal binary
+             characters to the characters allowed within key sequences
+             of key bindings.
+
+           getline.h getline.c keytab.c keytab.h glconf.c
+           man/gl_get_line.3
+             I introduced symbolic names for the arrow keys, and
+             modified the library to use the cursor key sequences
+             reported by terminfo/termcap in addition to the default
+             ANSI ones. Anything bound to the symbolically named arrow
+             keys also gets bound to the default and terminfo/termcap
+             cursor key sequences. Note that under Solaris
+             terminfo/termcap report the properties of hardware X
+             terminals when TERM is xterm instead of the terminal
+             emulator properties, and the cursor keys on these two
+             systems generate different key sequences. This is an
+             example of why extra default sequences are needed.
+
+           getline.h getline.c keytab.c
+             For some reason I was using \e to represent the escape
+             character. This is supported by gcc, which thus doesn't
+             emit a warning except with the -pedantic flag, but isn't
+             part of standard C. I now use a macro to define escape
+             as \033 in getline.h, and this is now used wherever the
+             escape character is needed.
+
+17/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1d)
+
+           getline.c, man/gl_get_line(3), html/gl_get_line.html
+             In tcsh ^D is bound to a function which does different
+             things depending on where the cursor is within the input
+             line. I have implemented its equivalent in the tecla
+             library. When invoked at the end of the line this action
+             function displays possible completions. When invoked on
+             an empty line it causes gl_get_line() to return NULL,
+             thus signalling end of input. When invoked within a line
+             it invokes forward-delete-char, as before. The new action
+             function is called del-char-or-list-or-eof.
+
+           getline.c, man/gl_get_line(3), html/gl_get_line.html
+             I found that the complete-word and expand-file actions
+             had underscores in their names instead of hyphens. This
+             made them different from all other action functions, so I
+             have changed the underscores to hyphens.
+
+           homedir.c
+             On SCO UnixWare while getpwuid_r() is available, the
+             associated _SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX macro used by sysconf()
+             to find out how big to make the buffer to pass to this
+             function to cater for any password entry, doesn't
+             exist. I also hadn't catered for the case where sysconf()
+             reports that this limit is indeterminate. I have thus
+             change the code to substitute a default limit of 1024 if
+             either the above macro isn't defined or if sysconf() says
+             that the associated limit is indeterminate.
+           
+17/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1c)
+
+           getline.c, getline.h, history.c, history.h
+             I have modified the way that the history recall functions
+             operate, to make them better emulate the behavior of
+             tcsh. Previously the history search bindings always
+             searched for the prefix that preceded the cursor, then
+             left the cursor at the same point in the line, so that a
+             following search would search using the same prefix. This
+             isn't how tcsh operates. On finding a matching line, tcsh
+             puts the cursor at the end of the line, but arranges for
+             the followup search to continue with the same prefix,
+             unless the user does any cursor motion or character
+             insertion operations in between, in which case it changes
+             the search prefix to the new set of characters that are
+             before the cursor. There are other complications as well,
+             which I have attempted to emulate. As far as I can
+             tell, the tecla history recall facilities now fully
+             emulate those of tcsh.
+
+16/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1b)
+
+           demo.c:
+             One can now quit from the demo by typing exit.
+
+           keytab.c:
+             The first entry of the table was getting deleted
+             by _kt_clear_bindings() regardless of the source
+             of the binding. This deleted the up-arrow binding.
+             Symptoms noted by gazelle@yin.interaccess.com.
+
+           getline.h:
+             Depending on which system include files were include
+             before the inclusion of getline.h, SIGWINCH and
+             TIOCGWINSZ might or might not be defined. This resulted
+             in different definitions of the GetLine object in
+             different files, and thus some very strange bugs! I have
+             now added #includes for the necessary system header files
+             in getline.h itself. The symptom was that on creating a
+             ~/.teclarc file, the demo program complained of a NULL
+             argument to kt_set_keybinding() for the first line of the
+             file.
+
+15/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1a)
+
+           demo.c:
+             I had neglected to check the return value of
+             new_GetLine() in the demo program. Oops.
+
+           getline.c libtecla.h:
+             I wrote gl_change_terminal(). This allows one to change to
+             a different terminal or I/O stream, by specifying the
+             stdio streams to use for input and output, along with the
+             type of terminal that they are connected to.
+
+           getline.c libtecla.h:
+             Renamed GetLine::isterm to GetLine::is_term. Standard
+             C reserves names that start with "is" followed by
+             alphanumeric characters, so this avoids potential
+             clashes in the future.
+
+           keytab.c keytab.h
+             Each key-sequence can now have different binding
+             functions from different sources, with the user provided
+             binding having the highest precedence, followed by the
+             default binding, followed by any terminal specific
+             binding. This allows gl_change_terminal() to redefine the
+             terminal-specific bindings each time that
+             gl_change_terminal() is called, without overwriting the
+             user specified or default bindings. In the future, it will
+             also allow for reconfiguration of user specified
+             bindings after the call to new_GetLine(). Ie. deleting a
+             user specified binding should reinstate any default or
+             terminal specific binding.
+
+           man/cpl_complete_word.3 html/cpl_complete_word.html
+           man/ef_expand_file.3    html/ef_expand_file.html
+           man/gl_get_line.3       html/gl_get_line.html
+             I added sections on thread safety to the man pages of the
+             individual modules.
+
+           man/gl_get_line.3       html/gl_get_line.html
+             I documented the new gl_change_terminal() function.
+
+           man/gl_get_line.3       html/gl_get_line.html
+             In the description of the ~/.teclarc configuration file,
+             I had omitted the 'bind' command word in the example
+             entry. I have now remedied this.
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/INSTALL b/libtecla-1.4.1/INSTALL
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a1b036
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/INSTALL
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+To compile and optionally install the library, it is first necessary
+to create a makefile for your system, by typing:
+
+  ./configure
+
+The Makefile that this generates is designed to install the files of
+the library in subdirectories of /usr/local/. If you would prefer to
+install them under a different directory, you can type:
+
+  ./configure --prefix /wherever
+
+Where you would replace /wherever with your chosen directory. Other
+command-line options are available, and can be listed by typing:
+
+  ./configure --help
+
+Having run the configure script, you are then ready to make the
+library. To do this, just type:
+
+  make
+
+What 'make' does depends on whether the configure script knows about
+your system. If the configure script doesn't know anything specific
+about your system, it will arrange for 'make' to produce the static
+tecla library, called libtecla.a, and if possible, the reentrant
+version of this called libtecla_r.a. If it does know about your
+system, it will also create shared libraries if possible. If you are
+on a system that isn't known, and you would like shared libraries to
+be compiled, please read the file called PORTING to see how this can
+be achieved.
+
+To install the library, its include file and it manual pages, type:
+
+  make install
+
+Note that this will also compile the library if you haven't already
+done so.
+
+Having compiled the library, if you wish, you can test it by running
+the demo programs. After building the library, you should find two
+programs, called demo and demo2, in the current directory.
+
+The first of the demos programs reads input lines from the user, and
+writes what was typed back to the screen. While typing a line of
+input, you can experiment with line editing, tab completion, history
+recall etc.. For details about these line editing features, see the
+man page gl_get_line(3). If you haven't installed this yet, you can
+see it anyway by typing:
+
+  nroff -man man3/gl_get_line.3 | more
+
+The second demo program, called demo2, demonstrates command-completion
+with the UNIX PATH. If you type in a partial command name, and press
+TAB, the command name will be completed if possible, and possible
+completions will be listed if it is ambiguous. When you then enter the
+line, the demo program then prints out the full pathname of the
+command that you typed. If you type anything after the command name,
+filename completion with the tab key reverts to its default behavior
+of completing filenames in the current directory.
+
+COMPILING IN A DIFFERENT DIRECTORY
+----------------------------------
+If you unpack the distribution in a directory which is visible from
+multiple hosts which have different architectures, you have the option
+of compiling the library for the different architectures in different
+directories. You might for example create a sub-directory for each
+architecture, under the top level directory of the distribution. You
+would then log in to a host of one of these architectures, cd to the
+sub-directory that you created for it, and type:
+
+  ../configure
+
+The configure script then creates a makefile in the current directory
+which is designed to build the library, object files, demos etc for
+the architecture of the current host, in the current directory, using
+the original source code in ../. You then repeat this procedure on
+hosts of other architectures.
+
+The compilation directories don't have to be sub-directories of the
+top level directory of the distribution. That was just described as an
+example. They can be anywhere you like.
+
+Every rule in the makefiles that are generated by the configure
+script, cites the paths of the target and source files explicitly, so
+this procedure should work on any system, without the need for vpath
+makefile support.
+
+EMBEDDING IN OTHER PACKAGE DISTRIBUTIONS
+----------------------------------------
+
+If you distribute the library with another package, which has its own
+heirarchy and configuration procedures, the following installation
+options may be of interest to you. At first glance, the use of a GNU
+configure script by the tecla library, may appear to reduce your
+options for controlling what gets made, and where it gets installed,
+but this isn't the case, because many of the parameters configured by
+the configure script are assigned to make variables which can be
+overriden when you run make.
+
+For example, lets say that you have your own configuration script in
+the parent directory of the libtecla top-level directory. In your
+configuration script, you would first need to have the following line:
+
+  (cd libtecla; ./configure)
+
+Now, from your makefile or whatever script you use to build your
+application, you would need to make the library. Assuming that your
+makefile or build script is in the parent directory of the libtecla
+distribution, the following line tells make to just make the
+non-reentrant, static version of the tecla library, and to install it
+and the tecla include file in sub-directories called lib and include
+in your current directory.
+
+  (cd libtecla; make LIBDIR=../lib INCDIR=../include TARGETS=normal TARGET_LIBS="static" install_lib install_inc)
+
+First, the LIBDIR=../lib means that on installing the library, it
+should be placed in the directory libtecla/../lib. Similarly INCDIR
+tells make where to place the include files. The install_lib and
+install_inc targets tell make to install the libraries and the include
+file. Because the install_man and install_bin targets have been
+omitted in this example, the man pages and programs aren't installed.
+If you were to include these additional targets then you could use the
+MANDIR and BINDIR variables, respectively to control where they were
+installed.
+
+The TARGETS variable is used to specify which of the normal and
+reentrant versions of the library are compiled. This can contain one
+or both of the words "normal" and "reentrant". If you don't specify
+this when you invoke make, the default value generated by the
+configure script will be used. Depending on whether reentrant POSIX
+functions are available for compilation of the reentrant version, this
+will be either "normal" or "normal reentrant".
+
+The TARGET_LIBS variable is used to specify which of the static and
+shared libraries are to be built. This can contain one or both of the
+words "static" and "shared". If you don't specify this when you invoke
+make, the default value generated by the configure script will be
+used. Depending on whether the configure script knows how to create
+shared libraries on the target system, this will be either "static" or
+"static shared". Beware that shared libraries aren't supported on many
+systems, so requiring "shared" will limit which systems you can
+compile your package on. Also note that unless your package installs
+the tecla library in a directory which all users of your program will
+have access to, you should only compile the static version.
+Instructions for adding shared-library creation rules for new systems
+are included in the PORTING file.
+
+The OPT variable can be used to change the default optimization from
+the default of "-O" to something else.
+
+The DEMOS variable controls whether the demo programs are built.
+Normally this has the value "demos", which tells the makefile to build
+the demo programs. Setting it to an empty string stops the demos from
+being built.
+
+The PROGRAMS variable is used to specify which programs are to be
+built and subsequently installed. All available programs are built by
+default. Currently there is only one such program, selected by
+specifying the word "enhance". This program uses tecla-enhanced
+pseudo-terminals to layer command line editing on top of third party
+programs.
+
+The PROGRAMS_R variable serves the same purpose as the PROGRAMS
+variable, except that programs listed here are linked with the
+reentrant version of the library, and should be specified with a _r
+suffix. Currently this variable is empty by default.
+
+Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/LICENSE.TERMS b/libtecla-1.4.1/LICENSE.TERMS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..275eef5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/LICENSE.TERMS
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+
+All rights reserved.
+
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+
+Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+of the copyright holder.
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15116b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+default:
+	./configure
+	make
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.in b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f691375
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# This is the template that the libtecla configure script uses to create
+# the libtecla Makefile. It does this by replacing all instances of
+# @name@ with the value of the correspondingly named configuration
+# variable. You should find another file in the same directory as this
+# one, called "configure.in". The latter file contains extensive comments
+# explaining how this all works.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# Where is the source code?
+
+srcdir = @srcdir@
+
+# Where do you want to install the library, its header file, and the man pages?
+
+prefix=@prefix@
+exec_prefix=@exec_prefix@
+LIBDIR=@libdir@
+INCDIR=@includedir@
+MANDIR=@mandir@
+BINDIR=@bindir@
+
+# Which C compiler do you want to use?
+
+CC = @CC@
+
+# If 'make' doesn't define the MAKE variable, define it here.
+
+@SET_MAKE@
+
+# To use RANLIB set the RANLIB variable to ranlib. Otherwise set it to
+# :, which is the bourne shell do-nothing command.
+
+RANLIB = @RANLIB@
+
+# The following optional defines change the characteristics of the library.
+#
+# USE_TERMINFO
+#   Use the terminfo terminal information database when looking up
+#   terminal characteristics. Most modern UNIX and UNIX-like operating
+#   systems support terminfo, so this define should normally be included.
+#   If in doubt leave it in, and see if the library compiles.
+# USE_TERMCAP
+#   If you don't have terminfo but do have the termcap database, replace
+#   the -DUSE_TERMINFO with -DUSE_TERMCAP. If there is a termcap.h in
+#   /usr/include/, also add -DHAVE_TERMCAP_H.
+#
+# If neither USE_TERMINFO nor USE_TERMCAP are included, ANSI VT100 control
+# sequences will be used to control all terminal types.
+#
+# For Solaris and Linux, use:
+#
+#  DEFINES = -DUSE_TERMINFO
+#
+
+DEFINES = @DEFS@
+
+#
+# The following defines are used in addition to the above when compiling
+# the reentrant version of the library. Note that the definition of
+# _POSIX_C_SOURCE to request reentrant functions, has the unfortunate
+# side-effect on some systems of stopping the TIOCGWINSZ ioctl macro from
+# getting defined. This in turn stops the library from being
+# able to respond to terminal size changes. Under Solaris this can be
+# remedied by adding -D__EXTENSIONS__. On linux this isn't necessary.
+# If you don't get this right, the library will still work, but
+# it will get confused if the terminal size gets changed and you try to
+# edit a line that exceeds the terminal width.
+#
+# Thus on Solaris you should use:
+#
+#   DEFINES_R = -D_POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L -D__EXTENSIONS__
+#
+# and on linux you should use:
+#
+#   DEFINES_R = -D_POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L
+#
+
+DEFINES_R = -D_POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L
+
+#
+# The compiler optimization flags. I like to keep this separate so
+# that I can set it to -g from the 'make' command line without having
+# to edit this file when debugging the library. If you aren't working
+# on modifying the library, leave this set to -O.
+#
+
+OPT = -O
+
+#
+# These are paranoid gcc warning flags to use when compiling new code.
+# Simply invoke make with WARNING_FLAGS='$(PEDANTIC_FLAGS)'.
+#
+PEDANTIC_FLAGS=-Wall -Wshadow -Wpointer-arith -Wwrite-strings -Wstrict-prototypes -Wmissing-prototypes -Wmissing-declarations -Wredundant-decls
+
+#
+# Specify any extra compiler warning options that you want to use.
+# Leave this blank unless you are porting the library to a new system,
+# or modifying the library.
+#
+
+WARNING_FLAGS=
+
+#
+# If you want to compile the demo program, specify any system
+# libraries that are needed for the terminal I/O functions.
+#
+# If you are using terminfo, you will probably only need -lcurses.
+# For termcap you may need -ltermcap or -ltermlib.
+#
+# For Solaris, use:
+#
+#  LIBS = -lcurses
+#
+# For linux, use:
+#
+#  LIBS = -lncurses
+#
+
+LIBS = @LIBS@
+
+#
+# List the default target libraries. This should be one or
+# both of the words "normal" and "reentrant".
+#
+TARGETS = @TARGETS@
+
+#
+# List which types of the above libraries are required.
+# This should be one or both of the words "static" and "shared".
+#
+TARGET_LIBS = @TARGET_LIBS@
+
+#
+# If you want the demo programs to be built, the following variable
+# should be assigned the single word: demos. If it isn't assigned
+# anything, the demo programs won't be built.
+#
+DEMOS = demos
+
+#
+# List the programs that are to be made by default.
+#
+PROGRAMS = enhance
+
+#
+# List programs for which reentrant versions are to be built by default.
+#
+PROGRAMS_R =
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# You shouldn't need to change anything below this line.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+CFLAGS = $(OPT) $(WARNING_FLAGS) $(DEFINES) @CFLAGS@ @SHARED_CFLAGS@
+
+default: $(TARGETS)
+
+normal:
+	@$(MAKE) -f $(srcdir)/Makefile.rules TARGETS="$(TARGET_LIBS)" SUFFIX="" CFLAGS="$(CFLAGS)" CC="$(CC)" OBJDIR=normal_obj LINK_SHARED='@LINK_SHARED@' SHARED_EXT='@SHARED_EXT@' SHARED_ALT='@SHARED_ALT@' LIBS='$(LIBS)' srcdir='$(srcdir)' LIBDIR='$(LIBDIR)' LN_S='@LN_S@' DEMOS="$(DEMOS)" PROGRAMS='$(PROGRAMS)' RANLIB='$(RANLIB)'
+
+reentrant:
+	@$(MAKE) -f $(srcdir)/Makefile.rules TARGETS="$(TARGET_LIBS)" SUFFIX="_r" CFLAGS="$(CFLAGS) $(DEFINES_R)" CC="$(CC)" OBJDIR=reentrant_obj LINK_SHARED='@LINK_SHARED@' SHARED_EXT='@SHARED_EXT@' SHARED_ALT='@SHARED_ALT@' LIBS='$(LIBS)' srcdir='$(srcdir)' LIBDIR='$(LIBDIR)' LN_S='@LN_S@' DEMOS="$(DEMOS)" PROGRAMS='$(PROGRAMS_R)' RANLIB='$(RANLIB)'
+
+demos: normal
+
+demos_r: reentrant
+
+clean:
+	rm -rf *.o normal_obj reentrant_obj libtecla*.a demo demo2 demo_r demo2_r enhance *~ man3/*~ html/*~ compile_reentrant compile_normal
+	@endings="@SHARED_EXT@ @SHARED_ALT@" ; \
+	for alt in $$endings ; do \
+	  lib="libtecla*$$alt" ; \
+	  rm -f $$lib; echo rm -f $$lib ; \
+	done
+
+distclean: clean
+	rm -f config.cache config.status config.log Makefile libtecla.map.opt
+	cp $(srcdir)/Makefile.stub Makefile
+
+install_lib: $(TARGETS) $(LIBDIR)
+	@for lib in libtecla.a libtecla_r.a ; do \
+	   if [ -f $$lib ] ; then \
+	     cp $$lib $(LIBDIR)/ ; chmod ugo+r $(LIBDIR)/$$lib; \
+	     echo "cp $$lib $(LIBDIR)/ ; chmod ugo+r $(LIBDIR)/$$lib"; \
+	   fi ; \
+	done
+	@for lib in libtecla libtecla_r ; do \
+	   src="$$lib@SHARED_EXT@"; \
+	   if [ -f $$src ] ; then \
+	     dst="$(LIBDIR)/$$src"; \
+	     cp -f $$src $$dst; chmod a=rX $$dst; \
+	     echo "cp -f $$src $$dst ; chmod a=rX $$dst"; \
+	     endings="@SHARED_ALT@" ; \
+	     for alt in $$endings ; do \
+	       lnk="$$lib$$alt"; \
+	       (cd $(LIBDIR); rm -f $$lnk; @LN_S@ $$src $$lnk); \
+	       echo "(cd $(LIBDIR); rm -f $$lnk; @LN_S@ $$src $$lnk)"; \
+	     done ; \
+	   fi ; \
+	done
+
+install_inc: $(INCDIR)
+	@if [ -f $(srcdir)/libtecla.h ]; then \
+	  cp $(srcdir)/libtecla.h $(INCDIR)/ ; chmod ugo+r $(INCDIR)/libtecla.h; \
+	  echo "cp $(srcdir)/libtecla.h $(INCDIR)/ ; chmod ugo+r $(INCDIR)/libtecla.h"; \
+	fi
+
+install_man: $(MANDIR) $(MANDIR)/man3
+	cd $(srcdir)/man3 && for page in *.3; do cp $$page $(MANDIR)/man3; chmod ugo+r $(MANDIR)/man3/$$page; done
+
+install_bin: $(BINDIR) $(PROGRAMS) $(PROGRAMS_R)
+	progs="$(PROGRAMS) $(PROGRAMS_R)"; \
+	for prog in $$progs; do \
+	  cp $$prog $(BINDIR)/; \
+	  chmod ugo+rx $(BINDIR)/$$prog; \
+	done
+
+install: install_lib install_inc install_man install_bin
+
+# Make any missing installation directories.
+
+$(MANDIR) $(MANDIR)/man3 $(LIBDIR) $(INCDIR) $(BINDIR):
+	$(srcdir)/install-sh -d $@
+	chmod ugo+rx $@
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.rules b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.rules
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6552057
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.rules
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+default: $(OBJDIR) $(TARGETS) $(DEMOS) $(PROGRAMS)
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# You shouldn't need to change anything in this file.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# Create the directory in which the object files will be created.
+
+$(OBJDIR):
+	mkdir $(OBJDIR)
+
+# Construct the compilation command.
+
+COMPILE = $(CC) -c $(CFLAGS) -o $@
+
+LIB_OBJECTS = $(OBJDIR)/getline.o $(OBJDIR)/keytab.o $(OBJDIR)/freelist.o \
+ $(OBJDIR)/strngmem.o $(OBJDIR)/hash.o $(OBJDIR)/history.o \
+ $(OBJDIR)/direader.o $(OBJDIR)/homedir.o $(OBJDIR)/pathutil.o \
+ $(OBJDIR)/expand.o $(OBJDIR)/stringrp.o $(OBJDIR)/cplfile.o \
+ $(OBJDIR)/cplmatch.o $(OBJDIR)/pcache.o $(OBJDIR)/version.o
+
+# List all of the programs that this makefile can build.
+
+PROGS = demo$(SUFFIX) demo2$(SUFFIX) enhance$(SUFFIX)
+
+static: libtecla$(SUFFIX).a
+
+libtecla$(SUFFIX).a: $(LIB_OBJECTS)
+	ar -ru $@ $(LIB_OBJECTS); \
+	$(RANLIB) $@; \
+	rm -f $(PROGS)
+
+shared: libtecla$(SUFFIX)$(SHARED_EXT)
+
+libtecla$(SUFFIX)$(SHARED_EXT): $(LIB_OBJECTS) $(srcdir)/libtecla.map \
+ libtecla.map.opt
+	$(LINK_SHARED)
+	@endings="$(SHARED_ALT)" ; \
+	for alt in $$endings ; do \
+	  lnk="libtecla$(SUFFIX)$$alt"; \
+	  echo "rm -f $$lnk; $(LN_S) $@ $$lnk"; \
+	  rm -f $$lnk; $(LN_S) $@ $$lnk; \
+	done; \
+	rm -f $(PROGS)
+
+libtecla.map.opt: $(srcdir)/libtecla.map
+	sed -n 's/^[ 	]*\([_a-zA-Z0-9]*\)[ 	]*;.*/+e \1/p' $? >$@
+
+demos: demo$(SUFFIX) demo2$(SUFFIX)
+
+demo$(SUFFIX): $(OBJDIR)/demo.o
+	LD_RUN_PATH="$(LIBDIR):$$LD_RUN_PATH:`pwd`" $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -o $@ \
+ $(OBJDIR)/demo.o -L. -ltecla$(SUFFIX) $(LIBS)
+
+demo2$(SUFFIX): $(OBJDIR)/demo2.o
+	LD_RUN_PATH="$(LIBDIR):$$LD_RUN_PATH:`pwd`" $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -o $@ \
+ $(OBJDIR)/demo2.o -L. -ltecla$(SUFFIX) $(LIBS)
+
+enhance$(SUFFIX): $(OBJDIR)/enhance.o
+	LD_RUN_PATH="$(LIBDIR):$$LD_RUN_PATH:`pwd`" $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -o $@ \
+ $(OBJDIR)/enhance.o -L. -ltecla$(SUFFIX) $(LIBS)
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Object file dependencies.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+$(OBJDIR)/getline.o: $(srcdir)/getline.c $(srcdir)/pathutil.h \
+ $(srcdir)/libtecla.h $(OBJDIR)/keytab.h $(srcdir)/history.h \
+ $(srcdir)/freelist.h $(srcdir)/stringrp.h $(srcdir)/getline.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/getline.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/keytab.o: $(srcdir)/keytab.c $(OBJDIR)/keytab.h \
+ $(srcdir)/strngmem.h $(srcdir)/getline.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/keytab.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/strngmem.o: $(srcdir)/strngmem.c $(srcdir)/strngmem.h \
+ $(srcdir)/freelist.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/strngmem.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/freelist.o: $(srcdir)/freelist.c $(srcdir)/freelist.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/freelist.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/hash.o: $(srcdir)/hash.c $(srcdir)/hash.h $(srcdir)/strngmem.h \
+ $(srcdir)/freelist.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/hash.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/history.o: $(srcdir)/history.c $(srcdir)/history.h \
+ $(srcdir)/freelist.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/history.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/expand.o: $(srcdir)/expand.c $(srcdir)/freelist.h \
+ $(srcdir)/direader.h $(srcdir)/pathutil.h $(srcdir)/homedir.h \
+ $(srcdir)/stringrp.h $(srcdir)/libtecla.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/expand.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/direader.o: $(srcdir)/direader.c $(srcdir)/direader.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/direader.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/homedir.o: $(srcdir)/homedir.c $(srcdir)/pathutil.h \
+ $(srcdir)/homedir.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/homedir.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/pathutil.o: $(srcdir)/pathutil.c $(srcdir)/pathutil.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/pathutil.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/stringrp.o: $(srcdir)/stringrp.c $(srcdir)/freelist.h \
+ $(srcdir)/stringrp.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/stringrp.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/cplfile.o: $(srcdir)/cplfile.c $(srcdir)/libtecla.h \
+ $(srcdir)/direader.h $(srcdir)/homedir.h $(srcdir)/pathutil.h \
+ $(srcdir)/cplfile.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/cplfile.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/cplmatch.o: $(srcdir)/cplmatch.c $(srcdir)/libtecla.h \
+ $(srcdir)/stringrp.h $(srcdir)/pathutil.h $(srcdir)/cplfile.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/cplmatch.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/pcache.o: $(srcdir)/pcache.c $(srcdir)/libtecla.h \
+ $(srcdir)/pathutil.h $(srcdir)/homedir.h $(srcdir)/freelist.h \
+ $(srcdir)/direader.h $(srcdir)/stringrp.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/pcache.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/demo.o: $(srcdir)/demo.c $(srcdir)/libtecla.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/demo.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/demo2.o: $(srcdir)/demo2.c $(srcdir)/libtecla.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/demo2.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/version.o: $(srcdir)/version.c $(srcdir)/libtecla.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/version.c
+
+$(OBJDIR)/enhance.o: $(srcdir)/enhance.c $(srcdir)/libtecla.h
+	$(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/enhance.c
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Include file dependencies.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+$(OBJDIR)/keytab.h: $(srcdir)/keytab.h $(srcdir)/libtecla.h \
+ $(srcdir)/hash.h $(srcdir)/strngmem.h
+	cp $(srcdir)/keytab.h $@
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.stub b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.stub
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15116b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/Makefile.stub
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+default:
+	./configure
+	make
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/PORTING b/libtecla-1.4.1/PORTING
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db39818
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/PORTING
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+The Tecla library was written with portability in mind, so no
+modifications to the source code should be needed on UNIX or LINUX
+platforms. The default compilation and linking arrangements should
+also work unchanged on these systems, but if no specific configuration
+has been provided for your system, shared libraries won't be compiled.
+Configuring these requires modifications to be made to the file:
+
+  configure.in
+
+This file is heavily commented (comments start with the word dnl) and
+is relatively simple, so the instructions and suggestions that you
+find in this file should be sufficient to help you figure out how to
+add a configuration for your system. This file is an input file to the
+GNU autoconf program, which uses it as a template for generating the
+distributed configure script. If autoconf is installed on your system,
+creating a new configure script is a simple matter of typing.
+
+  autoconf
+
+To avoid confusion with the leftovers of the previous configuration,
+you should then do the following:
+
+ rm -f config.cache
+ ./configure
+ make clean
+ ./configure
+ make
+
+The first ./configure creates a new makefile for your system, allowing
+you to type 'make clean' to discard any files that were compiled with
+the previous configuration. Since 'make clean' also deletes the new
+makefile, a second invokation of the configure script is then
+performed to re-create the makefile. The final make then creates the
+tecla library from scratch.
+
+Once you have confirmed that the new configuration works, please send
+the modified "configure.in" template to mcs@astro.caltech.edu, so that
+your changes can be included in subsequent releases.
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/README b/libtecla-1.4.1/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..894819d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/README
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+This is version 1.4.1 of the tecla command-line editing library.
+
+For the current official release, please direct your browser to:
+
+  http://www.astro.caltech.edu/~mcs/tecla/index.html
+
+The tecla library provides UNIX and LINUX programs with interactive
+command line editing facilities, similar to those of the unix tcsh
+shell. In addition to simple command-line editing, it supports recall
+of previously entered command lines, TAB completion of file names, and
+in-line wild-card expansion of filenames.  The internal functions
+which perform file-name completion and wild-card expansion are also
+available externally for optional use by programs, along with a module
+for tab-completion and lookup of filenames in a list of directories.
+
+Note that special care has been taken to allow the use of this library
+in threaded programs. The option to enable this is discussed in the
+Makefile, and specific discussions of thread safety are presented in
+the included man pages.
+
+For instructions on how to compile and install the library, please see
+the INSTALL file, which should be in the same directory as this file.
+
+Copyright and Disclaimer
+------------------------
+Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+
+All rights reserved.
+
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+
+Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+of the copyright holder.
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/RELEASE.NOTES b/libtecla-1.4.1/RELEASE.NOTES
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b18a4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/RELEASE.NOTES
@@ -0,0 +1,357 @@
+This file lists major changes which accompany each new release.
+
+Version 1.4.1:
+
+  This is a maintenance release. It includes minor changes to support
+  Mac OS X (Darwin), the QNX real-time operating system, and Cygwin
+  under Windows. It also fixes an oversight that was preventing the
+  tab key from inserting tab characters when users unbound the
+  complete-word action from it.
+
+Version 1.4.0:
+
+  The contents of the history list can now be saved and restored with
+  the new gl_save_history() and gl_load_history() functions.
+
+  Event handlers can now be registered to watch for and respond to I/O
+  on arbitrary file descriptors while gl_get_line() is waiting for
+  terminal input from the user. See the gl_get_line(3) man page
+  for details on gl_watch_fd().
+
+  As an optional alternative to getting configuration information only
+  from ~/.teclarc, the new gl_configure_getline() function allows
+  configuration commands to be taken from any of, a string, a
+  specified application-specific file, and/or a specified
+  user-specific file. See the gl_get_line(3) man page for details.
+
+  The version number of the library can now be queried using the
+  libtecla_version() function. See the libtecla(3) man page.
+
+  The new gl_group_history() function allows applications to group
+  different types of input line in the history buffer, and arrange for
+  only members of the appropriate group to be recalled on a given call
+  to gl_get_line(). See the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  The new gl_show_history() function displays the current history list
+  to a given stdio output stream. See the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  new_GetLine() now allows you to specify a history buffer size of
+  zero, thus requesting that no history buffer be allocated. You can
+  subsequently resize or delete the history buffer at any time, by
+  calling gl_resize_history(), limit the number of lines that are
+  allowed in the buffer by calling gl_limit_history(), clear either
+  all history lines from the history list, or just the history lines
+  that are associated with the current history group, by calling
+  gl_clear_history, and toggle the history mechanism on and off by
+  calling gl_toggle_history().
+
+  The new gl_terminal_size() function can be used to query the
+  current terminal size. It can also be used to supply a default
+  terminal size on systems where no mechanism is available for
+  looking up the size.
+
+  The contents and configuration of the history list can now be
+  obtained by the calling application, by calling the new
+  gl_lookup_history(), gl_state_of_history(), gl_range_of_history()
+  and gl_size_of_history() functions. See the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  Echoing of the input line as it is typed, can now be turned on and
+  off via the new gl_echo_mode() function. While echoing is disabled,
+  newly entered input lines are omitted from the history list.  See
+  the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  While the default remains to display the prompt string literally,
+  the new gl_prompt_style() function can be used to enable text
+  attribute formatting directives in prompt strings, such as
+  underlining, bold font, and highlighting directives.
+
+  Signal handling in gl_get_line() is now customizable. The default
+  signal handling behavior remains essentially the same, except that
+  the SIGTSTP, SIGTTIN and SIGTTOU are now forwarded to the
+  corresponding signal handler of the calling program, instead of
+  causing a SIGSTOP to be sent to the application.  It is now possible
+  to remove signals from the list that are trapped by gl_get_line(),
+  as well as add new signals to this list. The signal and terminal
+  environments in which the signal handler of the calling program is
+  invoked, and what gl_get_line() does after the signal handler
+  returns, is now customizable on a per signal basis. You can now also
+  query the last signal that was caught by gl_get_line(). This is
+  useful when gl_get_line() aborts with errno=EINTR, and you need to
+  know which signal caused it to abort.
+
+  Key-sequences bound to action functions can now start with printable
+  characters. Previously only keysequences starting with control or
+  meta characters were permitted.
+
+  gl_get_line() is now 8-bit clean. If the calling program has
+  correctly called setlocale(LC_CTYPE,""), then the user can select an
+  alternate locale by setting the standard LC_CTYPE, LC_ALL, or LANG
+  environment variables, and international characters can then be
+  entered directly, either by using a non-US keyboard, or by using a
+  compose key on a standard US keyboard. Note that in locales in which
+  meta characters become printable, meta characters no longer match
+  M-c bindings, which then have to be entered using their escape-c
+  equivalents.  Fortunately most modern terminal emulators either
+  output the escape-c version by default when the meta key is used, or
+  can be configured to do so (see the gl_get_line(3) man page), so in
+  most cases you can continue to use the meta key.
+
+  Completion callback functions can now tell gl_get_line() to return
+  the input line immediately after a successful tab completion, simply
+  by setting the last character of the optional continuation suffix to
+  a newline character (ie. in the call to cpl_add_completion()).
+
+  It is now safe to create and use multiple GetLine objects, albeit
+  still only from a single thread. In conjunction with the new
+  gl_configure_getline() function, this optionally allows multiple
+  GetLine objects with different bindings to be used to implement
+  different input modes.
+
+  The edit-mode configuration command now accepts the argument,
+  none. This tells gl_get_line() to revert to using just the native
+  line editing facilities provided by the terminal driver. This could
+  be used if the termcap or terminfo entry of the host terminal were
+  badly corrupted.
+
+  Application callback functions invoked by gl_get_line() can now
+  change the displayed prompt using the gl_replace_prompt() function.
+
+  Their is now an optional program distributed with the library. This
+  is a beta release of a program which adds tecla command-line editing
+  to virtually any third party application without the application
+  needing to be linked to the library. See the enhance(3) man page for
+  further details. Although built and installed by default, the
+  INSTALL document explains how to prevent this.
+
+  The INSTALL document now explains how you can stop the demo programs
+  from being built and installed.
+
+  NetBSD/termcap fixes. Mike MacFaden reported two problems that he
+  saw when compiling libtecla under NetBSD. Both cases were related to
+  the use of termcap.  Most systems use terminfo, so this problem has
+  gone unnoticed until now, and won't have affected the grand majority
+  of users.  The configure script had a bug which prevented the check
+  for CPP working properly, and getline.c wouldn't compile due to an
+  undeclared variable when USE_TERMCAP was defined. Both problems have
+  now been fixed. Note that if you successfully compiled version
+  1.3.3, this problem didn't affect you.
+
+  An unfortunate and undocumented binding of the key-sequence M-O was
+  shadowing the arrow-key bindings on systems that use ^[OA etc. I
+  have removed this binding (the documented lower case M-o binding
+  remains bound). Under the KDE konsole terminal this was causing the
+  arrow keys to do something other than expected.
+
+  There was a bug in the history list code which could result in
+  strange entries appearing at the start of the history list once
+  enough history lines had been added to the list to cause the
+  circular history buffer to wrap. This is now fixed.
+ 
+Version 1.3.3:
+
+  Signal handling has been re-written, and documentation of its
+  behaviour has been added to the gl_get_line(3) man page. In addition
+  to eliminating race conditions, and appropriately setting errno for
+  those signals that abort gl_get_line(), many more signals are now
+  intercepted, making it less likely that the terminal will be left in
+  raw mode by a signal that isn't trapped by gl_get_line().
+
+  A bug was also fixed that was leaving the terminal in raw mode if
+  the editing mode was changed interactively between vi and emacs.
+  This was only noticeable when running programs from old shells that
+  don't reset terminal modes.
+
+Version 1.3.2:
+
+  Tim Eliseo contributed a number of improvements to vi mode,
+  including a fuller set of vi key-bindings, implementation of the vi
+  constraint that the cursor can't backup past the point at which
+  input mode was entered, and restoration of overwritten characters
+  when backspacing in overwrite mode. There are also now new bindings
+  to allow users to toggle between vi and emacs modes interactively.
+  The terminal bell is now used in some circumstances, such as when an
+  unrecognized key sequence is entered. This can be turned off by the
+  new nobeep option in the tecla configuration file.
+
+  Unrelated to the above, a problem under Linux which prevented ^Q
+  from being used to resume terminal output after the user had pressed
+  ^S, has been fixed.
+
+Version 1.3.1:
+
+  In vi mode a bug was preventing the history-search-backward and
+  history-search-forward actions from doing anything when invoked on
+  empty lines. On empty lines they now act like up-history and
+  down-history respectively, as in emacs mode.
+
+  When creating shared libraries under Linux, the -soname directive
+  was being used incorrectly. The result is that Linux binaries linked
+  with the 1.2.3, 1.2.4 and 1.3.0 versions of the tecla shared
+  libraries, will refuse to see other versions of the shared library
+  until relinked with version 1.3.1 or higher.
+
+  The configure script can now handle the fact that under Solaris-2.6
+  and earlier, the only curses library is a static one that hides in
+  /usr/ccs/lib. Under Linux it now also caters for old versions of GNU
+  ld which don't accept version scripts.
+
+  The demos are now linked against the shared version of the library
+  if possible. Previously they were always linked with the static
+  version.
+
+Version 1.3.0:
+
+  The major change in this release is the addition of an optional vi
+  command-line editing mode in gl_get_line(), along with lots of new
+  action functions to support its bindings. To enable this, first
+  create a ~/.teclarc file if you don't already have one, then add the
+  following line to it.
+
+   edit-mode vi
+
+  The default vi bindings, which are designed to mimic those of the vi
+  editor as closely as possible, are described in the gl_get_line(3)
+  man page.
+
+  A new convenience function called ef_list_expansions() has been
+  added for listing filename expansions. See the ef_list_expansions(3)
+  man page for details. This is used in a new list-glob binding, bound
+  to ^Xg in emacs mode, and ^G in vi input mode.
+
+  A bug has been fixed in the key-binding table expansion code. This
+  bug would have caused problems to anybody who defined more than
+  about 18 personalized key-bindings in their ~/.teclarc file.
+
+Version 1.2.4:
+
+  Buffered I/O is now used for writing to terminals, and where
+  supported, cursor motion is done with move-n-positions terminfo
+  capabilities instead of doing lots of move-1-position requests. This
+  greatly improves how the library feels over slow links.
+
+  You can now optionally compile different architectures in different
+  directories, without having to make multiple copies of the
+  distribution. This is documented in the INSTALL file.
+
+  The ksh ~+ directive is now supported.
+
+  Thanks to Markus Gyger for the above improvements.
+
+  Documentation has been added to the INSTALL file describing features
+  designed to facilitate configuration and installation of the library
+  as part of larger packages. These features are intended to remove
+  the need to modify the tecla distribution's configuration and build
+  procedures when embedding the libtecla distribution in other package
+  distributions.
+
+  A previous fix to stop the cursor from warping when the last
+  character of the input line was in the last column of the terminal,
+  was only being used for the first terminal line of the input line.
+  It is now used for all subsequent lines as well, as originally
+  intended.
+  
+Version 1.2.3:
+
+  The installation procedure has been better automated with the
+  addition of an autoconf configure script. This means that installers
+  can now compile and install the library by typing:
+
+    ./configure
+    make
+    make install
+
+  On all systems this makes at least the normal static version of the
+  tecla library. It also makes the reentrant version if reentrant
+  POSIX functions are detected.  Under Solaris, Linux and HP-UX the
+  configuration script arranges for shared libraries to be compiled in
+  addition to the static libraries.  It is hoped that installers will
+  return information about how to compile shared libraries on other
+  systems, for inclusion in future releases, and to this end, a new
+  PORTING guide has been provided.
+
+  The versioning number scheme has been changed. This release would
+  have been 1.2c, but instead will be refered to as 1.2.3. The
+  versioning scheme, based on conventions used by Sun Microsystems, is
+  described in configure.in.
+
+  The library was also tested under HP-UX, and this revealed two
+  serious bugs, both of which have now been fixed.
+  
+  The first bug prevented the library from writing control codes to
+  terminals on big-endian machines, with the exception of those
+  running under Solaris. This was due to an int variable being used
+  where a char was needed.
+
+  The second bug had the symptom that on systems that don't use the
+  newline character as the control code for moving the cursor down a
+  line, a newline wasn't started when the user hit enter.
+
+Version 1.2b:
+
+  Two more minor bug fixes:
+
+  Many terminals don't wrap the cursor to the next line when a
+  character is written to the rightmost terminal column. Instead, they
+  delay starting a new line until one more character is written, at
+  which point they move the cursor two positions.  gl_get_line()
+  wasn't aware of this, so cursor repositionings just after writing
+  the last character of a column, caused it to erroneously go up a
+  line. This has now been remedied, using a method that should work
+  regardless of whether a terminal exhibits this behavior or not.
+
+  Some systems dynamically record the current terminal dimensions in
+  environment variables called LINES and COLUMNS. On such systems,
+  during the initial terminal setup, these values should override the
+  static values read from the terminal information databases, and now
+  do.  Previously they were only used if the dimensions returned by
+  terminfo/termcap looked bogus.
+
+Version 1.2a:
+
+  This minor release fixes the following two bugs:
+
+  The initial terminal size and subsequent changes thereto, weren't
+  being noticed by gl_get_line(). This was because the test for the
+  existence of TIOCWINSZ was erroneously placed before the inclusion
+  of termios.h. One of the results was that on input lines that
+  spanned more than one terminal line, the cursor occasionally jumped
+  unexpectedly to the previous terminal line.
+
+  On entering a line that wrapped over multiple terminal lines,
+  gl_get_line() simply output a carriage-return line-feed at the point
+  at which the user pressed return. Thus if one typed in such a line,
+  then moved back onto one of the earlier terminal lines before
+  hitting return, the cursor was left on a line containing part of the
+  line that had just been entered. This didn't do any harm, but it
+  looked a mess.
+
+Version 1.2:
+
+  A new facility for looking up and completing filenames in UNIX-style
+  paths has now been added (eg. you can search for, or complete
+  commands using the UNIX PATH environment variable). See the
+  pca_lookup_file(3) man page.
+
+  The already existing filename completion callback can now be made
+  selective in what types of files it lists. See the
+  cpl_complete_word(3) man page.
+
+  Due to its potential to break applications when changed, the use of
+  the publically defined CplFileArgs structure to configure the
+  cpl_file_completions() callback is now deprecated.  The definition
+  of this structure has been frozen, and its documentation has been
+  removed from the man pages.  It will remain supported, but if you
+  have used it, you are recommended to switch to the new method, which
+  involves a new opaque configuration object, allocated via a provided
+  constructor function, configured via accessor functions, and
+  eventually deleted with a provided destructor function. The
+  cpl_file_completions() callback distinguishes which structure type
+  it has been sent by virtue of a code placed at the start of the new
+  structure by the constructor.  It is assumed that no existing
+  applications set the boolean 'escaped' member of the CplFileArgs
+  structure to 4568.  The new method is documented in the
+  cpl_complete_word(3) man page.
+
+Version 1.1j
+
+  This was the initial public release on freshmeat.org.
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/config.guess b/libtecla-1.4.1/config.guess
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ce538b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/config.guess
@@ -0,0 +1,1183 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Attempt to guess a canonical system name.
+#   Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000
+#   Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+# General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+#
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# Written by Per Bothner <bothner@cygnus.com>.
+# Please send patches to <config-patches@gnu.org>.
+#
+# This script attempts to guess a canonical system name similar to
+# config.sub.  If it succeeds, it prints the system name on stdout, and
+# exits with 0.  Otherwise, it exits with 1.
+#
+# The plan is that this can be called by configure scripts if you
+# don't specify an explicit system type (host/target name).
+#
+# Only a few systems have been added to this list; please add others
+# (but try to keep the structure clean).
+#
+
+# Use $HOST_CC if defined. $CC may point to a cross-compiler
+if test x"$CC_FOR_BUILD" = x; then
+  if test x"$HOST_CC" != x; then
+    CC_FOR_BUILD="$HOST_CC"
+  else
+    if test x"$CC" != x; then
+      CC_FOR_BUILD="$CC"
+    else
+      CC_FOR_BUILD=cc
+    fi
+  fi
+fi
+
+
+# This is needed to find uname on a Pyramid OSx when run in the BSD universe.
+# (ghazi@noc.rutgers.edu 8/24/94.)
+if (test -f /.attbin/uname) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
+	PATH=$PATH:/.attbin ; export PATH
+fi
+
+UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -m) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_MACHINE=unknown
+UNAME_RELEASE=`(uname -r) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_RELEASE=unknown
+UNAME_SYSTEM=`(uname -s) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_SYSTEM=unknown
+UNAME_VERSION=`(uname -v) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_VERSION=unknown
+
+dummy=dummy-$$
+trap 'rm -f $dummy.c $dummy.o $dummy; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# Note: order is significant - the case branches are not exclusive.
+
+case "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" in
+    *:NetBSD:*:*)
+	# Netbsd (nbsd) targets should (where applicable) match one or
+	# more of the tupples: *-*-netbsdelf*, *-*-netbsdaout*,
+	# *-*-netbsdecoff* and *-*-netbsd*.  For targets that recently
+	# switched to ELF, *-*-netbsd* would select the old
+	# object file format.  This provides both forward
+	# compatibility and a consistent mechanism for selecting the
+	# object file format.
+	# Determine the machine/vendor (is the vendor relevant).
+	case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in
+	    amiga) machine=m68k-cbm ;;
+	    arm32) machine=arm-unknown ;;
+	    atari*) machine=m68k-atari ;;
+	    sun3*) machine=m68k-sun ;;
+	    mac68k) machine=m68k-apple ;;
+	    macppc) machine=powerpc-apple ;;
+	    hp3[0-9][05]) machine=m68k-hp ;;
+	    ibmrt|romp-ibm) machine=romp-ibm ;;
+	    *) machine=${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown ;;
+	esac
+	# The Operating System including object format.
+	if echo __ELF__ | $CC_FOR_BUILD -E - 2>/dev/null \
+		| grep __ELF__ >/dev/null
+	then
+	    # Once all utilities can be ECOFF (netbsdecoff) or a.out (netbsdaout).
+	    # Return netbsd for either.  FIX?
+	    os=netbsd
+	else
+	    os=netbsdelf
+	fi
+	# The OS release
+	release=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'`
+	# Since CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM:
+	# contains redundant information, the shorter form:
+	# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM is used.
+	echo "${machine}-${os}${release}"
+	exit 0 ;;
+    alpha:OSF1:*:*)
+	if test $UNAME_RELEASE = "V4.0"; then
+		UNAME_RELEASE=`/usr/sbin/sizer -v | awk '{print $3}'`
+	fi
+	# A Vn.n version is a released version.
+	# A Tn.n version is a released field test version.
+	# A Xn.n version is an unreleased experimental baselevel.
+	# 1.2 uses "1.2" for uname -r.
+	cat <<EOF >$dummy.s
+	.data
+\$Lformat:
+	.byte 37,100,45,37,120,10,0	# "%d-%x\n"
+
+	.text
+	.globl main
+	.align 4
+	.ent main
+main:
+	.frame \$30,16,\$26,0
+	ldgp \$29,0(\$27)
+	.prologue 1
+	.long 0x47e03d80 # implver \$0
+	lda \$2,-1
+	.long 0x47e20c21 # amask \$2,\$1
+	lda \$16,\$Lformat
+	mov \$0,\$17
+	not \$1,\$18
+	jsr \$26,printf
+	ldgp \$29,0(\$26)
+	mov 0,\$16
+	jsr \$26,exit
+	.end main
+EOF
+	$CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.s -o $dummy 2>/dev/null
+	if test "$?" = 0 ; then
+		case `./$dummy` in
+			0-0)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alpha"
+				;;
+			1-0)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev5"
+				;;
+			1-1)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev56"
+				;;
+			1-101)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphapca56"
+				;;
+			2-303)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev6"
+				;;
+			2-307)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev67"
+				;;
+		esac
+	fi
+	rm -f $dummy.s $dummy
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-dec-osf`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/^[VTX]//' | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Alpha\ *:Windows_NT*:*)
+	# How do we know it's Interix rather than the generic POSIX subsystem?
+	# Should we change UNAME_MACHINE based on the output of uname instead
+	# of the specific Alpha model?
+	echo alpha-pc-interix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    21064:Windows_NT:50:3)
+	echo alpha-dec-winnt3.5
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Amiga*:UNIX_System_V:4.0:*)
+	echo m68k-cbm-sysv4
+	exit 0;;
+    amiga:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:[Aa]miga[Oo][Ss]:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-amigaos
+	exit 0 ;;
+    arc64:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mips64el-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    arc:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hkmips:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    pmax:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sgi:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    wgrisc:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:OS/390:*:*)
+	echo i370-ibm-openedition
+	exit 0 ;;
+    arm:RISC*:1.[012]*:*|arm:riscix:1.[012]*:*)
+	echo arm-acorn-riscix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0;;
+    SR2?01:HI-UX/MPP:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxmpp
+	exit 0;;
+    Pyramid*:OSx*:*:* | MIS*:OSx*:*:* | MIS*:SMP_DC-OSx*:*:*)
+	# akee@wpdis03.wpafb.af.mil (Earle F. Ake) contributed MIS and NILE.
+	if test "`(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null`" = att ; then
+		echo pyramid-pyramid-sysv3
+	else
+		echo pyramid-pyramid-bsd
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    NILE*:*:*:dcosx)
+	echo pyramid-pyramid-svr4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun4H:SunOS:5.*:*)
+	echo sparc-hal-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun4*:SunOS:5.*:* | tadpole*:SunOS:5.*:*)
+	echo sparc-sun-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i86pc:SunOS:5.*:*)
+	echo i386-pc-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun4*:SunOS:6*:*)
+	# According to config.sub, this is the proper way to canonicalize
+	# SunOS6.  Hard to guess exactly what SunOS6 will be like, but
+	# it's likely to be more like Solaris than SunOS4.
+	echo sparc-sun-solaris3`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun4*:SunOS:*:*)
+	case "`/usr/bin/arch -k`" in
+	    Series*|S4*)
+		UNAME_RELEASE=`uname -v`
+		;;
+	esac
+	# Japanese Language versions have a version number like `4.1.3-JL'.
+	echo sparc-sun-sunos`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun3*:SunOS:*:*)
+	echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun*:*:4.2BSD:*)
+	UNAME_RELEASE=`(head -1 /etc/motd | awk '{print substr($5,1,3)}') 2>/dev/null`
+	test "x${UNAME_RELEASE}" = "x" && UNAME_RELEASE=3
+	case "`/bin/arch`" in
+	    sun3)
+		echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+		;;
+	    sun4)
+		echo sparc-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+		;;
+	esac
+	exit 0 ;;
+    aushp:SunOS:*:*)
+	echo sparc-auspex-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    atari*:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    # The situation for MiNT is a little confusing.  The machine name
+    # can be virtually everything (everything which is not
+    # "atarist" or "atariste" at least should have a processor
+    # > m68000).  The system name ranges from "MiNT" over "FreeMiNT"
+    # to the lowercase version "mint" (or "freemint").  Finally
+    # the system name "TOS" denotes a system which is actually not
+    # MiNT.  But MiNT is downward compatible to TOS, so this should
+    # be no problem.
+    atarist[e]:*MiNT:*:* | atarist[e]:*mint:*:* | atarist[e]:*TOS:*:*)
+        echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    atari*:*MiNT:*:* | atari*:*mint:*:* | atarist[e]:*TOS:*:*)
+	echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
+        exit 0 ;;
+    *falcon*:*MiNT:*:* | *falcon*:*mint:*:* | *falcon*:*TOS:*:*)
+        echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    milan*:*MiNT:*:* | milan*:*mint:*:* | *milan*:*TOS:*:*)
+        echo m68k-milan-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
+        exit 0 ;;
+    hades*:*MiNT:*:* | hades*:*mint:*:* | *hades*:*TOS:*:*)
+        echo m68k-hades-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
+        exit 0 ;;
+    *:*MiNT:*:* | *:*mint:*:* | *:*TOS:*:*)
+        echo m68k-unknown-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
+        exit 0 ;;
+    sun3*:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mac68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mvme68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mvme88k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m88k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    powerpc:machten:*:*)
+	echo powerpc-apple-machten${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    RISC*:Mach:*:*)
+	echo mips-dec-mach_bsd4.3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    RISC*:ULTRIX:*:*)
+	echo mips-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    VAX*:ULTRIX*:*:*)
+	echo vax-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    2020:CLIX:*:* | 2430:CLIX:*:*)
+	echo clipper-intergraph-clix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mips:*:*:UMIPS | mips:*:*:RISCos)
+	sed 's/^	//' << EOF >$dummy.c
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+#include <stdio.h>  /* for printf() prototype */
+	int main (int argc, char *argv[]) {
+#else
+	int main (argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; {
+#endif
+	#if defined (host_mips) && defined (MIPSEB)
+	#if defined (SYSTYPE_SYSV)
+	  printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssysv\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+	#endif
+	#if defined (SYSTYPE_SVR4)
+	  printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssvr4\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+	#endif
+	#if defined (SYSTYPE_BSD43) || defined(SYSTYPE_BSD)
+	  printf ("mips-mips-riscos%sbsd\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+	#endif
+	#endif
+	  exit (-1);
+	}
+EOF
+	$CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy \
+	  && ./$dummy `echo "${UNAME_RELEASE}" | sed -n 's/\([0-9]*\).*/\1/p'` \
+	  && rm $dummy.c $dummy && exit 0
+	rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+	echo mips-mips-riscos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Night_Hawk:Power_UNIX:*:*)
+	echo powerpc-harris-powerunix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    m88k:CX/UX:7*:*)
+	echo m88k-harris-cxux7
+	exit 0 ;;
+    m88k:*:4*:R4*)
+	echo m88k-motorola-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    m88k:*:3*:R3*)
+	echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    AViiON:dgux:*:*)
+        # DG/UX returns AViiON for all architectures
+        UNAME_PROCESSOR=`/usr/bin/uname -p`
+	if [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88100 ] || [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88110 ]
+	then
+	    if [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = m88kdguxelfx ] || \
+	       [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = x ]
+	    then
+		echo m88k-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	    else
+		echo m88k-dg-dguxbcs${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	    fi
+	else
+	    echo i586-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+ 	exit 0 ;;
+    M88*:DolphinOS:*:*)	# DolphinOS (SVR3)
+	echo m88k-dolphin-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    M88*:*:R3*:*)
+	# Delta 88k system running SVR3
+	echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    XD88*:*:*:*) # Tektronix XD88 system running UTekV (SVR3)
+	echo m88k-tektronix-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Tek43[0-9][0-9]:UTek:*:*) # Tektronix 4300 system running UTek (BSD)
+	echo m68k-tektronix-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:IRIX*:*:*)
+	echo mips-sgi-irix`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/g'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    ????????:AIX?:[12].1:2)   # AIX 2.2.1 or AIX 2.1.1 is RT/PC AIX.
+	echo romp-ibm-aix      # uname -m gives an 8 hex-code CPU id
+	exit 0 ;;              # Note that: echo "'`uname -s`'" gives 'AIX '
+    i?86:AIX:*:*)
+	echo i386-ibm-aix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:AIX:2:3)
+	if grep bos325 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+		sed 's/^		//' << EOF >$dummy.c
+		#include <sys/systemcfg.h>
+
+		main()
+			{
+			if (!__power_pc())
+				exit(1);
+			puts("powerpc-ibm-aix3.2.5");
+			exit(0);
+			}
+EOF
+		$CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy && ./$dummy && rm $dummy.c $dummy && exit 0
+		rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+		echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.5
+	elif grep bos324 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+		echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.4
+	else
+		echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:AIX:*:4)
+	IBM_CPU_ID=`/usr/sbin/lsdev -C -c processor -S available | head -1 | awk '{ print $1 }'`
+	if /usr/sbin/lsattr -EHl ${IBM_CPU_ID} | grep POWER >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+		IBM_ARCH=rs6000
+	else
+		IBM_ARCH=powerpc
+	fi
+	if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then
+		IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel`
+	else
+		IBM_REV=4.${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+	echo ${IBM_ARCH}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:AIX:*:*)
+	echo rs6000-ibm-aix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    ibmrt:4.4BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*)
+	echo romp-ibm-bsd4.4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    ibmrt:*BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*)            # covers RT/PC BSD and
+	echo romp-ibm-bsd${UNAME_RELEASE}   # 4.3 with uname added to
+	exit 0 ;;                           # report: romp-ibm BSD 4.3
+    *:BOSX:*:*)
+	echo rs6000-bull-bosx
+	exit 0 ;;
+    DPX/2?00:B.O.S.:*:*)
+	echo m68k-bull-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:1.*:*)
+	echo m68k-hp-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hp300:4.4BSD:*:* | 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:2.*:*)
+	echo m68k-hp-bsd4.4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/[34678]??:HP-UX:*:*)
+	case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in
+	    9000/31? )            HP_ARCH=m68000 ;;
+	    9000/[34]?? )         HP_ARCH=m68k ;;
+	    9000/[678][0-9][0-9])
+              sed 's/^              //' << EOF >$dummy.c
+
+              #define _HPUX_SOURCE
+              #include <stdlib.h>
+              #include <unistd.h>
+
+              int main ()
+              {
+              #if defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS)
+                  long bits = sysconf(_SC_KERNEL_BITS);
+              #endif
+                  long cpu  = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION);
+
+                  switch (cpu)
+              	{
+              	case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0"); break;
+              	case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1"); break;
+              	case CPU_PA_RISC2_0:
+              #if defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS)
+              	    switch (bits)
+              		{
+              		case 64: puts ("hppa2.0w"); break;
+              		case 32: puts ("hppa2.0n"); break;
+              		default: puts ("hppa2.0"); break;
+              		} break;
+              #else  /* !defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS) */
+              	    puts ("hppa2.0"); break;
+              #endif
+              	default: puts ("hppa1.0"); break;
+              	}
+                  exit (0);
+              }
+EOF
+	(CCOPTS= $CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy 2>/dev/null ) && HP_ARCH=`./$dummy`
+	rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+	esac
+	HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'`
+	echo ${HP_ARCH}-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    3050*:HI-UX:*:*)
+	sed 's/^	//' << EOF >$dummy.c
+	#include <unistd.h>
+	int
+	main ()
+	{
+	  long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION);
+	  /* The order matters, because CPU_IS_HP_MC68K erroneously returns
+	     true for CPU_PA_RISC1_0.  CPU_IS_PA_RISC returns correct
+	     results, however.  */
+	  if (CPU_IS_PA_RISC (cpu))
+	    {
+	      switch (cpu)
+		{
+		  case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		  case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		  case CPU_PA_RISC2_0: puts ("hppa2.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		  default: puts ("hppa-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		}
+	    }
+	  else if (CPU_IS_HP_MC68K (cpu))
+	    puts ("m68k-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
+	  else puts ("unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
+	  exit (0);
+	}
+EOF
+	$CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy && ./$dummy && rm $dummy.c $dummy && exit 0
+	rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+	echo unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/7??:4.3bsd:*:* | 9000/8?[79]:4.3bsd:*:* )
+	echo hppa1.1-hp-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/8??:4.3bsd:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.0-hp-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *9??*:MPE/iX:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.0-hp-mpeix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hp7??:OSF1:*:* | hp8?[79]:OSF1:*:* )
+	echo hppa1.1-hp-osf
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hp8??:OSF1:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.0-hp-osf
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:OSF1:*:*)
+	if [ -x /usr/sbin/sysversion ] ; then
+	    echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1mk
+	else
+	    echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    parisc*:Lites*:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.1-hp-lites
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hppa*:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo hppa-unknown-openbsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    C1*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C1*:*)
+	echo c1-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C2*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C2*:*)
+	if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
+	then echo c32-convex-bsd
+	else echo c2-convex-bsd
+	fi
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C34*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C34*:*)
+	echo c34-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C38*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C38*:*)
+	echo c38-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C4*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C4*:*)
+	echo c4-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*X-MP:*:*:*)
+	echo xmp-cray-unicos
+        exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*Y-MP:*:*:*)
+	echo ymp-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*[A-Z]90:*:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} \
+	| sed -e 's/CRAY.*\([A-Z]90\)/\1/' \
+	      -e y/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*TS:*:*:*)
+	echo t90-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*T3E:*:*:*)
+	echo alpha-cray-unicosmk${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*SV1:*:*:*)
+	echo sv1-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY-2:*:*:*)
+	echo cray2-cray-unicos
+        exit 0 ;;
+    F300:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
+        FUJITSU_SYS=`uname -p | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' | sed -e 's/\///'`
+        FUJITSU_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/ /_/'`
+        echo "f300-fujitsu-${FUJITSU_SYS}${FUJITSU_REL}"
+        exit 0 ;;
+    F301:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
+       echo f301-fujitsu-uxpv`echo $UNAME_RELEASE | sed 's/ .*//'`
+       exit 0 ;;
+    hp300:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:BSD/386:*:* | i?86:BSD/OS:*:* | *:Ascend\ Embedded/OS:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sparc*:BSD/OS:*:*)
+	echo sparc-unknown-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:BSD/OS:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:FreeBSD:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-openbsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i*:CYGWIN*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-cygwin
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i*:MINGW*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-mingw32
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i*:Windows_NT*:* | Pentium*:Windows_NT*:*)
+	# How do we know it's Interix rather than the generic POSIX subsystem?
+	# It also conflicts with pre-2.0 versions of AT&T UWIN. Should we
+	# UNAME_MACHINE based on the output of uname instead of i386?
+	echo i386-pc-interix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i*:UWIN*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-uwin
+	exit 0 ;;
+    p*:CYGWIN*:*)
+	echo powerpcle-unknown-cygwin
+	exit 0 ;;
+    prep*:SunOS:5.*:*)
+	echo powerpcle-unknown-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:GNU:*:*)
+	echo `echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}|sed -e 's,[-/].*$,,'`-unknown-gnu`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's,/.*$,,'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:Linux:*:*)
+
+	# The BFD linker knows what the default object file format is, so
+	# first see if it will tell us. cd to the root directory to prevent
+	# problems with other programs or directories called `ld' in the path.
+	ld_help_string=`cd /; ld --help 2>&1`
+	ld_supported_emulations=`echo $ld_help_string \
+			 | sed -ne '/supported emulations:/!d
+				    s/[ 	][ 	]*/ /g
+				    s/.*supported emulations: *//
+				    s/ .*//
+				    p'`
+        case "$ld_supported_emulations" in
+	  *ia64)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  i?86linux)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuaout"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  elf_i?86)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  i?86coff)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnucoff"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  sparclinux)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnuaout"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  armlinux)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnuaout"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  elf32arm*)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnuoldld"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  armelf_linux*)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  m68klinux)
+		echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnuaout"
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	  elf32ppc | elf32ppclinux)
+		# Determine Lib Version
+		cat >$dummy.c <<EOF
+#include <features.h>
+#if defined(__GLIBC__)
+extern char __libc_version[];
+extern char __libc_release[];
+#endif
+main(argc, argv)
+     int argc;
+     char *argv[];
+{
+#if defined(__GLIBC__)
+  printf("%s %s\n", __libc_version, __libc_release);
+#else
+  printf("unkown\n");
+#endif
+  return 0;
+}
+EOF
+		LIBC=""
+		$CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy 2>/dev/null
+		if test "$?" = 0 ; then
+			./$dummy | grep 1\.99 > /dev/null
+			if test "$?" = 0 ; then
+				LIBC="libc1"
+			fi
+		fi
+		rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+		echo powerpc-unknown-linux-gnu${LIBC}
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	esac
+
+	if test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "alpha" ; then
+		cat <<EOF >$dummy.s
+			.data
+		\$Lformat:
+			.byte 37,100,45,37,120,10,0	# "%d-%x\n"
+
+			.text
+			.globl main
+			.align 4
+			.ent main
+		main:
+			.frame \$30,16,\$26,0
+			ldgp \$29,0(\$27)
+			.prologue 1
+			.long 0x47e03d80 # implver \$0
+			lda \$2,-1
+			.long 0x47e20c21 # amask \$2,\$1
+			lda \$16,\$Lformat
+			mov \$0,\$17
+			not \$1,\$18
+			jsr \$26,printf
+			ldgp \$29,0(\$26)
+			mov 0,\$16
+			jsr \$26,exit
+			.end main
+EOF
+		LIBC=""
+		$CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.s -o $dummy 2>/dev/null
+		if test "$?" = 0 ; then
+			case `./$dummy` in
+			0-0)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alpha"
+				;;
+			1-0)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev5"
+				;;
+			1-1)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev56"
+				;;
+			1-101)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphapca56"
+				;;
+			2-303)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev6"
+				;;
+			2-307)
+				UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev67"
+				;;
+			esac
+
+			objdump --private-headers $dummy | \
+			  grep ld.so.1 > /dev/null
+			if test "$?" = 0 ; then
+				LIBC="libc1"
+			fi
+		fi
+		rm -f $dummy.s $dummy
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu${LIBC} ; exit 0
+	elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "mips" ; then
+	  cat >$dummy.c <<EOF
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+#include <stdio.h>  /* for printf() prototype */
+	int main (int argc, char *argv[]) {
+#else
+	int main (argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; {
+#endif
+#ifdef __MIPSEB__
+  printf ("%s-unknown-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+#ifdef __MIPSEL__
+  printf ("%sel-unknown-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+  return 0;
+}
+EOF
+	  $CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy 2>/dev/null && ./$dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm $dummy.c $dummy && exit 0
+	  rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+	elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "s390"; then
+	  echo s390-ibm-linux && exit 0
+	else
+	  # Either a pre-BFD a.out linker (linux-gnuoldld)
+	  # or one that does not give us useful --help.
+	  # GCC wants to distinguish between linux-gnuoldld and linux-gnuaout.
+	  # If ld does not provide *any* "supported emulations:"
+	  # that means it is gnuoldld.
+	  echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations:"
+	  test $? != 0 && echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuoldld" && exit 0
+
+	  case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in
+	  i?86)
+	    VENDOR=pc;
+	    ;;
+	  *)
+	    VENDOR=unknown;
+	    ;;
+	  esac
+	  # Determine whether the default compiler is a.out or elf
+	  cat >$dummy.c <<EOF
+#include <features.h>
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+#include <stdio.h>  /* for printf() prototype */
+	int main (int argc, char *argv[]) {
+#else
+	int main (argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; {
+#endif
+#ifdef __ELF__
+# ifdef __GLIBC__
+#  if __GLIBC__ >= 2
+    printf ("%s-${VENDOR}-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#  else
+    printf ("%s-${VENDOR}-linux-gnulibc1\n", argv[1]);
+#  endif
+# else
+   printf ("%s-${VENDOR}-linux-gnulibc1\n", argv[1]);
+# endif
+#else
+  printf ("%s-${VENDOR}-linux-gnuaout\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+  return 0;
+}
+EOF
+	  $CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy 2>/dev/null && ./$dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm $dummy.c $dummy && exit 0
+	  rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+	fi ;;
+# ptx 4.0 does uname -s correctly, with DYNIX/ptx in there.  earlier versions
+# are messed up and put the nodename in both sysname and nodename.
+    i?86:DYNIX/ptx:4*:*)
+	echo i386-sequent-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:UNIX_SV:4.2MP:2.*)
+        # Unixware is an offshoot of SVR4, but it has its own version
+        # number series starting with 2...
+        # I am not positive that other SVR4 systems won't match this,
+	# I just have to hope.  -- rms.
+        # Use sysv4.2uw... so that sysv4* matches it.
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv4.2uw${UNAME_VERSION}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:*:4.*:* | i?86:SYSTEM_V:4.*:*)
+	UNAME_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed 's/\/MP$//'`
+	if grep Novell /usr/include/link.h >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-univel-sysv${UNAME_REL}
+	else
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv${UNAME_REL}
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:*:5:7*)
+        # Fixed at (any) Pentium or better
+        UNAME_MACHINE=i586
+        if [ ${UNAME_SYSTEM} = "UnixWare" ] ; then
+	    echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-sco-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}uw${UNAME_VERSION}
+	else
+	    echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:*:3.2:*)
+	if test -f /usr/options/cb.name; then
+		UNAME_REL=`sed -n 's/.*Version //p' </usr/options/cb.name`
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-isc$UNAME_REL
+	elif /bin/uname -X 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
+		UNAME_REL=`(/bin/uname -X|egrep Release|sed -e 's/.*= //')`
+		(/bin/uname -X|egrep i80486 >/dev/null) && UNAME_MACHINE=i486
+		(/bin/uname -X|egrep '^Machine.*Pentium' >/dev/null) \
+			&& UNAME_MACHINE=i586
+		(/bin/uname -X|egrep '^Machine.*Pent ?II' >/dev/null) \
+			&& UNAME_MACHINE=i686
+		(/bin/uname -X|egrep '^Machine.*Pentium Pro' >/dev/null) \
+			&& UNAME_MACHINE=i686
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sco$UNAME_REL
+	else
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv32
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:*DOS:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-msdosdjgpp
+	exit 0 ;;
+    pc:*:*:*)
+	# Left here for compatibility:
+        # uname -m prints for DJGPP always 'pc', but it prints nothing about
+        # the processor, so we play safe by assuming i386.
+	echo i386-pc-msdosdjgpp
+        exit 0 ;;
+    Intel:Mach:3*:*)
+	echo i386-pc-mach3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    paragon:*:*:*)
+	echo i860-intel-osf1
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i860:*:4.*:*) # i860-SVR4
+	if grep Stardent /usr/include/sys/uadmin.h >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
+	  echo i860-stardent-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Stardent Vistra i860-SVR4
+	else # Add other i860-SVR4 vendors below as they are discovered.
+	  echo i860-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}  # Unknown i860-SVR4
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mini*:CTIX:SYS*5:*)
+	# "miniframe"
+	echo m68010-convergent-sysv
+	exit 0 ;;
+    M68*:*:R3V[567]*:*)
+	test -r /sysV68 && echo 'm68k-motorola-sysv' && exit 0 ;;
+    3[34]??:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:3.0 | 4850:*:4.0:3.0)
+	OS_REL=''
+	test -r /etc/.relid \
+	&& OS_REL=.`sed -n 's/[^ ]* [^ ]* \([0-9][0-9]\).*/\1/p' < /etc/.relid`
+	/bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
+	  && echo i486-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0
+	/bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | /bin/grep entium >/dev/null \
+	  && echo i586-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 ;;
+    3[34]??:*:4.0:* | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:*)
+        /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
+          && echo i486-ncr-sysv4 && exit 0 ;;
+    m68*:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mc68030:UNIX_System_V:4.*:*)
+	echo m68k-atari-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:LynxOS:2.*:* | i?86:LynxOS:3.[01]*:*)
+	echo i386-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    TSUNAMI:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+	echo sparc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    rs6000:LynxOS:2.*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+	echo rs6000-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    SM[BE]S:UNIX_SV:*:*)
+	echo mips-dde-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    RM*:ReliantUNIX-*:*:*)
+	echo mips-sni-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    RM*:SINIX-*:*:*)
+	echo mips-sni-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:SINIX-*:*:*)
+	if uname -p 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
+		UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -p) 2>/dev/null`
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-sni-sysv4
+	else
+		echo ns32k-sni-sysv
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    PENTIUM:CPunix:4.0*:*) # Unisys `ClearPath HMP IX 4000' SVR4/MP effort
+                           # says <Richard.M.Bartel@ccMail.Census.GOV>
+        echo i586-unisys-sysv4
+        exit 0 ;;
+    *:UNIX_System_V:4*:FTX*)
+	# From Gerald Hewes <hewes@openmarket.com>.
+	# How about differentiating between stratus architectures? -djm
+	echo hppa1.1-stratus-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:*:*:FTX*)
+	# From seanf@swdc.stratus.com.
+	echo i860-stratus-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mc68*:A/UX:*:*)
+	echo m68k-apple-aux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    news*:NEWS-OS:*:6*)
+	echo mips-sony-newsos6
+	exit 0 ;;
+    R[34]000:*System_V*:*:* | R4000:UNIX_SYSV:*:* | R*000:UNIX_SV:*:*)
+	if [ -d /usr/nec ]; then
+	        echo mips-nec-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	else
+	        echo mips-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+        exit 0 ;;
+    BeBox:BeOS:*:*)	# BeOS running on hardware made by Be, PPC only.
+	echo powerpc-be-beos
+	exit 0 ;;
+    BeMac:BeOS:*:*)	# BeOS running on Mac or Mac clone, PPC only.
+	echo powerpc-apple-beos
+	exit 0 ;;
+    BePC:BeOS:*:*)	# BeOS running on Intel PC compatible.
+	echo i586-pc-beos
+	exit 0 ;;
+    SX-4:SUPER-UX:*:*)
+	echo sx4-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    SX-5:SUPER-UX:*:*)
+	echo sx5-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Power*:Rhapsody:*:*)
+	echo powerpc-apple-rhapsody${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:Rhapsody:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-apple-rhapsody${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:Darwin:*:*)
+	echo `uname -p`-apple-darwin${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:procnto*:*:* | *:QNX:[0123456789]*:*)
+	if test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "x86pc"; then
+		UNAME_MACHINE=pc
+	fi
+	echo `uname -p`-${UNAME_MACHINE}-nto-qnx
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:QNX:*:4*)
+	echo i386-pc-qnx
+	exit 0 ;;
+    NSR-W:NONSTOP_KERNEL:*:*)
+	echo nsr-tandem-nsk${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    BS2000:POSIX*:*:*)
+	echo bs2000-siemens-sysv
+	exit 0 ;;
+    DS/*:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-${UNAME_SYSTEM}-${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+esac
+
+#echo '(No uname command or uname output not recognized.)' 1>&2
+#echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" 1>&2
+
+cat >$dummy.c <<EOF
+#ifdef _SEQUENT_
+# include <sys/types.h>
+# include <sys/utsname.h>
+#endif
+main ()
+{
+#if defined (sony)
+#if defined (MIPSEB)
+  /* BFD wants "bsd" instead of "newsos".  Perhaps BFD should be changed,
+     I don't know....  */
+  printf ("mips-sony-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+#include <sys/param.h>
+  printf ("m68k-sony-newsos%s\n",
+#ifdef NEWSOS4
+          "4"
+#else
+	  ""
+#endif
+         ); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (__arm) && defined (__acorn) && defined (__unix)
+  printf ("arm-acorn-riscix"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (hp300) && !defined (hpux)
+  printf ("m68k-hp-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (NeXT)
+#if !defined (__ARCHITECTURE__)
+#define __ARCHITECTURE__ "m68k"
+#endif
+  int version;
+  version=`(hostinfo | sed -n 's/.*NeXT Mach \([0-9]*\).*/\1/p') 2>/dev/null`;
+  if (version < 4)
+    printf ("%s-next-nextstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version);
+  else
+    printf ("%s-next-openstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version);
+  exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (MULTIMAX) || defined (n16)
+#if defined (UMAXV)
+  printf ("ns32k-encore-sysv\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+#if defined (CMU)
+  printf ("ns32k-encore-mach\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+  printf ("ns32k-encore-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (__386BSD__)
+  printf ("i386-pc-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (sequent)
+#if defined (i386)
+  printf ("i386-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#if defined (ns32000)
+  printf ("ns32k-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (_SEQUENT_)
+    struct utsname un;
+
+    uname(&un);
+
+    if (strncmp(un.version, "V2", 2) == 0) {
+	printf ("i386-sequent-ptx2\n"); exit (0);
+    }
+    if (strncmp(un.version, "V1", 2) == 0) { /* XXX is V1 correct? */
+	printf ("i386-sequent-ptx1\n"); exit (0);
+    }
+    printf ("i386-sequent-ptx\n"); exit (0);
+
+#endif
+
+#if defined (vax)
+#if !defined (ultrix)
+  printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+  printf ("vax-dec-ultrix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (alliant) && defined (i860)
+  printf ("i860-alliant-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+  exit (1);
+}
+EOF
+
+$CC_FOR_BUILD $dummy.c -o $dummy 2>/dev/null && ./$dummy && rm $dummy.c $dummy && exit 0
+rm -f $dummy.c $dummy
+
+# Apollos put the system type in the environment.
+
+test -d /usr/apollo && { echo ${ISP}-apollo-${SYSTYPE}; exit 0; }
+
+# Convex versions that predate uname can use getsysinfo(1)
+
+if [ -x /usr/convex/getsysinfo ]
+then
+    case `getsysinfo -f cpu_type` in
+    c1*)
+	echo c1-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c2*)
+	if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
+	then echo c32-convex-bsd
+	else echo c2-convex-bsd
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c34*)
+	echo c34-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c38*)
+	echo c38-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c4*)
+	echo c4-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    esac
+fi
+
+#echo '(Unable to guess system type)' 1>&2
+
+exit 1
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/config.sub b/libtecla-1.4.1/config.sub
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8e7785
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/config.sub
@@ -0,0 +1,1268 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Configuration validation subroutine script, version 1.1.
+#   Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000
+#   Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is (in principle) common to ALL GNU software.
+# The presence of a machine in this file suggests that SOME GNU software
+# can handle that machine.  It does not imply ALL GNU software can.
+#
+# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+# Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# Written by Per Bothner <bothner@cygnus.com>.
+# Please send patches to <config-patches@gnu.org>.
+#
+# Configuration subroutine to validate and canonicalize a configuration type.
+# Supply the specified configuration type as an argument.
+# If it is invalid, we print an error message on stderr and exit with code 1.
+# Otherwise, we print the canonical config type on stdout and succeed.
+
+# This file is supposed to be the same for all GNU packages
+# and recognize all the CPU types, system types and aliases
+# that are meaningful with *any* GNU software.
+# Each package is responsible for reporting which valid configurations
+# it does not support.  The user should be able to distinguish
+# a failure to support a valid configuration from a meaningless
+# configuration.
+
+# The goal of this file is to map all the various variations of a given
+# machine specification into a single specification in the form:
+#	CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM
+# or in some cases, the newer four-part form:
+#	CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM
+# It is wrong to echo any other type of specification.
+
+if [ x$1 = x ]
+then
+	echo Configuration name missing. 1>&2
+	echo "Usage: $0 CPU-MFR-OPSYS" 1>&2
+	echo "or     $0 ALIAS" 1>&2
+	echo where ALIAS is a recognized configuration type. 1>&2
+	exit 1
+fi
+
+# First pass through any local machine types.
+case $1 in
+	*local*)
+		echo $1
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	*)
+	;;
+esac
+
+# Separate what the user gave into CPU-COMPANY and OS or KERNEL-OS (if any).
+# Here we must recognize all the valid KERNEL-OS combinations.
+maybe_os=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\2/'`
+case $maybe_os in
+  nto-qnx* | linux-gnu*)
+    os=-$maybe_os
+    basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\1/'`
+    ;;
+  *)
+    basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/-[^-]*$//'`
+    if [ $basic_machine != $1 ]
+    then os=`echo $1 | sed 's/.*-/-/'`
+    else os=; fi
+    ;;
+esac
+
+### Let's recognize common machines as not being operating systems so
+### that things like config.sub decstation-3100 work.  We also
+### recognize some manufacturers as not being operating systems, so we
+### can provide default operating systems below.
+case $os in
+	-sun*os*)
+		# Prevent following clause from handling this invalid input.
+		;;
+	-dec* | -mips* | -sequent* | -encore* | -pc532* | -sgi* | -sony* | \
+	-att* | -7300* | -3300* | -delta* | -motorola* | -sun[234]* | \
+	-unicom* | -ibm* | -next | -hp | -isi* | -apollo | -altos* | \
+	-convergent* | -ncr* | -news | -32* | -3600* | -3100* | -hitachi* |\
+	-c[123]* | -convex* | -sun | -crds | -omron* | -dg | -ultra | -tti* | \
+	-harris | -dolphin | -highlevel | -gould | -cbm | -ns | -masscomp | \
+	-apple)
+		os=
+		basic_machine=$1
+		;;
+	-sim | -cisco | -oki | -wec | -winbond)
+		os=
+		basic_machine=$1
+		;;
+	-scout)
+		;;
+	-wrs)
+		os=-vxworks
+		basic_machine=$1
+		;;
+	-hiux*)
+		os=-hiuxwe2
+		;;
+	-sco5)
+		os=-sco3.2v5
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco4)
+		os=-sco3.2v4
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco3.2.[4-9]*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/sco3.2./sco3.2v/'`
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco3.2v[4-9]*)
+		# Don't forget version if it is 3.2v4 or newer.
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco*)
+		os=-sco3.2v2
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-udk*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-isc)
+		os=-isc2.2
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-clix*)
+		basic_machine=clipper-intergraph
+		;;
+	-isc*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-lynx*)
+		os=-lynxos
+		;;
+	-ptx*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-sequent/'`
+		;;
+	-windowsnt*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/windowsnt/winnt/'`
+		;;
+	-psos*)
+		os=-psos
+		;;
+	-mint | -mint[0-9]*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-atari
+		os=-mint
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Decode aliases for certain CPU-COMPANY combinations.
+case $basic_machine in
+	# Recognize the basic CPU types without company name.
+	# Some are omitted here because they have special meanings below.
+	tahoe | i860 | ia64 | m32r | m68k | m68000 | m88k | ns32k | arc | arm \
+		| arme[lb] | pyramid | mn10200 | mn10300 | tron | a29k \
+		| 580 | i960 | h8300 \
+		| x86 | ppcbe | mipsbe | mipsle | shbe | shle | armbe | armle \
+		| hppa | hppa1.0 | hppa1.1 | hppa2.0 | hppa2.0w | hppa2.0n \
+		| hppa64 \
+		| alpha | alphaev[4-8] | alphaev56 | alphapca5[67] \
+		| alphaev6[78] \
+		| we32k | ns16k | clipper | i370 | sh | powerpc | powerpcle \
+		| 1750a | dsp16xx | pdp11 | mips16 | mips64 | mipsel | mips64el \
+		| mips64orion | mips64orionel | mipstx39 | mipstx39el \
+		| mips64vr4300 | mips64vr4300el | mips64vr4100 | mips64vr4100el \
+		| mips64vr5000 | miprs64vr5000el | mcore \
+		| sparc | sparclet | sparclite | sparc64 | sparcv9 | v850 | c4x \
+		| thumb | d10v | fr30 | avr)
+		basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown
+		;;
+	m88110 | m680[12346]0 | m683?2 | m68360 | m5200 | z8k | v70 | h8500 | w65 | pj | pjl)
+		;;
+
+	# We use `pc' rather than `unknown'
+	# because (1) that's what they normally are, and
+	# (2) the word "unknown" tends to confuse beginning users.
+	i[34567]86)
+	  basic_machine=$basic_machine-pc
+	  ;;
+	# Object if more than one company name word.
+	*-*-*)
+		echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
+		exit 1
+		;;
+	# Recognize the basic CPU types with company name.
+	# FIXME: clean up the formatting here.
+	vax-* | tahoe-* | i[34567]86-* | i860-* | ia64-* | m32r-* | m68k-* | m68000-* \
+	      | m88k-* | sparc-* | ns32k-* | fx80-* | arc-* | arm-* | c[123]* \
+	      | mips-* | pyramid-* | tron-* | a29k-* | romp-* | rs6000-* \
+	      | power-* | none-* | 580-* | cray2-* | h8300-* | h8500-* | i960-* \
+	      | xmp-* | ymp-* \
+	      | x86-* | ppcbe-* | mipsbe-* | mipsle-* | shbe-* | shle-* | armbe-* | armle-* \
+	      | hppa-* | hppa1.0-* | hppa1.1-* | hppa2.0-* | hppa2.0w-* \
+	      | hppa2.0n-* | hppa64-* \
+	      | alpha-* | alphaev[4-8]-* | alphaev56-* | alphapca5[67]-* \
+	      | alphaev6[78]-* \
+	      | we32k-* | cydra-* | ns16k-* | pn-* | np1-* | xps100-* \
+	      | clipper-* | orion-* \
+	      | sparclite-* | pdp11-* | sh-* | powerpc-* | powerpcle-* \
+	      | sparc64-* | sparcv9-* | sparc86x-* | mips16-* | mips64-* | mipsel-* \
+	      | mips64el-* | mips64orion-* | mips64orionel-* \
+	      | mips64vr4100-* | mips64vr4100el-* | mips64vr4300-* | mips64vr4300el-* \
+	      | mipstx39-* | mipstx39el-* | mcore-* \
+	      | f301-* | armv*-* | s390-* | sv1-* | t3e-* \
+	      | m88110-* | m680[01234]0-* | m683?2-* | m68360-* | z8k-* | d10v-* \
+	      | thumb-* | v850-* | d30v-* | tic30-* | c30-* | fr30-* \
+	      | bs2000-*)
+		;;
+	# Recognize the various machine names and aliases which stand
+	# for a CPU type and a company and sometimes even an OS.
+	386bsd)
+		basic_machine=i386-unknown
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	3b1 | 7300 | 7300-att | att-7300 | pc7300 | safari | unixpc)
+		basic_machine=m68000-att
+		;;
+	3b*)
+		basic_machine=we32k-att
+		;;
+	a29khif)
+		basic_machine=a29k-amd
+		os=-udi
+		;;
+	adobe68k)
+		basic_machine=m68010-adobe
+		os=-scout
+		;;
+	alliant | fx80)
+		basic_machine=fx80-alliant
+		;;
+	altos | altos3068)
+		basic_machine=m68k-altos
+		;;
+	am29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-none
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	amdahl)
+		basic_machine=580-amdahl
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	amiga | amiga-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+		;;
+	amigaos | amigados)
+		basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+		os=-amigaos
+		;;
+	amigaunix | amix)
+		basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	apollo68)
+		basic_machine=m68k-apollo
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	apollo68bsd)
+		basic_machine=m68k-apollo
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	aux)
+		basic_machine=m68k-apple
+		os=-aux
+		;;
+	balance)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-sequent
+		os=-dynix
+		;;
+	convex-c1)
+		basic_machine=c1-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c2)
+		basic_machine=c2-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c32)
+		basic_machine=c32-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c34)
+		basic_machine=c34-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c38)
+		basic_machine=c38-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	cray | ymp)
+		basic_machine=ymp-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	cray2)
+		basic_machine=cray2-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	[ctj]90-cray)
+		basic_machine=c90-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	crds | unos)
+		basic_machine=m68k-crds
+		;;
+	da30 | da30-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-da30
+		;;
+	decstation | decstation-3100 | pmax | pmax-* | pmin | dec3100 | decstatn)
+		basic_machine=mips-dec
+		;;
+	delta | 3300 | motorola-3300 | motorola-delta \
+	      | 3300-motorola | delta-motorola)
+		basic_machine=m68k-motorola
+		;;
+	delta88)
+		basic_machine=m88k-motorola
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	dpx20 | dpx20-*)
+		basic_machine=rs6000-bull
+		os=-bosx
+		;;
+	dpx2* | dpx2*-bull)
+		basic_machine=m68k-bull
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	ebmon29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-amd
+		os=-ebmon
+		;;
+	elxsi)
+		basic_machine=elxsi-elxsi
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	encore | umax | mmax)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-encore
+		;;
+	es1800 | OSE68k | ose68k | ose | OSE)
+		basic_machine=m68k-ericsson
+		os=-ose
+		;;
+	fx2800)
+		basic_machine=i860-alliant
+		;;
+	genix)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-ns
+		;;
+	gmicro)
+		basic_machine=tron-gmicro
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	h3050r* | hiux*)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
+		os=-hiuxwe2
+		;;
+	h8300hms)
+		basic_machine=h8300-hitachi
+		os=-hms
+		;;
+	h8300xray)
+		basic_machine=h8300-hitachi
+		os=-xray
+		;;
+	h8500hms)
+		basic_machine=h8500-hitachi
+		os=-hms
+		;;
+	harris)
+		basic_machine=m88k-harris
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	hp300-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		;;
+	hp300bsd)
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	hp300hpux)
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		os=-hpux
+		;;
+	hp3k9[0-9][0-9] | hp9[0-9][0-9])
+		basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k2[0-9][0-9] | hp9k31[0-9])
+		basic_machine=m68000-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k3[2-9][0-9])
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k6[0-9][0-9] | hp6[0-9][0-9])
+		basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k7[0-79][0-9] | hp7[0-79][0-9])
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k78[0-9] | hp78[0-9])
+		# FIXME: really hppa2.0-hp
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k8[67]1 | hp8[67]1 | hp9k80[24] | hp80[24] | hp9k8[78]9 | hp8[78]9 | hp9k893 | hp893)
+		# FIXME: really hppa2.0-hp
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k8[0-9][13679] | hp8[0-9][13679])
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k8[0-9][0-9] | hp8[0-9][0-9])
+		basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
+		;;
+	hppa-next)
+		os=-nextstep3
+		;;
+	hppaosf)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+		os=-osf
+		;;
+	hppro)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+		os=-proelf
+		;;
+	i370-ibm* | ibm*)
+		basic_machine=i370-ibm
+		;;
+# I'm not sure what "Sysv32" means.  Should this be sysv3.2?
+	i[34567]86v32)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-sysv32
+		;;
+	i[34567]86v4*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	i[34567]86v)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	i[34567]86sol2)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-solaris2
+		;;
+	i386mach)
+		basic_machine=i386-mach
+		os=-mach
+		;;
+	i386-vsta | vsta)
+		basic_machine=i386-unknown
+		os=-vsta
+		;;
+	i386-go32 | go32)
+		basic_machine=i386-unknown
+		os=-go32
+		;;
+	i386-mingw32 | mingw32)
+		basic_machine=i386-unknown
+		os=-mingw32
+		;;
+	iris | iris4d)
+		basic_machine=mips-sgi
+		case $os in
+		    -irix*)
+			;;
+		    *)
+			os=-irix4
+			;;
+		esac
+		;;
+	isi68 | isi)
+		basic_machine=m68k-isi
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	m88k-omron*)
+		basic_machine=m88k-omron
+		;;
+	magnum | m3230)
+		basic_machine=mips-mips
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	merlin)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-utek
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	miniframe)
+		basic_machine=m68000-convergent
+		;;
+	*mint | -mint[0-9]* | *MiNT | *MiNT[0-9]*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-atari
+		os=-mint
+		;;
+	mipsel*-linux*)
+		basic_machine=mipsel-unknown
+		os=-linux-gnu
+		;;
+	mips*-linux*)
+		basic_machine=mips-unknown
+		os=-linux-gnu
+		;;
+	mips3*-*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`
+		;;
+	mips3*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`-unknown
+		;;
+	mmix*)
+		basic_machine=mmix-knuth
+		os=-mmixware
+		;;
+	monitor)
+		basic_machine=m68k-rom68k
+		os=-coff
+		;;
+	msdos)
+		basic_machine=i386-unknown
+		os=-msdos
+		;;
+	mvs)
+		basic_machine=i370-ibm
+		os=-mvs
+		;;
+	ncr3000)
+		basic_machine=i486-ncr
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	netbsd386)
+		basic_machine=i386-unknown
+		os=-netbsd
+		;;
+	netwinder)
+		basic_machine=armv4l-rebel
+		os=-linux
+		;;
+	news | news700 | news800 | news900)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sony
+		os=-newsos
+		;;
+	news1000)
+		basic_machine=m68030-sony
+		os=-newsos
+		;;
+	news-3600 | risc-news)
+		basic_machine=mips-sony
+		os=-newsos
+		;;
+	necv70)
+		basic_machine=v70-nec
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	next | m*-next )
+		basic_machine=m68k-next
+		case $os in
+		    -nextstep* )
+			;;
+		    -ns2*)
+		      os=-nextstep2
+			;;
+		    *)
+		      os=-nextstep3
+			;;
+		esac
+		;;
+	nh3000)
+		basic_machine=m68k-harris
+		os=-cxux
+		;;
+	nh[45]000)
+		basic_machine=m88k-harris
+		os=-cxux
+		;;
+	nindy960)
+		basic_machine=i960-intel
+		os=-nindy
+		;;
+	mon960)
+		basic_machine=i960-intel
+		os=-mon960
+		;;
+	np1)
+		basic_machine=np1-gould
+		;;
+	nsr-tandem)
+		basic_machine=nsr-tandem
+		;;
+	op50n-* | op60c-*)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki
+		os=-proelf
+		;;
+	OSE68000 | ose68000)
+		basic_machine=m68000-ericsson
+		os=-ose
+		;;
+	os68k)
+		basic_machine=m68k-none
+		os=-os68k
+		;;
+	pa-hitachi)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
+		os=-hiuxwe2
+		;;
+	paragon)
+		basic_machine=i860-intel
+		os=-osf
+		;;
+	pbd)
+		basic_machine=sparc-tti
+		;;
+	pbb)
+		basic_machine=m68k-tti
+		;;
+        pc532 | pc532-*)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-pc532
+		;;
+	pentium | p5 | k5 | k6 | nexen)
+		basic_machine=i586-pc
+		;;
+	pentiumpro | p6 | 6x86)
+		basic_machine=i686-pc
+		;;
+	pentiumii | pentium2)
+		basic_machine=i786-pc
+		;;
+	pentium-* | p5-* | k5-* | k6-* | nexen-*)
+		basic_machine=i586-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	pentiumpro-* | p6-* | 6x86-*)
+		basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	pentiumii-* | pentium2-*)
+		basic_machine=i786-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	pn)
+		basic_machine=pn-gould
+		;;
+	power)	basic_machine=rs6000-ibm
+		;;
+	ppc)	basic_machine=powerpc-unknown
+	        ;;
+	ppc-*)	basic_machine=powerpc-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	ppcle | powerpclittle | ppc-le | powerpc-little)
+		basic_machine=powerpcle-unknown
+	        ;;
+	ppcle-* | powerpclittle-*)
+		basic_machine=powerpcle-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	ps2)
+		basic_machine=i386-ibm
+		;;
+	rom68k)
+		basic_machine=m68k-rom68k
+		os=-coff
+		;;
+	rm[46]00)
+		basic_machine=mips-siemens
+		;;
+	rtpc | rtpc-*)
+		basic_machine=romp-ibm
+		;;
+	sa29200)
+		basic_machine=a29k-amd
+		os=-udi
+		;;
+	sequent)
+		basic_machine=i386-sequent
+		;;
+	sh)
+		basic_machine=sh-hitachi
+		os=-hms
+		;;
+	sparclite-wrs)
+		basic_machine=sparclite-wrs
+		os=-vxworks
+		;;
+	sps7)
+		basic_machine=m68k-bull
+		os=-sysv2
+		;;
+	spur)
+		basic_machine=spur-unknown
+		;;
+	st2000)
+		basic_machine=m68k-tandem
+		;;
+	stratus)
+		basic_machine=i860-stratus
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	sun2)
+		basic_machine=m68000-sun
+		;;
+	sun2os3)
+		basic_machine=m68000-sun
+		os=-sunos3
+		;;
+	sun2os4)
+		basic_machine=m68000-sun
+		os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	sun3os3)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sun
+		os=-sunos3
+		;;
+	sun3os4)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sun
+		os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	sun4os3)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		os=-sunos3
+		;;
+	sun4os4)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	sun4sol2)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		os=-solaris2
+		;;
+	sun3 | sun3-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sun
+		;;
+	sun4)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		;;
+	sun386 | sun386i | roadrunner)
+		basic_machine=i386-sun
+		;;
+	sv1)
+		basic_machine=sv1-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	symmetry)
+		basic_machine=i386-sequent
+		os=-dynix
+		;;
+	t3e)
+		basic_machine=t3e-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	tx39)
+		basic_machine=mipstx39-unknown
+		;;
+	tx39el)
+		basic_machine=mipstx39el-unknown
+		;;
+	tower | tower-32)
+		basic_machine=m68k-ncr
+		;;
+	udi29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-amd
+		os=-udi
+		;;
+	ultra3)
+		basic_machine=a29k-nyu
+		os=-sym1
+		;;
+	v810 | necv810)
+		basic_machine=v810-nec
+		os=-none
+		;;
+	vaxv)
+		basic_machine=vax-dec
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	vms)
+		basic_machine=vax-dec
+		os=-vms
+		;;
+	vpp*|vx|vx-*)
+               basic_machine=f301-fujitsu
+               ;;
+	vxworks960)
+		basic_machine=i960-wrs
+		os=-vxworks
+		;;
+	vxworks68)
+		basic_machine=m68k-wrs
+		os=-vxworks
+		;;
+	vxworks29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-wrs
+		os=-vxworks
+		;;
+	w65*)
+		basic_machine=w65-wdc
+		os=-none
+		;;
+	w89k-*)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-winbond
+		os=-proelf
+		;;
+	xmp)
+		basic_machine=xmp-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+        xps | xps100)
+		basic_machine=xps100-honeywell
+		;;
+	z8k-*-coff)
+		basic_machine=z8k-unknown
+		os=-sim
+		;;
+	none)
+		basic_machine=none-none
+		os=-none
+		;;
+
+# Here we handle the default manufacturer of certain CPU types.  It is in
+# some cases the only manufacturer, in others, it is the most popular.
+	w89k)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-winbond
+		;;
+	op50n)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki
+		;;
+	op60c)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki
+		;;
+	mips)
+		if [ x$os = x-linux-gnu ]; then
+			basic_machine=mips-unknown
+		else
+			basic_machine=mips-mips
+		fi
+		;;
+	romp)
+		basic_machine=romp-ibm
+		;;
+	rs6000)
+		basic_machine=rs6000-ibm
+		;;
+	vax)
+		basic_machine=vax-dec
+		;;
+	pdp11)
+		basic_machine=pdp11-dec
+		;;
+	we32k)
+		basic_machine=we32k-att
+		;;
+	sparc | sparcv9)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		;;
+        cydra)
+		basic_machine=cydra-cydrome
+		;;
+	orion)
+		basic_machine=orion-highlevel
+		;;
+	orion105)
+		basic_machine=clipper-highlevel
+		;;
+	mac | mpw | mac-mpw)
+		basic_machine=m68k-apple
+		;;
+	pmac | pmac-mpw)
+		basic_machine=powerpc-apple
+		;;
+	c4x*)
+		basic_machine=c4x-none
+		os=-coff
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Here we canonicalize certain aliases for manufacturers.
+case $basic_machine in
+	*-digital*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/digital.*/dec/'`
+		;;
+	*-commodore*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/commodore.*/cbm/'`
+		;;
+	*)
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Decode manufacturer-specific aliases for certain operating systems.
+
+if [ x"$os" != x"" ]
+then
+case $os in
+        # First match some system type aliases
+        # that might get confused with valid system types.
+	# -solaris* is a basic system type, with this one exception.
+	-solaris1 | -solaris1.*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|solaris1|sunos4|'`
+		;;
+	-solaris)
+		os=-solaris2
+		;;
+	-svr4*)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	-unixware*)
+		os=-sysv4.2uw
+		;;
+	-gnu/linux*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|gnu/linux|linux-gnu|'`
+		;;
+	# First accept the basic system types.
+	# The portable systems comes first.
+	# Each alternative MUST END IN A *, to match a version number.
+	# -sysv* is not here because it comes later, after sysvr4.
+	-gnu* | -bsd* | -mach* | -minix* | -genix* | -ultrix* | -irix* \
+	      | -*vms* | -sco* | -esix* | -isc* | -aix* | -sunos | -sunos[34]*\
+	      | -hpux* | -unos* | -osf* | -luna* | -dgux* | -solaris* | -sym* \
+	      | -amigaos* | -amigados* | -msdos* | -newsos* | -unicos* | -aof* \
+	      | -aos* \
+	      | -nindy* | -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -ebmon* | -hms* | -mvs* \
+	      | -clix* | -riscos* | -uniplus* | -iris* | -rtu* | -xenix* \
+	      | -hiux* | -386bsd* | -netbsd* | -openbsd* | -freebsd* | -riscix* \
+	      | -lynxos* | -bosx* | -nextstep* | -cxux* | -aout* | -elf* | -oabi* \
+	      | -ptx* | -coff* | -ecoff* | -winnt* | -domain* | -vsta* \
+	      | -udi* | -eabi* | -lites* | -ieee* | -go32* | -aux* \
+	      | -cygwin* | -pe* | -psos* | -moss* | -proelf* | -rtems* \
+	      | -mingw32* | -linux-gnu* | -uxpv* | -beos* | -mpeix* | -udk* \
+	      | -interix* | -uwin* | -rhapsody* | -darwin* | -opened* \
+	      | -openstep* | -oskit*)
+	# Remember, each alternative MUST END IN *, to match a version number.
+		;;
+	-qnx*)
+		case $basic_machine in
+		    x86-* | i[34567]86-*)
+			;;
+		    *)
+			os=-nto$os
+			;;
+		esac
+		;;
+	-nto*)
+		os=-nto-qnx
+		;;
+	-sim | -es1800* | -hms* | -xray | -os68k* | -none* | -v88r* \
+	      | -windows* | -osx | -abug | -netware* | -os9* | -beos* \
+	      | -macos* | -mpw* | -magic* | -mmixware* | -mon960* | -lnews*)
+		;;
+	-mac*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|mac|macos|'`
+		;;
+	-linux*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|linux|linux-gnu|'`
+		;;
+	-sunos5*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos5|solaris2|'`
+		;;
+	-sunos6*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos6|solaris3|'`
+		;;
+	-opened*)
+		os=-openedition
+		;;
+	-wince*)
+		os=-wince
+		;;
+	-osfrose*)
+		os=-osfrose
+		;;
+	-osf*)
+		os=-osf
+		;;
+	-utek*)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	-dynix*)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	-acis*)
+		os=-aos
+		;;
+	-386bsd)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	-ctix* | -uts*)
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	-ns2 )
+	        os=-nextstep2
+		;;
+	-nsk)
+		os=-nsk
+		;;
+	# Preserve the version number of sinix5.
+	-sinix5.*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sinix|sysv|'`
+		;;
+	-sinix*)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	-triton*)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	-oss*)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	-svr4)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	-svr3)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	-sysvr4)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	# This must come after -sysvr4.
+	-sysv*)
+		;;
+	-ose*)
+		os=-ose
+		;;
+	-es1800*)
+		os=-ose
+		;;
+	-xenix)
+		os=-xenix
+		;;
+        -*mint | -*MiNT)
+	        os=-mint
+		;;
+	-none)
+		;;
+	*)
+		# Get rid of the `-' at the beginning of $os.
+		os=`echo $os | sed 's/[^-]*-//'`
+		echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': system \`$os\' not recognized 1>&2
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+else
+
+# Here we handle the default operating systems that come with various machines.
+# The value should be what the vendor currently ships out the door with their
+# machine or put another way, the most popular os provided with the machine.
+
+# Note that if you're going to try to match "-MANUFACTURER" here (say,
+# "-sun"), then you have to tell the case statement up towards the top
+# that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating system.  Otherwise, code above
+# will signal an error saying that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating
+# system, and we'll never get to this point.
+
+case $basic_machine in
+	*-acorn)
+		os=-riscix1.2
+		;;
+	arm*-rebel)
+		os=-linux
+		;;
+	arm*-semi)
+		os=-aout
+		;;
+        pdp11-*)
+		os=-none
+		;;
+	*-dec | vax-*)
+		os=-ultrix4.2
+		;;
+	m68*-apollo)
+		os=-domain
+		;;
+	i386-sun)
+		os=-sunos4.0.2
+		;;
+	m68000-sun)
+		os=-sunos3
+		# This also exists in the configure program, but was not the
+		# default.
+		# os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	m68*-cisco)
+		os=-aout
+		;;
+	mips*-cisco)
+		os=-elf
+		;;
+	mips*-*)
+		os=-elf
+		;;
+	*-tti)	# must be before sparc entry or we get the wrong os.
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	sparc-* | *-sun)
+		os=-sunos4.1.1
+		;;
+	*-be)
+		os=-beos
+		;;
+	*-ibm)
+		os=-aix
+		;;
+	*-wec)
+		os=-proelf
+		;;
+	*-winbond)
+		os=-proelf
+		;;
+	*-oki)
+		os=-proelf
+		;;
+	*-hp)
+		os=-hpux
+		;;
+	*-hitachi)
+		os=-hiux
+		;;
+	i860-* | *-att | *-ncr | *-altos | *-motorola | *-convergent)
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	*-cbm)
+		os=-amigaos
+		;;
+	*-dg)
+		os=-dgux
+		;;
+	*-dolphin)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	m68k-ccur)
+		os=-rtu
+		;;
+	m88k-omron*)
+		os=-luna
+		;;
+	*-next )
+		os=-nextstep
+		;;
+	*-sequent)
+		os=-ptx
+		;;
+	*-crds)
+		os=-unos
+		;;
+	*-ns)
+		os=-genix
+		;;
+	i370-*)
+		os=-mvs
+		;;
+	*-next)
+		os=-nextstep3
+		;;
+        *-gould)
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+        *-highlevel)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	*-encore)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+        *-sgi)
+		os=-irix
+		;;
+        *-siemens)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	*-masscomp)
+		os=-rtu
+		;;
+	f301-fujitsu)
+		os=-uxpv
+		;;
+	*-rom68k)
+		os=-coff
+		;;
+	*-*bug)
+		os=-coff
+		;;
+	*-apple)
+		os=-macos
+		;;
+	*-atari*)
+		os=-mint
+		;;
+	*)
+		os=-none
+		;;
+esac
+fi
+
+# Here we handle the case where we know the os, and the CPU type, but not the
+# manufacturer.  We pick the logical manufacturer.
+vendor=unknown
+case $basic_machine in
+	*-unknown)
+		case $os in
+			-riscix*)
+				vendor=acorn
+				;;
+			-sunos*)
+				vendor=sun
+				;;
+			-aix*)
+				vendor=ibm
+				;;
+			-beos*)
+				vendor=be
+				;;
+			-hpux*)
+				vendor=hp
+				;;
+			-mpeix*)
+				vendor=hp
+				;;
+			-hiux*)
+				vendor=hitachi
+				;;
+			-unos*)
+				vendor=crds
+				;;
+			-dgux*)
+				vendor=dg
+				;;
+			-luna*)
+				vendor=omron
+				;;
+			-genix*)
+				vendor=ns
+				;;
+			-mvs* | -opened*)
+				vendor=ibm
+				;;
+			-ptx*)
+				vendor=sequent
+				;;
+			-vxsim* | -vxworks*)
+				vendor=wrs
+				;;
+			-aux*)
+				vendor=apple
+				;;
+			-hms*)
+				vendor=hitachi
+				;;
+			-mpw* | -macos*)
+				vendor=apple
+				;;
+			-*mint | -*MiNT)
+				vendor=atari
+				;;
+		esac
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed "s/unknown/$vendor/"`
+		;;
+esac
+
+echo $basic_machine$os
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/configure b/libtecla-1.4.1/configure
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..feaa587
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/configure
@@ -0,0 +1,1939 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles.
+# Generated automatically using autoconf version 2.13 
+# Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
+
+# Defaults:
+ac_help=
+ac_default_prefix=/usr/local
+# Any additions from configure.in:
+
+# Initialize some variables set by options.
+# The variables have the same names as the options, with
+# dashes changed to underlines.
+build=NONE
+cache_file=./config.cache
+exec_prefix=NONE
+host=NONE
+no_create=
+nonopt=NONE
+no_recursion=
+prefix=NONE
+program_prefix=NONE
+program_suffix=NONE
+program_transform_name=s,x,x,
+silent=
+site=
+srcdir=
+target=NONE
+verbose=
+x_includes=NONE
+x_libraries=NONE
+bindir='${exec_prefix}/bin'
+sbindir='${exec_prefix}/sbin'
+libexecdir='${exec_prefix}/libexec'
+datadir='${prefix}/share'
+sysconfdir='${prefix}/etc'
+sharedstatedir='${prefix}/com'
+localstatedir='${prefix}/var'
+libdir='${exec_prefix}/lib'
+includedir='${prefix}/include'
+oldincludedir='/usr/include'
+infodir='${prefix}/info'
+mandir='${prefix}/man'
+
+# Initialize some other variables.
+subdirs=
+MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS=
+SHELL=${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh}
+# Maximum number of lines to put in a shell here document.
+ac_max_here_lines=12
+
+ac_prev=
+for ac_option
+do
+
+  # If the previous option needs an argument, assign it.
+  if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
+    eval "$ac_prev=\$ac_option"
+    ac_prev=
+    continue
+  fi
+
+  case "$ac_option" in
+  -*=*) ac_optarg=`echo "$ac_option" | sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]*=//'` ;;
+  *) ac_optarg= ;;
+  esac
+
+  # Accept the important Cygnus configure options, so we can diagnose typos.
+
+  case "$ac_option" in
+
+  -bindir | --bindir | --bindi | --bind | --bin | --bi)
+    ac_prev=bindir ;;
+  -bindir=* | --bindir=* | --bindi=* | --bind=* | --bin=* | --bi=*)
+    bindir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -build | --build | --buil | --bui | --bu)
+    ac_prev=build ;;
+  -build=* | --build=* | --buil=* | --bui=* | --bu=*)
+    build="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -cache-file | --cache-file | --cache-fil | --cache-fi \
+  | --cache-f | --cache- | --cache | --cach | --cac | --ca | --c)
+    ac_prev=cache_file ;;
+  -cache-file=* | --cache-file=* | --cache-fil=* | --cache-fi=* \
+  | --cache-f=* | --cache-=* | --cache=* | --cach=* | --cac=* | --ca=* | --c=*)
+    cache_file="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -datadir | --datadir | --datadi | --datad | --data | --dat | --da)
+    ac_prev=datadir ;;
+  -datadir=* | --datadir=* | --datadi=* | --datad=* | --data=* | --dat=* \
+  | --da=*)
+    datadir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -disable-* | --disable-*)
+    ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*disable-//'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then
+      { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+    fi
+    ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+    eval "enable_${ac_feature}=no" ;;
+
+  -enable-* | --enable-*)
+    ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*enable-//' -e 's/=.*//'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then
+      { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+    fi
+    ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+    case "$ac_option" in
+      *=*) ;;
+      *) ac_optarg=yes ;;
+    esac
+    eval "enable_${ac_feature}='$ac_optarg'" ;;
+
+  -exec-prefix | --exec_prefix | --exec-prefix | --exec-prefi \
+  | --exec-pref | --exec-pre | --exec-pr | --exec-p | --exec- \
+  | --exec | --exe | --ex)
+    ac_prev=exec_prefix ;;
+  -exec-prefix=* | --exec_prefix=* | --exec-prefix=* | --exec-prefi=* \
+  | --exec-pref=* | --exec-pre=* | --exec-pr=* | --exec-p=* | --exec-=* \
+  | --exec=* | --exe=* | --ex=*)
+    exec_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -gas | --gas | --ga | --g)
+    # Obsolete; use --with-gas.
+    with_gas=yes ;;
+
+  -help | --help | --hel | --he)
+    # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing.
+    # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh.
+    cat << EOF
+Usage: configure [options] [host]
+Options: [defaults in brackets after descriptions]
+Configuration:
+  --cache-file=FILE       cache test results in FILE
+  --help                  print this message
+  --no-create             do not create output files
+  --quiet, --silent       do not print \`checking...' messages
+  --version               print the version of autoconf that created configure
+Directory and file names:
+  --prefix=PREFIX         install architecture-independent files in PREFIX
+                          [$ac_default_prefix]
+  --exec-prefix=EPREFIX   install architecture-dependent files in EPREFIX
+                          [same as prefix]
+  --bindir=DIR            user executables in DIR [EPREFIX/bin]
+  --sbindir=DIR           system admin executables in DIR [EPREFIX/sbin]
+  --libexecdir=DIR        program executables in DIR [EPREFIX/libexec]
+  --datadir=DIR           read-only architecture-independent data in DIR
+                          [PREFIX/share]
+  --sysconfdir=DIR        read-only single-machine data in DIR [PREFIX/etc]
+  --sharedstatedir=DIR    modifiable architecture-independent data in DIR
+                          [PREFIX/com]
+  --localstatedir=DIR     modifiable single-machine data in DIR [PREFIX/var]
+  --libdir=DIR            object code libraries in DIR [EPREFIX/lib]
+  --includedir=DIR        C header files in DIR [PREFIX/include]
+  --oldincludedir=DIR     C header files for non-gcc in DIR [/usr/include]
+  --infodir=DIR           info documentation in DIR [PREFIX/info]
+  --mandir=DIR            man documentation in DIR [PREFIX/man]
+  --srcdir=DIR            find the sources in DIR [configure dir or ..]
+  --program-prefix=PREFIX prepend PREFIX to installed program names
+  --program-suffix=SUFFIX append SUFFIX to installed program names
+  --program-transform-name=PROGRAM
+                          run sed PROGRAM on installed program names
+EOF
+    cat << EOF
+Host type:
+  --build=BUILD           configure for building on BUILD [BUILD=HOST]
+  --host=HOST             configure for HOST [guessed]
+  --target=TARGET         configure for TARGET [TARGET=HOST]
+Features and packages:
+  --disable-FEATURE       do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no)
+  --enable-FEATURE[=ARG]  include FEATURE [ARG=yes]
+  --with-PACKAGE[=ARG]    use PACKAGE [ARG=yes]
+  --without-PACKAGE       do not use PACKAGE (same as --with-PACKAGE=no)
+  --x-includes=DIR        X include files are in DIR
+  --x-libraries=DIR       X library files are in DIR
+EOF
+    if test -n "$ac_help"; then
+      echo "--enable and --with options recognized:$ac_help"
+    fi
+    exit 0 ;;
+
+  -host | --host | --hos | --ho)
+    ac_prev=host ;;
+  -host=* | --host=* | --hos=* | --ho=*)
+    host="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -includedir | --includedir | --includedi | --included | --include \
+  | --includ | --inclu | --incl | --inc)
+    ac_prev=includedir ;;
+  -includedir=* | --includedir=* | --includedi=* | --included=* | --include=* \
+  | --includ=* | --inclu=* | --incl=* | --inc=*)
+    includedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -infodir | --infodir | --infodi | --infod | --info | --inf)
+    ac_prev=infodir ;;
+  -infodir=* | --infodir=* | --infodi=* | --infod=* | --info=* | --inf=*)
+    infodir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -libdir | --libdir | --libdi | --libd)
+    ac_prev=libdir ;;
+  -libdir=* | --libdir=* | --libdi=* | --libd=*)
+    libdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -libexecdir | --libexecdir | --libexecdi | --libexecd | --libexec \
+  | --libexe | --libex | --libe)
+    ac_prev=libexecdir ;;
+  -libexecdir=* | --libexecdir=* | --libexecdi=* | --libexecd=* | --libexec=* \
+  | --libexe=* | --libex=* | --libe=*)
+    libexecdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -localstatedir | --localstatedir | --localstatedi | --localstated \
+  | --localstate | --localstat | --localsta | --localst \
+  | --locals | --local | --loca | --loc | --lo)
+    ac_prev=localstatedir ;;
+  -localstatedir=* | --localstatedir=* | --localstatedi=* | --localstated=* \
+  | --localstate=* | --localstat=* | --localsta=* | --localst=* \
+  | --locals=* | --local=* | --loca=* | --loc=* | --lo=*)
+    localstatedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -mandir | --mandir | --mandi | --mand | --man | --ma | --m)
+    ac_prev=mandir ;;
+  -mandir=* | --mandir=* | --mandi=* | --mand=* | --man=* | --ma=* | --m=*)
+    mandir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -nfp | --nfp | --nf)
+    # Obsolete; use --without-fp.
+    with_fp=no ;;
+
+  -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \
+  | --no-cr | --no-c)
+    no_create=yes ;;
+
+  -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \
+  | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r)
+    no_recursion=yes ;;
+
+  -oldincludedir | --oldincludedir | --oldincludedi | --oldincluded \
+  | --oldinclude | --oldinclud | --oldinclu | --oldincl | --oldinc \
+  | --oldin | --oldi | --old | --ol | --o)
+    ac_prev=oldincludedir ;;
+  -oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedi=* | --oldincluded=* \
+  | --oldinclude=* | --oldinclud=* | --oldinclu=* | --oldincl=* | --oldinc=* \
+  | --oldin=* | --oldi=* | --old=* | --ol=* | --o=*)
+    oldincludedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -prefix | --prefix | --prefi | --pref | --pre | --pr | --p)
+    ac_prev=prefix ;;
+  -prefix=* | --prefix=* | --prefi=* | --pref=* | --pre=* | --pr=* | --p=*)
+    prefix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -program-prefix | --program-prefix | --program-prefi | --program-pref \
+  | --program-pre | --program-pr | --program-p)
+    ac_prev=program_prefix ;;
+  -program-prefix=* | --program-prefix=* | --program-prefi=* \
+  | --program-pref=* | --program-pre=* | --program-pr=* | --program-p=*)
+    program_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -program-suffix | --program-suffix | --program-suffi | --program-suff \
+  | --program-suf | --program-su | --program-s)
+    ac_prev=program_suffix ;;
+  -program-suffix=* | --program-suffix=* | --program-suffi=* \
+  | --program-suff=* | --program-suf=* | --program-su=* | --program-s=*)
+    program_suffix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -program-transform-name | --program-transform-name \
+  | --program-transform-nam | --program-transform-na \
+  | --program-transform-n | --program-transform- \
+  | --program-transform | --program-transfor \
+  | --program-transfo | --program-transf \
+  | --program-trans | --program-tran \
+  | --progr-tra | --program-tr | --program-t)
+    ac_prev=program_transform_name ;;
+  -program-transform-name=* | --program-transform-name=* \
+  | --program-transform-nam=* | --program-transform-na=* \
+  | --program-transform-n=* | --program-transform-=* \
+  | --program-transform=* | --program-transfor=* \
+  | --program-transfo=* | --program-transf=* \
+  | --program-trans=* | --program-tran=* \
+  | --progr-tra=* | --program-tr=* | --program-t=*)
+    program_transform_name="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
+  | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil)
+    silent=yes ;;
+
+  -sbindir | --sbindir | --sbindi | --sbind | --sbin | --sbi | --sb)
+    ac_prev=sbindir ;;
+  -sbindir=* | --sbindir=* | --sbindi=* | --sbind=* | --sbin=* \
+  | --sbi=* | --sb=*)
+    sbindir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedi \
+  | --sharedstated | --sharedstate | --sharedstat | --sharedsta \
+  | --sharedst | --shareds | --shared | --share | --shar \
+  | --sha | --sh)
+    ac_prev=sharedstatedir ;;
+  -sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedi=* \
+  | --sharedstated=* | --sharedstate=* | --sharedstat=* | --sharedsta=* \
+  | --sharedst=* | --shareds=* | --shared=* | --share=* | --shar=* \
+  | --sha=* | --sh=*)
+    sharedstatedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -site | --site | --sit)
+    ac_prev=site ;;
+  -site=* | --site=* | --sit=*)
+    site="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -srcdir | --srcdir | --srcdi | --srcd | --src | --sr)
+    ac_prev=srcdir ;;
+  -srcdir=* | --srcdir=* | --srcdi=* | --srcd=* | --src=* | --sr=*)
+    srcdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -sysconfdir | --sysconfdir | --sysconfdi | --sysconfd | --sysconf \
+  | --syscon | --sysco | --sysc | --sys | --sy)
+    ac_prev=sysconfdir ;;
+  -sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdi=* | --sysconfd=* | --sysconf=* \
+  | --syscon=* | --sysco=* | --sysc=* | --sys=* | --sy=*)
+    sysconfdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -target | --target | --targe | --targ | --tar | --ta | --t)
+    ac_prev=target ;;
+  -target=* | --target=* | --targe=* | --targ=* | --tar=* | --ta=* | --t=*)
+    target="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -v | -verbose | --verbose | --verbos | --verbo | --verb)
+    verbose=yes ;;
+
+  -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers)
+    echo "configure generated by autoconf version 2.13"
+    exit 0 ;;
+
+  -with-* | --with-*)
+    ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*with-//' -e 's/=.*//'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then
+      { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+    fi
+    ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+    case "$ac_option" in
+      *=*) ;;
+      *) ac_optarg=yes ;;
+    esac
+    eval "with_${ac_package}='$ac_optarg'" ;;
+
+  -without-* | --without-*)
+    ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*without-//'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then
+      { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+    fi
+    ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+    eval "with_${ac_package}=no" ;;
+
+  --x)
+    # Obsolete; use --with-x.
+    with_x=yes ;;
+
+  -x-includes | --x-includes | --x-include | --x-includ | --x-inclu \
+  | --x-incl | --x-inc | --x-in | --x-i)
+    ac_prev=x_includes ;;
+  -x-includes=* | --x-includes=* | --x-include=* | --x-includ=* | --x-inclu=* \
+  | --x-incl=* | --x-inc=* | --x-in=* | --x-i=*)
+    x_includes="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -x-libraries | --x-libraries | --x-librarie | --x-librari \
+  | --x-librar | --x-libra | --x-libr | --x-lib | --x-li | --x-l)
+    ac_prev=x_libraries ;;
+  -x-libraries=* | --x-libraries=* | --x-librarie=* | --x-librari=* \
+  | --x-librar=* | --x-libra=* | --x-libr=* | --x-lib=* | --x-li=* | --x-l=*)
+    x_libraries="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+  -*) { echo "configure: error: $ac_option: invalid option; use --help to show usage" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+    ;;
+
+  *)
+    if test -n "`echo $ac_option| sed 's/[-a-z0-9.]//g'`"; then
+      echo "configure: warning: $ac_option: invalid host type" 1>&2
+    fi
+    if test "x$nonopt" != xNONE; then
+      { echo "configure: error: can only configure for one host and one target at a time" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+    fi
+    nonopt="$ac_option"
+    ;;
+
+  esac
+done
+
+if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
+  { echo "configure: error: missing argument to --`echo $ac_prev | sed 's/_/-/g'`" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+
+trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# File descriptor usage:
+# 0 standard input
+# 1 file creation
+# 2 errors and warnings
+# 3 some systems may open it to /dev/tty
+# 4 used on the Kubota Titan
+# 6 checking for... messages and results
+# 5 compiler messages saved in config.log
+if test "$silent" = yes; then
+  exec 6>/dev/null
+else
+  exec 6>&1
+fi
+exec 5>./config.log
+
+echo "\
+This file contains any messages produced by compilers while
+running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake.
+" 1>&5
+
+# Strip out --no-create and --no-recursion so they do not pile up.
+# Also quote any args containing shell metacharacters.
+ac_configure_args=
+for ac_arg
+do
+  case "$ac_arg" in
+  -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \
+  | --no-cr | --no-c) ;;
+  -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \
+  | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r) ;;
+  *" "*|*"	"*|*[\[\]\~\#\$\^\&\*\(\)\{\}\\\|\;\<\>\?]*)
+  ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args '$ac_arg'" ;;
+  *) ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args $ac_arg" ;;
+  esac
+done
+
+# NLS nuisances.
+# Only set these to C if already set.  These must not be set unconditionally
+# because not all systems understand e.g. LANG=C (notably SCO).
+# Fixing LC_MESSAGES prevents Solaris sh from translating var values in `set'!
+# Non-C LC_CTYPE values break the ctype check.
+if test "${LANG+set}"   = set; then LANG=C;   export LANG;   fi
+if test "${LC_ALL+set}" = set; then LC_ALL=C; export LC_ALL; fi
+if test "${LC_MESSAGES+set}" = set; then LC_MESSAGES=C; export LC_MESSAGES; fi
+if test "${LC_CTYPE+set}"    = set; then LC_CTYPE=C;    export LC_CTYPE;    fi
+
+# confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed.
+rm -rf conftest* confdefs.h
+# AIX cpp loses on an empty file, so make sure it contains at least a newline.
+echo > confdefs.h
+
+# A filename unique to this package, relative to the directory that
+# configure is in, which we can look for to find out if srcdir is correct.
+ac_unique_file=getline.c
+
+# Find the source files, if location was not specified.
+if test -z "$srcdir"; then
+  ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes
+  # Try the directory containing this script, then its parent.
+  ac_prog=$0
+  ac_confdir=`echo $ac_prog|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'`
+  test "x$ac_confdir" = "x$ac_prog" && ac_confdir=.
+  srcdir=$ac_confdir
+  if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then
+    srcdir=..
+  fi
+else
+  ac_srcdir_defaulted=no
+fi
+if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then
+  if test "$ac_srcdir_defaulted" = yes; then
+    { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $ac_confdir or .." 1>&2; exit 1; }
+  else
+    { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $srcdir" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+  fi
+fi
+srcdir=`echo "${srcdir}" | sed 's%\([^/]\)/*$%\1%'`
+
+# Prefer explicitly selected file to automatically selected ones.
+if test -z "$CONFIG_SITE"; then
+  if test "x$prefix" != xNONE; then
+    CONFIG_SITE="$prefix/share/config.site $prefix/etc/config.site"
+  else
+    CONFIG_SITE="$ac_default_prefix/share/config.site $ac_default_prefix/etc/config.site"
+  fi
+fi
+for ac_site_file in $CONFIG_SITE; do
+  if test -r "$ac_site_file"; then
+    echo "loading site script $ac_site_file"
+    . "$ac_site_file"
+  fi
+done
+
+if test -r "$cache_file"; then
+  echo "loading cache $cache_file"
+  . $cache_file
+else
+  echo "creating cache $cache_file"
+  > $cache_file
+fi
+
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+ac_exeext=
+ac_objext=o
+if (echo "testing\c"; echo 1,2,3) | grep c >/dev/null; then
+  # Stardent Vistra SVR4 grep lacks -e, says ghazi@caip.rutgers.edu.
+  if (echo -n testing; echo 1,2,3) | sed s/-n/xn/ | grep xn >/dev/null; then
+    ac_n= ac_c='
+' ac_t='	'
+  else
+    ac_n=-n ac_c= ac_t=
+  fi
+else
+  ac_n= ac_c='\c' ac_t=
+fi
+
+
+
+
+
+MAJOR_VER="1"
+
+
+
+MINOR_VER="4"
+
+
+
+MICRO_VER="1"
+
+
+CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+# Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:543: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+  ac_dummy="$PATH"
+  for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
+    test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+    if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+      ac_cv_prog_CC="gcc"
+      break
+    fi
+  done
+  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+fi
+fi
+CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "cc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cc; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:573: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+  ac_prog_rejected=no
+  ac_dummy="$PATH"
+  for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
+    test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+    if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+      if test "$ac_dir/$ac_word" = "/usr/ucb/cc"; then
+        ac_prog_rejected=yes
+	continue
+      fi
+      ac_cv_prog_CC="cc"
+      break
+    fi
+  done
+  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+if test $ac_prog_rejected = yes; then
+  # We found a bogon in the path, so make sure we never use it.
+  set dummy $ac_cv_prog_CC
+  shift
+  if test $# -gt 0; then
+    # We chose a different compiler from the bogus one.
+    # However, it has the same basename, so the bogon will be chosen
+    # first if we set CC to just the basename; use the full file name.
+    shift
+    set dummy "$ac_dir/$ac_word" "$@"
+    shift
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="$@"
+  fi
+fi
+fi
+fi
+CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+  if test -z "$CC"; then
+    case "`uname -s`" in
+    *win32* | *WIN32*)
+      # Extract the first word of "cl", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cl; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:624: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+  ac_dummy="$PATH"
+  for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
+    test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+    if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+      ac_cv_prog_CC="cl"
+      break
+    fi
+  done
+  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+fi
+fi
+CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+ ;;
+    esac
+  fi
+  test -z "$CC" && { echo "configure: error: no acceptable cc found in \$PATH" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:656: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works" >&5
+
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext << EOF
+
+#line 667 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+
+main(){return(0);}
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:672: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_works=yes
+  # If we can't run a trivial program, we are probably using a cross compiler.
+  if (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
+    ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=no
+  else
+    ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=yes
+  fi
+else
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_works=no
+fi
+rm -fr conftest*
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_works" 1>&6
+if test $ac_cv_prog_cc_works = no; then
+  { echo "configure: error: installation or configuration problem: C compiler cannot create executables." 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:698: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler" >&5
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross" 1>&6
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+echo $ac_n "checking whether we are using GNU C""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:703: checking whether we are using GNU C" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gcc'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  cat > conftest.c <<EOF
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+  yes;
+#endif
+EOF
+if { ac_try='${CC-cc} -E conftest.c'; { (eval echo configure:712: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }; } | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  ac_cv_prog_gcc=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_prog_gcc=no
+fi
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gcc" 1>&6
+
+if test $ac_cv_prog_gcc = yes; then
+  GCC=yes
+else
+  GCC=
+fi
+
+ac_test_CFLAGS="${CFLAGS+set}"
+ac_save_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+CFLAGS=
+echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:731: checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_cc_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  echo 'void f(){}' > conftest.c
+if test -z "`${CC-cc} -g -c conftest.c 2>&1`"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_g=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_g" 1>&6
+if test "$ac_test_CFLAGS" = set; then
+  CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS"
+elif test $ac_cv_prog_cc_g = yes; then
+  if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+    CFLAGS="-g -O2"
+  else
+    CFLAGS="-g"
+  fi
+else
+  if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+    CFLAGS="-O2"
+  else
+    CFLAGS=
+  fi
+fi
+
+
+
+echo $ac_n "checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \${MAKE}""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:765: checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \${MAKE}" >&5
+set dummy ${MAKE-make}; ac_make=`echo "$2" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  cat > conftestmake <<\EOF
+all:
+	@echo 'ac_maketemp="${MAKE}"'
+EOF
+# GNU make sometimes prints "make[1]: Entering...", which would confuse us.
+eval `${MAKE-make} -f conftestmake 2>/dev/null | grep temp=`
+if test -n "$ac_maketemp"; then
+  eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=yes
+else
+  eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=no
+fi
+rm -f conftestmake
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_prog_make_'${ac_make}_set`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  SET_MAKE=
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+  SET_MAKE="MAKE=${MAKE-make}"
+fi
+
+
+
+echo $ac_n "checking whether ln -s works""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:794: checking whether ln -s works" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_LN_S'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  rm -f conftestdata
+if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null
+then
+  rm -f conftestdata
+  ac_cv_prog_LN_S="ln -s"
+else
+  ac_cv_prog_LN_S=ln
+fi
+fi
+LN_S="$ac_cv_prog_LN_S"
+if test "$ac_cv_prog_LN_S" = "ln -s"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+
+
+for ac_prog in gawk mawk nawk awk
+do
+# Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:821: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_AWK'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  if test -n "$AWK"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_AWK="$AWK" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+  ac_dummy="$PATH"
+  for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
+    test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+    if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+      ac_cv_prog_AWK="$ac_prog"
+      break
+    fi
+  done
+  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+fi
+fi
+AWK="$ac_cv_prog_AWK"
+if test -n "$AWK"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""$AWK" 1>&6
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+test -n "$AWK" && break
+done
+
+
+
+# Extract the first word of "ranlib", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ranlib; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:855: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_RANLIB'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  if test -n "$RANLIB"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="$RANLIB" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+  ac_dummy="$PATH"
+  for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
+    test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+    if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+      ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="ranlib"
+      break
+    fi
+  done
+  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+  test -z "$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB" && ac_cv_prog_RANLIB=":"
+fi
+fi
+RANLIB="$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB"
+if test -n "$RANLIB"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""$RANLIB" 1>&6
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+
+
+ac_aux_dir=
+for ac_dir in $srcdir $srcdir/.. $srcdir/../..; do
+  if test -f $ac_dir/install-sh; then
+    ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
+    ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install-sh -c"
+    break
+  elif test -f $ac_dir/install.sh; then
+    ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
+    ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install.sh -c"
+    break
+  fi
+done
+if test -z "$ac_aux_dir"; then
+  { echo "configure: error: can not find install-sh or install.sh in $srcdir $srcdir/.. $srcdir/../.." 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+ac_config_guess=$ac_aux_dir/config.guess
+ac_config_sub=$ac_aux_dir/config.sub
+ac_configure=$ac_aux_dir/configure # This should be Cygnus configure.
+
+
+# Do some error checking and defaulting for the host and target type.
+# The inputs are:
+#    configure --host=HOST --target=TARGET --build=BUILD NONOPT
+#
+# The rules are:
+# 1. You are not allowed to specify --host, --target, and nonopt at the
+#    same time.
+# 2. Host defaults to nonopt.
+# 3. If nonopt is not specified, then host defaults to the current host,
+#    as determined by config.guess.
+# 4. Target and build default to nonopt.
+# 5. If nonopt is not specified, then target and build default to host.
+
+# The aliases save the names the user supplied, while $host etc.
+# will get canonicalized.
+case $host---$target---$nonopt in
+NONE---*---* | *---NONE---* | *---*---NONE) ;;
+*) { echo "configure: error: can only configure for one host and one target at a time" 1>&2; exit 1; } ;;
+esac
+
+
+# Make sure we can run config.sub.
+if ${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $ac_config_sub sun4 >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
+else { echo "configure: error: can not run $ac_config_sub" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+
+echo $ac_n "checking host system type""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:931: checking host system type" >&5
+
+host_alias=$host
+case "$host_alias" in
+NONE)
+  case $nonopt in
+  NONE)
+    if host_alias=`${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $ac_config_guess`; then :
+    else { echo "configure: error: can not guess host type; you must specify one" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+    fi ;;
+  *) host_alias=$nonopt ;;
+  esac ;;
+esac
+
+host=`${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $ac_config_sub $host_alias`
+host_cpu=`echo $host | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\1/'`
+host_vendor=`echo $host | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\2/'`
+host_os=`echo $host | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\3/'`
+echo "$ac_t""$host" 1>&6
+
+echo $ac_n "checking target system type""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:952: checking target system type" >&5
+
+target_alias=$target
+case "$target_alias" in
+NONE)
+  case $nonopt in
+  NONE) target_alias=$host_alias ;;
+  *) target_alias=$nonopt ;;
+  esac ;;
+esac
+
+target=`${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $ac_config_sub $target_alias`
+target_cpu=`echo $target | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\1/'`
+target_vendor=`echo $target | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\2/'`
+target_os=`echo $target | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\3/'`
+echo "$ac_t""$target" 1>&6
+
+echo $ac_n "checking build system type""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:970: checking build system type" >&5
+
+build_alias=$build
+case "$build_alias" in
+NONE)
+  case $nonopt in
+  NONE) build_alias=$host_alias ;;
+  *) build_alias=$nonopt ;;
+  esac ;;
+esac
+
+build=`${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $ac_config_sub $build_alias`
+build_cpu=`echo $build | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\1/'`
+build_vendor=`echo $build | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\2/'`
+build_os=`echo $build | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\3/'`
+echo "$ac_t""$build" 1>&6
+
+test "$host_alias" != "$target_alias" &&
+  test "$program_prefix$program_suffix$program_transform_name" = \
+    NONENONEs,x,x, &&
+  program_prefix=${target_alias}-
+
+
+
+case $target in
+*-sun-solaris2.[0-6]|*-sun-solaris2.[0-6].*)
+  LIBS="$LIBS -L/usr/ccs/lib"
+  ;;
+esac
+
+
+echo $ac_n "checking how to run the C preprocessor""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1002: checking how to run the C preprocessor" >&5
+# On Suns, sometimes $CPP names a directory.
+if test -n "$CPP" && test -d "$CPP"; then
+  CPP=
+fi
+if test -z "$CPP"; then
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CPP'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+    # This must be in double quotes, not single quotes, because CPP may get
+  # substituted into the Makefile and "${CC-cc}" will confuse make.
+  CPP="${CC-cc} -E"
+  # On the NeXT, cc -E runs the code through the compiler's parser,
+  # not just through cpp.
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1017 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <assert.h>
+Syntax Error
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1023: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  :
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  CPP="${CC-cc} -E -traditional-cpp"
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1034 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <assert.h>
+Syntax Error
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1040: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  :
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  CPP="${CC-cc} -nologo -E"
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1051 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <assert.h>
+Syntax Error
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1057: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  :
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  CPP=/lib/cpp
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+  ac_cv_prog_CPP="$CPP"
+fi
+  CPP="$ac_cv_prog_CPP"
+else
+  ac_cv_prog_CPP="$CPP"
+fi
+echo "$ac_t""$CPP" 1>&6
+
+echo $ac_n "checking for tigetstr in -lcurses""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1082: checking for tigetstr in -lcurses" >&5
+ac_lib_var=`echo curses'_'tigetstr | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+LIBS="-lcurses  $LIBS"
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1090 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+/* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error.  */
+/* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2
+    builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+char tigetstr();
+
+int main() {
+tigetstr()
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1101: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=yes"
+else
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_lib_'$ac_lib_var`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define USE_TERMINFO 1
+EOF
+
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lcurses"
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+echo $ac_n "checking for tigetstr in -lncurses""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1126: checking for tigetstr in -lncurses" >&5
+ac_lib_var=`echo ncurses'_'tigetstr | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+LIBS="-lncurses  $LIBS"
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1134 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+/* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error.  */
+/* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2
+    builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+char tigetstr();
+
+int main() {
+tigetstr()
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1145: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=yes"
+else
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_lib_'$ac_lib_var`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define USE_TERMINFO 1
+EOF
+
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lncurses"
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+echo $ac_n "checking for tgetstr in -lcurses""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1170: checking for tgetstr in -lcurses" >&5
+ac_lib_var=`echo curses'_'tgetstr | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+LIBS="-lcurses  $LIBS"
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1178 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+/* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error.  */
+/* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2
+    builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+char tgetstr();
+
+int main() {
+tgetstr()
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1189: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=yes"
+else
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_lib_'$ac_lib_var`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define USE_TERMCAP 1
+EOF
+
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lcurses"
+  ac_safe=`echo "termcap.h" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+echo $ac_n "checking for termcap.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1212: checking for termcap.h" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1217 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <termcap.h>
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1222: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes"
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_TERMCAP_H 1
+EOF
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+fi
+
+fi
+
+
+
+ac_safe=`echo "term.h" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+echo $ac_n "checking for term.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1259: checking for term.h" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1264 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <term.h>
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1269: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes"
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_TERM_H 1
+EOF
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+
+  ac_safe=`echo "ncurses/term.h" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+echo $ac_n "checking for ncurses/term.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1294: checking for ncurses/term.h" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1299 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <ncurses/term.h>
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1304: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes"
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_NCURSES_TERM_H 1
+EOF
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+
+fi
+
+
+
+ac_safe=`echo "curses.h" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+echo $ac_n "checking for curses.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1335: checking for curses.h" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1340 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <curses.h>
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1345: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes"
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_CURSES_H 1
+EOF
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+
+  ac_safe=`echo "ncurses/curses.h" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+echo $ac_n "checking for ncurses/curses.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1370: checking for ncurses/curses.h" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1375 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <ncurses/curses.h>
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1380: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes"
+else
+  echo "$ac_err" >&5
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then
+  echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_NCURSES_CURSES_H 1
+EOF
+
+else
+  echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+
+fi
+
+
+
+
+TARGETS="normal reentrant"
+
+
+echo $ac_n "checking for reentrant functions""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1414: checking for reentrant functions" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'tecla_cv_reentrant'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  
+  KEPT_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -D_POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L"
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1422 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+  
+int main() {
+
+    (void) readdir_r(NULL, NULL, NULL);
+    (void) getpwuid_r(geteuid(), NULL, NULL, 0, NULL);
+    (void) getpwnam_r(NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, NULL);
+  
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1439: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  tecla_cv_reentrant=yes
+else
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  tecla_cv_reentrant=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+  CFLAGS="$KEPT_CFLAGS"
+
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$tecla_cv_reentrant" 1>&6
+
+
+if test $tecla_cv_reentrant = no; then
+  TARGETS="normal"
+fi
+
+
+echo $ac_n "checking for select system call""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1462: checking for select system call" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'tecla_cv_select'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1468 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT_H
+#include <select.h>
+#endif
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+  
+int main() {
+
+    fd_set fds;
+    int nready;
+    FD_ZERO(&fds);
+    FD_SET(1, &fds);
+    nready = select(2, &fds, &fds, &fds, NULL);
+  
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1488: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  tecla_cv_select=yes
+else
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  tecla_cv_select=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$tecla_cv_select" 1>&6
+
+
+if test $tecla_cv_select = yes; then
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_SELECT 1
+EOF
+
+fi
+
+
+echo $ac_n "checking for SysV pseudo-terminals""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1513: checking for SysV pseudo-terminals" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'tecla_cv_sysv_pty'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  
+  cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1519 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stropts.h>
+  
+int main() {
+
+    char *name = ptsname(0);
+    int i1 = grantpt(0);
+    int i2 = unlockpt(0);
+    int i3 = ioctl(0, I_PUSH, "ptem");
+    return 0;
+  
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1536: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  tecla_cv_sysv_pty=yes
+else
+  echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+  cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+  rm -rf conftest*
+  tecla_cv_sysv_pty=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$tecla_cv_sysv_pty" 1>&6
+
+
+if test $tecla_cv_sysv_pty = yes; then
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_SYSV_PTY 1
+EOF
+
+fi
+
+
+
+SHARED_EXT=""
+
+
+
+SHARED_ALT=""
+
+
+
+SHARED_CFLAGS=""
+
+
+
+LINK_SHARED=""
+
+
+case $target in
+*solaris*)
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define __EXTENSIONS__ 1
+EOF
+
+  SHARED_EXT=".so.${MAJOR_VER}"
+  SHARED_ALT=".so"
+  LINK_SHARED='ld -G -M $$(srcdir)/libtecla.map -o $$@ -h $$(@F) -z defs -i $$(LIB_OBJECTS) $$(LIBS) -lc'
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="-Kpic"
+  case $CC in
+  */cc|cc) SHARED_CFLAGS="$SHARED_CFLAGS -xstrconst" ;;
+  gcc) CFLAGS="-I/usr/include $CFLAGS" ;;
+  esac
+  case $target in
+  *sparc*) SHARED_CFLAGS="$SHARED_CFLAGS -xregs=no%appl"
+  esac
+  ;;
+*linux*)
+  SHARED_EXT=".so.${MAJOR_VER}.${MINOR_VER}.${MICRO_VER}"
+  SHARED_ALT=".so .so.${MAJOR_VER}"
+
+
+  echo $ac_n "checking for --version-script in GNU ld""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1600: checking for --version-script in GNU ld" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+  
+    if (echo 'void dummy(void) {return;}' > dummy.c; $CC -c -fpic dummy.c; \
+         ld -o dummy.so dummy.o -shared --version-script=$srcdir/libtecla.map) 1>&2 2>/dev/null; then
+      tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script=yes
+    else
+      tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script=no
+    fi
+    rm -f dummy.c dummy.o dummy.so
+  
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script" 1>&6
+  if test $tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script = yes; then
+    VERSION_OPT='--version-script=$$(srcdir)/libtecla.map'
+  else
+    VERSION_OPT=''
+  fi
+
+  LINK_SHARED='ld -o $$@ -soname libtecla$$(SUFFIX).so.'${MAJOR_VER}' -shared '$VERSION_OPT' $$(LIB_OBJECTS) $$(LIBS) -lc'
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="-fpic"
+  ;;
+*hpux*)
+  SHARED_EXT=".${MAJOR_VER}"
+  SHARED_ALT=".sl"
+  LINK_SHARED='ld -b +h $$(@F) +k +vshlibunsats -o $$@ -c libtecla.map.opt $$(LIB_OBJECTS) $$(LIBS) -lc'
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="+z"
+  ;;
+*dec-osf*)
+  cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define _OSF_SOURCE 1
+EOF
+
+  ;;
+esac
+
+
+if test "$GCC"_ = "yes"_ && test "$LINK_SHARED"_ != "_" ; then
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="-fpic"
+  case $target_os in
+  sparc*solaris*) SHARED_CFLAGS="$SHARED_CFLAGS -mno-app-regs"
+  esac
+  LINK_SHARED="$LINK_SHARED `gcc -print-libgcc-file-name`"
+fi
+
+
+
+
+
+if test "$LINK_SHARED"_ != "_"; then
+  TARGET_LIBS="static shared"
+else
+  TARGET_LIBS="static"
+  LINK_SHARED="@:"
+fi
+
+
+trap '' 1 2 15
+cat > confcache <<\EOF
+# This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure
+# tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure
+# scripts and configure runs.  It is not useful on other systems.
+# If it contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
+#
+# By default, configure uses ./config.cache as the cache file,
+# creating it if it does not exist already.  You can give configure
+# the --cache-file=FILE option to use a different cache file; that is
+# what configure does when it calls configure scripts in
+# subdirectories, so they share the cache.
+# Giving --cache-file=/dev/null disables caching, for debugging configure.
+# config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it the
+# --recheck option to rerun configure.
+#
+EOF
+# The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values,
+# but we know of no workaround that is simple, portable, and efficient.
+# So, don't put newlines in cache variables' values.
+# Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly,
+# and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars.
+(set) 2>&1 |
+  case `(ac_space=' '; set | grep ac_space) 2>&1` in
+  *ac_space=\ *)
+    # `set' does not quote correctly, so add quotes (double-quote substitution
+    # turns \\\\ into \\, and sed turns \\ into \).
+    sed -n \
+      -e "s/'/'\\\\''/g" \
+      -e "s/^\\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1=\${\\1='\\2'}/p"
+    ;;
+  *)
+    # `set' quotes correctly as required by POSIX, so do not add quotes.
+    sed -n -e 's/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=\(.*\)/\1=${\1=\2}/p'
+    ;;
+  esac >> confcache
+if cmp -s $cache_file confcache; then
+  :
+else
+  if test -w $cache_file; then
+    echo "updating cache $cache_file"
+    cat confcache > $cache_file
+  else
+    echo "not updating unwritable cache $cache_file"
+  fi
+fi
+rm -f confcache
+
+trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix=$ac_default_prefix
+# Let make expand exec_prefix.
+test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix='${prefix}'
+
+# Any assignment to VPATH causes Sun make to only execute
+# the first set of double-colon rules, so remove it if not needed.
+# If there is a colon in the path, we need to keep it.
+if test "x$srcdir" = x.; then
+  ac_vpsub='/^[ 	]*VPATH[ 	]*=[^:]*$/d'
+fi
+
+trap 'rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# Transform confdefs.h into DEFS.
+# Protect against shell expansion while executing Makefile rules.
+# Protect against Makefile macro expansion.
+cat > conftest.defs <<\EOF
+s%#define \([A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]*\) *\(.*\)%-D\1=\2%g
+s%[ 	`~#$^&*(){}\\|;'"<>?]%\\&%g
+s%\[%\\&%g
+s%\]%\\&%g
+s%\$%$$%g
+EOF
+DEFS=`sed -f conftest.defs confdefs.h | tr '\012' ' '`
+rm -f conftest.defs
+
+
+# Without the "./", some shells look in PATH for config.status.
+: ${CONFIG_STATUS=./config.status}
+
+echo creating $CONFIG_STATUS
+rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS
+cat > $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+#! /bin/sh
+# Generated automatically by configure.
+# Run this file to recreate the current configuration.
+# This directory was configured as follows,
+# on host `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`:
+#
+# $0 $ac_configure_args
+#
+# Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging
+# configure, is in ./config.log if it exists.
+
+ac_cs_usage="Usage: $CONFIG_STATUS [--recheck] [--version] [--help]"
+for ac_option
+do
+  case "\$ac_option" in
+  -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r)
+    echo "running \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion"
+    exec \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion ;;
+  -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v)
+    echo "$CONFIG_STATUS generated by autoconf version 2.13"
+    exit 0 ;;
+  -help | --help | --hel | --he | --h)
+    echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 0 ;;
+  *) echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 1 ;;
+  esac
+done
+
+ac_given_srcdir=$srcdir
+
+trap 'rm -fr `echo "Makefile" | sed "s/:[^ ]*//g"` conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+
+# Protect against being on the right side of a sed subst in config.status.
+sed 's/%@/@@/; s/@%/@@/; s/%g\$/@g/; /@g\$/s/[\\\\&%]/\\\\&/g;
+ s/@@/%@/; s/@@/@%/; s/@g\$/%g/' > conftest.subs <<\\CEOF
+$ac_vpsub
+$extrasub
+s%@SHELL@%$SHELL%g
+s%@CFLAGS@%$CFLAGS%g
+s%@CPPFLAGS@%$CPPFLAGS%g
+s%@CXXFLAGS@%$CXXFLAGS%g
+s%@FFLAGS@%$FFLAGS%g
+s%@DEFS@%$DEFS%g
+s%@LDFLAGS@%$LDFLAGS%g
+s%@LIBS@%$LIBS%g
+s%@exec_prefix@%$exec_prefix%g
+s%@prefix@%$prefix%g
+s%@program_transform_name@%$program_transform_name%g
+s%@bindir@%$bindir%g
+s%@sbindir@%$sbindir%g
+s%@libexecdir@%$libexecdir%g
+s%@datadir@%$datadir%g
+s%@sysconfdir@%$sysconfdir%g
+s%@sharedstatedir@%$sharedstatedir%g
+s%@localstatedir@%$localstatedir%g
+s%@libdir@%$libdir%g
+s%@includedir@%$includedir%g
+s%@oldincludedir@%$oldincludedir%g
+s%@infodir@%$infodir%g
+s%@mandir@%$mandir%g
+s%@MAJOR_VER@%$MAJOR_VER%g
+s%@MINOR_VER@%$MINOR_VER%g
+s%@MICRO_VER@%$MICRO_VER%g
+s%@CC@%$CC%g
+s%@SET_MAKE@%$SET_MAKE%g
+s%@LN_S@%$LN_S%g
+s%@AWK@%$AWK%g
+s%@RANLIB@%$RANLIB%g
+s%@host@%$host%g
+s%@host_alias@%$host_alias%g
+s%@host_cpu@%$host_cpu%g
+s%@host_vendor@%$host_vendor%g
+s%@host_os@%$host_os%g
+s%@target@%$target%g
+s%@target_alias@%$target_alias%g
+s%@target_cpu@%$target_cpu%g
+s%@target_vendor@%$target_vendor%g
+s%@target_os@%$target_os%g
+s%@build@%$build%g
+s%@build_alias@%$build_alias%g
+s%@build_cpu@%$build_cpu%g
+s%@build_vendor@%$build_vendor%g
+s%@build_os@%$build_os%g
+s%@CPP@%$CPP%g
+s%@TARGETS@%$TARGETS%g
+s%@SHARED_EXT@%$SHARED_EXT%g
+s%@SHARED_ALT@%$SHARED_ALT%g
+s%@SHARED_CFLAGS@%$SHARED_CFLAGS%g
+s%@LINK_SHARED@%$LINK_SHARED%g
+s%@TARGET_LIBS@%$TARGET_LIBS%g
+
+CEOF
+EOF
+
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
+
+# Split the substitutions into bite-sized pieces for seds with
+# small command number limits, like on Digital OSF/1 and HP-UX.
+ac_max_sed_cmds=90 # Maximum number of lines to put in a sed script.
+ac_file=1 # Number of current file.
+ac_beg=1 # First line for current file.
+ac_end=$ac_max_sed_cmds # Line after last line for current file.
+ac_more_lines=:
+ac_sed_cmds=""
+while $ac_more_lines; do
+  if test $ac_beg -gt 1; then
+    sed "1,${ac_beg}d; ${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+  else
+    sed "${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+  fi
+  if test ! -s conftest.s$ac_file; then
+    ac_more_lines=false
+    rm -f conftest.s$ac_file
+  else
+    if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+      ac_sed_cmds="sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+    else
+      ac_sed_cmds="$ac_sed_cmds | sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+    fi
+    ac_file=`expr $ac_file + 1`
+    ac_beg=$ac_end
+    ac_end=`expr $ac_end + $ac_max_sed_cmds`
+  fi
+done
+if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+  ac_sed_cmds=cat
+fi
+EOF
+
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+
+CONFIG_FILES=\${CONFIG_FILES-"Makefile"}
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
+for ac_file in .. $CONFIG_FILES; do if test "x$ac_file" != x..; then
+  # Support "outfile[:infile[:infile...]]", defaulting infile="outfile.in".
+  case "$ac_file" in
+  *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%[^:]*:%%'`
+       ac_file=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%:.*%%'` ;;
+  *) ac_file_in="${ac_file}.in" ;;
+  esac
+
+  # Adjust a relative srcdir, top_srcdir, and INSTALL for subdirectories.
+
+  # Remove last slash and all that follows it.  Not all systems have dirname.
+  ac_dir=`echo $ac_file|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'`
+  if test "$ac_dir" != "$ac_file" && test "$ac_dir" != .; then
+    # The file is in a subdirectory.
+    test ! -d "$ac_dir" && mkdir "$ac_dir"
+    ac_dir_suffix="/`echo $ac_dir|sed 's%^\./%%'`"
+    # A "../" for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix.
+    ac_dots=`echo $ac_dir_suffix|sed 's%/[^/]*%../%g'`
+  else
+    ac_dir_suffix= ac_dots=
+  fi
+
+  case "$ac_given_srcdir" in
+  .)  srcdir=.
+      if test -z "$ac_dots"; then top_srcdir=.
+      else top_srcdir=`echo $ac_dots|sed 's%/$%%'`; fi ;;
+  /*) srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"; top_srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir" ;;
+  *) # Relative path.
+    srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"
+    top_srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir" ;;
+  esac
+
+
+  echo creating "$ac_file"
+  rm -f "$ac_file"
+  configure_input="Generated automatically from `echo $ac_file_in|sed 's%.*/%%'` by configure."
+  case "$ac_file" in
+  *Makefile*) ac_comsub="1i\\
+# $configure_input" ;;
+  *) ac_comsub= ;;
+  esac
+
+  ac_file_inputs=`echo $ac_file_in|sed -e "s%^%$ac_given_srcdir/%" -e "s%:% $ac_given_srcdir/%g"`
+  sed -e "$ac_comsub
+s%@configure_input@%$configure_input%g
+s%@srcdir@%$srcdir%g
+s%@top_srcdir@%$top_srcdir%g
+" $ac_file_inputs | (eval "$ac_sed_cmds") > $ac_file
+fi; done
+rm -f conftest.s*
+
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
+
+exit 0
+EOF
+chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS
+rm -fr confdefs* $ac_clean_files
+test "$no_create" = yes || ${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $CONFIG_STATUS || exit 1
+
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/configure.in b/libtecla-1.4.1/configure.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b083b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/configure.in
@@ -0,0 +1,412 @@
+dnl This is the input file which autoconf uses to construct a
+dnl "configure" script for the tecla library. It is a bourne shell
+dnl script which autoconf pre-processes with the m4 preprocessor to
+dnl expand autoconf-defined m4 macros such as AC_INIT().  The
+dnl following line just initializes autoconf. Autoconf interprets the
+dnl single argument as the name of an arbitrary file, which it uses to
+dnl ensure that it is being run correctly from the directory which
+dnl contains the libtecla source code.
+
+AC_INIT(getline.c)
+
+dnl Here we set the major version number of the tecla library.
+dnl Incrementing this number implies that a change has been made to
+dnl the library's public interface, which makes it binary incompatible
+dnl with programs that were linked with previous shared versions of
+dnl the tecla library.  Incompatible changes of this type should be
+dnl avoided at all costs, so it is hoped that the major version number
+dnl won't ever have to change. The major version number must be a
+dnl small integer number, preferably a single numeric digit.
+
+AC_SUBST(MAJOR_VER)
+MAJOR_VER="1"
+
+dnl Set the minor version number of the tecla library. This number
+dnl should be incremented by one whenever additional functionality,
+dnl such as new functions or modules, are added to the library. The
+dnl idea is that a program that was linked with a shared library of
+dnl the same major version number, but a lower minor version number,
+dnl will continue to function when the run-time loader links it
+dnl against the updated version.  The minor version number must be a
+dnl small integer number, which should be reset to 0 whenever the
+dnl major version number is incremented.
+
+AC_SUBST(MINOR_VER)
+MINOR_VER="4"
+
+dnl Set the micro version number of the tecla library. This is
+dnl incremented whenever modifications to the library are made which
+dnl make no changes to the public interface, but which fix bugs and/or
+dnl improve the behind-the-scenes implementation.  The micro version
+dnl number should be reset to 0 whenever the minor version number is
+dnl incremented.  The micro version number must be a small integer
+dnl number.
+
+AC_SUBST(MICRO_VER)
+MICRO_VER="1"
+
+dnl The AC_PROG_CC line looks for a C compiler, and if gcc is chosen,
+dnl sets the $GCC shell variable to "yes". Make sure that CFLAGS is
+dnl set to something first, to prevent AC_PROG_CC from substituting -g
+dnl for the optimization level.
+
+CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+AC_PROG_CC
+
+dnl Apparently not all implementations of the 'make' command define
+dnl the MAKE variable. The following directive creates a variable
+dnl called SET_MAKE which when expanded in a makefile is either empty
+dnl if the local 'make' command was found to define the MAKE variable,
+dnl or contains an assignment which will give the MAKE variable the
+dnl value 'make'.
+
+AC_PROG_MAKE_SET
+
+dnl The following directive causes autoconf to see if symbolic links
+dnl are supported on the current filesystem. If so, it sets the
+dnl variable LN_S to "ln -s". Otherwise it sets LN_S to just "ln".
+dnl This allows us to create symbolic links where possible, but falls
+dnl back to creating hard links where symbolic links aren't available.
+
+AC_PROG_LN_S
+
+dnl The following macro searches for the best implementation of awk
+dnl on the host system, and records it in the AWK shell variable.
+
+AC_PROG_AWK
+
+dnl If ranlib is needed on the target system, the RANLIB make variable
+dnl is set to ranlib. Otherwise it is set to :, which is the do-nothing
+dnl command of the bourne shell.
+
+AC_PROG_RANLIB
+
+dnl The following directive tells autoconf to figure out the target
+dnl system type and assign a canonical name for this to the $target
+dnl shell variable. This is used below in the target-specific case
+dnl statement.
+
+AC_CANONICAL_SYSTEM
+
+dnl In early versions of Solaris, some libraries are in /usr/ccs/lib,
+dnl where gcc doesn't look. The tests below for the curses library
+dnl would thus fail without this directory being added to the search
+dnl path. We thus add it here before the tests. Note that in the
+dnl following, since [ and ] are m4 quotes, and m4 will remove the
+dnl outermost quotes when it processes this file, we have to double
+dnl them up here to get [0-6] to appear in the output configure
+dnl script.
+
+case $target in
+*-sun-solaris2.[[0-6]]|*-sun-solaris2.[[0-6]].*)
+  LIBS="$LIBS -L/usr/ccs/lib"
+  ;;
+esac
+
+dnl The following lines look for terminfo functions in the normal
+dnl curses library. If not found, they are searched for in the GNU
+dnl ncurses library. If the terminfo functions still aren't found,
+dnl then termcap functions are searched for in the curses library.  If
+dnl either set of functions is found, the corresponding variable
+dnl USE_TERMINFO or USE_TERMCAP is arranged to be defined in CFLAGS,
+dnl via the exported DEFINES shell variable, and the library in which
+dnl they were found is appended to the LIBS shell variable.
+
+AC_CHECK_LIB(curses, tigetstr, [
+  AC_DEFINE(USE_TERMINFO)
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lcurses"
+], [AC_CHECK_LIB(ncurses, tigetstr, [
+  AC_DEFINE(USE_TERMINFO)
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lncurses"
+], [AC_CHECK_LIB(curses, tgetstr, [
+  AC_DEFINE(USE_TERMCAP)
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lcurses"
+  AC_CHECK_HEADER(termcap.h, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TERMCAP_H))
+])])])
+
+dnl Some systems don't have term.h, some systems squirrel it away
+dnl in an ncurses sub-directory of the system include directory.
+dnl If term.h exists in the normal location, arrange for HAVE_TERM_H
+dnl to be added to CFLAGS in the Makefile, by appending it to the
+dnl DEFINES shell variable. Otherwise, if it exists under an ncurses
+dnl sub-directory, arrange for HAVE_NCURSES_TERM_H to be set instead.
+dnl If it isn't found in either of these places, neither of these
+dnl variables is set, so term.h just doesn't get included.
+
+AC_CHECK_HEADER(term.h, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TERM_H), [
+  AC_CHECK_HEADER(ncurses/term.h, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_NCURSES_TERM_H))
+])
+
+dnl Do the same search for curses.h.
+
+AC_CHECK_HEADER(curses.h, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_CURSES_H), [
+  AC_CHECK_HEADER(ncurses/curses.h, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_NCURSES_CURSES_H))
+])
+
+dnl The following variable lists the targets that will be created if
+dnl the user runs make without any arguments. Initially we assume
+dnl that we can create both the normal and the reentrant versions
+dnl of the library.
+
+AC_SUBST(TARGETS)
+TARGETS="normal reentrant"
+
+dnl Check for reentrant functions by attempting to compile and link a
+dnl temporary program which calls them, being sure to include the
+dnl appropriate headers and define _POSIX_C_SOURCE, just in case any
+dnl of the functions are defined as macros. In the following,
+dnl AC_CACHE_CHECK outputs the message "checking for reentrant
+dnl functions". If this check has been done before, it assigns the
+dnl cached yes/no value to tecla_cv_reentrant.  Otherwise it uses
+dnl AC_TRY_LINK() to attempt to compile and link the specified dummy
+dnl program, and sets tecla_cv_reentrant to yes or no, depending on
+dnl whether this succeeds. Finally it caches the value of
+dnl tecla_cv_reentrant in the file config.cache, and writes "yes" or
+dnl "no" to the terminal.
+
+AC_CACHE_CHECK(for reentrant functions, tecla_cv_reentrant, [
+  KEPT_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -D_POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L"
+  AC_TRY_LINK([
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+  ], [
+    (void) readdir_r(NULL, NULL, NULL);
+    (void) getpwuid_r(geteuid(), NULL, NULL, 0, NULL);
+    (void) getpwnam_r(NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, NULL);
+  ], tecla_cv_reentrant=yes, tecla_cv_reentrant=no)
+  CFLAGS="$KEPT_CFLAGS"
+])
+
+dnl If the necessary reentrant functions weren't found to be
+dnl available, default to only compiling the non-reentrant version of
+dnl the library.
+
+if test $tecla_cv_reentrant = no; then
+  TARGETS="normal"
+fi
+
+dnl Check for the select system call with the normal arguments,
+dnl by attempting to compile and link a temporary program which
+dnl calls it, being sure to include the appropriate headers.
+dnl In the following, AC_CACHE_CHECK outputs the message
+dnl "checking for select system call". If this check has been done
+dnl before, it assigns the cached yes/no value to tecla_cv_select.
+dnl Otherwise it uses AC_TRY_LINK() to attempt to compile and link
+dnl the specified dummy program, and sets tecla_cv_select to yes
+dnl or no, depending on whether this succeeds. Finally it caches
+dnl the value of tecla_cv_select in the file config.cache, and
+dnl writes "yes" or "no" to the terminal.
+
+AC_CACHE_CHECK(for select system call, tecla_cv_select, [
+  AC_TRY_LINK([
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT_H
+#include <select.h>
+#endif
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+  ], [
+    fd_set fds;
+    int nready;
+    FD_ZERO(&fds);
+    FD_SET(1, &fds);
+    nready = select(2, &fds, &fds, &fds, NULL);
+  ], tecla_cv_select=yes, tecla_cv_select=no)
+])
+
+dnl If the select function was available, arrange for HAVE_SELECT to
+dnl be defined by CFLAGS.
+
+if test $tecla_cv_select = yes; then
+  AC_DEFINE(HAVE_SELECT)
+fi
+
+dnl Check if this system supports the system V pseudo terminal interface.
+
+AC_CACHE_CHECK(for SysV pseudo-terminals, tecla_cv_sysv_pty, [
+  AC_TRY_LINK([
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stropts.h>
+  ], [
+    char *name = ptsname(0);
+    int i1 = grantpt(0);
+    int i2 = unlockpt(0);
+    int i3 = ioctl(0, I_PUSH, "ptem");
+    return 0;
+  ], tecla_cv_sysv_pty=yes, tecla_cv_sysv_pty=no)
+])
+
+dnl If the system-V pseudo-terminal interface is available, arrange
+dnl for HAVE_SYSV_PTY to be defined by CFLAGS.
+
+if test $tecla_cv_sysv_pty = yes; then
+  AC_DEFINE(HAVE_SYSV_PTY)
+fi
+
+dnl The following variable contains the extension to append to
+dnl "libtecla" and "libtecla_r" when creating shared libraries on the
+dnl target platform.  This is system dependent and is ignored if
+dnl LINK_SHARED remains an empty string. On most platforms that
+dnl support shared libaries, this will be .so.$MAJOR_VER, where
+dnl MAJOR_VER is the major version number described above, which on
+dnl some systems, tells the run-time loader if the program being
+dnl loaded is binary compatible with a given version of the library
+dnl (see the discussion of MAJOR_VER near the top of this file).
+dnl The following empty default can be overriden on a system by system
+dnl basis later in this file.
+
+AC_SUBST(SHARED_EXT)
+SHARED_EXT=""
+
+dnl When a shared library is installed with the extension $SHARED_EXT,
+dnl you can optionally produce other copies of this library with
+dnl different extensions. This is done using symbolic or hard links,
+dnl depending on what is available on the current filesystem, and the
+dnl extensions to use for these links are listed in the following
+dnl variable, separated by spaces. The following empty default can be
+dnl overriden on a system by system basis later in this file.
+
+AC_SUBST(SHARED_ALT)
+SHARED_ALT=""
+
+dnl The following variable lists extra compilation flags needed to
+dnl create object files that can be included in shared libraries.
+dnl Normally one would include a flag to tell the C compiler to
+dnl compile position-independent code. This option commonly includes
+dnl the acronym 'pic'.
+
+AC_SUBST(SHARED_CFLAGS)
+SHARED_CFLAGS=""
+
+dnl On systems that support shared libraries, the following variable
+dnl provides the command needed to make a shared library. In this
+dnl variable, $$@ will be replaced with the name of the shared
+dnl library, $$(LIB_OBJECTS) will be replaced with a space separated
+dnl list of the object files that are to be included in the library,
+dnl and libtecla$$(SUFFIX) will be the name of the library being
+dnl built, minus the system-specific extension (eg. libtecla or
+dnl libtecla_r).  If LINK_SHARED is left as an empty string, shared
+dnl library creation will not attempted. If your system supports
+dnl shared library creation, you should override the default value of
+dnl this variable in the target-specific case statement later in this
+dnl file.
+
+AC_SUBST(LINK_SHARED)
+LINK_SHARED=""
+
+dnl The following bourne shell case statement is where system
+dnl dependencies can be added.  In particular, if your system supports
+dnl shared library creation, the following switch is the place to
+dnl configure it. To do so you will first need to find out what target
+dnl type was just assigned by the AC_CANONICAL_SYSTEM macro executed
+dnl previously.  The target type of your current system can be
+dnl determined by cd'ing to the top level directory of the tecla
+dnl distribution, and typing the command "sh config.guess". This will
+dnl report what autoconf thinks the system type is. Note that this
+dnl will be very specific, so if you know that the configuration
+dnl parameters that you are about to provide apply to different
+dnl versions of the current system type, you can express this in the
+dnl case statement by using a wild-card in place of the version
+dnl number, or by using an | alternation to list one or more version
+dnl names. Beware that autoconf uses [] as quote characters, so if you
+dnl want to use a regexp character range like [a-z], you should write
+dnl this as [[a-z]].
+
+case $target in
+*solaris*)
+  AC_DEFINE(__EXTENSIONS__)
+  SHARED_EXT=".so.${MAJOR_VER}"
+  SHARED_ALT=".so"
+  LINK_SHARED='ld -G -M $$(srcdir)/libtecla.map -o $$@ -h $$(@F) -z defs -i $$(LIB_OBJECTS) $$(LIBS) -lc'
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="-Kpic"
+  case $CC in
+  */cc|cc) SHARED_CFLAGS="$SHARED_CFLAGS -xstrconst" ;;
+  gcc) CFLAGS="-I/usr/include $CFLAGS" ;;
+  esac
+  case $target in
+  *sparc*) SHARED_CFLAGS="$SHARED_CFLAGS -xregs=no%appl"
+  esac
+  ;;
+*linux*)
+  SHARED_EXT=".so.${MAJOR_VER}.${MINOR_VER}.${MICRO_VER}"
+  SHARED_ALT=".so .so.${MAJOR_VER}"
+
+dnl See if the installed version of Gnu ld accepts version scripts.
+
+  AC_CACHE_CHECK([for --version-script in GNU ld], tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script, [
+    if (echo 'void dummy(void) {return;}' > dummy.c; $CC -c -fpic dummy.c; \
+         ld -o dummy.so dummy.o -shared --version-script=$srcdir/libtecla.map) 1>&2 2>/dev/null; then
+      tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script=yes
+    else
+      tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script=no
+    fi
+    rm -f dummy.c dummy.o dummy.so
+  ])
+  if test $tecla_cv_gnu_ld_script = yes; then
+    VERSION_OPT='--version-script=$$(srcdir)/libtecla.map'
+  else
+    VERSION_OPT=''
+  fi
+
+  LINK_SHARED='ld -o $$@ -soname libtecla$$(SUFFIX).so.'${MAJOR_VER}' -shared '$VERSION_OPT' $$(LIB_OBJECTS) $$(LIBS) -lc'
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="-fpic"
+  ;;
+*hpux*)
+  SHARED_EXT=".${MAJOR_VER}"
+  SHARED_ALT=".sl"
+  LINK_SHARED='ld -b +h $$(@F) +k +vshlibunsats -o $$@ -c libtecla.map.opt $$(LIB_OBJECTS) $$(LIBS) -lc'
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="+z"
+  ;;
+*dec-osf*)
+  AC_DEFINE(_OSF_SOURCE)
+  ;;
+esac
+
+dnl The following statement checks to see if the GNU C compiler has
+dnl been chosen instead of the normal compiler of the host operating
+dnl system. If it has, and shared library creation has been
+dnl configured, it replaces the shared-library-specific C compilation
+dnl flags with those supported by gcc. Also append the gcc run-time
+dnl library to the shared library link line.
+
+if test "$GCC"_ = "yes"_ && test "$LINK_SHARED"_ != "_" ; then
+  SHARED_CFLAGS="-fpic"
+  case $target_os in
+  sparc*solaris*) SHARED_CFLAGS="$SHARED_CFLAGS -mno-app-regs"
+  esac
+  LINK_SHARED="$LINK_SHARED `gcc -print-libgcc-file-name`"
+fi
+
+dnl The following variable will list which types of libraries,
+dnl "static", and possibly "shared", are to be created and installed.
+
+AC_SUBST(TARGET_LIBS)
+
+dnl If shared library creation has been configured, add shared
+dnl libraries to the list of libraries to be built.
+
+if test "$LINK_SHARED"_ != "_"; then
+  TARGET_LIBS="static shared"
+else
+  TARGET_LIBS="static"
+  LINK_SHARED="@:"
+fi
+
+dnl The following directive must always be the last line of any
+dnl autoconf script. It causes autoconf to create the configure
+dnl script, which for each argument of AC_OUTPUT, will look for a
+dnl filename formed by appending ".in" to the argument, preprocess
+dnl that file, replacing @VAR@ directives with the corresponding value
+dnl of the specified shell variable VAR, as set above in this file,
+dnl and write the resulting output to the filename given in the
+dnl argument. Note that only shell variables that were exported above
+dnl with the AC_SUBST() directive will be substituted in @VAR@
+dnl directives (some macros like AC_PROG_CC also call AC_SUBST for you
+dnl for the variables that they output).
+
+AC_OUTPUT(Makefile)
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73eef1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.c
@@ -0,0 +1,874 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Standard includes.
+ */
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+/*
+ * Local includes.
+ */
+#include "libtecla.h"
+#include "direader.h"
+#include "homedir.h"
+#include "pathutil.h"
+#include "cplfile.h"
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length allowed for usernames.
+ * names.
+ */
+#define USR_LEN 100
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length allowed for environment variable names.
+ */
+#define ENV_LEN 100
+
+/*
+ * Set the max length of the error-reporting string. There is no point
+ * in this being longer than the width of a typical terminal window.
+ * In composing error messages, I have assumed that this number is
+ * at least 80, so you don't decrease it below this number.
+ */
+#define ERRLEN 200
+
+/*
+ * The resources needed to complete a filename are maintained in objects
+ * of the following type.
+ */
+struct CompleteFile {
+  DirReader *dr;               /* A directory reader */
+  HomeDir *home;               /* A home directory expander */
+  PathName *path;              /* The buffer in which to accumulate the path */
+  PathName *buff;              /* A pathname work buffer */
+  char usrnam[USR_LEN+1];      /* The buffer used when reading the names of */
+                               /*  users. */
+  char envnam[ENV_LEN+1];      /* The buffer used when reading the names of */
+                               /*  environment variables. */
+  char errmsg[ERRLEN+1];       /* The error-report buffer */
+};
+
+static int cf_expand_home_dir(CompleteFile *cf, const char *user);
+static int cf_complete_username(CompleteFile *cf, WordCompletion *cpl,
+				const char *prefix, const char *line,
+				int word_start, int word_end, int escaped);
+static HOME_DIR_FN(cf_homedir_callback);
+static int cf_complete_entry(CompleteFile *cf, WordCompletion *cpl,
+			     const char *line, int word_start, int word_end,
+			     int escaped, CplCheckFn *check_fn,
+			     void *check_data);
+static char *cf_read_name(CompleteFile *cf, const char *type,
+			  const char *string, int slen,
+			  char *nambuf, int nammax);
+static int cf_prepare_suffix(CompleteFile *cf, const char *suffix,
+			     int add_escapes);
+
+/*
+ * A stack based object of the following type is used to pass data to the
+ * cf_homedir_callback() function.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  CompleteFile *cf;    /* The file-completion resource object */
+  WordCompletion *cpl; /* The string-completion rsource object */
+  const char *prefix;  /* The username prefix to be completed */
+  const char *line;    /* The line from which the prefix was extracted */
+  int word_start;      /* The index in line[] of the start of the username */
+  int word_end;        /* The index in line[] following the end of the prefix */
+  int escaped;         /* If true, add escapes to the completion suffixes */
+} CfHomeArgs;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new file-completion object.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  CompleteFile *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+CompleteFile *_new_CompleteFile(void)
+{
+  CompleteFile *cf;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  cf = (CompleteFile *) malloc(sizeof(CompleteFile));
+  if(!cf) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_CompleteFile: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_CompleteFile().
+ */
+  cf->dr = NULL;
+  cf->home = NULL;
+  cf->path = NULL;
+  cf->buff = NULL;
+  cf->usrnam[0] = '\0';
+  cf->envnam[0] = '\0';
+  cf->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Create the object that is used for reading directories.
+ */
+  cf->dr = _new_DirReader();
+  if(!cf->dr)
+    return _del_CompleteFile(cf);
+/*
+ * Create the object that is used to lookup home directories.
+ */
+  cf->home = _new_HomeDir();
+  if(!cf->home)
+    return _del_CompleteFile(cf);
+/*
+ * Create the buffer in which the completed pathname is accumulated.
+ */
+  cf->path = _new_PathName();
+  if(!cf->path)
+    return _del_CompleteFile(cf);
+/*
+ * Create a pathname work buffer.
+ */
+  cf->buff = _new_PathName();
+  if(!cf->buff)
+    return _del_CompleteFile(cf);
+  return cf;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a file-completion object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf     CompleteFile *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return CompleteFile *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+CompleteFile *_del_CompleteFile(CompleteFile *cf)
+{
+  if(cf) {
+    cf->dr = _del_DirReader(cf->dr);
+    cf->home = _del_HomeDir(cf->home);
+    cf->path = _del_PathName(cf->path);
+    cf->buff = _del_PathName(cf->buff);
+    free(cf);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Look up the possible completions of the incomplete filename that
+ * lies between specified indexes of a given command-line string.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The object in which to record the completions.
+ *  cf      CompleteFile *  The filename-completion resource object.
+ *  line      const char *  The string containing the incomplete filename.
+ *  word_start       int    The index of the first character in line[]
+ *                          of the incomplete filename.
+ *  word_end         int    The index of the character in line[] that
+ *                          follows the last character of the incomplete
+ *                          filename.
+ *  escaped          int    If true, backslashes in line[] are
+ *                          interpreted as escaping the characters
+ *                          that follow them, and any spaces, tabs,
+ *                          backslashes, or wildcard characters in the
+ *                          returned suffixes will be similarly escaped.
+ *                          If false, backslashes will be interpreted as
+ *                          literal parts of the file name, and no
+ *                          backslashes will be added to the returned
+ *                          suffixes.
+ *  check_fn  CplCheckFn *  If not zero, this argument specifies a
+ *                          function to call to ask whether a given
+ *                          file should be included in the list
+ *                          of completions.
+ *  check_data      void *  Anonymous data to be passed to check_fn().
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error. A description of the error can be
+ *                                     acquired by calling _cf_last_error(cf).
+ */
+int _cf_complete_file(WordCompletion *cpl, CompleteFile *cf,
+		     const char *line, int word_start, int word_end,
+		     int escaped, CplCheckFn *check_fn, void *check_data)
+{
+  const char *lptr; /* A pointer into line[] */
+  int nleft;        /* The number of characters still to be processed */
+                    /*  in line[]. */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!cpl || !cf || !line || word_end < word_start) {
+    if(cf)
+      strcpy(cf->errmsg, "_cf_complete_file: Invalid arguments");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Clear the buffer in which the filename will be constructed.
+ */
+  _pn_clear_path(cf->path);
+/*
+ * How many characters are to be processed?
+ */
+  nleft = word_end - word_start;
+/*
+ * Get a pointer to the start of the incomplete filename.
+ */
+  lptr = line + word_start;
+/*
+ * If the first character is a tilde, then perform home-directory
+ * interpolation.
+ */
+  if(nleft > 0 && *lptr == '~') {
+    int slen;
+    if(!cf_read_name(cf, "User", ++lptr, --nleft, cf->usrnam, USR_LEN))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Advance over the username in the input line.
+ */
+    slen = strlen(cf->usrnam);
+    lptr += slen;
+    nleft -= slen;
+/*
+ * If we haven't hit the end of the input string then we have a complete
+ * username to translate to the corresponding home directory.
+ */
+    if(nleft > 0) {
+      if(cf_expand_home_dir(cf, cf->usrnam))
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * ~user and ~ are usually followed by a directory separator to
+ * separate them from the file contained in the home directory.
+ * If the home directory is the root directory, then we don't want
+ * to follow the home directory by a directory separator, so we should
+ * skip over it so that it doesn't get copied into the filename.
+ */
+      if(strcmp(cf->path->name, FS_ROOT_DIR) == 0 &&
+	 strncmp(lptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) == 0) {
+	lptr += FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+	nleft -= FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+      };
+/*
+ * If we have reached the end of the input string, then the username
+ * may be incomplete, and we should attempt to complete it.
+ */
+    } else {
+/*
+ * Look up the possible completions of the username.
+ */
+      return cf_complete_username(cf, cpl, cf->usrnam, line, word_start+1,
+				  word_end, escaped);
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Copy the rest of the path, stopping to expand $envvar expressions
+ * where encountered.
+ */
+  while(nleft > 0) {
+    int seglen;   /* The length of the next segment to be copied */
+/*
+ * Find the length of the next segment to be copied, stopping if an
+ * unescaped '$' is seen, or the end of the path is reached.
+ */
+    for(seglen=0; seglen < nleft; seglen++) {
+      int c = lptr[seglen];
+      if(escaped && c == '\\')
+	seglen++;
+      else if(c == '$')
+	break;
+/*
+ * We will be completing the last component of the file name,
+ * so whenever a directory separator is seen, assume that it
+ * might be the start of the last component, and mark the character
+ * that follows it as the start of the name that is to be completed.
+ */
+      if(nleft >= FS_DIR_SEP_LEN &&
+	 strncmp(lptr + seglen, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN)==0) {
+	word_start = (lptr + seglen) - line + FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+      };
+    };
+/*
+ * We have reached either the end of the filename or the start of
+ * $environment_variable expression. Record the newly checked
+ * segment of the filename in the output filename, removing
+ * backslash-escapes where needed.
+ */
+    if(_pn_append_to_path(cf->path, lptr, seglen, escaped) == NULL) {
+      strcpy(cf->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to complete filename");
+      return 1;
+    };
+    lptr += seglen;
+    nleft -= seglen;
+/*
+ * If the above loop finished before we hit the end of the filename,
+ * then this was because an unescaped $ was seen. In this case, interpolate
+ * the value of the environment variable that follows it into the output
+ * filename.
+ */
+    if(nleft > 0) {
+      char *value;    /* The value of the environment variable */
+      int vlen;       /* The length of the value string */
+      int nlen;       /* The length of the environment variable name */
+/*
+ * Read the name of the environment variable.
+ */
+      if(!cf_read_name(cf, "Environment", ++lptr, --nleft, cf->envnam, ENV_LEN))
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * Advance over the environment variable name in the input line.
+ */
+      nlen = strlen(cf->envnam);
+      lptr += nlen;
+      nleft -= nlen;
+/*
+ * Get the value of the environment variable.
+ */
+      value = getenv(cf->envnam);
+      if(!value) {
+	const char *fmt = "Unknown environment variable: %.*s";
+	sprintf(cf->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt), cf->envnam);
+	return 1;
+      };
+      vlen = strlen(value);
+/*
+ * If we are at the start of the filename and the first character of the
+ * environment variable value is a '~', attempt home-directory
+ * interpolation.
+ */
+      if(cf->path->name[0] == '\0' && value[0] == '~') {
+	if(!cf_read_name(cf, "User", value+1, vlen-1, cf->usrnam, USR_LEN) ||
+	   cf_expand_home_dir(cf, cf->usrnam))
+	  return 1;
+/*
+ * If the home directory is the root directory, and the ~usrname expression
+ * was followed by a directory separator, prevent the directory separator
+ * from being appended to the root directory by skipping it in the
+ * input line.
+ */
+	if(strcmp(cf->path->name, FS_ROOT_DIR) == 0 &&
+	   strncmp(lptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) == 0) {
+	  lptr += FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+	  nleft -= FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+	};
+      } else {
+/*
+ * Append the value of the environment variable to the output path.
+ */
+	if(_pn_append_to_path(cf->path, value, strlen(value), escaped)==NULL) {
+	  strcpy(cf->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to complete filename");
+	  return 1;
+	};
+/*
+ * Prevent extra directory separators from being added.
+ */
+	if(nleft >= FS_DIR_SEP_LEN &&
+	   strcmp(cf->path->name, FS_ROOT_DIR) == 0 &&
+	   strncmp(lptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) == 0) {
+	  lptr += FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+	  nleft -= FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+	} else if(vlen > FS_DIR_SEP_LEN &&
+		  strcmp(value + vlen - FS_DIR_SEP_LEN, FS_DIR_SEP)==0) {
+	  cf->path->name[vlen-FS_DIR_SEP_LEN] = '\0';
+	};
+      };
+/*
+ * If adding the environment variable didn't form a valid directory,
+ * we can't complete the line, since there is no way to separate append
+ * a partial filename to an environment variable reference without
+ * that appended part of the name being seen later as part of the
+ * environment variable name. Thus if the currently constructed path
+ * isn't a directory, quite now with no completions having been
+ * registered.
+ */
+      if(!_pu_path_is_dir(cf->path->name))
+	return 0;
+/*
+ * For the reasons given above, if we have reached the end of the filename
+ * with the expansion of an environment variable, the only allowed
+ * completion involves the addition of a directory separator.
+ */
+      if(nleft == 0) {
+	if(cpl_add_completion(cpl, line, lptr-line, word_end, FS_DIR_SEP,
+			      "", "")) {
+	  strncpy(cf->errmsg, cpl_last_error(cpl), ERRLEN);
+	  cf->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+	  return 1;
+	};
+	return 0;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Complete the filename if possible.
+ */
+  return cf_complete_entry(cf, cpl, line, word_start, word_end, escaped,
+			   check_fn, check_data);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the last path-completion error that occurred.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf    CompleteFile *  The path-completion resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  const char *  The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *_cf_last_error(CompleteFile *cf)
+{
+  return cf ? cf->errmsg : "NULL CompleteFile argument";
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup the home directory of the specified user, or the current user
+ * if no name is specified, appending it to output pathname.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf  CompleteFile *  The pathname completion resource object.
+ *  user  const char *  The username to lookup, or "" to lookup the
+ *                      current user.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int    0 - OK.
+ *                       1 - Error.
+ */
+static int cf_expand_home_dir(CompleteFile *cf, const char *user)
+{
+/*
+ * Attempt to lookup the home directory.
+ */
+  const char *home_dir = _hd_lookup_home_dir(cf->home, user);
+/*
+ * Failed?
+ */
+  if(!home_dir) {
+    strncpy(cf->errmsg, _hd_last_home_dir_error(cf->home), ERRLEN);
+    cf->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Append the home directory to the pathname string.
+ */
+  if(_pn_append_to_path(cf->path, home_dir, -1, 0) == NULL) {
+    strcpy(cf->errmsg, "Insufficient memory for home directory expansion");
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup and report all completions of a given username prefix.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf     CompleteFile *  The filename-completion resource object.
+ *  cpl  WordCompletion *  The object in which to record the completions.
+ *  prefix   const char *  The prefix of the usernames to lookup.
+ *  line     const char *  The command-line in which the username appears.
+ *  word_start      int    The index within line[] of the start of the
+ *                         username that is being completed.
+ *  word_end        int    The index within line[] of the character which
+ *                         follows the incomplete username.
+ *  escaped         int    True if the completions need to have special
+ *                         characters escaped.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+static int cf_complete_username(CompleteFile *cf, WordCompletion *cpl,
+				const char *prefix, const char *line,
+				int word_start, int word_end, int escaped)
+{
+/*
+ * Set up a container of anonymous arguments to be sent to the
+ * username-lookup iterator.
+ */
+  CfHomeArgs args;
+  args.cf = cf;
+  args.cpl = cpl;
+  args.prefix = prefix;
+  args.line = line;
+  args.word_start = word_start;
+  args.word_end = word_end;
+  args.escaped = escaped;
+/*
+ * Iterate through the list of users, recording those which start
+ * with the specified prefix.
+ */
+  if(_hd_scan_user_home_dirs(cf->home, &args, cf_homedir_callback)) {
+    strncpy(cf->errmsg, _hd_last_home_dir_error(cf->home), ERRLEN);
+    cf->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * The user/home-directory scanner callback function (see homedir.h)
+ * used by cf_complete_username().
+ */
+static HOME_DIR_FN(cf_homedir_callback)
+{
+/*
+ * Get the file-completion resources from the anonymous data argument.
+ */
+  CfHomeArgs *args = (CfHomeArgs *) data;
+  WordCompletion *cpl = args->cpl;
+  CompleteFile *cf = args->cf;
+/*
+ * Get the length of the username prefix.
+ */
+  int prefix_len = strlen(args->prefix);
+/*
+ * Get the length of the latest user name that is to be compared to
+ * the prefix.
+ */
+  int name_len = strlen(usrnam);
+/*
+ * See if the latest username starts with the prefix that we are
+ * searching for, and record its suffix in the array of matches if so.
+ */
+  if(name_len >= prefix_len && strncmp(args->prefix, usrnam, prefix_len)==0) {
+/*
+ * Copy the username into the pathname work buffer, adding backslash
+ * escapes where needed.
+ */
+    if(cf_prepare_suffix(cf, usrnam+prefix_len, args->escaped)) {
+      strncpy(errmsg, cf->errmsg, maxerr);
+      errmsg[maxerr] = '\0';
+      return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Report the completion suffix that was copied above.
+ */
+    if(cpl_add_completion(cpl, args->line, args->word_start, args->word_end,
+			  cf->buff->name, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP)) {
+      strncpy(errmsg, cpl_last_error(cpl), maxerr);
+      errmsg[maxerr] = '\0';
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Report possible completions of the filename in cf->path->name[].
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf      CompleteFile *  The file-completion resource object.
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The object in which to record the completions.
+ *  line      const char *  The input line, as received by the callback
+ *                          function.
+ *  word_start       int    The index within line[] of the start of the
+ *                          last component of the filename that is being
+ *                          completed.
+ *  word_end         int    The index within line[] of the character which
+ *                          follows the incomplete filename.
+ *  escaped          int    If true, escape special characters in the
+ *                          completion suffixes.
+ *  check_fn  CplCheckFn *  If not zero, this argument specifies a
+ *                          function to call to ask whether a given
+ *                          file should be included in the list
+ *                          of completions.
+ *  check_data      void *  Anonymous data to be passed to check_fn().
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+static int cf_complete_entry(CompleteFile *cf, WordCompletion *cpl,
+			     const char *line, int word_start, int word_end,
+			     int escaped, CplCheckFn *check_fn,
+			     void *check_data)
+{
+  const char *dirpath;   /* The name of the parent directory */
+  int start;             /* The index of the start of the last filename */
+                         /*  component in the transcribed filename. */
+  const char *prefix;    /* The filename prefix to be completed */
+  int prefix_len;        /* The length of the filename prefix */
+  const char *file_name; /* The lastest filename being compared */
+  int waserr = 0;        /* True after errors */
+  int terminated=0;      /* True if the directory part had to be terminated */
+/*
+ * Get the pathname string and its current length.
+ */
+  char *pathname = cf->path->name;
+  int pathlen = strlen(pathname);
+/*
+ * Locate the start of the final component of the pathname.
+ */
+  for(start=pathlen - 1; start >= 0 &&
+      strncmp(pathname + start, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) != 0; start--)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Is the parent directory the root directory?
+ */
+  if(start==0 ||
+     (start < 0 && strncmp(pathname, FS_ROOT_DIR, FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN) == 0)) {
+    dirpath = FS_ROOT_DIR;
+    start += FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN;
+/*
+ * If we found a directory separator then the part which precedes the
+ * last component is the name of the directory to be opened.
+ */
+  } else if(start > 0) {
+/*
+ * The _dr_open_dir() function requires the directory name to be '\0'
+ * terminated, so temporarily do this by overwriting the first character
+ * of the directory separator.
+ */
+    pathname[start] = '\0';
+    dirpath = pathname;
+    terminated = 1;
+/*
+ * We reached the start of the pathname before finding a directory
+ * separator, so arrange to open the current working directory.
+ */
+  } else {
+    start = 0;
+    dirpath = FS_PWD;
+  };
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the directory.
+ */
+  if(_dr_open_dir(cf->dr, dirpath, NULL)) {
+    const char *fmt = "Can't open directory: %.*s";
+    sprintf(cf->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt), dirpath);
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If removed above, restore the directory separator and skip over it
+ * to the start of the filename.
+ */
+  if(terminated) {
+    memcpy(pathname + start, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN);
+    start += FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the filename prefix and its length.
+ */
+  prefix = pathname + start;
+  prefix_len = strlen(prefix);
+/*
+ * Traverse the directory, looking for files who's prefixes match the
+ * last component of the pathname.
+ */
+  while((file_name = _dr_next_file(cf->dr)) != NULL && !waserr) {
+    int name_len = strlen(file_name);
+/*
+ * Is the latest filename a possible completion of the filename prefix?
+ */
+    if(name_len >= prefix_len && strncmp(prefix, file_name, prefix_len)==0) {
+/*
+ * When listing all files in a directory, don't list files that start
+ * with '.'. This is how hidden files are denoted in UNIX.
+ */
+      if(prefix_len > 0 || file_name[0] != '.') {
+/*
+ * Copy the completion suffix into the work pathname cf->buff->name,
+ * adding backslash escapes if needed.
+ */
+	if(cf_prepare_suffix(cf, file_name + prefix_len, escaped)) {
+	  waserr = 1;
+	} else {
+/*
+ * We want directories to be displayed with directory suffixes,
+ * and other fully completed filenames to be followed by spaces.
+ * To check the type of the file, append the current suffix
+ * to the path being completed, check the filetype, then restore
+ * the path to its original form.
+ */
+	  const char *cont_suffix = "";  /* The suffix to add if fully */
+                                         /*  completed. */
+	  const char *type_suffix = "";  /* The suffix to add when listing */
+	  if(_pn_append_to_path(cf->path, file_name + prefix_len,
+				-1, escaped) == NULL) {
+	    strcpy(cf->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to complete filename.");
+	    return 1;
+	  };
+/*
+ * Specify suffixes according to the file type.
+ */
+	  if(_pu_path_is_dir(cf->path->name)) {
+	    cont_suffix = FS_DIR_SEP;
+	    type_suffix = FS_DIR_SEP;
+	  } else if(!check_fn || check_fn(check_data, cf->path->name)) {
+	    cont_suffix = " ";
+	  } else {
+	    cf->path->name[pathlen] = '\0';
+	    continue;
+	  };
+/*
+ * Remove the temporarily added suffix.
+ */
+	  cf->path->name[pathlen] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Record the latest completion.
+ */
+	  if(cpl_add_completion(cpl, line, word_start, word_end, cf->buff->name,
+				type_suffix, cont_suffix))
+	    waserr = 1;
+	};
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Close the directory.
+ */
+  _dr_close_dir(cf->dr);
+  return waserr;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read a username or environment variable name, stopping when a directory
+ * separator is seen, when the end of the string is reached, or the
+ * output buffer overflows.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf   CompleteFile *  The file-completion resource object.
+ *  type         char *  The capitalized name of the type of name being read.
+ *  string       char *  The string who's prefix contains the name.
+ *  slen          int    The number of characters in string[].
+ *  nambuf       char *  The output name buffer.
+ *  nammax        int    The longest string that will fit in nambuf[], excluding
+ *                       the '\0' terminator.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       char *  A pointer to nambuf on success. On error NULL is
+ *                       returned and a description of the error is recorded
+ *                       in cf->errmsg[].
+ */
+static char *cf_read_name(CompleteFile *cf, const char *type,
+			  const char *string, int slen,
+			  char *nambuf, int nammax)
+{
+  int namlen;         /* The number of characters in nambuf[] */
+  const char *sptr;   /* A pointer into string[] */
+/*
+ * Work out the max number of characters that should be copied.
+ */
+  int nmax = nammax < slen ? nammax : slen;
+/*
+ * Get the environment variable name that follows the dollar.
+ */
+  for(sptr=string,namlen=0;
+      namlen < nmax && (slen-namlen < FS_DIR_SEP_LEN ||
+			strncmp(sptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) != 0);
+      namlen++) {
+    nambuf[namlen] = *sptr++;
+  };
+/*
+ * Did the name overflow the buffer?
+ */
+  if(namlen >= nammax) {
+    const char *fmt = "%.*s name too long";
+    sprintf(cf->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt), type);
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Terminate the string.
+ */
+  nambuf[namlen] = '\0';
+  return nambuf;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Using the work buffer cf->buff, make a suitably escaped copy of a
+ * given completion suffix, ready to be passed to cpl_add_completion().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf   CompleteFile *  The file-completion resource object.
+ *  suffix       char *  The suffix to be copied.
+ *  add_escapes   int    If true, escape special characters.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int    0 - OK.
+ *                       1 - Error.
+ */
+static int cf_prepare_suffix(CompleteFile *cf, const char *suffix,
+			     int add_escapes)
+{
+  const char *sptr; /* A pointer into suffix[] */
+  int nbsl;         /* The number of backslashes to add to the suffix */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * How long is the suffix?
+ */
+  int suffix_len = strlen(suffix);
+/*
+ * Clear the work buffer.
+ */
+  _pn_clear_path(cf->buff);
+/*
+ * Count the number of backslashes that will have to be added to
+ * escape spaces, tabs, backslashes and wildcard characters.
+ */
+  nbsl = 0;
+  if(add_escapes) {
+    for(sptr = suffix; *sptr; sptr++) {
+      switch(*sptr) {
+      case ' ': case '\t': case '\\': case '*': case '?': case '[':
+	nbsl++;
+	break;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Arrange for the output path buffer to have sufficient room for the
+ * both the suffix and any backslashes that have to be inserted.
+ */
+  if(_pn_resize_path(cf->buff, suffix_len + nbsl) == NULL) {
+    strcpy(cf->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to complete filename");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the suffix doesn't need any escapes, copy it directly into the
+ * work buffer.
+ */
+  if(nbsl==0) {
+    strcpy(cf->buff->name, suffix);
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Make a copy with special characters escaped?
+ */
+    if(nbsl > 0) {
+      const char *src = suffix;
+      char *dst = cf->buff->name;
+      for(i=0; i<suffix_len; i++) {
+	switch(*src) {
+	case ' ': case '\t': case '\\': case '*': case '?': case '[':
+	  *dst++ = '\\';
+	};
+	*dst++ = *src++;
+      };
+      *dst = '\0';
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31683ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/cplfile.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+#ifndef cplfile_h
+#define cplfile_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+typedef struct CompleteFile CompleteFile;
+
+/*
+ * Create a file-completion resource object.
+ */
+CompleteFile *_new_CompleteFile(void);
+/*
+ * Delete a file-completion resource object.
+ */
+CompleteFile *_del_CompleteFile(CompleteFile *cf);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Complete the string between path[0] and path[len-1] as a pathname,
+ * leaving the last component uncompleted if it is potentially ambiguous,
+ * and returning an array of possible completions. Note that the returned
+ * container belongs to the 'cf' object and its contents will change on
+ * subsequent calls to this function.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The object in which to record the completions.
+ *  cf      CompleteFile *  The filename-completion resource object.
+ *  line      const char *  The string containing the incomplete filename.
+ *  word_start       int    The index of the first character in line[]
+ *                          of the incomplete filename.
+ *  word_end         int    The index of the character in line[] that
+ *                          follows the last character of the incomplete
+ *                          filename.
+ *  escaped          int    If true, backslashes in path[] are
+ *                          interpreted as escaping the characters
+ *                          that follow them, and any spaces, tabs,
+ *                          backslashes, or wildcard characters in the
+ *                          returned suffixes will be similarly be escaped.
+ *                          If false, backslashes will be interpreted as
+ *                          literal parts of the file name, and no
+ *                          backslashes will be added to the returned
+ *                          suffixes.
+ *  check_fn  CplCheckFn *  If not zero, this argument specifies a
+ *                          function to call to ask whether a given
+ *                          file should be included in the list
+ *                          of completions.
+ *  check_data      void *  Anonymous data to be passed to check_fn().
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error. A description of the error can be
+ *                                     acquired by calling cf_last_error(cf).
+ */
+int _cf_complete_file(WordCompletion *cpl, CompleteFile *cf,
+		     const char *line, int word_start, int word_end,
+		     int escaped, CplCheckFn *check_fn, void *check_data);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the error that occurred on the last call to
+ * cf_complete_file().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cf    CompleteFile *  The path-completion resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        char *  The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *_cf_last_error(CompleteFile *cf);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/cplmatch.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/cplmatch.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..111f5bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/cplmatch.c
@@ -0,0 +1,927 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Standard includes.
+ */
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+/*
+ * Local includes.
+ */
+#include "libtecla.h"
+#include "stringrp.h"
+#include "pathutil.h"
+#include "cplfile.h"
+
+/*
+ * Specify the number of strings to allocate when the string free-list
+ * is exhausted. This also sets the number of elements to expand the
+ * matches[] array by whenever it is found to be too small.
+ */
+#define STR_BLK_FACT 100
+
+/*
+ * Set the max length of the error-reporting string. There is no point
+ * in this being longer than the width of a typical terminal window.
+ * In composing error messages, I have assumed that this number is
+ * at least 80, so don't decrease it below 80.
+ */
+#define ERRLEN 200
+
+/*
+ * Completion matches are recorded in containers of the following
+ * type.
+ */
+struct WordCompletion {
+  StringGroup *sg;        /* Memory for a group of strings */
+  int matches_dim;        /* The allocated size of result.matches[] */
+  char errmsg[ERRLEN+1];  /* The error-reporting buffer */
+  CplMatches result;      /* Completions to be returned to the caller */
+  CompleteFile *cf;       /* The resources used for filename completion */
+};
+
+static void cpl_sort_matches(WordCompletion *cpl);
+static void cpl_zap_duplicates(WordCompletion *cpl);
+static void cpl_clear_completions(WordCompletion *cpl);
+static int cpl_cmp_matches(const void *v1, const void *v2);
+static int cpl_cmp_suffixes(const void *v1, const void *v2);
+
+/*
+ * The new_CplFileConf() constructor sets the integer first member of
+ * the returned object to the following magic number. On seeing this,
+ * cpl_file_completions() knows when it is passed a valid CplFileConf
+ * object.
+ */
+#define CFC_ID_CODE 4568
+
+/*
+ * A pointer to a structure of the following type can be passed to
+ * the builtin file-completion callback function to modify its behavior.
+ */
+struct CplFileConf {
+  int id;             /* new_CplFileConf() sets this to CFC_ID_CODE */
+  int escaped;        /* If none-zero, backslashes in the input line are */
+                      /*  interpreted as escaping special characters and */
+                      /*  spaces, and any special characters and spaces in */
+                      /*  the listed completions will also be escaped with */
+                      /*  added backslashes. This is the default behaviour. */
+                      /* If zero, backslashes are interpreted as being */
+                      /*  literal parts of the filename, and none are added */
+                      /*  to the completion suffixes. */
+  int file_start;     /* The index in the input line of the first character */
+                      /*  of the filename. If you specify -1 here, */
+                      /*  cpl_file_completions() identifies the */
+                      /*  the start of the filename by looking backwards for */
+                      /*  an unescaped space, or the beginning of the line. */
+  CplCheckFn *chk_fn; /* If not zero, this argument specifies a */
+                      /*  function to call to ask whether a given */
+                      /*  file should be included in the list */
+                      /*  of completions. */
+  void *chk_data;     /* Anonymous data to be passed to check_fn(). */
+};
+
+static void cpl_init_FileConf(CplFileConf *cfc);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new string-completion object.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return    WordCompletion *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+WordCompletion *new_WordCompletion(void)
+{
+  WordCompletion *cpl;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  cpl = (WordCompletion *) malloc(sizeof(WordCompletion));
+  if(!cpl) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_WordCompletion: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_WordCompletion().
+ */
+  cpl->sg = NULL;
+  cpl->matches_dim = 0;
+  cpl->result.suffix = NULL;
+  cpl->result.cont_suffix = NULL;
+  cpl->result.matches = NULL;
+  cpl->result.nmatch = 0;
+  cpl->cf = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate an object that allows a group of strings to be allocated
+ * efficiently by placing many of them in contiguous string segments.
+ */
+  cpl->sg = _new_StringGroup(_pu_pathname_dim());
+  if(!cpl->sg)
+    return del_WordCompletion(cpl);
+/*
+ * Allocate an array for matching completions. This will be extended later
+ * if needed.
+ */
+  cpl->matches_dim = STR_BLK_FACT;
+  cpl->result.matches = (CplMatch *) malloc(sizeof(cpl->result.matches[0]) *
+					    cpl->matches_dim);
+  if(!cpl->result.matches) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+     "new_WordCompletion: Insufficient memory to allocate array of matches.\n");
+    return del_WordCompletion(cpl);
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate a filename-completion resource object.
+ */
+  cpl->cf = _new_CompleteFile();
+  if(!cpl->cf)
+    return del_WordCompletion(cpl);
+  return cpl;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a string-completion object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl    WordCompletion *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return WordCompletion *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+WordCompletion *del_WordCompletion(WordCompletion *cpl)
+{
+  if(cpl) {
+    cpl->sg = _del_StringGroup(cpl->sg);
+    if(cpl->result.matches) {
+      free(cpl->result.matches);
+      cpl->result.matches = NULL;
+      cpl->cf = _del_CompleteFile(cpl->cf);
+    };
+    free(cpl);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function is designed to be called by CplMatchFn callback
+ * functions. It adds one possible completion of the token that is being
+ * completed to an array of completions. If the completion needs any
+ * special quoting to be valid when displayed in the input line, this
+ * quoting must be included in the string.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl     WordCompletion *  The argument of the same name that was passed
+ *                            to the calling CplMatchFn callback function.
+ *  line        const char *  The input line, as received by the callback
+ *                            function.
+ *  word_start         int    The index within line[] of the start of the
+ *                            word that is being completed.
+ *  word_end           int    The index within line[] of the character which
+ *                            follows the incomplete word, as received by the
+ *                            calling callback function.
+ *  suffix      const char *  The appropriately quoted string that could
+ *                            be appended to the incomplete token to complete
+ *                            it. A copy of this string will be allocated
+ *                            internally.
+ *  type_suffix const char *  When listing multiple completions, gl_get_line()
+ *                            appends this string to the completion to indicate
+ *                            its type to the user. If not pertinent pass "".
+ *                            Otherwise pass a literal or static string.
+ *  cont_suffix const char *  If this turns out to be the only completion,
+ *                            gl_get_line() will append this string as
+ *                            a continuation. For example, the builtin
+ *                            file-completion callback registers a directory
+ *                            separator here for directory matches, and a
+ *                            space otherwise. If the match were a function
+ *                            name you might want to append an open
+ *                            parenthesis, etc.. If not relevant pass "".
+ *                            Otherwise pass a literal or static string.
+ * Output:
+ *  return             int    0 - OK.
+ *                            1 - Error.
+ */
+int cpl_add_completion(WordCompletion *cpl, const char *line,
+		       int word_start, int word_end, const char *suffix,
+		       const char *type_suffix, const char *cont_suffix)
+{
+  CplMatch *match; /* The container of the new match */
+  char *string;    /* A newly allocated copy of the completion string */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!cpl)
+    return 1;
+  if(!suffix)
+    return 0;
+  if(!type_suffix)
+    type_suffix = "";
+  if(!cont_suffix)
+    cont_suffix = "";
+/*
+ * Do we need to extend the array of matches[]?
+ */
+  if(cpl->result.nmatch+1 > cpl->matches_dim) {
+    int needed = cpl->matches_dim + STR_BLK_FACT;
+    CplMatch *matches = (CplMatch *) realloc(cpl->result.matches,
+			    sizeof(cpl->result.matches[0]) * needed);
+    if(!matches) {
+      strcpy(cpl->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to extend array of matches.");
+      return 1;
+    };
+    cpl->result.matches = matches;
+    cpl->matches_dim = needed;
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate memory to store the combined completion prefix and the
+ * new suffix.
+ */
+  string = _sg_alloc_string(cpl->sg, word_end-word_start + strlen(suffix));
+  if(!string) {
+    strcpy(cpl->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to extend array of matches.");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Compose the string.
+ */
+  strncpy(string, line + word_start, word_end - word_start);
+  strcpy(string + word_end - word_start, suffix);
+/*
+ * Record the new match.
+ */
+  match = cpl->result.matches + cpl->result.nmatch++;
+  match->completion = string;
+  match->suffix = string + word_end - word_start;
+  match->type_suffix = type_suffix;
+/*
+ * Record the continuation suffix.
+ */
+  cpl->result.cont_suffix = cont_suffix;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Sort the array of matches.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The completion resource object.
+ */
+static void cpl_sort_matches(WordCompletion *cpl)
+{
+  qsort(cpl->result.matches, cpl->result.nmatch,
+	sizeof(cpl->result.matches[0]), cpl_cmp_matches);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a qsort() comparison function used to sort matches.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  v1, v2   void *  Pointers to the two matches to be compared.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    -1 -> v1 < v2.
+ *                    0 -> v1 == v2
+ *                    1 -> v1 > v2
+ */
+static int cpl_cmp_matches(const void *v1, const void *v2)
+{
+  const CplMatch *m1 = (const CplMatch *) v1;
+  const CplMatch *m2 = (const CplMatch *) v2;
+  return strcmp(m1->completion, m2->completion);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Sort the array of matches in order of their suffixes.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The completion resource object.
+ */
+static void cpl_sort_suffixes(WordCompletion *cpl)
+{
+  qsort(cpl->result.matches, cpl->result.nmatch,
+	sizeof(cpl->result.matches[0]), cpl_cmp_suffixes);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a qsort() comparison function used to sort matches in order of
+ * their suffixes.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  v1, v2   void *  Pointers to the two matches to be compared.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    -1 -> v1 < v2.
+ *                    0 -> v1 == v2
+ *                    1 -> v1 > v2
+ */
+static int cpl_cmp_suffixes(const void *v1, const void *v2)
+{
+  const CplMatch *m1 = (const CplMatch *) v1;
+  const CplMatch *m2 = (const CplMatch *) v2;
+  return strcmp(m1->suffix, m2->suffix);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Find the common prefix of all of the matching completion matches,
+ * and record a pointer to it in cpl->result.suffix. Note that this has
+ * the side effect of sorting the matches into suffix order.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The completion resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+static int cpl_common_suffix(WordCompletion *cpl)
+{
+  CplMatches *result;       /* The result container */
+  const char *first, *last; /* The first and last matching suffixes */
+  int length;               /* The length of the common suffix */
+/*
+ * Get the container of the array of matching files.
+ */
+  result = &cpl->result;
+/*
+ * No matching completions?
+ */
+  if(result->nmatch < 1)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Sort th matches into suffix order.
+ */
+  cpl_sort_suffixes(cpl);
+/*
+ * Given that the array of matches is sorted, the first and last
+ * suffixes are those that differ most in their prefixes, so the common
+ * prefix of these strings is the longest common prefix of all of the
+ * suffixes.
+ */
+  first = result->matches[0].suffix;
+  last = result->matches[result->nmatch - 1].suffix;
+/*
+ * Find the point at which the first and last matching strings
+ * first difffer.
+ */
+  while(*first && *first == *last) {
+    first++;
+    last++;
+  };
+/*
+ * How long is the common suffix?
+ */
+  length = first - result->matches[0].suffix;
+/*
+ * Allocate memory to record the common suffix.
+ */
+  result->suffix = _sg_alloc_string(cpl->sg, length);
+  if(!result->suffix) {
+    strcpy(cpl->errmsg,
+	   "Insufficient memory to record common completion suffix.");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the common suffix.
+ */
+  strncpy(result->suffix, result->matches[0].suffix, length);
+  result->suffix[length] = '\0'; 
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Discard the contents of the array of possible completion matches.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The word-completion resource object.
+ */
+static void cpl_clear_completions(WordCompletion *cpl)
+{
+/*
+ * Discard all of the strings.
+ */
+  _clr_StringGroup(cpl->sg);
+/*
+ * Record the fact that the array is now empty.
+ */
+  cpl->result.nmatch = 0;
+  cpl->result.suffix = NULL;
+  cpl->result.cont_suffix = "";
+/*
+ * Also clear the error message.
+ */
+  cpl->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Given an input line and the point at which it completion is to be
+ * attempted, return an array of possible completions.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl    WordCompletion *  The completion resource object.
+ *  line             char *  The current input line.
+ *  word_end          int    The index of the character in line[] which
+ *                           follows the end of the token that is being
+ *                           completed.
+ *  data             void *  Anonymous 'data' to be passed to match_fn().
+ *  match_fn   CplMatchFn *  The function that will identify the prefix
+ *                           to be completed from the input line, and
+ *                           record completion matches.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     CplMatches *  The container of the array of possible
+ *                           completions. The returned pointer refers
+ *                           to a container owned by the parent WordCompletion
+ *                           object, and its contents thus potentially
+ *                           change on every call to cpl_matches().
+ *                           On error, NULL is returned, and a description
+ *                           of the error can be acquired by calling
+ *                           cpl_last_error(cpl).
+ */
+CplMatches *cpl_complete_word(WordCompletion *cpl, const char *line,
+				int word_end, void *data, 
+				CplMatchFn *match_fn)
+{
+  int line_len;   /* The total length of the input line */
+/*
+ * How long is the input line?
+ */
+  line_len = strlen(line);
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!cpl || !line || !match_fn || word_end < 0 || word_end > line_len) {
+    if(cpl)
+      strcpy(cpl->errmsg, "cpl_complete_word: Invalid arguments.");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Clear the return container.
+ */
+  cpl_clear_completions(cpl);
+/*
+ * Have the matching function record possible completion matches in
+ * cpl->result.matches.
+ */
+  if(match_fn(cpl, data, line, word_end)) {
+    if(cpl->errmsg[0] == '\0')
+      strcpy(cpl->errmsg, "Error completing word.");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record a copy of the common initial part of all of the prefixes
+ * in cpl->result.common.
+ */
+  if(cpl_common_suffix(cpl))
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Sort the matches into lexicographic order.
+ */
+  cpl_sort_matches(cpl);
+/*
+ * Discard any duplicate matches.
+ */
+  cpl_zap_duplicates(cpl);
+/*
+ * If there is more than one match, discard the continuation suffix.
+ */
+  if(cpl->result.nmatch > 1)
+    cpl->result.cont_suffix = "";
+/*
+ * Return the array of matches.
+ */
+  return &cpl->result;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Print out an array of matching completions.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  result  CplMatches *   The container of the sorted array of
+ *                         completions.
+ *  fp            FILE *   The output stream to write to.
+ *  term_width     int     The width of the terminal.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int     0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+int cpl_list_completions(CplMatches *result, FILE *fp, int term_width)
+{
+  int maxlen;    /* The length of the longest matching string */
+  int width;     /* The width of a column */
+  int ncol;      /* The number of columns to list */
+  int nrow;      /* The number of rows needed to list all of the matches */
+  int row,col;   /* The row and column being written to */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!result || !fp) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "cpl_list_completions: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Not enough space to list anything?
+ */
+  if(term_width < 1)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Work out the maximum length of the matching strings.
+ */
+  maxlen = 0;
+  for(i=0; i<result->nmatch; i++) {
+    CplMatch *match = result->matches + i;
+    int len = strlen(match->completion) +
+              strlen(match->type_suffix);
+    if(len > maxlen)
+      maxlen = len;
+  };
+/*
+ * Nothing to list?
+ */
+  if(maxlen == 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Split the available terminal width into columns of maxlen + 2 characters.
+ */
+  width = maxlen + 2;
+  ncol = term_width / width;
+/*
+ * If the column width is greater than the terminal width, the matches will
+ * just have to overlap onto the next line.
+ */
+  if(ncol < 1)
+    ncol = 1;
+/*
+ * How many rows will be needed?
+ */
+  nrow = (result->nmatch + ncol - 1) / ncol;
+/*
+ * Print the matches out in ncol columns, sorted in row order within each
+ * column.
+ */
+  for(row=0; row < nrow; row++) {
+    for(col=0; col < ncol; col++) {
+      int m = col*nrow + row;
+      if(m < result->nmatch) {
+	CplMatch *match = result->matches + m;
+	if(fprintf(fp, "%s%-*s%s", match->completion,
+		   (int) (ncol > 1 ? maxlen - strlen(match->completion):0),
+		   match->type_suffix, col<ncol-1 ? "  " : "\r\n") < 0)
+	  return 1;
+      } else {
+	if(fprintf(fp, "\r\n") < 0)
+	  return 1;
+	break;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the string-completion error that occurred.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The string-completion resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    const char *  The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *cpl_last_error(WordCompletion *cpl)
+{
+  return cpl ? cpl->errmsg : "NULL WordCompletion argument";
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * When an error occurs while performing a completion, you registerf a
+ * terse description of the error by calling cpl_record_error(). This
+ * message will then be returned on the next call to cpl_last_error().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The string-completion resource object that was
+ *                          originally passed to the callback.
+ *  errmsg    const char *  The description of the error.
+ */
+void cpl_record_error(WordCompletion *cpl, const char *errmsg)
+{
+  if(cpl && errmsg) {
+    strncpy(cpl->errmsg, errmsg, ERRLEN);
+    cpl->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the builtin completion callback function which performs file
+ * completion.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl  WordCompletion *  An opaque pointer to the object that will
+ *                         contain the matches. This should be filled
+ *                         via zero or more calls to cpl_add_completion().
+ *  data           void *  Either NULL to request the default
+ *                         file-completion behavior, or a pointer to a
+ *                         CplFileConf structure, whose members specify
+ *                         a different behavior.
+ *  line           char *  The current input line.
+ *  word_end        int    The index of the character in line[] which
+ *                         follows the end of the token that is being
+ *                         completed.
+ * Output
+ *  return          int    0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+CPL_MATCH_FN(cpl_file_completions)
+{
+  const char *start_path;  /* The pointer to the start of the pathname */
+                           /*  in line[]. */
+  CplFileConf *conf;       /* The new-style configuration object. */
+/*
+ * The following configuration object will be used if the caller didn't
+ * provide one.
+ */
+  CplFileConf default_conf;
+/*
+ * This function can be called externally, so check its arguments.
+ */
+  if(!cpl)
+    return 1;
+  if(!line || word_end < 0) {
+    strcpy(cpl->errmsg, "cpl_file_completions: Invalid arguments.");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * The 'data' argument is either a CplFileConf pointer, identifiable
+ * by having an integer id code as its first member, or the deprecated
+ * CplFileArgs pointer, or can be NULL to request the default
+ * configuration.
+ */
+  if(data && *(int *)data == CFC_ID_CODE) {
+    conf = (CplFileConf *) data;
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Select the defaults.
+ */
+    conf = &default_conf;
+    cpl_init_FileConf(&default_conf);
+/*
+ * If we have been passed an instance of the deprecated CplFileArgs
+ * structure, copy its configuration parameters over the defaults.
+ */
+    if(data) {
+      CplFileArgs *args = (CplFileArgs *) data;
+      conf->escaped = args->escaped;
+      conf->file_start = args->file_start;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the start of the filename. If not specified by the caller
+ * identify it by searching backwards in the input line for an
+ * unescaped space or the start of the line.
+ */
+  if(conf->file_start < 0) {
+    start_path = _pu_start_of_path(line, word_end);
+    if(!start_path) {
+      strcpy(cpl->errmsg, "Unable to find the start of the filename.");
+      return 1;
+    };
+  } else {
+    start_path = line + conf->file_start;
+  };
+/*
+ * Perform the completion.
+ */
+  if(_cf_complete_file(cpl, cpl->cf, line, start_path - line, word_end,
+		      conf->escaped, conf->chk_fn, conf->chk_data)) {
+    cpl_record_error(cpl, _cf_last_error(cpl->cf));
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Initialize a CplFileArgs structure with default configuration
+ * parameters. Note that the CplFileArgs configuration type is
+ * deprecated. The opaque CplFileConf object should be used in future
+ * applications.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cfa  CplFileArgs *  The configuration object of the
+ *                      cpl_file_completions() callback.
+ */
+void cpl_init_FileArgs(CplFileArgs *cfa)
+{
+  if(cfa) {
+    cfa->escaped = 1;
+    cfa->file_start = -1;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Initialize a CplFileConf structure with default configuration
+ * parameters.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cfc  CplFileConf *  The configuration object of the
+ *                      cpl_file_completions() callback.
+ */
+static void cpl_init_FileConf(CplFileConf *cfc)
+{
+  if(cfc) {
+    cfc->id = CFC_ID_CODE;
+    cfc->escaped = 1;
+    cfc->file_start = -1;
+    cfc->chk_fn = 0;
+    cfc->chk_data = NULL;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new CplFileConf object and initialize it with defaults.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  CplFileConf *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+CplFileConf *new_CplFileConf(void)
+{
+  CplFileConf *cfc;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  cfc = (CplFileConf *)malloc(sizeof(CplFileConf));
+  if(!cfc)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_CplFileConf().
+ */
+  cpl_init_FileConf(cfc);
+  return cfc;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a CplFileConf object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cfc    CplFileConf *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return CplFileConf *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+CplFileConf *del_CplFileConf(CplFileConf *cfc)
+{
+  if(cfc) {
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(cfc);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If backslashes in the filename should be treated as literal
+ * characters, call the following function with literal=1. Otherwise
+ * the default is to treat them as escape characters, used for escaping
+ * spaces etc..
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cfc    CplFileConf *  The cpl_file_completions() configuration object
+ *                        to be configured.
+ *  literal        int    Pass non-zero here to enable literal interpretation
+ *                        of backslashes. Pass 0 to turn off literal
+ *                        interpretation.
+ */
+void cfc_literal_escapes(CplFileConf *cfc, int literal)
+{
+  if(cfc)
+    cfc->escaped = !literal;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Call this function if you know where the index at which the
+ * filename prefix starts in the input line. Otherwise by default,
+ * or if you specify start_index to be -1, the filename is taken
+ * to start after the first unescaped space preceding the cursor,
+ * or the start of the line, which ever comes first.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cfc    CplFileConf *  The cpl_file_completions() configuration object
+ *                        to be configured.
+ *  start_index    int    The index of the start of the filename in
+ *                        the input line, or -1 to select the default.
+ */
+void cfc_file_start(CplFileConf *cfc, int start_index)
+{
+  if(cfc)
+    cfc->file_start = start_index;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If you only want certain types of files to be included in the
+ * list of completions, you use the following function to specify a
+ * callback function which will be called to ask whether a given file
+ * should be included.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cfc    CplFileConf *  The cpl_file_completions() configuration object
+ *                        to be configured.
+ *  chk_fn  CplCheckFn *  Zero to disable filtering, or a pointer to a
+ *                        function that returns 1 if a given file should
+ *                        be included in the list of completions.
+ *  chk_data      void *  Anonymous data to be passed to chk_fn()
+ *                        every time that it is called.
+ */
+void cfc_set_check_fn(CplFileConf *cfc, CplCheckFn *chk_fn, void *chk_data)
+{
+  if(cfc) {
+    cfc->chk_fn = chk_fn;
+    cfc->chk_data = chk_data;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * The following CplCheckFn callback returns non-zero if the specified
+ * filename is that of an executable.
+ */
+CPL_CHECK_FN(cpl_check_exe)
+{
+  return _pu_path_is_exe(pathname);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Remove duplicates from a sorted array of matches.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The completion resource object.
+ */
+static void cpl_zap_duplicates(WordCompletion *cpl)
+{
+  CplMatch *matches;       /* The array of matches */
+  int nmatch;              /* The number of elements in matches[] */
+  const char *completion;  /* The completion string of the last unique match */
+  const char *type_suffix; /* The type of the last unique match */
+  int src;                 /* The index of the match being considered */
+  int dst;                 /* The index at which to record the next */
+                           /*  unique match. */
+/*
+ * Get the array of matches and the number of matches that it
+ * contains.
+ */
+  matches = cpl->result.matches;
+  nmatch = cpl->result.nmatch;
+/*
+ * No matches?
+ */
+  if(nmatch < 1)
+    return;
+/*
+ * Initialize the comparison strings with the first match.
+ */
+  completion = matches[0].completion;
+  type_suffix = matches[0].type_suffix;
+/*
+ * Go through the array of matches, copying each new unrecorded
+ * match at the head of the array, while discarding duplicates.
+ */
+  for(src=dst=1; src<nmatch; src++) {
+    CplMatch *match = matches + src;
+    if(strcmp(completion, match->completion) != 0 ||
+       strcmp(type_suffix, match->type_suffix) != 0) {
+      if(src != dst)
+	matches[dst] = *match;
+      dst++;
+      completion = match->completion;
+      type_suffix = match->type_suffix;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the number of unique matches that remain.
+ */
+  cpl->result.nmatch = dst;
+  return;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/demo.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/demo.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8bee92d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/demo.c
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by the California Institute of Technology.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+#include "libtecla.h"
+
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+  char *line;             /* A line of input */
+  GetLine *gl;            /* The line editor */
+  int major,minor,micro;  /* The version number of the library */
+/*
+ * Create the line editor, specifying a max line length of 500 bytes,
+ * and 10000 bytes to allocate to storage of historical input lines.
+ */
+  gl = new_GetLine(500, 5000);
+  if(!gl)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * If the user has the LC_CTYPE or LC_ALL environment variables set,
+ * enable display of characters corresponding to the specified locale.
+ */
+  (void) setlocale(LC_CTYPE, "");
+/*
+ * Lookup and display the version number of the library.
+ */
+  libtecla_version(&major, &minor, &micro);
+  printf("Welcome to the demo program of libtecla version %d.%d.%d\n",
+	 major, minor, micro);
+/*
+ * Load history.
+ */
+  (void) gl_load_history(gl, "~/.demo_history", "#");
+/*
+ * Read lines of input from the user and print them to stdout.
+ */
+  do {
+/*
+ * Get a new line from the user.
+ */
+    line = gl_get_line(gl, "$ ", NULL, 0);
+    if(!line)
+      break;
+/*
+ * Display what was entered.
+ */
+    if(printf("You entered: %s", line) < 0 || fflush(stdout))
+      break;
+/*
+ * If the user types "exit", quit the program.
+ */
+    if(strcmp(line, "exit\n")==0)
+      break;
+    else if(strcmp(line, "history\n")==0)
+      gl_show_history(gl, stdout, "%N  %T   %H\n", 0, -1);
+    else if(strcmp(line, "size\n")==0) {
+      GlTerminalSize size = gl_terminal_size(gl, 80, 24);
+      printf("Terminal size = %d columns x %d lines.\n", size.ncolumn,
+	     size.nline);
+    };
+  } while(1);
+/*
+ * Save historical command lines.
+ */
+  (void) gl_save_history(gl, "~/.demo_history", "#", -1);
+/*
+ * Clean up.
+ */
+  gl = del_GetLine(gl);
+  return 0;
+}
+
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/demo2.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/demo2.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1e80c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/demo2.c
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+#include "libtecla.h"
+
+/*
+ * Encapsulate the resources needed by this demo.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  GetLine *gl;      /* The line editor */
+  PathCache *pc;    /* A cache of executables in the user's path */
+  PcaPathConf *ppc; /* The configuration argument of pca_path_completions() */
+} DemoRes;
+
+/*
+ * The following functions allocate and free instances of the above
+ * structure.
+ */
+static DemoRes *new_DemoRes(void);
+static DemoRes *del_DemoRes(DemoRes *res);
+
+/*
+ * Search backwards for the start of a pathname.
+ */
+static char *start_of_path(const char *string, int back_from);
+
+/*
+ * Find the array indexes of the first character of the first
+ * space-delimited word in the specified string, and of the character
+ * that follows it.
+ */
+static int get_word_limits(const char *string, int *wa, int *wb);
+
+/*
+ * This is the demonstration completion callback function (defined below).
+ */
+static CPL_MATCH_FN(demo_cpl_fn);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This demo takes no arguments. It reads lines of input until the
+ * word 'exit' is entered, or C-d is pressed. It replaces the default
+ * tab-completion callback with one which when invoked at the start of
+ * a line, looks up completions of commands in the user's execution
+ * path, and when invoked in other parts of the line, reverts to
+ * normal filename completion. Whenever a new line is entered, it
+ * extracts the first word on the line, looks it up in the user's
+ * execution path to see if it corresponds to a known executable file,
+ * and if so, displays the full pathname of the file, along with the
+ * remaining arguments.
+ */
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+  char *line;             /* A line of input */
+  DemoRes *res;           /* The resources of the demo */
+  int wa,wb;              /* The delimiting indexes of a word in line[] */
+  int major,minor,micro;  /* The version number of the library */
+/*
+ * Allocate the resources needed by this demo.
+ */
+  res = new_DemoRes();
+  if(!res)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * If the user has the LC_CTYPE or LC_ALL environment variables set,
+ * enable display of characters corresponding to the specified locale.
+ */
+  (void) setlocale(LC_CTYPE, "");
+/*
+ * Lookup and display the version number of the library.
+ */
+  libtecla_version(&major, &minor, &micro);
+  printf("Welcome to the demo2 program of libtecla version %d.%d.%d\n",
+	 major, minor, micro);
+/*
+ * Read lines of input from the user and print them to stdout.
+ */
+  do {
+/*
+ * Get a new line from the user.
+ */
+    line = gl_get_line(res->gl, "$ ", NULL, 0);
+    if(!line)
+      break;
+/*
+ * Work out the extent of the first word in the input line, and
+ * try to identify this as a command in the path, displaying the
+ * full pathname of the match if found.
+ */
+    if(get_word_limits(line, &wa, &wb) == 0) {
+      char *cmd = pca_lookup_file(res->pc, line + wa, wb-wa, 0);
+      if(cmd) {
+	printf("Command=%s\n", cmd);
+	printf("Arguments=%s", line+wb);
+      } else {
+	printf("Command not found\n");
+      };
+    };
+/*
+ * If the user types "exit", quit the program.
+ */
+    if(strcmp(line, "exit\n")==0)
+      break;
+  } while(1);
+/*
+ * Clean up.
+ */
+  res = del_DemoRes(res);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This completion callback searches for completions of executables in
+ * the user's path when invoked on a word at the start of the path, and
+ * performs normal filename completion elsewhere.
+ */
+static CPL_MATCH_FN(demo_cpl_fn)
+{
+/*
+ * Get the resource object that was passed to gl_customize_completion().
+ */
+  DemoRes *res = (DemoRes *) data;
+/*
+ * Find the start of the filename prefix to be completed, searching
+ * backwards for the first unescaped space, or the start of the line.
+ */
+  char *start = start_of_path(line, word_end);
+/*
+ * Skip spaces preceding the start of the prefix.
+ */
+  while(start > line && isspace((int)(unsigned char) start[-1]))
+    start--;
+/*
+ * If the filename prefix is at the start of the line, attempt
+ * to complete the filename as a command in the path. Otherwise
+ * perform normal filename completion.
+ */
+  return (start == line) ?
+    pca_path_completions(cpl, res->ppc, line, word_end) :
+    cpl_file_completions(cpl, NULL, line, word_end);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search backwards for the potential start of a filename. This
+ * looks backwards from the specified index in a given string,
+ * stopping at the first unescaped space or the start of the line.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string  const char *  The string to search backwards in.
+ *  back_from      int    The index of the first character in string[]
+ *                        that follows the pathname.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        char *  The pointer to the first character of
+ *                        the potential pathname, or NULL on error.
+ */
+static char *start_of_path(const char *string, int back_from)
+{
+  int i, j;
+/*
+ * Search backwards from the specified index.
+ */
+  for(i=back_from-1; i>=0; i--) {
+    int c = string[i];
+/*
+ * Stop on unescaped spaces.
+ */
+    if(isspace((int)(unsigned char)c)) {
+/*
+ * The space can't be escaped if we are at the start of the line.
+ */
+      if(i==0)
+        break;
+/*
+ * Find the extent of the escape characters which precedes the space.
+ */
+      for(j=i-1; j>=0 && string[j]=='\\'; j--)
+	;
+/*
+ * If there isn't an odd number of escape characters before the space,
+ * then the space isn't escaped.
+ */
+      if((i - 1 - j) % 2 == 0)
+	break;
+    };
+  };
+  return (char *)string + i + 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new DemoRes object containing the resources needed by the
+ * demo.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  DemoRes *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+static DemoRes *new_DemoRes(void)
+{
+  DemoRes *res;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  res = (DemoRes *)malloc(sizeof(DemoRes));
+  if(!res) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_DemoRes: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_DemoRes().
+ */
+  res->gl = NULL;
+  res->pc = NULL;
+  res->ppc = NULL;
+/*
+ * Create the line editor, specifying a max line length of 500 bytes,
+ * and 10000 bytes to allocate to storage of historical input lines.
+ */
+  res->gl = new_GetLine(500, 10000);
+  if(!res->gl)
+    return del_DemoRes(res);
+/*
+ * Enable text attribute formatting directives in prompt strings.
+ */
+  gl_prompt_style(res->gl, GL_FORMAT_PROMPT);
+/*
+ * Allocate a cache of the executable files found in the user's path.
+ */
+  res->pc = new_PathCache();
+  if(!res->pc)
+    return del_DemoRes(res);
+/*
+ * Populate the cache with the contents of the user's path.
+ */
+  if(pca_scan_path(res->pc, getenv("PATH")))
+    return del_DemoRes(res);
+/*
+ * Arrange for susequent calls to pca_lookup_file() and pca_path_completions()
+ * to only report files that are executable by the user.
+ */
+  pca_set_check_fn(res->pc, cpl_check_exe, NULL);
+/*
+ * Allocate a configuration object for use with pca_path_completions().
+ */
+  res->ppc = new_PcaPathConf(res->pc);
+  if(!res->ppc)
+    return del_DemoRes(res);
+/*
+ * Replace the builtin filename completion callback with one which
+ * searches for completions of executables in the user's path when
+ * invoked on a word at the start of the path, and completes files
+ * elsewhere.
+ */
+  if(gl_customize_completion(res->gl, res, demo_cpl_fn))
+    return del_DemoRes(res);
+  return res;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a DemoRes object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  res     DemoRes *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  DemoRes *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+static DemoRes *del_DemoRes(DemoRes *res)
+{
+  if(res) {
+    res->gl = del_GetLine(res->gl);
+    res->pc = del_PathCache(res->pc);
+    res->ppc = del_PcaPathConf(res->ppc);
+    free(res);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the limits of the word at the start of a given string, ignoring
+ * leading white-space, and interpretting the first unescaped space, tab or
+ * the end of the line, as the end of the word.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string   const char *  The string to tokenize.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  wa,wb           int *  The indexes of the first character of the word,
+ *                         and the character which follows the last
+ *                         character of the word, will be assigned to
+ *                         *wa and *wb, respectively.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    0 - A word was found.
+ *                         1 - No word was found before the end of the
+ *                             string.
+ */
+static int get_word_limits(const char *string, int *wa, int *wb)
+{
+  int escaped = 0;  /* True if the next character is escaped */
+/*
+ * Skip leading white-space.
+ */
+  for(*wa=0; isspace((int)(unsigned char)string[*wa]); (*wa)++)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Find the first unescaped space, stopping early if the end of the
+ * string is reached.
+ */
+  for(*wb = *wa; ; (*wb)++) {
+    int c = string[*wb];
+    if(c=='\\')
+      escaped = !escaped;
+    else if((!escaped && isspace((int)(unsigned char)c)) || c=='\0')
+      break;
+  };
+  return *wa == *wb;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/direader.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/direader.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a81fbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/direader.c
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Standard includes.
+ */
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+/*
+ * Operating system includes.
+ */
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+
+#include "direader.h"
+
+/*
+ * Use the reentrant POSIX threads version of readdir()?
+ */
+#if defined(_POSIX_C_SOURCE) && _POSIX_C_SOURCE >= 199506L
+#define USE_READDIR_R 1
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Set the max length of the error-reporting string. There is no point
+ * in this being longer than the width of a typical terminal window.
+ * In composing error messages, I have assumed that this number is
+ * at least 80, so you don't decrease it below this number.
+ */
+#define ERRLEN 200
+
+/*
+ * Objects of the following type are used to maintain the resources
+ * needed to read directories.
+ */
+struct DirReader {
+  DIR *dir;              /* The directory stream (if open, NULL otherwise) */
+  struct dirent *file;   /* The latest directory entry */
+  char errmsg[ERRLEN+1]; /* Error-report buffer */
+#ifdef USE_READDIR_R
+  struct dirent *buffer; /* A buffer used by the threaded version of readdir */
+  int buffer_dim;        /* The allocated size of buffer[] */
+#endif
+};
+
+static int _dr_path_is_dir(const char *pathname);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new DirReader object.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  DirReader *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+DirReader *_new_DirReader(void)
+{
+  DirReader *dr;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  dr = (DirReader *) malloc(sizeof(DirReader));
+  if(!dr) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_DirReader: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_DirReader().
+ */
+  dr->dir = NULL;
+  dr->file = NULL;
+  dr->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+#ifdef USE_READDIR_R
+  dr->buffer = NULL;
+  dr->buffer_dim = 0;
+#endif
+  return dr;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a DirReader object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  dr     DirReader *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return DirReader *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+DirReader *_del_DirReader(DirReader *dr)
+{
+  if(dr) {
+    _dr_close_dir(dr);
+#ifdef USE_READDIR_R
+    free(dr->buffer);
+#endif
+    free(dr);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Open a new directory.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  dr      DirReader *   The directory reader resource object.
+ *  path   const char *   The directory to be opened.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  errmsg       char **  If an error occurs and errmsg isn't NULL, a
+ *                        pointer to an error description will be assigned
+ *                        to *errmsg.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int     0 - OK.
+ *                        1 - Error (see *errmsg for a description).
+ */
+int _dr_open_dir(DirReader *dr, const char *path, char **errmsg)
+{
+  DIR *dir = NULL;   /* The directory stream */
+/*
+ * If a directory is already open, close it first.
+ */
+  (void) _dr_close_dir(dr);
+/*
+ * Is the path a directory?
+ */
+  if(!_dr_path_is_dir(path)) {
+    if(errmsg) {
+      const char *fmt = "Can't open directory: %.*s\n";
+      sprintf(dr->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt), path);
+      *errmsg = dr->errmsg;
+    };
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the directory.
+ */
+  dir = opendir(path);
+  if(!dir) {
+    if(errmsg) {
+      const char *fmt = "Can't open directory: %.*s\n";
+      sprintf(dr->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt), path);
+      *errmsg = dr->errmsg;
+    };
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If using POSIX threads, allocate a buffer for readdir_r().
+ */
+#ifdef USE_READDIR_R
+  {
+    size_t size;
+    int name_max = pathconf(path, _PC_NAME_MAX);
+#ifdef NAME_MAX
+    if(name_max < 0)
+      name_max = NAME_MAX;
+#endif
+    if(name_max < 0) {
+      if(errmsg) {
+	strcpy(dr->errmsg, "Unable to deduce readdir() buffer size.");
+	*errmsg = dr->errmsg;
+      };
+      closedir(dir);
+      return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * How big a buffer do we need to allocate?
+ */
+    size = sizeof(struct dirent) + name_max;
+/*
+ * Extend the buffer?
+ */
+    if(size > dr->buffer_dim || !dr->buffer) {
+      struct dirent *buffer = (struct dirent *) (dr->buffer ?
+						 realloc(dr->buffer, size) :
+						 malloc(size));
+      if(!buffer) {
+	if(errmsg) {
+	  strcpy(dr->errmsg, "Insufficient memory for readdir() buffer.");
+	  *errmsg = dr->errmsg;
+	};
+	closedir(dir);
+	return 1;
+      };
+      dr->buffer = buffer;
+      dr->buffer_dim = size;
+    };
+  };
+#endif
+/*
+ * Record the successfully opened directory.
+ */
+  dr->dir = dir;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If the DirReader object is currently contains an open directory,
+ * close it.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  dr    DirReader *   The directory reader resource object.
+ */
+void _dr_close_dir(DirReader *dr)
+{
+  if(dr && dr->dir) {
+    closedir(dr->dir);
+    dr->dir = NULL;
+    dr->file = NULL;
+    dr->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read the next file from the directory opened with _dr_open_dir().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  dr    DirReader *  The directory reader resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     char *  The name of the new file, or NULL if we reached
+ *                     the end of the directory.
+ */
+char *_dr_next_file(DirReader *dr)
+{
+/*
+ * Are we currently reading a directory?
+ */
+  if(dr->dir) {
+/*
+ * Read the next directory entry.
+ */
+#ifdef USE_READDIR_R 
+    if(readdir_r(dr->dir, dr->buffer, &dr->file) == 0 && dr->file)
+      return dr->file->d_name;
+#else
+    dr->file = readdir(dr->dir);
+    if(dr->file)
+      return dr->file->d_name;
+#endif
+  };
+/*
+ * When the end of a directory is reached, close it.
+ */
+  _dr_close_dir(dr);
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return 1 if the specified pathname refers to a directory.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pathname  const char *  The path to test.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - Not a directory.
+ *                          1 - pathname[] refers to a directory.
+ */
+static int _dr_path_is_dir(const char *pathname)
+{
+  struct stat statbuf;    /* The file-statistics return buffer */
+/*
+ * Look up the file attributes.
+ */
+  if(stat(pathname, &statbuf) < 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Is the file a directory?
+ */
+  return S_ISDIR(statbuf.st_mode) != 0;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/direader.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/direader.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cf178e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/direader.h
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+#ifndef dirreader_h
+#define dirreader_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+typedef struct DirReader DirReader;
+
+DirReader *_new_DirReader(void);
+DirReader *_del_DirReader(DirReader *dr);
+
+int _dr_open_dir(DirReader *dr, const char *pathname, char **errmsg);
+char *_dr_next_file(DirReader *dr);
+void _dr_close_dir(DirReader *dr);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/enhance.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/enhance.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72f5061
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/enhance.c
@@ -0,0 +1,689 @@
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <termios.h>
+
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+
+#if HAVE_SYSV_PTY
+#include <stropts.h>    /* System-V stream I/O */
+char *ptsname(int fd);
+int grantpt(int fd);
+int unlockpt(int fd);
+#endif
+
+#include "libtecla.h"
+
+/*
+ * Pseudo-terminal devices are found in the following directory.
+ */
+#define PTY_DEV_DIR "/dev/"
+
+/*
+ * Pseudo-terminal controller device file names start with the following
+ * prefix.
+ */
+#define PTY_CNTRL "pty"
+
+/*
+ * Pseudo-terminal slave device file names start with the following
+ * prefix.
+ */
+#define PTY_SLAVE "tty"
+
+/*
+ * Specify the maximum suffix length for the control and slave device
+ * names.
+ */
+#define PTY_MAX_SUFFIX 10
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length of the master and slave terminal device filenames,
+ * including space for a terminating '\0'.
+ */
+#define PTY_MAX_NAME (sizeof(PTY_DEV_DIR)-1 + \
+		      (sizeof(PTY_SLAVE) > sizeof(PTY_CNTRL) ? \
+		       sizeof(PTY_SLAVE) : sizeof(PTY_CNTRL))-1 \
+		      + PTY_MAX_SUFFIX + 1)
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length of an input line.
+ */
+#define PTY_MAX_LINE 4096
+
+/*
+ * Set the size of the buffer used for accumulating bytes written by the
+ * user's terminal to its stdout.
+ */
+#define PTY_MAX_READ 1000
+
+/*
+ * Set the amount of memory used to record history.
+ */
+#define PTY_HIST_SIZE 10000
+
+/*
+ * Set the timeout delay used to check for quickly arriving
+ * sequential output from the application.
+ */
+#define PTY_READ_TIMEOUT 100000    /* micro-seconds */
+
+static int pty_open_master(const char *prog, int *cntrl, char *slave_name);
+static int pty_open_slave(const char *prog, char *slave_name);
+static int pty_child(const char *prog, int slave, char *argv[]);
+static int pty_parent(const char *prog, int cntrl);
+static int pty_stop_parent(int waserr, int cntrl, GetLine *gl, char *rbuff);
+static GL_FD_EVENT_FN(pty_read_from_program);
+static int pty_write_to_fd(int fd, const char *string, int n);
+static void pty_child_exited(int sig);
+static int pty_master_readable(int fd, long usec);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Run a program with enhanced terminal editing facilities.
+ *
+ * Usage:
+ *  enhance program [args...]
+ */
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+  int cntrl = -1;  /* The fd of the pseudo-terminal controller device */
+  int slave = -1;  /* The fd of the pseudo-terminal slave device */
+  pid_t pid;       /* The return value of fork() */
+  int status;      /* The return statuses of the parent and child functions */
+  char slave_name[PTY_MAX_NAME]; /* The filename of the slave end of the */
+                                 /*  pseudo-terminal. */
+  char *prog;      /* The name of the program (ie. argv[0]) */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(argc < 2) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s <program> [arguments...]\n", argv[0]);
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the name of the program.
+ */
+  prog = argv[0];
+/*
+ * If the user has the LC_CTYPE or LC_ALL environment variables set,
+ * enable display of characters corresponding to the specified locale.
+ */
+  (void) setlocale(LC_CTYPE, "");
+/*
+ * If the program is taking its input from a pipe or a file, or
+ * sending its output to something other than a terminal, run the
+ * program without tecla.
+ */
+  if(!isatty(STDIN_FILENO) || !isatty(STDOUT_FILENO)) {
+    if(execvp(argv[1], argv + 1) < 0) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to execute %s (%s).\n", prog, argv[1],
+	      strerror(errno));
+      fflush(stderr);
+      _exit(1);
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Open the master side of a pseudo-terminal pair, and return
+ * the corresponding file descriptor and the filename of the
+ * slave end of the pseudo-terminal.
+ */
+  if(pty_open_master(prog, &cntrl, slave_name))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Set up a signal handler to watch for the child process exiting.
+ */
+  signal(SIGCHLD, pty_child_exited);
+/*
+ * The above signal handler sends the parent process a SIGINT signal.
+ * This signal is caught by gl_get_line(), which resets the terminal
+ * settings, and if the application signal handler for this signal
+ * doesn't abort the process, gl_get_line() returns NULL with errno
+ * set to EINTR. Arrange to ignore the signal, so that gl_get_line()
+ * returns and we have a chance to cleanup.
+ */
+  signal(SIGINT, SIG_IGN);
+/*
+ * We will read user input in one process, and run the user's program
+ * in a child process.
+ */
+  pid = fork();
+  if(pid < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to fork child process (%s).\n", prog,
+	    strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Are we the parent?
+ */
+  if(pid!=0) {
+    status = pty_parent(prog, cntrl);
+    close(cntrl);
+  } else {
+    close(cntrl); /* The child doesn't use the slave device */
+    signal(SIGCHLD, pty_child_exited);
+    if((slave = pty_open_slave(prog, slave_name)) >= 0) {
+      status = pty_child(prog, slave, argv + 1);
+      close(slave);
+    } else {
+      status = 1;
+    };
+  };
+  return status;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Open the master side of a pseudo-terminal pair, and return
+ * the corresponding file descriptor and the filename of the
+ * slave end of the pseudo-terminal.
+ *
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  prog  const char *  The name of this program.
+ *  cntrl        int *  The file descriptor of the pseudo-terminal
+ *                      controller device will be assigned tp *cntrl.
+ *  slave_name  char *  The file-name of the pseudo-terminal slave device
+ *                      will be recorded in slave_name[], which must have
+ *                      at least PTY_MAX_NAME elements.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int pty_open_master(const char *prog, int *cntrl, char *slave_name)
+{
+  char master_name[PTY_MAX_NAME]; /* The filename of the master device */
+  DIR *dir;                       /* The directory iterator */
+  struct dirent *file;            /* A file in "/dev" */
+/*
+ * Mark the controller device as not opened yet.
+ */
+  *cntrl = -1;
+/*
+ * On systems with the Sys-V pseudo-terminal interface, we don't
+ * have to search for a free master terminal. We just open /dev/ptmx,
+ * and if there is a free master terminal device, we are given a file
+ * descriptor connected to it.
+ */
+#if HAVE_SYSV_PTY
+  *cntrl = open("/dev/ptmx", O_RDWR);
+  if(*cntrl >= 0) {
+/*
+ * Get the filename of the slave side of the pseudo-terminal.
+ */
+    char *name = ptsname(*cntrl);
+    if(name) {
+      if(strlen(name)+1 > PTY_MAX_NAME) {
+	fprintf(stderr, "%s: Slave pty filename too long.\n", prog);
+	return 1;
+      };
+      strcpy(slave_name, name);
+/*
+ * If unable to get the slave name, discard the controller file descriptor,
+ * ready to try a search instead.
+ */
+    } else {
+      close(*cntrl);
+      *cntrl = -1;
+    };
+  } else {
+#endif
+/*
+ * On systems without /dev/ptmx, or if opening /dev/ptmx failed,
+ * we open one master terminal after another, until one that isn't
+ * in use by another program is found.
+ *
+ * Open the devices directory.
+ */
+    dir = opendir(PTY_DEV_DIR);
+    if(!dir) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s: Couldn't open %s (%s)\n", prog, PTY_DEV_DIR,
+	      strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Look for pseudo-terminal controller device files in the devices
+ * directory.
+ */
+    while(*cntrl < 0 && (file = readdir(dir))) {
+      if(strncmp(file->d_name, PTY_CNTRL, sizeof(PTY_CNTRL)-1) == 0) {
+/*
+ * Get the common extension of the control and slave filenames.
+ */
+	const char *ext = file->d_name + sizeof(PTY_CNTRL)-1;
+	if(strlen(ext) > PTY_MAX_SUFFIX)
+	  continue;
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the control file.
+ */
+	strcpy(master_name, PTY_DEV_DIR);
+	strcat(master_name, PTY_CNTRL);
+	strcat(master_name, ext);
+	*cntrl = open(master_name, O_RDWR);
+	if(*cntrl < 0)
+	  continue;
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the matching slave file.
+ */
+	strcpy(slave_name, PTY_DEV_DIR);
+	strcat(slave_name, PTY_SLAVE);
+	strcat(slave_name, ext);
+      };
+    };
+    closedir(dir);
+#if HAVE_SYSV_PTY
+  };
+#endif
+/*
+ * Did we fail to find a pseudo-terminal pair that we could open?
+ */
+  if(*cntrl < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to find a free pseudo-terminal.\n", prog);
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * System V systems require the program that opens the master to
+ * grant access to the slave side of the pseudo-terminal.
+ */
+#ifdef HAVE_SYSV_PTY
+  if(grantpt(*cntrl) < 0 ||
+     unlockpt(*cntrl) < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to unlock terminal (%s).\n", prog,
+	    strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+#endif
+/*
+ * Success.
+ */
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Open the slave end of a pseudo-terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  prog   const char *  The name of this program.
+ *  slave_name   char *  The filename of the slave device.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int    The file descriptor of the successfully opened
+ *                       slave device, or < 0 on error.
+ */
+static int pty_open_slave(const char *prog, char *slave_name)
+{
+  int fd;  /* The file descriptor of the slave device */
+/*
+ * Place the process in its own process group. In system-V based
+ * OS's, this ensures that when the pseudo-terminal is opened, it
+ * becomes the controlling terminal of the process.
+ */
+  if(setsid() < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to form new process group (%s).\n", prog,
+	    strerror(errno));
+    return -1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the specified device.
+ */
+  fd = open(slave_name, O_RDWR);
+  if(fd < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to open pseudo-terminal slave device (%s).\n",
+	    prog, strerror(errno));
+    return -1;
+  };
+/*
+ * On system-V streams based systems, we need to push the stream modules
+ * that implement pseudo-terminal and termio interfaces. At least on
+ * Solaris, which pushes these automatically when a slave is opened,
+ * this is redundant, so ignore errors when pushing the modules.
+ */
+#if HAVE_SYSV_PTY
+  (void) ioctl(fd, I_PUSH, "ptem");
+  (void) ioctl(fd, I_PUSH, "ldterm");
+/*
+ * On BSD based systems other than SunOS 4.x, the following makes the
+ * pseudo-terminal the controlling terminal of the child process.
+ * According to the pseudo-terminal example code in Steven's
+ * Advanced programming in the unix environment, the !defined(CIBAUD)
+ * part of the clause prevents this from being used under SunOS. Since
+ * I only have his code with me, and won't have access to the book,
+ * I don't know why this is necessary.
+ */
+#elif defined(TIOCSCTTY) && !defined(CIBAUD)
+  if(ioctl(fd, TIOCSCTTY, (char *) 0) < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to establish controlling terminal (%s).\n",
+	    prog, strerror(errno));
+    close(fd);
+    return -1;
+  };
+#endif
+  return fd;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read input from the controlling terminal of the program, using
+ * gl_get_line(), and feed it to the user's program running in a child
+ * process, via the controller side of the pseudo-terminal. Also pass
+ * data received from the user's program via the conroller end of
+ * the pseudo-terminal, to stdout.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  prog  const char *  The name of this program.
+ *  cntrl        int    The file descriptor of the controller end of the
+ *                      pseudo-terminal.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int pty_parent(const char *prog, int cntrl)
+{
+  GetLine *gl = NULL;  /* The gl_get_line() resource object */
+  char *line;          /* An input line read from the user */
+  char *rbuff=NULL;    /* A buffer for reading from the pseudo terminal */
+/*
+ * Allocate the gl_get_line() resource object.
+ */
+  gl = new_GetLine(PTY_MAX_LINE, PTY_HIST_SIZE);
+  if(!gl)
+    return pty_stop_parent(1, cntrl, gl, rbuff);
+/*
+ * Allocate a buffer to use to accumulate bytes read from the
+ * pseudo-terminal.
+ */
+  rbuff = (char *) malloc(PTY_MAX_READ+1);
+  if(!rbuff)
+    return pty_stop_parent(1, cntrl, gl, rbuff);
+  rbuff[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Register an event handler to watch for data appearing from the
+ * user's program on the controller end of the pseudo terminal.
+ */
+  if(gl_watch_fd(gl, cntrl, GLFD_READ, pty_read_from_program, rbuff))
+    return pty_stop_parent(1, cntrl, gl, rbuff);
+/*
+ * Read input lines from the user and pass them on to the user's program,
+ * by writing to the controller end of the pseudo-terminal.
+ */
+  while((line=gl_get_line(gl, rbuff, NULL, 0))) {
+    if(pty_write_to_fd(cntrl, line, strlen(line)))
+       return pty_stop_parent(1, cntrl, gl, rbuff);
+    rbuff[0] = '\0';
+  };
+  return pty_stop_parent(0, cntrl, gl, rbuff);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a private return function of pty_parent(), used to release
+ * dynamically allocated resources, close the controller end of the
+ * pseudo-terminal, and wait for the child to exit. It returns the
+ * exit status of the child process, unless the caller reports an
+ * error itself, in which case the caller's error status is returned.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  waserr   int    True if the caller is calling this function because
+ *                  an error occured.
+ *  cntrl    int    The file descriptor of the controller end of the
+ *                  pseudo-terminal.
+ *  gl   GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  rbuff   char *  The buffer used to accumulate bytes read from
+ *                  the pseudo-terminal.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  int    The desired exit status of the program.
+ */
+static int pty_stop_parent(int waserr, int cntrl, GetLine *gl, char *rbuff)
+{
+  int status;  /* The return status of the child process */
+/*
+ * Close the controller end of the terminal.
+ */
+  close(cntrl);
+/*
+ * Delete the resource object.
+ */
+  gl = del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Delete the read buffer.
+ */
+  if(rbuff)
+    free(rbuff);
+/*
+ * Wait for the user's program to end.
+ */
+  (void) wait(&status);
+/*
+ * Return either our error status, or the return status of the child
+ * program.
+ */
+  return waserr ? 1 : status;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Run the user's program, with its stdin and stdout connected to the
+ * slave end of the psuedo-terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  prog  const char *   The name of this program.
+ *  slave        int     The file descriptor of the slave end of the
+ *                       pseudo terminal.
+ *  argv        char *[] The argument vector to pass to the user's program,
+ *                       where argv[0] is the name of the user's program,
+ *                       and the last argument is followed by a pointer
+ *                       to NULL.
+ * Output:
+ *  return   int         If this function returns at all, an error must
+ *                       have occured when trying to overlay the process
+ *                       with the user's program. In this case 1 is
+ *                       returned.
+ */
+static int pty_child(const char *prog, int slave, char *argv[])
+{
+  struct termios attr; /* The terminal attributes */
+/*
+ * We need to stop the pseudo-terminal from echoing everything that we send it.
+ */
+  if(tcgetattr(slave, &attr)) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Can't get pseudo-terminal attributes (%s).\n", prog,
+	    strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+  attr.c_lflag &= ~(ECHO);
+  while(tcsetattr(slave, TCSADRAIN, &attr)) {
+    if(errno != EINTR) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s: tcsetattr error: %s\n", prog, strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Arrange for stdin, stdout and stderr to be connected to the slave device,
+ * ignoring errors that imply that either stdin or stdout is closed.
+ */
+  while(dup2(slave, STDIN_FILENO) < 0 && errno==EINTR)
+    ;
+  while(dup2(slave, STDOUT_FILENO) < 0 && errno==EINTR)
+    ;
+  while(dup2(slave, STDERR_FILENO) < 0 && errno==EINTR)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Run the user's program.
+ */
+  if(execvp(argv[0], argv) < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s: Unable to execute %s (%s).\n", prog, argv[0],
+	    strerror(errno));
+    fflush(stderr);
+    _exit(1);
+  };
+  return 0;  /* This should never be reached */
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the event-handler that is called by gl_get_line() whenever
+ * there is tet waiting to be read from the user's program, via the
+ * controller end of the pseudo-terminal. See libtecla.h for details
+ * about its arguments.
+ */
+static GL_FD_EVENT_FN(pty_read_from_program)
+{
+  char *nlptr;   /* A pointer to the last newline in the accumulated string */
+  char *crptr;   /* A pointer to the last '\r' in the accumulated string */
+  char *nextp;   /* A pointer to the next unprocessed character */
+/*
+ * Get the read buffer in which we are accumulating a line to be
+ * forwarded to stdout.
+ */
+  char *rbuff = (char *) data;
+/*
+ * New data may arrive while we are processing the current read, and
+ * it is more efficient to display this here than to keep returning to
+ * gl_get_line() and have it display the latest prefix as a prompt,
+ * followed by the current input line, so we loop, delaying a bit at
+ * the end of each iteration to check for more data arriving from
+ * the application, before finally returning to gl_get_line() when
+ * no more input is available.
+ */
+  do {
+/*
+ * Get the current length of the output string.
+ */
+    int len = strlen(rbuff);
+/*
+ * Read the text from the program.
+ */
+    int nnew = read(fd, rbuff + len, PTY_MAX_READ - len);
+    if(nnew < 0)
+      return GLFD_ABORT;
+    len += nnew;
+/*
+ * Nul terminate the accumulated string.
+ */
+    rbuff[len] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Find the last newline and last carriage return in the buffer, if any.
+ */
+    nlptr = strrchr(rbuff, '\n');
+    crptr = strrchr(rbuff, '\r');
+/*
+ * We want to output up to just before the last newline or carriage
+ * return. If there are no newlines of carriage returns in the line,
+ * and the buffer is full, then we should output the whole line. In
+ * all cases a new output line will be started after the latest text
+ * has been output. The intention is to leave any incomplete line
+ * in the buffer, for (perhaps temporary) use as the current prompt.
+ */
+    if(nlptr) {
+      nextp = crptr && crptr < nlptr ? crptr : nlptr;
+    } else if(crptr) {
+      nextp = crptr;
+    } else if(len >= PTY_MAX_READ) {
+      nextp = rbuff + len;
+    } else {
+      nextp = NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Do we have any text to output yet?
+ */
+    if(nextp) {
+/*
+ * If there was already some text in rbuff before this function
+ * was called, then it will have been used as a prompt. Arrange
+ * to rewrite this prefix, plus the new suffix, by moving back to
+ * the start of the line.
+ */
+      if(len > 0)
+	(void) pty_write_to_fd(STDOUT_FILENO, "\r", 1);
+/*
+ * Write everything up to the last newline to stdout.
+ */
+      (void) pty_write_to_fd(STDOUT_FILENO, rbuff, nextp - rbuff);
+/*
+ * Start a new line.
+ */
+      (void) pty_write_to_fd(STDOUT_FILENO, "\r\n", 2);
+/*
+ * Skip trailing carriage returns and newlines.
+ */
+      while(*nextp=='\n' || *nextp=='\r')
+	nextp++;
+/*
+ * Move any unwritten text following the newline, to the start of the
+ * buffer.
+ */
+      memmove(rbuff, nextp, len - (nextp - rbuff) + 1);
+    };
+  } while(pty_master_readable(fd, PTY_READ_TIMEOUT));
+/*
+ * Make the incomplete line in the output buffer the current prompt.
+ */
+  gl_replace_prompt(gl, rbuff);
+  return GLFD_REFRESH;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Write a given string to a specified file descriptor.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fd             int     The file descriptor to write to.
+ *  string  const char *   The string to write (of at least 'n' characters).
+ *  n              int     The number of characters to write.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int     0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+static int pty_write_to_fd(int fd, const char *string, int n)
+{
+  int ndone = 0;  /* The number of characters written so far */
+/*
+ * Do as many writes as are needed to write the whole string.
+ */
+  while(ndone < n) {
+    int nnew = write(fd, string + ndone, n - ndone);
+    if(nnew > 0)
+      ndone += nnew;
+    else if(errno != EINTR)
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the signal handler that is called when the child process
+ * that is running the user's program exits for any reason. It closes
+ * the slave end of the terminal, so that gl_get_line() in the parent
+ * process sees an end of file.
+ */
+static void pty_child_exited(int sig)
+{
+  raise(SIGINT);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero after a given amount of time if there is data waiting
+ * to be read from a given file descriptor.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fd        int  The descriptor to watch.
+ *  usec     long  The number of micro-seconds to wait for input to
+ *                 arrive before giving up.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int  0 - No data is waiting to be read (or select isn't
+ *                     available).
+ *                 1 - Data is waiting to be read.
+ */
+static int pty_master_readable(int fd, long usec)
+{
+#if HAVE_SELECT
+  fd_set rfds;             /* The set of file descriptors to check */
+  struct timeval timeout;  /* The timeout */
+  FD_ZERO(&rfds);
+  FD_SET(fd, &rfds);
+  timeout.tv_sec = 0;
+  timeout.tv_usec = usec;
+  return select(fd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, &timeout) == 1;
+#else
+  return 0;
+#endif
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/expand.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/expand.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1600ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/expand.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1265 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+#include "freelist.h"
+#include "direader.h"
+#include "pathutil.h"
+#include "homedir.h"
+#include "stringrp.h"
+#include "libtecla.h"
+
+/*
+ * Specify the number of elements to extend the files[] array by
+ * when it proves to be too small. This also sets the initial size
+ * of the array.
+ */
+#define MATCH_BLK_FACT 256
+
+/*
+ * A list of directory iterators is maintained using nodes of the
+ * following form.
+ */
+typedef struct DirNode DirNode;
+struct DirNode {
+  DirNode *next;       /* The next directory in the list */
+  DirNode *prev;       /* The node that precedes this node in the list */
+  DirReader *dr;       /* The directory reader object */
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+  FreeList *mem;       /* Memory for DirNode list nodes */
+  DirNode *head;       /* The head of the list of used and unused cache nodes */
+  DirNode *next;       /* The next unused node between head and tail */
+  DirNode *tail;       /* The tail of the list of unused cache nodes */
+} DirCache;
+
+/*
+ * Specify how many directory cache nodes to allocate at a time.
+ */
+#define DIR_CACHE_BLK 20
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length allowed for usernames.
+ */
+#define USR_LEN 100
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length allowed for environment variable names.
+ */
+#define ENV_LEN 100
+
+/*
+ * Set the max length of the error-reporting string. There is no point
+ * in this being longer than the width of a typical terminal window.
+ * In composing error messages, I have assumed that this number is
+ * at least 80, so you don't decrease it below this number.
+ */
+#define ERRLEN 200
+
+struct ExpandFile {
+  StringGroup *sg;        /* A list of string segments in which */
+                          /*  matching filenames are stored. */
+  DirCache cache;         /* The cache of directory reader objects */
+  PathName *path;         /* The pathname being matched */
+  HomeDir *home;          /* Home-directory lookup object */
+  int files_dim;          /* The allocated dimension of result.files[] */
+  char usrnam[USR_LEN+1]; /* A user name */
+  char envnam[ENV_LEN+1]; /* An environment variable name */
+  char errmsg[ERRLEN+1];  /* Error-report buffer */
+  FileExpansion result;   /* The container used to return the results of */
+                          /*  expanding a path. */
+};
+
+static int ef_record_pathname(ExpandFile *ef, const char *pathname,
+			      int remove_escapes);
+static char *ef_cache_pathname(ExpandFile *ef, const char *pathname,
+			       int remove_escapes);
+static void ef_clear_files(ExpandFile *ef);
+
+static DirNode *ef_open_dir(ExpandFile *ef, const char *pathname);
+static DirNode *ef_close_dir(ExpandFile *ef, DirNode *node);
+static char *ef_expand_special(ExpandFile *ef, const char *path, int pathlen);
+static int ef_match_relative_pathname(ExpandFile *ef, DirReader *dr,
+				      const char *pattern, int separate);
+static int ef_matches_range(int c, const char *pattern, const char **endp);
+static int ef_string_matches_pattern(const char *file, const char *pattern,
+				      int xplicit, const char *nextp);
+static int ef_cmp_strings(const void *v1, const void *v2);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create the resources needed to expand filenames.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  ExpandFile *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+ExpandFile *new_ExpandFile(void)
+{
+  ExpandFile *ef;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  ef = (ExpandFile *) malloc(sizeof(ExpandFile));
+  if(!ef) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_ExpandFile: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_ExpandFile().
+ */
+  ef->sg = NULL;
+  ef->cache.mem = NULL;
+  ef->cache.head = NULL;
+  ef->cache.next = NULL;
+  ef->cache.tail = NULL;
+  ef->path = NULL;
+  ef->home = NULL;
+  ef->result.files = NULL;
+  ef->result.nfile = 0;
+  ef->usrnam[0] = '\0';
+  ef->envnam[0] = '\0';
+  ef->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Allocate a list of string segments for storing filenames.
+ */
+  ef->sg = _new_StringGroup(_pu_pathname_dim());
+  if(!ef->sg)
+    return del_ExpandFile(ef);
+/*
+ * Allocate a freelist for allocating directory cache nodes.
+ */
+  ef->cache.mem = _new_FreeList("new_ExpandFile", sizeof(DirNode), DIR_CACHE_BLK);
+  if(!ef->cache.mem)
+    return del_ExpandFile(ef);
+/*
+ * Allocate a pathname buffer.
+ */
+  ef->path = _new_PathName();
+  if(!ef->path)
+    return del_ExpandFile(ef);
+/*
+ * Allocate an object for looking up home-directories.
+ */
+  ef->home = _new_HomeDir();
+  if(!ef->home)
+    return del_ExpandFile(ef);
+/*
+ * Allocate an array for files. This will be extended later if needed.
+ */
+  ef->files_dim = MATCH_BLK_FACT;
+  ef->result.files = (char **) malloc(sizeof(ef->result.files[0]) *
+				      ef->files_dim);
+  if(!ef->result.files) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+        "new_ExpandFile: Insufficient memory to allocate array of files.\n");
+    return del_ExpandFile(ef);
+  };
+  return ef;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a ExpandFile object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef     ExpandFile *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return ExpandFile *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+ExpandFile *del_ExpandFile(ExpandFile *ef)
+{
+  if(ef) {
+    DirNode *dnode;
+/*
+ * Delete the string segments.
+ */
+    ef->sg = _del_StringGroup(ef->sg);
+/*
+ * Delete the cached directory readers.
+ */
+    for(dnode=ef->cache.head; dnode; dnode=dnode->next)
+      dnode->dr = _del_DirReader(dnode->dr);
+/*
+ * Delete the memory from which the DirNode list was allocated, thus
+ * deleting the list at the same time.
+ */
+    ef->cache.mem = _del_FreeList("del_ExpandFile", ef->cache.mem, 1);
+    ef->cache.head = ef->cache.tail = ef->cache.next = NULL;
+/*
+ * Delete the pathname buffer.
+ */
+    ef->path = _del_PathName(ef->path);
+/*
+ * Delete the home-directory lookup object.
+ */
+    ef->home = _del_HomeDir(ef->home);
+/*
+ * Delete the array of pointers to files.
+ */
+    if(ef->result.files) {
+      free(ef->result.files);
+      ef->result.files = NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(ef);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Expand a pathname, converting ~user/ and ~/ patterns at the start
+ * of the pathname to the corresponding home directories, replacing
+ * $envvar with the value of the corresponding environment variable,
+ * and then, if there are any wildcards, matching these against existing
+ * filenames.
+ *
+ * If no errors occur, a container is returned containing the array of
+ * files that resulted from the expansion. If there were no wildcards
+ * in the input pathname, this will contain just the original pathname
+ * after expansion of ~ and $ expressions. If there were any wildcards,
+ * then the array will contain the files that matched them. Note that
+ * if there were any wildcards but no existing files match them, this
+ * is counted as an error and NULL is returned.
+ *
+ * The supported wildcards and their meanings are:
+ *  *        -  Match any sequence of zero or more characters.
+ *  ?        -  Match any single character.
+ *  [chars]  -  Match any single character that appears in 'chars'.
+ *              If 'chars' contains an expression of the form a-b,
+ *              then any character between a and b, including a and b,
+ *              matches. The '-' character looses its special meaning
+ *              as a range specifier when it appears at the start
+ *              of the sequence of characters.
+ *  [^chars] -  The same as [chars] except that it matches any single
+ *              character that doesn't appear in 'chars'.
+ *
+ * Wildcard expressions are applied to individual filename components.
+ * They don't match across directory separators. A '.' character at
+ * the beginning of a filename component must also be matched
+ * explicitly by a '.' character in the input pathname, since these
+ * are UNIX's hidden files.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef         ExpandFile *  The pathname expansion resource object.
+ *  path             char *  The path name to be expanded.
+ *  pathlen           int    The length of the suffix of path[] that
+ *                           constitutes the filename to be expanded,
+ *                           or -1 to specify that the whole of the
+ *                           path string should be used. Note that
+ *                           regardless of the value of this argument,
+ *                           path[] must contain a '\0' terminated
+ *                           string, since this function checks that
+ *                           pathlen isn't mistakenly too long.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  FileExpansion *  A pointer to a container within the given
+ *                           ExpandFile object. This contains an array
+ *                           of the pathnames that resulted from expanding
+ *                           ~ and $ expressions and from matching any
+ *                           wildcards, sorted into lexical order.
+ *                           This container and its contents will be
+ *                           recycled on subsequent calls, so if you need
+ *                           to keep the results of two successive runs,
+ *                           you will either have to allocate a private
+ *                           copy of the array, or use two ExpandFile
+ *                           objects.
+ *
+ *                           On error NULL is returned. A description
+ *                           of the error can be acquired by calling the
+ *                           ef_last_error() function.
+ */
+FileExpansion *ef_expand_file(ExpandFile *ef, const char *path, int pathlen)
+{
+  DirNode *dnode;       /* A directory-reader cache node */
+  const char *dirname;  /* The name of the top level directory of the search */
+  const char *pptr;     /* A pointer into path[] */
+  int wild;             /* True if the path contains any wildcards */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!ef || !path) {
+    if(ef)
+      strcpy(ef->errmsg, "ef_expand_file: NULL path argument");
+    else
+      fprintf(stderr, "ef_expand_file: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the caller specified that the whole of path[] be matched,
+ * work out the corresponding length.
+ */
+  if(pathlen < 0 || pathlen > strlen(path))
+    pathlen = strlen(path);
+/*
+ * Discard previous expansion results.
+ */
+  ef_clear_files(ef);
+/*
+ * Preprocess the path, expanding ~/, ~user/ and $envvar references,
+ * using ef->path as a work directory and returning a pointer to
+ * a copy of the resulting pattern in the cache.
+ */
+  path = ef_expand_special(ef, path, pathlen);
+  if(!path)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Clear the pathname buffer.
+ */
+  _pn_clear_path(ef->path);
+/*
+ * Does the pathname contain any wildcards?
+ */
+  for(wild=0,pptr=path; !wild && *pptr; pptr++) {
+    switch(*pptr) {
+    case '\\':                      /* Skip escaped characters */
+      if(pptr[1])
+	pptr++;
+      break; 
+    case '*': case '?': case '[':   /* A wildcard character? */
+      wild = 1;
+      break;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * If there are no wildcards to match, copy the current expanded
+ * path into the output array, removing backslash escapes while doing so.
+ */
+  if(!wild) {
+    if(ef_record_pathname(ef, path, 1))
+      return NULL;
+/*
+ * Does the filename exist?
+ */
+    ef->result.exists = _pu_file_exists(ef->result.files[0]);
+/*
+ * Match wildcards against existing files.
+ */
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Only existing files that match the pattern will be returned in the
+ * cache.
+ */
+    ef->result.exists = 1;
+/*
+ * Treat matching of the root-directory as a special case since it
+ * isn't contained in a directory.
+ */
+    if(strcmp(path, FS_ROOT_DIR) == 0) {
+      if(ef_record_pathname(ef, FS_ROOT_DIR, 0))
+	return NULL;
+    } else {
+/*
+ * What should the top level directory of the search be?
+ */
+      if(strncmp(path, FS_ROOT_DIR, FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN) == 0) {
+	dirname = FS_ROOT_DIR;
+	if(!_pn_append_to_path(ef->path, FS_ROOT_DIR, -1, 0)) {
+	  strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to record path");
+	  return NULL;
+	};
+	path += FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN;
+      } else {
+	dirname = FS_PWD;
+      };
+/*
+ * Open the top-level directory of the search.
+ */
+      dnode = ef_open_dir(ef, dirname);
+      if(!dnode)
+	return NULL;
+/*
+ * Recursively match successive directory components of the path.
+ */
+      if(ef_match_relative_pathname(ef, dnode->dr, path, 0)) {
+	dnode = ef_close_dir(ef, dnode);
+	return NULL;
+      };
+/*
+ * Cleanup.
+ */
+      dnode = ef_close_dir(ef, dnode);
+    };
+/*
+ * No files matched?
+ */
+    if(ef->result.nfile < 1) {
+      strcpy(ef->errmsg, "No files match");
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Sort the pathnames that matched.
+ */
+    qsort(ef->result.files, ef->result.nfile, sizeof(ef->result.files[0]),
+	  ef_cmp_strings);
+  };
+/*
+ * Return the result container.
+ */
+  return &ef->result;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Attempt to recursively match the given pattern with the contents of
+ * the current directory, descending sub-directories as needed.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef      ExpandFile *  The pathname expansion resource object.
+ *  dr       DirReader *  The directory reader object of the directory
+ *                        to be searched.
+ *  pattern const char *  The pattern to match with files in the current
+ *                        directory.
+ *  separate       int    When appending a filename from the specified
+ *                        directory to ef->pathname, insert a directory
+ *                        separator between the existing pathname and
+ *                        the filename, unless separate is zero.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    0 - OK.
+ *                        1 - Error.
+ */
+static int ef_match_relative_pathname(ExpandFile *ef, DirReader *dr,
+				       const char *pattern, int separate)
+{
+  const char *nextp;  /* The pointer to the character that follows the part */
+                      /*  of the pattern that is to be matched with files */
+                      /*  in the current directory. */
+  char *file;         /* The name of the file being matched */
+  int pathlen;        /* The length of ef->pathname[] on entry to this */
+                      /*  function */
+/*
+ * Record the current length of the pathname string recorded in
+ * ef->pathname[].
+ */
+  pathlen = strlen(ef->path->name);
+/*
+ * Get a pointer to the character that follows the end of the part of
+ * the pattern that should be matched to files within the current directory.
+ * This will either point to a directory separator, or to the '\0' terminator
+ * of the pattern string.
+ */
+  for(nextp=pattern; *nextp && strncmp(nextp, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) != 0;
+      nextp++)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Read each file from the directory, attempting to match it to the
+ * current pattern.
+ */
+  while((file=_dr_next_file(dr)) != NULL) {
+/*
+ * Does the latest file match the pattern up to nextp?
+ */
+    if(ef_string_matches_pattern(file, pattern, file[0]=='.', nextp)) {
+/*
+ * Append the new directory entry to the current matching pathname.
+ */
+      if((separate && _pn_append_to_path(ef->path, FS_DIR_SEP, -1, 0)==NULL) ||
+	 _pn_append_to_path(ef->path, file, -1, 0)==NULL) {
+	strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to record path");
+	return 1;
+      };
+/*
+ * If we have reached the end of the pattern, record the accumulated
+ * pathname in the list of matching files.
+ */
+      if(*nextp == '\0') {
+	if(ef_record_pathname(ef, ef->path->name, 0))
+	  return 1;
+/*
+ * If the matching directory entry is a subdirectory, and the
+ * next character of the pattern is a directory separator,
+ * recursively call the current function to scan the sub-directory
+ * for matches.
+ */
+      } else if(_pu_path_is_dir(ef->path->name) &&
+		strncmp(nextp, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) == 0) {
+/*
+ * If the pattern finishes with the directory separator, then
+ * record the pathame as matching.
+ */
+	if(nextp[FS_DIR_SEP_LEN] == '\0') {
+	  if(ef_record_pathname(ef, ef->path->name, 0))
+	    return 1;
+/*
+ * Match files within the directory.
+ */
+	} else {
+	  DirNode *subdnode = ef_open_dir(ef, ef->path->name);
+	  if(subdnode) {
+	    if(ef_match_relative_pathname(ef, subdnode->dr,
+					   nextp+FS_DIR_SEP_LEN, 1)) {
+	      subdnode = ef_close_dir(ef, subdnode);
+	      return 1;
+	    };
+	    subdnode = ef_close_dir(ef, subdnode);
+	  };
+	};
+      };
+/*
+ * Remove the latest filename from the pathname string, so that
+ * another matching file can be appended.
+ */
+      ef->path->name[pathlen] = '\0';
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Record a new matching filename.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef        ExpandFile *  The filename-match resource object.
+ *  pathname  const char *  The pathname to record.
+ *  remove_escapes   int    If true, remove backslash escapes in the
+ *                          recorded copy of the pathname.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int     0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Error (ef->errmsg will contain a
+ *                                      description of the error).
+ */
+static int ef_record_pathname(ExpandFile *ef, const char *pathname,
+			      int remove_escapes)
+{
+  char *copy;          /* The recorded copy of pathname[] */
+/*
+ * Attempt to make a copy of the pathname in the cache.
+ */
+  copy = ef_cache_pathname(ef, pathname, remove_escapes);
+  if(!copy)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * If there isn't room to record a pointer to the recorded pathname in the
+ * array of files, attempt to extend the array.
+ */
+  if(ef->result.nfile + 1 > ef->files_dim) {
+    int files_dim = ef->files_dim + MATCH_BLK_FACT;
+    char **files = (char **) realloc(ef->result.files,
+				     files_dim * sizeof(files[0]));
+    if(!files) {
+      sprintf(ef->errmsg,
+	      "Insufficient memory to record all of the matching filenames");
+      return 1;
+    };
+    ef->result.files = files;
+    ef->files_dim = files_dim;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record a pointer to the new match.
+ */
+  ef->result.files[ef->result.nfile++] = copy;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Record a pathname in the cache.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef       ExpandFile *  The filename-match resource object.
+ *  pathname       char *  The pathname to record.
+ *  remove_escapes  int    If true, remove backslash escapes in the
+ *                         copy of the pathname.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         char *  The pointer to the copy of the pathname.
+ *                         On error NULL is returned and a description
+ *                         of the error is left in ef->errmsg[].
+ */
+static char *ef_cache_pathname(ExpandFile *ef, const char *pathname,
+			       int remove_escapes)
+{
+  char *copy = _sg_store_string(ef->sg, pathname, remove_escapes);
+  if(!copy)
+    strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to store pathname");
+  return copy;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Clear the results of the previous expansion operation, ready for the
+ * next.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef    ExpandFile *  The pathname expansion resource object.
+ */
+static void ef_clear_files(ExpandFile *ef)
+{
+  _clr_StringGroup(ef->sg);
+  _pn_clear_path(ef->path);
+  ef->result.exists = 0;
+  ef->result.nfile = 0;
+  ef->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Get a new directory reader object from the cache.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef        ExpandFile *  The pathname expansion resource object.
+ *  pathname  const char *  The pathname of the directory.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       DirNode *  The cache entry of the new directory reader,
+ *                          or NULL on error. On error, ef->errmsg will
+ *                          contain a description of the error.
+ */
+static DirNode *ef_open_dir(ExpandFile *ef, const char *pathname)
+{
+  char *errmsg = NULL;  /* An error message from a called function */
+  DirNode *node;        /* The cache node used */
+/*
+ * Get the directory reader cache.
+ */
+  DirCache *cache = &ef->cache;
+/*
+ * Extend the cache if there are no free cache nodes.
+ */
+  if(!cache->next) {
+    node = (DirNode *) _new_FreeListNode(cache->mem);
+    if(!node) {
+      sprintf(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to open a new directory");
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Initialize the cache node.
+ */
+    node->next = NULL;
+    node->prev = NULL;
+    node->dr = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate a directory reader object.
+ */
+    node->dr = _new_DirReader();
+    if(!node->dr) {
+      sprintf(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to open a new directory");
+      node = (DirNode *) _del_FreeListNode(cache->mem, node);
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Append the node to the cache list.
+ */
+    node->prev = cache->tail;
+    if(cache->tail)
+      cache->tail->next = node;
+    else
+      cache->head = node;
+    cache->next = cache->tail = node;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the first unused node, but don't remove it from the list yet.
+ */
+  node = cache->next;
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the specified directory.
+ */
+  if(_dr_open_dir(node->dr, pathname, &errmsg)) {
+    strncpy(ef->errmsg, errmsg, ERRLEN);
+    ef->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Now that we have successfully opened the specified directory,
+ * remove the cache node from the list, and relink the list around it.
+ */
+  cache->next = node->next;
+  if(node->prev)
+    node->prev->next = node->next;
+  else
+    cache->head = node->next;
+  if(node->next)
+    node->next->prev = node->prev;
+  else
+    cache->tail = node->prev;
+  node->next = node->prev = NULL;
+/*
+ * Return the successfully initialized cache node to the caller.
+ */
+  return node;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a directory reader object to the cache, after first closing
+ * the directory that it was managing.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef    ExpandFile *  The pathname expansion resource object.
+ *  node     DirNode *  The cache entry of the directory reader, as returned
+ *                      by ef_open_dir().
+ * Output:
+ *  return   DirNode *  The deleted DirNode (ie. allways NULL).
+ */
+static DirNode *ef_close_dir(ExpandFile *ef, DirNode *node)
+{
+/*
+ * Get the directory reader cache.
+ */
+  DirCache *cache = &ef->cache;
+/*
+ * Close the directory.
+ */
+  _dr_close_dir(node->dr);
+/*
+ * Return the node to the tail of the cache list.
+ */
+  node->next = NULL;
+  node->prev = cache->tail;
+  if(cache->tail)
+    cache->tail->next = node;
+  else
+    cache->head = cache->tail = node;
+  if(!cache->next)
+    cache->next = node;
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the specified file name matches a given glob
+ * pattern.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  file     const char *  The file-name component to be matched to the pattern.
+ *  pattern  const char *  The start of the pattern to match against file[].
+ *  xplicit         int    If non-zero, the first character must be matched
+ *                         explicitly (ie. not with a wildcard).
+ *  nextp    const char *  The pointer to the the character following the
+ *                         end of the pattern in pattern[].
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int          0 - Doesn't match.
+ *                         1 - The file-name string matches the pattern.
+ */
+static int ef_string_matches_pattern(const char *file, const char *pattern,
+				      int xplicit, const char *nextp)
+{
+  const char *pptr = pattern; /* The pointer used to scan the pattern */
+  const char *fptr = file;    /* The pointer used to scan the filename string */
+/*
+ * Match each character of the pattern in turn.
+ */
+  while(pptr < nextp) {
+/*
+ * Handle the next character of the pattern.
+ */
+    switch(*pptr) {
+/*
+ * A match zero-or-more characters wildcard operator.
+ */
+    case '*':
+/*
+ * Skip the '*' character in the pattern.
+ */
+      pptr++;
+/*
+ * If wildcards aren't allowed, the pattern doesn't match.
+ */
+      if(xplicit)
+	return 0;
+/*
+ * If the pattern ends with a the '*' wildcard, then the
+ * rest of the filename matches this.
+ */
+      if(pptr >= nextp)
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * Using the wildcard to match successively longer sections of
+ * the remaining characters of the filename, attempt to match
+ * the tail of the filename against the tail of the pattern.
+ */
+      for( ; *fptr; fptr++) {
+	if(ef_string_matches_pattern(fptr, pptr, 0, nextp))
+	  return 1;
+      };
+      return 0; /* The pattern following the '*' didn't match */
+      break;
+/*
+ * A match-one-character wildcard operator.
+ */
+    case '?':
+/*
+ * If there is a character to be matched, skip it and advance the
+ * pattern pointer.
+ */
+      if(!xplicit && *fptr) {
+        fptr++;
+        pptr++;
+/*
+ * If we hit the end of the filename string, there is no character
+ * matching the operator, so the string doesn't match.
+ */
+      } else {
+        return 0;
+      };
+      break;
+/*
+ * A character range operator, with the character ranges enclosed
+ * in matching square brackets.
+ */
+    case '[':
+      if(xplicit || !ef_matches_range(*fptr++, ++pptr, &pptr))
+        return 0;
+      break;
+/*
+ * A backslash in the pattern prevents the following character as
+ * being seen as a special character.
+ */
+    case '\\':
+      pptr++;
+      /* Note fallthrough to default */
+/*
+ * A normal character to be matched explicitly.
+ */
+    default:
+      if(*fptr == *pptr) {
+        fptr++;
+        pptr++;
+      } else {
+        return 0;
+      };
+      break;
+    };
+/*
+ * After passing the first character, turn off the explicit match
+ * requirement.
+ */
+    xplicit = 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * To get here the pattern must have been exhausted. If the filename
+ * string matched, then the filename string must also have been
+ * exhausted.
+ */
+  return *fptr == '\0';
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Match a character range expression terminated by an unescaped close
+ * square bracket.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  c               int     The character to be matched with the range
+ *                          pattern.
+ *  pattern  const char *   The range pattern to be matched (ie. after the
+ *                          initiating '[' character).
+ *  endp     const char **  On output a pointer to the character following the
+ *                          range expression will be assigned to *endp.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int     0 - Doesn't match.
+ *                          1 - The character matched.
+ */
+static int ef_matches_range(int c, const char *pattern, const char **endp)
+{
+  const char *pptr = pattern;  /* The pointer used to scan the pattern */
+  int invert = 0;              /* True to invert the sense of the match */
+  int matched = 0;             /* True if the character matched the pattern */
+/*
+ * If the first character is a caret, the sense of the match is
+ * inverted and only if the character isn't one of those in the
+ * range, do we say that it matches.
+ */
+  if(*pptr == '^') {
+    pptr++;
+    invert = 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * The hyphen is only a special character when it follows the first
+ * character of the range (not including the caret).
+ */
+  if(*pptr == '-') {
+    pptr++;
+    if(c == '-') {
+      *endp = pptr;
+      matched = 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Skip other leading '-' characters since they make no sense.
+ */
+    while(*pptr == '-')
+      pptr++;
+  };
+/*
+ * The hyphen is only a special character when it follows the first
+ * character of the range (not including the caret or a hyphen).
+ */
+  if(*pptr == ']') {
+    pptr++;
+    if(c == ']') {
+      *endp = pptr;
+      matched = 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Having dealt with the characters that have special meanings at
+ * the beginning of a character range expression, see if the
+ * character matches any of the remaining characters of the range,
+ * up until a terminating ']' character is seen.
+ */
+  while(!matched && *pptr && *pptr != ']') {
+/*
+ * Is this a range of characters signaled by the two end characters
+ * separated by a hyphen?
+ */
+    if(*pptr == '-') {
+      if(pptr[1] != ']') {
+        if(c >= pptr[-1] && c <= pptr[1])
+	  matched = 1;
+	pptr += 2;
+      };
+/*
+ * A normal character to be compared directly.
+ */
+    } else if(*pptr++ == c) {
+      matched = 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Find the terminating ']'.
+ */
+  while(*pptr && *pptr != ']')
+    pptr++;
+/*
+ * Did we find a terminating ']'?
+ */
+  if(*pptr == ']') {
+    *endp = pptr + 1;
+    return matched ? !invert : invert;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the pattern didn't end with a ']' then it doesn't match, regardless
+ * of the value of the required sense of the match.
+ */
+  *endp = pptr;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a qsort() comparison function used to sort strings.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  v1, v2   void *  Pointers to the two strings to be compared.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    -1 -> v1 < v2.
+ *                    0 -> v1 == v2
+ *                    1 -> v1 > v2
+ */
+static int ef_cmp_strings(const void *v1, const void *v2)
+{
+  char * const *s1 = (char * const *) v1;
+  char * const *s2 = (char * const *) v2;
+  return strcmp(*s1, *s2);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Preprocess a path, expanding ~/, ~user/ and $envvar references, using
+ * ef->path as a work buffer, then copy the result into a cache entry,
+ * and return a pointer to this copy.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef    ExpandFile *  The resource object of the file matcher.
+ *  pathlen      int    The length of the prefix of path[] to be expanded.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      char *  A pointer to a copy of the output path in the
+ *                      cache. On error NULL is returned, and a description
+ *                      of the error is left in ef->errmsg[].
+ */
+static char *ef_expand_special(ExpandFile *ef, const char *path, int pathlen)
+{
+  int spos;      /* The index of the start of the path segment that needs */
+                 /*  to be copied from path[] to the output pathname. */
+  int ppos;      /* The index of a character in path[] */
+  char *pptr;    /* A pointer into the output path */
+  int escaped;   /* True if the previous character was a '\' */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Clear the pathname buffer.
+ */
+  _pn_clear_path(ef->path);
+/*
+ * We need to perform two passes, one to expand environment variables
+ * and a second to do tilde expansion. This caters for the case
+ * where an initial dollar expansion yields a tilde expression.
+ */
+  escaped = 0;
+  for(spos=ppos=0; ppos < pathlen; ppos++) {
+    int c = path[ppos];
+    if(escaped) {
+      escaped = 0;
+    } else if(c == '\\') {
+      escaped = 1;
+    } else if(c == '$') {
+      int envlen;   /* The length of the environment variable */
+      char *value;  /* The value of the environment variable */
+/*
+ * Record the preceding unrecorded part of the pathname.
+ */
+      if(spos < ppos && _pn_append_to_path(ef->path, path + spos, ppos-spos, 0)
+	 == NULL) {
+	strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to expand path");
+	return NULL;
+      };
+/*
+ * Skip the dollar.
+ */
+      ppos++;
+/*
+ * Copy the environment variable name that follows the dollar into
+ * ef->envnam[], stopping if a directory separator or end of string
+ * is seen.
+ */
+      for(envlen=0; envlen<ENV_LEN && ppos < pathlen &&
+	  strncmp(path + ppos, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN); envlen++)
+	ef->envnam[envlen] = path[ppos++];
+/*
+ * If the username overflowed the buffer, treat it as invalid (note that
+ * on most unix systems only 8 characters are allowed in a username,
+ * whereas our ENV_LEN is much bigger than that.
+ */
+      if(envlen >= ENV_LEN) {
+	strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Environment variable name too long");
+	return NULL;
+      };
+/*
+ * Terminate the environment variable name.
+ */
+      ef->envnam[envlen] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Lookup the value of the environment variable.
+ */
+      value = getenv(ef->envnam);
+      if(!value) {
+	const char *fmt = "No expansion found for: $%.*s";
+	sprintf(ef->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt), ef->envnam);
+	return NULL;
+      };
+/*
+ * Copy the value of the environment variable into the output pathname.
+ */
+      if(_pn_append_to_path(ef->path, value, -1, 0) == NULL) {
+	strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to expand path");
+	return NULL;
+      };
+/*
+ * Record the start of the uncopied tail of the input pathname.
+ */
+      spos = ppos;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the uncopied tail of the pathname.
+ */
+  if(spos < ppos && _pn_append_to_path(ef->path, path + spos, ppos-spos, 0)
+     == NULL) {
+    strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to expand path");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the first character of the resulting pathname is a tilde,
+ * then attempt to substitute the home directory of the specified user.
+ */
+  pptr = ef->path->name;
+  if(*pptr == '~' && path[0] != '\\') {
+    int usrlen;           /* The length of the username following the tilde */
+    const char *homedir;  /* The home directory of the user */
+    int homelen;          /* The length of the home directory string */
+    int plen;             /* The current length of the path */
+    int skip=0;           /* The number of characters to skip after the ~user */
+/*
+ * Get the current length of the output path.
+ */
+    plen = strlen(ef->path->name);
+/*
+ * Skip the tilde.
+ */
+    pptr++;
+/*
+ * Copy the optional username that follows the tilde into ef->usrnam[].
+ */
+    for(usrlen=0; usrlen<USR_LEN && *pptr &&
+	strncmp(pptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN); usrlen++)
+      ef->usrnam[usrlen] = *pptr++;
+/*
+ * If the username overflowed the buffer, treat it as invalid (note that
+ * on most unix systems only 8 characters are allowed in a username,
+ * whereas our USR_LEN is much bigger than that.
+ */
+    if(usrlen >= USR_LEN) {
+      strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Username too long");
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Terminate the username string.
+ */
+    ef->usrnam[usrlen] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Lookup the home directory of the user.
+ */
+    homedir = _hd_lookup_home_dir(ef->home, ef->usrnam);
+    if(!homedir) {
+      strncpy(ef->errmsg, _hd_last_home_dir_error(ef->home), ERRLEN);
+      ef->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+      return NULL;
+    };
+    homelen = strlen(homedir);
+/*
+ * ~user and ~ are usually followed by a directory separator to
+ * separate them from the file contained in the home directory.
+ * If the home directory is the root directory, then we don't want
+ * to follow the home directory by a directory separator, so we must
+ * erase it.
+ */
+    if(strcmp(homedir, FS_ROOT_DIR) == 0 &&
+       strncmp(pptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) == 0) {
+      skip = FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+    };
+/*
+ * If needed, increase the size of the pathname buffer to allow it
+ * to accomodate the home directory instead of the tilde expression.
+ * Note that pptr may not be valid after this call.
+ */
+    if(_pn_resize_path(ef->path, plen - usrlen - 1 - skip + homelen)==NULL) {
+      strcpy(ef->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to expand filename");
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Move the part of the pathname that follows the tilde expression to
+ * the end of where the home directory will need to be inserted.
+ */
+    memmove(ef->path->name + homelen,
+	    ef->path->name + 1 + usrlen + skip, plen - usrlen - 1 - skip+1);
+/*
+ * Write the home directory at the beginning of the string.
+ */
+    for(i=0; i<homelen; i++)
+      ef->path->name[i] = homedir[i];
+  };
+/*
+ * Copy the result into the cache, and return a pointer to the copy.
+ */
+  return ef_cache_pathname(ef, ef->path->name, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the last path-expansion error that occurred.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ef     ExpandFile *   The path-expansion resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       char *   The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *ef_last_error(ExpandFile *ef)
+{
+  return ef ? ef->errmsg : "NULL ExpandFile argument";
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Print out an array of matching files.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  result  FileExpansion *   The container of the sorted array of
+ *                            expansions.
+ *  fp               FILE *   The output stream to write to.
+ *  term_width        int     The width of the terminal.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int     0 - OK.
+ *                            1 - Error.
+ */
+int ef_list_expansions(FileExpansion *result, FILE *fp, int term_width)
+{
+  int maxlen;    /* The length of the longest matching string */
+  int width;     /* The width of a column */
+  int ncol;      /* The number of columns to list */
+  int nrow;      /* The number of rows needed to list all of the expansions */
+  int row,col;   /* The row and column being written to */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!result || !fp) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "ef_list_expansions: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Not enough space to list anything?
+ */
+  if(term_width < 1)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Work out the maximum length of the matching filenames.
+ */
+  maxlen = 0;
+  for(i=0; i<result->nfile; i++) {
+    int len = strlen(result->files[i]);
+    if(len > maxlen)
+      maxlen = len;
+  };
+/*
+ * Nothing to list?
+ */
+  if(maxlen == 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Split the available terminal width into columns of maxlen + 2 characters.
+ */
+  width = maxlen + 2;
+  ncol = term_width / width;
+/*
+ * If the column width is greater than the terminal width, the matches will
+ * just have to overlap onto the next line.
+ */
+  if(ncol < 1)
+    ncol = 1;
+/*
+ * How many rows will be needed?
+ */
+  nrow = (result->nfile + ncol - 1) / ncol;
+/*
+ * Print the expansions out in ncol columns, sorted in row order within each
+ * column.
+ */
+  for(row=0; row < nrow; row++) {
+    for(col=0; col < ncol; col++) {
+      int m = col*nrow + row;
+      if(m < result->nfile) {
+	const char *filename = result->files[m];
+	if(fprintf(fp, "%s%-*s%s", filename,
+		   (int) (ncol > 1 ? maxlen - strlen(filename):0), "",
+		   col<ncol-1 ? "  " : "\r\n") < 0)
+	  return 1;
+      } else {
+	if(fprintf(fp, "\r\n") < 0)
+	  return 1;
+	break;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fe0472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.c
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "freelist.h"
+
+typedef struct FreeListBlock FreeListBlock;
+struct FreeListBlock {
+  FreeListBlock *next;   /* The next block in the list */
+  char *nodes;           /* The array of free-list nodes */
+};
+
+struct FreeList {
+  size_t node_size;         /* The size of a free-list node */
+  unsigned blocking_factor; /* The number of nodes per block */
+  long nbusy;               /* The number of nodes that are in use */
+  FreeListBlock *block;     /* The head of the list of free-list blocks */
+  void *free_list;          /* The free-list of nodes */
+};
+
+static FreeListBlock *_new_FreeListBlock(FreeList *fl);
+static FreeListBlock *_del_FreeListBlock(FreeListBlock *fl);
+static void _thread_FreeListBlock(FreeList *fl, FreeListBlock *block);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Allocate a new free-list from blocks of 'blocking_factor' objects of size
+ * node_size.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  caller        const char *  The name of the calling function, for use in
+ *                              error messages, or NULL to not report errors
+ *                              to stderr.
+ *  node_size         size_t    The size of the free-list nodes to be returned
+ *                              by _new_FreeListNode(). Use sizeof() to
+ *                              determine this.
+ *  blocking_factor unsigned    The number of objects of size 'object_size'
+ *                              to allocate per block.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          FreeList *  The new freelist, or NULL on error.
+ */
+FreeList *_new_FreeList(const char *caller, size_t node_size,
+			unsigned blocking_factor)
+{
+  FreeList *fl;  /* The new free-list container */
+/*
+ * When a free-list node is on the free-list, it is used as a (void *)
+ * link field. Roundup node_size to a mulitple of the size of a void
+ * pointer. This, plus the fact that the array of nodes is obtained via
+ * malloc, which returns memory suitably aligned for any object, will
+ * ensure that the first sizeof(void *) bytes of each node will be
+ * suitably aligned to use as a (void *) link pointer.
+ */
+  node_size = sizeof(void *) *
+    ((node_size + sizeof(void *) - 1) / sizeof(void *));
+/*
+ * Enfore a minimum block size.
+ */
+  if(blocking_factor < 1)
+    blocking_factor = 1;
+/*
+ * Allocate the container of the free list.
+ */
+  fl = (FreeList *) malloc(sizeof(FreeList));
+  if(!fl) {
+    if(caller)
+      fprintf(stderr, "_new_FreeList (%s): Insufficient memory.\n", caller);
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_FreeList().
+ */
+  fl->node_size = node_size;
+  fl->blocking_factor = blocking_factor;
+  fl->nbusy = 0;
+  fl->block = NULL;
+  fl->free_list = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate the first block of memory.
+ */
+  fl->block = _new_FreeListBlock(fl);
+  if(!fl->block) {
+    if(caller)
+      fprintf(stderr, "_new_FreeList (%s): Insufficient memory.\n", caller);
+    return _del_FreeList(caller, fl, 1);
+  };
+/*
+ * Add the new list of nodes to the free-list.
+ */
+  fl->free_list = fl->block->nodes;
+/*
+ * Return the free-list for use.
+ */
+  return fl;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Re-thread a freelist to reclaim all allocated nodes.
+ * This function should not be called unless if it is known that none
+ * of the currently allocated nodes are still being used.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fl          FreeList *  The free-list to be reset, or NULL.
+ */
+void _rst_FreeList(FreeList *fl)
+{
+  if(fl) {
+    FreeListBlock *block;
+/*
+ * Re-thread the nodes of each block into individual free-lists.
+ */
+    for(block=fl->block; block; block=block->next)
+      _thread_FreeListBlock(fl, block);
+/*
+ * Link all of the block freelists into one large freelist.
+ */
+    fl->free_list = NULL;
+    for(block=fl->block; block; block=block->next) {
+/*
+ * Locate the last node of the current block.
+ */
+      char *last_node = block->nodes + fl->node_size *
+	(fl->blocking_factor - 1);
+/*
+ * Make the link-field of the last node point to the first
+ * node of the current freelist, then make the first node of the
+ * new block the start of the freelist. 
+ */
+      *(void **)last_node = fl->free_list;
+      fl->free_list = block->nodes;
+    };
+/*
+ * All allocated nodes have now been returned to the freelist.
+ */
+    fl->nbusy = 0;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a free-list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  caller    const char *  The name of the calling function, for use in
+ *                          error messages, or NULL if error messages
+ *                          shouldn't be reported to stderr.
+ *  fl          FreeList *  The free-list to be deleted, or NULL.
+ *  force            int    If force==0 then _del_FreeList() will complain
+ *                           and refuse to delete the free-list if any
+ *                           of nodes have not been returned to the free-list.
+ *                          If force!=0 then _del_FreeList() will not check
+ *                           whether any nodes are still in use and will
+ *                           always delete the list.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      FreeList *  Always NULL (even if the list couldn't be
+ *                          deleted).
+ */
+FreeList *_del_FreeList(const char *caller, FreeList *fl, int force)
+{
+  if(fl) {
+/*
+ * Check whether any nodes are in use.
+ */
+    if(!force && _busy_FreeListNodes(fl) != 0) {
+      if(caller)
+	fprintf(stderr, "_del_FreeList (%s): %ld nodes are still in use.\n",
+		caller, _busy_FreeListNodes(fl));
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Delete the list blocks.
+ */
+    {
+      FreeListBlock *next = fl->block;
+      while(next) {
+	FreeListBlock *block = next;
+	next = block->next;
+	block = _del_FreeListBlock(block);
+      };
+    };
+    fl->block = NULL;
+    fl->free_list = NULL;
+/*
+ * Discard the container.
+ */
+    free(fl);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Allocate a new object from a free-list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fl        FreeList *  The free-list to return an object from.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        void *  A new object of the size that was specified via
+ *                        the node_size argument of _new_FreeList() when
+ *                        the free-list was created, or NULL if there
+ *                        is insufficient memory, or 'fl' is NULL.
+ */
+void *_new_FreeListNode(FreeList *fl)
+{
+  void *node;  /* The node to be returned */
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(!fl)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * If the free-list has been exhausted extend it by allocating
+ * another block of nodes.
+ */
+  if(!fl->free_list) {
+    FreeListBlock *block = _new_FreeListBlock(fl);
+    if(!block)
+      return NULL;
+/*
+ * Prepend the new block to the list of free-list blocks.
+ */
+    block->next = fl->block;
+    fl->block = block;
+/*
+ * Add the new list of nodes to the free-list.
+ */
+    fl->free_list = fl->block->nodes;
+  };
+/*
+ * Remove and return a node from the front of the free list.
+ */
+  node = fl->free_list;
+  fl->free_list = *(void **)node;
+/*
+ * Record the loss of a node from the free-list.
+ */
+  fl->nbusy++;
+/*
+ * Return the node.
+ */
+  return node;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return an object to the free-list that it was allocated from.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  caller  const char *  The name of the calling function, for use in
+ *                        error messages, or NULL to not report errors
+ *                        to stderr.
+ *  fl        FreeList *  The free-list from which the object was taken.
+ *  object        void *  The node to be returned.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        void *  Always NULL.
+ */
+void *_del_FreeListNode(FreeList *fl, void *object)
+{
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(!fl)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Return the node to the head of the free list.
+ */
+  if(object) {
+    *(void **)object = fl->free_list;
+    fl->free_list = object;
+/*
+ * Record the return of the node to the free-list.
+ */
+    fl->nbusy--;
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a count of the number of nodes that are currently allocated.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fl      FreeList *  The list to count wrt, or NULL.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      long    The number of nodes (or 0 if fl==NULL).
+ */
+long _busy_FreeListNodes(FreeList *fl)
+{
+  return fl ? fl->nbusy : 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Allocate a new list of free-list nodes. On return the nodes will
+ * be linked together as a list starting with the node at the lowest
+ * address and ending with a NULL next pointer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fl          FreeList *  The free-list to allocate the list for.
+ * Output:
+ *  return FreeListBlock *  The new linked block of free-list nodes,
+ *                          or NULL on error.
+ */
+static FreeListBlock *_new_FreeListBlock(FreeList *fl)
+{
+  FreeListBlock *block;  /* The new block to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  block = (FreeListBlock *) malloc(sizeof(FreeListBlock));
+  if(!block)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_FreeListBlock().
+ */
+  block->next = NULL;
+  block->nodes = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate the block of nodes.
+ */
+  block->nodes = (char *) malloc(fl->node_size * fl->blocking_factor);
+  if(!block->nodes)
+    return _del_FreeListBlock(block);
+/*
+ * Initialize the block as a linked list of FreeListNode's.
+ */
+  _thread_FreeListBlock(fl, block);
+  return block;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Link each node of a freelist block to the node that follows it.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fl         FreeList *   The freelist that contains the block.
+ *  block FreeListBlock *   The block to be threaded.
+ */
+static void _thread_FreeListBlock(FreeList *fl, FreeListBlock *block)
+{
+  char *mem = block->nodes;
+  int i;
+  for(i=0; i<fl->blocking_factor - 1; i++, mem += fl->node_size)
+    *(void **)mem = mem + fl->node_size;  /* Link to the next node */
+  *(void **)mem = NULL;                   /* Terminate the list */
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a free-list block.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fl      FreeListBlock *  The block to be deleted, or NULL.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  FreeListBlock *  Always NULL.
+ */
+static FreeListBlock *_del_FreeListBlock(FreeListBlock *fl)
+{
+  if(fl) {
+    fl->next = NULL;
+    if(fl->nodes)
+      free(fl->nodes);
+    fl->nodes = NULL;
+    free(fl);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84e6aef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/freelist.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+#ifndef freelist_h
+#define freelist_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * This module provides a memory allocation scheme that helps to
+ * prevent memory fragmentation by allocating large blocks of
+ * fixed sized objects and forming them into a free-list for
+ * subsequent allocations. The free-list is expanded as needed.
+ */
+typedef struct FreeList FreeList;
+
+/*
+ * Allocate a new free-list from blocks of 'blocking_factor' objects of size
+ * node_size. The node_size argument should be determined by applying
+ * the sizeof() operator to the object type that you intend to allocate from
+ * the freelist.
+ */
+FreeList *_new_FreeList(const char *caller, size_t node_size,
+			unsigned blocking_factor);
+
+/*
+ * If it is known that none of the nodes currently allocated from
+ * a freelist are still in use, the following function can be called
+ * to return all nodes to the freelist without the overhead of
+ * having to call del_FreeListNode() for every allocated node. The
+ * nodes of the freelist can then be reused by future callers to
+ * new_FreeListNode().
+ */
+void _rst_FreeList(FreeList *fl);
+
+/*
+ * Delete a free-list.
+ */
+FreeList *_del_FreeList(const char *caller, FreeList *fl, int force);
+
+/*
+ * Determine the number of nodes that are currently allocated.
+ */
+long _busy_FreeListNodes(FreeList *fl);
+
+/*
+ * Allocate a new object from a free-list.
+ */
+void *_new_FreeListNode(FreeList *fl);
+
+/*
+ * Return an object to the free-list that it was allocated from.
+ */
+void *_del_FreeListNode(FreeList *fl, void *object);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/getline.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/getline.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..242fae3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/getline.c
@@ -0,0 +1,8346 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Standard headers.
+ */
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <setjmp.h>
+
+/*
+ * UNIX headers.
+ */
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Handle the different sources of terminal control string and size
+ * information. Note that if no terminal information database is available,
+ * ANSI VT100 control sequences are used.
+ */
+#if defined(USE_TERMINFO) || defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+/*
+ * Include curses.h or ncurses/curses.h depending on which is available.
+ */
+#ifdef HAVE_CURSES_H
+#include <curses.h>
+#elif defined(HAVE_NCURSES_CURSES_H)
+#include <ncurses/curses.h>
+#endif
+/*
+ * Include term.h where available.
+ */
+#if defined(HAVE_TERM_H)
+#include <term.h>
+#elif defined(HAVE_NCURSES_TERM_H)
+#include <ncurses/term.h>
+#endif
+/*
+ * When using termcap, include termcap.h on systems that have it.
+ * Otherwise assume that all prototypes are provided by curses.h.
+ */
+#if defined(USE_TERMCAP) && defined(HAVE_TERMCAP_H)
+#include <termcap.h>
+#endif
+/*
+ * Unfortunately both terminfo and termcap require one to use the tputs()
+ * function to output terminal control characters, and this function
+ * doesn't allow one to specify a file stream. As a result, the following
+ * file-scope variable is used to pass the current output file stream.
+ * This is bad, but there doesn't seem to be any alternative.
+ */
+static FILE *tputs_fp = NULL;
+/*
+ * Under Solaris default Curses the output function that tputs takes is
+ * declared to have a char argument. On all other systems and on Solaris
+ * X/Open Curses (Issue 4, Version 2) it expects an int argument (using
+ * c89 or options -I /usr/xpg4/include -L /usr/xpg4/lib -R /usr/xpg4/lib
+ * selects XPG4v2 Curses on Solaris 2.6 and later).
+ *
+ * Similarly, under Mac OS X, the return value of the tputs output
+ * function is declared as void, whereas it is declared as int on
+ * other systems.
+ */
+#if defined __sun && defined __SVR4 && !defined _XOPEN_CURSES
+static int gl_tputs_putchar(char c) {return putc(c, tputs_fp);}
+#elif defined(__APPLE__) && defined(__MACH__)
+static void gl_tputs_putchar(int c) {(void) putc(c, tputs_fp);}
+#else
+static int gl_tputs_putchar(int c) {return putc(c, tputs_fp);}
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * POSIX headers.
+ */
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <termios.h>
+
+/*
+ * Does the system provide the signal and ioctl query facility used
+ * to inform the process of terminal window size changes?
+ */
+#if defined(SIGWINCH) && defined(TIOCGWINSZ)
+#define USE_SIGWINCH 1
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Provide typedefs for standard POSIX structures.
+ */
+typedef struct sigaction SigAction;
+typedef struct termios Termios;
+
+/*
+ * Local headers.
+ */
+#include "pathutil.h"
+#include "libtecla.h"
+#include "keytab.h"
+#include "history.h"
+#include "freelist.h"
+#include "stringrp.h"
+#include "getline.h"
+
+/*
+ * Enumerate the available editing styles.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  GL_EMACS_MODE,   /* Emacs style editing */
+  GL_VI_MODE,      /* Vi style editing */
+  GL_NO_EDITOR     /* Fall back to the basic OS-provided editing */
+} GlEditor;
+
+/*
+ * In vi mode, the following datatype is used to implement the
+ * undo command. It records a copy of the input line from before
+ * the command-mode action which edited the input line.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  char *line;        /* A historical copy of the input line */
+  int buff_curpos;   /* The historical location of the cursor in */
+                     /*  line[] when the line was modified. */
+  int ntotal;        /* The number of characters in line[] */
+  int saved;         /* True once a line has been saved after the */
+                     /*  last call to gl_interpret_char(). */
+} ViUndo;
+
+/*
+ * In vi mode, the following datatype is used to record information
+ * needed by the vi-repeat-change command.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  KtKeyFn *fn;               /* The last action function that made a */
+                             /*  change to the line. */
+  int count;                 /* The repeat count that was passed to the */
+                             /*  above command. */  
+  int input_curpos;          /* Whenever vi command mode is entered, the */
+                             /*  the position at which it was first left */
+                             /*  is recorded here. */
+  int command_curpos;        /* Whenever vi command mode is entered, the */
+                             /*  the location of the cursor is recorded */
+                             /*  here. */
+  char input_char;           /* Commands that call gl_read_character() */
+                             /*  record the character here, so that it can */
+                             /*  used on repeating the function. */
+  int saved;                 /* True if a function has been saved since the */
+                             /*  last call to gl_interpret_char(). */
+  int active;                /* True while a function is being repeated. */
+} ViRepeat;
+
+/*
+ * The following datatype is used to encapsulate information specific
+ * to vi mode.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  ViUndo undo;               /* Information needed to implement the vi */
+                             /*  undo command. */
+  ViRepeat repeat;           /* Information needed to implement the vi */
+                             /*  repeat command. */
+  int command;               /* True in vi command-mode */
+  int find_forward;          /* True if the last character search was in the */
+                             /*  forward direction. */
+  int find_onto;             /* True if the last character search left the */
+                             /*  on top of the located character, as opposed */
+                             /*  to just before or after it. */
+  char find_char;            /* The last character sought, or '\0' if no */
+                             /*  searches have been performed yet. */
+} ViMode;
+
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+/*
+ * Define a type for recording a file-descriptor callback and its associated
+ * data.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  GlFdEventFn *fn;   /* The callback function */
+  void *data;        /* Anonymous data to pass to the callback function */
+} GlFdHandler;
+
+/*
+ * A list of nodes of the following type is used to record file-activity
+ * event handlers, but only on systems that have the select() system call.
+ */
+typedef struct GlFdNode GlFdNode;
+struct GlFdNode {
+  GlFdNode *next;    /* The next in the list of nodes */
+  int fd;            /* The file descriptor being watched */
+  GlFdHandler rd;    /* The callback to call when fd is readable */
+  GlFdHandler wr;    /* The callback to call when fd is writable */
+  GlFdHandler ur;    /* The callback to call when fd has urgent data */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Set the number of the above structures to allocate every time that
+ * the freelist of GlFdNode's becomes exhausted.
+ */
+#define GLFD_FREELIST_BLOCKING 10
+
+/*
+ * Listen for and handle file-descriptor events.
+ */
+static int gl_event_handler(GetLine *gl);
+
+static int gl_call_fd_handler(GetLine *gl, GlFdHandler *gfh, int fd,
+			      GlFdEvent event);
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Each signal that gl_get_line() traps is described by a list node
+ * of the following type.
+ */
+typedef struct GlSignalNode GlSignalNode;
+struct GlSignalNode {
+  GlSignalNode *next;  /* The next signal in the list */
+  int signo;           /* The number of the signal */
+  sigset_t proc_mask;  /* A process mask which only includes signo */
+  SigAction original;  /* The signal disposition of the calling program */
+                       /*  for this signal. */
+  unsigned flags;      /* A bitwise union of GlSignalFlags enumerators */
+  GlAfterSignal after; /* What to do after the signal has been handled */
+  int errno_value;     /* What to set errno to */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Set the number of the above structures to allocate every time that
+ * the freelist of GlSignalNode's becomes exhausted.
+ */
+#define GLS_FREELIST_BLOCKING 30
+
+/*
+ * Define the contents of the GetLine object.
+ * Note that the typedef for this object can be found in libtecla.h.
+ */
+struct GetLine {
+  GlHistory *glh;            /* The line-history buffer */
+  WordCompletion *cpl;       /* String completion resource object */
+  CplMatchFn(*cpl_fn);       /* The tab completion callback function */
+  void *cpl_data;            /* Callback data to pass to cpl_fn() */
+  ExpandFile *ef;            /* ~user/, $envvar and wildcard expansion */
+                             /*  resource object. */
+  StringGroup *capmem;       /* Memory for recording terminal capability */
+                             /*  strings. */
+  int input_fd;              /* The file descriptor to read on */
+  int output_fd;             /* The file descriptor to write to */
+  FILE *input_fp;            /* A stream wrapper around input_fd */
+  FILE *output_fp;           /* A stream wrapper around output_fd */
+  FILE *file_fp;             /* When input is being temporarily taken from */
+                             /*  a file, this is its file-pointer. Otherwise */
+                             /*  it is NULL. */
+  char *term;                /* The terminal type specified on the last call */
+                             /*  to gl_change_terminal(). */
+  int is_term;               /* True if stdin is a terminal */
+  size_t linelen;            /* The max number of characters per line */
+  char *line;                /* A line-input buffer of allocated size */
+                             /*  linelen+2. The extra 2 characters are */
+                             /*  reserved for "\n\0". */
+  char *cutbuf;              /* A cut-buffer of the same size as line[] */
+  const char *prompt;        /* The current prompt string */
+  int prompt_len;            /* The length of the prompt string */
+  int prompt_changed;        /* True after a callback changes the prompt */
+  int prompt_style;          /* How the prompt string is displayed */
+  FreeList *sig_mem;         /* Memory for nodes of the signal list */
+  GlSignalNode *sigs;        /* The head of the list of signals */
+  sigset_t old_signal_set;   /* The signal set on entry to gl_get_line() */
+  sigset_t new_signal_set;   /* The set of signals that we are trapping */
+  Termios oldattr;           /* Saved terminal attributes. */
+  KeyTab *bindings;          /* A table of key-bindings */
+  int ntotal;                /* The number of characters in gl->line[] */
+  int buff_curpos;           /* The cursor position within gl->line[] */
+  int term_curpos;           /* The cursor position on the terminal */
+  int buff_mark;             /* A marker location in the buffer */
+  int insert_curpos;         /* The cursor position at start of insert */
+  int insert;                /* True in insert mode */ 
+  int number;                /* If >= 0, a numeric argument is being read */
+  int endline;               /* True to tell gl_get_input_line() to return */
+                             /*  the current contents of gl->line[] */
+  KtKeyFn *current_fn;       /* The action function that is currently being */
+                             /*  invoked. */
+  int current_count;         /* The repeat count passed to current_fn() */
+  GlhLineID preload_id;      /* When not zero, this should be the ID of a */
+                             /*  line in the history buffer for potential */
+                             /*  recall. */
+  int preload_history;       /* If true, preload the above history line when */
+                             /*  gl_get_input_line() is next called. */
+  long keyseq_count;         /* The number of key sequences entered by the */
+                             /*  the user since new_GetLine() was called. */
+  long last_search;          /* The value of oper_count during the last */
+                             /*  history search operation. */
+  GlEditor editor;           /* The style of editing, (eg. vi or emacs) */
+  int silence_bell;          /* True if gl_ring_bell() should do nothing. */
+  ViMode vi;                 /* Parameters used when editing in vi mode */
+  const char *left;          /* The string that moves the cursor 1 character */
+                             /*  left. */
+  const char *right;         /* The string that moves the cursor 1 character */
+                             /*  right. */
+  const char *up;            /* The string that moves the cursor 1 character */
+                             /*  up. */
+  const char *down;          /* The string that moves the cursor 1 character */
+                             /*  down. */
+  const char *home;          /* The string that moves the cursor home */
+  const char *bol;           /* Move cursor to beginning of line */
+  const char *clear_eol;     /* The string that clears from the cursor to */
+                             /*  the end of the line. */
+  const char *clear_eod;     /* The string that clears from the cursor to */
+                             /*  the end of the display. */
+  const char *u_arrow;       /* The string returned by the up-arrow key */
+  const char *d_arrow;       /* The string returned by the down-arrow key */
+  const char *l_arrow;       /* The string returned by the left-arrow key */
+  const char *r_arrow;       /* The string returned by the right-arrow key */
+  const char *sound_bell;    /* The string needed to ring the terminal bell */
+  const char *bold;          /* Switch to the bold font */
+  const char *underline;     /* Underline subsequent characters */
+  const char *standout;      /* Turn on standout mode */
+  const char *dim;           /* Switch to a dim font */
+  const char *reverse;       /* Turn on reverse video */
+  const char *blink;         /* Switch to a blinking font */
+  const char *text_attr_off; /* Turn off all text attributes */
+  int nline;                 /* The height of the terminal in lines */
+  int ncolumn;               /* The width of the terminal in columns */
+#ifdef USE_TERMCAP
+  char *tgetent_buf;         /* The buffer that is used by tgetent() to */
+                             /*  store a terminal description. */
+  char *tgetstr_buf;         /* The buffer that is used by tgetstr() to */
+                             /*  store terminal capabilities. */
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+  const char *left_n;        /* The parameter string that moves the cursor */
+                             /*  n characters left. */
+  const char *right_n;       /* The parameter string that moves the cursor */
+                             /*  n characters right. */
+#endif
+  char *app_file;            /* The pathname of the application-specific */
+                             /*  .teclarc configuration file, or NULL. */
+  char *user_file;           /* The pathname of the user-specific */
+                             /*  .teclarc configuration file, or NULL. */
+  int configured;            /* True as soon as any teclarc configuration */
+                             /*  file has been read. */
+  int echo;                  /* True to display the line as it is being */
+                             /*  entered. If 0, only the prompt will be */
+                             /*  displayed, and the line will not be */
+                             /*  archived in the history list. */
+  int last_signal;           /* The last signal that was caught by */
+                             /*  the last call to gl_get_line(), or -1 */
+                             /*  if no signal has been caught yet. */
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+  FreeList *fd_node_mem;     /* A freelist of GlFdNode structures */
+  GlFdNode *fd_nodes;        /* The list of fd event descriptions */
+  fd_set rfds;               /* The set of fds to watch for readability */
+  fd_set wfds;               /* The set of fds to watch for writability */
+  fd_set ufds;               /* The set of fds to watch for urgent data */
+  int max_fd;                /* The maximum file-descriptor being watched */
+#endif
+};
+
+/*
+ * Define the max amount of space needed to store a termcap terminal
+ * description. Unfortunately this has to be done by guesswork, so
+ * there is the potential for buffer overflows if we guess too small.
+ * Fortunately termcap has been replaced by terminfo on most
+ * platforms, and with terminfo this isn't an issue. The value that I
+ * am using here is the conventional value, as recommended by certain
+ * web references.
+ */
+#ifdef USE_TERMCAP
+#define TERMCAP_BUF_SIZE 2048
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Set the size of the string segments used to store terminal capability
+ * strings.
+ */
+#define CAPMEM_SEGMENT_SIZE 512
+
+/*
+ * If no terminal size information is available, substitute the
+ * following vt100 default sizes.
+ */
+#define GL_DEF_NLINE 24
+#define GL_DEF_NCOLUMN 80
+
+/*
+ * List the signals that we need to catch. In general these are
+ * those that by default terminate or suspend the process, since
+ * in such cases we need to restore terminal settings.
+ */
+static const struct GlDefSignal {
+  int signo;            /* The number of the signal */
+  unsigned flags;       /* A bitwise union of GlSignalFlags enumerators */
+  GlAfterSignal after;  /* What to do after the signal has been delivered */
+  int errno_value;      /* What to set errno to */
+} gl_signal_list[] = {
+  {SIGABRT,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, EINTR},
+  {SIGINT,    GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, EINTR},
+  {SIGTERM,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, EINTR},
+  {SIGALRM,   GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+  {SIGCONT,   GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#if defined(SIGHUP)
+#ifdef ENOTTY
+  {SIGHUP,    GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, ENOTTY},
+#else
+  {SIGHUP,    GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, EINTR},
+#endif
+#endif
+#if defined(SIGPIPE)
+#ifdef EPIPE
+  {SIGPIPE,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, EPIPE},
+#else
+  {SIGPIPE,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, EINTR},
+#endif
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGPWR
+  {SIGPWR,    GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGQUIT
+  {SIGQUIT,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_ABORT, EINTR},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGTSTP
+  {SIGTSTP,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGTTIN
+  {SIGTTIN,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGTTOU
+  {SIGTTOU,   GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGUSR1
+  {SIGUSR1,   GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGUSR2
+  {SIGUSR2,   GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGVTALRM
+  {SIGVTALRM, GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGWINCH
+  {SIGWINCH,  GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+#ifdef SIGXCPU
+  {SIGXCPU,   GLS_RESTORE_ENV, GLS_CONTINUE, 0},
+#endif
+};
+
+/*
+ * Define file-scope variables for use in signal handlers.
+ */
+static volatile sig_atomic_t gl_pending_signal = -1;
+static sigjmp_buf gl_setjmp_buffer;
+
+static void gl_signal_handler(int signo);
+
+static int gl_check_caught_signal(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Define a tab to be a string of 8 spaces.
+ */
+#define TAB_WIDTH 8
+
+/*
+ * Does the system send us SIGWINCH signals when the terminal size
+ * changes?
+ */
+#ifdef USE_SIGWINCH
+static int gl_resize_terminal(GetLine *gl, int redisplay);
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Getline calls this to temporarily override certain signal handlers
+ * of the calling program.
+ */
+static int gl_override_signal_handlers(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Getline calls this to restore the signal handlers of the calling
+ * program.
+ */
+static int gl_restore_signal_handlers(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Put the terminal into raw input mode, after saving the original
+ * terminal attributes in gl->oldattr.
+ */
+static int gl_raw_terminal_mode(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Restore the terminal attributes from gl->oldattr.
+ */
+static int gl_restore_terminal_attributes(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Read a line from the user in raw mode.
+ */
+static int gl_get_input_line(GetLine *gl, const char *start_line,
+			     int start_pos);
+
+/*
+ * Set the largest key-sequence that can be handled.
+ */
+#define GL_KEY_MAX 64
+
+/*
+ * Handle the receipt of the potential start of a new key-sequence from
+ * the user.
+ */
+static int gl_interpret_char(GetLine *gl, char c);
+
+/*
+ * Bind a single control or meta character to an action.
+ */
+static int gl_bind_control_char(GetLine *gl, KtBinder binder,
+				char c, const char *action);
+
+/*
+ * Set up terminal-specific key bindings.
+ */
+static int gl_bind_terminal_keys(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Lookup terminal control string and size information.
+ */
+static int gl_control_strings(GetLine *gl, const char *term);
+
+/*
+ * Wrappers around the terminfo and termcap functions that lookup
+ * strings in the terminal information databases.
+ */
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+static const char *gl_tigetstr(GetLine *gl, const char *name);
+#elif defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+static const char *gl_tgetstr(GetLine *gl, const char *name, char **bufptr);
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Output a binary string directly to the terminal.
+ */
+static int gl_output_raw_string(GetLine *gl, const char *string);
+
+/*
+ * Output a terminal control sequence.
+ */
+static int gl_output_control_sequence(GetLine *gl, int nline,
+				      const char *string);
+
+/*
+ * Output a character or string to the terminal after converting tabs
+ * to spaces and control characters to a caret followed by the modified
+ * character.
+ */
+static int gl_output_char(GetLine *gl, char c, char pad);
+static int gl_output_string(GetLine *gl, const char *string, char pad);
+
+/*
+ * Delete nc characters starting from the one under the cursor.
+ * Optionally copy the deleted characters to the cut buffer.
+ */
+static int gl_delete_chars(GetLine *gl, int nc, int cut);
+
+/*
+ * Add a character to the line buffer at the current cursor position,
+ * inserting or overwriting according the current mode.
+ */
+static int gl_add_char_to_line(GetLine *gl, char c);
+
+/*
+ * Insert/append a string to the line buffer and terminal at the current
+ * cursor position.
+ */
+static int gl_add_string_to_line(GetLine *gl, const char *s);
+
+/*
+ * Read a single character from the terminal.
+ */
+static int gl_read_character(GetLine *gl, char *c);
+
+
+/*
+ * Move the terminal cursor n positions to the left or right.
+ */
+static int gl_terminal_move_cursor(GetLine *gl, int n);
+
+/*
+ * Move the terminal cursor to a given position.
+ */
+static int gl_set_term_curpos(GetLine *gl, int term_curpos);
+
+/*
+ * Set the position of the cursor both in the line input buffer and on the
+ * terminal.
+ */
+static int gl_place_cursor(GetLine *gl, int buff_curpos);
+
+/*
+ * Return the terminal cursor position that corresponds to a given
+ * line buffer cursor position.
+ */
+static int gl_buff_curpos_to_term_curpos(GetLine *gl, int buff_curpos);
+
+/*
+ * Return the number of terminal characters needed to display a
+ * given raw character.
+ */
+static int gl_displayed_char_width(GetLine *gl, char c, int term_curpos);
+
+/*
+ * Return the number of terminal characters needed to display a
+ * given substring.
+ */
+static int gl_displayed_string_width(GetLine *gl, const char *string, int nc,
+				     int term_curpos);
+/*
+ * Return non-zero if 'c' is to be considered part of a word.
+ */
+static int gl_is_word_char(int c);
+
+/*
+ * Read a tecla configuration file.
+ */
+static int _gl_read_config_file(GetLine *gl, const char *filename, KtBinder who);
+
+/*
+ * Read a tecla configuration string.
+ */
+static int _gl_read_config_string(GetLine *gl, const char *buffer, KtBinder who);
+
+/*
+ * Define the callback function used by _gl_parse_config_line() to
+ * read the next character of a configuration stream.
+ */
+#define GLC_GETC_FN(fn) int (fn)(void *stream)
+typedef GLC_GETC_FN(GlcGetcFn);
+
+static GLC_GETC_FN(glc_file_getc);  /* Read from a file */
+static GLC_GETC_FN(glc_buff_getc);  /* Read from a string */
+
+/*
+ * Parse a single configuration command line.
+ */
+static int _gl_parse_config_line(GetLine *gl, void *stream, GlcGetcFn *getc_fn,
+				 const char *origin, KtBinder who, int *lineno);
+
+/*
+ * Bind the actual arrow key bindings to match those of the symbolic
+ * arrow-key bindings.
+ */
+static int _gl_bind_arrow_keys(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Copy the binding of the specified symbolic arrow-key binding to
+ * the terminal specific, and default arrow-key key-sequences. 
+ */
+static int _gl_rebind_arrow_key(KeyTab *bindings, const char *name,
+				const char *term_seq,
+				const char *def_seq1,
+				const char *def_seq2);
+
+/*
+ * After the gl_read_from_file() action has been used to tell gl_get_line()
+ * to temporarily read input from a file, gl_revert_input() arranges
+ * for input to be reverted to the input stream last registered with
+ * gl_change_terminal().
+ */
+static void gl_revert_input(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Flush unwritten characters to the terminal.
+ */
+static int gl_flush_output(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Change the editor style being emulated.
+ */
+static int gl_change_editor(GetLine *gl, GlEditor editor);
+
+/*
+ * Searching in a given direction, return the index of a given (or
+ * read) character in the input line, or the character that precedes
+ * it in the specified search direction. Return -1 if not found.
+ */
+static int gl_find_char(GetLine *gl, int count, int forward, int onto, char c);
+
+/*
+ * Return the buffer index of the nth word ending after the cursor.
+ */
+static int gl_nth_word_end_forward(GetLine *gl, int n);
+
+/*
+ * Return the buffer index of the nth word start after the cursor.
+ */
+static int gl_nth_word_start_forward(GetLine *gl, int n);
+
+/*
+ * Return the buffer index of the nth word start before the cursor.
+ */
+static int gl_nth_word_start_backward(GetLine *gl, int n);
+
+/*
+ * When called when vi command mode is enabled, this function saves the
+ * current line and cursor position for potential restoration later
+ * by the vi undo command.
+ */
+static void gl_save_for_undo(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * If in vi mode, switch to vi command mode.
+ */
+static void gl_vi_command_mode(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * In vi mode this is used to delete up to or onto a given or read
+ * character in the input line. Also switch to insert mode if requested
+ * after the deletion.
+ */
+static int gl_delete_find(GetLine *gl, int count, char c, int forward,
+			  int onto, int change);
+
+/*
+ * Copy the characters between the cursor and the count'th instance of
+ * a specified (or read) character in the input line, into the cut buffer.
+ */
+static int gl_copy_find(GetLine *gl, int count, char c, int forward, int onto);
+
+/*
+ * Return the line index of the parenthesis that either matches the one under
+ * the cursor, or not over a parenthesis character, the index of the next
+ * close parenthesis. Return -1 if not found.
+ */
+static int gl_index_of_matching_paren(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Replace a malloc'd string (or NULL), with another malloc'd copy of
+ * a string (or NULL).
+ */
+static int gl_record_string(char **sptr, const char *string);
+
+/*
+ * Enumerate text display attributes as powers of two, suitable for
+ * use in a bit-mask.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  GL_TXT_STANDOUT=1,   /* Display text highlighted */
+  GL_TXT_UNDERLINE=2,  /* Display text underlined */
+  GL_TXT_REVERSE=4,    /* Display text with reverse video */
+  GL_TXT_BLINK=8,      /* Display blinking text */
+  GL_TXT_DIM=16,       /* Display text in a dim font */
+  GL_TXT_BOLD=32       /* Display text using a bold font */
+} GlTextAttr;
+
+/*
+ * Display the prompt regardless of the current visibility mode.
+ */
+static int gl_display_prompt(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Return the number of characters used by the prompt on the terminal.
+ */
+static int gl_displayed_prompt_width(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Prepare the return the current input line to the caller of gl_get_line().
+ */
+static int gl_line_ended(GetLine *gl, int newline_char, int archive);
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length of a line in a user's tecla configuration
+ * file (not counting comments).
+ */
+#define GL_CONF_BUFLEN 100
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum number of arguments supported by individual commands
+ * in tecla configuration files.
+ */
+#define GL_CONF_MAXARG 10
+
+/*
+ * Prototype the available action functions.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_user_interrupt);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_abort);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_suspend);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_stop_output);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_start_output);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_literal_next);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_cursor_left);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_cursor_right);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_insert_mode);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_beginning_of_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_end_of_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_kill_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_refind);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_invert_refind);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_to_column);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_to_parenthesis);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_find);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_find);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_to);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_to);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_upcase_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_downcase_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_capitalize_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_redisplay);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_clear_screen);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_transpose_chars);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_set_mark);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_exchange_point_and_mark);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_kill_region);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_region_as_kill);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_yank);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_up_history);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_down_history);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_search_backward);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_re_search_backward);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_search_forward);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_re_search_forward);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_complete_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_expand_filename);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_del_char_or_list_or_eof);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_list_or_eof);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_read_from_file);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_beginning_of_history);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_end_of_history);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_digit_argument);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_newline);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_repeat_history);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_insert);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_overwrite);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_change_case);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_insert_at_bol);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_append_at_eol);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_append);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_list_glob);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_kill_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_goto_column);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_to_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_replace_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_rest_of_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_to_bol);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_refind);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_invert_refind);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_to_column);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_to_parenthesis);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_find);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_find);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_to);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_to);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_find_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_find_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_to_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_to_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_repeat_find_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_invert_refind_char);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_append_yank);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_word);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_to_bol);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_refind);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_invert_refind);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_to_column);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_to_parenthesis);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_rest_of_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_line);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_find);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_find);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_to);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_to);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_undo);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_emacs_editing_mode);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_editing_mode);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_ring_bell);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_repeat_change);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_find_parenthesis);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_read_init_files);
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_list_history);
+
+/*
+ * Name the available action functions.
+ */
+static const struct {const char *name; KT_KEY_FN(*fn);} gl_actions[] = {
+  {"user-interrupt",             gl_user_interrupt},
+  {"abort",                      gl_abort},
+  {"suspend",                    gl_suspend},
+  {"stop-output",                gl_stop_output},
+  {"start-output",               gl_start_output},
+  {"literal-next",               gl_literal_next},
+  {"cursor-right",               gl_cursor_right},
+  {"cursor-left",                gl_cursor_left},
+  {"insert-mode",                gl_insert_mode},
+  {"beginning-of-line",          gl_beginning_of_line},
+  {"end-of-line",                gl_end_of_line},
+  {"delete-line",                gl_delete_line},
+  {"kill-line",                  gl_kill_line},
+  {"forward-word",               gl_forward_word},
+  {"backward-word",              gl_backward_word},
+  {"forward-delete-char",        gl_forward_delete_char},
+  {"backward-delete-char",       gl_backward_delete_char},
+  {"forward-delete-word",        gl_forward_delete_word},
+  {"backward-delete-word",       gl_backward_delete_word},
+  {"delete-refind",              gl_delete_refind},
+  {"delete-invert-refind",       gl_delete_invert_refind},
+  {"delete-to-column",           gl_delete_to_column},
+  {"delete-to-parenthesis",      gl_delete_to_parenthesis},
+  {"forward-delete-find",        gl_forward_delete_find},
+  {"backward-delete-find",       gl_backward_delete_find},
+  {"forward-delete-to",          gl_forward_delete_to},
+  {"backward-delete-to",         gl_backward_delete_to},
+  {"upcase-word",                gl_upcase_word},
+  {"downcase-word",              gl_downcase_word},
+  {"capitalize-word",            gl_capitalize_word},
+  {"redisplay",                  gl_redisplay},
+  {"clear-screen",               gl_clear_screen},
+  {"transpose-chars",            gl_transpose_chars},
+  {"set-mark",                   gl_set_mark},
+  {"exchange-point-and-mark",    gl_exchange_point_and_mark},
+  {"kill-region",                gl_kill_region},
+  {"copy-region-as-kill",        gl_copy_region_as_kill},
+  {"yank",                       gl_yank},
+  {"up-history",                 gl_up_history},
+  {"down-history",               gl_down_history},
+  {"history-search-backward",    gl_history_search_backward},
+  {"history-re-search-backward", gl_history_re_search_backward},
+  {"history-search-forward",     gl_history_search_forward},
+  {"history-re-search-forward",  gl_history_re_search_forward},
+  {"complete-word",              gl_complete_word},
+  {"expand-filename",            gl_expand_filename},
+  {"del-char-or-list-or-eof",    gl_del_char_or_list_or_eof},
+  {"read-from-file",             gl_read_from_file},
+  {"beginning-of-history",       gl_beginning_of_history},
+  {"end-of-history",             gl_end_of_history},
+  {"digit-argument",             gl_digit_argument},
+  {"newline",                    gl_newline},
+  {"repeat-history",             gl_repeat_history},
+  {"vi-insert",                  gl_vi_insert},
+  {"vi-overwrite",               gl_vi_overwrite},
+  {"vi-insert-at-bol",           gl_vi_insert_at_bol},
+  {"vi-append-at-eol",           gl_vi_append_at_eol},
+  {"vi-append",                  gl_vi_append},
+  {"change-case",                gl_change_case},
+  {"list-glob",                  gl_list_glob},
+  {"backward-kill-line",         gl_backward_kill_line},
+  {"goto-column",                gl_goto_column},
+  {"forward-to-word",            gl_forward_to_word},
+  {"vi-replace-char",            gl_vi_replace_char},
+  {"vi-change-rest-of-line",     gl_vi_change_rest_of_line},
+  {"vi-change-line",             gl_vi_change_line},
+  {"vi-change-to-bol",           gl_vi_change_to_bol},
+  {"vi-change-refind",           gl_vi_change_refind},
+  {"vi-change-invert-refind",    gl_vi_change_invert_refind},
+  {"vi-change-to-column",        gl_vi_change_to_column},
+  {"vi-change-to-parenthesis",   gl_vi_change_to_parenthesis},
+  {"forward-copy-char",          gl_forward_copy_char},
+  {"backward-copy-char",         gl_backward_copy_char},
+  {"forward-find-char",          gl_forward_find_char},
+  {"backward-find-char",         gl_backward_find_char},
+  {"forward-to-char",            gl_forward_to_char},
+  {"backward-to-char",           gl_backward_to_char},
+  {"repeat-find-char",           gl_repeat_find_char},
+  {"invert-refind-char",         gl_invert_refind_char},
+  {"append-yank",                gl_append_yank},
+  {"backward-copy-word",         gl_backward_copy_word},
+  {"forward-copy-word",          gl_forward_copy_word},
+  {"copy-to-bol",                gl_copy_to_bol},
+  {"copy-refind",                gl_copy_refind},
+  {"copy-invert-refind",         gl_copy_invert_refind},
+  {"copy-to-column",             gl_copy_to_column},
+  {"copy-to-parenthesis",        gl_copy_to_parenthesis},
+  {"copy-rest-of-line",          gl_copy_rest_of_line},
+  {"copy-line",                  gl_copy_line},
+  {"backward-copy-find",         gl_backward_copy_find},
+  {"forward-copy-find",          gl_forward_copy_find},
+  {"backward-copy-to",           gl_backward_copy_to},
+  {"forward-copy-to",            gl_forward_copy_to},
+  {"list-or-eof",                gl_list_or_eof},
+  {"vi-undo",                    gl_vi_undo},
+  {"vi-backward-change-word",    gl_vi_backward_change_word},
+  {"vi-forward-change-word",     gl_vi_forward_change_word},
+  {"vi-backward-change-find",    gl_vi_backward_change_find},
+  {"vi-forward-change-find",     gl_vi_forward_change_find},
+  {"vi-backward-change-to",      gl_vi_backward_change_to},
+  {"vi-forward-change-to",       gl_vi_forward_change_to},
+  {"vi-backward-change-char",    gl_vi_backward_change_char},
+  {"vi-forward-change-char",     gl_vi_forward_change_char},
+  {"emacs-mode",                 gl_emacs_editing_mode},
+  {"vi-mode",                    gl_vi_editing_mode},
+  {"ring-bell",                  gl_ring_bell},
+  {"vi-repeat-change",           gl_vi_repeat_change},
+  {"find-parenthesis",           gl_find_parenthesis},
+  {"read-init-files",            gl_read_init_files},
+  {"list-history",               gl_list_history},
+};
+
+/*
+ * Define the default key-bindings in emacs mode.
+ */
+static const KtKeyBinding gl_emacs_bindings[] = {
+  {"right",        "cursor-right"},
+  {"^F",           "cursor-right"},
+  {"left",         "cursor-left"},
+  {"^B",           "cursor-left"},
+  {"M-i",          "insert-mode"},
+  {"M-I",          "insert-mode"},
+  {"^A",           "beginning-of-line"},
+  {"^E",           "end-of-line"},
+  {"^U",           "delete-line"},
+  {"^K",           "kill-line"},
+  {"M-f",          "forward-word"},
+  {"M-F",          "forward-word"},
+  {"M-b",          "backward-word"},
+  {"M-B",          "backward-word"},
+  {"^D",           "del-char-or-list-or-eof"},
+  {"^H",           "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"^?",           "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-d",          "forward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-D",          "forward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-^H",         "backward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-^?",         "backward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-u",          "upcase-word"},
+  {"M-U",          "upcase-word"},
+  {"M-l",          "downcase-word"},
+  {"M-L",          "downcase-word"},
+  {"M-c",          "capitalize-word"},
+  {"M-C",          "capitalize-word"},
+  {"^R",           "redisplay"},
+  {"^L",           "clear-screen"},
+  {"^T",           "transpose-chars"},
+  {"^@",           "set-mark"},
+  {"^X^X",         "exchange-point-and-mark"},
+  {"^W",           "kill-region"},
+  {"M-w",          "copy-region-as-kill"},
+  {"M-W",          "copy-region-as-kill"},
+  {"^Y",           "yank"},
+  {"^P",           "up-history"},
+  {"up",           "up-history"},
+  {"^N",           "down-history"},
+  {"down",         "down-history"},
+  {"M-p",          "history-search-backward"},
+  {"M-P",          "history-search-backward"},
+  {"M-n",          "history-search-forward"},
+  {"M-N",          "history-search-forward"},
+  {"\t",           "complete-word"},
+  {"^X*",          "expand-filename"},
+  {"^X^F",         "read-from-file"},
+  {"^X^R",         "read-init-files"},
+  {"^Xg",          "list-glob"},
+  {"^XG",          "list-glob"},
+  {"^Xh",          "list-history"},
+  {"^XH",          "list-history"},
+  {"M-<",          "beginning-of-history"},
+  {"M->",          "end-of-history"},
+  {"M-0",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-1",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-2",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-3",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-4",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-5",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-6",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-7",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-8",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-9",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"\r",           "newline"},
+  {"\n",           "newline"},
+  {"M-o",          "repeat-history"},
+  {"M-C-v",        "vi-mode"},
+};
+
+/*
+ * Define the default key-bindings in vi mode. Note that in vi-mode
+ * meta-key bindings are command-mode bindings. For example M-i first
+ * switches to command mode if not already in that mode, then moves
+ * the cursor one position right, as in vi.
+ */
+static const KtKeyBinding gl_vi_bindings[] = {
+  {"^D",           "list-or-eof"},
+  {"^G",           "list-glob"},
+  {"^H",           "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"\t",           "complete-word"},
+  {"\r",           "newline"},
+  {"\n",           "newline"},
+  {"^L",           "clear-screen"},
+  {"^N",           "down-history"},
+  {"^P",           "up-history"},
+  {"^R",           "redisplay"},
+  {"^U",           "backward-kill-line"},
+  {"^W",           "backward-delete-word"},
+  {"^X^F",         "read-from-file"},
+  {"^X^R",         "read-init-files"},
+  {"^X*",          "expand-filename"},
+  {"^?",           "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"M- ",          "cursor-right"},
+  {"M-$",          "end-of-line"},
+  {"M-*",          "expand-filename"},
+  {"M-+",          "down-history"},
+  {"M--",          "up-history"},
+  {"M-<",          "beginning-of-history"},
+  {"M->",          "end-of-history"},
+  {"M-^",          "beginning-of-line"},
+  {"M-;",          "repeat-find-char"},
+  {"M-,",          "invert-refind-char"},
+  {"M-|",          "goto-column"},
+  {"M-~",          "change-case"},
+  {"M-.",          "vi-repeat-change"},
+  {"M-%",          "find-parenthesis"},
+  {"M-0",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-1",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-2",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-3",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-4",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-5",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-6",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-7",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-8",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-9",          "digit-argument"},
+  {"M-a",          "vi-append"},
+  {"M-A",          "vi-append-at-eol"},
+  {"M-b",          "backward-word"},
+  {"M-B",          "backward-word"},
+  {"M-C",          "vi-change-rest-of-line"},
+  {"M-cb",         "vi-backward-change-word"},
+  {"M-cB",         "vi-backward-change-word"},
+  {"M-cc",         "vi-change-line"},
+  {"M-ce",         "vi-forward-change-word"},
+  {"M-cE",         "vi-forward-change-word"},
+  {"M-cw",         "vi-forward-change-word"},
+  {"M-cW",         "vi-forward-change-word"},
+  {"M-cF",         "vi-backward-change-find"},
+  {"M-cf",         "vi-forward-change-find"},
+  {"M-cT",         "vi-backward-change-to"},
+  {"M-ct",         "vi-forward-change-to"},
+  {"M-c;",         "vi-change-refind"},
+  {"M-c,",         "vi-change-invert-refind"},
+  {"M-ch",         "vi-backward-change-char"},
+  {"M-c^H",        "vi-backward-change-char"},
+  {"M-c^?",        "vi-backward-change-char"},
+  {"M-cl",         "vi-forward-change-char"},
+  {"M-c ",         "vi-forward-change-char"},
+  {"M-c^",         "vi-change-to-bol"},
+  {"M-c0",         "vi-change-to-bol"},
+  {"M-c$",         "vi-change-rest-of-line"},
+  {"M-c|",         "vi-change-to-column"},
+  {"M-c%",         "vi-change-to-parenthesis"},
+  {"M-dh",         "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-d^H",        "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-d^?",        "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-dl",         "forward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-d ",         "forward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-dd",         "delete-line"},
+  {"M-db",         "backward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-dB",         "backward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-de",         "forward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-dE",         "forward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-dw",         "forward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-dW",         "forward-delete-word"},
+  {"M-dF",         "backward-delete-find"},
+  {"M-df",         "forward-delete-find"},
+  {"M-dT",         "backward-delete-to"},
+  {"M-dt",         "forward-delete-to"},
+  {"M-d;",         "delete-refind"},
+  {"M-d,",         "delete-invert-refind"},
+  {"M-d^",         "backward-kill-line"},
+  {"M-d0",         "backward-kill-line"},
+  {"M-d$",         "kill-line"},
+  {"M-D",          "kill-line"},
+  {"M-d|",         "delete-to-column"},
+  {"M-d%",         "delete-to-parenthesis"},
+  {"M-e",          "forward-word"},
+  {"M-E",          "forward-word"},
+  {"M-f",          "forward-find-char"},
+  {"M-F",          "backward-find-char"},
+  {"M--",          "up-history"},
+  {"M-h",          "cursor-left"},
+  {"M-H",          "beginning-of-history"},
+  {"M-i",          "vi-insert"},
+  {"M-I",          "vi-insert-at-bol"},
+  {"M-j",          "down-history"},
+  {"M-J",          "history-search-forward"},
+  {"M-k",          "up-history"},
+  {"M-K",          "history-search-backward"},
+  {"M-l",          "cursor-right"},
+  {"M-L",          "end-of-history"},
+  {"M-n",          "history-re-search-forward"},
+  {"M-N",          "history-re-search-backward"},
+  {"M-p",          "append-yank"},
+  {"M-P",          "yank"},
+  {"M-r",          "vi-replace-char"},
+  {"M-R",          "vi-overwrite"},
+  {"M-s",          "vi-forward-change-char"},
+  {"M-S",          "vi-change-line"},
+  {"M-t",          "forward-to-char"},
+  {"M-T",          "backward-to-char"},
+  {"M-u",          "vi-undo"},
+  {"M-w",          "forward-to-word"},
+  {"M-W",          "forward-to-word"},
+  {"M-x",          "forward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-X",          "backward-delete-char"},
+  {"M-yh",         "backward-copy-char"},
+  {"M-y^H",        "backward-copy-char"},
+  {"M-y^?",        "backward-copy-char"},
+  {"M-yl",         "forward-copy-char"},
+  {"M-y ",         "forward-copy-char"},
+  {"M-ye",         "forward-copy-word"},
+  {"M-yE",         "forward-copy-word"},
+  {"M-yw",         "forward-copy-word"},
+  {"M-yW",         "forward-copy-word"},
+  {"M-yb",         "backward-copy-word"},
+  {"M-yB",         "backward-copy-word"},
+  {"M-yf",         "forward-copy-find"},
+  {"M-yF",         "backward-copy-find"},
+  {"M-yt",         "forward-copy-to"},
+  {"M-yT",         "backward-copy-to"},
+  {"M-y;",         "copy-refind"},
+  {"M-y,",         "copy-invert-refind"},
+  {"M-y^",         "copy-to-bol"},
+  {"M-y0",         "copy-to-bol"},
+  {"M-y$",         "copy-rest-of-line"},
+  {"M-yy",         "copy-line"},
+  {"M-Y",          "copy-line"},
+  {"M-y|",         "copy-to-column"},
+  {"M-y%",         "copy-to-parenthesis"},
+  {"M-^E",         "emacs-mode"},
+  {"M-^H",         "cursor-left"},
+  {"M-^?",         "cursor-left"},
+  {"M-^L",         "clear-screen"},
+  {"M-^N",         "down-history"},
+  {"M-^P",         "up-history"},
+  {"M-^R",         "redisplay"},
+  {"M-^D",         "list-or-eof"},
+  {"M-\r",         "newline"},
+  {"M-\t",         "complete-word"},
+  {"M-\n",         "newline"},
+  {"M-^X^R",       "read-init-files"},
+  {"M-^Xh",        "list-history"},
+  {"M-^XH",        "list-history"},
+  {"down",         "down-history"},
+  {"up",           "up-history"},
+  {"left",         "cursor-left"},
+  {"right",        "cursor-right"},
+};
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new GetLine object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  linelen  size_t    The maximum line length to allow for.
+ *  histlen  size_t    The number of bytes to allocate for recording
+ *                     a circular buffer of history lines.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  GetLine *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+GetLine *new_GetLine(size_t linelen, size_t histlen)
+{
+  GetLine *gl;  /* The object to be returned */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(linelen < 10) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_GetLine: Line length too small.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  gl = (GetLine *) malloc(sizeof(GetLine));
+  if(!gl) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_GetLine: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_GetLine().
+ */
+  gl->glh = NULL;
+  gl->cpl = NULL;
+  gl->cpl_fn = cpl_file_completions;
+  gl->cpl_data = NULL;
+  gl->ef = NULL;
+  gl->capmem = NULL;
+  gl->term = NULL;
+  gl->is_term = 0;
+  gl->input_fd = -1;
+  gl->output_fd = -1;
+  gl->input_fp = NULL;
+  gl->output_fp = NULL;
+  gl->file_fp = NULL;
+  gl->linelen = linelen;
+  gl->line = NULL;
+  gl->cutbuf = NULL;
+  gl->linelen = linelen;
+  gl->prompt = "";
+  gl->prompt_len = 0;
+  gl->prompt_changed = 0;
+  gl->prompt_style = GL_LITERAL_PROMPT;
+  gl->vi.undo.line = NULL;
+  gl->vi.undo.buff_curpos = 0;
+  gl->vi.undo.ntotal = 0;
+  gl->vi.undo.saved = 0;
+  gl->vi.repeat.fn = 0;
+  gl->vi.repeat.count = 0;
+  gl->vi.repeat.input_curpos = 0;
+  gl->vi.repeat.command_curpos = 0;
+  gl->vi.repeat.input_char = '\0';
+  gl->vi.repeat.saved = 0;
+  gl->vi.repeat.active = 0;
+  gl->sig_mem = NULL;
+  gl->sigs = NULL;
+  sigemptyset(&gl->old_signal_set);
+  sigemptyset(&gl->new_signal_set);
+  gl->bindings = NULL;
+  gl->ntotal = 0;
+  gl->buff_curpos = 0;
+  gl->term_curpos = 0;
+  gl->buff_mark = 0;
+  gl->insert_curpos = 0;
+  gl->insert = 1;
+  gl->number = -1;
+  gl->endline = 0;
+  gl->current_fn = 0;
+  gl->current_count = 0;
+  gl->preload_id = 0;
+  gl->preload_history = 0;
+  gl->keyseq_count = 0;
+  gl->last_search = -1;
+  gl->editor = GL_EMACS_MODE;
+  gl->silence_bell = 0;
+  gl->vi.command = 0;
+  gl->vi.find_forward = 0;
+  gl->vi.find_onto = 0;
+  gl->vi.find_char = '\0';
+  gl->left = NULL;
+  gl->right = NULL;
+  gl->up = NULL;
+  gl->down = NULL;
+  gl->home = NULL;
+  gl->bol = 0;
+  gl->clear_eol = NULL;
+  gl->clear_eod = NULL;
+  gl->u_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->d_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->l_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->r_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->sound_bell = NULL;
+  gl->bold = NULL;
+  gl->underline = NULL;
+  gl->standout = NULL;
+  gl->dim = NULL;
+  gl->reverse = NULL;
+  gl->blink = NULL;
+  gl->text_attr_off = NULL;
+  gl->nline = 0;
+  gl->ncolumn = 0;
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+  gl->left_n = NULL;
+  gl->right_n = NULL;
+#elif defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+  gl->tgetent_buf = NULL;
+  gl->tgetstr_buf = NULL;
+#endif
+  gl->app_file = NULL;
+  gl->user_file = NULL;
+  gl->configured = 0;
+  gl->echo = 1;
+  gl->last_signal = -1;
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+  gl->fd_node_mem = NULL;
+  gl->fd_nodes = NULL;
+  FD_ZERO(&gl->rfds);
+  FD_ZERO(&gl->wfds);
+  FD_ZERO(&gl->ufds);
+  gl->max_fd = 0;
+#endif
+/*
+ * Allocate the history buffer.
+ */
+  gl->glh = _new_GlHistory(histlen);
+  if(!gl->glh)
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Allocate the resource object for file-completion.
+ */
+  gl->cpl = new_WordCompletion();
+  if(!gl->cpl)
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Allocate the resource object for file-completion.
+ */
+  gl->ef = new_ExpandFile();
+  if(!gl->ef)
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Allocate a string-segment memory allocator for use in storing terminal
+ * capablity strings.
+ */
+  gl->capmem = _new_StringGroup(CAPMEM_SEGMENT_SIZE);
+  if(!gl->capmem)
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Allocate a line buffer, leaving 2 extra characters for the terminating
+ * '\n' and '\0' characters
+ */
+  gl->line = (char *) malloc(linelen + 2);
+  if(!gl->line) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+	    "new_GetLine: Insufficient memory to allocate line buffer.\n");
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+  };
+  gl->line[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Allocate a cut buffer.
+ */
+  gl->cutbuf = (char *) malloc(linelen + 2);
+  if(!gl->cutbuf) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+	    "new_GetLine: Insufficient memory to allocate cut buffer.\n");
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+  };
+  gl->cutbuf[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Allocate a vi undo buffer.
+ */
+  gl->vi.undo.line = (char *) malloc(linelen + 2);
+  if(!gl->vi.undo.line) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+	    "new_GetLine: Insufficient memory to allocate undo buffer.\n");
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+  };
+  gl->vi.undo.line[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Allocate a freelist from which to allocate nodes for the list
+ * of signals.
+ */
+  gl->sig_mem = _new_FreeList("new_GetLine", sizeof(GlSignalNode),
+			      GLS_FREELIST_BLOCKING);
+  if(!gl->sig_mem)
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Install dispositions for the default list of signals that gl_get_line()
+ * traps.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<sizeof(gl_signal_list)/sizeof(gl_signal_list[0]); i++) {
+    const struct GlDefSignal *sig = gl_signal_list + i;
+    if(gl_trap_signal(gl, sig->signo, sig->flags, sig->after,
+		       sig->errno_value))
+      return del_GetLine(gl);
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate an empty table of key bindings.
+ */
+  gl->bindings = _new_KeyTab();
+  if(!gl->bindings)
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Define the available actions that can be bound to key sequences.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<sizeof(gl_actions)/sizeof(gl_actions[0]); i++) {
+    if(_kt_set_action(gl->bindings, gl_actions[i].name, gl_actions[i].fn))
+      return del_GetLine(gl);
+  };
+/*
+ * Set up the default bindings.
+ */
+  if(gl_change_editor(gl, gl->editor))
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Allocate termcap buffers.
+ */
+#ifdef USE_TERMCAP
+  gl->tgetent_buf = (char *) malloc(TERMCAP_BUF_SIZE);
+  gl->tgetstr_buf = (char *) malloc(TERMCAP_BUF_SIZE);
+  if(!gl->tgetent_buf || !gl->tgetstr_buf) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_GetLine: Insufficient memory for termcap buffers.\n");
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+  };
+#endif
+/*
+ * Set up for I/O assuming stdin and stdout.
+ */
+  if(gl_change_terminal(gl, stdin, stdout, getenv("TERM")))
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+/*
+ * Create a freelist for use in allocating GlFdNode list nodes.
+ */
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+  gl->fd_node_mem = _new_FreeList("new_GetLine", sizeof(GlFdNode),
+				  GLFD_FREELIST_BLOCKING);
+  if(!gl->fd_node_mem)
+    return del_GetLine(gl);
+#endif
+/*
+ * We are done for now.
+ */
+  return gl;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a GetLine object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return GetLine *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+GetLine *del_GetLine(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  if(gl) {
+    gl->glh = _del_GlHistory(gl->glh);
+    gl->cpl = del_WordCompletion(gl->cpl);
+    gl->ef = del_ExpandFile(gl->ef);
+    gl->capmem = _del_StringGroup(gl->capmem);
+    if(gl->line)
+      free(gl->line);
+    if(gl->cutbuf)
+      free(gl->cutbuf);
+    if(gl->vi.undo.line)
+      free(gl->vi.undo.line);
+    gl->sig_mem = _del_FreeList(NULL, gl->sig_mem, 1);
+    gl->sigs = NULL;       /* Already freed by freeing sig_mem */
+    gl->bindings = _del_KeyTab(gl->bindings);
+#ifdef USE_TERMCAP
+    if(gl->tgetent_buf)
+      free(gl->tgetent_buf);
+    if(gl->tgetstr_buf)
+      free(gl->tgetstr_buf);
+#endif
+    if(gl->file_fp)
+      fclose(gl->file_fp);
+    if(gl->term)
+      free(gl->term);
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+    gl->fd_node_mem = _del_FreeList(NULL, gl->fd_node_mem, 1);
+#endif
+    free(gl);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Bind a control or meta character to an action.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of this program.
+ *  binder    KtBinder    The source of the binding.
+ *  c             char    The control or meta character.
+ *                        If this is '\0', the call is ignored.
+ *  action  const char *  The action name to bind the key to.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    0 - OK.
+ *                        1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_bind_control_char(GetLine *gl, KtBinder binder, char c,
+				const char *action)
+{
+  char keyseq[2];
+/*
+ * Quietly reject binding to the NUL control character, since this
+ * is an ambiguous prefix of all bindings.
+ */
+  if(c == '\0')
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Making sure not to bind characters which aren't either control or
+ * meta characters.
+ */
+  if(IS_CTRL_CHAR(c) || IS_META_CHAR(c)) {
+    keyseq[0] = c;
+    keyseq[1] = '\0';
+  } else {
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * Install the binding.
+ */
+  return _kt_set_keybinding(gl->bindings, binder, keyseq, action);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read a line from the user.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  A resource object returned by new_GetLine().
+ *  prompt      char *  The prompt to prefix the line with.
+ *  start_line  char *  The initial contents of the input line, or NULL
+ *                      if it should start out empty.
+ *  start_pos    int    If start_line isn't NULL, this specifies the
+ *                      index of the character over which the cursor
+ *                      should initially be positioned within the line.
+ *                      If you just want it to follow the last character
+ *                      of the line, send -1.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      char *  An internal buffer containing the input line, or
+ *                      NULL at the end of input. If the line fitted in
+ *                      the buffer there will be a '\n' newline character
+ *                      before the terminating '\0'. If it was truncated
+ *                      there will be no newline character, and the remains
+ *                      of the line should be retrieved via further calls
+ *                      to this function.
+ */
+char *gl_get_line(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt,
+		  const char *start_line, int start_pos)
+{
+  int waserr = 0;    /* True if an error occurs */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl || !prompt) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * If this is the first call to this function since new_GetLine(),
+ * complete any postponed configuration.
+ */
+  if(!gl->configured) {
+    (void) gl_configure_getline(gl, NULL, NULL, TECLA_CONFIG_FILE);
+    gl->configured = 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If input is temporarily being taken from a file, return lines
+ * from the file until the file is exhausted, then revert to
+ * the normal input stream.
+ */
+  if(gl->file_fp) {
+    if(fgets(gl->line, gl->linelen, gl->file_fp))
+      return gl->line;
+    gl_revert_input(gl);
+  };
+/*
+ * Is input coming from a non-interactive source?
+ */
+  if(!gl->is_term)
+    return fgets(gl->line, gl->linelen, gl->input_fp);
+/*
+ * Record the new prompt and its displayed width.
+ */
+  gl_replace_prompt(gl, prompt);
+/*
+ * Before installing our signal handler functions, record the fact
+ * that there are no pending signals.
+ */
+  gl_pending_signal = -1;
+/*
+ * Temporarily override the signal handlers of the calling program,
+ * so that we can intercept signals that would leave the terminal
+ * in a bad state.
+ */
+  waserr = gl_override_signal_handlers(gl);
+/*
+ * After recording the current terminal settings, switch the terminal
+ * into raw input mode.
+ */
+  waserr = waserr || gl_raw_terminal_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * Attempt to read the line.
+ */
+  waserr = waserr || gl_get_input_line(gl, start_line, start_pos);
+/*
+ * Restore terminal settings.
+ */
+  gl_restore_terminal_attributes(gl);
+/*
+ * Restore the signal handlers.
+ */
+  gl_restore_signal_handlers(gl);
+/*
+ * Having restored the program terminal and signal environment,
+ * re-submit any signals that were received.
+ */
+  if(gl_pending_signal != -1) {
+    raise(gl_pending_signal);
+    waserr = 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If gl_get_input_line() aborted input due to the user asking to
+ * temporarily read lines from a file, read the first line from
+ * this file.
+ */
+  if(!waserr && gl->file_fp)
+    return gl_get_line(gl, prompt, NULL, 0);
+/*
+ * Return the new input line.
+ */
+  return waserr ? NULL : gl->line;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Record of the signal handlers of the calling program, so that they
+ * can be restored later.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl    GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int     0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_override_signal_handlers(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  GlSignalNode *sig;   /* A node in the list of signals to be caught */
+/*
+ * Set up our signal handler.
+ */
+  SigAction act;
+  act.sa_handler = gl_signal_handler;
+  sigemptyset(&act.sa_mask);
+  act.sa_flags = 0;
+/*
+ * Get the process signal mask so that we can see which signals the
+ * calling program currently has blocked, and so that we can restore this
+ * mask before returning to the calling program.
+ */
+  if(sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, NULL, &gl->old_signal_set) == -1) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line(): sigprocmask error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Form a new process signal mask from the list of signals that we have
+ * been asked to trap.
+ */
+  sigemptyset(&gl->new_signal_set);
+  for(sig=gl->sigs; sig; sig=sig->next) {
+/*
+ * Trap this signal? If it is blocked by the calling program and we
+ * haven't been told to unblock it, don't arrange to trap this signal.
+ */
+    if(sig->flags & GLS_UNBLOCK_SIG ||
+       !sigismember(&gl->old_signal_set, sig->signo)) {
+      if(sigaddset(&gl->new_signal_set, sig->signo) == -1) {
+	fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line(): sigaddset error: %s\n",
+		strerror(errno));
+	return 1;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Before installing our signal handlers, block all of the signals
+ * that we are going to be trapping.
+ */
+  if(sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &gl->new_signal_set, NULL) == -1) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line(): sigprocmask error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Override the actions of the signals that we are trapping.
+ */
+  for(sig=gl->sigs; sig; sig=sig->next) {
+    if(sigismember(&gl->new_signal_set, sig->signo) &&
+       sigaction(sig->signo, &act, &sig->original)) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line(): sigaction error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Just in case a SIGWINCH signal was sent to the process while our
+ * SIGWINCH signal handler wasn't in place, check to see if the terminal
+ * size needs updating.
+ */
+#ifdef USE_SIGWINCH
+  if(gl_resize_terminal(gl, 0))
+    return 1;
+#endif
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Restore the signal handlers of the calling program.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_restore_signal_handlers(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  GlSignalNode *sig;   /* A node in the list of signals to be caught */
+/*
+ * Restore application signal handlers that were overriden
+ * by gl_override_signal_handlers().
+ */
+  for(sig=gl->sigs; sig; sig=sig->next) {
+    if(sigismember(&gl->new_signal_set, sig->signo) &&
+       sigaction(sig->signo, &sig->original, NULL)) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line(): sigaction error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Restore the original signal mask.
+ */
+  if(sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, &gl->old_signal_set, NULL) == -1) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line(): sigprocmask error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This signal handler simply records the fact that a given signal was
+ * caught in the file-scope gl_pending_signal variable.
+ */
+static void gl_signal_handler(int signo)
+{
+  gl_pending_signal = signo;
+  siglongjmp(gl_setjmp_buffer, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Switch the terminal into raw mode after storing the previous terminal
+ * settings in gl->attributes.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *   The resource object of this program.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int     0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_raw_terminal_mode(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  Termios newattr;   /* The new terminal attributes */
+/*
+ * Record the current terminal attributes.
+ */
+  if(tcgetattr(gl->input_fd, &gl->oldattr)) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "getline(): tcgetattr error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * This function shouldn't do anything but record the current terminal
+ * attritubes if editing has been disabled.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor == GL_NO_EDITOR)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Modify the existing attributes.
+ */
+  newattr = gl->oldattr;
+/*
+ * Turn off local echo, canonical input mode and extended input processing.
+ */
+  newattr.c_lflag &= ~(ECHO | ICANON | IEXTEN);
+/*
+ * Don't translate carriage return to newline, turn off input parity
+ * checking, don't strip off 8th bit, turn off output flow control.
+ */
+  newattr.c_iflag &= ~(ICRNL | INPCK | ISTRIP);
+/*
+ * Clear size bits, turn off parity checking, and allow 8-bit characters.
+ */
+  newattr.c_cflag &= ~(CSIZE | PARENB);
+  newattr.c_cflag |= CS8;
+/*
+ * Turn off output processing.
+ */
+  newattr.c_oflag &= ~(OPOST);
+/*
+ * Request one byte at a time, without waiting.
+ */
+  newattr.c_cc[VMIN] = 1;
+  newattr.c_cc[VTIME] = 0;
+/*
+ * Install the new terminal modes.
+ */
+  while(tcsetattr(gl->input_fd, TCSADRAIN, &newattr)) {
+    if (errno != EINTR) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "getline(): tcsetattr error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Restore the terminal attributes recorded in gl->oldattr.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int     0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_restore_terminal_attributes(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  int waserr = 0;
+/*
+ * Before changing the terminal attributes, make sure that all output
+ * has been passed to the terminal.
+ */
+  if(gl_flush_output(gl))
+    waserr = 1;
+/*
+ * Reset the terminal attributes to the values that they had on
+ * entry to gl_get_line().
+ */
+  while(tcsetattr(gl->input_fd, TCSADRAIN, &gl->oldattr)) {
+    if(errno != EINTR) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "gl_get_line(): tcsetattr error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+      waserr = 1;
+      break;
+    };
+  };
+  return waserr;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read a new input line from the user.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  start_line    char *  The initial contents of the input line, or NULL
+ *                        if it should start out empty.
+ *  start_pos      int    If start_line isn't NULL, this specifies the
+ *                        index of the character over which the cursor
+ *                        should initially be positioned within the line.
+ *                        If you just want it to follow the last character
+ *                        of the line, send -1.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    0 - OK.
+ *                   1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_get_input_line(GetLine *gl, const char *start_line, int start_pos)
+{
+  char c;       /* The character being read */
+/*
+ * Reset the properties of the line.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = 0;
+  gl->buff_curpos = 0;
+  gl->term_curpos = 0;
+  gl->insert_curpos = 0;
+  gl->number = -1;
+  gl->endline = 0;
+  gl->vi.command = 0;
+  gl->vi.undo.line[0] = '\0';
+  gl->vi.undo.ntotal = 0;
+  gl->vi.undo.buff_curpos = 0;
+  gl->vi.repeat.fn = 0;
+  gl->last_signal = -1;
+/*
+ * Reset the history search pointers.
+ */
+  if(_glh_cancel_search(gl->glh))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Draw the prompt at the start of the line.
+ */
+  if(gl_display_prompt(gl))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Present an initial line?
+ */
+  if(start_line) {
+    char *cptr;      /* A pointer into gl->line[] */
+/*
+ * Load the line into the buffer, and display it.
+ */
+    if(start_line != gl->line)
+      strncpy(gl->line, start_line, gl->linelen);
+    gl->line[gl->linelen] = '\0';
+    gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Strip off any trailing newline and carriage return characters.
+ */
+    for(cptr=gl->line + gl->ntotal - 1; cptr >= gl->line &&
+	(*cptr=='\n' || *cptr=='\r'); cptr--,gl->ntotal--)
+      ;
+    if(gl->ntotal < 0)
+      gl->ntotal = 0;
+    gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Display the string that remains.
+ */
+    if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line, '\0'))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Where should the cursor be placed within the line?
+ */
+    if(start_pos < 0 || start_pos > gl->ntotal) {
+      if(gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->ntotal))
+	return 1;
+    } else {
+      if(gl_place_cursor(gl, start_pos))
+	return 1;
+    };
+  } else {
+    gl->line[0] = '\0';
+  };
+/*
+ * Preload a history line?
+ */
+  if(gl->preload_history) {
+    gl->preload_history = 0;
+    if(gl->preload_id) {
+      if(_glh_recall_line(gl->glh, gl->preload_id, gl->line, gl->linelen)) {
+	gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+	gl->buff_curpos = strlen(gl->line);
+      };
+      gl->preload_id = 0;
+    }; 
+    gl_redisplay(gl, 1);
+  };
+/*
+ * Read one character at a time.
+ */
+  while(gl_read_character(gl, &c) == 0) {
+/*
+ * Increment the count of the number of key sequences entered.
+ */
+    gl->keyseq_count++;
+/*
+ * Interpret the character either as the start of a new key-sequence,
+ * as a continuation of a repeat count, or as a printable character
+ * to be added to the line.
+ */
+    if(gl_interpret_char(gl, c))
+      break;
+/*
+ * If we just ran an action function which temporarily asked for
+ * input to be taken from a file, abort this call.
+ */
+    if(gl->file_fp)
+      return 0;
+/*
+ * Has the line been completed?
+ */
+    if(gl->endline)
+      return gl_line_ended(gl, isprint((int)(unsigned char) c) ? c : '\n',
+			   gl->echo && (c=='\n' || c=='\r'));
+  };
+/*
+ * To get here, gl_read_character() must have returned non-zero. See
+ * if this was because a signal was caught that requested that the
+ * current line be returned.
+ */
+  if(gl->endline)
+    return gl_line_ended(gl, '\n', gl->echo);
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Add a character to the line buffer at the current cursor position,
+ * inserting or overwriting according the current mode.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl   GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ *  c       char     The character to be added.
+ * Output:
+ *  return   int     0 - OK.
+ *                   1 - Insufficient room.
+ */
+static int gl_add_char_to_line(GetLine *gl, char c)
+{
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current cursor position.
+ */
+  int buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+  int term_curpos = gl->term_curpos;
+/*
+ * Work out the displayed width of the new character.
+ */
+  int width = gl_displayed_char_width(gl, c, term_curpos);
+/*
+ * If we are in insert mode, or at the end of the line,
+ * check that we can accomodate a new character in the buffer.
+ * If not, simply return, leaving it up to the calling program
+ * to check for the absence of a newline character.
+ */
+  if((gl->insert || buff_curpos >= gl->ntotal) && gl->ntotal >= gl->linelen)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Are we adding characters to the line (ie. inserting or appending)?
+ */
+  if(gl->insert || buff_curpos >= gl->ntotal) {
+/*
+ * If inserting, make room for the new character.
+ */
+    if(buff_curpos < gl->ntotal) {
+      memmove(gl->line + buff_curpos + 1, gl->line + buff_curpos,
+	      gl->ntotal - buff_curpos);
+    };
+/*
+ * Copy the character into the buffer.
+ */
+    gl->line[buff_curpos] = c;
+    gl->buff_curpos++;
+/*
+ * If the line was extended, update the record of the string length
+ * and terminate the extended string.
+ */
+    gl->ntotal++;
+    gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Redraw the line from the cursor position to the end of the line,
+ * and move the cursor to just after the added character.
+ */
+    if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line + buff_curpos, '\0') ||
+       gl_set_term_curpos(gl, term_curpos + width))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Are we overwriting an existing character?
+ */
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Get the widths of the character to be overwritten and the character
+ * that is going to replace it.
+ */
+    int old_width = gl_displayed_char_width(gl, gl->line[buff_curpos],
+					    term_curpos);
+/*
+ * Overwrite the character in the buffer.
+ */
+    gl->line[buff_curpos] = c;
+/*
+ * If we are replacing with a narrower character, we need to
+ * redraw the terminal string to the end of the line, then
+ * overwrite the trailing old_width - width characters
+ * with spaces.
+ */
+    if(old_width > width) {
+      if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line + buff_curpos, '\0'))
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * Clear to the end of the terminal.
+ */
+      if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod))
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * Move the cursor to the end of the new character.
+ */
+      if(gl_set_term_curpos(gl, term_curpos + width))
+	return 1;
+      gl->buff_curpos++;
+/*
+ * If we are replacing with a wider character, then we will be
+ * inserting new characters, and thus extending the line.
+ */
+    } else if(width > old_width) {
+/*
+ * Redraw the line from the cursor position to the end of the line,
+ * and move the cursor to just after the added character.
+ */
+      if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line + buff_curpos, '\0') ||
+	 gl_set_term_curpos(gl, term_curpos + width))
+	return 1;
+      gl->buff_curpos++;
+/*
+ * The original and replacement characters have the same width,
+ * so simply overwrite.
+ */
+    } else {
+/*
+ * Copy the character into the buffer.
+ */
+      gl->line[buff_curpos] = c;
+      gl->buff_curpos++;
+/*
+ * Overwrite the original character.
+ */
+      if(gl_output_char(gl, c, gl->line[gl->buff_curpos]))
+	return 1;
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Insert/append a string to the line buffer and terminal at the current
+ * cursor position.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl   GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ *  s       char *   The string to be added.
+ * Output:
+ *  return   int     0 - OK.
+ *                   1 - Insufficient room.
+ */
+static int gl_add_string_to_line(GetLine *gl, const char *s)
+{
+  int buff_slen;   /* The length of the string being added to line[] */
+  int term_slen;   /* The length of the string being written to the terminal */
+  int buff_curpos; /* The original value of gl->buff_curpos */
+  int term_curpos; /* The original value of gl->term_curpos */
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current cursor position.
+ */
+  buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+  term_curpos = gl->term_curpos;
+/*
+ * How long is the string to be added?
+ */
+  buff_slen = strlen(s);
+  term_slen = gl_displayed_string_width(gl, s, buff_slen, term_curpos);
+/*
+ * Check that we can accomodate the string in the buffer.
+ * If not, simply return, leaving it up to the calling program
+ * to check for the absence of a newline character.
+ */
+  if(gl->ntotal + buff_slen > gl->linelen)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Move the characters that follow the cursor in the buffer by
+ * buff_slen characters to the right.
+ */
+  if(gl->ntotal > gl->buff_curpos) {
+    memmove(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos + buff_slen, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos,
+	    gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos);
+  };
+/*
+ * Copy the string into the buffer.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, s, buff_slen);
+  gl->ntotal += buff_slen;
+  gl->buff_curpos += buff_slen;
+/*
+ * Maintain the buffer properly terminated.
+ */
+  gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Write the modified part of the line to the terminal, then move
+ * the terminal cursor to the end of the displayed input string.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line + buff_curpos, '\0') ||
+     gl_set_term_curpos(gl, term_curpos + term_slen))
+    return 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read a single character from the terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl    GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int     0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Either an I/O error occurred, or a signal was
+ *                        caught who's disposition is to abort gl_get_line()
+ *                        or to have gl_get_line() return the current line
+ *                        as though the user had pressed return. In the
+ *                        latter case gl->endline will be non-zero.
+ */
+static int gl_read_character(GetLine *gl, char *c)
+{
+/*
+ * Before waiting for a new character to be input, flush unwritten
+ * characters to the terminal.
+ */
+  if(gl_flush_output(gl))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * We may have to repeat the read if window change signals are received.
+ */
+  for(;;) {
+/*
+ * If the endline flag becomes set, don't wait for another character.
+ */
+    if(gl->endline)
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Since the code in this function can block, trap signals.
+ */
+    if(sigsetjmp(gl_setjmp_buffer, 1)==0) {
+/*
+ * Unblock the signals that we are trapping.
+ */
+      if(sigprocmask(SIG_UNBLOCK, &gl->new_signal_set, NULL) == -1) {
+	fprintf(stderr, "getline(): sigprocmask error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+	return 1;
+      };
+/*
+ * If select() is available, watch for activity on any file descriptors
+ * that the user has registered, and for data available on the terminal
+ * file descriptor.
+ */
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+      if(gl_event_handler(gl))
+	return 1;
+#endif
+/*
+ * Read one character from the terminal. This could take more
+ * than one call if an interrupt that we aren't trapping is
+ * received.
+ */
+      while(read(gl->input_fd, (void *)c, 1) != 1) {
+	if(errno != EINTR) {
+#ifdef EAGAIN
+	  if(!errno)          /* This can happen with SysV O_NDELAY */
+	    errno = EAGAIN;
+#endif
+	  return 1;
+	};
+      };
+/*
+ * Block all of the signals that we are trapping.
+ */
+      if(sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &gl->new_signal_set, NULL) == -1) {
+	fprintf(stderr, "getline(): sigprocmask error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+	return 1;
+      };
+      return 0;
+    };
+/*
+ * To get here, one of the signals that we are trapping must have
+ * been received. Note that by using sigsetjmp() instead of setjmp()
+ * the signal mask that was blocking these signals will have been
+ * reinstated, so we can be sure that no more of these signals will
+ * be received until we explicitly unblock them again.
+ */
+    if(gl_check_caught_signal(gl))
+      return 1;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function is called to handle signals caught between calls to
+ * sigsetjmp() and siglongjmp().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int     0 - Signal handled internally.
+ *                      1 - Signal requires gl_get_line() to abort.
+ */
+static int gl_check_caught_signal(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  GlSignalNode *sig;      /* The signal disposition */
+  SigAction keep_action;  /* The signal disposition of tecla signal handlers */
+/*
+ * Was no signal caught?
+ */
+  if(gl_pending_signal == -1)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Record the signal that was caught, so that the user can query it later.
+ */
+  gl->last_signal = gl_pending_signal;
+/*
+ * Did we receive a terminal size signal?
+ */
+#ifdef USE_SIGWINCH
+  if(gl_pending_signal == SIGWINCH && gl_resize_terminal(gl, 1))
+    return 1;
+#endif
+/*
+ * Lookup the requested disposition of this signal.
+ */
+  for(sig=gl->sigs; sig && sig->signo != gl_pending_signal; sig=sig->next)
+    ;
+  if(!sig)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Start a fresh line?
+ */
+  if(sig->flags & GLS_RESTORE_LINE) {
+    if(gl_set_term_curpos(gl, gl_buff_curpos_to_term_curpos(gl, gl->ntotal)) ||
+       gl_output_raw_string(gl, "\r\n"))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Restore terminal settings to how they were before gl_get_line() was
+ * called?
+ */
+  if(sig->flags & GLS_RESTORE_TTY)
+    gl_restore_terminal_attributes(gl);
+/*
+ * Restore signal handlers to how they were before gl_get_line() was
+ * called? If this hasn't been requested, only reinstate the signal
+ * handler of the signal that we are handling.
+ */
+  if(sig->flags & GLS_RESTORE_SIG) {
+    gl_restore_signal_handlers(gl);
+  } else {
+    (void) sigaction(sig->signo, &sig->original, &keep_action);
+    (void) sigprocmask(SIG_UNBLOCK, &sig->proc_mask, NULL);
+  };
+/*
+ * Forward the signal to the application's signal handler.
+ */
+  if(!(sig->flags & GLS_DONT_FORWARD))
+    raise(gl_pending_signal);
+  gl_pending_signal = -1;
+/*
+ * Reinstate our signal handlers.
+ */
+  if(sig->flags & GLS_RESTORE_SIG) {
+    gl_override_signal_handlers(gl);
+  } else {
+    (void) sigaction(sig->signo, &keep_action, NULL);
+    (void) sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &sig->proc_mask, NULL);
+  };
+/*
+ * Do we need to reinstate our terminal settings?
+ */
+  if(sig->flags & GLS_RESTORE_TTY)
+    gl_raw_terminal_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * Redraw the line?
+ */
+  if(sig->flags & GLS_REDRAW_LINE && gl_redisplay(gl, 1))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Set errno.
+ */
+  errno = sig->errno_value;
+/*
+ * What next?
+ */
+  switch(sig->after) {
+  case GLS_RETURN:
+    return gl_newline(gl, 1);
+    break;
+  case GLS_ABORT:
+    return 1;
+    break;
+  case GLS_CONTINUE:
+    return 0;
+    break;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Get pertinent terminal control strings and the initial terminal size.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  term      char *  The type of the terminal.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_control_strings(GetLine *gl, const char *term)
+{
+  int bad_term = 0;   /* True if term is unusable */
+/*
+ * Discard any existing control strings from a previous terminal.
+ */
+  gl->left = NULL;
+  gl->right = NULL;
+  gl->up = NULL;
+  gl->down = NULL;
+  gl->home = NULL;
+  gl->bol = 0;
+  gl->clear_eol = NULL;
+  gl->clear_eod = NULL;
+  gl->u_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->d_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->l_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->r_arrow = NULL;
+  gl->sound_bell = NULL;
+  gl->bold = NULL;
+  gl->underline = NULL;
+  gl->standout = NULL;
+  gl->dim = NULL;
+  gl->reverse = NULL;
+  gl->blink = NULL;
+  gl->text_attr_off = NULL;
+  gl->nline = 0;
+  gl->ncolumn = 0;
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+  gl->left_n = NULL;
+  gl->right_n = NULL;
+#endif
+/*
+ * If possible lookup the information in a terminal information
+ * database.
+ */
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+  if(!term || setupterm((char *)term, gl->input_fd, NULL) == ERR) {
+    bad_term = 1;
+  } else {
+    _clr_StringGroup(gl->capmem);
+    gl->left = gl_tigetstr(gl, "cub1");
+    gl->right = gl_tigetstr(gl, "cuf1");
+    gl->up = gl_tigetstr(gl, "cuu1");
+    gl->down = gl_tigetstr(gl, "cud1");
+    gl->home = gl_tigetstr(gl, "home");
+    gl->clear_eol = gl_tigetstr(gl, "el");
+    gl->clear_eod = gl_tigetstr(gl, "ed");
+    gl->u_arrow = gl_tigetstr(gl, "kcuu1");
+    gl->d_arrow = gl_tigetstr(gl, "kcud1");
+    gl->l_arrow = gl_tigetstr(gl, "kcub1");
+    gl->r_arrow = gl_tigetstr(gl, "kcuf1");
+    gl->left_n = gl_tigetstr(gl, "cub");
+    gl->right_n = gl_tigetstr(gl, "cuf");
+    gl->sound_bell = gl_tigetstr(gl, "bel");
+    gl->bold = gl_tigetstr(gl, "bold");
+    gl->underline = gl_tigetstr(gl, "smul");
+    gl->standout = gl_tigetstr(gl, "smso");
+    gl->dim = gl_tigetstr(gl, "dim");
+    gl->reverse = gl_tigetstr(gl, "rev");
+    gl->blink = gl_tigetstr(gl, "blink");
+    gl->text_attr_off = gl_tigetstr(gl, "sgr0");
+  };
+#elif defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+  if(!term || tgetent(gl->tgetent_buf, (char *)term) < 0) {
+    bad_term = 1;
+  } else {
+    char *tgetstr_buf_ptr = gl->tgetstr_buf;
+    _clr_StringGroup(gl->capmem);
+    gl->left = gl_tgetstr(gl, "le", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->right = gl_tgetstr(gl, "nd", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->up = gl_tgetstr(gl, "up", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->down = gl_tgetstr(gl, "do", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->home = gl_tgetstr(gl, "ho", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->clear_eol = gl_tgetstr(gl, "ce", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->clear_eod = gl_tgetstr(gl, "cd", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->u_arrow = gl_tgetstr(gl, "ku", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->d_arrow = gl_tgetstr(gl, "kd", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->l_arrow = gl_tgetstr(gl, "kl", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->r_arrow = gl_tgetstr(gl, "kr", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->sound_bell = gl_tgetstr(gl, "bl", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->bold = gl_tgetstr(gl, "md", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->underline = gl_tgetstr(gl, "us", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->standout = gl_tgetstr(gl, "so", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->dim = gl_tgetstr(gl, "mh", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->reverse = gl_tgetstr(gl, "mr", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->blink = gl_tgetstr(gl, "mb", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+    gl->text_attr_off = gl_tgetstr(gl, "me", &tgetstr_buf_ptr);
+  };
+#endif
+/*
+ * Report term being unusable.
+ */
+  if(bad_term) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Bad terminal type: \"%s\". Will assume vt100.\n",
+	    term ? term : "(null)");
+  };
+/*
+ * Fill in missing information with ANSI VT100 strings.
+ */
+  if(!gl->left)
+    gl->left = "\b";    /* ^H */
+  if(!gl->right)
+    gl->right = GL_ESC_STR "[C";
+  if(!gl->up)
+    gl->up = GL_ESC_STR "[A";
+  if(!gl->down)
+    gl->down = "\n";
+  if(!gl->home)
+    gl->home = GL_ESC_STR "[H";
+  if(!gl->bol)
+    gl->bol = "\r";
+  if(!gl->clear_eol)
+    gl->clear_eol = GL_ESC_STR "[K";
+  if(!gl->clear_eod)
+    gl->clear_eod = GL_ESC_STR "[J";
+  if(!gl->u_arrow)
+    gl->u_arrow = GL_ESC_STR "[A";
+  if(!gl->d_arrow)
+    gl->d_arrow = GL_ESC_STR "[B";
+  if(!gl->l_arrow)
+    gl->l_arrow = GL_ESC_STR "[D";
+  if(!gl->r_arrow)
+    gl->r_arrow = GL_ESC_STR "[C";
+  if(!gl->sound_bell)
+    gl->sound_bell = "\a";
+  if(!gl->bold)
+    gl->bold = GL_ESC_STR "[1m";
+  if(!gl->underline)
+    gl->underline = GL_ESC_STR "[4m";
+  if(!gl->standout)
+    gl->standout = GL_ESC_STR "[1;7m";
+  if(!gl->dim)
+    gl->dim = "";  /* Not available */
+  if(!gl->reverse)
+    gl->reverse = GL_ESC_STR "[7m";
+  if(!gl->blink)
+    gl->blink = GL_ESC_STR "[5m";
+  if(!gl->text_attr_off)
+    gl->text_attr_off = GL_ESC_STR "[m";
+/*
+ * Find out the current terminal size.
+ */
+  (void) gl_terminal_size(gl, GL_DEF_NCOLUMN, GL_DEF_NLINE);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a private function of gl_control_strings() used to look up
+ * a termninal capability string from the terminfo database and make
+ * a private copy of it.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  name    const char *  The name of the terminfo string to look up.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  const char *  The local copy of the capability, or NULL
+ *                        if not available.
+ */
+static const char *gl_tigetstr(GetLine *gl, const char *name)
+{
+  const char *value = tigetstr((char *)name);
+  if(!value || value == (char *) -1)
+    return NULL;
+  return _sg_store_string(gl->capmem, value, 0);
+}
+#elif defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a private function of gl_control_strings() used to look up
+ * a termninal capability string from the termcap database and make
+ * a private copy of it. Note that some emulations of tgetstr(), such
+ * as that used by Solaris, ignores the buffer pointer that is past to
+ * it, so we can't assume that a private copy has been made that won't
+ * be trashed by another call to gl_control_strings() by another
+ * GetLine object. So we make what may be a redundant private copy
+ * of the string in gl->capmem.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  name    const char *  The name of the terminfo string to look up.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  bufptr        char ** On input *bufptr points to the location in
+ *                        gl->tgetstr_buf at which to record the
+ *                        capability string. On output *bufptr is
+ *                        incremented over the stored string.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  const char *  The local copy of the capability, or NULL
+ *                        on error.
+ */
+static const char *gl_tgetstr(GetLine *gl, const char *name, char **bufptr)
+{
+  const char *value = tgetstr((char *)name, bufptr);
+  if(!value || value == (char *) -1)
+    return NULL;
+  return _sg_store_string(gl->capmem, value, 0);
+}
+#endif
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that implements a user interrupt (eg. ^C).
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_user_interrupt)
+{
+  raise(SIGINT);
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that implements the abort signal.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_abort)
+{
+  raise(SIGABRT);
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that sends a suspend signal (eg. ^Z) to the
+ * the parent process.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_suspend)
+{
+  raise(SIGTSTP);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that halts output to the terminal.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_stop_output)
+{
+  tcflow(gl->output_fd, TCOOFF);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that resumes halted terminal output.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_start_output)
+{
+  tcflow(gl->output_fd, TCOON);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that allows the next character to be accepted
+ * without any interpretation as a special character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_literal_next)
+{
+  char c;   /* The character to be added to the line */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Get the character to be inserted literally.
+ */
+  if(gl_read_character(gl, &c))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Add the character to the line 'count' times.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<count; i++)
+    gl_add_char_to_line(gl, c);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the number of characters needed to display a given character
+ * on the screen. Tab characters require eight spaces, and control
+ * characters are represented by a caret followed by the modified
+ * character.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  c           char    The character to be displayed.
+ *  term_curpos  int    The destination terminal location of the character.
+ *                      This is needed because the width of tab characters
+ *                      depends on where they are, relative to the
+ *                      preceding tab stops.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    The number of terminal charaters needed.
+ */
+static int gl_displayed_char_width(GetLine *gl, char c, int term_curpos)
+{
+  if(c=='\t')
+    return TAB_WIDTH - ((term_curpos % gl->ncolumn) % TAB_WIDTH);
+  if(IS_CTRL_CHAR(c))
+    return 2;
+  if(!isprint((int)(unsigned char) c)) {
+    char string[TAB_WIDTH + 4];
+    sprintf(string, "\\%o", (int)(unsigned char)c);
+    return strlen(string);
+  };
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Work out the length of given string of characters on the terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  string      char *  The string to be measured.
+ *  nc           int    The number of characters to be measured, or -1
+ *                      to measure the whole string.
+ *  term_curpos  int    The destination terminal location of the character.
+ *                      This is needed because the width of tab characters
+ *                      depends on where they are, relative to the
+ *                      preceding tab stops.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    The number of displayed characters.
+ */
+static int gl_displayed_string_width(GetLine *gl, const char *string, int nc,
+				     int term_curpos)
+{
+  int slen=0;   /* The displayed number of characters */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * How many characters are to be measured?
+ */
+  if(nc < 0)
+    nc = strlen(string);
+/*
+ * Add up the length of the displayed string.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<nc; i++)
+    slen += gl_displayed_char_width(gl, string[i], term_curpos + slen);
+  return slen;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Write a string directly to the terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *   The resource object of this program.
+ *  string    char *   The string to be written.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int     0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_output_raw_string(GetLine *gl, const char *string)
+{
+  if(gl->echo) {
+    int ndone = 0;   /* The number of characters written so far */
+/*
+ * How long is the string to be written?
+ */
+    int slen = strlen(string);
+/*
+ * Attempt to write the string to the terminal, restarting the
+ * write if a signal is caught.
+ */
+    while(ndone < slen) {
+      int nnew = fwrite(string + ndone, sizeof(char), slen-ndone,
+			gl->output_fp);
+      if(nnew > 0)
+	ndone += nnew;
+      else if(errno != EINTR)
+	return 1;
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Output a terminal control sequence. When using terminfo,
+ * this must be a sequence returned by tgetstr() or tigetstr()
+ * respectively.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ *  nline      int     The number of lines affected by the operation,
+ *                     or 1 if not relevant.
+ *  string    char *   The control sequence to be sent.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int     0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_output_control_sequence(GetLine *gl, int nline,
+				      const char *string)
+{
+  if(gl->echo) {
+#if defined(USE_TERMINFO) || defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+    tputs_fp = gl->output_fp;
+    errno = 0;
+    tputs((char *)string, nline, gl_tputs_putchar);
+    return errno != 0;
+#else
+    return gl_output_raw_string(gl, string);
+#endif
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Move the terminal cursor n characters to the left or right.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *   The resource object of this program.
+ *  n          int     number of positions to the right (> 0) or left (< 0).
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int     0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_terminal_move_cursor(GetLine *gl, int n)
+{
+  int cur_row, cur_col; /* The current terminal row and column index of */
+                        /*  the cursor wrt the start of the input line. */
+  int new_row, new_col; /* The target terminal row and column index of */
+                        /*  the cursor wrt the start of the input line. */
+/*
+ * How far can we move left?
+ */
+  if(gl->term_curpos + n < 0)
+    n = gl->term_curpos;
+/*
+ * Break down the current and target cursor locations into rows and columns.
+ */
+  cur_row = gl->term_curpos / gl->ncolumn;
+  cur_col = gl->term_curpos % gl->ncolumn;
+  new_row = (gl->term_curpos + n) / gl->ncolumn;
+  new_col = (gl->term_curpos + n) % gl->ncolumn;
+/*
+ * Move down to the next line.
+ */
+  for(; cur_row < new_row; cur_row++) {
+    if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->down))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Move up to the previous line.
+ */
+  for(; cur_row > new_row; cur_row--) {
+    if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->up))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Move to the right within the target line?
+ */
+  if(cur_col < new_col) {
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+/*
+ * Use a parameterized control sequence if it generates less control
+ * characters (guess based on ANSI terminal termcap entry).
+ */
+    if(gl->right_n != NULL && new_col - cur_col > 1) {
+      if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, tparm((char *)gl->right_n,
+           (long)(new_col - cur_col), 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l)))
+	return 1;
+    } else
+#endif
+    {
+      for(; cur_col < new_col; cur_col++) {
+        if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->right))
+          return 1;
+      };
+    };
+/*
+ * Move to the left within the target line?
+ */
+  } else if(cur_col > new_col) {
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+/*
+ * Use a parameterized control sequence if it generates less control
+ * characters (guess based on ANSI terminal termcap entry).
+ */
+    if(gl->left_n != NULL && cur_col - new_col > 3) {
+      if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, tparm((char *)gl->left_n,
+           (long)(cur_col - new_col), 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l, 0l)))
+	return 1;
+    } else
+#endif
+    {
+      for(; cur_col > new_col; cur_col--) {
+        if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->left))
+          return 1;
+      };
+    };
+  }
+/*
+ * Update the recorded position of the terminal cursor.
+ */
+  gl->term_curpos += n;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Write a character to the terminal after expanding tabs and control
+ * characters to their multi-character representations.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl    GetLine *   The resource object of this program.
+ *  c        char     The character to be output.
+ *  pad      char     Many terminals have the irritating feature that
+ *                    when one writes a character in the last column of
+ *                    of the terminal, the cursor isn't wrapped to the
+ *                    start of the next line until one more character
+ *                    is written. Some terminals don't do this, so
+ *                    after such a write, we don't know where the
+ *                    terminal is unless we output an extra character.
+ *                    This argument specifies the character to write.
+ *                    If at the end of the input line send '\0' or a
+ *                    space, and a space will be written. Otherwise,
+ *                    pass the next character in the input line
+ *                    following the one being written.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int     0 - OK.
+ */ 
+static int gl_output_char(GetLine *gl, char c, char pad)
+{
+  char string[TAB_WIDTH + 4]; /* A work area for composing compound strings */
+  int nchar;                  /* The number of terminal characters */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check for special characters.
+ */
+  if(c == '\t') {
+/*
+ * How many spaces do we need to represent a tab at the current terminal
+ * column?
+ */
+    nchar = gl_displayed_char_width(gl, '\t', gl->term_curpos);
+/*
+ * Compose the tab string.
+ */
+    for(i=0; i<nchar; i++)
+      string[i] = ' ';
+  } else if(IS_CTRL_CHAR(c)) {
+    string[0] = '^';
+    string[1] = CTRL_TO_CHAR(c);
+    nchar = 2;
+  } else if(!isprint((int)(unsigned char) c)) {
+    sprintf(string, "\\%o", (int)(unsigned char)c);
+    nchar = strlen(string);
+  } else {
+    string[0] = c;
+    nchar = 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Terminate the string.
+ */
+  string[nchar] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Write the string to the terminal.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_raw_string(gl, string))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Except for one exception to be described in a moment, the cursor should
+ * now have been positioned after the character that was just output.
+ */
+  gl->term_curpos += nchar;
+/*
+ * If the new character ended exactly at the end of a line,
+ * most terminals won't move the cursor onto the next line until we
+ * have written a character on the next line, so append an extra
+ * space then move the cursor back.
+ */
+  if(gl->term_curpos % gl->ncolumn == 0) {
+    int term_curpos = gl->term_curpos;
+    if(gl_output_char(gl, pad ? pad : ' ', ' ') ||
+       gl_set_term_curpos(gl, term_curpos))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Write a string to the terminal after expanding tabs and control
+ * characters to their multi-character representations.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl    GetLine *   The resource object of this program.
+ *  string   char *   The string to be output.
+ *  pad      char     Many terminals have the irritating feature that
+ *                    when one writes a character in the last column of
+ *                    of the terminal, the cursor isn't wrapped to the
+ *                    start of the next line until one more character
+ *                    is written. Some terminals don't do this, so
+ *                    after such a write, we don't know where the
+ *                    terminal is unless we output an extra character.
+ *                    This argument specifies the character to write.
+ *                    If at the end of the input line send '\0' or a
+ *                    space, and a space will be written. Otherwise,
+ *                    pass the next character in the input line
+ *                    following the one being written.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int     0 - OK.
+ */
+static int gl_output_string(GetLine *gl, const char *string, char pad)
+{
+  const char *cptr;   /* A pointer into string[] */
+  for(cptr=string; *cptr; cptr++) {
+    char nextc = cptr[1];
+    if(gl_output_char(gl, *cptr, nextc ? nextc : pad))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Given a character position within gl->line[], work out the
+ * corresponding gl->term_curpos position on the terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ *  buff_curpos int     The position within gl->line[].
+ *  
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int     The gl->term_curpos position on the terminal.
+ */
+static int gl_buff_curpos_to_term_curpos(GetLine *gl, int buff_curpos)
+{
+  return gl->prompt_len + gl_displayed_string_width(gl, gl->line, buff_curpos,
+						    gl->prompt_len);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Move the terminal cursor position.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  term_curpos int    The destination terminal cursor position.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_set_term_curpos(GetLine *gl, int term_curpos)
+{
+  return gl_terminal_move_cursor(gl, term_curpos - gl->term_curpos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that moves the buffer cursor one character
+ * left, and updates the terminal cursor to match.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_cursor_left)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos - count);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that moves the buffer cursor one character
+ * right, and updates the terminal cursor to match.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_cursor_right)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos + count);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that toggles between overwrite and insert
+ * mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_insert_mode)
+{
+  gl->insert = !gl->insert;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which moves the cursor to the beginning of
+ * the line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_beginning_of_line)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which moves the cursor to the end of
+ * the line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_end_of_line)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->ntotal);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes the entire contents of the
+ * current line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_line)
+{
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Copy the contents of the line to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  strcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line);
+/*
+ * Clear the buffer.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = 0;
+  gl->line[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Move the terminal cursor to just after the prompt.
+ */
+  if(gl_place_cursor(gl, 0))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Clear from the end of the prompt to the end of the terminal.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod))
+    return 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes all characters between the
+ * current cursor position and the end of the line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_kill_line)
+{
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Copy the part of the line that is about to be deleted to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  strcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos);
+/*
+ * Terminate the buffered line at the current cursor position.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = gl->buff_curpos;
+  gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Clear the part of the line that follows the cursor.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Explicitly reset the cursor position to allow vi command mode
+ * constraints on its position to be set.
+ */
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes all characters between the
+ * start of the line and the current cursor position.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_kill_line)
+{
+/*
+ * How many characters are to be deleted from before the cursor?
+ */
+  int nc = gl->buff_curpos - gl->insert_curpos;
+  if (!nc)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Move the cursor to the start of the line, or in vi input mode,
+ * the start of the sub-line at which insertion started, and delete
+ * up to the old cursor position.
+ */
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->insert_curpos) ||
+         gl_delete_chars(gl, nc, gl->editor == GL_EMACS_MODE || gl->vi.command);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which moves the cursor forward by a word.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_word)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl_nth_word_end_forward(gl, count) +
+			 (gl->editor==GL_EMACS_MODE));
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which moves the cursor forward to the start
+ * of the next word.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_to_word)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl_nth_word_start_forward(gl, count));
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which moves the cursor backward by a word.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_word)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl_nth_word_start_backward(gl, count));
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete one or more characters, starting with the one under the cursor.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  nc         int    The number of characters to delete.
+ *  cut        int    If true, copy the characters to the cut buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_delete_chars(GetLine *gl, int nc, int cut)
+{
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * If there are fewer than nc characters following the cursor, limit
+ * nc to the number available.
+ */
+  if(gl->buff_curpos + nc > gl->ntotal)
+    nc = gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Copy the about to be deleted region to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  if(cut) {
+    memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, nc);
+    gl->cutbuf[nc] = '\0';
+  }
+/*
+ * Nothing to delete?
+ */
+  if(nc <= 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * In vi overwrite mode, restore any previously overwritten characters
+ * from the undo buffer.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor == GL_VI_MODE && !gl->vi.command && !gl->insert) {
+/*
+ * How many of the characters being deleted can be restored from the
+ * undo buffer?
+ */
+    int nrestore = gl->buff_curpos + nc <= gl->vi.undo.ntotal ?
+      nc : gl->vi.undo.ntotal - gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Restore any available characters.
+ */
+    if(nrestore > 0)
+      memcpy(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, gl->vi.undo.line + gl->buff_curpos,
+             nrestore);
+/*
+ * If their were insufficient characters in the undo buffer, then this
+ * implies that we are deleting from the end of the line, so we need
+ * to terminate the line either where the undo buffer ran out, or if
+ * we are deleting from beyond the end of the undo buffer, at the current
+ * cursor position.
+ */
+    if(nc != nrestore) {
+      gl->ntotal = gl->vi.undo.ntotal > gl->buff_curpos ? gl->vi.undo.ntotal :
+	gl->buff_curpos;
+      gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+    };
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Copy the remaining part of the line back over the deleted characters.
+ */
+    memmove(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos + nc,
+	    gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos - nc + 1);
+    gl->ntotal -= nc;
+  };
+/*
+ * Redraw the remaining characters following the cursor.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, '\0'))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Clear to the end of the terminal.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Place the cursor at the start of where the deletion was performed.
+ */
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes character(s) under the
+ * cursor without moving the cursor.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_char)
+{
+/*
+ * Delete 'count' characters.
+ */
+  return gl_delete_chars(gl, count, gl->vi.command);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes character(s) under the
+ * cursor and moves the cursor back one character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_char)
+{
+/*
+ * Restrict the deletion count to the number of characters that
+ * precede the insertion point.
+ */
+  if(count > gl->buff_curpos - gl->insert_curpos)
+    count = gl->buff_curpos - gl->insert_curpos;
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+  return gl_cursor_left(gl, count) ||
+    gl_delete_chars(gl, count, gl->vi.command);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position delete to the specified column.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_to_column)
+{
+  if (--count >= gl->buff_curpos)
+    return gl_forward_delete_char(gl, count - gl->buff_curpos);
+  else
+    return gl_backward_delete_char(gl, gl->buff_curpos - count);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position delete characters to a matching
+ * parenthesis.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_to_parenthesis)
+{
+  int curpos = gl_index_of_matching_paren(gl);
+  if(curpos >= 0) {
+    gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+    if(curpos >= gl->buff_curpos)
+      return gl_forward_delete_char(gl, curpos - gl->buff_curpos + 1);
+    else
+      return gl_backward_delete_char(gl, ++gl->buff_curpos - curpos + 1);
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes from the cursor to the end
+ * of the word that the cursor is either in or precedes.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_word)
+{
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * In emacs mode delete to the end of the word. In vi mode delete to the
+ * start of the net word.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor == GL_EMACS_MODE) {
+    return gl_delete_chars(gl,
+		gl_nth_word_end_forward(gl,count) - gl->buff_curpos + 1, 1);
+  } else {
+    return gl_delete_chars(gl,
+		gl_nth_word_start_forward(gl,count) - gl->buff_curpos,
+		gl->vi.command);
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes the word that precedes the
+ * cursor.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_word)
+{
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current cursor position.
+ */
+  int buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Move back 'count' words.
+ */
+  if(gl_backward_word(gl, count))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Delete from the new cursor position to the original one.
+ */
+  return gl_delete_chars(gl, buff_curpos - gl->buff_curpos,
+  			 gl->editor == GL_EMACS_MODE || gl->vi.command);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Searching in a given direction, delete to the count'th
+ * instance of a specified or queried character, in the input line.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  count        int    The number of times to search.
+ *  c           char    The character to be searched for, or '\0' if
+ *                      the character should be read from the user.
+ *  forward      int    True if searching forward.
+ *  onto         int    True if the search should end on top of the
+ *                      character, false if the search should stop
+ *                      one character before the character in the
+ *                      specified search direction.
+ *  change       int    If true, this function is being called upon
+ *                      to do a vi change command, in which case the
+ *                      user will be left in insert mode after the
+ *                      deletion.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_delete_find(GetLine *gl, int count, char c, int forward,
+			  int onto, int change)
+{
+/*
+ * Search for the character, and abort the deletion if not found.
+ */
+  int pos = gl_find_char(gl, count, forward, onto, c);
+  if(pos < 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Allow the cursor to be at the end of the line if this is a change
+ * command.
+ */
+  if(change)
+    gl->vi.command = 0;
+/*
+ * Delete the appropriate span of characters.
+ */
+  if(forward) {
+    if(gl_delete_chars(gl, pos - gl->buff_curpos + 1, 1))
+      return 1;
+  } else {
+    int buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+    if(gl_place_cursor(gl, pos) ||
+       gl_delete_chars(gl, buff_curpos - gl->buff_curpos, 1))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If this is a change operation, switch the insert mode.
+ */
+  if(change && gl_vi_insert(gl, 0))
+    return 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes forward from the cursor up to and
+ * including a specified character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_find)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 1, 1, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes backward from the cursor back to
+ * and including a specified character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_find)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 0, 1, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes forward from the cursor up to but
+ * not including a specified character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_delete_to)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 1, 0, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes backward from the cursor back to
+ * but not including a specified character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_delete_to)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 0, 0, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes to a character specified by a
+ * previous search.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_refind)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, gl->vi.find_char, gl->vi.find_forward,
+			gl->vi.find_onto, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes to a character specified by a
+ * previous search, but in the opposite direction.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_delete_invert_refind)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, gl->vi.find_char,
+			!gl->vi.find_forward, gl->vi.find_onto, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which converts the characters in the word
+ * following the cursor to upper case.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_upcase_word)
+{
+/*
+ * Locate the count'th word ending after the cursor.
+ */
+  int last = gl_nth_word_end_forward(gl, count);
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Upcase characters from the current cursor position to 'last'.
+ */
+  while(gl->buff_curpos <= last) {
+    char *cptr = gl->line + gl->buff_curpos++;
+/*
+ * Convert the character to upper case?
+ */
+    if(islower((int)(unsigned char) *cptr))
+      *cptr = toupper((int) *cptr);
+/*
+ * Write the possibly modified character back. Note that for non-modified
+ * characters we want to do this as well, so as to advance the cursor.
+ */
+    if(gl_output_char(gl, *cptr, cptr[1]))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);	/* bounds check */
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which converts the characters in the word
+ * following the cursor to lower case.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_downcase_word)
+{
+/*
+ * Locate the count'th word ending after the cursor.
+ */
+  int last = gl_nth_word_end_forward(gl, count);
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Upcase characters from the current cursor position to 'last'.
+ */
+  while(gl->buff_curpos <= last) {
+    char *cptr = gl->line + gl->buff_curpos++;
+/*
+ * Convert the character to upper case?
+ */
+    if(isupper((int)(unsigned char) *cptr))
+      *cptr = tolower((int) *cptr);
+/*
+ * Write the possibly modified character back. Note that for non-modified
+ * characters we want to do this as well, so as to advance the cursor.
+ */
+    if(gl_output_char(gl, *cptr, cptr[1]))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);	/* bounds check */
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which converts the first character of the
+ * following word to upper case, in order to capitalize the word, and
+ * leaves the cursor at the end of the word.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_capitalize_word)
+{
+  char *cptr;   /* &gl->line[gl->buff_curpos] */
+  int first;    /* True for the first letter of the word */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current insert mode and the cursor position.
+ */
+  int insert = gl->insert;
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * We want to overwrite the modified word.
+ */
+  gl->insert = 0;
+/*
+ * Capitalize 'count' words.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<count && gl->buff_curpos < gl->ntotal; i++) {
+    int pos = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * If we are not already within a word, skip to the start of the word.
+ */
+    for(cptr = gl->line + pos ; pos<gl->ntotal && !gl_is_word_char((int) *cptr);
+	pos++, cptr++)
+      ;
+/*
+ * Move the cursor to the new position.
+ */
+    if(gl_place_cursor(gl, pos))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * While searching for the end of the word, change lower case letters
+ * to upper case.
+ */
+    for(first=1; gl->buff_curpos<gl->ntotal && gl_is_word_char((int) *cptr);
+	gl->buff_curpos++, cptr++) {
+/*
+ * Convert the character to upper case?
+ */
+      if(first) {
+	if(islower((int)(unsigned char) *cptr))
+	  *cptr = toupper((int) *cptr);
+      } else {
+	if(isupper((int)(unsigned char) *cptr))
+	  *cptr = tolower((int) *cptr);
+      };
+      first = 0;
+/*
+ * Write the possibly modified character back. Note that for non-modified
+ * characters we want to do this as well, so as to advance the cursor.
+ */
+      if(gl_output_char(gl, *cptr, cptr[1]))
+	return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Restore the insertion mode.
+ */
+  gl->insert = insert;
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);	/* bounds check */
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which redraws the current line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_redisplay)
+{
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current cursor position.
+ */
+  int buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Move the cursor to the start of the terminal line, and clear from there
+ * to the end of the display.
+ */
+  if(gl_set_term_curpos(gl, 0) ||
+     gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Display the current prompt.
+ */
+  if(gl_display_prompt(gl))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Render the part of the line that the user has typed in so far.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line, '\0'))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Restore the cursor position.
+ */
+  if(gl_place_cursor(gl, buff_curpos))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Flush the redisplayed line to the terminal.
+ */
+  return gl_flush_output(gl);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which clears the display and redraws the
+ * input line from the home position.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_clear_screen)
+{
+/*
+ * Record the current cursor position.
+ */
+  int buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Home the cursor and clear from there to the end of the display.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->home) ||
+     gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Redisplay the line.
+ */
+  gl->term_curpos = 0;
+  gl->buff_curpos = 0;
+  if(gl_redisplay(gl,1))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Restore the cursor position.
+ */
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, buff_curpos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which swaps the character under the cursor
+ * with the character to the left of the cursor.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_transpose_chars)
+{
+  char from[3];     /* The original string of 2 characters */
+  char swap[3];     /* The swapped string of two characters */
+/*
+ * If we are at the beginning or end of the line, there aren't two
+ * characters to swap.
+ */
+  if(gl->buff_curpos < 1 || gl->buff_curpos >= gl->ntotal)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Get the original and swapped strings of the two characters.
+ */
+  from[0] = gl->line[gl->buff_curpos - 1];
+  from[1] = gl->line[gl->buff_curpos];
+  from[2] = '\0';
+  swap[0] = gl->line[gl->buff_curpos];
+  swap[1] = gl->line[gl->buff_curpos - 1];
+  swap[2] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Move the cursor to the start of the two characters.
+ */
+  if(gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos-1))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Swap the two characters in the buffer.
+ */
+  gl->line[gl->buff_curpos] = swap[0];
+  gl->line[gl->buff_curpos+1] = swap[1];
+/*
+ * If the sum of the displayed width of the two characters
+ * in their current and final positions is the same, swapping can
+ * be done by just overwriting with the two swapped characters.
+ */
+  if(gl_displayed_string_width(gl, from, -1, gl->term_curpos) ==
+     gl_displayed_string_width(gl, swap, -1, gl->term_curpos)) {
+    int insert = gl->insert;
+    gl->insert = 0;
+    if(gl_output_char(gl, swap[0], swap[1]) ||
+       gl_output_char(gl, swap[1], gl->line[gl->buff_curpos+2]))
+      return 1;
+    gl->insert = insert;
+/*
+ * If the swapped substring has a different displayed size, we need to
+ * redraw everything after the first of the characters.
+ */
+  } else {
+    if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, '\0') ||
+       gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Advance the cursor to the character after the swapped pair.
+ */
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos + 2);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which sets a mark at the current cursor
+ * location.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_set_mark)
+{
+  gl->buff_mark = gl->buff_curpos;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which swaps the mark location for the
+ * cursor location.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_exchange_point_and_mark)
+{
+/*
+ * Get the old mark position, and limit to the extent of the input
+ * line.
+ */
+  int old_mark = gl->buff_mark <= gl->ntotal ? gl->buff_mark : gl->ntotal;
+/*
+ * Make the current cursor position the new mark.
+ */
+  gl->buff_mark = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Move the cursor to the old mark position.
+ */
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, old_mark);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes the characters between the
+ * mark and the cursor, recording them in gl->cutbuf for later pasting.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_kill_region)
+{
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Limit the mark to be within the line.
+ */
+  if(gl->buff_mark > gl->ntotal)
+    gl->buff_mark = gl->ntotal;
+/*
+ * If there are no characters between the cursor and the mark, simply clear
+ * the cut buffer.
+ */
+  if(gl->buff_mark == gl->buff_curpos) {
+    gl->cutbuf[0] = '\0';
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the mark is before the cursor, swap the cursor and the mark.
+ */
+  if(gl->buff_mark < gl->buff_curpos && gl_exchange_point_and_mark(gl,1))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Delete the characters.
+ */
+  if(gl_delete_chars(gl, gl->buff_mark - gl->buff_curpos, 1))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Make the mark the same as the cursor position.
+ */
+  gl->buff_mark = gl->buff_curpos;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which records the characters between the
+ * mark and the cursor, in gl->cutbuf for later pasting.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_region_as_kill)
+{
+  int ca, cb;  /* The indexes of the first and last characters in the region */
+  int mark;    /* The position of the mark */
+/*
+ * Get the position of the mark, limiting it to lie within the line.
+ */
+  mark = gl->buff_mark > gl->ntotal ? gl->ntotal : gl->buff_mark;
+/*
+ * If there are no characters between the cursor and the mark, clear
+ * the cut buffer.
+ */
+  if(mark == gl->buff_curpos) {
+    gl->cutbuf[0] = '\0';
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the line indexes of the first and last characters in the region.
+ */
+  if(mark < gl->buff_curpos) {
+    ca = mark;
+    cb = gl->buff_curpos - 1;
+  } else {
+    ca = gl->buff_curpos;
+    cb = mark - 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Copy the region to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + ca, cb + 1 - ca);
+  gl->cutbuf[cb + 1 - ca] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which inserts the contents of the cut
+ * buffer at the current cursor location.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_yank)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Set the mark at the current location.
+ */
+  gl->buff_mark = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Do nothing else if the cut buffer is empty.
+ */
+  if(gl->cutbuf[0] == '\0')
+    return gl_ring_bell(gl, 1);
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Insert the string count times.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<count; i++) {
+    if(gl_add_string_to_line(gl, gl->cutbuf))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * gl_add_string_to_line() leaves the cursor after the last character that
+ * was pasted, whereas vi leaves the cursor over the last character pasted.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor == GL_VI_MODE && gl_cursor_left(gl, 1))
+    return 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which inserts the contents of the cut
+ * buffer one character beyond the current cursor location.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_append_yank)
+{
+  int was_command = gl->vi.command;
+  int i;
+/*
+ * If the cut buffer is empty, ring the terminal bell.
+ */
+  if(gl->cutbuf[0] == '\0')
+    return gl_ring_bell(gl, 1);
+/*
+ * Set the mark at the current location + 1.
+ */
+  gl->buff_mark = gl->buff_curpos + 1;
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Arrange to paste the text in insert mode after the current character.
+ */
+  if(gl_vi_append(gl, 0))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Insert the string count times.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<count; i++) {
+    if(gl_add_string_to_line(gl, gl->cutbuf))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Switch back to command mode if necessary.
+ */
+  if(was_command)
+    gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+#ifdef USE_SIGWINCH
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Respond to the receipt of a window change signal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  redisplay  int    If true redisplay the current line after
+ *                    getting the new window size.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_resize_terminal(GetLine *gl, int redisplay)
+{
+  int lines_used;       /* The number of lines currently in use */
+  struct winsize size;  /* The new size information */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Record the fact that the sigwinch signal has been noted.
+ */
+  if(gl_pending_signal == SIGWINCH)
+    gl_pending_signal = -1;
+/*
+ * Query the new terminal window size. Ignore invalid responses.
+ */
+  if(ioctl(gl->output_fd, TIOCGWINSZ, &size) == 0 &&
+     size.ws_row > 0 && size.ws_col > 0) {
+/*
+ * Redisplay the input line?
+ */
+    if(redisplay) {
+/*
+ * How many lines are currently displayed.
+ */
+      lines_used = (gl_displayed_string_width(gl,gl->line,-1,gl->prompt_len) +
+		    gl->prompt_len + gl->ncolumn - 1) / gl->ncolumn;
+/*
+ * Move to the cursor to the start of the line.
+ */
+      for(i=1; i<lines_used; i++) {
+	if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->up))
+	  return 1;
+      };
+      if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->bol))
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * Clear to the end of the terminal.
+ */
+      if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, size.ws_row, gl->clear_eod))
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * Record the fact that the cursor is now at the beginning of the line.
+ */
+      gl->term_curpos = 0;
+    };
+/*
+ * Update the recorded window size.
+ */
+    gl->nline = size.ws_row;
+    gl->ncolumn = size.ws_col;
+  };
+/*
+ * Redisplay the line?
+ */
+  return redisplay ? gl_redisplay(gl,1) : 0;
+}
+#endif
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that recalls the previous line in the
+ * history buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_up_history)
+{
+/*
+ * In vi mode, switch to command mode, since the user is very
+ * likely to want to move around newly recalled lines.
+ */
+  gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * Forget any previous recall session.
+ */
+  gl->preload_id = 0;
+/*
+ * We don't want a search prefix for this function.
+ */
+  if(_glh_search_prefix(gl->glh, gl->line, 0))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Recall the count'th next older line in the history list. If the first one
+ * fails we can return since nothing has changed otherwise we must continue
+ * and update the line state.
+ */
+  if(_glh_find_backwards(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen) == NULL)
+    return 0;
+  while(--count && _glh_find_backwards(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen))
+    ;
+/*
+ * Record the number of characters in the new string.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Arrange to have the cursor placed at the end of the new line.
+ */
+  gl->buff_curpos = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Erase and display the new line.
+ */
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that recalls the next line in the
+ * history buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_down_history)
+{
+/*
+ * In vi mode, switch to command mode, since the user is very
+ * likely to want to move around newly recalled lines.
+ */
+  gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * If no search is currently in progress continue a previous recall
+ * session from a previous entered line if possible.
+ */
+  if(_glh_line_id(gl->glh, 0) == 0 && gl->preload_id) {
+    _glh_recall_line(gl->glh, gl->preload_id, gl->line, gl->linelen);
+    gl->preload_id = 0;
+  } else {
+/*
+ * We don't want a search prefix for this function.
+ */
+    if(_glh_search_prefix(gl->glh, gl->line, 0))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Recall the count'th next newer line in the history list. If the first one
+ * fails we can return since nothing has changed otherwise we must continue
+ * and update the line state.
+ */
+    if(_glh_find_forwards(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen) == NULL)
+      return 0;
+    while(--count && _glh_find_forwards(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen))
+      ;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the number of characters in the new string.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Arrange to have the cursor placed at the end of the new line.
+ */
+  gl->buff_curpos = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Erase and display the new line.
+ */
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that recalls the previous line in the
+ * history buffer whos prefix matches the characters that currently
+ * precede the cursor. By setting count=-1, this can be used internally
+ * to force searching for the prefix used in the last search.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_search_backward)
+{
+/*
+ * In vi mode, switch to command mode, since the user is very
+ * likely to want to move around newly recalled lines.
+ */
+  gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * Forget any previous recall session.
+ */
+  gl->preload_id = 0;
+/*
+ * If the previous thing that the user did wasn't to execute a history
+ * search function, set the search prefix equal to the string that
+ * precedes the cursor. In vi command mode include the character that
+ * is under the cursor in the string. If count<0 force a repeat search
+ * even if the last command wasn't a history command.
+ */
+  if(gl->last_search != gl->keyseq_count - 1 && count>=0 &&
+     _glh_search_prefix(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->buff_curpos +
+			(gl->editor==GL_VI_MODE && gl->ntotal>0)))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Record the key sequence number in which this search function is
+ * being executed, so that the next call to this function or
+ * gl_history_search_forward() knows if any other operations
+ * were performed in between.
+ */
+  gl->last_search = gl->keyseq_count;
+/*
+ * Search backwards for a match to the part of the line which precedes the
+ * cursor.
+ */
+  if(_glh_find_backwards(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen) == NULL)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Record the number of characters in the new string.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Arrange to have the cursor placed at the end of the new line.
+ */
+  gl->buff_curpos = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Erase and display the new line.
+ */
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that recalls the previous line in the
+ * history buffer who's prefix matches that specified in an earlier call
+ * to gl_history_search_backward() or gl_history_search_forward().
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_re_search_backward)
+{
+  return gl_history_search_backward(gl, -1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that recalls the next line in the
+ * history buffer who's prefix matches that specified in the earlier call
+ * to gl_history_search_backward) which started the history search.
+ * By setting count=-1, this can be used internally to force searching
+ * for the prefix used in the last search.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_search_forward)
+{
+/*
+ * In vi mode, switch to command mode, since the user is very
+ * likely to want to move around newly recalled lines.
+ */
+  gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * If the previous thing that the user did wasn't to execute a history
+ * search function, set the search prefix equal to the string that
+ * precedes the cursor. In vi command mode include the character that
+ * is under the cursor in the string. If count<0 force a repeat search
+ * even if the last command wasn't a history command.
+ */
+  if(gl->last_search != gl->keyseq_count - 1 && count>=0 &&
+     _glh_search_prefix(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->buff_curpos +
+			(gl->editor==GL_VI_MODE && gl->ntotal>0)))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Record the key sequence number in which this search function is
+ * being executed, so that the next call to this function or
+ * gl_history_search_backward() knows if any other operations
+ * were performed in between.
+ */
+  gl->last_search = gl->keyseq_count;
+/*
+ * Search forwards for the next matching line.
+ */
+  if(_glh_find_forwards(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen) == NULL)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Record the number of characters in the new string.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Arrange for the cursor to be placed at the end of the new line.
+ */
+  gl->buff_curpos = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Erase and display the new line.
+ */
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that recalls the next line in the
+ * history buffer who's prefix matches that specified in an earlier call
+ * to gl_history_search_backward() or gl_history_search_forward().
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_history_re_search_forward)
+{
+  return gl_history_search_forward(gl, -1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the tab completion function that completes the filename that
+ * precedes the cursor position.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_complete_word)
+{
+  CplMatches *matches;    /* The possible completions */
+  int redisplay=0;        /* True if the whole line needs to be redrawn */
+  int suffix_len;         /* The length of the completion extension */
+  int cont_len;           /* The length of any continuation suffix */
+  int nextra;             /* The number of characters being added to the */
+                          /*  total length of the line. */
+  int buff_pos;           /* The buffer index at which the completion is */
+                          /*  to be inserted. */
+/*
+ * In vi command mode, switch to append mode so that the character below
+ * the character is included in the completion (otherwise people can't
+ * complete at the end of the line).
+ */
+  if(gl->vi.command && gl_vi_append(gl, 0))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Get the cursor position at which the completion is to be inserted.
+ */
+  buff_pos = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Perform the completion.
+ */
+  matches = cpl_complete_word(gl->cpl, gl->line, gl->buff_curpos, gl->cpl_data,
+			      gl->cpl_fn);
+  if(!matches) {
+    if(gl->echo &&
+       fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n%s\n", cpl_last_error(gl->cpl)) < 0)
+      return 1;
+    gl->term_curpos = 0;
+    redisplay = 1;
+/*
+ * Are there any completions?
+ */
+  } else if(matches->nmatch >= 1) {
+/*
+ * If there any ambiguous matches, report them, starting on a new line.
+ */
+    if(matches->nmatch > 1 && gl->echo) {
+      if(fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n") < 0)
+	return 1;
+      cpl_list_completions(matches, gl->output_fp, gl->ncolumn);
+      redisplay = 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * If the callback called gl_change_prompt(), we will need to redisplay
+ * the whole line.
+ */
+    if(gl->prompt_changed)
+      redisplay = 1;
+/*
+ * Get the length of the suffix and any continuation suffix to add to it.
+ */
+    suffix_len = strlen(matches->suffix);
+    cont_len = strlen(matches->cont_suffix);
+/*
+ * If there is an unambiguous match, and the continuation suffix ends in
+ * a newline, strip that newline and arrange to have getline return
+ * after this action function returns.
+ */
+    if(matches->nmatch==1 && cont_len > 0 &&
+       matches->cont_suffix[cont_len - 1] == '\n') {
+      cont_len--;
+      if(gl_newline(gl, 1))
+	return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Work out the number of characters that are to be added.
+ */
+    nextra = suffix_len + cont_len;
+/*
+ * Is there anything to be added?
+ */
+    if(nextra) {
+/*
+ * Will there be space for the expansion in the line buffer?
+ */
+      if(gl->ntotal + nextra < gl->linelen) {
+/*
+ * Make room to insert the filename extension.
+ */
+	memmove(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos + nextra, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos,
+		gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos);
+/*
+ * Insert the filename extension.
+ */
+	memcpy(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, matches->suffix, suffix_len);
+/*
+ * Add the terminating characters.
+ */
+	memcpy(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos + suffix_len, matches->cont_suffix,
+	       cont_len);
+/*
+ * Record the increased length of the line.
+ */
+	gl->ntotal += nextra;
+/*
+ * Place the cursor position at the end of the completion.
+ */
+	gl->buff_curpos += nextra;
+/*
+ * Terminate the extended line.
+ */
+	gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+/*
+ * If we don't have to redisplay the whole line, redisplay the part
+ * of the line which follows the original cursor position, and place
+ * the cursor at the end of the completion.
+ */
+	if(!redisplay) {
+	  if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod) ||
+	     gl_output_string(gl, gl->line + buff_pos, '\0') ||
+	     gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos))
+	    return 1;
+	};
+      } else {
+	fprintf(stderr,
+		"\r\nInsufficient room in line for file completion.\r\n");
+	redisplay = 1;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Redisplay the whole line?
+ */
+  if(redisplay) {
+    gl->term_curpos = 0;
+    if(gl_redisplay(gl,1))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the function that expands the filename that precedes the
+ * cursor position. It expands ~user/ expressions, $envvar expressions,
+ * and wildcards.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_expand_filename)
+{
+  char *start_path;      /* The pointer to the start of the pathname in */
+                         /*  gl->line[]. */
+  FileExpansion *result; /* The results of the filename expansion */
+  int pathlen;           /* The length of the pathname being expanded */
+  int redisplay=0;       /* True if the whole line needs to be redrawn */
+  int length;            /* The number of characters needed to display the */
+                         /*  expanded files. */
+  int nextra;            /* The number of characters to be added */
+  int i,j;
+/*
+ * In vi command mode, switch to append mode so that the character below
+ * the character is included in the completion (otherwise people can't
+ * complete at the end of the line).
+ */
+  if(gl->vi.command && gl_vi_append(gl, 0))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Locate the start of the filename that precedes the cursor position.
+ */
+  start_path = _pu_start_of_path(gl->line,
+				 gl->buff_curpos > 0 ? gl->buff_curpos : 0);
+  if(!start_path)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Get the length of the string that is to be expanded.
+ */
+  pathlen = gl->buff_curpos - (start_path - gl->line);
+/*
+ * Attempt to expand it.
+ */
+  result = ef_expand_file(gl->ef, start_path, pathlen);
+/*
+ * If there was an error, report the error on a new line, then redraw
+ * the original line.
+ */
+  if(!result) {
+    if(gl->echo &&
+       fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n%s\n", ef_last_error(gl->ef)) < 0)
+      return 1;
+    gl->term_curpos = 0;
+    return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+  };
+/*
+ * If no files matched, report this as well.
+ */
+  if(result->nfile == 0 || !result->exists) {
+    if(gl->echo && fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\nNo files match.\n") < 0)
+      return 1;
+    gl->term_curpos = 0;
+    return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+  };
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential use by
+ * vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Work out how much space we will need to display all of the matching
+ * filenames, taking account of the space that we need to place between
+ * them, and the number of additional '\' characters needed to escape
+ * spaces, tabs and backslash characters in the individual filenames.
+ */
+  length = 0;
+  for(i=0; i<result->nfile; i++) {
+    char *file = result->files[i];
+    while(*file) {
+      int c = *file++;
+      switch(c) {
+      case ' ': case '\t': case '\\': case '*': case '?': case '[':
+	length++;  /* Count extra backslash characters */
+      };
+      length++;    /* Count the character itself */
+    };
+    length++;      /* Count the space that follows each filename */
+  };
+/*
+ * Work out the number of characters that are to be added.
+ */
+  nextra = length - pathlen;
+/*
+ * Will there be space for the expansion in the line buffer?
+ */
+  if(gl->ntotal + nextra >= gl->linelen) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "\r\nInsufficient room in line for file expansion.\r\n");
+    redisplay = 1;
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Do we need to move the part of the line that followed the unexpanded
+ * filename?
+ */
+    if(nextra != 0) {
+      memmove(gl->line + gl->buff_curpos + nextra, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos,
+	      gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos);
+    };
+/*
+ * Insert the filenames, separated by spaces, and with internal spaces,
+ * tabs and backslashes escaped with backslashes.
+ */
+    for(i=0,j=start_path - gl->line; i<result->nfile; i++) {
+      char *file = result->files[i];
+      while(*file) {
+	int c = *file++;
+	switch(c) {
+	case ' ': case '\t': case '\\': case '*': case '?': case '[':
+	  gl->line[j++] = '\\';
+	};
+	gl->line[j++] = c;
+      };
+      gl->line[j++] = ' ';
+    };
+/*
+ * Record the increased length of the line.
+ */
+    gl->ntotal += nextra;
+/*
+ * Place the cursor position at the end of the expansion.
+ */
+    gl->buff_curpos += nextra;
+/*
+ * Terminate the extended line.
+ */
+    gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+  };
+/*
+ * Display the whole line on a new line?
+ */
+  if(redisplay) {
+    gl->term_curpos = 0;
+    return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+  };
+/*
+ * Otherwise redisplay the part of the line which follows the start of
+ * the original filename.
+ */
+  if(gl_set_term_curpos(gl, gl_buff_curpos_to_term_curpos(gl, start_path - gl->line)) ||
+     gl_output_control_sequence(gl, gl->nline, gl->clear_eod) ||
+     gl_output_string(gl, start_path, gl->line[gl->buff_curpos]))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Restore the cursor position to the end of the expansion.
+ */
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that lists glob expansions of the
+ * filename that precedes the cursor position. It expands ~user/
+ * expressions, $envvar expressions, and wildcards.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_list_glob)
+{
+  char *start_path;      /* The pointer to the start of the pathname in */
+                         /*  gl->line[]. */
+  FileExpansion *result; /* The results of the filename expansion */
+  int pathlen;           /* The length of the pathname being expanded */
+/*
+ * Locate the start of the filename that precedes the cursor position.
+ */
+  start_path = _pu_start_of_path(gl->line,
+				 gl->buff_curpos > 0 ? gl->buff_curpos : 0);
+  if(!start_path)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Get the length of the string that is to be expanded.
+ */
+  pathlen = gl->buff_curpos - (start_path - gl->line);
+/*
+ * Attempt to expand it.
+ */
+  result = ef_expand_file(gl->ef, start_path, pathlen);
+/*
+ * If there was an error, report the error.
+ */
+  if(!result) {
+    if(gl->echo &&
+       fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n%s\n", ef_last_error(gl->ef)) < 0)
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * If no files matched, report this as well.
+ */
+  } else if(result->nfile == 0 || !result->exists) {
+    if(gl->echo && fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\nNo files match.\n") < 0)
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * List the matching expansions.
+ */
+  } else if(gl->echo) {
+    if(fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n") < 0)
+      return 1;
+    ef_list_expansions(result, gl->output_fp, gl->ncolumn);
+  };
+/*
+ * Redisplay the line being edited.
+ */
+  gl->term_curpos = 0;
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if a character should be considered a part of a word.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  c       int  The character to be tested.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  int  True if the character should be considered part of a word.
+ */
+static int gl_is_word_char(int c)
+{
+  return isalnum((int)(unsigned char)c) || strchr(GL_WORD_CHARS, c) != NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Override the builtin file-completion callback that is bound to the
+ * "complete_word" action function.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ *  data             void *  This is passed to match_fn() whenever it is
+ *                           called. It could, for example, point to a
+ *                           symbol table where match_fn() could look
+ *                           for possible completions.
+ *  match_fn   CplMatchFn *  The function that will identify the prefix
+ *                           to be completed from the input line, and
+ *                           report matching symbols.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_customize_completion(GetLine *gl, void *data, CplMatchFn *match_fn)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl || !match_fn) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_customize_completion: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the new completion function and its callback data.
+ */
+  gl->cpl_fn = match_fn;
+  gl->cpl_data = data;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Change the terminal (or stream) that getline interacts with.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ *  input_fp         FILE *  The stdio stream to read from.
+ *  output_fp        FILE *  The stdio stream to write to.
+ *  term             char *  The terminal type. This can be NULL if
+ *                           either or both of input_fp and output_fp don't
+ *                           refer to a terminal. Otherwise it should refer
+ *                           to an entry in the terminal information database.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_change_terminal(GetLine *gl, FILE *input_fp, FILE *output_fp,
+		       const char *term)
+{
+  int is_term = 0;   /* True if both input_fd and output_fd are associated */
+                     /*  with a terminal. */
+/*
+ * Require that input_fp and output_fp both be valid.
+ */
+  if(!input_fp || !output_fp) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "\r\ngl_change_terminal: Bad input/output stream(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If we are displacing a previous terminal, remove it from the list
+ * of fds being watched.
+ */
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+  if(gl->input_fd >= 0)
+    FD_CLR(gl->input_fd, &gl->rfds);
+#endif
+/*
+ * Record the file descriptors and streams.
+ */
+  gl->input_fp = input_fp;
+  gl->input_fd = fileno(input_fp);
+  gl->output_fp = output_fp;
+  gl->output_fd = fileno(output_fp);
+/*
+ * Make sure that the file descriptor will be visible in the set to
+ * be watched.
+ */
+#ifdef HAVE_SELECT
+  FD_SET(gl->input_fd, &gl->rfds);
+  if(gl->input_fd > gl->max_fd)
+    gl->max_fd = gl->input_fd;
+#endif
+/*
+ * Disable terminal interaction until we have enough info to interact
+ * with the terminal.
+ */
+  gl->is_term = 0;
+/*
+ * For terminal editing, we need both output_fd and input_fd to refer to
+ * a terminal. While we can't verify that they both point to the same
+ * terminal, we can verify that they point to terminals.
+ */
+  is_term = isatty(gl->input_fd) && isatty(gl->output_fd);
+/*
+ * If we are interacting with a terminal and no terminal type has been
+ * specified, treat it as a generic ANSI terminal.
+ */
+  if(is_term && !term)
+    term = "ansi";
+/*
+ * Make a copy of the terminal type string.
+ */
+  if(term != gl->term) {
+/*
+ * Delete any old terminal type string.
+ */
+    if(gl->term) {
+      free(gl->term);
+      gl->term = NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Make a copy of the new terminal-type string, if any.
+ */
+    if(term) {
+      gl->term = (char *) malloc(strlen(term)+1);
+      if(gl->term)
+	strcpy(gl->term, term);
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Clear any terminal-specific key bindings that were taken from the
+ * settings of the last terminal.
+ */
+  _kt_clear_bindings(gl->bindings, KTB_TERM);
+/*
+ * If we have a terminal install new bindings for it.
+ */
+  if(is_term) {
+/*
+ * Get the current settings of the terminal.
+ */
+    if(tcgetattr(gl->input_fd, &gl->oldattr)) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "\r\ngl_change_terminal: tcgetattr error: %s\n",
+	      strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Lookup the terminal control string and size information.
+ */
+    if(gl_control_strings(gl, term))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * We now have enough info to interact with the terminal.
+ */
+    gl->is_term = 1;
+/*
+ * Bind terminal-specific keys.
+ */
+    if(gl_bind_terminal_keys(gl))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Set up terminal-specific key bindings.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_bind_terminal_keys(GetLine *gl)
+{
+/*
+ * Install key-bindings for the special terminal characters.
+ */
+  if(gl_bind_control_char(gl, KTB_TERM, gl->oldattr.c_cc[VINTR],
+			  "user-interrupt") ||
+     gl_bind_control_char(gl, KTB_TERM, gl->oldattr.c_cc[VQUIT], "abort") ||
+     gl_bind_control_char(gl, KTB_TERM, gl->oldattr.c_cc[VSUSP], "suspend"))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * In vi-mode, arrange for the above characters to be seen in command
+ * mode.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor == GL_VI_MODE) {
+    if(gl_bind_control_char(gl, KTB_TERM, MAKE_META(gl->oldattr.c_cc[VINTR]),
+			    "user-interrupt") ||
+       gl_bind_control_char(gl, KTB_TERM, MAKE_META(gl->oldattr.c_cc[VQUIT]),
+			    "abort") ||
+       gl_bind_control_char(gl, KTB_TERM, MAKE_META(gl->oldattr.c_cc[VSUSP]),
+			    "suspend"))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Non-universal special keys.
+ */
+#ifdef VLNEXT
+  if(gl_bind_control_char(gl, KTB_TERM, gl->oldattr.c_cc[VLNEXT],
+			  "literal-next"))
+    return 1;
+#else
+  if(_kt_set_keybinding(gl->bindings, KTB_TERM, "^V", "literal-next"))
+    return 1;
+#endif
+/*
+ * Bind action functions to the terminal-specific arrow keys
+ * looked up by gl_control_strings().
+ */
+  if(_gl_bind_arrow_keys(gl))
+    return 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function is normally bound to control-D. When it is invoked within
+ * a line it deletes the character which follows the cursor. When invoked
+ * at the end of the line it lists possible file completions, and when
+ * invoked on an empty line it causes gl_get_line() to return EOF. This
+ * function emulates the one that is normally bound to control-D by tcsh.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_del_char_or_list_or_eof)
+{
+/*
+ * If we have an empty line arrange to return EOF.
+ */
+  if(gl->ntotal < 1) {
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * If we are at the end of the line list possible completions.
+ */
+  } else if(gl->buff_curpos >= gl->ntotal) {
+/*
+ * Get the list of possible completions.
+ */
+    CplMatches *matches = cpl_complete_word(gl->cpl, gl->line, gl->buff_curpos,
+					    gl->cpl_data, gl->cpl_fn);
+    if(!matches) {
+      if(gl->echo &&
+	 fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n%s\n", cpl_last_error(gl->cpl)) < 0)
+	return 1;
+      gl->term_curpos = 0;
+/*
+ * List the matches.
+ */
+    } else if(matches->nmatch > 0 && gl->echo) {
+      if(fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n") < 0)
+	return 1;
+      cpl_list_completions(matches, gl->output_fp, gl->ncolumn);
+    };
+/*
+ * Redisplay the line unchanged.
+ */
+    return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+/*
+ * Within the line delete the character that follows the cursor.
+ */
+  } else {
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, first preserve the current line for potential use
+ * by vi-undo.
+ */
+    gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Delete 'count' characters.
+ */
+    return gl_forward_delete_char(gl, count);
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function is normally bound to control-D in vi mode. When it is
+ * invoked within a line it lists possible file completions, and when
+ * invoked on an empty line it causes gl_get_line() to return EOF. This
+ * function emulates the one that is normally bound to control-D by tcsh.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_list_or_eof)
+{
+/*
+ * If we have an empty line arrange to return EOF.
+ */
+  if(gl->ntotal < 1) {
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Otherwise list possible completions.
+ */
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Get the list of possible completions.
+ */
+    CplMatches *matches = cpl_complete_word(gl->cpl, gl->line, gl->buff_curpos,
+					    gl->cpl_data, gl->cpl_fn);
+    if(!matches) {
+      if(gl->echo &&
+	 fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n%s\n", cpl_last_error(gl->cpl)) < 0)
+	return 1;
+      gl->term_curpos = 0;
+/*
+ * List the matches.
+ */
+    } else if(matches->nmatch > 0 && gl->echo) {
+      if(fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n") < 0)
+	return 1;
+      cpl_list_completions(matches, gl->output_fp, gl->ncolumn);
+    };
+/*
+ * Redisplay the line unchanged.
+ */
+    return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Where the user has used the symbolic arrow-key names to specify
+ * arrow key bindings, bind the specified action functions to the default
+ * and terminal specific arrow key sequences.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *   The getline resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int     0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int _gl_bind_arrow_keys(GetLine *gl)
+{
+/*
+ * Process each of the arrow keys.
+ */
+  if(_gl_rebind_arrow_key(gl->bindings, "up", gl->u_arrow, "^[[A", "^[OA") ||
+     _gl_rebind_arrow_key(gl->bindings, "down", gl->d_arrow, "^[[B", "^[OB") ||
+     _gl_rebind_arrow_key(gl->bindings, "left", gl->l_arrow, "^[[D", "^[OD") ||
+     _gl_rebind_arrow_key(gl->bindings, "right", gl->r_arrow, "^[[C", "^[OC"))
+    return 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup the action function of a symbolic arrow-key binding, and bind
+ * it to the terminal-specific and default arrow-key sequences. Note that
+ * we don't trust the terminal-specified key sequences to be correct.
+ * The main reason for this is that on some machines the xterm terminfo
+ * entry is for hardware X-terminals, rather than xterm terminal emulators
+ * and the two terminal types emit different character sequences when the
+ * their cursor keys are pressed. As a result we also supply a couple
+ * of default key sequences.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  bindings     KeyTab *   The table of key bindings.
+ *  name           char *   The symbolic name of the arrow key.
+ *  term_seq       char *   The terminal-specific arrow-key sequence.
+ *  def_seq1       char *   The first default arrow-key sequence.
+ *  def_seq2       char *   The second arrow-key sequence.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int     0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+static int _gl_rebind_arrow_key(KeyTab *bindings, const char *name,
+				const char *term_seq, const char *def_seq1,
+				const char *def_seq2)
+{
+  int first,last;  /* The indexes of the first and last matching entries */
+/*
+ * Lookup the key binding for the symbolic name of the arrow key. This
+ * will either be the default action, or a user provided one.
+ */
+  if(_kt_lookup_keybinding(bindings, name, strlen(name), &first, &last)
+     == KT_EXACT_MATCH) {
+/*
+ * Get the action function.
+ */
+    KtKeyFn *key_fn = bindings->table[first].keyfn;
+/*
+ * Bind this to each of the specified key sequences.
+ */
+    if((term_seq && _kt_set_keyfn(bindings, KTB_TERM, term_seq, key_fn)) ||
+       (def_seq1 && _kt_set_keyfn(bindings, KTB_NORM, def_seq1, key_fn)) ||
+       (def_seq2 && _kt_set_keyfn(bindings, KTB_NORM, def_seq2, key_fn)))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read getline configuration information from a given file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  filename  const char *  The name of the file to read configuration
+ *                          information from. The contents of this file
+ *                          are as described in the gl_get_line(3) man
+ *                          page for the default ~/.teclarc configuration
+ *                          file.
+ *  who         KtBinder    Who bindings are to be installed for.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Irrecoverable error.
+ */
+static int _gl_read_config_file(GetLine *gl, const char *filename, KtBinder who)
+{
+  FileExpansion *expansion; /* The expansion of the filename */
+  FILE *fp;                 /* The opened file */
+  int waserr = 0;           /* True if an error occurred while reading */
+  int lineno = 1;           /* The line number being processed */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl || !filename) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_gl_read_config_file: Invalid arguments.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Expand the filename.
+ */
+  expansion = ef_expand_file(gl->ef, filename, -1);
+  if(!expansion) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Unable to expand %s (%s).\n", filename,
+            ef_last_error(gl->ef));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the file.
+ */
+  fp = fopen(expansion->files[0], "r");
+/*
+ * It isn't an error for there to be no configuration file.
+ */
+  if(!fp)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Parse the contents of the file.
+ */
+  while(!waserr && !feof(fp))
+    waserr = _gl_parse_config_line(gl, fp, glc_file_getc, filename, who,
+				   &lineno);
+/*
+ * Bind action functions to the terminal-specific arrow keys.
+ */
+  if(_gl_bind_arrow_keys(gl))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Clean up.
+ */
+  (void) fclose(fp);
+  return waserr;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read GetLine configuration information from a string. The contents of
+ * the string are the same as those described in the gl_get_line(3)
+ * man page for the contents of the ~/.teclarc configuration file.
+ */
+static int _gl_read_config_string(GetLine *gl, const char *buffer, KtBinder who)
+{
+  const char *bptr;         /* A pointer into buffer[] */
+  int waserr = 0;           /* True if an error occurred while reading */
+  int lineno = 1;           /* The line number being processed */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl || !buffer) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_gl_read_config_string: Invalid arguments.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get a pointer to the start of the buffer.
+ */
+  bptr = buffer;
+/*
+ * Parse the contents of the buffer.
+ */
+  while(!waserr && *bptr)
+    waserr = _gl_parse_config_line(gl, &bptr, glc_buff_getc, "", who, &lineno);
+/*
+ * Bind action functions to the terminal-specific arrow keys.
+ */
+  if(_gl_bind_arrow_keys(gl))
+    return 1;
+  return waserr;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Parse the next line of a getline configuration file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  stream        void *  The pointer representing the stream to be read
+ *                        by getc_fn().
+ *  getc_fn  GlcGetcFn *  A callback function which when called with
+ *                       'stream' as its argument, returns the next
+ *                        unread character from the stream.
+ *  origin  const char *  The name of the entity being read (eg. a
+ *                        file name).
+ *  who       KtBinder    Who bindings are to be installed for.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  lineno         int *  The line number being processed is to be
+ *                        maintained in *lineno.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    0 - OK.
+ *                        1 - Irrecoverable error.
+ */
+static int _gl_parse_config_line(GetLine *gl, void *stream, GlcGetcFn *getc_fn,
+				 const char *origin, KtBinder who, int *lineno)
+{
+  char buffer[GL_CONF_BUFLEN+1];  /* The input line buffer */
+  char *argv[GL_CONF_MAXARG];     /* The argument list */
+  int argc = 0;                   /* The number of arguments in argv[] */
+  int c;                          /* A character from the file */
+  int escaped = 0;                /* True if the next character is escaped */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Skip spaces and tabs.
+ */
+  do c = getc_fn(stream); while(c==' ' || c=='\t');
+/*
+ * Comments extend to the end of the line.
+ */
+  if(c=='#')
+    do c = getc_fn(stream); while(c != '\n' && c != EOF);
+/*
+ * Ignore empty lines.
+ */
+  if(c=='\n' || c==EOF) {
+    (*lineno)++;
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the buffer location of the start of the first argument.
+ */
+  argv[argc] = buffer;
+/*
+ * Read the rest of the line, stopping early if a comment is seen, or
+ * the buffer overflows, and replacing sequences of spaces with a
+ * '\0', and recording the thus terminated string as an argument.
+ */
+  i = 0;
+  while(i<GL_CONF_BUFLEN) {
+/*
+ * Did we hit the end of the latest argument?
+ */
+    if(c==EOF || (!escaped && (c==' ' || c=='\n' || c=='\t' || c=='#'))) {
+/*
+ * Terminate the argument.
+ */
+      buffer[i++] = '\0';
+      argc++;
+/*
+ * Skip spaces and tabs.
+ */
+      while(c==' ' || c=='\t')
+	c = getc_fn(stream);
+/*
+ * If we hit the end of the line, or the start of a comment, exit the loop.
+ */
+      if(c==EOF || c=='\n' || c=='#')
+	break;
+/*
+ * Start recording the next argument.
+ */
+      if(argc >= GL_CONF_MAXARG) {
+	fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: Too many arguments.\n", origin, *lineno);
+	do c = getc_fn(stream); while(c != '\n' && c != EOF); /* Skip past eol */
+	return 0;
+      };
+      argv[argc] = buffer + i;
+/*
+ * The next character was preceded by spaces, so it isn't escaped.
+ */
+      escaped = 0;
+    } else {
+/*
+ * If we hit an unescaped backslash, this means that we should arrange
+ * to treat the next character like a simple alphabetical character.
+ */
+      if(c=='\\' && !escaped) {
+	escaped = 1;
+/*
+ * Splice lines where the newline is escaped.
+ */
+      } else if(c=='\n' && escaped) {
+	(*lineno)++;
+/*
+ * Record a normal character, preserving any preceding backslash.
+ */
+      } else {
+	if(escaped)
+	  buffer[i++] = '\\';
+	if(i>=GL_CONF_BUFLEN)
+	  break;
+	escaped = 0;
+	buffer[i++] = c;
+      };
+/*
+ * Get the next character.
+ */
+      c = getc_fn(stream);
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Did the buffer overflow?
+ */
+  if(i>=GL_CONF_BUFLEN) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: Line too long.\n", origin, *lineno);
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * The first argument should be a command name.
+ */
+  if(strcmp(argv[0], "bind") == 0) {
+    const char *action = NULL; /* A NULL action removes a keybinding */
+    const char *keyseq = NULL;
+    switch(argc) {
+    case 3:
+      action = argv[2];
+    case 2:              /* Note the intentional fallthrough */
+      keyseq = argv[1];
+/*
+ * Attempt to record the new keybinding.
+ */
+      if(_kt_set_keybinding(gl->bindings, who, keyseq, action)) {
+	fprintf(stderr, "The error occurred at line %d of %s.\n", *lineno,
+		origin);
+      };
+      break;
+    default:
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: Wrong number of arguments.\n", origin, *lineno);
+    };
+  } else if(strcmp(argv[0], "edit-mode") == 0) {
+    if(argc == 2 && strcmp(argv[1], "emacs") == 0) {
+      gl_change_editor(gl, GL_EMACS_MODE);
+    } else if(argc == 2 && strcmp(argv[1], "vi") == 0) {
+      gl_change_editor(gl, GL_VI_MODE);
+    } else if(argc == 2 && strcmp(argv[1], "none") == 0) {
+      gl_change_editor(gl, GL_NO_EDITOR);
+    } else {
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: The argument of editor should be vi or emacs.\n",
+	      origin, *lineno);
+    };
+  } else if(strcmp(argv[0], "nobeep") == 0) {
+    gl->silence_bell = 1;
+  } else {
+    fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: Unknown command name '%s'.\n", origin, *lineno,
+	    argv[0]);
+  };
+/*
+ * Skip any trailing comment.
+ */
+  while(c != '\n' && c != EOF)
+    c = getc_fn(stream);
+  (*lineno)++;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the _gl_parse_config_line() callback function which reads the
+ * next character from a configuration file.
+ */
+static GLC_GETC_FN(glc_file_getc)
+{
+  return fgetc((FILE *) stream);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the _gl_parse_config_line() callback function which reads the
+ * next character from a buffer. Its stream argument is a pointer to a
+ * variable which is, in turn, a pointer into the buffer being read from.
+ */
+static GLC_GETC_FN(glc_buff_getc)
+{
+  const char **lptr = (char const **) stream;
+  return **lptr ? *(*lptr)++ : EOF;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * When this action is triggered, it arranges to temporarily read command
+ * lines from the regular file whos name precedes the cursor.
+ * The current line is first discarded.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_read_from_file)
+{
+  char *start_path;       /* The pointer to the start of the pathname in */
+                          /*  gl->line[]. */
+  FileExpansion *result;  /* The results of the filename expansion */
+  int pathlen;            /* The length of the pathname being expanded */
+  int error_reported = 0; /* True after an error has been reported */
+/*
+ * Locate the start of the filename that precedes the cursor position.
+ */
+  start_path = _pu_start_of_path(gl->line,
+				 gl->buff_curpos > 0 ? gl->buff_curpos : 0);
+  if(!start_path)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Get the length of the pathname string.
+ */
+  pathlen = gl->buff_curpos - (start_path - gl->line);
+/*
+ * Attempt to expand the pathname.
+ */
+  result = ef_expand_file(gl->ef, start_path, pathlen);
+/*
+ * If there was an error, report the error on a new line, then redraw
+ * the original line.
+ */
+  if(!result) {
+    if(gl->echo &&
+       fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n%s\n", ef_last_error(gl->ef)) < 0)
+      return 1;
+    error_reported = 1;
+/*
+ * If no files matched, report this as well.
+ */
+  } else if(result->nfile == 0 || !result->exists) {
+    if(gl->echo && fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\nNo files match.\n") < 0)
+      return 1;
+    error_reported = 1;
+/*
+ * Complain if more than one file matches.
+ */
+  } else if(result->nfile > 1) {
+    if(gl->echo &&
+       fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\nMore than one file matches.\n") < 0)
+      return 1;
+    error_reported = 1;
+/*
+ * Disallow input from anything but normal files. In principle we could
+ * also support input from named pipes. Terminal files would be a problem
+ * since we wouldn't know the terminal type, and other types of files
+ * might cause the library to lock up.
+ */
+  } else if(!_pu_path_is_file(result->files[0])) {
+    if(gl->echo && fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\nNot a normal file.\n") < 0)
+      return 1;
+    error_reported = 1;
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Attempt to open and install the specified file for reading.
+ */
+    gl->file_fp = fopen(result->files[0], "r");
+    if(!gl->file_fp) {
+      if(gl->echo && fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\nUnable to open: %s\n",
+		 result->files[0]) < 0)
+	return 1;
+      error_reported = 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Inform the user what is happening.
+ */
+    if(gl->echo && fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n<Taking input from %s>\n",
+			   result->files[0]) < 0)
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If an error was reported, redisplay the current line.
+ */
+  if(error_reported) {
+    gl->term_curpos = 0;
+    return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Close any temporary file that is being used for input.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ */
+static void gl_revert_input(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  if(gl->file_fp)
+    fclose(gl->file_fp);
+  gl->file_fp = NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that recalls the oldest line in the
+ * history buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_beginning_of_history)
+{
+/*
+ * In vi mode, switch to command mode, since the user is very
+ * likely to want to move around newly recalled lines.
+ */
+  gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * Forget any previous recall session.
+ */
+  gl->preload_id = 0;
+/*
+ * Recall the next oldest line in the history list.
+ */
+  if(_glh_oldest_line(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen) == NULL)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Record the number of characters in the new string.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Arrange to have the cursor placed at the end of the new line.
+ */
+  gl->buff_curpos = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Erase and display the new line.
+ */
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If a history session is currently in progress, this action function
+ * recalls the line that was being edited when the session started. If
+ * no history session is in progress, it does nothing.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_end_of_history)
+{
+/*
+ * In vi mode, switch to command mode, since the user is very
+ * likely to want to move around newly recalled lines.
+ */
+  gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * Forget any previous recall session.
+ */
+  gl->preload_id = 0;
+/*
+ * Recall the next oldest line in the history list.
+ */
+  if(_glh_current_line(gl->glh, gl->line, gl->linelen) == NULL)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Record the number of characters in the new string.
+ */
+  gl->ntotal = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Arrange to have the cursor placed at the end of the new line.
+ */
+  gl->buff_curpos = strlen(gl->line);
+/*
+ * Erase and display the new line.
+ */
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This action function is treated specially, in that its count argument
+ * is set to the end keystroke of the keysequence that activated it.
+ * It accumulates a numeric argument, adding one digit on each call in
+ * which the last keystroke was a numeric digit.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_digit_argument)
+{
+/*
+ * Was the last keystroke a digit?
+ */
+  int is_digit = isdigit((int)(unsigned char) count);
+/*
+ * In vi command mode, a lone '0' means goto-start-of-line.
+ */
+  if(gl->vi.command && gl->number < 0 && count == '0')
+    return gl_beginning_of_line(gl, count);
+/*
+ * Are we starting to accumulate a new number?
+ */
+  if(gl->number < 0 || !is_digit)
+    gl->number = 0;
+/*
+ * Was the last keystroke a digit?
+ */
+  if(is_digit) {
+/*
+ * Read the numeric value of the digit, without assuming ASCII.
+ */
+    int n;
+    char s[2]; s[0] = count; s[1] = '\0';
+    n = atoi(s);
+/*
+ * Append the new digit.
+ */
+    gl->number = gl->number * 10 + n;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * The newline action function sets gl->endline to tell
+ * gl_get_input_line() that the line is now complete.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_newline)
+{
+  GlhLineID id;    /* The last history line recalled while entering this line */
+/*
+ * Flag the line as ended.
+ */
+  gl->endline = 1;
+/*
+ * Record the next position in the history buffer, for potential
+ * recall by an action function on the next call to gl_get_line().
+ */
+  id = _glh_line_id(gl->glh, 1);
+  if(id)
+    gl->preload_id = id;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * The 'repeat' action function sets gl->endline to tell
+ * gl_get_input_line() that the line is now complete, and records the
+ * ID of the next history line in gl->preload_id so that the next call
+ * to gl_get_input_line() will preload the line with that history line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_repeat_history)
+{
+  gl->endline = 1;
+  gl->preload_id = _glh_line_id(gl->glh, 1);
+  gl->preload_history = 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Flush unwritten characters to the terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl     GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_flush_output(GetLine *gl)
+{
+/*
+ * Attempt to flush output to the terminal, restarting the output
+ * if a signal is caught.
+ */
+  while(fflush(gl->output_fp) != 0) {
+    if(errno!=EINTR)
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Change the style of editing to emulate a given editor.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  editor  GlEditor    The type of editor to emulate.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_change_editor(GetLine *gl, GlEditor editor)
+{
+/*
+ * Install the default key-bindings of the requested editor.
+ */
+  switch(editor) {
+  case GL_EMACS_MODE:
+    _kt_clear_bindings(gl->bindings, KTB_NORM);
+    _kt_clear_bindings(gl->bindings, KTB_TERM);
+    (void) _kt_add_bindings(gl->bindings, KTB_NORM, gl_emacs_bindings,
+		   sizeof(gl_emacs_bindings)/sizeof(gl_emacs_bindings[0]));
+    break;
+  case GL_VI_MODE:
+    _kt_clear_bindings(gl->bindings, KTB_NORM);
+    _kt_clear_bindings(gl->bindings, KTB_TERM);
+    (void) _kt_add_bindings(gl->bindings, KTB_NORM, gl_vi_bindings,
+			    sizeof(gl_vi_bindings)/sizeof(gl_vi_bindings[0]));
+    break;
+  case GL_NO_EDITOR:
+    break;
+  default:
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_change_editor: Unknown editor.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the new editing mode.
+ */
+  gl->editor = editor;
+  gl->vi.command = 0;     /* Start in input mode */
+  gl->insert_curpos = 0;
+/*
+ * Reinstate terminal-specific bindings.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor != GL_NO_EDITOR && gl->input_fp)
+    (void) gl_bind_terminal_keys(gl);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that switches to editing using emacs bindings
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_emacs_editing_mode)
+{
+  return gl_change_editor(gl, GL_EMACS_MODE);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that switches to editing using vi bindings
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_editing_mode)
+{
+  return gl_change_editor(gl, GL_VI_MODE);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that switches to insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_insert)
+{
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Switch to vi insert mode.
+ */
+  gl->insert = 1;
+  gl->vi.command = 0;
+  gl->insert_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function that switches to overwrite mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_overwrite)
+{
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Switch to vi overwrite mode.
+ */
+  gl->insert = 0;
+  gl->vi.command = 0;
+  gl->insert_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This action function toggles the case of the character under the
+ * cursor.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_change_case)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current insert mode and the cursor position.
+ */
+  int insert = gl->insert;
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * We want to overwrite the modified word.
+ */
+  gl->insert = 0;
+/*
+ * Toggle the case of 'count' characters.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<count && gl->buff_curpos < gl->ntotal; i++) {
+    char *cptr = gl->line + gl->buff_curpos++;
+/*
+ * Convert the character to upper case?
+ */
+    if(islower((int)(unsigned char) *cptr))
+      *cptr = toupper((int) *cptr);
+    else if(isupper((int)(unsigned char) *cptr))
+      *cptr = tolower((int) *cptr);
+/*
+ * Write the possibly modified character back. Note that for non-modified
+ * characters we want to do this as well, so as to advance the cursor.
+ */
+      if(gl_output_char(gl, *cptr, cptr[1]))
+	return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Restore the insertion mode.
+ */
+  gl->insert = insert;
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);	/* bounds check */
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function which implements the vi-style action which
+ * moves the cursor to the start of the line, then switches to insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_insert_at_bol)
+{
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+  return gl_beginning_of_line(gl, 0) ||
+         gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+         
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function which implements the vi-style action which
+ * moves the cursor to the end of the line, then switches to insert mode
+ * to allow text to be appended to the line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_append_at_eol)
+{
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+  gl->vi.command = 0;	/* Allow cursor at EOL */
+  return gl_end_of_line(gl, 0) ||
+         gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function which implements the vi-style action which
+ * moves the cursor to right one then switches to insert mode, thus
+ * allowing text to be appended after the next character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_append)
+{
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+  gl->vi.command = 0;	/* Allow cursor at EOL */
+  return gl_cursor_right(gl, 1) ||
+         gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This action function moves the cursor to the column specified by the
+ * numeric argument. Column indexes start at 1.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_goto_column)
+{
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, count - 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting with the character under the cursor, replace 'count'
+ * characters with the next character that the user types.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_replace_char)
+{
+  char c;  /* The replacement character */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current insert mode.
+ */
+  int insert = gl->insert;
+/*
+ * Get the replacement character.
+ */
+  if(gl->vi.repeat.active) {
+    c = gl->vi.repeat.input_char;
+  } else {
+    if(gl_read_character(gl, &c))
+      return 1;
+    gl->vi.repeat.input_char = c;
+  };
+/*
+ * Are there 'count' characters to be replaced?
+ */
+  if(gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos >= count) {
+/*
+ * If in vi command mode, preserve the current line for potential
+ * use by vi-undo.
+ */
+    gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Temporarily switch to overwrite mode.
+ */
+    gl->insert = 0;
+/*
+ * Overwrite the current character plus count-1 subsequent characters
+ * with the replacement character.
+ */
+    for(i=0; i<count; i++)
+      gl_add_char_to_line(gl, c);
+/*
+ * Restore the original insert/overwrite mode.
+ */
+    gl->insert = insert;
+  };
+  return gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos);	/* bounds check */
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which changes all characters between the
+ * current cursor position and the end of the line.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_rest_of_line)
+{
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+  gl->vi.command = 0;	/* Allow cursor at EOL */
+  return gl_kill_line(gl, count) || gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which changes all characters between the
+ * start of the line and the current cursor position.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_to_bol)
+{
+  return gl_backward_kill_line(gl, count) || gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which deletes the entire contents of the
+ * current line and switches to insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_line)
+{
+  return gl_delete_line(gl, count) || gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position and looking towards the end of the
+ * line, copy 'count' characters to the cut buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_char)
+{
+/*
+ * Limit the count to the number of characters available.
+ */
+  if(gl->buff_curpos + count >= gl->ntotal)
+    count = gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos;
+  if(count < 0)
+    count = 0;
+/*
+ * Copy the characters to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, count);
+  gl->cutbuf[count] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the character before the cursor position and looking
+ * backwards towards the start of the line, copy 'count' characters to
+ * the cut buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_char)
+{
+/*
+ * Limit the count to the number of characters available.
+ */
+  if(count > gl->buff_curpos)
+    count = gl->buff_curpos;
+  if(count < 0)
+    count = 0;
+  gl_place_cursor(gl, gl->buff_curpos - count);
+/*
+ * Copy the characters to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, count);
+  gl->cutbuf[count] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position copy to the specified column into the
+ * cut buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_to_column)
+{
+  if (--count >= gl->buff_curpos)
+    return gl_forward_copy_char(gl, count - gl->buff_curpos);
+  else
+    return gl_backward_copy_char(gl, gl->buff_curpos - count);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position copy characters up to a matching
+ * parenthesis into the cut buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_to_parenthesis)
+{
+  int curpos = gl_index_of_matching_paren(gl);
+  if(curpos >= 0) {
+    gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+    if(curpos >= gl->buff_curpos)
+      return gl_forward_copy_char(gl, curpos - gl->buff_curpos + 1);
+    else
+      return gl_backward_copy_char(gl, ++gl->buff_curpos - curpos + 1);
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position copy the rest of the line into the
+ * cut buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_rest_of_line)
+{
+/*
+ * Copy the characters to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos);
+  gl->cutbuf[gl->ntotal - gl->buff_curpos] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy from the beginning of the line to the cursor position into the
+ * cut buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_to_bol)
+{
+/*
+ * Copy the characters to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line, gl->buff_curpos);
+  gl->cutbuf[gl->buff_curpos] = '\0';
+  gl_place_cursor(gl, 0);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy the entire line into the cut buffer.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_line)
+{
+/*
+ * Copy the characters to the cut buffer.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line, gl->ntotal);
+  gl->cutbuf[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search forwards for the next character that the user enters.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_find_char)
+{
+  int pos = gl_find_char(gl, count, 1, 1, '\0');
+  return pos >= 0 && gl_place_cursor(gl, pos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search backwards for the next character that the user enters.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_find_char)
+{
+  int pos = gl_find_char(gl, count, 0, 1, '\0');
+  return pos >= 0 && gl_place_cursor(gl, pos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search forwards for the next character that the user enters. Move up to,
+ * but not onto, the found character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_to_char)
+{
+  int pos = gl_find_char(gl, count, 1, 0, '\0');
+  return pos >= 0 && gl_place_cursor(gl, pos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search backwards for the next character that the user enters. Move back to,
+ * but not onto, the found character.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_to_char)
+{
+  int pos = gl_find_char(gl, count, 0, 0, '\0');
+  return pos >= 0 && gl_place_cursor(gl, pos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Searching in a given direction, return the index of a given (or
+ * read) character in the input line, or the character that precedes
+ * it in the specified search direction. Return -1 if not found.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  count        int    The number of times to search.
+ *  forward      int    True if searching forward.
+ *  onto         int    True if the search should end on top of the
+ *                      character, false if the search should stop
+ *                      one character before the character in the
+ *                      specified search direction.
+ *  c           char    The character to be sought, or '\0' if the
+ *                      character should be read from the user.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    The index of the character in gl->line[], or
+ *                      -1 if not found.
+ */
+static int gl_find_char(GetLine *gl, int count, int forward, int onto, char c)
+{
+  int pos;     /* The index reached in searching the input line */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Get a character from the user?
+ */
+  if(!c) {
+/*
+ * If we are in the process of repeating a previous change command, substitute
+ * the last find character.
+ */
+    if(gl->vi.repeat.active) {
+      c = gl->vi.find_char;
+    } else {
+      if(gl_read_character(gl, &c))
+	return -1;
+/*
+ * Record the details of the new search, for use by repeat finds.
+ */
+      gl->vi.find_forward = forward;
+      gl->vi.find_onto = onto;
+      gl->vi.find_char = c;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Which direction should we search?
+ */
+  if(forward) {
+/*
+ * Search forwards 'count' times for the character, starting with the
+ * character that follows the cursor.
+ */
+    for(i=0, pos=gl->buff_curpos; i<count && pos < gl->ntotal; i++) {
+/*
+ * Advance past the last match (or past the current cursor position
+ * on the first search).
+ */
+      pos++;
+/*
+ * Search for the next instance of c.
+ */
+      for( ; pos<gl->ntotal && c!=gl->line[pos]; pos++)
+	;
+    };
+/*
+ * If the character was found and we have been requested to return the
+ * position of the character that precedes the desired character, then
+ * we have gone one character too far.
+ */
+    if(!onto && pos<gl->ntotal)
+      pos--;
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Search backwards 'count' times for the character, starting with the
+ * character that precedes the cursor.
+ */
+    for(i=0, pos=gl->buff_curpos; i<count && pos >= gl->insert_curpos; i++) {
+/*
+ * Step back one from the last match (or from the current cursor
+ * position on the first search).
+ */
+      pos--;
+/*
+ * Search for the next instance of c.
+ */
+      for( ; pos>=gl->insert_curpos && c!=gl->line[pos]; pos--)
+	;
+    };
+/*
+ * If the character was found and we have been requested to return the
+ * position of the character that precedes the desired character, then
+ * we have gone one character too far.
+ */
+    if(!onto && pos>=gl->insert_curpos)
+      pos++;
+  };
+/*
+ * If found, return the cursor position of the count'th match.
+ * Otherwise ring the terminal bell.
+ */
+  if(pos >= gl->insert_curpos && pos < gl->ntotal) {
+    return pos;
+  } else {
+    (void) gl_ring_bell(gl, 1);
+    return -1;
+  }
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Repeat the last character search in the same direction as the last
+ * search.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_repeat_find_char)
+{
+  int pos = gl->vi.find_char ?
+    gl_find_char(gl, count, gl->vi.find_forward, gl->vi.find_onto,
+		 gl->vi.find_char) : -1;
+  return pos >= 0 && gl_place_cursor(gl, pos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Repeat the last character search in the opposite direction as the last
+ * search.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_invert_refind_char)
+{
+  int pos = gl->vi.find_char ?
+    gl_find_char(gl, count, !gl->vi.find_forward, gl->vi.find_onto,
+		 gl->vi.find_char) : -1;
+  return pos >= 0 && gl_place_cursor(gl, pos);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search forward from the current position of the cursor for 'count'
+ * word endings, returning the index of the last one found, or the end of
+ * the line if there were less than 'count' words.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  n            int    The number of word boundaries to search for.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    The buffer index of the located position.
+ */
+static int gl_nth_word_end_forward(GetLine *gl, int n)
+{
+  int bufpos;   /* The buffer index being checked. */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * In order to guarantee forward motion to the next word ending,
+ * we need to start from one position to the right of the cursor
+ * position, since this may already be at the end of a word.
+ */
+  bufpos = gl->buff_curpos + 1;
+/*
+ * If we are at the end of the line, return the index of the last
+ * real character on the line. Note that this will be -1 if the line
+ * is empty.
+ */
+  if(bufpos >= gl->ntotal)
+    return gl->ntotal - 1;
+/*
+ * Search 'n' times, unless the end of the input line is reached first.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<n && bufpos<gl->ntotal; i++) {
+/*
+ * If we are not already within a word, skip to the start of the next word.
+ */
+    for( ; bufpos<gl->ntotal && !gl_is_word_char((int)gl->line[bufpos]);
+	bufpos++)
+      ;
+/*
+ * Find the end of the next word.
+ */
+    for( ; bufpos<gl->ntotal && gl_is_word_char((int)gl->line[bufpos]);
+	bufpos++)
+      ;
+  };
+/*
+ * We will have overshot.
+ */
+  return bufpos > 0 ? bufpos-1 : bufpos;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search forward from the current position of the cursor for 'count'
+ * word starts, returning the index of the last one found, or the end of
+ * the line if there were less than 'count' words.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  n            int    The number of word boundaries to search for.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    The buffer index of the located position.
+ */
+static int gl_nth_word_start_forward(GetLine *gl, int n)
+{
+  int bufpos;   /* The buffer index being checked. */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Get the current cursor position.
+ */
+  bufpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Search 'n' times, unless the end of the input line is reached first.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<n && bufpos<gl->ntotal; i++) {
+/*
+ * Find the end of the current word.
+ */
+    for( ; bufpos<gl->ntotal && gl_is_word_char((int)gl->line[bufpos]);
+	bufpos++)
+      ;
+/*
+ * Skip to the start of the next word.
+ */
+    for( ; bufpos<gl->ntotal && !gl_is_word_char((int)gl->line[bufpos]);
+	bufpos++)
+      ;
+  };
+  return bufpos;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search backward from the current position of the cursor for 'count'
+ * word starts, returning the index of the last one found, or the start
+ * of the line if there were less than 'count' words.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  n            int    The number of word boundaries to search for.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    The buffer index of the located position.
+ */
+static int gl_nth_word_start_backward(GetLine *gl, int n)
+{
+  int bufpos;   /* The buffer index being checked. */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Get the current cursor position.
+ */
+  bufpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Search 'n' times, unless the beginning of the input line (or vi insertion
+ * point) is reached first.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<n && bufpos > gl->insert_curpos; i++) {
+/*
+ * Starting one character back from the last search, so as not to keep
+ * settling on the same word-start, search backwards until finding a
+ * word character.
+ */
+    while(--bufpos >= gl->insert_curpos &&
+          !gl_is_word_char((int)gl->line[bufpos]))
+      ;
+/*
+ * Find the start of the word.
+ */
+    while(--bufpos >= gl->insert_curpos &&
+          gl_is_word_char((int)gl->line[bufpos]))
+      ;
+/*
+ * We will have gone one character too far.
+ */
+    bufpos++;
+  };
+  return bufpos >= gl->insert_curpos ? bufpos : gl->insert_curpos;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy one or more words into the cut buffer without moving the cursor
+ * or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_word)
+{
+/*
+ * Find the location of the count'th start or end of a word
+ * after the cursor, depending on whether in emacs or vi mode.
+ */
+  int next = gl->editor == GL_EMACS_MODE ?
+    gl_nth_word_end_forward(gl, count) :
+    gl_nth_word_start_forward(gl, count);
+/*
+ * How many characters are to be copied into the cut buffer?
+ */
+  int n = next - gl->buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Copy the specified segment and terminate the string.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, n);
+  gl->cutbuf[n] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy one or more words preceding the cursor into the cut buffer,
+ * without moving the cursor or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_word)
+{
+/*
+ * Find the location of the count'th start of word before the cursor.
+ */
+  int next = gl_nth_word_start_backward(gl, count);
+/*
+ * How many characters are to be copied into the cut buffer?
+ */
+  int n = gl->buff_curpos - next;
+  gl_place_cursor(gl, next);
+/*
+ * Copy the specified segment and terminate the string.
+ */
+  memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + next, n);
+  gl->cutbuf[n] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy the characters between the cursor and the count'th instance of
+ * a specified character in the input line, into the cut buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  count        int    The number of times to search.
+ *  c           char    The character to be searched for, or '\0' if
+ *                      the character should be read from the user.
+ *  forward      int    True if searching forward.
+ *  onto         int    True if the search should end on top of the
+ *                      character, false if the search should stop
+ *                      one character before the character in the
+ *                      specified search direction.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ *
+ */
+static int gl_copy_find(GetLine *gl, int count, char c, int forward, int onto)
+{
+  int n;  /* The number of characters in the cut buffer */
+/*
+ * Search for the character, and abort the operation if not found.
+ */
+  int pos = gl_find_char(gl, count, forward, onto, c);
+  if(pos < 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Copy the specified segment.
+ */
+  if(forward) {
+    n = pos + 1 - gl->buff_curpos;
+    memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + gl->buff_curpos, n);
+  } else {
+    n = gl->buff_curpos - pos;
+    memcpy(gl->cutbuf, gl->line + pos, n);
+    if(gl->editor == GL_VI_MODE)
+      gl_place_cursor(gl, pos);
+  }
+/*
+ * Terminate the copy.
+ */
+  gl->cutbuf[n] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy a section up to and including a specified character into the cut
+ * buffer without moving the cursor or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_find)
+{
+  return gl_copy_find(gl, count, '\0', 1, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy a section back to and including a specified character into the cut
+ * buffer without moving the cursor or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_find)
+{
+  return gl_copy_find(gl, count, '\0', 0, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy a section up to and not including a specified character into the cut
+ * buffer without moving the cursor or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_forward_copy_to)
+{
+  return gl_copy_find(gl, count, '\0', 1, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy a section back to and not including a specified character into the cut
+ * buffer without moving the cursor or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_backward_copy_to)
+{
+  return gl_copy_find(gl, count, '\0', 0, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy to a character specified in a previous search into the cut
+ * buffer without moving the cursor or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_refind)
+{
+  return gl_copy_find(gl, count, gl->vi.find_char, gl->vi.find_forward,
+		      gl->vi.find_onto);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Copy to a character specified in a previous search, but in the opposite
+ * direction, into the cut buffer without moving the cursor or deleting text.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_copy_invert_refind)
+{
+  return gl_copy_find(gl, count, gl->vi.find_char, !gl->vi.find_forward,
+		      gl->vi.find_onto);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Set the position of the cursor in the line input buffer and the
+ * terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ *  buff_curpos  int    The new buffer cursor position.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_place_cursor(GetLine *gl, int buff_curpos)
+{
+/*
+ * Don't allow the cursor position to go out of the bounds of the input
+ * line.
+ */
+  if(buff_curpos >= gl->ntotal)
+    buff_curpos = gl->vi.command ? gl->ntotal-1 : gl->ntotal;
+  if(buff_curpos < 0)
+    buff_curpos = 0;
+/*
+ * Record the new buffer position.
+ */
+  gl->buff_curpos = buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Move the terminal cursor to the corresponding character.
+ */
+  return gl_set_term_curpos(gl, gl_buff_curpos_to_term_curpos(gl, buff_curpos));
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * In vi command mode, this function saves the current line to the
+ * historical buffer needed by the undo command. In emacs mode it does
+ * nothing. In order to allow action functions to call other action
+ * functions, gl_interpret_char() sets gl->vi.undo.saved to 0 before
+ * invoking an action, and thereafter once any call to this function
+ * has set it to 1, further calls are ignored.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ */
+static void gl_save_for_undo(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  if(gl->vi.command && !gl->vi.undo.saved) {
+    strcpy(gl->vi.undo.line, gl->line);
+    gl->vi.undo.buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+    gl->vi.undo.ntotal = gl->ntotal;
+    gl->vi.undo.saved = 1;
+  };
+  if(gl->vi.command && !gl->vi.repeat.saved &&
+     gl->current_fn != gl_vi_repeat_change) {
+    gl->vi.repeat.fn = gl->current_fn;
+    gl->vi.repeat.count = gl->current_count;
+    gl->vi.repeat.saved = 1;
+  };
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * In vi mode, restore the line to the way it was before the last command
+ * mode operation, storing the current line in the buffer so that the
+ * undo operation itself can subsequently be undone.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_undo)
+{
+/*
+ * Get pointers into the two lines.
+ */
+  char *undo_ptr = gl->vi.undo.line;
+  char *line_ptr = gl->line;
+/*
+ * Swap the characters of the two buffers up to the length of the shortest
+ * line.
+ */
+  while(*undo_ptr && *line_ptr) {
+    char c = *undo_ptr;
+    *undo_ptr++ = *line_ptr;
+    *line_ptr++ = c;
+  };
+/*
+ * Copy the rest directly.
+ */
+  if(gl->ntotal > gl->vi.undo.ntotal) {
+    strcpy(undo_ptr, line_ptr);
+    *line_ptr = '\0';
+  } else {
+    strcpy(line_ptr, undo_ptr);
+    *undo_ptr = '\0';
+  };
+/*
+ * Swap the length information.
+ */
+  {
+    int ntotal = gl->ntotal;
+    gl->ntotal = gl->vi.undo.ntotal;
+    gl->vi.undo.ntotal = ntotal;
+  };
+/*
+ * Set both cursor positions to the leftmost of the saved and current
+ * cursor positions to emulate what vi does.
+ */
+  if(gl->buff_curpos < gl->vi.undo.buff_curpos)
+    gl->vi.undo.buff_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+  else
+    gl->buff_curpos = gl->vi.undo.buff_curpos;
+/*
+ * Since we have bipassed calling gl_save_for_undo(), record repeat
+ * information inline.
+ */
+  gl->vi.repeat.fn = gl_vi_undo;
+  gl->vi.repeat.count = 1;
+/*
+ * Display the restored line.
+ */
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the following word and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_word)
+{
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+  gl->vi.command = 0;	/* Allow cursor at EOL */
+  return gl_forward_delete_word(gl, count) || gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the preceding word and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_word)
+{
+  return gl_backward_delete_word(gl, count) || gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the following section and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_find)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 1, 1, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the preceding section and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_find)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 0, 1, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the following section and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_to)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 1, 0, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the preceding section and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_to)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, '\0', 0, 0, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete to a character specified by a previous search and leave the user
+ * in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_refind)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, gl->vi.find_char, gl->vi.find_forward,
+			gl->vi.find_onto, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete to a character specified by a previous search, but in the opposite
+ * direction, and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_invert_refind)
+{
+  return gl_delete_find(gl, count, gl->vi.find_char, !gl->vi.find_forward,
+			gl->vi.find_onto, 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the following character and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_forward_change_char)
+{
+  gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+  gl->vi.command = 0;	/* Allow cursor at EOL */
+  return gl_delete_chars(gl, count, 1) || gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete the preceding character and leave the user in vi insert mode.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_backward_change_char)
+{
+  return gl_backward_delete_char(gl, count) || gl_vi_insert(gl, 0);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position change characters to the specified column.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_to_column)
+{
+  if (--count >= gl->buff_curpos)
+    return gl_vi_forward_change_char(gl, count - gl->buff_curpos);
+  else
+    return gl_vi_backward_change_char(gl, gl->buff_curpos - count);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Starting from the cursor position change characters to a matching
+ * parenthesis.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_change_to_parenthesis)
+{
+  int curpos = gl_index_of_matching_paren(gl);
+  if(curpos >= 0) {
+    gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+    if(curpos >= gl->buff_curpos)
+      return gl_vi_forward_change_char(gl, curpos - gl->buff_curpos + 1);
+    else
+      return gl_vi_backward_change_char(gl, ++gl->buff_curpos - curpos + 1);
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If in vi mode, switch to vi command mode.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ */
+static void gl_vi_command_mode(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  if(gl->editor == GL_VI_MODE && !gl->vi.command) {
+    gl->insert = 1;
+    gl->vi.command = 1;
+    gl->vi.repeat.input_curpos = gl->insert_curpos;
+    gl->vi.repeat.command_curpos = gl->buff_curpos;
+    gl->insert_curpos = 0;	/* unrestrict left motion boundary */
+    gl_cursor_left(gl, 1); /* Vi moves left one on entering command mode */
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is an action function which rings the terminal bell.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_ring_bell)
+{
+  return gl->silence_bell ? 0 :
+    gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->sound_bell);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function which implements the vi-repeat-change
+ * action.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_vi_repeat_change)
+{
+  int status;   /* The return status of the repeated action function */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Nothing to repeat?
+ */
+  if(!gl->vi.repeat.fn)
+    return gl_ring_bell(gl, 1);
+/*
+ * Provide a way for action functions to know whether they are being
+ * called by us.
+ */
+  gl->vi.repeat.active = 1;
+/*
+ * Re-run the recorded function.
+ */
+  status = gl->vi.repeat.fn(gl, gl->vi.repeat.count);
+/*
+ * Mark the repeat as completed.
+ */
+  gl->vi.repeat.active = 0;
+/*
+ * Is we are repeating a function that has just switched to input
+ * mode to allow the user to type, re-enter the text that the user
+ * previously entered.
+ */
+  if(status==0 && !gl->vi.command) {
+/*
+ * Make sure that the current line has been saved.
+ */
+    gl_save_for_undo(gl);
+/*
+ * Repeat a previous insertion or overwrite?
+ */
+    if(gl->vi.repeat.input_curpos >= 0 &&
+       gl->vi.repeat.input_curpos <= gl->vi.repeat.command_curpos &&
+       gl->vi.repeat.command_curpos <= gl->vi.undo.ntotal) {
+/*
+ * Using the current line which is saved in the undo buffer, plus
+ * the range of characters therein, as recorded by gl_vi_command_mode(),
+ * add the characters that the user previously entered, to the input
+ * line.
+ */
+      for(i=gl->vi.repeat.input_curpos; i<gl->vi.repeat.command_curpos; i++) {
+	if(gl_add_char_to_line(gl, gl->vi.undo.line[i]))
+	  return 1;
+      };
+    };
+/*
+ * Switch back to command mode, now that the insertion has been repeated.
+ */
+    gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+  };
+  return status;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If the cursor is currently over a parenthesis character, return the
+ * index of its matching parenthesis. If not currently over a parenthesis
+ * character, return the next close parenthesis character to the right of
+ * the cursor. If the respective parenthesis character isn't found,
+ * ring the terminal bell and return -1.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The getline resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    Either the index of the matching parenthesis,
+ *                      or -1 if not found.
+ */
+static int gl_index_of_matching_paren(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * List the recognized parentheses, and their matches.
+ */
+  const char *o_paren = "([{";
+  const char *c_paren = ")]}";
+  const char *cptr;
+/*
+ * Get the character that is currently under the cursor.
+ */
+  char c = gl->line[gl->buff_curpos];
+/*
+ * If the character under the cursor is an open parenthesis, look forward
+ * for the matching close parenthesis.
+ */
+  if((cptr=strchr(o_paren, c))) {
+    char match = c_paren[cptr - o_paren];
+    int matches_needed = 1;
+    for(i=gl->buff_curpos+1; i<gl->ntotal; i++) {
+      if(gl->line[i] == c)
+	matches_needed++;
+      else if(gl->line[i] == match && --matches_needed==0)
+	return i;
+    };
+/*
+ * If the character under the cursor is an close parenthesis, look forward
+ * for the matching open parenthesis.
+ */
+  } else if((cptr=strchr(c_paren, c))) {
+    char match = o_paren[cptr - c_paren];
+    int matches_needed = 1;
+    for(i=gl->buff_curpos-1; i>=0; i--) {
+      if(gl->line[i] == c)
+	matches_needed++;
+      else if(gl->line[i] == match && --matches_needed==0)
+	return i;
+    };
+/*
+ * If not currently over a parenthesis character, search forwards for
+ * the first close parenthesis (this is what the vi % binding does).
+ */
+  } else {
+    for(i=gl->buff_curpos+1; i<gl->ntotal; i++)
+      if(strchr(c_paren, gl->line[i]) != NULL)
+	return i;
+  };
+/*
+ * Not found.
+ */
+  (void) gl_ring_bell(gl, 1);
+  return -1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If the cursor is currently over a parenthesis character, this action
+ * function moves the cursor to its matching parenthesis.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_find_parenthesis)
+{
+  int curpos = gl_index_of_matching_paren(gl);
+  if(curpos >= 0)
+    return gl_place_cursor(gl, curpos);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Handle the receipt of the potential start of a new key-sequence from
+ * the user.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *   The resource object of this library.
+ *  first_char char     The first character of the sequence.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int     0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_interpret_char(GetLine *gl, char first_char)
+{
+  KtKeyFn *keyfn;            /* An action function */
+  char keyseq[GL_KEY_MAX+1]; /* A special key sequence being read */
+  int nkey=0;                /* The number of characters in the key sequence */
+  int count;                 /* The repeat count of an action function */
+  int ret;                   /* The return value of an action function */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Get the first character.
+ */
+  char c = first_char;
+/*
+ * If editting is disabled, just add newly entered characters to the
+ * input line buffer, and watch for the end of the line.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor == GL_NO_EDITOR) {
+    if(gl->ntotal >= gl->linelen)
+      return 0;
+    if(c == '\n' || c == '\r')
+      return gl_newline(gl, 1);
+    gl->line[gl->ntotal++] = c;
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the user is in the process of specifying a repeat count and the
+ * new character is a digit, increment the repeat count accordingly.
+ */
+  if(gl->number >= 0 && isdigit((int)(unsigned char) c))
+    return gl_digit_argument(gl, c);
+/*
+ * In vi command mode, all key-sequences entered need to be
+ * either implicitly or explicitly prefixed with an escape character.
+ */
+  else if(gl->vi.command && c != GL_ESC_CHAR)
+    keyseq[nkey++] = GL_ESC_CHAR;
+/*
+ * If the first character of the sequence is a printable character,
+ * then to avoid confusion with the special "up", "down", "left"
+ * or "right" cursor key bindings, we need to prefix the
+ * printable character with a backslash escape before looking it up.
+ */
+  else if(!IS_META_CHAR(c) && !IS_CTRL_CHAR(c))
+    keyseq[nkey++] = '\\';
+/*
+ * Compose a potentially multiple key-sequence in gl->keyseq.
+ */
+  while(nkey < GL_KEY_MAX) {
+    int first, last;   /* The matching entries in gl->keys */
+/*
+ * If the character is an unprintable meta character, split it
+ * into two characters, an escape character and the character
+ * that was modified by the meta key.
+ */
+    if(IS_META_CHAR(c)) {
+      keyseq[nkey++] = GL_ESC_CHAR;
+      c = META_TO_CHAR(c);
+      continue;
+    };
+/*
+ * Append the latest character to the key sequence.
+ */
+    keyseq[nkey++] = c;
+/*
+ * When doing vi-style editing, an escape at the beginning of any binding
+ * switches to command mode.
+ */
+    if(keyseq[0] == GL_ESC_CHAR && !gl->vi.command)
+      gl_vi_command_mode(gl);
+/*
+ * Lookup the key sequence.
+ */
+    switch(_kt_lookup_keybinding(gl->bindings, keyseq, nkey, &first, &last)) {
+    case KT_EXACT_MATCH:
+/*
+ * Get the matching action function.
+ */
+      keyfn = gl->bindings->table[first].keyfn;
+/*
+ * Get the repeat count, passing the last keystroke if executing the
+ * digit-argument action.
+ */
+      if(keyfn == gl_digit_argument) {
+	count = c;
+      } else {
+	count = gl->number >= 0 ? gl->number : 1;
+      };
+/*
+ * Record the function that is being invoked.
+ */
+      gl->current_fn = keyfn;
+      gl->current_count = count;
+/*
+ * Mark the current line as not yet preserved for use by the vi undo command.
+ */
+      gl->vi.undo.saved = 0;
+      gl->vi.repeat.saved = 0;
+/*
+ * Execute the action function. Note the action function can tell
+ * whether the provided repeat count was defaulted or specified
+ * explicitly by looking at whether gl->number is -1 or not. If
+ * it is negative, then no repeat count was specified by the user.
+ */
+      ret = keyfn(gl, count);
+/*
+ * Reset the repeat count after running action functions (other
+ * than digit-argument).
+ */
+      if(keyfn != gl_digit_argument)
+	gl->number = -1;
+      if(ret)
+	return 1;
+      return 0;
+      break;
+    case KT_AMBIG_MATCH:             /* Ambiguous match - so look ahead */
+      if(gl_read_character(gl, &c))  /* Get the next character */
+	return 1;
+      break;
+    case KT_NO_MATCH:
+/*
+ * If the first character looked like it might be a prefix of a key-sequence
+ * but it turned out not to be, ring the bell to tell the user that it
+ * wasn't recognised.
+ */
+      if(keyseq[0] != '\\' && keyseq[0] != '\t') {
+	gl_ring_bell(gl, 0);
+      } else {
+/*
+ * The user typed a single printable character that doesn't match
+ * the start of any keysequence, so add it to the line in accordance
+ * with the current repeat count.
+ */
+	count = gl->number >= 0 ? gl->number : 1;
+	for(i=0; i<count; i++)
+	  gl_add_char_to_line(gl, first_char);
+	gl->number = -1;
+      };
+      return 0;
+      break;
+    case KT_BAD_MATCH:
+      return 1;
+      break;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Key sequence too long to match.
+ */
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Configure the application and/or user-specific behavior of
+ * gl_get_line().
+ *
+ * Note that calling this function between calling new_GetLine() and
+ * the first call to new_GetLine(), disables the otherwise automatic
+ * reading of ~/.teclarc on the first call to gl_get_line().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl             GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  app_string  const char *  Either NULL, or a string containing one
+ *                            or more .teclarc command lines, separated
+ *                            by newline characters. This can be used to
+ *                            establish an application-specific
+ *                            configuration, without the need for an external
+ *                            file. This is particularly useful in embedded
+ *                            environments where there is no filesystem.
+ *  app_file    const char *  Either NULL, or the pathname of an
+ *                            application-specific .teclarc file. The
+ *                            contents of this file, if provided, are
+ *                            read after the contents of app_string[].
+ *  user_file   const char *  Either NULL, or the pathname of a
+ *                            user-specific .teclarc file. Except in
+ *                            embedded applications, this should
+ *                            usually be "~/.teclarc".
+ * Output:
+ *  return             int    0 - OK.
+ *                            1 - Bad argument(s).
+ */
+int gl_configure_getline(GetLine *gl, const char *app_string,
+			 const char *app_file, const char *user_file)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_configure_getline: NULL gl argument.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Mark getline as having been explicitly configured.
+ */
+  gl->configured = 1;
+/*
+ * Start by parsing the configuration string, if provided.
+ */
+  if(app_string)
+    (void) _gl_read_config_string(gl, app_string, KTB_NORM);
+/*
+ * Now parse the application-specific configuration file, if provided.
+ */
+  if(app_file)
+    (void) _gl_read_config_file(gl, app_file, KTB_NORM);
+/*
+ * Finally, parse the user-specific configuration file, if provided.
+ */
+  if(user_file)
+    (void) _gl_read_config_file(gl, user_file, KTB_USER);
+/*
+ * Record the names of the configuration files to allow them to
+ * be re-read if requested at a later time.
+ */
+  if(gl_record_string(&gl->app_file, app_file) ||
+     gl_record_string(&gl->user_file, user_file)) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+	    "Insufficient memory to record tecla configuration file names.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Replace a malloc'd string (or NULL), with another malloc'd copy of
+ * a string (or NULL).
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sptr          char **  On input if *sptr!=NULL, *sptr will be
+ *                         free'd and *sptr will be set to NULL. Then,
+ *                         on output, if string!=NULL a malloc'd copy
+ *                         of this string will be assigned to *sptr.
+ *  string  const char *   The string to be copied, or NULL to simply
+ *                         discard any existing string.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int     0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Malloc failure (no error message is generated).
+ */
+static int gl_record_string(char **sptr, const char *string)
+{
+/*
+ * If the original string is the same string, don't do anything.
+ */
+  if(*sptr == string || (*sptr && string && strcmp(*sptr, string)==0))
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Discard any existing cached string.
+ */
+  if(*sptr) {
+    free(*sptr);
+    *sptr = NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate memory for a copy of the specified string.
+ */
+  if(string) {
+    *sptr = (char *) malloc(strlen(string) + 1);
+    if(!*sptr)
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Copy the string.
+ */
+    strcpy(*sptr, string);
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Re-read any application-specific and user-specific files previously
+ * specified via the gl_configure_getline() function.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_read_init_files)
+{
+  return gl_configure_getline(gl, NULL, gl->app_file, gl->user_file);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Save the contents of the history buffer to a given new file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl             GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  filename    const char *  The name of the new file to write to.
+ *  comment     const char *  Extra information such as timestamps will
+ *                            be recorded on a line started with this
+ *                            string, the idea being that the file can
+ *                            double as a command file. Specify "" if
+ *                            you don't care.
+ *  max_lines          int    The maximum number of lines to save, or -1
+ *                            to save all of the lines in the history
+ *                            list.
+ * Output:
+ *  return             int     0 - OK.
+ *                             1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_save_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename, const char *comment,
+		    int max_lines)
+{
+  FileExpansion *expansion; /* The expansion of the filename */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl || !filename || !comment) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_save_history: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Expand the filename.
+ */
+  expansion = ef_expand_file(gl->ef, filename, -1);
+  if(!expansion) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Unable to expand %s (%s).\n", filename,
+            ef_last_error(gl->ef));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Attempt to save to the specified file.
+ */
+  return _glh_save_history(gl->glh, expansion->files[0], comment, max_lines);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Restore the contents of the history buffer from a given new file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl             GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  filename    const char *  The name of the new file to write to.
+ *  comment     const char *  This must be the same string that was
+ *                            passed to gl_save_history() when the file
+ *                            was written.
+ * Output:
+ *  return             int     0 - OK.
+ *                             1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_load_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename, const char *comment)
+{
+  FileExpansion *expansion; /* The expansion of the filename */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl || !filename || !comment) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_load_history: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Expand the filename.
+ */
+  expansion = ef_expand_file(gl->ef, filename, -1);
+  if(!expansion) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Unable to expand %s (%s).\n", filename,
+            ef_last_error(gl->ef));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Attempt to load from the specified file.
+ */
+  if(_glh_load_history(gl->glh, expansion->files[0], comment,
+		       gl->cutbuf, gl->linelen)) {
+    gl->cutbuf[0] = '\0';
+    return 1;
+  };
+  gl->cutbuf[0] = '\0';
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Where possible, register a function and associated data to be called
+ * whenever a specified event is seen on a file descriptor.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ *  fd                int    The file descriptor to watch.
+ *  event       GlFdEvent    The type of activity to watch for.
+ *  callback  GlFdEventFn *  The function to call when the specified
+ *                           event occurs. Setting this to 0 removes
+ *                           any existing callback.
+ *  data             void *  A pointer to arbitrary data to pass to the
+ *                           callback function.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Either gl==NULL, or this facility isn't
+ *                               available on the the host system
+ *                               (ie. select() isn't available). No
+ *                               error message is generated in the latter
+ *                               case.
+ */
+int gl_watch_fd(GetLine *gl, int fd, GlFdEvent event,
+		GlFdEventFn *callback, void *data)
+#if !defined(HAVE_SELECT)
+{return 1;}               /* The facility isn't supported on this system */
+#else
+{
+  GlFdNode *prev;  /* The node that precedes 'node' in gl->fd_nodes */
+  GlFdNode *node;  /* The file-descriptor node being checked */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_watch_fd: NULL gl argument.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+  if(fd < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_watch_fd: Error fd < 0.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Search the list of already registered fd activity nodes for the specified
+ * file descriptor.
+ */
+  for(prev=NULL,node=gl->fd_nodes; node && node->fd != fd;
+      prev=node, node=node->next)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Hasn't a node been allocated for this fd yet?
+ */
+  if(!node) {
+/*
+ * If there is no callback to record, just ignore the call.
+ */
+    if(!callback)
+      return 0;
+/*
+ * Allocate the new node.
+ */
+    node = (GlFdNode *) _new_FreeListNode(gl->fd_node_mem);
+    if(!node) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "gl_watch_fd: Insufficient memory.\n");
+      return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Prepend the node to the list.
+ */
+    node->next = gl->fd_nodes;
+    gl->fd_nodes = node;
+/*
+ * Initialize the node.
+ */
+    node->fd = fd;
+    node->rd.fn = 0;
+    node->rd.data = NULL;
+    node->ur = node->wr = node->rd;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the new callback.
+ */
+  switch(event) {
+  case GLFD_READ:
+    node->rd.fn = callback;
+    node->rd.data = data;
+    if(callback)
+      FD_SET(fd, &gl->rfds);
+    else
+      FD_CLR(fd, &gl->rfds);
+    break;
+  case GLFD_WRITE:
+    node->wr.fn = callback;
+    node->wr.data = data;
+    if(callback)
+      FD_SET(fd, &gl->wfds);
+    else
+      FD_CLR(fd, &gl->wfds);
+    break;
+  case GLFD_URGENT:
+    node->ur.fn = callback;
+    node->ur.data = data;
+    if(callback)
+      FD_SET(fd, &gl->ufds);
+    else
+      FD_CLR(fd, &gl->ufds);
+    break;
+  };
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the largest file descriptor being watched.
+ */
+  if(fd > gl->max_fd)
+    gl->max_fd = fd;
+/*
+ * If we are deleting an existing callback, also delete the parent
+ * activity node if no callbacks are registered to the fd anymore.
+ */
+  if(!callback) {
+    if(!node->rd.fn && !node->wr.fn && !node->ur.fn) {
+      if(prev)
+	prev->next = node->next;
+      else
+	gl->fd_nodes = node->next;
+      node = (GlFdNode *) _del_FreeListNode(gl->fd_node_mem, node);
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * When select() is available, this function is called by
+ * gl_read_character() to respond to file-descriptor events registered by
+ * the caller.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl    GetLine *  The resource object of this module.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    0 - A character is waiting to be read from the
+ *                       terminal.
+ *                   1 - An error occurred.
+ */
+static int gl_event_handler(GetLine *gl)
+{
+/*
+ * If at any time no external callbacks remain, quit the loop return,
+ * so that we can simply wait in read(). This is designed as an
+ * optimization for when no callbacks have been registered on entry to
+ * this function, but since callbacks can delete themselves, it can
+ * also help later.
+ */
+  while(gl->fd_nodes) {
+/*
+ * Get the set of descriptors to be watched.
+ */
+    fd_set rfds = gl->rfds;
+    fd_set wfds = gl->wfds;
+    fd_set ufds = gl->ufds;
+/*
+ * Wait for activity on any of the file descriptors.
+ */
+    int nready = select(gl->max_fd+1, &rfds, &wfds, &ufds, NULL);
+/*
+ * If select() returns but none of the file descriptors are reported
+ * to have activity, then select() timed out.
+ */
+    if(nready == 0) {
+      fprintf(stdout, "\r\nUnexpected select() timeout\r\n");
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * If nready < 0, this means an error occurred.
+ */
+    } else if(nready < 0) {
+      if(errno != EINTR) {
+#ifdef EAGAIN
+	if(!errno)          /* This can happen with SysV O_NDELAY */
+	  errno = EAGAIN;
+#endif
+	return 1;
+      };
+/*
+ * If the terminal input file descriptor has data available, return.
+ */
+    } else if(FD_ISSET(gl->input_fd, &rfds)) {
+      return 0;
+/*
+ * Check for activity on any of the file descriptors registered by the
+ * calling application, and call the associated callback functions.
+ */
+    } else {
+      GlFdNode *node;   /* The fd event node being checked */
+/*
+ * Search the list for the file descriptor that caused select() to return.
+ */
+      for(node=gl->fd_nodes; node; node=node->next) {
+/*
+ * Is there urgent out of band data waiting to be read on fd?
+ */
+	if(node->ur.fn && FD_ISSET(node->fd, &ufds)) {
+	  if(gl_call_fd_handler(gl, &node->ur, node->fd, GLFD_URGENT))
+	    return 1;
+	  break;  /* The callback may have changed the list of nodes */
+/*
+ * Is the fd readable?
+ */
+	} else if(node->rd.fn && FD_ISSET(node->fd, &rfds)) {
+	  if(gl_call_fd_handler(gl, &node->rd, node->fd, GLFD_READ))
+	    return 1;
+	  break;  /* The callback may have changed the list of nodes */
+/*
+ * Is the fd writable?
+ */
+	} else if(node->wr.fn && FD_ISSET(node->fd, &rfds)) {
+	  if(gl_call_fd_handler(gl, &node->wr, node->fd, GLFD_WRITE))
+	    return 1;
+	  break;  /* The callback may have changed the list of nodes */
+	};
+      };
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a private function of gl_event_handler(), used to call a
+ * file-descriptor callback.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  gfh  GlFdHandler *  The I/O handler.
+ *  fd           int    The file-descriptor being reported.
+ *  event  GlFdEvent    The I/O event being reported.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_call_fd_handler(GetLine *gl, GlFdHandler *gfh, int fd,
+			      GlFdEvent event)
+{
+  Termios attr;       /* The terminal attributes */
+  int redisplay = 0;  /* True to have the input line redisplayed */
+  int waserr = 0;     /* True after any error */
+/*
+ * We don't want to do a longjmp in the middle of a callback that
+ * might be modifying global or heap data, so block all the signals
+ * that we are trapping.
+ */
+  if(sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &gl->new_signal_set, NULL) == -1) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "getline(): sigprocmask error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Re-enable conversion of newline characters to carriage-return/linefeed,
+ * so that the callback can write to the terminal without having to do
+ * anything special.
+ */
+  if(tcgetattr(gl->input_fd, &attr)) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "\r\ngetline(): tcgetattr error: %s\r\n", strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+  attr.c_oflag |= OPOST;
+  while(tcsetattr(gl->input_fd, TCSADRAIN, &attr)) {
+    if (errno != EINTR) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "\r\ngetline(): tcsetattr error: %s\r\n",
+	      strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Invoke the application's callback function.
+ */
+  switch(gfh->fn(gl, gfh->data, fd, event)) {
+  default:
+  case GLFD_ABORT:
+    waserr = 1;
+    break;
+  case GLFD_REFRESH:
+    redisplay = 1;
+    break;
+  case GLFD_CONTINUE:
+    redisplay = gl->prompt_changed;
+    break;
+  };
+/*
+ * Disable conversion of newline characters to carriage-return/linefeed.
+ */
+  attr.c_oflag &= ~(OPOST);
+  while(tcsetattr(gl->input_fd, TCSADRAIN, &attr)) {
+    if(errno != EINTR) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "\ngetline(): tcsetattr error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * If requested, redisplay the input line.
+ */
+  if(redisplay && gl_redisplay(gl, 1))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Unblock the signals that we were trapping before this function
+ * was called.
+ */
+  if(sigprocmask(SIG_UNBLOCK, &gl->new_signal_set, NULL) == -1) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "getline(): sigprocmask error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return waserr;
+}
+#endif  /* HAVE_SELECT */
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Switch history groups. History groups represent separate history
+ * lists recorded within a single history buffer. Different groups
+ * are distinguished by integer identifiers chosen by the calling
+ * appplicaton. Initially new_GetLine() sets the group identifier to
+ * 0. Whenever a new line is appended to the history list, the current
+ * group identifier is recorded with it, and history lookups only
+ * consider lines marked with the current group identifier.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  id     unsigned    The new history group identifier.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_group_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned id)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_group_history: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the group isn't being changed, do nothing.
+ */
+  if(_glh_get_group(gl->glh) == id)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Establish the new group.
+ */
+  if(_glh_set_group(gl->glh, id))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Prevent history information from the previous group being
+ * inappropriately used by the next call to gl_get_line().
+ */
+  gl->preload_history = 0;
+  gl->last_search = -1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Display the contents of the history list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  fp         FILE *  The stdio output stream to write to.
+ *  fmt  const char *  A format string. This containing characters to be
+ *                     written verbatim, plus any of the following
+ *                     format directives:
+ *                       %D  -  The date, formatted like 2001-11-20
+ *                       %T  -  The time of day, formatted like 23:59:59
+ *                       %N  -  The sequential entry number of the
+ *                              line in the history buffer.
+ *                       %G  -  The number of the history group that
+ *                              the line belongs to.
+ *                       %%  -  A literal % character.
+ *                       %H  -  The history line itself.
+ *                     Note that a '\n' newline character is not
+ *                     appended by default.
+ *  all_groups  int    If true, display history lines from all
+ *                     history groups. Otherwise only display
+ *                     those of the current history group.
+ *  max_lines   int    If max_lines is < 0, all available lines
+ *                     are displayed. Otherwise only the most
+ *                     recent max_lines lines will be displayed.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_show_history(GetLine *gl, FILE *fp, const char *fmt, int all_groups,
+		    int max_lines)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl || !fp || !fmt) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_show_history: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return _glh_show_history(gl->glh, fp, fmt, all_groups, max_lines);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Update if necessary, and return the current size of the terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  def_ncolumn       int    If the number of columns in the terminal
+ *                           can't be determined, substitute this number.
+ *  def_nline         int    If the number of lines in the terminal can't
+ *                           be determined, substitute this number.
+ * Output:
+ *  return GlTerminalSize    The current terminal size.
+ */
+GlTerminalSize gl_terminal_size(GetLine *gl, int def_ncolumn, int def_nline)
+{
+  GlTerminalSize size;  /* The return value */
+  const char *env;      /* The value of an environment variable */
+  int n;                /* A number read from env[] */
+/*
+ * Set the number of lines and columns to non-sensical values so that
+ * we know later if they have been set.
+ */
+  gl->nline = 0;
+  gl->ncolumn = 0;
+/*
+ * Are we reading from a terminal?
+ */
+  if(gl->is_term) {
+/*
+ * Ask the terminal directly if possible.
+ */
+#ifdef USE_SIGWINCH
+    (void) gl_resize_terminal(gl, 0);
+#endif
+/*
+ * If gl_resize_terminal() couldn't be used, or it returned non-sensical
+ * values for the number of lines, see if the LINES environment variable
+ * exists and specifies a believable number. If this doesn't work,
+ * look up the default size in the terminal information database,
+ * where available.
+ */
+    if(gl->nline < 1) {
+      if((env = getenv("LINES")) && (n=atoi(env)) > 0)
+	gl->nline = n;
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+      else
+	gl->nline = tigetnum((char *)"lines");
+#elif defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+      else
+        gl->nline = tgetnum("li");
+#endif
+    };
+/*
+ * If gl_resize_terminal() couldn't be used, or it returned non-sensical
+ * values for the number of columns, see if the COLUMNS environment variable
+ * exists and specifies a believable number. If this doesn't work, fall
+ * lookup the default size in the terminal information database,
+ * where available.
+ */
+    if(gl->ncolumn < 1) {
+      if((env = getenv("COLUMNS")) && (n=atoi(env)) > 0)
+	gl->ncolumn = n;
+#ifdef USE_TERMINFO
+      else
+	gl->ncolumn = tigetnum((char *)"cols");
+#elif defined(USE_TERMCAP)
+      else
+	gl->ncolumn = tgetnum("co");
+#endif
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * If we still haven't been able to acquire reasonable values, substitute
+ * the default values specified by the caller.
+ */
+  if(gl->nline <= 0)
+    gl->nline = def_nline;
+  if(gl->ncolumn <= 0)
+    gl->ncolumn = def_ncolumn;
+/*
+ * Copy the new size into the return value.
+ */
+  size.nline = gl->nline;
+  size.ncolumn = gl->ncolumn;
+  return size;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Resize or delete the history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  bufsize  size_t    The number of bytes in the history buffer, or 0
+ *                     to delete the buffer completely.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Insufficient memory (the previous buffer
+ *                         will have been retained). No error message
+ *                         will be displayed.
+ */
+int gl_resize_history(GetLine *gl, size_t bufsize)
+{
+  return gl ? _glh_resize_history(gl->glh, bufsize) : 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Set an upper limit to the number of lines that can be recorded in the
+ * history list, or remove a previously specified limit.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  max_lines   int    The maximum number of lines to allow, or -1 to
+ *                     cancel a previous limit and allow as many lines
+ *                     as will fit in the current history buffer size.
+ */
+void gl_limit_history(GetLine *gl, int max_lines)
+{
+  if(gl)
+    _glh_limit_history(gl->glh, max_lines);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Discard either all historical lines, or just those associated with the
+ * current history group.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  all_groups  int    If true, clear all of the history. If false,
+ *                     clear only the stored lines associated with the
+ *                     currently selected history group.
+ */
+void gl_clear_history(GetLine *gl, int all_groups)
+{
+  if(gl)
+    _glh_clear_history(gl->glh, all_groups);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Temporarily enable or disable the gl_get_line() history mechanism.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  enable      int    If true, turn on the history mechanism. If
+ *                     false, disable it.
+ */
+void gl_toggle_history(GetLine *gl, int enable)
+{
+  if(gl)
+    _glh_toggle_history(gl->glh, enable);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup a history line by its sequential number of entry in the
+ * history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  id      unsigned long    The identification number of the line to
+ *                           be returned, where 0 denotes the first line
+ *                           that was entered in the history list, and
+ *                           each subsequently added line has a number
+ *                           one greater than the previous one. For
+ *                           the range of lines currently in the list,
+ *                           see the gl_range_of_history() function.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  line    GlHistoryLine *  A pointer to the variable in which to
+ *                           return the details of the line.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - The line is no longer in the history
+ *                               list, and *line has not been changed.
+ *                           1 - The requested line can be found in
+ *                               *line. Note that line->line is part
+ *                               of the history buffer, so a
+ *                               private copy should be made if you
+ *                               wish to use it after subsequent calls
+ *                               to any functions that take *gl as an
+ *                               argument.
+ */
+int gl_lookup_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned long id, GlHistoryLine *line)
+{
+  return gl ? _glh_lookup_history(gl->glh, (GlhLineID) id, &line->line,
+				  &line->group, &line->timestamp) : 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the state of the history list. Note that any of the input/output
+ * pointers can be specified as NULL.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  state  GlHistoryState *  A pointer to the variable in which to record
+ *                           the return values.
+ */
+void gl_state_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistoryState *state)
+{
+  if(gl && state)
+    _glh_state_of_history(gl->glh, &state->enabled, &state->group,
+			  &state->max_lines);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the number and range of lines in the history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  range  GlHistoryRange *  A pointer to the variable in which to record
+ *                           the return values. If range->nline=0, the
+ *                           range of lines will be given as 0-0.
+ */
+void gl_range_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistoryRange *range)
+{
+  if(gl && range)
+    _glh_range_of_history(gl->glh, &range->oldest, &range->newest,
+			  &range->nlines);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the size of the history buffer and the amount of the
+ * buffer that is currently in use.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The gl_get_line() resource object.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  GlHistorySize size *  A pointer to the variable in which to return
+ *                        the results.
+ */
+void gl_size_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistorySize *size)
+{
+  if(gl && size)
+    _glh_size_of_history(gl->glh, &size->size, &size->used);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is the action function that lists the contents of the history
+ * list.
+ */
+static KT_KEY_FN(gl_list_history)
+{
+/*
+ * Start a new line.
+ */
+  if(fprintf(gl->output_fp, "\r\n") < 0)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * List history lines that belong to the current group.
+ */
+  _glh_show_history(gl->glh, gl->output_fp, "%N  %T   %H\r\n", 0,
+		    count<=1 ? -1 : count);
+/*
+ * Redisplay the line being edited.
+ */
+  gl->term_curpos = 0;
+  return gl_redisplay(gl,1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Specify whether text that users type should be displayed or hidden.
+ * In the latter case, only the prompt is displayed, and the final
+ * input line is not archived in the history list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The gl_get_line() resource object.
+ *  enable         int     0 - Disable echoing.
+ *                         1 - Enable echoing.
+ *                        -1 - Just query the mode without changing it.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    The echoing disposition that was in effect
+ *                        before this function was called:
+ *                         0 - Echoing was disabled.
+ *                         1 - Echoing was enabled.
+ */
+int gl_echo_mode(GetLine *gl, int enable)
+{
+  if(gl) {
+    int was_echoing = gl->echo;
+    if(enable >= 0)
+      gl->echo = enable;
+    return was_echoing;
+  };
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Display the prompt.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    0 - OK.
+ *                        1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_display_prompt(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  const char *pptr;       /* A pointer into gl->prompt[] */
+  unsigned old_attr=0;    /* The current text display attributes */
+  unsigned new_attr=0;    /* The requested text display attributes */
+/*
+ * Temporarily switch to echoing output characters.
+ */
+  int kept_echo = gl->echo;
+  gl->echo = 1;
+/*
+ * In case the screen got messed up, send a carriage return to
+ * put the cursor at the beginning of the current terminal line.
+ */
+  if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->bol))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Write the prompt, using the currently selected prompt style.
+ */
+  switch(gl->prompt_style) {
+  case GL_LITERAL_PROMPT:
+    if(gl_output_string(gl, gl->prompt, '\0'))
+      return 1;
+    break;
+  case GL_FORMAT_PROMPT:
+    for(pptr=gl->prompt; *pptr; pptr++) {
+/*
+ * Does the latest character appear to be the start of a directive?
+ */
+      if(*pptr == '%') {
+/*
+ * Check for and act on attribute changing directives.
+ */
+	switch(pptr[1]) {
+/*
+ * Add or remove a text attribute from the new set of attributes.
+ */ 
+	case 'B': case 'U': case 'S': case 'P': case 'F': case 'V':
+	case 'b': case 'u': case 's': case 'p': case 'f': case 'v':
+	  switch(*++pptr) {
+	  case 'B':           /* Switch to a bold font */
+	    new_attr |= GL_TXT_BOLD;
+	    break;
+	  case 'b':           /* Switch to a non-bold font */
+	    new_attr &= ~GL_TXT_BOLD;
+	    break;
+	  case 'U':           /* Start underlining */
+	    new_attr |= GL_TXT_UNDERLINE;
+	    break;
+	  case 'u':           /* Stop underlining */
+	    new_attr &= ~GL_TXT_UNDERLINE;
+	    break;
+	  case 'S':           /* Start highlighting */
+	    new_attr |= GL_TXT_STANDOUT;
+	    break;
+	  case 's':           /* Stop highlighting */
+	    new_attr &= ~GL_TXT_STANDOUT;
+	    break;
+	  case 'P':           /* Switch to a pale font */
+	    new_attr |= GL_TXT_DIM;
+	    break;
+	  case 'p':           /* Switch to a non-pale font */
+	    new_attr &= ~GL_TXT_DIM;
+	    break;
+	  case 'F':           /* Switch to a flashing font */
+	    new_attr |= GL_TXT_BLINK;
+	    break;
+	  case 'f':           /* Switch to a steady font */
+	    new_attr &= ~GL_TXT_BLINK;
+	    break;
+	  case 'V':           /* Switch to reverse video */
+	    new_attr |= GL_TXT_REVERSE;
+	    break;
+	  case 'v':           /* Switch out of reverse video */
+	    new_attr &= ~GL_TXT_REVERSE;
+	    break;
+	  };
+	  continue;
+/*
+ * A literal % is represented by %%. Skip the leading %.
+ */
+	case '%':
+	  pptr++;
+	  break;
+	};
+      };
+/*
+ * Many terminals, when asked to turn off a single text attribute, turn
+ * them all off, so the portable way to turn one off individually is to
+ * explicitly turn them all off, then specify those that we want from
+ * scratch.
+ */
+      if(old_attr & ~new_attr) {
+	if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->text_attr_off))
+	  return 1;
+	old_attr = 0;
+      };
+/*
+ * Install new text attributes?
+ */
+      if(new_attr != old_attr) {
+	if(new_attr & GL_TXT_BOLD && !(old_attr & GL_TXT_BOLD) &&
+	   gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->bold))
+	  return 1;
+	if(new_attr & GL_TXT_UNDERLINE && !(old_attr & GL_TXT_UNDERLINE) &&
+	   gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->underline))
+	  return 1;
+	if(new_attr & GL_TXT_STANDOUT && !(old_attr & GL_TXT_STANDOUT) &&
+	   gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->standout))
+	  return 1;
+	if(new_attr & GL_TXT_DIM && !(old_attr & GL_TXT_DIM) &&
+	   gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->dim))
+	  return 1;
+	if(new_attr & GL_TXT_REVERSE && !(old_attr & GL_TXT_REVERSE) &&
+	   gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->reverse))
+	  return 1;
+	if(new_attr & GL_TXT_BLINK && !(old_attr & GL_TXT_BLINK) &&
+	   gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->blink))
+	  return 1;
+	old_attr = new_attr;
+      };
+/*
+ * Display the latest character.
+ */
+      if(gl_output_char(gl, *pptr, pptr[1]))
+	return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Turn off all text attributes now that we have finished drawing
+ * the prompt.
+ */
+    if(gl_output_control_sequence(gl, 1, gl->text_attr_off))
+      return 1;
+    break;
+  };
+/*
+ * Restore the original echo mode.
+ */
+  gl->echo = kept_echo;
+/*
+ * The prompt has now been displayed at least once.
+ */
+  gl->prompt_changed = 0;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function can be called from gl_get_line() callbacks to have
+ * the prompt changed when they return. It has no effect if gl_get_line()
+ * is not currently being invoked.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  prompt  const char *  The new prompt.
+ */
+void gl_replace_prompt(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt)
+{
+  if(gl) {
+    gl->prompt = prompt ? prompt : "";
+    gl->prompt_len = gl_displayed_prompt_width(gl);
+    gl->prompt_changed = 1;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Work out the length of the current prompt on the terminal, according
+ * to the current prompt formatting style.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    The number of displayed characters.
+ */
+static int gl_displayed_prompt_width(GetLine *gl)
+{
+  int slen=0;         /* The displayed number of characters */
+  const char *pptr;   /* A pointer into prompt[] */
+/*
+ * The length differs according to the prompt display style.
+ */
+  switch(gl->prompt_style) {
+  case GL_LITERAL_PROMPT:
+    return gl_displayed_string_width(gl, gl->prompt, -1, 0);
+    break;
+  case GL_FORMAT_PROMPT:
+/*
+ * Add up the length of the displayed string, while filtering out
+ * attribute directives.
+ */
+    for(pptr=gl->prompt; *pptr; pptr++) {
+/*
+ * Does the latest character appear to be the start of a directive?
+ */
+      if(*pptr == '%') {
+/*
+ * Check for and skip attribute changing directives.
+ */
+	switch(pptr[1]) {
+	case 'B': case 'b': case 'U': case 'u': case 'S': case 's':
+	  pptr++;
+	  continue;
+/*
+ * A literal % is represented by %%. Skip the leading %.
+ */
+	case '%':
+	  pptr++;
+	  break;
+	};
+      };
+      slen += gl_displayed_char_width(gl, *pptr, slen);
+    };
+    break;
+  };
+  return slen;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Specify whether to heed text attribute directives within prompt
+ * strings.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  style  GlPromptStyle    The style of prompt (see the definition of
+ *                          GlPromptStyle in libtecla.h for details).
+ */
+void gl_prompt_style(GetLine *gl, GlPromptStyle style)
+{
+  if(gl) {
+    if(style != gl->prompt_style) {
+      gl->prompt_style = style;
+      gl->prompt_len = gl_displayed_prompt_width(gl);
+      gl->prompt_changed = 1;
+    };
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Tell gl_get_line() how to respond to a given signal. This can be used
+ * both to override the default responses to signals that gl_get_line()
+ * normally catches and to add new signals to the list that are to be
+ * caught.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  signo            int    The number of the signal to be caught.
+ *  flags       unsigned    A bitwise union of GlSignalFlags enumerators.
+ *  after  GlAfterSignal    What to do after the application's signal
+ *                          handler has been called.
+ *  errno_value      int    The value to set errno to.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_trap_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo, unsigned flags,
+		   GlAfterSignal after, int errno_value)
+{
+  GlSignalNode *sig;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_trap_signal: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * See if the signal has already been registered.
+ */
+  for(sig=gl->sigs; sig && sig->signo != signo; sig = sig->next)
+    ;
+/*
+ * If the signal hasn't already been registered, allocate a node for
+ * it.
+ */
+  if(!sig) {
+    sig = (GlSignalNode *) _new_FreeListNode(gl->sig_mem);
+    if(!sig)
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Add the new node to the head of the list.
+ */
+    sig->next = gl->sigs;
+    gl->sigs = sig;
+/*
+ * Record the signal number.
+ */
+    sig->signo = signo;
+/*
+ * Create a signal set that includes just this signal.
+ */
+    sigemptyset(&sig->proc_mask);
+    if(sigaddset(&sig->proc_mask, signo) == -1) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "gl_trap_signal: sigaddset error: %s\n",
+	      strerror(errno));
+      sig = (GlSignalNode *) _del_FreeListNode(gl->sig_mem, sig);
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the new signal attributes.
+ */
+  sig->flags = flags;
+  sig->after = after;
+  sig->errno_value = errno_value;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Remove a signal from the list of signals that gl_get_line() traps.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  signo            int    The number of the signal to be ignored.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_ignore_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo)
+{
+  GlSignalNode *sig;  /* The gl->sigs list node of the specified signal */
+  GlSignalNode *prev; /* The node that precedes sig in the list */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!gl) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "gl_ignore_signal: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Find the node of the gl->sigs list which records the disposition
+ * of the specified signal.
+ */
+  for(prev=NULL,sig=gl->sigs; sig && sig->signo != signo;
+      prev=sig,sig=sig->next)
+    ;
+  if(sig) {
+/*
+ * Remove the node from the list.
+ */
+    if(prev)
+      prev->next = sig->next;
+    else
+      gl->sigs = sig->next;
+/*
+ * Return the node to the freelist.
+ */
+    sig = (GlSignalNode *) _del_FreeListNode(gl->sig_mem, sig);
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function is called when an input line has been completed. It
+ * appends the specified newline character, terminates the line,
+ * records the line in the history buffer if appropriate, and positions
+ * the terminal cursor at the start of the next line.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  newline_char     int    The newline character to add to the end
+ *                          of the line.
+ *  archive          int    True to have the line archived in the
+ *                          history buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+static int gl_line_ended(GetLine *gl, int newline_char, int archive)
+{
+/*
+ * If the newline character is printable, display it.
+ */
+  if(isprint((int)(unsigned char) newline_char)) {
+    if(gl_end_of_line(gl, 1) || gl_add_char_to_line(gl, newline_char))
+      return 1;
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Otherwise just append it to the input line buffer.
+ */
+    gl->line[gl->ntotal++] = newline_char;
+    gl->line[gl->ntotal] = '\0';
+  };
+/*
+ * Add the line to the history buffer if it was entered with a
+ * newline or carriage return character.
+ */
+  if(archive)
+    (void) _glh_add_history(gl->glh, gl->line, 0);
+/*
+ * Unless depending on the system-provided line editing, start a new
+ * line after the end of the line that has just been entered.
+ */
+  if(gl->editor != GL_NO_EDITOR) {
+    if(gl_end_of_line(gl, 1) ||
+       gl_output_raw_string(gl, "\r\n"))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the last signal that was caught by the most recent call to
+ * gl_get_line(), or -1 if no signals were caught. This is useful if
+ * gl_get_line() returns errno=EINTR and you need to find out what signal
+ * caused it to abort.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    The last signal caught by the most recent
+ *                          call to gl_get_line(), or -1 if no signals
+ *                          were caught.
+ */
+int gl_last_signal(const GetLine *gl)
+{
+  return gl ? gl->last_signal : -1;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/getline.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/getline.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..24b0875
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/getline.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+#ifndef getline_h
+#define getline_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Set the name of the getline configuration file.
+ */
+#define TECLA_CONFIG_FILE "~/.teclarc"
+
+/*
+ * The following macro returns non-zero if a character is
+ * a control character.
+ */
+#define IS_CTRL_CHAR(c) ((unsigned char)(c) < ' ' || (unsigned char)(c)=='\177')
+
+/*
+ * The following macro returns non-zero if a character is
+ * a meta character.
+ */
+#define IS_META_CHAR(c) (((unsigned char)(c) & 0x80) && !isprint((int)(unsigned char)(c)))
+
+/*
+ * Return the character that would be produced by pressing the
+ * specified key plus the control key.
+ */
+#define MAKE_CTRL(c) ((c)=='?' ? '\177' : ((unsigned char)toupper(c) & ~0x40))
+
+/*
+ * Return the character that would be produced by pressing the
+ * specified key plus the meta key.
+ */
+#define MAKE_META(c) ((unsigned char)(c) | 0x80)
+
+/*
+ * Given a binary control character, return the character that
+ * had to be pressed at the same time as the control key.
+ */
+#define CTRL_TO_CHAR(c) (toupper((unsigned char)(c) | 0x40))
+
+/*
+ * Given a meta character, return the character that was pressed
+ * at the same time as the meta key.
+ */
+#define META_TO_CHAR(c) ((unsigned char)(c) & ~0x80)
+
+/*
+ * Specify the string of characters other than the alphanumeric characters,
+ * that are to be considered parts of words.
+ */
+#define GL_WORD_CHARS "_*\?\\[]"
+
+/*
+ * Define the escape character, both as a string and as a character.
+ */
+#define GL_ESC_STR "\033"
+#define GL_ESC_CHAR '\033'
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/hash.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/hash.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89f8245
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/hash.c
@@ -0,0 +1,748 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+#include "hash.h"
+#include "strngmem.h"
+#include "freelist.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following container object contains free-lists to be used
+ * for allocation of HashTable containers and nodes.
+ */
+struct HashMemory {
+  FreeList *hash_memory;    /* HashTable free-list */
+  FreeList *node_memory;    /* HashNode free-list */
+  StringMem *string_memory; /* Memory used to allocate hash strings */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Define a hash symbol-table entry.
+ * See symbol.h for the definition of the Symbol container type.
+ */
+typedef struct HashNode HashNode;
+struct HashNode {
+  Symbol symbol;       /* The symbol stored in the hash-entry */
+  HashNode *next;      /* The next hash-table entry in a bucket list */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Each hash-table bucket contains a linked list of entries that
+ * hash to the same bucket.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  HashNode *head;   /* The head of the bucket hash-node list */
+  int count;        /* The number of entries in the list */
+} HashBucket;
+
+/*
+ * Set the max length of the error-reporting string. There is no point
+ * in this being longer than the width of a typical terminal window.
+ * In composing error messages, I have assumed that this number is
+ * at least 80, so you don't decrease it below this number.
+ */
+#define ERRLEN 200
+
+/*
+ * A hash-table consists of 'size' hash buckets.
+ * Note that the HashTable typedef for this struct is contained in hash.h.
+ */
+struct HashTable {
+  char errmsg[ERRLEN+1];/* Error-report buffer */
+  HashMemory *mem;      /* HashTable free-list */
+  int internal_mem;     /* True if 'mem' was allocated by _new_HashTable() */
+  int case_sensitive;   /* True if case is significant in lookup keys */
+  int size;             /* The number of hash buckets */
+  HashBucket *bucket;   /* An array of 'size' hash buckets */
+  int (*keycmp)(const char *, const char *); /* Key comparison function */
+  void *app_data;       /* Application-provided data */
+  HASH_DEL_FN(*del_fn); /* Application-provided 'app_data' destructor */
+};
+
+static HashNode *_del_HashNode(HashTable *hash, HashNode *node);
+static HashNode *_new_HashNode(HashTable *hash, const char *name, int code,
+		      void (*fn)(void), void *data, SYM_DEL_FN(*del_fn));
+static HashNode *_find_HashNode(HashTable *hash, HashBucket *bucket,
+				const char *name, HashNode **prev);
+static HashBucket *_find_HashBucket(HashTable *hash, const char *name);
+static int _ht_lower_strcmp(const char *node_key, const char *look_key);
+static int _ht_strcmp(const char *node_key, const char *look_key);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Allocate a free-list for use in allocating hash tables and their nodes.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  list_count    int    The number of HashTable containers per free-list
+ *                       block.
+ *  node_count    int    The number of HashTable nodes per free-list block.
+ * Output:
+ *  return HashMemory *  The new free-list for use in allocating hash tables
+ *                       and their nodes.
+ */
+HashMemory *_new_HashMemory(int hash_count, int node_count)
+{
+  HashMemory *mem;
+/*
+ * Allocate the free-list container.
+ */
+  mem = (HashMemory *) malloc(sizeof(HashMemory));
+  if(!mem) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_HashMemory: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Initialize the container at least up to the point at which it can
+ * safely be passed to _del_HashMemory().
+ */
+  mem->hash_memory = NULL;
+  mem->node_memory = NULL;
+  mem->string_memory = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate the two free-lists.
+ */
+  mem->hash_memory = _new_FreeList("_new_HashMemory", sizeof(HashTable),
+				  hash_count);
+  if(!mem->hash_memory)
+    return _del_HashMemory(mem, 1);
+  mem->node_memory = _new_FreeList("_new_HashMemory", sizeof(HashNode),
+				  node_count);
+  if(!mem->node_memory)
+    return _del_HashMemory(mem, 1);
+  mem->string_memory = _new_StringMem("_new_HashMemory", 64);
+  if(!mem->string_memory)
+    return _del_HashMemory(mem, 1);
+/*
+ * Return the free-list container.
+ */
+  return mem;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a HashTable free-list. An error will be displayed if the list is
+ * still in use and the deletion will be aborted.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  mem    HashMemory *  The free-list container to be deleted.
+ *  force         int    If force==0 then _del_HashMemory() will complain
+ *                        and refuse to delete the free-list if any
+ *                        of nodes have not been returned to the free-list.
+ *                       If force!=0 then _del_HashMemory() will not check
+ *                        whether any nodes are still in use and will
+ *                        always delete the list.
+ * Output:
+ *  return HashMemory *  Always NULL (even if the memory could not be
+ *                       deleted).
+ */
+HashMemory *_del_HashMemory(HashMemory *mem, int force)
+{
+  const char *caller = "_del_HashMemory";
+  if(mem) {
+    if(!force && (_busy_FreeListNodes(mem->hash_memory) > 0 ||
+		  _busy_FreeListNodes(mem->node_memory) > 0)) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s: Free-list in use.\n", caller);
+      return NULL;
+    };
+    mem->hash_memory = _del_FreeList(caller, mem->hash_memory, force);
+    mem->node_memory = _del_FreeList(caller, mem->node_memory, force);
+    mem->string_memory = _del_StringMem(caller, mem->string_memory, force);
+    free(mem);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new hash table.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  mem       HashMemory *  An optional free-list for use in allocating
+ *                          HashTable containers and nodes. See explanation
+ *                          in hash.h. If you are going to allocate more
+ *                          than one hash table, then it will be more
+ *                          efficient to allocate a single free-list for
+ *                          all of them than to force each hash table
+ *                          to allocate its own private free-list.
+ *  size             int    The size of the hash table. Best performance
+ *                          will be acheived if this is a prime number.
+ *  hcase       HashCase    Specify how symbol case is considered when
+ *                          looking up symbols, from:
+ *                           IGNORE_CASE - Upper and lower case versions
+ *                                         of a letter are treated as
+ *                                         being identical.
+ *                           HONOUR_CASE - Upper and lower case versions
+ *                                         of a letter are treated as
+ *                                         being distinct.
+ *                          characters in a lookup name is significant.
+ *  app_data        void *  Optional application data to be registered
+ *                          to the table. This is presented to user
+ *                          provided SYM_DEL_FN() symbol destructors along
+ *                          with the symbol data.
+ *  del_fn() HASH_DEL_FN(*) If you want app_data to be free'd when the
+ *                          hash-table is destroyed, register a suitable
+ *                          destructor function here.
+ * Output:
+ *  return HashTable *  The new hash table, or NULL on error.
+ */
+HashTable *_new_HashTable(HashMemory *mem, int size, HashCase hcase,
+			 void *app_data, HASH_DEL_FN(*del_fn))
+{
+  HashTable *hash;         /* The table to be returned */
+  int allocate_mem = !mem; /* True if mem should be internally allocated */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(size <= 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_HashTable: Illegal table size (%d).\n", size);
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate an internal free-list?
+ */
+  if(allocate_mem) {
+    mem = _new_HashMemory(1, 100);
+    if(!mem)
+      return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  hash = (HashTable *) _new_FreeListNode(mem->hash_memory);
+  if(!hash) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_HashTable: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    if(allocate_mem)
+      mem = _del_HashMemory(mem, 1);
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize
+ * the container at least up to the point at which it can safely
+ * be passed to _del_HashTable().
+ */
+  hash->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+  hash->mem = mem;
+  hash->internal_mem = allocate_mem;
+  hash->case_sensitive = hcase==HONOUR_CASE;
+  hash->size = size;
+  hash->bucket = NULL;
+  hash->keycmp = hash->case_sensitive ? _ht_strcmp : _ht_lower_strcmp;
+  hash->app_data = app_data;
+  hash->del_fn = del_fn;
+/*
+ * Allocate the array of 'size' hash buckets.
+ */
+  hash->bucket = (HashBucket *) malloc(sizeof(HashBucket) * size);
+  if(!hash->bucket) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_HashTable: Insufficient memory for %d buckets.\n",
+	    size);
+    return _del_HashTable(hash);
+  };
+/*
+ * Initialize the bucket array.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<size; i++) {
+    HashBucket *b = hash->bucket + i;
+    b->head = NULL;
+    b->count = 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * The table is ready for use - albeit currently empty.
+ */
+  return hash;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a hash-table.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash   HashTable *  The hash table to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return HashTable *  The deleted hash table (always NULL).
+ */
+HashTable *_del_HashTable(HashTable *hash)
+{
+  if(hash) {
+/*
+ * Clear and delete the bucket array.
+ */
+    if(hash->bucket) {
+      _clear_HashTable(hash);
+      free(hash->bucket);
+      hash->bucket = NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Delete application data.
+ */
+    if(hash->del_fn)
+      hash->del_fn(hash->app_data);
+/*
+ * If the hash table was allocated from an internal free-list, delete
+ * it and the hash table by deleting the free-list. Otherwise just
+ * return the hash-table to the external free-list.
+ */
+    if(hash->internal_mem)
+      _del_HashMemory(hash->mem, 1);
+    else
+      hash = (HashTable *) _del_FreeListNode(hash->mem->hash_memory, hash);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create and install a new entry in a hash table. If an entry with the
+ * same name already exists, replace its contents with the new data.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash   HashTable *  The hash table to insert the symbol into.
+ *  name  const char *  The name to tag the entry with.
+ *  code         int    An application-specific code to be stored in
+ *                      the entry.
+ *  fn  void (*)(void)  An application-specific function to be stored
+ *                      in the entry.
+ *  data        void *  An application-specific pointer to data to be
+ *                      associated with the entry, or NULL if not
+ *                      relevant.
+ *  del_fn SYM_DEL_FN(*) An optional destructor function. When the
+ *                      symbol is deleted this function will be called
+ *                      with the 'code' and 'data' arguments given
+ *                      above. Any application data that was registered
+ *                      to the table via the app_data argument of
+ *                      _new_HashTable() will also be passed.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  HashNode *  The new entry, or NULL if there was insufficient
+ *                      memory or the arguments were invalid.
+ */
+Symbol *_new_HashSymbol(HashTable *hash, const char *name, int code,
+			void (*fn)(void), void *data, SYM_DEL_FN(*del_fn))
+{
+  HashBucket *bucket;  /* The hash-bucket associated with the name */
+  HashNode *node;      /* The new node */
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(!hash || !name)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Get the hash bucket of the specified name.
+ */
+  bucket = _find_HashBucket(hash, name);
+/*
+ * See if a node with the same name already exists.
+ */
+  node = _find_HashNode(hash, bucket, name, NULL);
+/*
+ * If found, delete its contents by calling the user-supplied
+ * destructor function, if provided.
+ */
+  if(node) {
+    if(node->symbol.data && node->symbol.del_fn) {
+      node->symbol.data = node->symbol.del_fn(hash->app_data, node->symbol.code,
+					      node->symbol.data);
+    };
+/*
+ * Allocate a new node if necessary.
+ */
+  } else {
+    node = _new_HashNode(hash, name, code, fn, data, del_fn);
+    if(!node)
+      return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Install the node at the head of the hash-bucket list.
+ */
+  node->next = bucket->head;
+  bucket->head = node;
+  bucket->count++;
+  return &node->symbol;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Remove and delete a given hash-table entry.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash   HashTable *  The hash table to find the symbol in.
+ *  name  const char *  The name of the entry.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  HashNode *  The deleted hash node (always NULL).
+ */
+Symbol *_del_HashSymbol(HashTable *hash, const char *name)
+{
+  if(hash && name) {
+    HashBucket *bucket = _find_HashBucket(hash, name);
+    HashNode *prev;   /* The node preceding the located node */
+    HashNode *node = _find_HashNode(hash, bucket, name, &prev);
+/*
+ * Node found?
+ */
+    if(node) {
+/*
+ * Remove the node from the bucket list.
+ */
+      if(prev) {
+	prev->next = node->next;
+      } else {
+	bucket->head = node->next;
+      };
+/*
+ * Record the loss of a node.
+ */
+      bucket->count--;
+/*
+ * Delete the node.
+ */
+      (void) _del_HashNode(hash, node);
+    };
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Look up a symbol in the hash table.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash   HashTable *   The table to look up the string in.
+ *  name  const char *   The name of the symbol to look up.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    Symbol *   The located hash-table symbol, or NULL if not
+ *                       found.
+ */
+Symbol *_find_HashSymbol(HashTable *hash, const char *name)
+{
+  HashBucket *bucket;  /* The hash-table bucket associated with name[] */
+  HashNode *node;      /* The hash-table node of the requested symbol */
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(!hash)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Nothing to lookup?
+ */
+  if(!name)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Hash the name to a hash-table bucket.
+ */
+  bucket = _find_HashBucket(hash, name);
+/*
+ * Find the bucket entry that exactly matches the name.
+ */
+  node = _find_HashNode(hash, bucket, name, NULL);
+  if(!node)
+    return NULL;
+  return &node->symbol;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Private function used to allocate a hash-table node.
+ * The caller is responsible for checking that the specified symbol
+ * is unique and for installing the returned entry in the table.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash     HashTable *  The table to allocate the node for.
+ *  name    const char *  The name of the new entry.
+ *  code           int    A user-supplied context code.
+ *  fn  void (*)(void)    A user-supplied function pointer.
+ *  data          void *  A user-supplied data pointer.
+ *  del_fn  SYM_DEL_FN(*) An optional 'data' destructor function.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    HashNode *  The new node, or NULL on error.
+ */
+static HashNode *_new_HashNode(HashTable *hash, const char *name, int code,
+			      void (*fn)(void), void *data, SYM_DEL_FN(*del_fn))
+{
+  HashNode *node;  /* The new node */
+/*
+ * Allocate the new node from the free list.
+ */
+  node = (HashNode *) _new_FreeListNode(hash->mem->node_memory);
+  if(!node)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * contents of 'node' at least up to the point at which it can be
+ * safely passed to _del_HashNode().
+ */
+  node->symbol.name = NULL;
+  node->symbol.code = code;
+  node->symbol.fn = fn;
+  node->symbol.data = data;
+  node->symbol.del_fn = del_fn;
+  node->next = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate a copy of 'name'.
+ */
+  node->symbol.name = _new_StringMemString(hash->mem->string_memory,
+					  strlen(name) + 1);
+  if(!node->symbol.name)
+    return _del_HashNode(hash, node);
+/*
+ * If character-case is insignificant in the current table, convert the
+ * name to lower case while copying it.
+ */
+  if(hash->case_sensitive) {
+    strcpy(node->symbol.name, name);
+  } else {
+    const char *src = name;
+    char *dst = node->symbol.name;
+    for( ; *src; src++,dst++)
+      *dst = tolower(*src);
+    *dst = '\0';
+  };
+  return node;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Private function used to delete a hash-table node.
+ * The node must have been removed from its list before calling this
+ * function.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash   HashTable *  The table for which the node was originally
+ *                      allocated.
+ *  node    HashNode *  The node to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  HashNode *  The deleted node (always NULL).
+ */
+static HashNode *_del_HashNode(HashTable *hash, HashNode *node)
+{
+  if(node) {
+    node->symbol.name = _del_StringMemString(hash->mem->string_memory,
+					    node->symbol.name);
+/*
+ * Call the user-supplied data-destructor if provided.
+ */
+    if(node->symbol.data && node->symbol.del_fn)
+      node->symbol.data = node->symbol.del_fn(hash->app_data,
+					      node->symbol.code,
+					      node->symbol.data);
+/*
+ * Return the node to the free-list.
+ */
+    node->next = NULL;
+    node = (HashNode *) _del_FreeListNode(hash->mem->node_memory, node);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Private function to locate the hash bucket associated with a given
+ * name.
+ *
+ * This uses a hash-function described in the dragon-book
+ * ("Compilers - Principles, Techniques and Tools", by Aho, Sethi and
+ *  Ullman; pub. Adison Wesley) page 435.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash    HashTable *   The table to look up the string in.
+ *  name   const char *   The name of the symbol to look up.
+ * Output:
+ *  return HashBucket *   The located hash-bucket.
+ */
+static HashBucket *_find_HashBucket(HashTable *hash, const char *name)
+{
+  unsigned const char *kp;
+  unsigned long h = 0L;
+  if(hash->case_sensitive) {
+    for(kp=(unsigned const char *) name; *kp; kp++)
+      h = 65599UL * h + *kp;  /* 65599 is a prime close to 2^16 */
+  } else {
+    for(kp=(unsigned const char *) name; *kp; kp++)
+      h = 65599UL * h + tolower((int)*kp);  /* 65599 is a prime close to 2^16 */
+  };
+  return hash->bucket + (h % hash->size);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search for a given name in the entries of a given bucket.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash     HashTable *  The hash-table being searched.
+ *  bucket  HashBucket *  The bucket to search (use _find_HashBucket()).
+ *  name    const char *  The name to search for.
+ * Output:
+ *  prev      HashNode ** If prev!=NULL then the pointer to the node
+ *                        preceding the located node in the list will
+ *                        be recorded in *prev. This will be NULL either
+ *                        if the name is not found or the located node is
+ *                        at the head of the list of entries.
+ * return     HashNode *  The located hash-table node, or NULL if not
+ *                        found.
+ */
+static HashNode *_find_HashNode(HashTable *hash, HashBucket *bucket,
+			       const char *name, HashNode **prev)
+{
+  HashNode *last;  /* The previously searched node */
+  HashNode *node;  /* The node that is being searched */
+/*
+ * Search the list for a node containing the specified name.
+ */
+  for(last=NULL, node=bucket->head;
+      node && hash->keycmp(node->symbol.name, name)!=0;
+      last = node, node=node->next)
+    ;
+  if(prev)
+    *prev = node ? last : NULL;
+  return node;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * When hash->case_sensitive is zero this function is called
+ * in place of strcmp(). In such cases the hash-table names are stored
+ * as lower-case versions of the original strings so this function
+ * performs the comparison against lower-case copies of the characters
+ * of the string being compared.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  node_key   const char *  The lower-case hash-node key being compared
+ *                           against.
+ *  look_key   const char *  The lookup key.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    <0 if node_key < look_key.
+ *                            0 if node_key == look_key.
+ *                           >0 if node_key > look_key.
+ */
+static int _ht_lower_strcmp(const char *node_key, const char *look_key)
+{
+  int cn;  /* The latest character from node_key[] */
+  int cl;  /* The latest character from look_key[] */
+  do {
+    cn = *node_key++;
+    cl = *look_key++;
+  } while(cn && cn==tolower(cl));
+  return cn - tolower(cl);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a wrapper around strcmp for comparing hash-keys in a case
+ * sensitive manner. The reason for having this wrapper, instead of using
+ * strcmp() directly, is to make some C++ compilers happy. The problem
+ * is that when the library is compiled with a C++ compiler, the
+ * declaration of the comparison function is a C++ declaration, whereas
+ * strcmp() is a pure C function and thus although it appears to have the
+ * same declaration, the compiler disagrees.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  node_key   char *  The lower-case hash-node key being compared against.
+ *  look_key   char *  The lookup key.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    <0 if node_key < look_key.
+ *                      0 if node_key == look_key.
+ *                     >0 if node_key > look_key.
+ */
+static int _ht_strcmp(const char *node_key, const char *look_key)
+{
+  return strcmp(node_key, look_key);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Empty a hash-table by deleting all of its entries.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash    HashTable *  The hash table to clear.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int    0 - OK.
+ *                       1 - Invalid arguments.
+ */
+int _clear_HashTable(HashTable *hash)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!hash)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Clear the contents of the bucket array.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<hash->size; i++) {
+    HashBucket *bucket = hash->bucket + i;
+/*
+ * Delete the list of active hash nodes from the bucket.
+ */
+    HashNode *node = bucket->head;
+    while(node) {
+      HashNode *next = node->next;
+      (void) _del_HashNode(hash, node);
+      node = next;
+    };
+/*
+ * Mark the bucket as empty.
+ */
+    bucket->head = NULL;
+    bucket->count = 0;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Execute a given function on each entry of a hash table, returning
+ * before completion if the the specified function returns non-zero.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  hash       HashTable *    The table to traverse.
+ *  scan_fn HASH_SCAN_FN(*)   The function to call.
+ *  context         void *    Optional caller-specific context data
+ *                            to be passed to scan_fn().
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int      0 - OK.
+ *                            1 - Either the arguments were invalid, or
+ *                                scan_fn() returned non-zero at some
+ *                                point.
+ */
+int _scan_HashTable(HashTable *hash, HASH_SCAN_FN(*scan_fn), void *context)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!hash || !scan_fn)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Iterate through the buckets of the table.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<hash->size; i++) {
+    HashBucket *bucket = hash->bucket + i;
+    HashNode *node;
+/*
+ * Iterate through the list of symbols that fall into bucket i,
+ * passing each one to the caller-specified function.
+ */
+    for(node=bucket->head; node; node=node->next) {
+      if(scan_fn(&node->symbol, context))
+	return 1;
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/hash.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/hash.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13c0a2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/hash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+#ifndef hash_h
+#define hash_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * The following macro can be used to prototype or define a
+ * function that deletes the data of a symbol-table entry.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  app_data void *  The _new_HashTable() app_data argument.
+ *  code      int    The Symbol::code argument.
+ *  sym_data void *  The Symbol::data argument to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  void * The deleted data (always return NULL).
+ */
+#define SYM_DEL_FN(fn) void *(fn)(void *app_data, int code, void *sym_data)
+
+/*
+ * The following macro can be used to prototype or define a
+ * function that deletes the application-data of a hash-table.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  data    void * The _new_HashTable() 'app_data' argument to be
+ *                 deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  void * The deleted data (always return NULL).
+ */
+#define HASH_DEL_FN(fn) void *(fn)(void *app_data)
+
+/*
+ * The following is a container for recording the context
+ * of a symbol in a manner that is independant of the particular
+ * symbol-table implementation. Each hash-table entry contains
+ * the following user supplied parameters:
+ *
+ * 1. An optional integral parameter 'code'. This is useful for
+ *    enumerating a symbol or for describing what type of data
+ *    or function is stored in the symbol.
+ *
+ * 2. An optional generic function pointer. This is useful for
+ *    associating functions with names. The user is responsible
+ *    for casting between the generic function type and the
+ *    actual function type. The code field could be used to
+ *    enumerate what type of function to cast to.
+ *
+ * 3. An optional generic pointer to a static or heap-allocated
+ *    object. It is up to the user to cast this back to the
+ *    appropriate object type. Again, the code field could be used
+ *    to describe what type of object is stored there.
+ *    If the object is dynamically allocated and should be discarded
+ *    when the symbol is deleted from the symbol table, send a
+ *    destructor function to have it deleted automatically.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  char *name;           /* The name of the symbol */
+  int code;             /* Application supplied integral code */
+  void (*fn)(void);     /* Application supplied generic function */
+  void *data;           /* Application supplied context data */
+  SYM_DEL_FN(*del_fn);  /* Data destructor function */
+} Symbol;
+
+/*
+ * HashNode's and HashTable's are small objects. Separately allocating
+ * many such objects would normally cause memory fragmentation. To
+ * counter this, HashMemory objects are used. These contain
+ * dedicated free-lists formed from large dynamically allocated arrays
+ * of objects. One HashMemory object can be shared between multiple hash
+ * tables (within a single thread).
+ */
+typedef struct HashMemory HashMemory;
+
+  /* Create a free-list for allocation of hash tables and their nodes */
+
+HashMemory *_new_HashMemory(int hash_count, int node_count);
+
+  /* Delete a redundant free-list if not being used */
+
+HashMemory *_del_HashMemory(HashMemory *mem, int force);
+
+/*
+ * Declare an alias for the private HashTable structure defined in
+ * hash.c.
+ */
+typedef struct HashTable HashTable;
+
+/*
+ * Enumerate case-sensitivity options.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  IGNORE_CASE,     /* Ignore case when looking up symbols */
+  HONOUR_CASE      /* Honor case when looking up symbols */
+} HashCase;
+
+  /* Create a new hash-table */
+
+HashTable *_new_HashTable(HashMemory *mem, int size, HashCase hcase,
+			 void *app_data, HASH_DEL_FN(*del_fn));
+
+  /* Delete a reference to a hash-table */
+
+HashTable *_del_HashTable(HashTable *hash);
+
+  /* Add an entry to a hash table */
+
+Symbol *_new_HashSymbol(HashTable *hash, const char *key, int code,
+			void (*fn)(void), void *data, SYM_DEL_FN(*del_fn));
+
+  /* Remove and delete all the entries in a given hash table */
+
+int _clear_HashTable(HashTable *hash);
+
+  /* Remove and delete a given hash-table entry */
+
+Symbol *_del_HashSymbol(HashTable *hash, const char *key);
+
+  /* Lookup a given hash-table entry */
+
+Symbol *_find_HashSymbol(HashTable *hash, const char *key);
+
+  /* Execute a given function on each entry of a hash table, returning */
+  /*  before completion if the specified function returns non-zero. */
+
+#define HASH_SCAN_FN(fn)  int (fn)(Symbol *sym, void *context)
+
+int _scan_HashTable(HashTable *hash, HASH_SCAN_FN(*scan_fn), void *context);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/history.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/history.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a8d94f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/history.c
@@ -0,0 +1,2003 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+#include "history.h"
+#include "freelist.h"
+
+/*
+ * GlLineNode's record the location and length of historical lines in
+ * a buffer array.
+ */
+typedef struct GlLineNode GlLineNode;
+struct GlLineNode {
+  long id;             /* The unique identifier of this history line */
+  time_t timestamp;    /* The time at which the line was archived */
+  unsigned group;      /* The identifier of the history group to which the */
+                       /*  the line belongs. */
+  GlLineNode *next;    /* The next youngest line in the list */
+  GlLineNode *prev;    /* The next oldest line in the list */
+  int start;           /* The start index of the line in the buffer */
+  int nchar;           /* The total length of the line, including the '\0' */
+};
+
+/*
+ * The number of GlLineNode elements per freelist block.
+ */
+#define LINE_NODE_BLK 100
+
+/*
+ * Lines are organised in the buffer from oldest to newest. The
+ * positions of the lines are recorded in a doubly linked list
+ * of GlLineNode objects.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  FreeList *node_mem;    /* A freelist of GlLineNode objects */ 
+  GlLineNode *head;      /* The head of the list of lines */
+  GlLineNode *tail;      /* The tail of the list of lines */
+} GlLineList;
+
+/*
+ * All elements of the history mechanism are recorded in an object of
+ * the following type.
+ */
+struct GlHistory {
+  char *buffer;       /* A circular buffer used to record historical input */
+                      /*  lines. */
+  size_t buflen;      /* The length of the buffer array */
+  GlLineList list;    /* A list of the start of lines in buffer[] */
+  GlLineNode *recall; /* The last line recalled, or NULL if no recall */
+                      /*  session is currently active. */
+  GlLineNode *id_node;/* The node at which the last ID search terminated */
+  const char *prefix; /* A pointer to the line containing the prefix that */
+                      /*  is being searched for. */
+  int prefix_len;     /* The length of the prefix */
+  unsigned long seq;  /* The next ID to assign to a line node */
+  unsigned group;     /* The identifier of the current history group */
+  int nline;          /* The number of lines currently in the history list */
+  int max_lines;      /* Either -1 or a ceiling on the number of lines */
+  int enable;         /* If false, ignore history additions and lookups */
+};
+
+static char *_glh_restore_line(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim);
+static int _glh_cant_load_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *filename,
+				  int lineno, const char *message, FILE *fp);
+static int _glh_write_timestamp(FILE *fp, time_t timestamp);
+static int _glh_decode_timestamp(char *string, char **endp, time_t *t);
+static void _glh_discard_node(GlHistory *glh, GlLineNode *node);
+static GlLineNode *_glh_find_id(GlHistory *glh, GlhLineID id);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a line history maintenance object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  buflen     size_t    The number of bytes to allocate to the circular
+ *                       buffer that is used to record all of the
+ *                       most recent lines of user input that will fit.
+ *                       If buflen==0, no buffer will be allocated.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  GlHistory *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+GlHistory *_new_GlHistory(size_t buflen)
+{
+  GlHistory *glh;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  glh = (GlHistory *) malloc(sizeof(GlHistory));
+  if(!glh) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_GlHistory: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_GlHistory().
+ */
+  glh->buffer = NULL;
+  glh->buflen = buflen;
+  glh->list.node_mem = NULL;
+  glh->list.head = NULL;
+  glh->list.tail = NULL;
+  glh->recall = NULL;
+  glh->id_node = NULL;
+  glh->prefix = NULL;
+  glh->prefix_len = 0;
+  glh->seq = 0;
+  glh->group = 0;
+  glh->nline = 0;
+  glh->max_lines = -1;
+  glh->enable = 1;
+/*
+ * Allocate the buffer, if required.
+ */
+  if(buflen > 0) {
+    glh->buffer = (char *) malloc(sizeof(char) * buflen);
+    if(!glh->buffer) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "_new_GlHistory: Insufficient memory.\n");
+      return _del_GlHistory(glh);
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate the GlLineNode freelist.
+ */
+  glh->list.node_mem = _new_FreeList("_new_GlHistory", sizeof(GlLineNode),
+				     LINE_NODE_BLK);
+  if(!glh->list.node_mem)
+    return _del_GlHistory(glh);
+  return glh;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a GlHistory object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return GlHistory *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+GlHistory *_del_GlHistory(GlHistory *glh)
+{
+  if(glh) {
+/*
+ * Delete the buffer.
+ */
+    if(glh->buffer) {
+      free(glh->buffer);
+      glh->buffer = NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Delete the freelist of GlLineNode's.
+ */
+    glh->list.node_mem = _del_FreeList("_del_GlHistory", glh->list.node_mem, 1);
+/*
+ * The contents of the list were deleted by deleting the freelist.
+ */
+    glh->list.head = NULL;
+    glh->list.tail = NULL;
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(glh);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Add a new line to the end of the history buffer, wrapping round to the
+ * start of the buffer if needed.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  line      char *  The line to be archived.
+ *  force      int    Unless this flag is non-zero, empty lines and
+ *                    lines which match the previous line in the history
+ *                    buffer, aren't archived. This flag requests that
+ *                    the line be archived regardless.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+int _glh_add_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *line, int force)
+{
+  GlLineList *list; /* The line location list */
+  int nchar;        /* The number of characters needed to record the line */
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The new line location list node */
+  int empty;        /* True if the string is empty */
+  const char *nlptr;/* A pointer to a newline character in line[] */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !line)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Get the line location list.
+ */
+  list = &glh->list;
+/*
+ * Cancel any ongoing search.
+ */
+  if(_glh_cancel_search(glh))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * See how much buffer space will be needed to record the line?
+ *
+ * If the string contains a terminating newline character, arrange to
+ * have the archived line NUL terminated at this point.
+ */
+  nlptr = strchr(line, '\n');
+  if(nlptr)
+    nchar = (nlptr - line) + 1;
+  else
+    nchar = strlen(line) + 1;
+/*
+ * If the line is too big to fit in the buffer, truncate it.
+ */
+  if(nchar > glh->buflen)
+    nchar = glh->buflen;
+/*
+ * Is the line empty?
+ */
+  empty = 1;
+  for(i=0; i<nchar-1 && empty; i++)
+    empty = isspace((int)(unsigned char) line[i]);
+/*
+ * If the line is empty, don't add it to the buffer unless explicitly
+ * told to.
+ */
+  if(empty && !force)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * If the new line is the same as the most recently added line,
+ * don't add it again, unless explicitly told to.
+ */
+  if(!force &&
+     list->tail && strlen(glh->buffer + list->tail->start) == nchar-1 &&
+     strncmp(line, glh->buffer + list->tail->start, nchar-1)==0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Allocate the list node that will record the line location.
+ */
+  node = (GlLineNode *) _new_FreeListNode(list->node_mem);
+  if(!node)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Is the buffer empty?
+ */
+  if(!list->head) {
+/*
+ * Place the line at the beginning of the buffer.
+ */
+    strncpy(glh->buffer, line, nchar);
+    glh->buffer[nchar-1] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Record the location of the line.
+ */
+    node->start = 0;
+/*
+ * The buffer has one or more lines in it.
+ */
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Place the start of the new line just after the most recently
+ * added line.
+ */
+    int start = list->tail->start + list->tail->nchar;
+/*
+ * If there is insufficient room between the end of the most
+ * recently added line and the end of the buffer, we place the
+ * line at the beginning of the buffer. To make as much space
+ * as possible for this line, we first delete any old lines
+ * at the end of the buffer, then shift the remaining contents
+ * of the buffer to the end of the buffer.
+ */
+    if(start + nchar >= glh->buflen) {
+      GlLineNode *last; /* The last line in the buffer */
+      GlLineNode *ln;   /* A member of the list of line locations */
+      int shift;        /* The shift needed to move the contents of the */
+                        /*  buffer to its end. */
+/*
+ * Delete any old lines between the most recent line and the end of the
+ * buffer.
+ */
+      while(list->head && list->head->start > list->tail->start)
+	_glh_discard_node(glh, list->head);
+/*
+ * Find the line that is nearest the end of the buffer.
+ */
+      last = NULL;
+      for(ln=list->head; ln; ln=ln->next) {
+	if(!last || ln->start > last->start)
+	  last = ln;
+      };
+/*
+ * How big a shift is needed to move the existing contents of the
+ * buffer to the end of the buffer?
+ */
+      shift = last ? (glh->buflen - (last->start + last->nchar)) : 0;
+/*
+ * Is any shift needed?
+ */
+      if(shift > 0) {
+/*
+ * Move the buffer contents to the end of the buffer.
+ */
+	memmove(glh->buffer + shift, glh->buffer, glh->buflen - shift);
+/*
+ * Update the listed locations to reflect the shift.
+ */
+	for(ln=list->head; ln; ln=ln->next)
+	  ln->start += shift;
+      };
+/*
+ * The new line should now be located at the start of the buffer.
+ */
+      start = 0;
+    };
+/*
+ * Make space for the new line at the beginning of the buffer by
+ * deleting the oldest lines. This just involves removing them
+ * from the list of used locations. Also enforce the current
+ * maximum number of lines.
+ */
+    while(list->head &&
+	  ((list->head->start >= start && list->head->start - start < nchar) ||
+	   (glh->max_lines >= 0 && glh->nline>=glh->max_lines))) {
+      _glh_discard_node(glh, list->head);
+    };
+/*
+ * Copy the new line into the buffer.
+ */
+    memcpy(glh->buffer + start, line, nchar);
+    glh->buffer[start + nchar - 1] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Record its location.
+ */
+    node->start = start;
+  };
+/*
+ * Append the line location node to the end of the list.
+ */
+  node->id = glh->seq++;
+  node->timestamp = time(NULL);
+  node->group = glh->group;
+  node->nchar = nchar;
+  node->next = NULL;
+  node->prev = list->tail;
+  if(list->tail)
+    list->tail->next = node;
+  else
+    list->head = node;
+  list->tail = node;
+  glh->nline++;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Recall the next oldest line that has the search prefix last recorded
+ * by _glh_search_prefix().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  line      char *  The input line buffer. On input this should contain
+ *                    the current input line, and on output, if anything
+ *                    was found, its contents will have been replaced
+ *                    with the matching line.
+ *  dim     size_t    The allocated dimensions of the line buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    char *  A pointer to line[0], or NULL if not found.
+ */
+char *_glh_find_backwards(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The line location node being checked */
+  int first;        /* True if this is the start of a new search */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !line) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_find_backwards: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Check the line dimensions.
+ */
+  if(dim < strlen(line) + 1) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+       "_glh_find_backwards: 'dim' inconsistent with strlen(line) contents.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is this the start of a new search?
+ */
+  first = glh->recall==NULL;
+/*
+ * If this is the first search backwards, save the current line
+ * for potential recall later, and mark it as the last line
+ * recalled.
+ */
+  if(first) {
+    if(_glh_add_history(glh, line, 1))
+      return NULL;
+    glh->recall = glh->list.tail;
+  };
+/*
+ * If there is no search prefix, the prefix last set by glh_search_prefix()
+ * doesn't exist in the history buffer.
+ */
+  if(!glh->prefix)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * From where should we start the search?
+ */
+  if(glh->recall)
+    node = glh->recall->prev;
+  else
+    node = glh->list.tail;
+/*
+ * Search backwards through the list for the first match with the
+ * prefix string.
+ */
+  for( ; node &&
+      (node->group != glh->group ||
+       strncmp(glh->buffer + node->start, glh->prefix, glh->prefix_len) != 0);
+      node = node->prev)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Was a matching line found?
+ */
+  if(node) {
+/*
+ * Recall the found node as the starting point for subsequent
+ * searches.
+ */
+    glh->recall = node;
+/*
+ * Copy the matching line into the provided line buffer.
+ */
+    strncpy(line, glh->buffer + node->start, dim);
+    line[dim-1] = '\0';
+    return line;
+  };
+/*
+ * No match was found.
+ */
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Recall the next newest line that has the search prefix last recorded
+ * by _glh_search_prefix().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  line      char *  The input line buffer. On input this should contain
+ *                    the current input line, and on output, if anything
+ *                    was found, its contents will have been replaced
+ *                    with the matching line.
+ *  dim     size_t    The allocated dimensions of the line buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    char *  The line requested, or NULL if no matching line
+ *                    was found.
+ */
+char *_glh_find_forwards(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The line location node being checked */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !line) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_find_forwards: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Check the line dimensions.
+ */
+  if(dim < strlen(line) + 1) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+       "_glh_find_forwards: 'dim' inconsistent with strlen(line) contents.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * From where should we start the search?
+ */
+  if(glh->recall)
+    node = glh->recall->next;
+  else
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * If there is no search prefix, the prefix last set by glh_search_prefix()
+ * doesn't exist in the history buffer.
+ */
+  if(!glh->prefix)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Search forwards through the list for the first match with the
+ * prefix string.
+ */
+  for( ; node &&
+      (node->group != glh->group ||
+       strncmp(glh->buffer + node->start, glh->prefix, glh->prefix_len) != 0);
+      node = node->next)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Was a matching line found?
+ */
+  if(node) {
+/*
+ * Did we hit the line that was originally being edited when the
+ * current history traversal started?
+ */
+    if(node == glh->list.tail)
+      return _glh_restore_line(glh, line, dim);
+/*
+ * Copy the matching line into the provided line buffer.
+ */
+    strncpy(line, glh->buffer + node->start, dim);
+    line[dim-1] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Record the starting point of the next search.
+ */
+    glh->recall = node;
+/*
+ * Return the matching line to the user.
+ */
+    return line;
+  };
+/*
+ * No match was found.
+ */
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If a search is in progress, cancel it.
+ *
+ * This involves discarding the line that was temporarily saved by
+ * _glh_find_backwards() when the search was originally started,
+ * and reseting the search iteration pointer to NULL.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+int _glh_cancel_search(GlHistory *glh)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_cancel_search: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If there wasn't a search in progress, do nothing.
+ */
+  if(!glh->recall)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Delete the node of the preserved line.
+ */
+  _glh_discard_node(glh, glh->list.tail);
+/*
+ * Reset the search pointers.
+ */
+  glh->recall = NULL;
+  glh->prefix = "";
+  glh->prefix_len = 0;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Set the prefix of subsequent history searches.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  line      char *  The command line who's prefix is to be used.
+ *  prefix_len int    The length of the prefix.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+int _glh_search_prefix(GlHistory *glh, const char *line, int prefix_len)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The line location node being checked */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_search_prefix: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Record a zero length search prefix?
+ */
+  if(prefix_len <= 0) {
+    glh->prefix_len = 0;
+    glh->prefix = "";
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the length of the new search prefix.
+ */
+  glh->prefix_len = prefix_len;
+/*
+ * If any history line starts with the specified prefix, record a
+ * pointer to it for comparison in subsequent searches. If the prefix
+ * doesn't match any of the lines, then simply record NULL to indicate
+ * that there is no point in searching. Note that _glh_add_history()
+ * clears this pointer by calling _glh_cancel_search(), so there is
+ * no danger of it being used after the buffer has been modified.
+ */
+  for(node = glh->list.tail ; node &&
+      (node->group != glh->group ||
+       strncmp(glh->buffer + node->start, line, prefix_len) != 0);
+      node = node->prev)
+    ;
+/*
+ * If a matching line was found record it for use as the search
+ * prefix.
+ */
+  glh->prefix = node ? glh->buffer + node->start : NULL;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Recall the oldest recorded line.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  line      char *  The input line buffer. On input this should contain
+ *                    the current input line, and on output, its contents
+ *                    will have been replaced with the oldest line.
+ *  dim     size_t    The allocated dimensions of the line buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    char *  A pointer to line[0], or NULL if not found.
+ */
+char *_glh_oldest_line(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The line location node being checked */
+  int first;        /* True if this is the start of a new search */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !line) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_oldest_line: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Check the line dimensions.
+ */
+  if(dim < strlen(line) + 1) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+       "_glh_oldest_line: 'dim' inconsistent with strlen(line) contents.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is this the start of a new search?
+ */
+  first = glh->recall==NULL;
+/*
+ * If this is the first search backwards, save the current line
+ * for potential recall later, and mark it as the last line
+ * recalled.
+ */
+  if(first) {
+    if(_glh_add_history(glh, line, 1))
+      return NULL;
+    glh->recall = glh->list.tail;
+  };
+/*
+ * Locate the oldest line that belongs to the current group.
+ */
+  for(node=glh->list.head; node && node->group != glh->group; 
+      node = node->next)
+    ;
+/*
+ * No line found?
+ */
+  if(!node)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Record the above node as the starting point for subsequent
+ * searches.
+ */
+  glh->recall = node;
+/*
+ * Copy the recalled line into the provided line buffer.
+ */
+  strncpy(line, glh->buffer + node->start, dim);
+  line[dim-1] = '\0';
+  return line;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Recall the line that was being entered when the search started.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  line      char *  The input line buffer. On input this should contain
+ *                    the current input line, and on output, its contents
+ *                    will have been replaced with the line that was
+ *                    being entered when the search was started.
+ *  dim     size_t    The allocated dimensions of the line buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    char *  A pointer to line[0], or NULL if not found.
+ */
+char *_glh_current_line(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !line) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_current_line: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Check the line dimensions.
+ */
+  if(dim < strlen(line) + 1) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+       "_glh_current_line: 'dim' inconsistent with strlen(line) contents.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Restore the original line.
+ */
+  return _glh_restore_line(glh, line, dim);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Remove the line that was originally being edited when the history
+ * traversal was started, from its saved position in the history list,
+ * and place it in the provided line buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  line      char *  The input line buffer. On input this should contain
+ *                    the current input line, and on output, its contents
+ *                    will have been replaced with the saved line.
+ *  dim     size_t    The allocated dimensions of the line buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    char *  A pointer to line[0], or NULL if not found.
+ */
+static char *_glh_restore_line(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim)
+{
+  GlLineNode *tail;   /* The tail node to be discarded */
+/*
+ * If there wasn't a search in progress, do nothing.
+ */
+  if(!glh->recall)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Get the list node that is to be removed.
+ */
+  tail = glh->list.tail;
+/*
+ * If a pointer to the saved line is being used to record the
+ * current search prefix, reestablish the search prefix, to
+ * have it recorded by another history line if possible.
+ */
+  if(glh->prefix == glh->buffer + tail->start)
+    (void) _glh_search_prefix(glh, glh->buffer + tail->start, glh->prefix_len);
+/*
+ * Copy the recalled line into the input-line buffer.
+ */
+  strncpy(line, glh->buffer + tail->start, dim);
+  line[dim-1] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Discard the line-location node.
+ */
+  _glh_discard_node(glh, tail);
+/*
+ * Mark the search as ended.
+ */
+  glh->recall = NULL;
+  return line;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the id of a history line offset by a given number of lines from
+ * the one that is currently being recalled. If a recall session isn't
+ * in progress, or the offset points outside the history list, 0 is
+ * returned.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  offset       int    The line offset (0 for the current line, < 0
+ *                      for an older line, > 0 for a newer line.
+ * Output:
+ *  return GlhLineID    The identifier of the line that is currently
+ *                      being recalled, or 0 if no recall session is
+ *                      currently in progress.
+ */
+GlhLineID _glh_line_id(GlHistory *glh, int offset)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The line location node being checked */
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Search forward 'offset' lines to find the required line.
+ */
+  if(offset >= 0) {
+    for(node=glh->recall; node && offset != 0; node=node->next) {
+      if(node->group == glh->group)
+	offset--;
+    };
+  } else {
+    for(node=glh->recall; node && offset != 0; node=node->prev) {
+      if(node->group == glh->group)
+	offset++;
+    };
+  };
+  return node ? node->id : 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Recall a line by its history buffer ID. If the line is no longer
+ * in the buffer, or the id is zero, NULL is returned.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh  GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  id   GlhLineID    The ID of the line to be returned.
+ *  line      char *  The input line buffer. On input this should contain
+ *                    the current input line, and on output, its contents
+ *                    will have been replaced with the saved line.
+ *  dim     size_t    The allocated dimensions of the line buffer.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    char *  A pointer to line[0], or NULL if not found.
+ */
+char *_glh_recall_line(GlHistory *glh, GlhLineID id, char *line, size_t dim)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The line location node being checked */
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->buffer || glh->max_lines == 0)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * If we are starting a new recall session, save the current line
+ * for potential recall later.
+ */
+  if(!glh->recall && _glh_add_history(glh, line, 1))
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Search for the specified line.
+ */
+  node = _glh_find_id(glh, id);
+/*
+ * Not found?
+ */
+  if(!node || node->group != glh->group)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Record the node of the matching line as the starting point
+ * for subsequent searches.
+ */
+  glh->recall = node;
+/*
+ * Copy the recalled line into the provided line buffer.
+ */
+  strncpy(line, glh->buffer + node->start, dim);
+  line[dim-1] = '\0';
+  return line;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Save the current history in a specified file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh        GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  filename  const char *  The name of the new file to record the
+ *                          history in.
+ *  comment   const char *  Extra information such as timestamps will
+ *                          be recorded on a line started with this
+ *                          string, the idea being that the file can
+ *                          double as a command file. Specify "" if
+ *                          you don't care.
+ *  max_lines        int    The maximum number of lines to save, or -1
+ *                          to save all of the lines in the history
+ *                          list.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+int _glh_save_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *filename, const char *comment,
+		      int max_lines)
+{
+  FILE *fp;         /* The output file */
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The line being saved */
+  GlLineNode *head; /* The head of the list of lines to be saved */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !filename || !comment) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_save_history: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the specified file.
+ */
+  fp = fopen(filename, "w");
+  if(!fp) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_save_history: Can't open %s (%s).\n",
+	    filename, strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If a ceiling on the number of lines to save was specified, count
+ * that number of lines backwards, to find the first line to be saved.
+ */
+  head = NULL;
+  if(max_lines >= 0) {
+    for(head=glh->list.tail; head && --max_lines > 0; head=head->prev)
+      ;
+  };
+  if(!head)
+    head = glh->list.head;
+/*
+ * Write the contents of the history buffer to the history file, writing
+ * associated data such as timestamps, to a line starting with the
+ * specified comment string.
+ */
+  for(node=head; node; node=node->next) {
+/*
+ * Write peripheral information associated with the line, as a comment.
+ */
+    if(fprintf(fp, "%s ", comment) < 0 ||
+       _glh_write_timestamp(fp, node->timestamp) ||
+       fprintf(fp, " %u\n", node->group) < 0) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "Error writing %s (%s).\n", filename, strerror(errno));
+      (void) fclose(fp);
+      return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Write the history line.
+ */
+    if(fprintf(fp, "%s\n", glh->buffer + node->start) < 0) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "Error writing %s (%s).\n", filename, strerror(errno));
+      (void) fclose(fp);
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Close the history file.
+ */
+  if(fclose(fp) == EOF) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Error writing %s (%s).\n", filename, strerror(errno));
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Restore previous history lines from a given file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh        GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  filename  const char *  The name of the file to read from.
+ *  comment   const char *  The same comment string that was passed to
+ *                          _glh_save_history() when this file was
+ *                          written.
+ *  line            char *  A buffer into which lines can be read.
+ *  dim            size_t   The allocated dimension of line[].
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+int _glh_load_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *filename, const char *comment,
+		      char *line, size_t dim)
+{
+  FILE *fp;            /* The output file */
+  size_t comment_len;  /* The length of the comment string */
+  time_t timestamp;    /* The timestamp of the history line */
+  unsigned group;      /* The identifier of the history group to which */
+                       /*  the line belongs. */
+  int lineno;          /* The line number being read */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !filename || !comment || !line) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_load_history: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Measure the length of the comment string.
+ */
+  comment_len = strlen(comment);
+/*
+ * Clear the history list.
+ */
+  _glh_clear_history(glh, 1);
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the specified file. Don't treat it as an error
+ * if the file doesn't exist.
+ */
+  fp = fopen(filename, "r");
+  if(!fp)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Attempt to read each line and preceding peripheral info, and add these
+ * to the history list.
+ */
+  for(lineno=1; fgets(line, dim, fp) != NULL; lineno++) {
+    char *lptr;          /* A pointer into the input line */
+/*
+ * Check that the line starts with the comment string.
+ */
+    if(strncmp(line, comment, comment_len) != 0) {
+      return _glh_cant_load_history(glh, filename, lineno,
+				    "Corrupt history parameter line", fp);
+    };
+/*
+ * Skip spaces and tabs after the comment.
+ */
+    for(lptr=line+comment_len; *lptr && (*lptr==' ' || *lptr=='\t'); lptr++)
+      ;
+/*
+ * The next word must be a timestamp.
+ */
+    if(_glh_decode_timestamp(lptr, &lptr, &timestamp)) {
+      return _glh_cant_load_history(glh, filename, lineno,
+				    "Corrupt timestamp", fp);
+    };
+/*
+ * Skip spaces and tabs.
+ */
+    while(*lptr==' ' || *lptr=='\t')
+      lptr++;
+/*
+ * The next word must be an unsigned integer group number.
+ */
+    group = (int) strtoul(lptr, &lptr, 10);
+    if(*lptr != ' ' && *lptr != '\n') {
+      return _glh_cant_load_history(glh, filename, lineno,
+				    "Corrupt group id", fp);
+    };
+/*
+ * Skip spaces and tabs.
+ */
+    while(*lptr==' ' || *lptr=='\t')
+      lptr++;
+/*
+ * There shouldn't be anything left on the line.
+ */
+    if(*lptr != '\n') {
+      return _glh_cant_load_history(glh, filename, lineno,
+				    "Corrupt parameter line", fp);
+    };
+/*
+ * Now read the history line itself.
+ */
+    lineno++;
+    if(fgets(line, dim, fp) == NULL)
+      return _glh_cant_load_history(glh, filename, lineno, "Read error", fp);
+/*
+ * Append the line to the history buffer.
+ */
+    if(_glh_add_history(glh, line, 1)) {
+      return _glh_cant_load_history(glh, filename, lineno,
+				    "Insufficient memory to record line", fp);
+    };
+/*
+ * Record the group and timestamp information along with the line.
+ */
+    if(glh->list.tail) {
+      glh->list.tail->timestamp = timestamp;
+      glh->list.tail->group = group;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Close the file.
+ */
+  (void) fclose(fp);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This is a private error return function of _glh_load_history().
+ */
+static int _glh_cant_load_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *filename,
+				  int lineno, const char *message, FILE *fp)
+{
+  fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: %s.\n", filename, lineno, message);
+  (void) fclose(fp);
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Switch history groups.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh        GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  group      unsigned    The new group identifier. This will be recorded
+ *                          with subsequent history lines, and subsequent
+ *                          history searches will only return lines with
+ *                          this group identifier. This allows multiple
+ *                          separate history lists to exist within
+ *                          a single GlHistory object. Note that the
+ *                          default group identifier is 0.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+int _glh_set_group(GlHistory *glh, unsigned group)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_set_group: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is the group being changed?
+ */
+  if(group != glh->group) {
+/*
+ * Cancel any ongoing search.
+ */
+    if(_glh_cancel_search(glh))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Record the new group.
+ */
+    glh->group = group;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the current history group.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh        GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      unsigned    The group identifier.    
+ */
+int _glh_get_group(GlHistory *glh)
+{
+  return glh ? glh->group : 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Write a timestamp to a given stdio stream, in the format
+ * yyyymmddhhmmss
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fp             FILE *  The stream to write to.
+ *  timestamp    time_t    The timestamp to be written.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+static int _glh_write_timestamp(FILE *fp, time_t timestamp)
+{
+  struct tm *t;  /* THe broken-down calendar time */
+/*
+ * Get the calendar components corresponding to the given timestamp.
+ */
+  if(timestamp < 0 || (t = localtime(&timestamp)) == NULL) {
+    if(fprintf(fp, "?") < 0)
+      return 1;
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * Write the calendar time as yyyymmddhhmmss.
+ */
+  if(fprintf(fp, "%04d%02d%02d%02d%02d%02d", t->tm_year + 1900, t->tm_mon + 1,
+	     t->tm_mday, t->tm_hour, t->tm_min, t->tm_sec) < 0)
+    return 1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read a timestamp from a string.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string    char *  The string to read from.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  endp        char ** On output *endp will point to the next unprocessed
+ *                      character in string[].
+ *  timestamp time_t *  The timestamp will be assigned to *t.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+static int _glh_decode_timestamp(char *string, char **endp, time_t *timestamp)
+{
+  unsigned year,month,day,hour,min,sec;  /* Calendar time components */
+  struct tm t;
+/*
+ * There are 14 characters in the date format yyyymmddhhmmss.
+ */
+  enum {TSLEN=14};                    
+  char timestr[TSLEN+1];   /* The timestamp part of the string */
+/*
+ * If the time wasn't available at the time that the line was recorded
+ * it will have been written as "?". Check for this before trying
+ * to read the timestamp.
+ */
+  if(string[0] == '\?') {
+    *endp = string+1;
+    *timestamp = -1;
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * The timestamp is expected to be written in the form yyyymmddhhmmss.
+ */
+  if(strlen(string) < TSLEN) {
+    *endp = string;
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Copy the timestamp out of the string.
+ */
+  strncpy(timestr, string, TSLEN);
+  timestr[TSLEN] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Decode the timestamp.
+ */
+  if(sscanf(timestr, "%4u%2u%2u%2u%2u%2u", &year, &month, &day, &hour, &min,
+	    &sec) != 6) {
+    *endp = string;
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Advance the string pointer over the successfully read timestamp.
+ */
+  *endp = string + TSLEN;
+/*
+ * Copy the read values into a struct tm.
+ */
+  t.tm_sec = sec;
+  t.tm_min = min;
+  t.tm_hour = hour;
+  t.tm_mday = day;
+  t.tm_wday = 0;
+  t.tm_yday = 0;
+  t.tm_mon = month - 1;
+  t.tm_year = year - 1900;
+  t.tm_isdst = -1;
+/*
+ * Convert the contents of the struct tm to a time_t.
+ */
+  *timestamp = mktime(&t);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Display the contents of the history list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  fp          FILE *  The stdio stream to write to.
+ *  fmt   const char *  A format string. This can contain arbitrary
+ *                      characters, which are written verbatim, plus
+ *                      any of the following format directives:
+ *                        %D  -  The date, like 2001-11-20
+ *                        %T  -  The time of day, like 23:59:59
+ *                        %N  -  The sequential entry number of the
+ *                               line in the history buffer.
+ *                        %G  -  The history group number of the line.
+ *                        %%  -  A literal % character.
+ *                        %H  -  The history line.
+ *  all_groups   int    If true, display history lines from all
+ *                      history groups. Otherwise only display
+ *                      those of the current history group.
+ *  max_lines    int    If max_lines is < 0, all available lines
+ *                      are displayed. Otherwise only the most
+ *                      recent max_lines lines will be displayed.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Error.
+ */
+int _glh_show_history(GlHistory *glh, FILE *fp, const char *fmt,
+		      int all_groups, int max_lines)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node;      /* The line being displayed */
+  GlLineNode *oldest;    /* The oldest line to display */
+  enum {TSMAX=32};       /* The maximum length of the date and time string */
+  char buffer[TSMAX+1];  /* The buffer in which to write the date and time */
+  int idlen;             /* The length of displayed ID strings */
+  unsigned grpmax;       /* The maximum group number in the buffer */
+  int grplen;            /* The number of characters needed to print grpmax */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh || !fp || !fmt) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_glh_show_history: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->list.head)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Work out the length to display ID numbers, choosing the length of
+ * the biggest number in the buffer. Smaller numbers will be padded 
+ * with leading zeroes if needed.
+ */
+  sprintf(buffer, "%lu", (unsigned long) glh->list.tail->id);
+  idlen = strlen(buffer);
+/*
+ * Find the largest group number.
+ */
+  grpmax = 0;
+  for(node=glh->list.head; node; node=node->next) {
+    if(node->group > grpmax)
+      grpmax = node->group;
+  };
+/*
+ * Find out how many characters are needed to display the group number.
+ */
+  sprintf(buffer, "%u", (unsigned) grpmax);
+  grplen = strlen(buffer);
+/*
+ * Find the node that follows the oldest line to be displayed.
+ */
+  if(max_lines < 0) {
+    oldest = glh->list.head;
+  } else if(max_lines==0) {
+    return 0;
+  } else {
+    for(oldest=glh->list.tail; oldest; oldest=oldest->prev) {
+      if((all_groups || oldest->group == glh->group) && --max_lines <= 0)
+	break;
+    };
+/*
+ * If the number of lines in the buffer doesn't exceed the specified
+ * maximum, start from the oldest line in the buffer.
+ */
+    if(!oldest)
+      oldest = glh->list.head;
+  };
+/*
+ * List the history lines in increasing time order.
+ */
+  for(node=oldest; node; node=node->next) {
+/*
+ * Only display lines from the current history group, unless
+ * told otherwise.
+ */
+    if(all_groups || node->group == glh->group) {
+      const char *fptr;      /* A pointer into the format string */
+      struct tm *t = NULL;   /* The broken time version of the timestamp */
+/*
+ * Work out the calendar representation of the node timestamp.
+ */
+      if(node->timestamp != (time_t) -1)
+	t = localtime(&node->timestamp);
+/*
+ * Parse the format string.
+ */
+      fptr = fmt;
+      while(*fptr) {
+/*
+ * Search for the start of the next format directive or the end of the string.
+ */
+	const char *start = fptr;
+	while(*fptr && *fptr != '%')
+	  fptr++;
+/*
+ * Display any literal characters that precede the located directive.
+ */
+	if(fptr > start && fprintf(fp, "%.*s", (int) (fptr - start), start) < 0)
+	  return 1;
+/*
+ * Did we hit a new directive before the end of the line?
+ */
+	if(*fptr) {
+/*
+ * Obey the directive. Ignore unknown directives.
+ */
+	  switch(*++fptr) {
+	  case 'D':          /* Display the date */
+	    if(t && strftime(buffer, TSMAX, "%Y-%m-%d", t) != 0 &&
+	       fprintf(fp, "%s", buffer) < 0)
+	      return 1;
+	    break;
+	  case 'T':          /* Display the time of day */
+	    if(t && strftime(buffer, TSMAX, "%H:%M:%S", t) != 0 &&
+	       fprintf(fp, "%s", buffer) < 0)
+	      return 1;
+	    break;
+	  case 'N':          /* Display the sequential entry number */
+	    if(fprintf(fp, "%*lu", idlen, (unsigned long) node->id) < 0)
+	      return 1;
+	    break;
+	  case 'G':
+	    if(fprintf(fp, "%*u", grplen, (unsigned) node->group) < 0)
+	      return 1;
+	    break;
+	  case 'H':          /* Display the history line */
+	    if(fprintf(fp, "%s", glh->buffer + node->start) < 0)
+	      return 1;
+	    break;
+	  case '%':          /* A literal % symbol */
+	    if(fputc('%', fp) == EOF)
+	      return 1;
+	    break;
+	  };
+/*
+ * Skip the directive.
+ */
+	  if(*fptr)
+	    fptr++;
+	};
+      };
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Change the size of the history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  bufsize   size_t    The number of bytes in the history buffer, or 0
+ *                      to delete the buffer completely.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK.
+ *                      1 - Insufficient memory (the previous buffer
+ *                          will have been retained). No error message
+ *                          will be displayed.
+ */
+int _glh_resize_history(GlHistory *glh, size_t bufsize)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node;  /* A line location node in the list of lines */
+  GlLineNode *prev;  /* The line location node preceding 'node' */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh)
+    return bufsize > 0;
+/*
+ * If the new size doesn't differ from the existing size, do nothing.
+ */
+  if(glh->buflen == bufsize)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Cancel any ongoing search.
+ */
+  (void) _glh_cancel_search(glh);
+/*
+ * Create a wholly new buffer?
+ */
+  if(glh->buflen == 0) {
+    glh->buffer = (char *) malloc(bufsize);
+    if(!glh->buffer)
+      return 1;
+    glh->buflen = bufsize;
+/*
+ * Delete an existing buffer?
+ */
+  } else if(bufsize == 0) {
+    _glh_clear_history(glh, 1);
+    free(glh->buffer);
+    glh->buffer = NULL;
+    glh->buflen = 0;
+/*
+ * To get here, we must be shrinking or expanding from one
+ * finite size to another.
+ */
+  } else {
+/*
+ * If we are shrinking the size of the buffer, then we first need
+ * to discard the oldest lines that won't fit in the new buffer.
+ */
+    if(bufsize < glh->buflen) {
+      size_t nbytes = 0;    /* The number of bytes used in the new buffer */
+      GlLineNode *oldest;   /* The oldest node to be kept */
+/*
+ * Searching backwards from the youngest line, find the oldest
+ * line for which there will be sufficient room in the new buffer.
+ */
+      for(oldest = glh->list.tail;
+	  oldest && (nbytes += oldest->nchar) <= bufsize;
+	  oldest = oldest->prev)
+	;
+/*
+ * We will have gone one node too far, unless we reached the oldest line
+ * without exceeding the target length.
+ */
+      if(oldest) {
+	nbytes -= oldest->nchar;
+	oldest = oldest->next;
+      };
+/*
+ * Discard the nodes that can't be retained.
+ */
+      while(glh->list.head && glh->list.head != oldest)
+	_glh_discard_node(glh, glh->list.head);
+/*
+ * If we are increasing the size of the buffer, we need to reallocate
+ * the buffer before shifting the lines into their new positions.
+ */
+    } else {
+      char *new_buffer = (char *) realloc(glh->buffer, bufsize);
+      if(!new_buffer)
+	return 1;
+      glh->buffer = new_buffer;
+      glh->buflen = bufsize;
+    };
+/*
+ * If there are any lines to be preserved, copy the block of lines
+ * that precedes the end of the existing buffer to what will be 
+ * the end of the new buffer.
+ */
+    if(glh->list.head) {
+      int shift;  /* The number of bytes to shift lines in the buffer */
+/*
+ * Get the oldest line to be kept.
+ */
+      GlLineNode *oldest = glh->list.head;
+/*
+ * Count the number of characters that are used in the lines that
+ * precede the end of the current buffer (ie. not including those
+ * lines that have been wrapped to the start of the buffer).
+ */
+      int n = 0;
+      for(node=oldest,prev=oldest->prev; node && node->start >= oldest->start;
+	  prev=node, node=node->next)
+	n += node->nchar;
+/*
+ * Move these bytes to the end of the resized buffer.
+ */
+      memmove(glh->buffer + bufsize - n, glh->buffer + oldest->start, n);
+/*
+ * Adjust the buffer pointers to reflect the new locations of the moved
+ * lines.
+ */
+      shift = bufsize - n - oldest->start;
+      for(node=prev; node && node->start >= oldest->start; node=node->prev)
+	node->start += shift;
+    };
+/*
+ * Shrink the buffer?
+ */
+    if(bufsize < glh->buflen) {
+      char *new_buffer = (char *) realloc(glh->buffer, bufsize);
+      if(new_buffer)
+	glh->buffer = new_buffer;
+      glh->buflen = bufsize;  /* Mark it as shrunk, regardless of success */
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Set an upper limit to the number of lines that can be recorded in the
+ * history list, or remove a previously specified limit.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  max_lines    int    The maximum number of lines to allow, or -1 to
+ *                      cancel a previous limit and allow as many lines
+ *                      as will fit in the current history buffer size.
+ */
+void _glh_limit_history(GlHistory *glh, int max_lines)
+{
+  if(!glh)
+    return;
+/*
+ * Apply a new limit?
+ */
+  if(max_lines >= 0 && max_lines != glh->max_lines) {
+/*
+ * Count successively older lines until we reach the start of the
+ * list, or until we have seen max_lines lines (at which point 'node'
+ * will be line number max_lines+1).
+ */
+    int nline = 0;
+    GlLineNode *node;
+    for(node=glh->list.tail; node && ++nline <= max_lines; node=node->prev)
+      ;
+/*
+ * Discard any lines that exceed the limit.
+ */
+    if(node) {
+      GlLineNode *oldest = node->next;  /* The oldest line to be kept */
+/*
+ * Delete nodes from the head of the list until we reach the node that
+ * is to be kept.
+ */
+      while(glh->list.head && glh->list.head != oldest)
+	_glh_discard_node(glh, glh->list.head);
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the new limit.
+ */
+  glh->max_lines = max_lines;
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Discard either all history, or the history associated with the current
+ * history group.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  all_groups   int    If true, clear all of the history. If false,
+ *                      clear only the stored lines associated with the
+ *                      currently selected history group.
+ */
+void _glh_clear_history(GlHistory *glh, int all_groups)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh)
+    return;
+/*
+ * Cancel any ongoing search.
+ */
+  (void) _glh_cancel_search(glh);
+/*
+ * Delete all history lines regardless of group?
+ */
+  if(all_groups) {
+    _rst_FreeList(glh->list.node_mem);
+    glh->list.head = glh->list.tail = NULL;
+    glh->nline = 0;
+    glh->id_node = NULL;
+/*
+ * Just delete lines of the current group?
+ */
+  } else {
+    GlLineNode *node;  /* The line node being checked */
+    GlLineNode *prev;  /* The line node that precedes 'node' */
+    GlLineNode *next;  /* The line node that follows 'node' */
+/*
+ * Search out and delete the line nodes of the current group.
+ */
+    for(node=glh->list.head; node; node=next) {
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the following node before we delete the current
+ * node.
+ */
+      next = node->next;
+/*
+ * Discard this node?
+ */
+      if(node->group == glh->group)
+	_glh_discard_node(glh, node);
+    };
+/*
+ * If there are any lines left, and we deleted any lines, there will
+ * be gaps in the buffer. These need to be removed.
+ */
+    if(glh->list.head) {
+      int epos;   /* The index of the last used element in the buffer */
+/*
+ * Find the line nearest the end of the buffer.
+ */
+      GlLineNode *enode;
+      for(node=glh->list.head, prev=NULL;
+	  node && node->start >= glh->list.head->start;
+	  prev=node, node = node->next)
+	;
+      enode = prev;
+/*
+ * Move the end line to abutt the end of the buffer, and remove gaps
+ * between the lines that precede it.
+ */
+      epos = glh->buflen;
+      for(node=enode; node; node=node->prev) {
+	int shift = epos - (node->start + node->nchar);
+	if(shift) {
+	  memmove(glh->buffer + node->start + shift,
+		  glh->buffer + node->start, node->nchar);
+	  node->start += shift;
+	};
+	epos = node->start;
+      };
+/*
+ * Move the first line in the buffer to the start of the buffer, and
+ * remove gaps between the lines that follow it.
+ */
+      epos = 0;
+      for(node=enode ? enode->next : NULL; node; node=node->next) {
+	int shift = epos - node->start;
+	if(shift) {
+	  memmove(glh->buffer + node->start + shift,
+		  glh->buffer + node->start, node->nchar);
+	  node->start += shift;
+	};
+	epos = node->start + node->nchar;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Temporarily enable or disable the history list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  enable       int    If true, turn on the history mechanism. If
+ *                      false, disable it.
+ */
+void _glh_toggle_history(GlHistory *glh, int enable)
+{
+  if(glh)
+    glh->enable = enable;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Remove a given line location node from the history list, and return
+ * it to the freelist.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh    GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  node  GlLineNode *  The node to be removed. This must be currently
+ *                      in the list who's head is glh->list.head, or
+ *                      be NULL.
+ */
+static void _glh_discard_node(GlHistory *glh, GlLineNode *node)
+{
+  if(node) {
+/*
+ * Make the node that precedes the node being removed point
+ * to the one that follows it.
+ */
+    if(node->prev)
+      node->prev->next = node->next;
+    else
+      glh->list.head = node->next;
+/*
+ * Make the node that follows the node being removed point
+ * to the one that precedes it.
+ */
+    if(node->next)
+      node->next->prev = node->prev;
+    else
+      glh->list.tail = node->prev;
+/*
+ * If we are deleting the node that is marked as the start point of the
+ * last ID search, remove the cached starting point.
+ */
+    if(node == glh->id_node)
+      glh->id_node = NULL;
+/*
+ * Return the node to the free list.
+ */
+    node = (GlLineNode *) _del_FreeListNode(glh->list.node_mem, node);
+/*
+ * Decrement the count of the number of lines in the buffer.
+ */
+    glh->nline--;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup the details of a given history line, given its id.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh      GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  id        GlLineID    The sequential number of the line.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  line    const char ** A pointer to the history line will be assigned
+ *                        to *line.
+ *  group     unsigned *  The group membership of the line will be assigned
+ *                        to *group.
+ *  timestamp   time_t *  The timestamp of the line will be assigned to
+ *                        *timestamp.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    0 - The requested line wasn't found.
+ *                        1 - The line was found.
+ */
+int _glh_lookup_history(GlHistory *glh, GlhLineID id, const char **line,
+			unsigned *group, time_t *timestamp)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node; /* The located line location node */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!glh)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Search for the line that has the specified ID.
+ */
+  node = _glh_find_id(glh, (GlhLineID) id);
+/*
+ * Not found?
+ */
+  if(!node)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Return the details of the line.
+ */
+  if(line)
+    *line = glh->buffer + node->start;
+  if(group)
+    *group = node->group;
+  if(timestamp)
+    *timestamp = node->timestamp;
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup a node in the history list by its ID.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh      GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  id       GlhLineID    The ID of the line to be returned.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  GlLIneNode *  The located node, or NULL if not found.
+ */
+static GlLineNode *_glh_find_id(GlHistory *glh, GlhLineID id)
+{
+  GlLineNode *node;  /* The node being checked */
+/*
+ * Is history enabled?
+ */
+  if(!glh->enable || !glh->list.head)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * If possible, start at the end point of the last ID search.
+ * Otherwise start from the head of the list.
+ */
+  node = glh->id_node;
+  if(!node)
+    node = glh->list.head;
+/*
+ * Search forwards from 'node'?
+ */
+  if(node->id < id) {
+    while(node && node->id != id)
+      node = node->next;
+    glh->id_node = node ? node : glh->list.tail;
+/*
+ * Search backwards from 'node'?
+ */
+  } else {
+    while(node && node->id != id)
+      node = node->prev;
+    glh->id_node = node ? node : glh->list.head;
+  };
+/*
+ * Return the located node (this will be NULL if the ID wasn't found).
+ */
+  return node;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the state of the history list. Note that any of the input/output
+ * pointers can be specified as NULL.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh         GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  enabled           int *  If history is enabled, *enabled will be
+ *                           set to 1. Otherwise it will be assigned 0.
+ *  group        unsigned *  The current history group ID will be assigned
+ *                           to *group.
+ *  max_lines         int *  The currently requested limit on the number
+ *                           of history lines in the list, or -1 if
+ *                           unlimited.
+ */
+void _glh_state_of_history(GlHistory *glh, int *enabled, unsigned *group,
+			   int *max_lines)
+{
+  if(glh) {
+    if(enabled)
+     *enabled = glh->enable;
+    if(group)
+     *group = glh->group;
+    if(max_lines)
+     *max_lines = glh->max_lines;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Get the range of lines in the history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh         GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  oldest  unsigned long *  The sequential entry number of the oldest
+ *                           line in the history list will be assigned
+ *                           to *oldest, unless there are no lines, in
+ *                           which case 0 will be assigned.
+ *  newest  unsigned long *  The sequential entry number of the newest
+ *                           line in the history list will be assigned
+ *                           to *newest, unless there are no lines, in
+ *                           which case 0 will be assigned.
+ *  nlines            int *  The number of lines currently in the history
+ *                           list.
+ */
+void _glh_range_of_history(GlHistory *glh, unsigned long *oldest,
+			   unsigned long *newest, int *nlines)
+{
+  if(glh) {
+    if(oldest)
+      *oldest = glh->list.head ? glh->list.head->id : 0;
+    if(newest)
+      *newest = glh->list.tail ? glh->list.tail->id : 0;
+    if(nlines)
+      *nlines = glh->nline;
+  };
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the size of the history buffer and the amount of the
+ * buffer that is currently in use.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  glh      GlHistory *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  buff_size   size_t *  The size of the history buffer (bytes).
+ *  buff_used   size_t *  The amount of the history buffer that
+ *                        is currently occupied (bytes).
+ */
+void _glh_size_of_history(GlHistory *glh, size_t *buff_size, size_t *buff_used)
+{
+  if(glh) {
+    if(buff_size)
+      *buff_size = glh->buflen;
+/*
+ * Determine the amount of buffer space that is currently occupied.
+ */
+    if(buff_used) {
+      size_t used = 0;
+      GlLineNode *node;
+      for(node=glh->list.head; node; node=node->next)
+	used += node->nchar;
+      *buff_used = used;
+    };
+  };
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/history.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/history.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49671a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/history.h
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+#ifndef history_h
+#define history_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>  /* FILE * */
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * This module is used to record and traverse historical lines of user input.
+ */
+
+typedef struct GlHistory GlHistory;
+
+/*
+ * Create a new history maintenance object.
+ */
+GlHistory *_new_GlHistory(size_t buflen);
+
+/*
+ * Delete a history maintenance object.
+ */
+GlHistory *_del_GlHistory(GlHistory *glh);
+
+int _glh_add_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *line, int force);
+
+int _glh_search_prefix(GlHistory *glh, const char *line, int prefix_len);
+
+char *_glh_find_backwards(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim);
+char *_glh_find_forwards(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim);
+
+int _glh_cancel_search(GlHistory *glh);
+
+char *_glh_oldest_line(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim);
+char *_glh_current_line(GlHistory *glh, char *line, size_t dim);
+
+/*
+ * Whenever a new line is added to the history buffer, it is given
+ * a unique ID, recorded in an object of the following type.
+ */
+typedef unsigned long GlhLineID;
+
+/*
+ * Query the id of a history line offset by a given number of lines from
+ * the one that is currently being recalled. If a recall session isn't
+ * in progress, or the offset points outside the history list, 0 is
+ * returned.
+ */
+GlhLineID _glh_line_id(GlHistory *glh, int offset);
+
+/*
+ * Recall a line by its history buffer ID. If the line is no longer
+ * in the buffer, or the specified id is zero, NULL is returned.
+ */
+char *_glh_recall_line(GlHistory *glh, GlhLineID id, char *line, size_t dim);
+
+/*
+ * Write the contents of the history buffer to a given file. Note that
+ * ~ and $ expansion are not performed on the filename.
+ */
+int _glh_save_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *filename,
+		      const char *comment, int max_lines);
+
+/*
+ * Restore the contents of the history buffer from a given file.
+ * Note that ~ and $ expansion are not performed on the filename.
+ */
+int _glh_load_history(GlHistory *glh, const char *filename, const char *comment,
+		      char *line, size_t dim);
+
+/*
+ * Set and query the current history group.
+ */
+int _glh_set_group(GlHistory *glh, unsigned group);
+int _glh_get_group(GlHistory *glh);
+
+/*
+ * Display the contents of the history list to the specified stdio
+ * output group.
+ */
+int _glh_show_history(GlHistory *glh, FILE *fp, const char *fmt,
+		      int all_groups, int max_lines);
+
+/*
+ * Change the size of the history buffer.
+ */
+int _glh_resize_history(GlHistory *glh, size_t bufsize);
+
+/*
+ * Set an upper limit to the number of lines that can be recorded in the
+ * history list, or remove a previously specified limit.
+ */
+void _glh_limit_history(GlHistory *glh, int max_lines);
+
+/*
+ * Discard either all history, or the history associated with the current
+ * history group.
+ */
+void _glh_clear_history(GlHistory *glh, int all_groups);
+
+/*
+ * Temporarily enable or disable the history facility.
+ */
+void _glh_toggle_history(GlHistory *glh, int enable);
+
+/*
+ * Lookup a history line by its sequential number of entry in the
+ * history buffer.
+ */
+int _glh_lookup_history(GlHistory *glh, GlhLineID id, const char **line,
+			unsigned *group, time_t *timestamp);
+
+/*
+ * Query the state of the history list.
+ */
+void _glh_state_of_history(GlHistory *glh, int *enabled, unsigned *group,
+			   int *max_lines);
+
+/*
+ * Get the range of lines in the history buffer.
+ */
+void _glh_range_of_history(GlHistory *glh, unsigned long *oldest,
+			   unsigned long *newest, int *nlines);
+
+/*
+ * Return the size of the history buffer and the amount of the
+ * buffer that is currently in use.
+ */
+void _glh_size_of_history(GlHistory *glh, size_t *buff_size, size_t *buff_used);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2029b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.c
@@ -0,0 +1,399 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+
+#include "pathutil.h"
+#include "homedir.h"
+
+/*
+ * Set the max length of the error-reporting string. There is no point
+ * in this being longer than the width of a typical terminal window.
+ * In composing error messages, I have assumed that this number is
+ * at least 80, so you don't decrease it below this number.
+ */
+#define ERRLEN 200
+
+/*
+ * Use the reentrant POSIX threads versions of the password lookup functions?
+ */
+#if defined(_POSIX_C_SOURCE) && _POSIX_C_SOURCE >= 199506L
+#define THREAD_COMPATIBLE 1
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Provide a password buffer size fallback in case the max size reported
+ * by sysconf() is said to be indeterminate.
+ */
+#define DEF_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX 1024
+
+/*
+ * The resources needed to lookup and record a home directory are
+ * maintained in objects of the following type.
+ */
+struct HomeDir {
+  char errmsg[ERRLEN+1]; /* Error-report buffer */
+  char *buffer;          /* A buffer for reading password entries and */
+                         /*  directory paths. */
+  int buflen;            /* The allocated size of buffer[] */
+#ifdef THREAD_COMPATIBLE
+  struct passwd pwd;     /* The password entry of a user */
+#endif
+};
+
+static const char *hd_getpwd(HomeDir *home);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new HomeDir object.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  HomeDir *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+HomeDir *_new_HomeDir(void)
+{
+  HomeDir *home;  /* The object to be returned */
+  size_t pathlen; /* The estimated maximum size of a pathname */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  home = (HomeDir *) malloc(sizeof(HomeDir));
+  if(!home) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_HomeDir: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_HomeDir().
+ */
+  home->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+  home->buffer = NULL;
+  home->buflen = 0;
+/*
+ * Allocate the buffer that is used by the reentrant POSIX password-entry
+ * lookup functions.
+ */
+#ifdef THREAD_COMPATIBLE
+/*
+ * Get the length of the buffer needed by the reentrant version
+ * of getpwnam().
+ */
+#ifndef _SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX
+  home->buflen = DEF_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX;
+#else
+  errno = 0;
+  home->buflen = sysconf(_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX);
+/*
+ * If the limit isn't available, substitute a suitably large fallback value.
+ */
+  if(home->buflen < 0 || errno)
+    home->buflen = DEF_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX;
+#endif
+#endif
+/*
+ * If the existing buffer length requirement is too restrictive to record
+ * a pathname, increase its length.
+ */
+  pathlen = _pu_pathname_dim();
+  if(pathlen > home->buflen)
+    home->buflen = pathlen;
+/*
+ * Allocate a work buffer.
+ */
+  home->buffer = (char *) malloc(home->buflen);
+  if(!home->buffer) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_HomeDir: Insufficient memory.");
+    return _del_HomeDir(home);
+  };
+  return home;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a HomeDir object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  home   HomeDir *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return HomeDir *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+HomeDir *_del_HomeDir(HomeDir *home)
+{
+  if(home) {
+    if(home->buffer)
+      free(home->buffer);
+    free(home);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup the home directory of a given user in the password file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  home      HomeDir *   The resources needed to lookup the home directory.
+ *  user   const char *   The name of the user to lookup, or "" to lookup
+ *                        the home directory of the person running the
+ *                        program.
+ * Output:
+ *  return const char *   The home directory. If the library was compiled
+ *                        with threads, this string is part of the HomeDir
+ *                        object and will change on subsequent calls. If
+ *                        the library wasn't compiled to be reentrant,
+ *                        then the string is a pointer into a static string
+ *                        in the C library and will change not only on
+ *                        subsequent calls to this function, but also if
+ *                        any calls are made to the C library password
+ *                        file lookup functions. Thus to be safe, you should
+ *                        make a copy of this string before calling any
+ *                        other function that might do a password file
+ *                        lookup.
+ *
+ *                        On error, NULL is returned and a description
+ *                        of the error can be acquired by calling
+ *                        _hd_last_home_dir_error().
+ */
+const char *_hd_lookup_home_dir(HomeDir *home, const char *user)
+{
+  const char *home_dir;   /* A pointer to the home directory of the user */
+/*
+ * If no username has been specified, arrange to lookup the current
+ * user.
+ */
+  int login_user = !user || *user=='\0';
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!home) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_hd_lookup_home_dir: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Handle the ksh "~+". This expands to the absolute path of the
+ * current working directory.
+ */
+  if (!login_user && strcmp(user, "+") == 0) {
+    home_dir = hd_getpwd(home);
+    if(!home_dir) {
+      strncpy(home->errmsg, "Cannot determine current directory.", ERRLEN);
+      home->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+      return NULL;
+    }
+    return home_dir;
+  };
+/*
+ * Look up the password entry of the user.
+ * First the POSIX threads version - this is painful!
+ */
+#ifdef THREAD_COMPATIBLE
+  {
+    struct passwd *ret; /* The returned pointer to pwd */
+    int status;         /* The return value of getpwnam_r() */
+/*
+ * Look up the password entry of the specified user.
+ */
+    if(login_user)
+      status = getpwuid_r(geteuid(), &home->pwd, home->buffer, home->buflen,
+			  &ret);
+    else
+      status = getpwnam_r(user, &home->pwd, home->buffer, home->buflen, &ret);
+    if(status || !ret) {
+      const char *fmt = "User '%.*s' doesn't exist.";
+      sprintf(home->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt),  user);
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Get a pointer to the string that holds the home directory.
+ */
+    home_dir = home->pwd.pw_dir;
+  };
+/*
+ * Now the classic unix version.
+ */
+#else
+  {
+    struct passwd *pwd = login_user ? getpwuid(geteuid()) : getpwnam(user);
+    if(!pwd) {
+      const char *fmt = "User '%.*s' doesn't exist.";
+      sprintf(home->errmsg, fmt, ERRLEN - strlen(fmt),  user);
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Get a pointer to the home directory.
+ */
+    home_dir = pwd->pw_dir;
+  };
+#endif
+  return home_dir;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the last error that caused _hd_lookup_home_dir()
+ * to return NULL.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  home   HomeDir *  The resources needed to record the home directory.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    char *  The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *_hd_last_home_dir_error(HomeDir *home)
+{
+  return home ? home->errmsg : "NULL HomeDir argument";
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * The _hd_scan_user_home_dirs() function calls a user-provided function
+ * for each username known by the system, passing the function both
+ * the name and the home directory of the user.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  home             HomeDir *  The resource object for reading home
+ *                              directories.
+ *  data                void *  Anonymous data to be passed to the
+ *                              callback function.
+ *  callback_fn  HOME_DIR_FN(*) The function to call for each user.
+ * Output:
+ *  return               int    0 - Successful completion.
+ *                              1 - An error occurred. A description
+ *                                  of the error can be obtained by
+ *                                  calling _hd_last_home_dir_error().
+ */
+int _hd_scan_user_home_dirs(HomeDir *home, void *data, HOME_DIR_FN(*callback_fn))
+{
+  int waserr = 0;       /* True after errors */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!home || !callback_fn) {
+    if(home)
+      strcpy(home->errmsg,
+	     "_hd_scan_user_home_dirs: Missing callback function");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * There are no reentrant versions of getpwent() etc for scanning
+ * the password file, so disable username completion when the
+ * library is compiled to be reentrant.
+ */
+#if !defined(_POSIX_C_SOURCE) || _POSIX_C_SOURCE < 199506L
+  {
+    struct passwd *pwd;   /* The pointer to the latest password entry */
+/*
+ * Open the password file.
+ */
+    setpwent();
+/*
+ * Read the contents of the password file, looking for usernames
+ * that start with the specified prefix, and adding them to the
+ * list of matches.
+ */
+    while((pwd = getpwent()) != NULL && !waserr)
+      waserr = callback_fn(data, pwd->pw_name, pwd->pw_dir, home->errmsg,
+			   ERRLEN);
+/*
+ * Close the password file.
+ */
+    endpwent();
+  };
+#endif
+/*
+ * Under ksh ~+ stands for the absolute pathname of the current working
+ * directory.
+ */
+  if (!waserr) {
+    const char *pwd = hd_getpwd(home);
+    if(pwd) {
+      waserr = callback_fn(data, "+", pwd, home->errmsg, ERRLEN);
+    } else {
+      waserr = 1;
+      strncpy(home->errmsg, "Cannot determine current directory.", ERRLEN);
+      home->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+    };
+  };
+  return waserr;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the value of getenv("PWD") if this points to the current
+ * directory, or the return value of getcwd() otherwise. The reason for
+ * prefering PWD over getcwd() is that the former preserves the history
+ * of symbolic links that have been traversed to reach the current
+ * directory. This function is designed to provide the equivalent
+ * expansion of the ksh ~+ directive, which normally returns its value
+ * of PWD.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  home      HomeDir *  The resource object for reading home directories.
+ * Output:
+ *  return const char *  A pointer to either home->buffer, where the
+ *                       pathname is recorded, the string returned by
+ *                       getenv("PWD"), or NULL on error.
+ */
+static const char *hd_getpwd(HomeDir *home)
+{
+/*
+ * Get the absolute path of the current working directory.
+ */
+  char *cwd = getcwd(home->buffer, home->buflen);
+/*
+ * Some shells set PWD with the path of the current working directory.
+ * This will differ from cwd in that it won't have had symbolic links
+ * expanded.
+ */
+  const char *pwd = getenv("PWD");
+/*
+ * If PWD was set, and it points to the same directory as cwd, return
+ * its value. Note that it won't be the same if the current shell or
+ * the current program has changed directories, after inheriting PWD
+ * from a parent shell.
+ */
+  struct stat cwdstat, pwdstat;
+  if(pwd && cwd && stat(cwd, &cwdstat)==0 && stat(pwd, &pwdstat)==0 &&
+     cwdstat.st_dev == pwdstat.st_dev && cwdstat.st_ino == pwdstat.st_ino)
+    return pwd;
+/*
+ * Also return pwd if getcwd() failed, since it represents the best
+ * information that we have access to.
+ */
+  if(!cwd)
+    return pwd;
+/*
+ * In the absence of a valid PWD, return cwd.
+ */
+  return cwd;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5607802
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/homedir.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+#ifndef homedir_h
+#define homedir_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+typedef struct HomeDir HomeDir;
+
+/*
+ * The following constructor and destructor functions create and
+ * delete the resources needed to look up home directories.
+ */
+HomeDir *_new_HomeDir(void);
+HomeDir *_del_HomeDir(HomeDir *home);
+
+/*
+ * Return the home directory of a specified user, or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *_hd_lookup_home_dir(HomeDir *home, const char *user);
+
+/*
+ * Get the description of the that occured when _hd_lookup_home_dir() was
+ * last called.
+ */
+const char *_hd_last_home_dir_error(HomeDir *home);
+
+/*
+ * The _hd_scan_user_home_dirs() function calls a user-provided function
+ * for each username known by the system, passing the function both
+ * the name and the home directory of the user.
+ *
+ * The following macro can be used to declare both pointers and
+ * prototypes for the callback functions. The 'data' argument is
+ * a copy of the 'data' argument passed to _hd_scan_user_home_dirs()
+ * and is intended for the user of _hd_scan_user_home_dirs() to use
+ * to pass anonymous context data to the callback function.
+ * The username and home directories are passed to the callback function
+ * in the *usrnam and *homedir arguments respectively.
+ * To abort the scan, and have _hd_scan_user_home_dirs() return 1, the
+ * callback function can return 1. A description of up to maxerr
+ * characters before the terminating '\0', can be written to errmsg[].
+ * This can then be examined by calling _hd_last_home_dir_error().
+ * To indicate success and continue the scan, the callback function
+ * should return 0. _hd_scan_user_home_dirs() returns 0 on successful
+ * completion of the scan, or 1 if an error occurred or a call to the
+ * callback function returned 1.
+ */
+#define HOME_DIR_FN(fn) int (fn)(void *data, const char *usrnam, const char *homedir, char *errmsg, int maxerr)
+
+int _hd_scan_user_home_dirs(HomeDir *home, void *data,
+			    HOME_DIR_FN(*callback_fn));
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/changes.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/changes.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b309a7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/changes.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1495 @@
+<HEAD><TITLE>The tecla library change log</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY bgcolor=add8e6><PRE>
+In the following log, modification dates are listed using the European
+convention in which the day comes before the month (ie. DD/MM/YYYY).
+The most recent modifications are listed first.
+
+25/05/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu  (based on suggestions by Paul Smith)
+           pathutil.c
+             Apparently, under QNX pathconf("/",_PC_PATH_MAX) returns
+             EINVAL. At Paul's suggestion I have modified the code to
+             silently substitute the existing MAX_PATHLEN_FALLBACK
+             value if pathconf() returns an error of any kind.
+           homedir.c
+             Under QNX, sysconf(_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX) also apparently
+             returns EINVAL, so as with pathconf() I modified the code
+             to substitute a fallback default, rather than
+             complaining and failing.
+           enhance.c
+             Paul told me that the inclusion of sys/termios.h was
+             causing compilation of enhance.c to fail under QNX. This
+             line is a bug.  The correct thing to do is include
+             termios.h without a sub-directory prefix, as I was
+             already doing futher up in the file, so I have just
+             removed the errant include line.
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c configure.in configure
+             Mac OS X doesn't have a term.h or termcap.h, but it does
+             define prototypes for tputs() and setupterm(), so the
+             default prototypes that I was including if no headers
+             where available, upset it. I've removed these prototypes.
+             I also now conditionally include whichever is found of
+             curses.h and ncurses/curses.h for both termcap and
+             terminfo (before I wasn't including curses.h when
+             termcap was selected).
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           Updated version number to 1.4.1, ready for a micro
+           release.
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           html/index.html
+             Added Mac OS X and Cygwin to the list of systems that
+             can compile libtecla.
+
+12/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             Under Mac OS X, the tputs() callback function returns
+             void, instead of the int return value used by other
+             systems. This declaration is now used if both __MACH__
+             and __APPLE__ are defined. Hopefully these are the
+             correct system macros to check. Thanks for Stephan
+             Fiedler for providing information on Mac OS X.
+
+11/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure getline.c
+             Some systems don't have term.h, and others have it hidden
+             in an ncurses sub-directory of the standard system include
+             directory. If term.h can't be found, simply don't include
+             it. If it is in an ncurses sub-directory, include
+             ncurses/term.h instead of term.h.
+
+04/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             Use ranlib on systems that need it (Mac OS X).  Also,
+             make all components of the installation directories where
+             needed, instead of assuming that they exist.
+
+04/02/2002 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             When the tab completion binding was unbound from the tab
+             key, hitting the tab key caused gl_get_line() to ring the
+             bell instead of inserting a tab character. This is
+             problematic when using the 'enhance' program with
+             Jython, since tabs are important in Python. I have
+             corrected this.
+
+10/12/2001 Version 1.4.0 released.
+
+10/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             If the TIOCGWINSZ ioctl doesn't work, as is the case when
+             running in an emacs shell, leave the size unchanged, rather
+             than returning a fatal error.
+
+07/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure
+             Now that the configure version of CFLAGS is included in
+             the makefile, I noticed that the optimization flags -g
+             and -O2 had been added. It turns out that if CFLAGS isn't
+             already set, the autoconf AC_PROG_CC macro initializes it
+             with these two optimization flags. Since this would break
+             backwards compatibility in embedded distributions that
+             already use the OPT= makefile argument, and because
+             turning debugging on needlessly bloats the library, I now
+             make sure that CFLAGS is set before calling this macro.
+
+07/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           enhance.c
+             Use argv[0] in error reports instead of using a
+             hardcoded macro.
+
+07/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             The cut buffer wasn't being cleared after being
+             used as a work buffer by gl_load_history().
+
+06/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           configure.in configure
+             I removed my now redundant definition of SUN_TPUTS from
+             CFLAGS. I also added "-I/usr/include" to CFLAGS under
+             Solaris to prevent gcc from seeing conflicting versions
+             of system header files in /usr/local/include.
+
+06/12/2001 Markus Gyger (logged here by mcs)
+           Lots of files.
+             Lots of corrections to misspellings and typos in the
+             comments.
+           getline.c
+             Markus reverted a supposed fix that I added a day or two
+             ago. I had incorrectly thought that in Solaris 8, Sun had
+             finally brought their declaration of the callback
+             function of tputs() into line with other systems, but it
+             turned out that gcc was pulling in a GNU version of
+             term.h from /usr/local/include, and this was what
+             confused me.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           Makefile.in
+             I added @CFLAGS@ to the CFLAGS assignment, so that
+             if CFLAGS is set as an environment variable when
+             configure is run, the corresponding make variable
+             includes its values in the output makefile.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_last_signal.3
+             I added a function that programs can use to find out
+             which signal caused gl_get_line() to return EINTR.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             When the newline action was triggered by a printable
+             character, it failed to display that character. It now
+             does. Also, extra control codes that I had added, to
+             clear to the end of the display after the carriage return,
+             but before displaying the prompt, were confusing expect
+             scripts, so I have removed them. This step is now done
+             instead in gl_redisplay() after displaying the full input
+             line.
+
+05/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             A user convinced me that continuing to invoke meta
+             keybindings for meta characters that are printable is a
+             bad idea, as is allowing users to ask to have setlocale()
+             called behind the application's back. I have thus changed
+             this. The setlocale configuration option has gone, and
+             gl_get_line() is now completely 8-bit clean, by default.
+             This means that if a meta character is printable, it is
+             treated as a literal character, rather than a potential
+             M-c binding.  Meta bindings can still be invoked via
+             their Esc-c equivalents, and indeed most terminal
+             emulators either output such escape pairs by default when
+             the meta character is pressed, or can be configured to do
+             so. I have documented how to configure xterm to do this,
+             in the man page.
+
+03/12/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             gl_get_line() by default now prints any 8-bit printable
+             characters that don't match keybindings. Previously
+             characters > 127 were only printed if preceded by the
+             literal-next action.  Alternatively, by placing the
+             command literal_if_printable in the tecla configuration
+             file, all printable characters are treated as literal
+             characters, even if they are bound to action functions.
+
+             For international users of programs written by
+             programmers that weren't aware of the need to call
+             setlocale() to support alternate character sets, the
+             configuration file can now also contain the single-word
+             command "setlocale", which tells gl_get_line() to remedy
+             this.
+
+27/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           demo.c demo2.c enhance man3/gl_get_line.3
+             All demos and programs now call setlocale(LC_CTYPE,"").
+             This makes them support character sets of different
+             locales, where specified with the LC_CTYPE, LC_ALL, or
+             LANG environment variables. I also added this to the demo
+             in the man page, and documented its effect.
+
+27/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c
+             When displaying unsigned characters with values over
+             127 literally, previously it was assumed that they would
+             all be displayable. Now isprint() is consulted, and if it
+             says that a character isn't printable, the character code
+             is displayed in octal like \307. In non-C locales, some
+             characters with values > 127 are displayable, and
+             isprint() tells gl_get_line() which are and which aren't.
+
+27/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c pathutil.c history.c enhance.c demo2.c
+             All arguments of the ctype.h character class functions
+             are now cast to (int)(unsigned char). Previously they
+             were cast to (int), which doesn't correctly conform to
+             the requirements of the C standard, and could cause
+             problems for characters with values > 127 on systems
+             with signed char's.
+
+26/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           man3/enhance.3 man3/libtecla.3
+             I started writing a man page for the enhance program.
+
+26/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules INSTALL
+             It is now possible to specify whether the demos and other
+             programs are to be built, by overriding the default
+             values of the DEMOS, PROGRAMS and PROGRAMS_R variables.
+             I have also documented the BINDIR variable and the
+             install_bin makefile target.
+
+22/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_ignore_signal.3 man3/gl_trap_signal.3
+             Signal handling has now been modified to be customizable.
+             Signals that are trapped by default can be removed from
+             the list of trapped signals, and signals that aren't
+             currently trapped, can be added to the list. Applications
+             can also specify the signal and terminal environments in
+             which an application's signal handler is invoked, and
+             what gl_get_line() does after the signal handler returns.
+
+13/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             Added half-bright, reverse-video and blinking text to the
+             available prompt formatting options.
+           getline.c
+             Removed ^O from the default VT100 sgr0 capability
+             string.  Apparently it can cause problems with some
+             terminal emulators, and we don't need it, since it turns
+             off the alternative character set mode, which we don't
+             use.
+           getline.c
+             gl_tigetstr() and gl_tgetstr() didn't guard against the
+             error returns of tigetstr() and tgetstr() respectively.
+             They now do.
+
+11/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_prompt_style.3
+             Although the default remains to display the prompt string
+             literally, the new gl_prompt_style() function can be used
+             to enable text attribute formatting directives in prompt
+             strings, such as underlining, bold font, and highlighting
+             directives.
+
+09/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           enhance.c Makefile.rules configure.in configure
+             I added a new program to the distribution that allows one
+             to run most third party programs with the tecla library
+             providing command-line editing.
+
+08/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           libtecla.h getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3 history.c history.h
+             I added a max_lines argument to gl_show_history() and
+             _glh_show_history(). This can optionally be used to
+             set a limit on the number of history lines displayed.
+           libtecla.h getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a new function called gl_replace_prompt(). This
+             can be used by gl_get_line() callback functions to
+             request that a new prompt be use when they return.
+
+06/11/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I implemented, bound and documented the list-history
+             action, used for listing historical lines of the current
+             history group.
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_echo_mode.3
+             I wrote functions to specify and query whether subsequent
+             lines will be visible as they are being typed.
+
+28/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             For those cases where a terminal provides its own
+             high-level terminal editing facilities, you can now
+             specify an edit-mode argument of 'none'. This disables
+             all tecla key bindings, and by using canonical terminal
+             input mode instead of raw input mode, editing is left up
+             to the terminal driver.
+
+21/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           libtecla.h getline.c history.c history.h
+           man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_history_info.3
+             I added the new gl_state_of_history(),
+             gl_range_of_history() and gl_size_of_history()
+             functions for querying information about the
+             history list.
+           history.c
+             While testing the new gl_size_of_history()
+             function, I noticed that when the history buffer
+             wrapped, any location nodes of old lines between
+             the most recent line and the end of the buffer
+             weren't being removed. This could result in bogus
+             entries appearing at the start of the history list.
+             Now fixed.
+
+20/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           libtecla.h getline.c history.c history.h
+           man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_lookup_history.3
+             I added a function called gl_lookup_history(), that
+             the application can use to lookup lines in the history
+             list.
+           libtecla.h getline.c history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+             gl_show_history() now takes a format string argument
+             to control how the line is displayed, and with what
+             information. It also now provides the option of either
+             displaying all history lines or just those of the
+             current history group.
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             gl_get_line() only archives lines in the history buffer
+             if the newline action was invoked by a newline or
+             carriage return character.
+
+16/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           history.c history.h getline.c libtecla.h libtecla.map
+           man3/gl_get_line.3 man3/gl_resize_history.3
+           man3/gl_limit_history.3 man3/gl_clear_history.3
+           man3/gl_toggle_history.3
+	     I added a number of miscellaneous history configuration
+	     functions. You can now resize or delete the history
+	     buffer, limit the number of lines that are allowed in the
+	     buffer, clear either all history or just the history of
+	     the current history group, and temporarily enable and
+	     disable the history mechanism.
+
+13/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             tputs_fp is now only declared if using termcap or
+             terminfo.
+           getline.c libtecla.map man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_terminal_size.3
+             I added a public gl_terminal_size() function for
+             updating and querying the current size of the terminal.
+           update_version configure.in libtecla.h
+             A user noted that on systems where the configure script
+             couldn't be used, it was inconvenient to have the version
+             number macros set by the configure script, so they are
+             now specified in libtecla.h. To reduce the likelihood
+             that the various files where the version number now
+             appears might get out of sync, I have written the
+             update_version script, which changes the version number
+             in all of these files to a given value.
+
+01/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a max_lines argument to gl_save_history(), to
+             allow people to optionally place a ceiling on the number
+             of history lines saved. Specifying this as -1 sets the
+             ceiling to infinity.
+
+01/10/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in configure
+             Under digital unix, getline wouldn't compile with
+             _POSIX_C_SOURCE set, due to type definitions needed by
+             select being excluded by this flag. Defining the
+             _OSF_SOURCE macro as well on this system, resolved this.
+
+30/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c libtecla.h history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_group_history.3
+             I implemented history streams. History streams
+             effectively allow multiple history lists to be stored in
+             a single history buffer. Lines in the buffer are tagged
+             with the current stream identification number, and
+             lookups only consider lines that are marked with the
+             current stream identifier.
+           getline.c libtecla.h history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/gl_show_history.3
+             The new gl_show_history function displays the current
+             history to a given stdio output stream.
+
+29/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Previously new_GetLine() installed a persistent signal
+             handler to be sure to catch the SIGWINCH (terminal size
+             change) signal between calls to gl_get_line(). This had
+             the drawback that if multiple GetLine objects were
+             created, only the first GetLine object used after the
+             signal was received, would see the signal and adapt to
+             the new terminal size. Instead of this, a signal handler
+             for sigwinch is only installed while gl_get_line() is
+             running, and just after installing this handler,
+             gl_get_line() checks for terminal size changes that
+             might have occurred while the signal handler wasn't
+             installed.
+           getline.c
+             Dynamically allocated copies of capability strings looked
+             up in the terminfo or termcap databases are now made, so
+             that calls to setupterm() etc for one GetLine object
+             don't get trashed when another GetLine object calls
+             setupterm() etc. It is now safe to allocate and use
+             multiple GetLine objects, albeit only within a single
+             thread.
+           
+28/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           version.c Makefile.rules
+             I added a function for querying the version number of
+             the library.
+
+26/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I added the new gl_watch_fd() function, which allows
+             applications to register callback functions to be invoked
+             when activity is seen on arbitrary file descriptors while
+             gl_get_line() is awaiting keyboard input from the user.
+
+           keytab.c
+             If a request is received to delete a non-existent
+             binding, which happens to be an ambiguous prefix of other
+             bindings no complaint is now generated about it being
+             ambiguous.
+
+23/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c history.c history.h man3/gl_get_line.3
+           libtecla.map demo.c
+             I added new public functions for saving and restoring the
+             contents of the history list. The demo program now uses
+             these functions to load and save history in ~/.demo_history.
+
+23/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             On trying the demo for the first time on a KDE konsole
+             terminal, I discovered that the default M-O binding
+             to repeat history was hiding the arrow keys, which are
+             M-OA etc. I have removed this binding. The M-o (ie the
+             lower case version of this), is still bound.
+
+18/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3 libtecla.map
+             Automatic reading of ~/.teclarc is now postponed until
+             the first call to gl_get_line(), to give the application
+             the chance to specify alternative configuration sources
+             with the new function gl_configure_getline(). The latter
+             function allows configuration to be done with a string, a
+             specified application-specific file, and/or a specified
+             user-specific file. I also added a read-init-files action
+             function, for re-reading the configuration files, if any.
+             This is by default bound to ^X^R. This is all documented
+             in gl_get_line.3.
+
+08/09/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             It is now possible to bind actions to key-sequences
+             that start with printable characters. Previously
+             keysequences were required to start with meta or control
+             characters. This is documented in gl_get_line.3.
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             A customized completion function can now arrange for
+             gl_get_line() to return the current input line whenever a
+             successful completion has been made. This is signalled by
+             setting the last character of the optional continuation
+             suffix to a newline character. This is documented in
+             gl_get_line.3.
+
+05/07/2001 Bug reported by Mike MacFaden, fixed by mcs
+
+           configure.in
+             There was a bug in the configure script that only
+             revealed itself on systems without termcap but not
+             terminfo (eg. NetBSD). I traced the bug back to a lack of
+             sufficient quoting of multi-line m4 macro arguments in
+             configure.in, and have now fixed this and recreated the
+             configure script.
+
+05/07/2001 Bug reported and patched by Mike MacFaden (patch modified
+           by mcs to match original intentions).
+
+           getline.c
+             getline.c wouldn't compile when termcap was selected as
+             the terminal information database. setupterm() was being
+             passed a non-existent variable, in place of the term[]
+             argument of gl_control_strings(). Also if
+             gl_change_terminal() is called with term==NULL, "ansi"
+             is now substituted.
+
+02/07/2001 Version 1.3.3 released.
+
+27/06/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c expand.c cplmatch.c
+             Added checks to fprintf() statements that write to the
+             terminal.
+           getline.c
+             Move the cursor to the end of the line before suspending,
+             so that the cursor doesn't get left in the middle of the
+             input line.
+           Makefile.in
+             On systems that don't support shared libraries, the
+             distclean target of make deleted libtecla.h. This has
+             now been fixed.
+           getline.c
+             gl_change_terminal() was being called by gl_change_editor(),
+             with the unwanted side effect that raw terminal modes were
+             stored as those to be restored later, if called by an
+             action function. gl_change_terminal() was being called in
+             this case to re-establish terminal-specific key bindings,
+             so I have just split this part of the function out into
+             a separate function for both gl_change_editor() and
+             gl_change_terminal() to call.
+
+12/06/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Signal handling has been improved. Many more signals are
+             now trapped, and instead of using a simple flag set by a
+             signal handler, race conditions are avoided by blocking
+             signals during most of the gl_get_line() code, and
+             unblocking them via calls to sigsetjmp(), just before
+             attempting to read each new character from the user.
+             The matching use of siglongjmp() in the signal
+             handlers ensures that signals are reblocked correctly
+             before they are handled. In most cases, signals cause
+             gl_get_line() to restore the terminal modes and signal
+             handlers of the calling application, then resend the
+             signal to the application. In the case of SIGINT, SIGHUP,
+             SIGPIPE, and SIGQUIT, if the process still exists after
+             the signals are resent, gl_get_line() immediately returns
+             with appropriate values assigned to errno. If SIGTSTP,
+             SIGTTIN or SIGTTOU signals are received, the process is
+             suspended. If any other signal is received, and the
+             process continues to exist after the signal is resent to
+             the calling application, line input is resumed after the
+             terminal is put back into raw mode, the gl_get_line()
+             signal handling is restored, and the input line redrawn.
+           man/gl_get_line(3)
+             I added a SIGNAL HANDLING section to the gl_get_line()
+             man page, describing the new signal handling features.
+
+21/05/2001 Version 1.3.2 released.
+
+21/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             When vi-replace-char was used to replace the character at
+             the end of the line, it left the cursor one character to
+             its right instead of on top of it. Now rememdied.
+           getline.c
+             When undoing, to properly emulate vi, the cursor is now
+             left at the leftmost of the saved and current cursor
+             positions.
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             Implemented find-parenthesis (%), delete-to-paren (M-d%),
+             vi-change-to-paren (M-c%), copy-to-paren (M-y%).
+           cplfile.c pcache.c
+             In three places I was comparing the last argument of
+             strncmp() to zero instead of the return value of
+             strncmp().
+
+20/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             Implemented and documented the vi-repeat-change action,
+             bound to the period key. This repeats the last action
+             that modified the input line.
+
+19/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           man3/gl_get_line.3
+             I documented the new action functions and bindings
+             provided by Tim Eliseo, plus the ring-bell action and
+             the new "nobeep" configuration option.
+           getline.c
+             I modified gl_change_editor() to remove and reinstate the
+             terminal settings as well as the default bindings, since
+             these have editor-specific differences. I also modified
+             it to not abort if a key-sequence can't be bound for some
+             reason. This allows the new vi-mode and emacs-mode
+             bindings to be used safely.
+           getline.c
+             When the line was re-displayed on receipt of a SIGWINCH
+             signal, the result wasn't visible until the next
+             character was typed, since a call to fflush() was needed.
+             gl_redisplay_line() now calls gl_flush_output() to remedy
+             this.
+
+17/05/2001 mcs@astro.catlech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Under Linux, calling fflush(gl->output_fd) hangs if
+             terminal output has been suspended with ^S. With the
+             tecla library taking responsability for reading the stop
+             and start characters this was a problem, because once
+             hung in fflush(), the keyboard input loop wasn't entered,
+             so the user couldn't type the start character to resume
+             output.  To remedy this, I now have the terminal process
+             these characters, rather than the library.
+
+12/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             The literal-next action is now implemented as a single
+             function which reads the next character itself.
+             Previously it just set a flag which effected the
+             interpretation of the next character read by the input
+             loop.
+           getline.c
+             Added a ring-bell action function. This is currently
+             unbound to any key by default, but it is used internally,
+             and can be used by users that want to disable any of the
+             default key-bindings.
+
+12/05/2001 Tim Eliseo    (logged here by mcs)
+
+           getline.c
+             Don't reset gl->number until after calling an action
+             function. By looking at whether gl->number is <0 or
+             not, action functions can then tell whether the count
+             that they were passed was explicitly specified by the
+             user, as opposed to being defaulted to 1.
+           getline.c
+             In vi, the position at which input mode is entered
+             acts as a barrier to backward motion for the few
+             backward moving actions that are enabled in input mode.
+             Tim added this barrier to getline.
+           getline.c
+             In gl_get_line() after reading an input line, or
+             having the read aborted by a signal, the sig_atomic_t
+             gl_pending_signal was being compared to zero instead
+             of -1 to see if no signals had been received.
+             gl_get_line() will thus have been calling raise(-1),
+             which luckily didn't seem to do anything. Tim also
+             arranged for errno to be set to EINTR when a signal
+             aborts gl_get_line().
+           getline.c
+             The test in gl_add_char_to_line() for detecting
+             when overwriting a character with a wider character,
+             had a < where it needed a >. Overwriting with a wider
+             character thus overwrote trailing characters. Tim also
+             removed a redundant copy of the character into the
+             line buffer.
+           getline.c
+             gl_cursor_left() and gl->cursor_right() were executing
+             a lot of redundant code, when the existing call to the
+             recently added gl_place_cursor() function, does all that
+             is necessary.
+           getline.c
+             Remove redundant code from backward_kill_line() by
+             re-implimenting in terms of gl_place_cursor() and
+             gl_delete_chars().
+           getline.c
+             gl_forward_delete_char() now records characters in cut
+             buffer when in vi command mode.
+           getline.c
+             In vi mode gl_backward_delete_char() now only deletes
+             up to the point at which input mode was entered. Also
+             gl_delete_chars() restores from the undo buffer when
+             deleting in vi insert mode.
+           getline.c
+             Added action functions, vi-delete-goto-column,
+             vi-change-to-bol, vi-change-line, emacs-mode, vi-mode,
+             vi-forward-change-find, vi-backward-change-find,
+             vi-forward-change-to, vi-backward-change-to,
+             vi-change-goto-col, forward-delete-find, backward-delete-find,
+             forward-delete-to, backward-delete-to,
+             delete-refind, delete-invert-refind, forward-copy-find,
+             backward-copy-find, forward-copy-to, backward-copy-to
+             copy-goto-column, copy-rest-of-line, copy-to-bol, copy-line,
+             history-re-search-forward, history-re-search-backward.
+
+06/05/2001 Version 1.3.1 released.
+
+03/05/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in
+             Old versions of GNU ld don't accept version scripts.
+             Under Linux I thus added a test to try out ld with
+             the --version-script argument to see if it works.
+             If not, version scripts aren't used.
+           configure.in
+             My test for versions of Solaris earlier than 7
+             failed when confronted by a three figure version
+             number (2.5.1). Fixed.
+
+30/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             In vi mode, history-search-backward and
+             history-search-forward weren't doing anything when
+             invoked at the start of an empty line, whereas
+             they should have acted like up-history and down-history.
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             When shared libraries are being created, the build
+             procedure now arranges for any alternate library
+             links to be created as well, before linking the
+             demos. Without this the demos always linked to the
+             static libraries (which was perfectly ok, but wasn't a
+             good example).
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             On systems on which shared libraries were being created,
+             if there were no alternate list of names, make would
+             abort due to a Bourne shell 'for' statement that didn't
+             have any arguments. Currently there are no systems who's
+             shared library configurations would trigger this
+             problem.
+           Makefile.rules
+             The demos now relink to take account of changes to the
+             library.
+           configure.in configure
+             When determining whether the reentrant version of the
+             library should be compiled by default, the configure
+             script now attempts to compile a dummy program that
+             includes all of the appropriate system headers and
+             defines _POSIX_C_SOURCE. This should now be a robust test
+             on systems which use C macros to alias these function
+             names to other internal functions.
+           configure.in
+             Under Solaris 2.6 and earlier, the curses library is in
+             /usr/ccs/lib. Gcc wasn't finding this. In addition to
+             remedying this, I had to remove "-z text" from
+             LINK_SHARED under Solaris to get it to successfully
+             compile the shared library against the static curses
+             library.
+           configure.in
+             Under Linux the -soname directive was being used
+             incorrectly, citing the fully qualified name of the
+             library instead of its major version alias. This will
+             unfortunately mean that binaries linked with the 1.2.3
+             and 1.2.4 versions of the shared library won't use
+             later versions of the library unless relinked.
+
+30/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             In gl_get_input_line(), don't redundantly copy the
+             start_line if start_line == gl->line.
+
+30/04/2001 Version 1.3.0 released.
+
+28/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in
+             I removed the --no-undefined directive from the Linux
+             LINK_SHARED command. After recent patches to our RedHat
+             7.0 systems ld started reporting some internal symbols of
+             libc as being undefined.  Using nm on libc indicated that
+             the offending symbols are indeed defined, albeit as
+             "common" symbols, so there appears to be a bug in
+             RedHat's ld. Removing this flag allows the tecla shared
+             library to compile, and programs appear to function fine.
+           man3/gl_get_line.3
+             The default key-sequence used to invoke the
+             read-from-file action was incorrectly cited as ^Xi
+             instead of ^X^F.
+
+26/04/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man3/gl_get_line.3
+             A new vi-style editing mode was added. This involved
+             adding many new action functions, adding support for
+             specifying editing modes in users' ~/.teclarc files,
+             writing a higher level cursor motion function to support
+             the different line-end bounds required in vi command
+             mode, and a few small changes to support the fact that vi
+             has two modes, input mode and command mode with different
+             bindings.
+
+             When vi editing mode is enabled, any binding that starts
+             with an escape or a meta character, is interpreted as a
+             command-mode binding, and switches the library to vi
+             command mode if not already in that mode. Once in command
+             mode the first character of all keysequences entered
+             until input mode is re-enabled, are quietly coerced to
+             meta characters before being looked up in the key-binding
+             table. So, for example, in the key-binding table, the
+             standard vi command-mode 'w' key, which moves the cursor
+             one word to the right, is represented by M-w. This
+             emulates vi's dual sets of bindings in a natural way
+             without needing large changes to the library, or new
+             binding syntaxes. Since cursor keys normally emit
+             keysequences which start with escape, it also does
+             something sensible when a cursor key is pressed during
+             input mode (unlike true vi, which gets upset).
+
+             I also added a ^Xg binding for the new list-glob action
+             to both the emacs and vi key-binding tables. This lists
+             the files that match the wild-card expression that
+             precedes it on the command line.
+
+             The function that reads in ~/.teclarc used to tell
+             new_GetLine() to abort if it encountered anything that it
+             didn't understand in this file. It now just reports an
+             error and continues onto the next line.
+           Makefile.in:
+             When passing LIBS=$(LIBS) to recursive invokations of
+             make, quotes weren't included around the $(LIBS) part.
+             This would cause problems if LIBS ever contained more
+             than one word (with the supplied configure script this
+             doesn't happen currently). I added these quotes.
+           expand.c man3/ef_expand_file.3:
+             I wrote a new public function called ef_list_expansions(),
+             to list the matching filenames returned by
+             ef_expand_file().
+
+             I also fixed the example in the man page, which cited
+             exp->file instead of exp->files, and changed the
+             dangerous name 'exp' with 'expn'.
+           keytab.c:
+             Key-binding tables start with 100 elements, and are
+             supposedly incremented in size by 100 elements whenever
+             the a table runs out of space. The realloc arguments to
+             do this were wrong. This would have caused problems if
+             anybody added a lot of personal bindings in their
+             ~/.teclarc file. I only noticed it because the number of
+             key bindings needed by the new vi mode exceeded this
+             number.
+           libtecla.map
+             ef_expand_file() is now reported as having been added in
+             the upcoming 1.3.0 release.
+
+25/03/2001 Markus Gyger  (logged here by mcs)
+
+           Makefile.in:
+             Make symbolic links to alternative shared library names
+             relative instead of absolute.
+           Makefile.rules:
+             The HP-UX libtecla.map.opt file should be made in the
+             compilation directory, to allow the source code directory
+             to be on a readonly filesystem.
+           cplmatch.c demo2.c history.c pcache.c
+             To allow the library to be compiled with a C++ compiler,
+             without generating warnings, a few casts were added where
+             void* return values were being assigned directly to
+             none void* pointer variables.
+
+25/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           libtecla.map:
+             Added comment header to explain the purpose of the file.
+             Also added cpl_init_FileArgs to the list of exported
+             symbols. This symbol is deprecated, and no longer
+             documented, but for backwards compatibility, it should
+             still be exported.
+           configure:
+             I had forgotten to run autoconf before releasing version
+             1.2.4, so I have just belatedly done so.  This enables
+             Markus' changes to "configure.in" documented previously,
+             (see 17/03/2001).
+
+20/03/2001 John Levon   (logged here by mcs)
+
+           libtecla.h
+             A couple of the function prototypes in libtecla.h have
+             (FILE *) argument declarations, which means that stdio.h
+             needs to be included. The header file should be self
+             contained, so libtecla.h now includes stdio.h.
+
+18/03/2001 Version 1.2.4 released.
+
+           README html/index.html configure.in
+             Incremented minor version from 3 to 4.
+
+18/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             The fix for the end-of-line problem that I released a
+             couple of weeks ago, only worked for the first line,
+             because I was handling this case when the cursor position
+             was equal to the last column, rather than when the cursor
+             position modulo ncolumn was zero.
+           Makefile.in Makefile.rules
+             The demos are now made by default, their rules now being
+             int Makefile.rules instead of Makefile.in.
+           INSTALL
+             I documented how to compile the library in a different
+             directory than the distribution directory.
+             I also documented features designed to facilitate
+             configuring and building the library as part of another
+             package.
+
+17/03/2001 Markus Gyger (logged here by mcs)
+
+           getline.c
+             Until now cursor motions were done one at a time. Markus
+             has added code to make use the of the terminfo capability
+             that moves the cursor by more than one position at a
+             time. This greatly improves performance when editing near
+             the start of long lines.
+           getline.c
+             To further improve performance, Markus switched from
+             writing one character at a time to the terminal, using
+             the write() system call, to using C buffered output
+             streams. The output buffer is only flushed when
+             necessary.
+           Makefile.rules Makefile.in configure.in
+             Added support for compiling for different architectures
+             in different directories. Simply create another directory
+             and run the configure script located in the original
+             directory.
+           Makefile.in configure.in libtecla.map
+             Under Solaris, Linux and HP-UX, symbols that are to be
+             exported by tecla shared libraries are explicitly specified
+             via symbol map files. Only publicly documented functions
+             are thus visible to applications.
+           configure.in
+             When linking shared libraries under Solaris SPARC,
+             registers that are reserved for applications are marked
+             as off limits to the library, using -xregs=no%appl when
+             compiling with Sun cc, or -mno-app-regs when compiling
+             with gcc. Also removed -z redlocsym for Solaris, which
+             caused problems under some releases of ld.
+           homedir.c  (after minor changes by mcs)
+             Under ksh, ~+ expands to the current value of the ksh
+             PWD environment variable, which contains the path of
+             the current working directory, including any symbolic
+             links that were traversed to get there. The special
+             username "+" is now treated equally by tecla, except
+             that it substitutes the return value of getcwd() if PWD
+             either isn't set, or if it points at a different
+             directory than that reported by getcwd().
+
+08/03/2001 Version 1.2.3 released.
+
+08/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             On compiling the library under HP-UX for the first time
+             I encountered and fixed a couple of bugs:
+
+             1. On all systems except Solaris, the callback function
+                required by tputs() takes an int argument for the
+                character that is to be printed. Under Solaris it
+                takes a char argument. The callback function was
+                passing this argument, regardless of type, to write(),
+                which wrote the first byte of the argument.  This was
+                fine under Solaris and under little-endian systems,
+                because the first byte contained the character to be
+                written, but on big-endian systems, it always wrote
+                the zero byte at the other end of the word. As a
+                result, no control characters were being written to
+                the terminal.
+             2. While attempting to start a newline after the user hit
+                enter, the library was outputting the control sequence
+                for moving the cursor down, instead of the newline
+                character. On many systems the control sequence for
+                moving the cursor down happends to be a newline
+                character, but under HP-UX it isn't. The result was
+                that no new line was being started under HP-UX.
+
+04/03/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           configure.in Makefile.in Makefile.stub configure config.guess
+           config.sub Makefile.rules install-sh PORTING README INSTALL
+             Configuration and compilation of the library is now
+             performed with the help of an autoconf configure
+             script. In addition to relieving the user of the need to
+             edit the Makefile, this also allows automatic compilation
+             of the reentrant version of the library on platforms that
+             can handle it, along with the creation of shared
+             libraries where configured. On systems that aren't known
+             to the configure script, just the static tecla library is
+             compiled. This is currently the case on all systems
+             except Linux, Solaris and HP-UX. In the hope that
+             installers will provide specific conigurations for other
+             systems, the configure.in script is heavily commented,
+             and instructions on how to use are included in a new
+             PORTING file.
+
+24/02/2001 Version 1.2b released.
+
+22/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             It turns out that most terminals, but not all, on writing
+             a character in the rightmost column, don't wrap the
+             cursor onto the next line until the next character is
+             output. This library wasn't aware of this and thus if one
+             tried to reposition the cursor from the last column,
+             gl_get_line() thought that it was moving relative to a
+             point on the next line, and thus moved the cursor up a
+             line. The fix was to write one extra character when in
+             the last column to force the cursor onto the next line,
+             then backup the cursor to the start of the new line.
+           getline.c
+             On terminal initialization, the dynamic LINES and COLUMNS
+             environment variables were ignored unless
+             terminfo/termcap didn't return sensible dimensions. In
+             practice, when present they should override the static
+             versions in the terminfo/termcap databases. This is the
+             new behavior. In reality this probably won't have caused
+             many problems, because a SIGWINCH signal which informs of
+             terminal size changes is sent when the terminal is
+             opened, so the dimensions established during
+             initialization quickly get updated on most systems.
+
+18/02/2001 Version 1.2a released.
+
+18/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Three months ago I moved the point at which termios.h
+             was included in getline.c. Unfortunately, I didn't notice
+             that this moved it to after the test for TIOCGWINSZ being
+             defined. This resulted in SIGWINCH signals not being
+             trapped for, and thus terminal size changes went
+             unnoticed. I have now moved the test to after the 
+             inclusion of termios.h.
+
+12/02/2001 Markus Gyger     (described here by mcs)
+
+           man3/pca_lookup_file.3 man3/gl_get_line.3
+           man3/ef_expand_file.3 man3/cpl_complete_word.3
+             In the 1.2 release of the library, all functions in the
+             library were given man pages. Most of these simply
+             include one of the above 4 man pages, which describe the
+             functions while describing the modules that they are in.
+             Markus added all of these function names to the lists in
+             the "NAME" headers of the respective man pages.
+             Previously only the primary function of each module was
+             named there.
+
+11/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             On entering a line that wrapped over two or more
+             terminal, if the user pressed enter when the cursor
+             wasn't on the last of the wrapped lines, the text of the
+             wrapped lines that followed it got mixed up with the next
+             line written by the application, or the next input
+             line. Somehow this slipped through the cracks and wasn't
+             noticed until now. Anyway, it is fixed now.
+
+09/02/2001 Version 1.2 released.
+
+04/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           pcache.c libtecla.h
+             With all filesystems local, demo2 was very fast to start
+             up, but on a Sun system with one of the target
+             directories being on a remote nfs mounted filesystem, the
+             startup time was many seconds. This was due to the
+             executable selection callback being applied to all files
+             in the path at startup. To avoid this, all files are now
+             included in the cache, and the application specified
+             file-selection callback is only called on files as they
+             are matched. Whether the callback rejected or accepted
+             them is then cached so that the next time an already
+             checked file is looked at, the callback doesn't have to
+             be called. As a result, startup is now fast on all
+             systems, and since usually there are only a few matching
+             file completions at a time, the delay during completion
+             is also usually small. The only exception is if the user
+             tries to complete an empty string, at which point all
+             files have to be checked. Having done this once, however,
+             doing it again is fast.
+           man3/pca_lookup_file.3
+             I added a man page documenting the new PathCache module.
+           man3/<many-new-files>.3
+             I have added man pages for all of the functions in each
+             of the modules. These 1-line pages use the .so directive
+             to redirect nroff to the man page of the parent module.
+           man Makefile update_html
+             I renamed man to man3 to make it easier to test man page
+             rediction, and updated Makefile and update_html
+             accordingly. I also instructed update_html to ignore
+             1-line man pages when making html equivalents of the man
+             pages.
+           cplmatch.c
+             In cpl_list_completions() the size_t return value of
+             strlen() was being used as the length argument of a "%*s"
+             printf directive. This ought to be an int, so the return
+             value of strlen() is now cast to int. This would have
+             caused problems on architectures where the size of a
+             size_t is not equal to the size of an int.
+
+02/02/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             Under UNIX, certain terminal bindings are set using the
+             stty command. This, for example, specifies which control
+             key generates a user-interrupt (usually ^C or ^Y). What I
+             hadn't realized was that ASCII NUL is used as the way to
+             specify that one of these bindings is unset. I have now
+             modified the code to skip unset bindings, leaving the
+             corresponding action bound to the built-in default, or a
+             user provided binding.
+
+28/01/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           pcache.c libtecla.h
+             A new module was added which supports searching for files
+             in any colon separated list of directories, such as the
+             unix execution PATH environment variable. Files in these
+             directories, after being individually okayed for
+             inclusion via an application provided callback, are
+             cached in a PathCache object. You can then look up the
+             full pathname of a given filename, or you can use the
+             provided completion callback to list possible completions
+             in the path-list. The contents of relative directories,
+             such as ".", obviously can't be cached, so these
+             directories are read on the fly during lookups and
+             completions. The obvious application of this facility is
+             to provide Tab-completion of commands, and thus a
+             callback to place executable files in the cache, is
+             provided.
+           demo2.c
+             This new program demonstrates the new PathCache
+             module. It reads and processes lines of input until the
+             word 'exit' is entered, or C-d is pressed. The default
+             tab-completion callback is replaced with one which at the
+             start of a line, looks up completions of commands in the
+             user's execution path, and when invoked in other parts of
+             the line, reverts to normal filename completion. Whenever
+             a new line is entered, it extracts the first word on the
+             line, looks it up in the user's execution path to see if
+             it corresponds to a known command file, and if so,
+             displays the full pathname of the file, along with the
+             remaining arguments.
+           cplfile.c
+             I added an optional pair of callback function/data
+             members to the new cpl_file_completions() configuration
+             structure. Where provided, this callback is asked
+             on a file-by-file basis, which files should be included
+             in the list of file completions. For example, a callback
+             is provided for listing only completions of executable
+             files.
+           cplmatch.c
+             When listing completions, the length of the type suffix
+             of each completion wasn't being taken into account
+             correctly when computing the column widths. Thus the
+             listing appeared ragged sometimes. This is now fixed.
+           pathutil.c
+             I added a function for prepending a string to a path,
+             and another for testing whether a pathname referred to
+             an executable file.
+
+28/01/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           libtecla.h cplmatch.c man/cpl_complete_word.3
+             The use of a publically defined structure to configure
+             the cpl_file_completions() callback was flawed, so a new
+             approach has been designed, and the old method, albeit
+             still supported, is no longer documented in the man
+             pages. The definition of the CplFileArgs structure in
+             libtecla.h is now accompanied by comments warning people
+             not to modify it, since modifications could break
+             applications linked to shared versions of the tecla
+             library. The new method involves an opaque CplFileConf
+             object, instances of which are returned by a provided
+             constructor function, configured with provided accessor
+             functions, and when no longer needed, deleted with a
+             provided destructor function. This is documented in the
+             cpl_complete_word man page. The cpl_file_completions()
+             callback distinguishes what type of configuration
+             structure it has been sent by virtue of a code placed at
+             the beginning of the CplFileConf argument by its
+             constructor.
+
+04/01/2001 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1j)
+
+           getline.c
+             I added upper-case bindings for the default meta-letter
+             keysequences such as M-b. They thus continue to work
+             when the user has caps-lock on.
+           Makefile
+             I re-implemented the "install" target in terms of new
+             install_lib, install_inc and install_man targets. When
+             distributing the library with other packages, these new
+             targets allows for finer grained control of the
+             installation process.
+
+30/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I realized that the recall-history action that I
+             implemented wasn't what Markus had asked me for. What he
+             actually wanted was for down-history to continue going
+             forwards through a previous history recall session if no
+             history recall session had been started while entering
+             the current line. I have thus removed the recall-history
+             action and modified the down-history action function
+             accordingly.
+
+24/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c
+             I modified gl_get_line() to allow the previously returned
+             line to be passed in the start_line argument.
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a recall-history action function, bound to M^P.
+             This recalls the last recalled history line, regardless
+             of whether it was from the current or previous line.
+
+13/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1i)
+
+           getline.c history.h history.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I implemented the equivalent of the ksh Operate action. I
+             have named the tecla equivalent "repeat-history". This
+             causes the line that is to be edited to returned, and
+             arranges for the next most recent history line to be
+             preloaded on the next call to gl_get_line(). Repeated
+             invocations of this action thus result in successive
+             history lines being repeated - hence the
+             name. Implementing the ksh Operate action was suggested
+             by Markus Gyger. In ksh it is bound to ^O, but since ^O
+             is traditionally bound by the default terminal settings,
+             to stop-output, I have bound the tecla equivalent to M-o.
+
+01/12/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1h)
+
+           getline.c keytab.c keytab.h man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a digit-argument action, to allow repeat
+             counts for actions to be entered. As in both tcsh
+             and readline, this is bound by default to each of
+             M-0, M-1 through to M-9, the number being appended
+             to the current repeat count. Once one of these has been
+             pressed, the subsequent digits of the repeat count can be
+             typed with or without the meta key pressed. It is also
+             possible to bind digit-argument to other keys, with or
+             without a numeric final keystroke. See man page for
+             details.
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             Markus noted that my choice of M-< for the default
+             binding of read-from-file, could be confusing, since
+             readline binds this to beginning-of-history. I have
+             thus rebound it to ^X^F (ie. like find-file in emacs).
+
+           getline.c history.c history.h man/gl_get_line.3
+             I have now implemented equivalents of the readline
+             beginning-of-history and end-of-history actions.
+             These are bound to M-< and M-> respectively.
+
+           history.c history.h
+             I Moved the definition of the GlHistory type, and
+             its subordinate types from history.h to history.c.
+             There is no good reason for any other module to
+             have access to the innards of this structure.
+
+27/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1g)
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a "read-from-file" action function and bound it
+             by default to M-<. This causes gl_get_line() to
+             temporarily return input from the file who's name
+             precedes the cursor.
+             
+26/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           getline.c keytab.c keytab.h man/gl_get_line.3
+             I have reworked some of the keybinding code again.
+
+             Now, within key binding strings, in addition to the
+             previously existing notation, you can now use M-a to
+             denote meta-a, and C-a to denote control-a. For example,
+             a key binding which triggers when the user presses the
+             meta key, the control key and the letter [
+             simultaneously, can now be denoted by M-C-[, or M-^[ or
+             \EC-[ or \E^[.
+
+             I also updated the man page to use M- instead of \E in
+             the list of default bindings, since this looks cleaner.
+
+           getline.c man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added a copy-region-as-kill action function and
+             gave it a default binding to M-w.
+
+22/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+
+           *.c
+             Markus Gyger sent me a copy of a previous version of
+             the library, with const qualifiers added in appropriate
+             places. I have done the same for the latest version.
+             Among other things, this gets rid of the warnings
+             that are generated if one tells the compiler to
+             const qualify literal strings.
+
+           getline.c getline.h glconf.c
+             I have moved the contents of glconf.c and the declaration
+             of the GetLine structure into getline.c. This is cleaner,
+             since now only functions in getline.c can mess with the
+             innards of GetLine objects. It also clears up some problems
+             with system header inclusion order under Solaris, and also
+             the possibility that this might result in inconsistent
+             system macro definitions, which in turn could cause different
+             declarations of the structure to be seen in different files.
+
+           hash.c
+             I wrote a wrapper function to go around strcmp(), such that
+             when hash.c is compiled with a C++ compiler, the pointer
+             to the wrapper function is a C++ function pointer.
+             This makes it compatible with comparison function pointer
+             recorded in the hash table.
+
+           cplmatch.c getline.c libtecla.h
+             Markus noted that the Sun C++ compiler wasn't able to
+             match up the declaration of cpl_complete_word() in
+             libtecla.h, where it is surrounded by a extern "C" {}
+             wrapper, with the definition of this function in
+             cplmatch.c. My suspicion is that the compiler looks not
+             only at the function name, but also at the function
+             arguments to see if two functions match, and that the
+             match_fn() argument, being a fully blown function pointer
+             declaration, got interpetted as that of a C function in
+             one case, and a C++ function in the other, thus
+             preventing a match.
+
+             To fix this I now define a CplMatchFn typedef in libtecla.h,
+             and use this to declare the match_fn callback.
+
+20/11/2000 (Changes suggested by Markus Gyger to support C++ compilers):
+           expand.c
+             Renamed a variable called "explicit" to "xplicit", to
+             avoid conflicts when compiling with C++ compilers.
+           *.c
+             Added explicit casts when converting from (void *) to
+             other pointer types. This isn't needed in C but it is
+             in C++.
+           getline.c
+             tputs() has a strange declaration under Solaris. I was
+             enabling this declaration when the SPARC feature-test
+             macro was set. Markus changed the test to hinge on the
+             __sun and __SVR4 macros.
+           direader.c glconf.c stringrp.c
+             I had omitted to include string.h in these two files.
+
+           Markus also suggested some other changes, which are still
+           under discussion. With the just above changes however, the
+           library compiles without complaint using g++.
+
+19/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu
+           getline.h getline.c keytab.c keytab.h glconf.c
+           man/gl_get_line.3
+             I added support for backslash escapes (include \e
+             for the keyboard escape key) and literal binary
+             characters to the characters allowed within key sequences
+             of key bindings.
+
+           getline.h getline.c keytab.c keytab.h glconf.c
+           man/gl_get_line.3
+             I introduced symbolic names for the arrow keys, and
+             modified the library to use the cursor key sequences
+             reported by terminfo/termcap in addition to the default
+             ANSI ones. Anything bound to the symbolically named arrow
+             keys also gets bound to the default and terminfo/termcap
+             cursor key sequences. Note that under Solaris
+             terminfo/termcap report the properties of hardware X
+             terminals when TERM is xterm instead of the terminal
+             emulator properties, and the cursor keys on these two
+             systems generate different key sequences. This is an
+             example of why extra default sequences are needed.
+
+           getline.h getline.c keytab.c
+             For some reason I was using \e to represent the escape
+             character. This is supported by gcc, which thus doesn't
+             emit a warning except with the -pedantic flag, but isn't
+             part of standard C. I now use a macro to define escape
+             as \033 in getline.h, and this is now used wherever the
+             escape character is needed.
+
+17/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1d)
+
+           getline.c, man/gl_get_line(3), html/gl_get_line.html
+             In tcsh ^D is bound to a function which does different
+             things depending on where the cursor is within the input
+             line. I have implemented its equivalent in the tecla
+             library. When invoked at the end of the line this action
+             function displays possible completions. When invoked on
+             an empty line it causes gl_get_line() to return NULL,
+             thus signalling end of input. When invoked within a line
+             it invokes forward-delete-char, as before. The new action
+             function is called del-char-or-list-or-eof.
+
+           getline.c, man/gl_get_line(3), html/gl_get_line.html
+             I found that the complete-word and expand-file actions
+             had underscores in their names instead of hyphens. This
+             made them different from all other action functions, so I
+             have changed the underscores to hyphens.
+
+           homedir.c
+             On SCO UnixWare while getpwuid_r() is available, the
+             associated _SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX macro used by sysconf()
+             to find out how big to make the buffer to pass to this
+             function to cater for any password entry, doesn't
+             exist. I also hadn't catered for the case where sysconf()
+             reports that this limit is indeterminate. I have thus
+             change the code to substitute a default limit of 1024 if
+             either the above macro isn't defined or if sysconf() says
+             that the associated limit is indeterminate.
+           
+17/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1c)
+
+           getline.c, getline.h, history.c, history.h
+             I have modified the way that the history recall functions
+             operate, to make them better emulate the behavior of
+             tcsh. Previously the history search bindings always
+             searched for the prefix that preceded the cursor, then
+             left the cursor at the same point in the line, so that a
+             following search would search using the same prefix. This
+             isn't how tcsh operates. On finding a matching line, tcsh
+             puts the cursor at the end of the line, but arranges for
+             the followup search to continue with the same prefix,
+             unless the user does any cursor motion or character
+             insertion operations in between, in which case it changes
+             the search prefix to the new set of characters that are
+             before the cursor. There are other complications as well,
+             which I have attempted to emulate. As far as I can
+             tell, the tecla history recall facilities now fully
+             emulate those of tcsh.
+
+16/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1b)
+
+           demo.c:
+             One can now quit from the demo by typing exit.
+
+           keytab.c:
+             The first entry of the table was getting deleted
+             by _kt_clear_bindings() regardless of the source
+             of the binding. This deleted the up-arrow binding.
+             Symptoms noted by gazelle@yin.interaccess.com.
+
+           getline.h:
+             Depending on which system include files were include
+             before the inclusion of getline.h, SIGWINCH and
+             TIOCGWINSZ might or might not be defined. This resulted
+             in different definitions of the GetLine object in
+             different files, and thus some very strange bugs! I have
+             now added #includes for the necessary system header files
+             in getline.h itself. The symptom was that on creating a
+             ~/.teclarc file, the demo program complained of a NULL
+             argument to kt_set_keybinding() for the first line of the
+             file.
+
+15/11/2000 mcs@astro.caltech.edu (Release of version 1.1a)
+
+           demo.c:
+             I had neglected to check the return value of
+             new_GetLine() in the demo program. Oops.
+
+           getline.c libtecla.h:
+             I wrote gl_change_terminal(). This allows one to change to
+             a different terminal or I/O stream, by specifying the
+             stdio streams to use for input and output, along with the
+             type of terminal that they are connected to.
+
+           getline.c libtecla.h:
+             Renamed GetLine::isterm to GetLine::is_term. Standard
+             C reserves names that start with "is" followed by
+             alphanumeric characters, so this avoids potential
+             clashes in the future.
+
+           keytab.c keytab.h
+             Each key-sequence can now have different binding
+             functions from different sources, with the user provided
+             binding having the highest precedence, followed by the
+             default binding, followed by any terminal specific
+             binding. This allows gl_change_terminal() to redefine the
+             terminal-specific bindings each time that
+             gl_change_terminal() is called, without overwriting the
+             user specified or default bindings. In the future, it will
+             also allow for reconfiguration of user specified
+             bindings after the call to new_GetLine(). Ie. deleting a
+             user specified binding should reinstate any default or
+             terminal specific binding.
+
+           man/cpl_complete_word.3 html/cpl_complete_word.html
+           man/ef_expand_file.3    html/ef_expand_file.html
+           man/gl_get_line.3       html/gl_get_line.html
+             I added sections on thread safety to the man pages of the
+             individual modules.
+
+           man/gl_get_line.3       html/gl_get_line.html
+             I documented the new gl_change_terminal() function.
+
+           man/gl_get_line.3       html/gl_get_line.html
+             In the description of the ~/.teclarc configuration file,
+             I had omitted the 'bind' command word in the example
+             entry. I have now remedied this.
+</PRE></BODY>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/cpl_complete_word.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/cpl_complete_word.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..063359d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/cpl_complete_word.html
@@ -0,0 +1,423 @@
+<head>
+<title>Manual Page</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+</pre><h2>NAME</h2><pre>
+     cpl_complete_word,   cfc_file_start,    cfc_literal_escapes,
+     cfc_set_check_fn,  cpl_add_completion, cpl_file_completions,
+     cpl_last_error,   cpl_list_completions,    cpl_record_error,
+     del_CplFileConf,     del_WordCompletion,    new_CplFileConf,
+     new_WordCompletion - lookup possible completions for a word
+
+</pre><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><pre>
+     #include &lt;stdio.h&gt;
+     #include &lt;libtecla.h&gt;
+
+     WordCompletion *new_WordCompletion(void);
+
+     WordCompletion *del_WordCompletion(WordCompletion *cpl);
+
+     #define CPL_MATCH_FN(fn) int (fn)(WordCompletion *cpl, \
+                                       void *data, \
+                                       const char *line, \
+                                       int word_end)
+     typedef CPL_MATCH_FN(CplMatchFn);
+
+     CPL_MATCH_FN(cpl_file_completions);
+
+     CplMatches *cpl_complete_word(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                                   const char *line,
+                                   int word_end, void *data,
+                                   CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+     int cpl_list_completions(CplMatches *result, FILE *fp,
+                              int term_width);
+
+     int cpl_add_completion(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                            const char *line, int word_start,
+                            int word_end, const char *suffix,
+                            const char *type_suffix,
+                            const char *cont_suffix);
+
+     void cpl_record_error(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                           const char *errmsg);
+
+     const char *cpl_last_error(WordCompletion *cpl);
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><pre>
+     The  cpl_complete_word()  function  is  part  of  the  tecla
+     library (see the <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a> man page). It is usually called
+     behind the scenes by <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>, but can also be  called
+     separately.
+
+     Given an input line containing an incomplete word to be com-
+     pleted,  it  calls a user-provided callback function (or the
+     provided file-completion callback function) to look  up  all
+     possible  completion  suffixes  for  that word. The callback
+     function is expected to look backward in the line,  starting
+     from the specified cursor position, to find the start of the
+     word to be completed, then to look up all  possible  comple-
+     tions of that word and record them, one at a time by calling
+     cpl_add_completion().
+
+
+     Descriptions of the functions of this module are as follows:
+
+       CompleteWord *new_CompleteWord(void)
+
+     This  function   creates   the   resources   used   by   the
+     cpl_complete_word()  function.  In  particular, it maintains
+     the memory that is used to return  the  results  of  calling
+     cpl_complete_word().
+
+       CompleteWord *del_CompleteWord(CompleteWord *cpl)
+
+     This function deletes the resources that were returned by  a
+     previous  call to new_CompleteWord(). It always returns NULL
+     (ie. a deleted object). It does nothing if the cpl  argument
+     is NULL.
+
+     The callback functions  which  lookup  possible  completions
+     should be defined with the following macro (which is defined
+     in libtecla.h).
+
+       #define CPL_MATCH_FN(fn) int (fn)(WordCompletion *cpl, \
+                                         void *data, \
+                                         const char *line, \
+                                         int word_end)
+
+     Functions of this type are  called  by  cpl_complete_word(),
+     and all of the arguments of the callback are those that were
+     passed to said function. In particular,  the  line  argument
+     contains the input line containing the word to be completed,
+     and word_end is the index of the character that follows  the
+     last  character  of  the incomplete word within this string.
+     The callback is expected to look backwards from word_end for
+     the start of the incomplete word. What constitutes the start
+     of a word clearly depends on the application,  so  it  makes
+     sense  for  the callback to take on this responsibility. For
+     example, the  builtin  filename  completion  function  looks
+     backwards  until it hits an unescaped space, or the start of
+     the line.  Having found the start of the word, the  callback
+     should  then  lookup  all possible completions of this word,
+     and  record  each   completion   via   separate   calls   to
+     cpl_add_completion().  If  the  callback  needs access to an
+     application-specific symbol table, it can pass  it  and  any
+     other  data  that  it  needs,  via  the  data argument. This
+     removes any need for globals.
+
+     The callback function should return 0 if no errors occur. On
+     failure it should return 1, and register a terse description
+     of the error by calling cpl_record_error().
+
+       void cpl_record_error(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                             const char *errmsg);
+
+     The    last    error    message    recorded    by    calling
+     cpl_record_error(),  can  subsequently be queried by calling
+     cpl_last_error(), as described later.
+
+       int cpl_add_completion(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                              const char *line, int word_start,
+                              int word_end, const char *suffix,
+                              const char *type_suffix,
+                              const char *cont_suffix);
+
+     The cpl_add_completion() function is  called  zero  or  more
+     times  by  the  completion  callback function to record each
+     possible completion in the specified WordCompletion  object.
+     These    completions    are    subsequently    returned   by
+     cpl_complete_word(), as described later. The cpl, line,  and
+     word_end  arguments  should be those that were passed to the
+     callback function. The word_start  argument  should  be  the
+     index  within the input line string of the start of the word
+     that is being completed. This should  equal  word_end  if  a
+     zero-length  string  is being completed. The suffix argument
+     is the string that would have to be appended to  the  incom-
+     plete  word  to complete it.  If this needs any quoting (eg.
+     the addition of backslashes before special charaters) to  be
+     valid  within  the  displayed  input  line,  this  should be
+     included. A copy of the suffix string  is  allocated  inter-
+     nally,  so  there  is  no  need to maintain your copy of the
+     string after cpl_add_completion() returns.
+
+     Note that in the array of  possible  completions  which  the
+     cpl_complete_word() function returns, the suffix recorded by
+     cpl_add_completion() is listed along with the concatentation
+     of  this  suffix  with the word that lies between word_start
+     and word_end in the input line.
+
+     The type_suffix argument specifies an optional string to  be
+     appended  to  the completion if it is displayed as part of a
+     list of completions by cpl_list_completions(). The intention
+     is  that  this indicate to the user the type of each comple-
+     tion. For example, the file  completion  function  places  a
+     directory  separator after completions that are directories,
+     to indicate their nature to the user. Similary, if the  com-
+     pletion were a function, you could indicate this to the user
+     by setting type_suffix to "()". Note  that  the  type_suffix
+     string  isn't  copied,  so  if  the argument isn't a literal
+     string between speech marks, be sure that the string remains
+     valid   for   at   least   as   long   as   the  results  of
+     cpl_complete_word() are needed.
+
+     The cont_suffix is a continuation suffix to  append  to  the
+     completed word in the input line if this is the only comple-
+     tion. This is something that isn't part  of  the  completion
+     itself, but that gives the user an indication about how they
+     might continue to extend the token.  For example, the  file-
+     completion  callback  function adds a directory separator if
+     the completed word is a directory.  If  the  completed  word
+     were  a  function  name, you could similarly aid the user by
+     arranging for an open parenthesis to be appended.
+
+       CplMatches *cpl_complete_word(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                                     const char *line,
+                                     int word_end, void *data,
+                                     CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+     The cpl_complete_word() is normally called behind the scenes
+     by  <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>, but can also be called separately if you
+     separately allocate a  WordCompletion  object.  It  performs
+     word  completion, as described at the beginning of this sec-
+     tion. Its first argument is  a  resource  object  previously
+     returned  by  new_CompleteWord().   The line argument is the
+     input line string, containing the word to be completed.  The
+     word_end argument contains the index of the character in the
+     input line, that just follows the last character of the word
+     to  be  completed. When called by gl_get_line(), this is the
+     character over which the  user  pressed  TAB.  The  match_fn
+     argument  is  the  function pointer of the callback function
+     which will lookup  possible  completions  of  the  word,  as
+     described  above,  and  the data argument provides a way for
+     the application to pass arbitrary data to the callback func-
+     tion.
+
+     If no errors occur, the cpl_complete_word() function returns
+     a  pointer to a CplMatches container, as defined below. This
+     container is allocated as part of the cpl  object  that  was
+     passed  to cpl_complete_word(), and will thus change on each
+     call which uses the same cpl argument.
+
+       typedef struct {
+         char *completion;        /* A matching completion */
+                                  /*  string */
+         char *suffix;            /* The part of the */
+                                  /*  completion string which */
+                                  /*  would have to be */
+                                  /*  appended to complete the */
+                                  /*  original word. */
+         const char *type_suffix; /* A suffix to be added when */
+                                  /*  listing completions, to */
+                                  /*  indicate the type of the */
+                                  /*  completion. */
+       } CplMatch;
+
+       typedef struct {
+         char *suffix;            /* The common initial part */
+                                  /*  of all of the completion */
+                                  /*  suffixes. */
+         const char *cont_suffix; /* Optional continuation */
+                                  /*  string to be appended to */
+                                  /*  the sole completion when */
+                                  /*  nmatch==1. */
+         CplMatch *matches;       /* The array of possible */
+                                  /*  completion strings, */
+                                  /*  sorted into lexical */
+                                  /*  order. */
+         int nmatch;              /* The number of elements in */
+                                  /*  the above matches[] */
+                                  /*  array. */
+       } CplMatches;
+
+     If an error occurs  during  completion,  cpl_complete_word()
+     returns  NULL. A description of the error can be acquired by
+     calling the cpl_last_error() function.
+
+       const char *cpl_last_error(WordCompletion *cpl);
+
+     The cpl_last_error() function returns a terse description of
+     the   error   which   occurred   on   the   last   call   to
+     cpl_complete_word() or cpl_add_completion().
+
+       int cpl_list_completions(CplMatches *result, FILE *fp,
+                                int terminal_width);
+
+     When the cpl_complete_word() function returns multiple  pos-
+     sible  completions,  the cpl_list_completions() function can
+     be called upon to list them, suitably  arranged  across  the
+     available  width  of  the  terminal.  It  arranges  for  the
+     displayed columns of completions to all have the same width,
+     set   by   the  longest  completion.  It  also  appends  the
+     type_suffix strings that were recorded with each completion,
+     thus indicating their types to the user.
+
+
+</pre><h2>THE BUILT-IN FILENAME-COMPLETION CALLBACK</h2><pre>
+     By default the <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a> function, passes the following
+     completion  callback  function  to cpl_complete_word(). This
+     function can also be used separately, either by  sending  it
+     to  cpl_complete_word(), or by calling it directly from your
+     own completion callback function.
+
+       CPL_MATCH_FN(cpl_file_completions);
+
+     Certain aspects of the behavior  of  this  callback  can  be
+     changed  via  its  data  argument. If you are happy with its
+     default behavior you can pass NULL in this argument.  Other-
+     wise  it should be a pointer to a CplFileConf object, previ-
+     ously allocated by calling new_CplFileConf().
+
+       CplFileConf *new_CplFileConf(void);
+
+     CplFileConf objects encapsulate the configuration parameters
+     of cpl_file_completions(). These parameters, which start out
+     with default values, can be changed by calling the  accessor
+     functions described below.
+
+     By default,  the  cpl_file_completions()  callback  function
+     searches  backwards for the start of the filename being com-
+     pleted, looking for the first un-escaped space or the  start
+     of  the input line. If you wish to specify a different loca-
+     tion, call cfc_file_start() with  the  index  at  which  the
+     filename  starts  in  the input line. Passing start_index=-1
+     re-enables the default behavior.
+
+       void cfc_file_start(CplFileConf *cfc, int start_index);
+
+     By default, when cpl_file_completions() looks at a  filename
+     in  the input line, each lone backslash in the input line is
+     interpreted as being a special character which  removes  any
+     special significance of the character which follows it, such
+     as a space which should be taken as  part  of  the  filename
+     rather  than  delimiting  the  start  of the filename. These
+     backslashes are thus ignored while looking for  completions,
+     and  subsequently  added  before  spaces,  tabs  and literal
+     backslashes in the list of completions.  To  have  unescaped
+     backslashes    treated    as    normal    characters,   call
+     cfc_literal_escapes() with a non-zero value in  its  literal
+     argument.
+
+       void cfc_literal_escapes(CplFileConf *cfc, int literal);
+
+     By default, cpl_file_completions() reports all  files  who's
+     names  start with the prefix that is being completed. If you
+     only want a selected subset of these files to be reported in
+     the list of completions, you can arrange this by providing a
+     callback function which takes the full pathname of  a  file,
+     and  returns  0  if  the file should be ignored, or 1 if the
+     file should be included  in  the  list  of  completions.  To
+     register  such a function for use by cpl_file_completions(),
+     call cfc_set_check_fn(), and pass it a pointer to the  func-
+     tion,  together  with  a  pointer to any data that you would
+     like passed to this callback whenever  it  is  called.  Your
+     callback can make its decisions based on any property of the
+     file, such as the filename itself, whether the file is read-
+     able, writable or executable, or even based on what the file
+     contains.
+
+       #define CPL_CHECK_FN(fn) int (fn)(void *data, \
+                                         const char *pathname)
+       typedef CPL_CHECK_FN(CplCheckFn);
+
+       void cfc_set_check_fn(CplFileConf *cfc,
+                             CplCheckFn *chk_fn, void *chk_data);
+
+     The cpl_check_exe() function is a provided callback  of  the
+     above  type, for use with cpl_file_completions(). It returns
+     non-zero if the filename that it is given represents a  nor-
+     mal  file that the user has execute permission to. You could
+     use this to have cpl_file_completions()  only  list  comple-
+     tions of executable files.
+
+     When you have finished with a CplFileConf variable, you  can
+     pass  it  to  the  del_CplFileConf()  destructor function to
+     reclaim its memory.
+
+       CplFileConf *del_CplFileConf(CplFileConf *cfc);
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>THREAD SAFETY</h2><pre>
+     In multi-threaded programs, you should use the  libtecla_r.a
+     version  of the library. This uses POSIX reentrant functions
+     where available (hence the _r suffix), and disables features
+     that  rely on non-reentrant system functions. In the case of
+     this module, the only disabled feature is  username  comple-
+     tion in ~username/ expressions, in cpl_file_completions().
+
+     Using the libtecla_r.a version of the library, it is safe to
+     use  the facilities of this module in multiple threads, pro-
+     vided that each thread uses a separately allocated  WordCom-
+     pletion  object.  In  other words, if two threads want to do
+     word completion, they should each call  new_WordCompletion()
+     to allocate their own completion objects.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILES</h2><pre>
+     libtecla.a    -    The tecla library
+     libtecla.h    -    The tecla header file.
+
+
+</pre><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><pre>
+     <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a>,       <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>,        <a href="ef_expand_file.html">ef_expand_file(3)</a>,
+     <a href="pca_lookup_file.html">pca_lookup_file(3)</a>
+
+
+</pre><h2>AUTHOR</h2><pre>
+     Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+</body>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/ef_expand_file.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/ef_expand_file.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1e71c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/ef_expand_file.html
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+<head>
+<title>Manual Page</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+</pre><h2>NAME</h2><pre>
+     ef_expand_file,        del_ExpandFile,        ef_last_error,
+     ef_list_expansions,  new_ExpandFile  - expand filenames con-
+     taining ~user/$envvar and wildcard expressions
+
+</pre><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><pre>
+     #include &lt;libtecla.h&gt;
+
+     ExpandFile *new_ExpandFile(void);
+
+     ExpandFile *del_ExpandFile(ExpandFile *ef);
+
+     FileExpansion *ef_expand_file(ExpandFile *ef,
+                                   const char *path,
+                                   int pathlen);
+
+     int ef_list_expansions(FileExpansion *result, FILE *fp,
+                            int term_width);
+
+     const char *ef_last_error(ExpandFile *ef);
+
+
+</pre><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><pre>
+     The ef_expand_file() function is part of the  tecla  library
+     (see  the  <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a>  man  page).  It  expands a specified
+     filename, converting ~user/ and ~/ expressions at the  start
+     of  the  filename  to  the  corresponding  home directories,
+     replacing  $envvar  with  the  value  of  the  corresponding
+     environment  variable, and then, if there are any wildcards,
+     matching these against existing  filenames.  Backslashes  in
+     the  input  filename are interpreted as escaping any special
+     meanings  of  the  characters  that   follow   them.    Only
+     backslahes  that  are themselves preceded by backslashes are
+     preserved in the expanded filename.
+
+     In the presence of wildcards, the returned list of filenames
+     only  includes  the  names of existing files which match the
+     wildcards. Otherwise,  the  original  filename  is  returned
+     after  expansion  of  tilde  and dollar expressions, and the
+     result is not checked against existing  files.  This  mimics
+     the file-globbing behavior of the unix tcsh shell.
+
+     The supported wildcards and their meanings are:
+       *        -  Match any sequence of zero or more characters.
+       ?        -  Match any single character.
+       [chars]  -  Match any single character that appears in
+                   'chars'.  If 'chars' contains an expression of
+                   the form a-b, then any character between a and
+                   b, including a and b, matches. The '-'
+                   character looses its special meaning as a
+                   range specifier when it appears at the start
+                   of the sequence of characters. The ']'
+                   character also looses its significance as the
+                   terminator of the range expression if it
+                   appears immediately after the opening '[', at
+                   which point it is treated one of the
+                   characters of the range. If you want both '-'
+                   and ']' to be part of the range, the '-'
+                   should come first and the ']' second.
+
+       [^chars] -  The same as [chars] except that it matches any
+                   single character that doesn't appear in
+                   'chars'.
+
+     Note that wildcards never match the initial dot in filenames
+     that  start  with  '.'.  The  initial '.' must be explicitly
+     specified in the filename. This again  mimics  the  globbing
+     behavior  of  most unix shells, and its rational is based in
+     the fact that in unix, files with names that start with  '.'
+     are usually hidden configuration files, which are not listed
+     by default by the ls command.
+
+     The following is a complete example of how to use  the  file
+     expansion function.
+
+       #include &lt;stdio.h&gt;
+       #include &lt;libtecla.h&gt;
+
+       int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+       {
+         ExpandFile *ef;      /* The expansion resource object */
+         char *filename;      /* The filename being expanded */
+         FileExpansion *expn; /* The results of the expansion */
+         int i;
+
+         ef = new_ExpandFile();
+         if(!ef)
+           return 1;
+
+         for(arg = *(argv++); arg; arg = *(argv++)) {
+           if((expn = ef_expand_file(ef, arg, -1)) == NULL) {
+             fprintf(stderr, "Error expanding %s (%s).\n", arg,
+                              ef_last_error(ef));
+           } else {
+             printf("%s matches the following files:\n", arg);
+             for(i=0; i&lt;expn-&gt;nfile; i++)
+               printf(" %s\n", expn-&gt;files[i]);
+           }
+         }
+
+         ef = del_ExpandFile(ef);
+         return 0;
+       }
+
+     Descriptions of the functions used above are as follows:
+
+       ExpandFile *new_ExpandFile(void)
+
+     This  function   creates   the   resources   used   by   the
+     ef_expand_file()  function.  In particular, it maintains the
+     memory  that  is  used  to  record  the  array  of  matching
+     filenames  that  is returned by ef_expand_file(). This array
+     is expanded as needed, so there is no built in limit to  the
+     number of files that can be matched.
+
+       ExpandFile *del_ExpandFile(ExpandFile *ef)
+
+     This function deletes the resources that were returned by  a
+     previous  call  to  new_ExpandFile(). It always returns NULL
+     (ie a deleted object). It does nothing if the ef argument is
+     NULL.
+
+     A  container  of  the  following   type   is   returned   by
+     ef_expand_file().
+
+       typedef struct {
+         int exists;   /* True if the files in files[] exist */
+         int nfile;    /* The number of files in files[] */
+         char **files; /* An array of 'nfile' filenames. */
+       } FileExpansion;
+
+       FileExpansion *ef_expand_file(ExpandFile *ef,
+                                     const char *path,
+                                     int pathlen)
+
+     The ef_expand_file() function performs  filename  expansion,
+     as  documented at the start of this section. Its first argu-
+     ment is a resource object returned  by  new_ExpandFile().  A
+     pointer to the start of the filename to be matched is passed
+     via the path argument. This must be a normal NUL  terminated
+     string, but unless a length of -1 is passed in pathlen, only
+     the first pathlen characters will be used  in  the  filename
+     expansion.   If  the length is specified as -1, the whole of
+     the string will be expanded.
+
+     The function returns a pointer to a container who's contents
+     are the results of the expansion. If there were no wildcards
+     in the filename, the nfile member will be 1, and the  exists
+     member  should  be queried if it is important to know if the
+     expanded file currently exists or not. If there  were  wild-
+     cards,  then  the  contained  files[] array will contain the
+     names of the nfile existing files  that  matched  the  wild-
+     carded  filename,  and the exists member will have the value
+     1. Note that the returned container belongs to the specified
+     ef  object, and its contents will change on each call, so if
+     you need to retain the results of  more  than  one  call  to
+     ef_expand_file(),  you  should either make a private copy of
+     the returned  results,  or  create  multiple  file-expansion
+     resource objects via multiple calls to new_ExpandFile().
+
+     On error, NULL is returned, and an explanation of the  error
+     can be determined by calling ef_last_error(ef).
+
+       const char *ef_last_error(ExpandFile *ef)
+
+     This function returns the message which describes the  error
+     that  occurred on the last call to ef_expand_file(), for the
+     given (ExpandFile *ef) resource object.
+
+       int ef_list_expansions(FileExpansion *result, FILE *fp,
+                              int terminal_width);
+
+     The ef_list_expansions() function provides a convenient  way
+     to    list    the    filename    expansions    returned   by
+     ef_expand_file(). Like the unix ls command, it arranges  the
+     filenames  into  equal width columns, each column having the
+     width of the largest file. The number  of  columns  used  is
+     thus  determined  by the length of the longest filename, and
+     the specified terminal width. Beware that filenames that are
+     longer than the specified terminal width are printed without
+     being truncated, so output longer than the specified  termi-
+     nal width can occur. The list is written to the stdio stream
+     specified by the fp argument.
+
+
+</pre><h2>THREAD SAFETY</h2><pre>
+     In multi-threaded programs, you should use the  libtecla_r.a
+     version  of the library. This uses POSIX reentrant functions
+     where available (hence the _r suffix), and disables features
+     that rely on non-reentrant system functions. Currently there
+     are no features disabled in this module.
+
+     Using the libtecla_r.a version of the library, it is safe to
+     use  the facilities of this module in multiple threads, pro-
+     vided that each thread uses a separately  allocated  Expand-
+     File  object. In other words, if two threads want to do file
+     expansion, they should each call new_ExpandFile()  to  allo-
+     cate their own file-expansion objects.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILES</h2><pre>
+     libtecla.a    -    The tecla library
+     libtecla.h    -    The tecla header file.
+
+
+</pre><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><pre>
+     <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a>,      <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>,      <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a>,
+     <a href="pca_lookup_file.html">pca_lookup_file(3)</a>
+</pre><h2>AUTHOR</h2><pre>
+     Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+</body>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/enhance.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/enhance.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f6bb09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/enhance.html
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<head>
+<title>Manual Page</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+</pre><h2>NAME</h2><pre>
+     enhance - A program that adds command-line editing to  third
+     party programs.
+
+</pre><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><pre>
+     enhance command [ argument ... ]
+
+
+</pre><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><pre>
+     The enhance program provides enhanced  command-line  editing
+     facilities  to  users  of third party applications, to which
+     one doesn't have any source code. It does this by placing  a
+     pseudo-terminal  between the application and the real termi-
+     nal. It uses the tecla command-line editing library to  read
+     input  from  the real terminal, then forwards each just com-
+     pleted  input  line  to  the  application  via  the  pseudo-
+     terminal.  All output from the application is forwarded back
+     unchanged to the real terminal.
+
+     Whenever the application stops generating  output  for  more
+     than  a  tenth  of  a second, the enhance program treats the
+     latest incomplete output line as the prompt, and  redisplays
+     any incompleted input line that the user has typed after it.
+     Note that the small delay, which  is  imperceptible  to  the
+     user,  isn't necessary for correct operation of the program.
+     It is just an optimization, designed to stop the input  line
+     from being redisplayed so often that it slows down output.
+
+
+</pre><h2>DEFICIENCIES</h2><pre>
+     The one major problem that hasn't been solved yet, is how to
+     deal  with  applications  that change whether typed input is
+     echo'd by their controlling terminal. For example,  programs
+     that ask for a password, such as ftp and telnet, temporarily
+     tell their controlling terminal not to echo  what  the  user
+     types.  Since  this  request goes to the application side of
+     the psuedo terminal, the enhance program has no way of know-
+     ing  that  this  has  happened,  and continues to echo typed
+     input to its controlling  terminal,  while  the  user  types
+     their password.
+
+     Furthermore, before  executing  the  host  application,  the
+     enhance program initially sets the pseudo terminal to noecho
+     mode, so that  everything  that  it  sends  to  the  program
+     doesn't  get  redundantly echoed. If a program that switches
+     to  noecho  mode  explicitly  restores  echoing  afterwards,
+     rather  than  restoring  the terminal modes that were previ-
+     ously in force, then subsequently, every time that you enter
+     a  new input line, a duplicate copy will be displayed on the
+     next line.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILES</h2><pre>
+     libtecla.a    -   The tecla library.
+     ~/.teclarc    -   The tecla personal customization file.
+
+
+</pre><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><pre>
+     <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a>
+
+
+</pre><h2>AUTHOR</h2><pre>
+     Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+</body>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/gl_get_line.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/gl_get_line.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dcc45a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/gl_get_line.html
@@ -0,0 +1,2295 @@
+<head>
+<title>Manual Page</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+</pre><h2>NAME</h2><pre>
+     gl_get_line,            new_GetLine,            del_GetLine,
+     gl_customize_completion,                 gl_change_terminal,
+     gl_configure_getline,   gl_load_history,    gl_save_history,
+     gl_group_history,        gl_show_history,       gl_watch_fd,
+     gl_terminal_size,    gl_resize_history,    gl_limit_history,
+     gl_clear_history,    gl_toggle_history,   gl_lookup_history,
+     gl_state_of_history,                    gl_range_of_history,
+     gl_size_of_history,     gl_echo_mode,     gl_replace_prompt,
+     gl_prompt_style,      gl_ignore_signal,      gl_trap_signal,
+     gl_last_signal - allow the user to compose an input line
+
+</pre><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><pre>
+     #include &lt;stdio.h&gt;
+     #include &lt;libtecla.h&gt;
+
+     GetLine *new_GetLine(size_t linelen, size_t histlen);
+
+     GetLine *del_GetLine(GetLine *gl);
+
+     char *gl_get_line(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt,
+                      const char *start_line, int start_pos);
+
+     int gl_customize_completion(GetLine *gl, void *data,
+                                 CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+     int gl_change_terminal(GetLine *gl, FILE *input_fp,
+                            FILE *output_fp, const char *term);
+
+     int gl_configure_getline(GetLine *gl,
+                              const char *app_string,
+                              const char *app_file,
+                              const char *user_file);
+
+     int gl_save_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                         const char *comment, int max_lines);
+
+     int gl_load_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                         const char *comment);
+
+     int gl_watch_fd(GetLine *gl, int fd, GlFdEvent event,
+                     GlFdEventFn *callback, void *data);
+
+     int gl_group_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned stream);
+
+     int gl_show_history(GetLine *gl, FILE *fp,
+                         const char *fmt, int all_groups,
+                         int max_lines);
+
+     int gl_resize_history(GetLine *gl, size_t bufsize);
+
+     void gl_limit_history(GetLine *gl, int max_lines);
+     void gl_clear_history(GetLine *gl, int all_groups);
+
+     void gl_toggle_history(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+     GlTerminalSize gl_terminal_size(GetLine *gl,
+                                     int def_ncolumn,
+                                     int def_nline);
+
+     int gl_lookup_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned long id,
+                           GlHistoryLine *hline);
+
+     void gl_state_of_history(GetLine *gl,
+                              GlHistoryState *state);
+
+     void gl_range_of_history(GetLine *gl,
+                              GlHistoryRange *range);
+
+     void gl_size_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistorySize *size);
+
+     void gl_echo_mode(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+     void gl_replace_prompt(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt);
+
+     void gl_prompt_style(GetLine *gl, GlPromptStyle style);
+
+     int gl_ignore_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo);
+
+     int gl_trap_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo, unsigned flags,
+                        GlAfterSignal after, int errno_value);
+
+     int gl_last_signal(const GetLine *gl);
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><pre>
+     The gl_get_line() function is part of the tecla library (see
+     the <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a> man page). If the user is typing at a termi-
+     nal, it prompts them for an line  of  input,  then  provides
+     interactive editing facilities, similar to those of the unix
+     tcsh shell. In addition to simple command-line  editing,  it
+     supports  recall  of  previously  entered command lines, TAB
+     completion of file names, and in-line wild-card expansion of
+     filenames.
+
+
+</pre><h2>AN EXAMPLE</h2><pre>
+     The following shows a complete example of  how  to  use  the
+     gl_get_line() function to get input from the user:
+
+       #include &lt;stdio.h&gt;
+       #include &lt;locale.h&gt;
+       #include &lt;libtecla.h&gt;
+       int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+       {
+         char *line;    /* The line that the user typed */
+         GetLine *gl;   /* The gl_get_line() resource object */
+
+         setlocale(LC_CTYPE, ""); /* Adopt the user's choice */
+                                  /* of character set. */
+
+         gl = new_GetLine(1024, 2048);
+         if(!gl)
+           return 1;
+
+         while((line=gl_get_line(gl, "$ ", NULL, -1)) != NULL &amp;&amp;
+                strcmp(line, "exit\n") != 0)
+           printf("You typed: %s\n", line);
+
+         gl = del_GetLine(gl);
+         return 0;
+       }
+
+     In  the  example,  first  the  resources   needed   by   the
+     gl_get_line() function are created by calling new_GetLine().
+     This allocates the memory used in subsequent  calls  to  the
+     gl_get_line()  function,  including  the  history buffer for
+     recording previously entered lines. Then one or  more  lines
+     are read from the user, until either an error occurs, or the
+     user types exit. Then finally the resources that were  allo-
+     cated  by  new_GetLine(), are returned to the system by cal-
+     ling del_GetLine(). Note the use of the NULL return value of
+     del_GetLine()  to make gl NULL. This is a safety precaution.
+     If  the  program  subsequently  attempts  to  pass   gl   to
+     gl_get_line(),  said  function  will complain, and return an
+     error, instead of attempting to  use  the  deleted  resource
+     object.
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>THE FUNCTIONS USED IN THE EXAMPLE</h2><pre>
+     The descriptions of the functions used in the example are as
+     follows:
+
+       GetLine *new_GetLine(size_t linelen, size_t histlen)
+
+     This  function   creates   the   resources   used   by   the
+     gl_get_line()  function and returns an opaque pointer to the
+     object that contains them.  The maximum length of  an  input
+     line  is  specified via the linelen argument, and the number
+     of bytes to allocate for storing history lines is set by the
+     histlen argument. History lines are stored back-to-back in a
+     single buffer of this size. Note that this  means  that  the
+     number  of  history  lines  that  can be stored at any given
+     time, depends on the lengths of the  individual  lines.   If
+     you want to place an upper limit on the number of lines that
+     can be stored, see the gl_limit_history() function described
+     later.  If you don't want history at all, specify histlen as
+     zero, and no history buffer will be allocated.
+
+     On error, a  message  is  printed  to  stderr  and  NULL  is
+     returned.
+
+       GetLine *del_GetLine(GetLine *gl)
+
+     This function deletes the resources that were returned by  a
+     previous call to new_GetLine(). It always returns NULL (ie a
+     deleted object). It does nothing if the gl argument is NULL.
+
+       char *gl_get_line(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt,
+                        const char *start_line, int start_pos);
+
+     The gl_get_line() function can be called any number of times
+     to  read input from the user. The gl argument must have been
+     previously returned by a call to new_GetLine().  The  prompt
+     argument  should be a normal NUL terminated string, specify-
+     ing the prompt to present the user with. By default  prompts
+     are   displayed   literally,   but   if   enabled  with  the
+     gl_prompt_style() function (see later), prompts can  contain
+     directives to do underlining, switch to and from bold fonts,
+     or turn highlighting on and off.
+
+     If you want to specify the initial contents of the line, for
+     the user to edit, pass the desired string via the start_line
+     argument. You can then specify which character of this  line
+     the cursor is initially positioned over, using the start_pos
+     argument. This should be -1 if you want the cursor to follow
+     the  last  character of the start line. If you don't want to
+     preload the line in this manner, send  start_line  as  NULL,
+     and set start_pos to -1.
+
+     The gl_get_line() function returns a  pointer  to  the  line
+     entered  by  the user, or NULL on error or at the end of the
+     input. The returned pointer is  part  of  the  specified  gl
+     resource  object,  and  thus  should  not  be  free'd by the
+     caller, or assumed to be unchanging from  one  call  to  the
+     next.  When  reading  from  a user at a terminal, there will
+     always be a newline character at the  end  of  the  returned
+     line.   When  standard input is being taken from a pipe or a
+     file, there will similarly be a  newline  unless  the  input
+     line  was  too  long to store in the internal buffer. In the
+     latter case you should call gl_get_line() again to read  the
+     rest   of   the   line.   Note   that  this  behavior  makes
+     gl_get_line() similar to fgets().  In fact when stdin  isn't
+     connected to a terminal,gl_get_line() just calls fgets().
+
+
+</pre><h2>OPTIONAL PROMPT FORMATTING</h2><pre>
+     Whereas by default the prompt string  that  you  specify  is
+     displayed  literally,  without any special interpretation of
+     the characters within it, the gl_prompt_style() function can
+     be  used to enable optional formatting directives within the
+     prompt.
+
+       void gl_prompt_style(GetLine *gl, GlPromptStyle style);
+
+     The style argument, which specifies  the  formatting  style,
+     can take any of the following values:
+
+       GL_FORMAT_PROMPT   -  In this style, the formatting
+                             directives described below, when
+                             included in prompt strings, are
+                             interpreted as follows:
+
+                               %B  -  Display subsequent
+                                      characters with a bold
+                                      font.
+                               %b  -  Stop displaying characters
+                                      with the bold font.
+                               %F  -  Make subsequent characters
+                                      flash.
+                               %f  -  Turn off flashing
+                                      characters.
+                               %U  -  Underline subsequent
+                                      characters.
+                               %u  -  Stop underlining
+                                      characters.
+                               %P  -  Switch to a pale (half
+                                      brightness) font.
+                               %p  -  Stop using the pale font.
+                               %S  -  Highlight subsequent
+                                      characters (also known as
+                                      standout mode).
+                               %s  -  Stop highlighting
+                                      characters.
+                               %V  -  Turn on reverse video.
+                               %v  -  Turn off reverse video.
+                               %%  -  Display a single %
+                                      character.
+
+                             For example, in this mode, a prompt
+                             string like "%UOK%u$ " would
+                             display the prompt "OK$ ",
+                             but with the OK part
+                             underlined.
+
+                             Note that although a pair of
+                             characters that starts with a %
+                             character, but doesn't match any of
+                             the above directives is displayed
+                             literally, if a new directive is
+                             subsequently introduced which does
+                             match, the displayed prompt will
+                             change, so it is better to always
+                             use %% to display a literal %.
+
+                             Also note that not all terminals
+                             support all of these text
+                             attributes, and that some substitute
+                             a different attribute for missing
+                             ones.
+
+       GL_LITERAL_PROMPT  -  In this style, the prompt string is
+                             printed literally. This is the
+                             default style.
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>THE AVAILABLE KEY BINDING FUNCTIONS</h2><pre>
+     The gl_get_line() function provides a  number  of  functions
+     which  can  be  bound  to  key sequences. The names of these
+     functions, and what they do, are given below.
+
+       user-interrupt           -  Send a SIGINT signal to the
+                                   parent process.
+       abort                    -  Send a SIGABRT signal to the
+                                   parent process.
+       suspend                  -  Suspend the parent process.
+       stop-output              -  Pause terminal output.
+       start-output             -  Resume paused terminal output.
+       literal-next             -  Arrange for the next character
+                                   to be treated as a normal
+                                   character. This allows control
+                                   characters to be entered.
+       cursor-right             -  Move the cursor one character
+                                   right.
+       cursor-left              -  Move the cursor one character
+                                   left.
+       insert-mode              -  Toggle between insert mode and
+                                   overwrite mode.
+       beginning-of-line        -  Move the cursor to the
+                                   beginning of the line.
+       end-of-line              -  Move the cursor to the end of
+                                   the line.
+       delete-line              -  Delete the contents of the
+                                   current line.
+       kill-line                -  Delete everything that follows
+                                   the cursor.
+       backward-kill-line       -  Delete all characters between
+                                   the cursor and the start of the
+                                   line.
+       forward-word             -  Move to the end of the word
+                                   which follows the cursor.
+       forward-to-word          -  Move the cursor to the start of
+                                   the word that follows the
+                                   cursor.
+       backward-word            -  Move to the start of the word
+                                   which precedes the cursor.
+       goto-column              -  Move the cursor to the
+                                   1-relative column in the line
+                                   specified by any preceding
+                                   digit-argument sequences (see
+                                   ENTERING REPEAT COUNTS below).
+       find-parenthesis         -  If the cursor is currently
+                                   over a parenthesis character,
+                                   move it to the matching
+                                   parenthesis character. If not
+                                   over a parenthesis character
+                                   move right to the next close
+                                   parenthesis.
+       forward-delete-char      -  Delete the character under the
+                                   cursor.
+       backward-delete-char     -  Delete the character which
+                                   precedes the cursor.
+       list-or-eof              -  This is intended for binding
+                                   to ^D. When invoked when the
+                                   cursor is within the line it
+                                   displays all possible
+                                   completions then redisplays
+                                   the line unchanged. When
+                                   invoked on an empty line, it
+                                   signals end-of-input (EOF) to
+                                   the caller of gl_get_line().
+       del-char-or-list-or-eof  -  This is intended for binding
+                                   to ^D. When invoked when the
+                                   cursor is within the line it
+                                   invokes forward-delete-char.
+                                   When invoked at the end of the
+                                   line it displays all possible
+                                   completions then redisplays
+                                   the line unchanged. When
+                                   invoked on an empty line, it
+                                   signals end-of-input (EOF) to
+                                   the caller of gl_get_line().
+       forward-delete-word      -  Delete the word which follows
+                                   the cursor.
+       backward-delete-word     -  Delete the word which precedes
+                                   the cursor.
+       upcase-word              -  Convert all of the characters
+                                   of the word which follows the
+                                   cursor, to upper case.
+       downcase-word            -  Convert all of the characters
+                                   of the word which follows the
+                                   cursor, to lower case.
+       capitalize-word          -  Capitalize the word which
+                                   follows the cursor.
+       change-case              -  If the next character is upper
+                                   case, toggle it to lower case
+                                   and vice versa.
+       redisplay                -  Redisplay the line.
+       clear-screen             -  Clear the terminal, then
+                                   redisplay the current line.
+       transpose-chars          -  Swap the character under the
+                                   cursor with the character just
+                                   before the cursor.
+       set-mark                 -  Set a mark at the position of
+                                   the cursor.
+       exchange-point-and-mark  -  Move the cursor to the last
+                                   mark that was set, and move
+                                   the mark to where the cursor
+                                   used to be.
+       kill-region              -  Delete the characters that lie
+                                   between the last mark that was
+                                   set, and the cursor.
+       copy-region-as-kill      -  Copy the text between the mark
+                                   and the cursor to the cut
+                                   buffer, without deleting the
+                                   original text.
+       yank                     -  Insert the text that was last
+                                   deleted, just before the
+                                   current position of the cursor.
+       append-yank              -  Paste the current contents of
+                                   the cut buffer, after the
+                                   cursor.
+       up-history               -  Recall the next oldest line
+                                   that was entered. Note that
+                                   in vi mode you are left in
+                                   command mode.
+       down-history             -  Recall the next most recent
+                                   line that was entered. If no
+                                   history recall session is
+                                   currently active, the next
+                                   line from a previous recall
+                                   session is recalled. Note that
+                                   in vi mode you are left in
+                                   command mode.
+       history-search-backward  -  Recall the next oldest line
+                                   who's prefix matches the string
+                                   which currently precedes the
+                                   cursor (in vi command-mode the
+                                   character under the cursor is
+                                   also included in the search
+                                   string).  Note that in vi mode
+                                   you are left in command mode.
+       history-search-forward   -  Recall the next newest line
+                                   who's prefix matches the string
+                                   which currently precedes the
+                                   cursor (in vi command-mode the
+                                   character under the cursor is
+                                   also included in the search
+                                   string).  Note that in vi mode
+                                   you are left in command mode.
+       history-re-search-backward -Recall the next oldest line
+                                   who's prefix matches that
+                                   established by the last
+                                   invocation of either
+                                   history-search-forward or
+                                   history-search-backward.
+       history-re-search-forward - Recall the next newest line
+                                   who's prefix matches that
+                                   established by the last
+                                   invocation of either
+                                   history-search-forward or
+                                   history-search-backward.
+       complete-word            -  Attempt to complete the
+                                   incomplete word which
+                                   precedes the cursor. Unless
+                                   the host program has customized
+                                   word completion, filename
+                                   completion is attempted. In vi
+                                   commmand mode the character
+                                   under the cursor is also
+                                   included in the word being
+                                   completed, and you are left in
+                                   vi insert mode.
+       expand-filename          -  Within the command line, expand
+                                   wild cards, tilde expressions
+                                   and dollar expressions in the
+                                   filename which immediately
+                                   precedes the cursor. In vi
+                                   commmand mode the character
+                                   under the cursor is also
+                                   included in the filename being
+                                   expanded, and you are left in
+                                   vi insert mode.
+       list-glob                -  List any filenames which match
+                                   the wild-card, tilde and dollar
+                                   expressions in the filename
+                                   which immediately precedes the
+                                   cursor, then redraw the input
+                                   line unchanged.
+       list-history             -  Display the contents of the
+                                   history list for the current
+                                   history group. If a repeat
+                                   count of &gt; 1 is specified,
+                                   only that many of the most
+                                   recent lines are displayed.
+                                   See the "ENTERING REPEAT
+                                   COUNTS" section.
+       read-from-file           -  Temporarily switch to reading
+                                   input from the file who's
+                                   name precedes the cursor.
+       read-init-files          -  Re-read teclarc configuration
+                                   files.
+       beginning-of-history     -  Move to the oldest line in the
+                                   history list. Note that in vi
+                                   mode you are left in command
+                                   mode.
+       end-of-history           -  Move to the newest line in the
+                                   history list (ie. the current
+                                   line). Note that in vi mode
+                                   this leaves you in command
+                                   mode.
+       digit-argument           -  Enter a repeat count for the
+                                   next key-binding function.
+                                   For details, see the ENTERING
+                                   REPEAT COUNTS section.
+       newline                  -  Terminate and return the
+                                   current contents of the
+                                   line, after appending a
+                                   newline character. The newline
+                                   character is normally '\n',
+                                   but will be the first
+                                   character of the key-sequence
+                                   that invoked the newline
+                                   action, if this happens to be
+                                   a printable character. If the
+                                   action was invoked by the
+                                   '\n' newline character or the
+                                   '\r' carriage return
+                                   character, the line is
+                                   appended to the history
+                                   buffer.
+       repeat-history           -  Return the line that is being
+                                   edited, then arrange for the
+                                   next most recent entry in the
+                                   history buffer to be recalled
+                                   when gl_get_line() is
+                                   next called. Repeatedly
+                                   invoking this action causes
+                                   successive historical input
+                                   lines to be re-executed. Note
+                                   that this action is equivalent
+                                   to the 'Operate' action in
+                                   ksh.
+       ring-bell                -  Ring the terminal bell, unless
+                                   the bell has been silenced via
+                                   the nobeep configuration
+                                   option (see the THE TECLA
+                                   CONFIGURATION FILE section).
+       forward-copy-char        -  Copy the next character into
+                                   the cut buffer (NB. use repeat
+                                   counts to copy more than one).
+       backward-copy-char       -  Copy the previous character
+                                   into the cut buffer.
+       forward-copy-word        -  Copy the next word into the cut
+                                   buffer.
+       backward-copy-word       -  Copy the previous word into the
+                                   cut buffer.
+       forward-find-char        -  Move the cursor to the next
+                                   occurrence of the next
+                                   character that you type.
+       backward-find-char       -  Move the cursor to the last
+                                   occurrence of the next
+                                   character that you type.
+       forward-to-char          -  Move the cursor to the
+                                   character just before the next
+                                   occurrence of the next
+                                   character that the user types.
+       backward-to-char         -  Move the cursor to the
+                                   character just after the last
+                                   occurrence before the cursor
+                                   of the next character that the
+                                   user types.
+       repeat-find-char         -  Repeat the last
+                                   backward-find-char,
+                                   forward-find-char,
+                                   backward-to-char or
+                                   forward-to-char.
+       invert-refind-char       -  Repeat the last
+                                   backward-find-char,
+                                   forward-find-char,
+                                   backward-to-char, or
+                                   forward-to-char in the
+                                   opposite direction.
+       delete-to-column         -  Delete the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to the column that
+                                   is specified by the repeat
+                                   count.
+       delete-to-parenthesis    -  Delete the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including
+                                   the matching parenthesis, or
+                                   next close parenthesis.
+       forward-delete-find      -  Delete the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including the
+                                   following occurence of the
+                                   next character typed.
+       backward-delete-find     -  Delete the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including the
+                                   preceding occurence of the
+                                   next character typed.
+       forward-delete-to        -  Delete the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to, but not
+                                   including, the following
+                                   occurence of the next
+                                   character typed.
+       backward-delete-to       -  Delete the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to, but not
+                                   including, the preceding
+                                   occurence of the next
+                                   character typed.
+       delete-refind            -  Repeat the last *-delete-find
+                                   or *-delete-to action.
+       delete-invert-refind     -  Repeat the last *-delete-find
+                                   or *-delete-to action, in the
+                                   opposite direction.
+       copy-to-column           -  Copy the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to the column that
+                                   is specified by the repeat
+                                   count, into the cut buffer.
+       copy-to-parenthesis      -  Copy the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including
+                                   the matching parenthesis, or
+                                   next close parenthesis, into
+                                   the cut buffer.
+       forward-copy-find        -  Copy the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including the
+                                   following occurence of the
+                                   next character typed, into the
+                                   cut buffer.
+       backward-copy-find       -  Copy the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including the
+                                   preceding occurence of the
+                                   next character typed, into the
+                                   cut buffer.
+       forward-copy-to          -  Copy the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to, but not
+                                   including, the following
+                                   occurence of the next
+                                   character typed, into the cut
+                                   buffer.
+       backward-copy-to         -  Copy the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to, but not
+                                   including, the preceding
+                                   occurence of the next
+                                   character typed, into the cut
+                                   buffer.
+       copy-refind              -  Repeat the last *-copy-find
+                                   or *-copy-to action.
+       copy-invert-refind       -  Repeat the last *-copy-find
+                                   or *-copy-to action, in the
+                                   opposite direction.
+       vi-mode                  -  Switch to vi mode from emacs
+                                   mode.
+       emacs-mode               -  Switch to emacs mode from vi
+                                   mode.
+       vi-insert                -  From vi command mode, switch to
+                                   insert mode.
+       vi-overwrite             -  From vi command mode, switch to
+                                   overwrite mode.
+       vi-insert-at-bol         -  From vi command mode, move the
+                                   cursor to the start of the line
+                                   and switch to insert mode.
+       vi-append-at-eol         -  From vi command mode, move the
+                                   cursor to the end of the line
+                                   and switch to append mode.
+       vi-append                -  From vi command mode, move the
+                                   cursor one position right, and
+                                   switch to insert mode.
+       vi-replace-char          -  From vi command mode, replace
+                                   the character under the cursor
+                                   with the the next character
+                                   entered.
+       vi-forward-change-char   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the next character then enter
+                                   insert mode.
+       vi-backward-change-char  -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the preceding character then
+                                   enter insert mode.
+       vi-forward-change-word   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the next word then enter
+                                   insert mode.
+       vi-backward-change-word  -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the preceding word then
+                                   enter insert mode.
+       vi-change-rest-of-line   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   from the cursor to the end of
+                                   the line, then enter insert
+                                   mode.
+       vi-change-line           -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the current line, then enter
+                                   insert mode.
+       vi-change-to-bol         -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   all characters between the
+                                   cursor and the beginning of
+                                   the line, then enter insert
+                                   mode.
+       vi-change-to-column      -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the characters from the cursor
+                                   up to the column that is
+                                   specified by the repeat count,
+                                   then enter insert mode.
+       vi-change-to-parenthesis -  Delete the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including
+                                   the matching parenthesis, or
+                                   next close parenthesis, then
+                                   enter vi insert mode.
+       vi-forward-change-find   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including the
+                                   following occurence of the
+                                   next character typed, then
+                                   enter insert mode.
+       vi-backward-change-find  -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to and including the
+                                   preceding occurence of the
+                                   next character typed, then
+                                   enter insert mode.
+       vi-forward-change-to     -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to, but not
+                                   including, the following
+                                   occurence of the next
+                                   character typed, then enter
+                                   insert mode.
+       vi-backward-change-to    -  From vi command mode, delete
+                                   the characters from the
+                                   cursor up to, but not
+                                   including, the preceding
+                                   occurence of the next
+                                   character typed, then enter
+                                   insert mode.
+       vi-change-refind         -  Repeat the last
+                                   vi-*-change-find or
+                                   vi-*-change-to action.
+       vi-change-invert-refind  -  Repeat the last
+                                   vi-*-change-find or
+                                   vi-*-change-to action, in the
+                                   opposite direction.
+       vi-undo                  -  In vi mode, undo the last
+                                   editing operation.
+       vi-repeat-change         -  In vi command mode, repeat the
+                                   last command that modified the
+                                   line.
+
+
+</pre><h2>DEFAULT KEY BINDINGS IN EMACS MODE</h2><pre>
+     The following default key bindings, which can  be  overriden
+     by  the tecla configuration file, are designed to mimic most
+     of the bindings of the unix tcsh shell, when it is in  emacs
+     editing mode.
+
+     This is the default editing mode of the tecla library.
+
+     Note that a key sequence like  ^A  or  C-a  means  hold  the
+     control-key down while pressing the letter A, and that where
+     you see \E or M- in a binding, this  represents  the  escape
+     key   or   the   Meta   modifier  key.  Also  note  that  to
+     gl_get_line(), pressing the  escape  key  before  a  key  is
+     equivalent to pressing the meta key at the same time as that
+     key. Thus the key sequence M-p can be typed in two ways,  by
+     pressing  the  escape  key,  followed  by  pressing p, or by
+     pressing the Meta key at the same time as p.
+
+     Under UNIX the terminal driver sets a number of special keys
+     for certain functions. The tecla library attempts to use the
+     same keybindings to maintain consistency. The key  sequences
+     shown for the following 6 bindings are thus just examples of
+     what they will probably be set to. If you have used the stty
+     command  to  change  these  keys,  then the default bindings
+     should match.
+
+       ^C     -&gt;   user-interrupt
+       ^\     -&gt;   abort
+       ^Z     -&gt;   suspend
+       ^Q     -&gt;   start-output
+       ^S     -&gt;   stop-output
+       ^V     -&gt;   literal-next
+
+     The cursor keys are refered to by name, as follows. This  is
+     necessary because different types of terminals generate dif-
+     ferent key sequences when their cursor keys are pressed.
+
+       right  -&gt;   cursor-right
+       left   -&gt;   cursor-left
+       up     -&gt;   up-history
+       down   -&gt;   down-history
+
+     The remaining bindings don't depend on  the  terminal  sett-
+     tings.
+
+       ^F     -&gt;   cursor-right
+       ^B     -&gt;   cursor-left
+       M-i    -&gt;   insert-mode
+       ^A     -&gt;   beginning-of-line
+       ^E     -&gt;   end-of-line
+       ^U     -&gt;   delete-line
+       ^K     -&gt;   kill-line
+       M-f    -&gt;   forward-word
+       M-b    -&gt;   backward-word
+       ^D     -&gt;   del-char-or-list-or-eof
+       ^H     -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+       ^?     -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+       M-d    -&gt;   forward-delete-word
+       M-^H   -&gt;   backward-delete-word
+       M-^?   -&gt;   backward-delete-word
+       M-u    -&gt;   upcase-word
+       M-l    -&gt;   downcase-word
+       M-c    -&gt;   capitalize-word
+       ^R     -&gt;   redisplay
+       ^L     -&gt;   clear-screen
+       ^T     -&gt;   transpose-chars
+       ^@     -&gt;   set-mark
+       ^X^X   -&gt;   exchange-point-and-mark
+       ^W     -&gt;   kill-region
+       M-w    -&gt;   copy-region-as-kill
+       ^Y     -&gt;   yank
+       ^P     -&gt;   up-history
+       ^N     -&gt;   down-history
+       M-p    -&gt;   history-search-backward
+       M-n    -&gt;   history-search-forward
+       ^I     -&gt;   complete-word
+       ^X*    -&gt;   expand-filename
+       ^X^F   -&gt;   read-from-file
+       ^X^R   -&gt;   read-init-files
+       ^Xg    -&gt;   list-glob
+       ^Xh    -&gt;   list-history
+       M-&lt;    -&gt;   beginning-of-history
+       M-&gt;    -&gt;   end-of-history
+       \n     -&gt;   newline
+       \r     -&gt;   newline
+       M-o    -&gt;   repeat-history
+       M-^V   -&gt;   vi-mode
+
+       M-0, M-1, ... M-9  -&gt;  digit-argument  (see below)
+
+     Note that ^I is what the TAB key generates, and that ^@  can
+     be  generated not only by pressing the control key and the @
+     key simultaneously, but also by pressing the control key and
+     the space bar at the same time.
+
+
+</pre><h2>DEFAULT KEY BINDINGS IN VI MODE</h2><pre>
+     The following default key bindings are designed to mimic the
+     vi  style of editing as closely as possible. This means that
+     very few editing functions are provided in the initial char-
+     acter  input  mode, editing functions instead being provided
+     by the vi command mode. Vi command mode is entered  whenever
+     the  escape character is pressed, or whenever a key-sequence
+     that starts with a meta character is entered. In addition to
+     mimicing  vi, libtecla provides bindings for tab completion,
+     wild-card expansion  of  file  names,  and  historical  line
+     recall.
+
+     To learn how to tell  the  tecla  library  to  use  vi  mode
+     instead  of  the default emacs editing mode, see the section
+     entitled THE TECLA CONFIGURATION FILE.
+
+     As already mentioned above in the emacs section, Note that a
+     key  sequence like ^A or C-a means hold the control-key down
+     while pressing the letter A, and that where you see \E or M-
+     in  a  binding,  this  represents the escape key or the Meta
+     modifier key. Also note that to gl_get_line(), pressing  the
+     escape  key  before a key is equivalent to pressing the meta
+     key at the same time as that key. Thus the key sequence  M-p
+     can  be  typed in two ways, by pressing the escape key, fol-
+     lowed by pressing p, or by pressing the Meta key at the same
+     time as p.
+
+     Under UNIX the terminal driver sets a number of special keys
+     for certain functions. The tecla library attempts to use the
+     same keybindings to maintain consistency, binding them  both
+     in  input  mode and in command mode. The key sequences shown
+     for the following 6 bindings are thus just examples of  what
+     they will probably be set to. If you have used the stty com-
+     mand to change these keys, then the default bindings  should
+     match.
+
+       ^C     -&gt;   user-interrupt
+       ^\     -&gt;   abort
+       ^Z     -&gt;   suspend
+       ^Q     -&gt;   start-output
+       ^S     -&gt;   stop-output
+       ^V     -&gt;   literal-next
+       M-^C   -&gt;   user-interrupt
+       M-^\   -&gt;   abort
+       M-^Z   -&gt;   suspend
+       M-^Q   -&gt;   start-output
+       M-^S   -&gt;   stop-output
+
+     Note that above, most of the  bindings  are  defined  twice,
+     once as a raw control code like ^C and then a second time as
+     a meta character like M-^C. The former is the binding for vi
+     input mode, whereas the latter is the binding for vi command
+     mode. Once in command mode all key-sequences that  the  user
+     types  that  they don't explicitly start with an escape or a
+     meta key, have their first key secretly converted to a  meta
+     character  before  the  key sequence is looked up in the key
+     binding table. Thus, once in command mode, when you type the
+     letter  i,  for example, the tecla library actually looks up
+     the binding for M-i.
+
+     The cursor keys are refered to by name, as follows. This  is
+     necessary because different types of terminals generate dif-
+     ferent key sequences when their cursor keys are pressed.
+
+       right  -&gt;   cursor-right
+       left   -&gt;   cursor-left
+       up     -&gt;   up-history
+       down   -&gt;   down-history
+
+     The cursor keys normally generate a keysequence  that  start
+     with  an  escape  character,  so beware that using the arrow
+     keys will put you into command mode (if you  aren't  already
+     in command mode).
+
+     The following are the terminal-independent key bindings  for
+     vi input mode.
+
+       ^D     -&gt;   list-or-eof
+       ^G     -&gt;   list-glob
+       ^H     -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+       ^I     -&gt;   complete-word
+       \r     -&gt;   newline
+       \n     -&gt;   newline
+       ^L     -&gt;   clear-screen
+       ^N     -&gt;   down-history
+       ^P     -&gt;   up-history
+       ^R     -&gt;   redisplay
+       ^U     -&gt;   backward-kill-line
+       ^W     -&gt;   backward-delete-word
+       ^X*    -&gt;   expand-filename
+       ^X^F   -&gt;   read-from-file
+       ^X^R   -&gt;   read-init-files
+       ^?     -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+
+     The following are the key bindings that are  defined  in  vi
+     command mode, this being specified by them all starting with
+     a meta character. As mentioned above, once in  command  mode
+     the  initial  meta  character  is optional. For example, you
+     might enter command mode by typing Esc,  and  then  press  h
+     twice  to  move the cursor two positions to the left. Both h
+     characters get quietly converted to M-h  before  being  com-
+     pared to the key-binding table, the first one because Escape
+     followed  by  a  character  is  always  converted   to   the
+     equivalent  meta  character,  and the second because command
+     mode was already active.
+
+       M-\     -&gt;   cursor-right     (Meta-space)
+       M-$     -&gt;   end-of-line
+       M-*     -&gt;   expand-filename
+       M-+     -&gt;   down-history
+       M--     -&gt;   up-history
+       M-&lt;     -&gt;   beginning-of-history
+       M-&gt;     -&gt;   end-of-history
+       M-^     -&gt;   beginning-of-line
+       M-;     -&gt;   repeat-find-char
+       M-,     -&gt;   invert-refind-char
+       M-|     -&gt;   goto-column
+       M-~     -&gt;   change-case
+       M-.     -&gt;   vi-repeat-change
+       M-%     -&gt;   find-parenthesis
+       M-a     -&gt;   vi-append
+       M-A     -&gt;   vi-append-at-eol
+       M-b     -&gt;   backward-word
+       M-B     -&gt;   backward-word
+       M-C     -&gt;   vi-change-rest-of-line
+       M-cb    -&gt;   vi-backward-change-word
+       M-cB    -&gt;   vi-backward-change-word
+       M-cc    -&gt;   vi-change-line
+       M-ce    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-word
+       M-cE    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-word
+       M-cw    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-word
+       M-cW    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-word
+       M-cF    -&gt;   vi-backward-change-find
+       M-cf    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-find
+       M-cT    -&gt;   vi-backward-change-to
+       M-ct    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-to
+       M-c;    -&gt;   vi-change-refind
+       M-c,    -&gt;   vi-change-invert-refind
+       M-ch    -&gt;   vi-backward-change-char
+       M-c^H   -&gt;   vi-backward-change-char
+       M-c^?   -&gt;   vi-backward-change-char
+       M-cl    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-char
+       M-c\    -&gt;   vi-forward-change-char  (Meta-c-space)
+       M-c^    -&gt;   vi-change-to-bol
+       M-c0    -&gt;   vi-change-to-bol
+       M-c$    -&gt;   vi-change-rest-of-line
+       M-c|    -&gt;   vi-change-to-column
+       M-c%    -&gt;   vi-change-to-parenthesis
+       M-dh    -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+       M-d^H   -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+       M-d^?   -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+       M-dl    -&gt;   forward-delete-char
+       M-d     -&gt;   forward-delete-char    (Meta-d-space)
+       M-dd    -&gt;   delete-line
+       M-db    -&gt;   backward-delete-word
+       M-dB    -&gt;   backward-delete-word
+       M-de    -&gt;   forward-delete-word
+       M-dE    -&gt;   forward-delete-word
+       M-dw    -&gt;   forward-delete-word
+       M-dW    -&gt;   forward-delete-word
+       M-dF    -&gt;   backward-delete-find
+       M-df    -&gt;   forward-delete-find
+       M-dT    -&gt;   backward-delete-to
+       M-dt    -&gt;   forward-delete-to
+       M-d;    -&gt;   delete-refind
+       M-d,    -&gt;   delete-invert-refind
+       M-d^    -&gt;   backward-kill-line
+       M-d0    -&gt;   backward-kill-line
+       M-d$    -&gt;   kill-line
+       M-D     -&gt;   kill-line
+       M-d|    -&gt;   delete-to-column
+       M-d%    -&gt;   delete-to-parenthesis
+       M-e     -&gt;   forward-word
+       M-E     -&gt;   forward-word
+       M-f     -&gt;   forward-find-char
+       M-F     -&gt;   backward-find-char
+       M--     -&gt;   up-history
+       M-h     -&gt;   cursor-left
+       M-H     -&gt;   beginning-of-history
+       M-i     -&gt;   vi-insert
+       M-I     -&gt;   vi-insert-at-bol
+       M-j     -&gt;   down-history
+       M-J     -&gt;   history-search-forward
+       M-k     -&gt;   up-history
+       M-K     -&gt;   history-search-backward
+       M-l     -&gt;   cursor-right
+       M-L     -&gt;   end-of-history
+       M-n     -&gt;   history-re-search-forward
+       M-N     -&gt;   history-re-search-backward
+       M-p     -&gt;   append-yank
+       M-P     -&gt;   yank
+       M-r     -&gt;   vi-replace-char
+       M-R     -&gt;   vi-overwrite
+       M-s     -&gt;   vi-forward-change-char
+       M-S     -&gt;   vi-change-line
+       M-t     -&gt;   forward-to-char
+       M-T     -&gt;   backward-to-char
+       M-u     -&gt;   vi-undo
+       M-w     -&gt;   forward-to-word
+       M-W     -&gt;   forward-to-word
+       M-x     -&gt;   forward-delete-char
+       M-X     -&gt;   backward-delete-char
+       M-yh    -&gt;   backward-copy-char
+       M-y^H   -&gt;   backward-copy-char
+       M-y^?   -&gt;   backward-copy-char
+       M-yl    -&gt;   forward-copy-char
+       M-y\    -&gt;   forward-copy-char  (Meta-y-space)
+       M-ye    -&gt;   forward-copy-word
+       M-yE    -&gt;   forward-copy-word
+       M-yw    -&gt;   forward-copy-word
+       M-yW    -&gt;   forward-copy-word
+       M-yb    -&gt;   backward-copy-word
+       M-yB    -&gt;   backward-copy-word
+       M-yf    -&gt;   forward-copy-find
+       M-yF    -&gt;   backward-copy-find
+       M-yt    -&gt;   forward-copy-to
+       M-yT    -&gt;   backward-copy-to
+       M-y;    -&gt;   copy-refind
+       M-y,    -&gt;   copy-invert-refind
+       M-y^    -&gt;   copy-to-bol
+       M-y0    -&gt;   copy-to-bol
+       M-y$    -&gt;   copy-rest-of-line
+       M-yy    -&gt;   copy-line
+       M-Y     -&gt;   copy-line
+       M-y|    -&gt;   copy-to-column
+       M-y%    -&gt;   copy-to-parenthesis
+       M-^E    -&gt;   emacs-mode
+       M-^H    -&gt;   cursor-left
+       M-^?    -&gt;   cursor-left
+       M-^L    -&gt;   clear-screen
+       M-^N    -&gt;   down-history
+       M-^P    -&gt;   up-history
+       M-^R    -&gt;   redisplay
+       M-^D    -&gt;   list-or-eof
+       M-^I    -&gt;   complete-word
+       M-\r    -&gt;   newline
+       M-\n    -&gt;   newline
+       M-^X^R  -&gt;   read-init-files
+       M-^Xh   -&gt;   list-history
+
+       M-0, M-1, ... M-9  -&gt;  digit-argument  (see below)
+
+     Note that ^I is what the TAB key generates.
+
+
+</pre><h2>ENTERING REPEAT COUNTS</h2><pre>
+     Many of the key binding functions described previously, take
+     an  optional  count, typed in before the target keysequence.
+     This is interpreted as a repeat count by  most  bindings.  A
+     notable  exception  is the goto-column binding, which inter-
+     prets the count as a column number.
+
+     By default you can specify this count argument  by  pressing
+     the  meta key while typing in the numeric count. This relies
+     on the digit-argument action being bound to  Meta-0,  Meta-1
+     etc.  Once any one of these bindings has been activated, you
+     can optionally take your finger off the meta key to type  in
+     the rest of the number, since every numeric digit thereafter
+     is treated as part of the number, unless it is  preceded  by
+     the literal-next binding. As soon as a non-digit, or literal
+     digit key is pressed the  repeat  count  is  terminated  and
+     either  causes  the  just typed character to be added to the
+     line that many times, or causes the next  key-binding  func-
+     tion to be given that argument.
+
+     For example, in emacs mode, typing:
+
+       M-12a
+
+     causes the letter 'a' to be added  to  the  line  12  times,
+     whereas
+
+       M-4M-c
+
+     Capitalizes the next 4 words.
+
+     In vi command mode the Meta modifier is automatically  added
+     to  all  characters  typed  in,  so  to  enter a count in vi
+     command-mode, just involves typing in the number, just as at
+     it  does in the vi editor itself. So for example, in vi com-
+     mand mode, typing:
+
+       4w2x
+
+     moves the cursor four words to the right, then  deletes  two
+     characters.
+
+     You can also bind digit-argument to other key sequences.  If
+     these  end  in  a numeric digit, that digit gets appended to
+     the current repeat count. If it doesn't  end  in  a  numeric
+     digit,  a  new repeat count is started with a value of zero,
+     and can be completed by typing in the number, after  letting
+     go of the key which triggered the digit-argument action.
+
+
+</pre><h2>THE TECLA CONFIGURATION FILE</h2><pre>
+     By default, the first call to gl_get_line() looks for a file
+     called .teclarc in your home directory (ie. ~/.teclarc).  If
+     it finds this file, it reads it, interpreting each  line  as
+     defining  a  new  key  binding  or  an editing configuration
+     option.  Since  the  emacs  keybindings  are  installed   by
+     default, if you want to use the non-default vi editing mode,
+     the most important item to go in this file is the  following
+     line:
+
+       edit-mode vi
+
+     This will re-configure the default bindings for vi-mode. The
+     complete set of arguments that this command accepts are:
+
+       vi     -  Install key-bindings like those of the vi
+                 editor.
+       emacs  -  Install key-bindings like those of the emacs
+                 editor. This is the default.
+       none   -  Use just the native line editing facilities
+                 provided by the terminal driver.
+
+     To prevent the terminal bell from being rung, such  as  when
+     an unrecognized control-sequence is typed, place the follow-
+     ing line in the configuration file:
+
+       nobeep
+
+     An example of a key binding line in the  configuration  file
+     is the following.
+
+       bind M-[2~ insert-mode
+
+     On many keyboards, the above key sequence is generated  when
+     one presses the insert key, so with this keybinding, one can
+     toggle between the emacs-mode insert and overwrite modes  by
+     hitting  one  key.  One  could  also do it by typing out the
+     above sequence of characters one by one. As explained above,
+     the M- part of this sequence can be typed either by pressing
+     the escape key before the following key, or by pressing  the
+     Meta  key at the same time as the following key. Thus if you
+     had set the above key binding, and the insert  key  on  your
+     keyboard  didn't  generate the above key sequence, you could
+     still type it in either of the following 2 ways.
+
+       1. Hit the escape key momentarily, then press '[', then '2', then
+          finally '~'.
+
+       2. Press the meta key at the same time as pressing the '[' key,
+          then press '2', then '~'.
+
+     If you set a keybinding for a key-sequence that  is  already
+     bound  to a function, the new binding overrides the old one.
+     If in the new binding you omit the name of the new  function
+     to  bind  to  the key-sequence, the original binding becomes
+     undefined.
+
+     Starting with versions of libtecla later than  1.3.3  it  is
+     now  possible  to bind keysequences that begin with a print-
+     able character. Previously key-sequences  were  required  to
+     start with a control or meta character.
+
+     Note that the special  keywords  "up",  "down",  "left"  and
+     "right" refer to the arrow keys, and are thus not treated as
+     keysequences. So, for example, to rebind  the  up  and  down
+     arrow  keys  to  use the history search mechanism instead of
+     the simple history recall method, you could place  the  fol-
+     lowing in your configuration file:
+
+       bind up history-search-backwards
+       bind down history-search-backwards
+
+     To unbind an existing binding, you can do this with the bind
+     command  by  omitting  to  name any action to rebind the key
+     sequence to.  For example, by not specifying an action func-
+     tion,  the  following command unbinds the default beginning-
+     of-line action from the ^A key sequence:
+
+       bind ^A
+
+
+</pre><h2>ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION SOURCES</h2><pre>
+     As mentioned above, by default users have the option of con-
+     figuring  the  behavior of gl_get_line() via a configuration
+     file called .teclarc in their  home  directories.  The  fact
+     that  all applications share this same configuration file is
+     both an advantage and a disadvantage.  In most cases  it  is
+     an  advantage, since it encourages uniformity, and frees the
+     user from having to configure each  application  separately.
+     In  some  applications, however, this single means of confi-
+     guration is a problem. This is particularly true of embedded
+     software,  where  there's no filesystem to read a configura-
+     tion file from, and also in applications where  a  radically
+     different  choice  of  keybindings  is  needed  to emulate a
+     legacy keyboard interface.  To cater  for  such  cases,  the
+     following  function  allows the application to control where
+     configuration information is read from.
+
+
+       int gl_configure_getline(GetLine *gl,
+                                const char *app_string,
+                                const char *app_file,
+                                const char *user_file);
+
+
+     It allows the configuration commands that would normally  be
+     read  from  a user's ~/.teclarc file, to be read from any or
+     none of, a string,  an  application  specific  configuration
+     file,  and/or  a  user-specific  configuration file. If this
+     function is called before the first call  to  gl_get_line(),
+     the default behavior of reading ~/.teclarc on the first call
+     to gl_get_line() is disabled, so all configuration  must  be
+     achieved using the configuration sources specified with this
+     function.
+
+     If app_string != NULL, then it is interpreted  as  a  string
+     containing  one  or  more  configuration commands, separated
+     from each other in the string by  embedded  newline  charac-
+     ters. If app_file != NULL then it is interpreted as the full
+     pathname of an application-specific configuration  file.  If
+     user_file  !=  NULL then it is interpreted as the full path-
+     name  of  a  user-specific  configuration  file,   such   as
+     ~/.teclarc. For example, in the following call,
+
+       gl_configure_getline(gl, "edit-mode vi \n nobeep",
+                                "/usr/share/myapp/teclarc",
+                                "~/.teclarc");
+
+     the app_string argument causes the  calling  application  to
+     start  in  vi  edit-mode, instead of the default emacs mode,
+     and turns off the use of the terminal bell by  the  library.
+     It  then attempts to read system-wide configuration commands
+     from an optional file called /usr/share/myapp/teclarc,  then
+     finally  reads  user-specific configuration commands from an
+     optional .teclarc file in the user's  home  directory.  Note
+     that  the  arguments are listed in ascending order of prior-
+     ity, with the contents of app_string being potentially over-
+     riden  by  commands  in  app_file,  and commands in app_file
+     potentially being overriden by commands in user_file.
+     You can call this function as  many  times  as  needed,  the
+     results  being  cumulative,  but  note  that  copies  of any
+     filenames specified via the app_file and user_file arguments
+     are  recorded  internally  for  subsequent  use by the read-
+     init-files key-binding function, so if you plan to call this
+     function  multiple  times, be sure that the last call speci-
+     fies the filenames that  you  want  re-read  when  the  user
+     requests that the configuration files be re-read.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILENAME AND TILDE COMPLETION</h2><pre>
+     With the default key bindings, pressing the  TAB  key  (aka.
+     ^I)  results  in  gl_get_line()  attempting  to complete the
+     incomplete filename that precedes the cursor.  gl_get_line()
+     searches backwards from the cursor, looking for the start of
+     the filename, stopping when it hits either a  space  or  the
+     start  of  the line. If more than one file has the specified
+     prefix, gl_get_line() completes the filename up to the point
+     at  which  the ambiguous matches start to differ, then lists
+     the possible matches.
+
+     In addition to literally  written  filenames,  gl_get_line()
+     can complete files that start with ~/ and ~user/ expressions
+     and that contain $envvar expressions. In particular, if  you
+     hit    TAB   within   an   incomplete   ~user,   expression,
+     gl_get_line() will attempt to complete the username, listing
+     any ambiguous matches.
+
+     The   completion   binding   is   implemented   using    the
+     cpl_word_completions()  function,  which  is  also available
+     separately   to   users   of   this   library.    See    the
+     cpl_word_completions(3) man page for more details.
+
+
+</pre><h2>CUSTOMIZED WORD COMPLETION</h2><pre>
+     If in your application, you would like to have  TAB  comple-
+     tion  complete  other  things  in  addition to or instead of
+     filenames, you can arrange this by registering an  alternate
+     completion   callback   function,   via   a   call   to  the
+     gl_customize_completion() function.
+
+       int gl_customize_completion(GetLine *gl, void *data,
+                                   CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+     The data argument provides a way  for  your  application  to
+     pass  arbitrary,  application-specific  information  to  the
+     callback function. This is passed to the callback every time
+     that it is called. It might for example, point to the symbol
+     table from which possible completions are to be sought.  The
+     match_fn  argument  specifies  the  callback  function to be
+     called.  The  CplMatchFn  function  type   is   defined   in
+     libtecla.h, as is a CPL_MATCH_FN() macro that you can use to
+     declare and prototype callback  functions.  The  declaration
+     and  responsibilities of callback functions are described in
+     depth in the <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a> man page.
+
+     In brief, the callback function is responsible  for  looking
+     backwards  in  the  input line, back from the point at which
+     the user pressed TAB, to find the start of  the  word  being
+     completed.  It then must lookup possible completions of this
+     word, and record them  one  by  one  in  the  WordCompletion
+     object  that  is passed to it as an argument, by calling the
+     cpl_add_completion()  function.  If  the  callback  function
+     wishes to provide filename completion in addition to its own
+     specific completions, it has the option  of  itself  calling
+     the  builtin  file-name  completion  callback. This also, is
+     documented in the <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a> man page.
+
+     Note that if you would  like  gl_get_line()  to  return  the
+     current  input  line  when  a  successful completion is been
+     made,   you    can    arrange    this    when    you    call
+     cpl_add_completion(),  by  making  the last character of the
+     continuation suffix a newline character. If you do this, the
+     input  line  will  be  updated  to  display  the completion,
+     together with any contiuation suffix up to the newline char-
+     acter, then gl_get_line() will return this input line.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILENAME EXPANSION</h2><pre>
+     With  the  default  key  bindings,   pressing   ^X*   causes
+     gl_get_line()  to expand the filename that precedes the cur-
+     sor,  replacing  ~/  and   ~user/   expressions   with   the
+     corresponding   home   directories,  and  replacing  $envvar
+     expressions with the  value  of  the  specified  environment
+     variable,  then if there are any wildcards, replacing the so
+     far expanded filename with a  space-separated  list  of  the
+     files which match the wild cards.
+
+     The   expansion   binding   is   implemented    using    the
+     ef_expand_file()  function.   See  the <a href="ef_expand_file.html">ef_expand_file(3)</a> man
+     page for more details.
+
+
+</pre><h2>RECALLING PREVIOUSLY TYPED LINES</h2><pre>
+     Every time that a new line is entered by  the  user,  it  is
+     appended  to  a  list  of  historical input lines maintained
+     within the GetLine resource object. You can traverse up  and
+     down  this  list  using the up and down arrow keys. Alterna-
+     tively, you can do the same with the ^P, and ^N keys, and in
+     vi  command mode you can alternatively use the k and j char-
+     acters. Thus pressing up-arrow once,  replaces  the  current
+     input  line  with  the previously entered line. Pressing up-
+     arrow again, replaces this with the line  that  was  entered
+     before it, etc.. Having gone back one or more lines into the
+     history list, one can return  to  newer  lines  by  pressing
+     down-arrow  one  or  more  times.  If you do this sufficient
+     times, you will return to the original line  that  you  were
+     entering when you first hit up-arrow.
+
+     Note that in vi mode, all of the  history  recall  functions
+     switch the library into command mode.
+
+     In emacs mode the M-p and M-n keys work just like the ^P and
+     ^N  keys,  except  that  they  skip all but those historical
+     lines which share the prefix that precedes the cursor. In vi
+     command  mode  the upper case K and J characters do the same
+     thing, except that the string that they search for  includes
+     the character under the cursor as well as what precedes it.
+
+     Thus for example, suppose that you were in emacs  mode,  and
+     you  had  just entered the following list of commands in the
+     order shown:
+
+       ls ~/tecla/
+       cd ~/tecla
+       ls -l getline.c
+       emacs ~/tecla/getline.c
+
+     If you next typed:
+
+       ls
+
+     and then hit M-p, then rather than returning the  previously
+     typed   emacs   line,   which   doesn't   start  with  "ls",
+     gl_get_line() would  recall  the  "ls  -l  getline.c"  line.
+     Pressing M-p again would recall the "ls ~/tecla/" line.
+
+
+</pre><h2>HISTORY FILES</h2><pre>
+     To save the contents of the history buffer  before  quitting
+     your  application,  and  subsequently  restore them when you
+     next start the application, the following functions are pro-
+     vided.
+
+
+      int gl_save_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                          const char *comment, int max_lines);
+      int gl_load_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                          const char *comment);
+
+
+     The filename argument specifies the name to give the history
+     file  when  saving, or the name of an existing history file,
+     when loading. This may contain home-directory  and  environ-
+     ment  variable  expressions,  such  as "~/.myapp_history" or
+     "$HOME/.myapp_history".
+     Along with each history line, extra  information  about  it,
+     such  as when it was entered by the user, and what its nest-
+     ing level is, is recorded as a comment preceding the line in
+     the  history file. Writing this as a comment allows the his-
+     tory file to double as a command file, just in case you wish
+     to  replay  a whole session using it. Since comment prefixes
+     differ in different languages, the comment argument is  pro-
+     vided  for  specifying  the  comment prefix. For example, if
+     your application were a  unix  shell,  such  as  the  bourne
+     shell,  you  would specify "#" here. Whatever you choose for
+     the comment character, you must specify the same  prefix  to
+     gl_load_history()    that   you   used   when   you   called
+     gl_save_history() to write the history file.
+
+     The max_lines must be either -1 to specify that all lines in
+     the history list be saved, or a positive number specifying a
+     ceiling on how many of  the  most  recent  lines  should  be
+     saved.
+
+     Both fuctions return non-zero on  error,  after  writing  an
+     error  message  to  stderr. Note that gl_load_history() does
+     not consider the non-existence of a file to be an error.
+
+
+</pre><h2>MULTIPLE HISTORY LISTS</h2><pre>
+     If your application uses a single GetLine object for  enter-
+     ing  many  different  types  of  input  lines,  you may wish
+     gl_get_line() to distinguish the different types of lines in
+     the  history  list,  and  only  recall  lines that match the
+     current  type  of  line.  To   support   this   requirement,
+     gl_get_line() marks lines being recorded in the history list
+     with an integer identifier chosen by the application.   Ini-
+     tially  this identifier is set to 0 by new_GetLine(), but it
+     can be changed subsequently by calling gl_group_history().
+
+
+       int gl_group_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned id);
+
+
+     The integer identifier id can be any number  chosen  by  the
+     application,    but    note   that   gl_save_history()   and
+     gl_load_history() preserve the association between  identif-
+     iers and historical input lines between program invokations,
+     so you should choose fixed  identifiers  for  the  different
+     types of input line used by your application.
+
+     Whenever gl_get_line() appends a new input line to the  his-
+     tory  list,  the current history identifier is recorded with
+     it, and when it is asked to recall a historical input  line,
+     it only recalls lines that are marked with the current iden-
+     tifier.
+
+</pre><h2>DISPLAYING HISTORY</h2><pre>
+     The   history   list   can   be   displayed    by    calling
+     gl_show_history().
+
+
+       int gl_show_history(GetLine *gl, FILE *fp,
+                           const char *fmt,
+                           int all_groups,
+                           int max_lines);
+
+
+     This displays the current contents of the  history  list  to
+     the  stdio  output  stream  fp. If the max_lines argument is
+     greater than or equal to zero, then no more than this number
+     of   the  most  recent  lines  will  be  displayed.  If  the
+     all_groups argument is  non-zero,  lines  from  all  history
+     groups  are displayed. Otherwise just those of the currently
+     selected history group  are  displayed.  The  format  string
+     argument,  fmt,  determines  how the line is displayed. This
+     can contain arbitrary characters which are written verbatim,
+     interleaved with any of the following format directives:
+
+       %D  -  The date on which the line was originally
+              entered, formatted like 2001-11-20.
+       %T  -  The time of day when the line was entered,
+              formatted like 23:59:59.
+       %N  -  The sequential entry number of the line in
+              the history buffer.
+       %G  -  The number of the history group which the
+              line belongs to.
+       %%  -  A literal % character.
+       %H  -  The history line itself.
+
+     Thus a format string like "%D %T  %H0 would output something
+     like:
+
+       2001-11-20 10:23:34  Hello world
+
+     Note the inclusion of an explicit newline character  in  the
+     format string.
+
+
+</pre><h2>LOOKING UP HISTORY</h2><pre>
+     The gl_lookup_history() function allows the calling applica-
+     tion to look up lines in the history list.
+
+
+       typedef struct {
+         const char *line;    /* The requested historical */
+                              /*  line. */
+         unsigned group;      /* The history group to which */
+                              /*  the line belongs. */
+         time_t timestamp;    /* The date and time at which */
+                              /*  the line was originally */
+                              /*  entered. */
+       } GlHistoryLine;
+
+       int gl_lookup_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned long id,
+                             GlHistoryLine *hline);
+
+
+     The id argument indicates which line to look up,  where  the
+     first  line  that  was  entered  in  the  history list after
+     new_GetLine() was called, is denoted by 0, and  subsequently
+     entered  lines are denoted with successively higher numbers.
+     Note that the range of lines currently preserved in the his-
+     tory    list    can    be    queried    by    calling    the
+     gl_range_of_history()  function,  described  later.  If  the
+     requested  line  is  in the history list, the details of the
+     line are recorded in the variable pointed to  by  the  hline
+     argument,  and  1  is returned. Otherwise 0 is returned, and
+     the variable pointed to by hline is left unchanged.
+
+     Beware that the string returned in hline-&gt;line  is  part  of
+     the  history  buffer,  so  it  must  not  be modified by the
+     caller, and will be recycled on the next call to  any  func-
+     tion  that  takes  gl  as its argument. Therefore you should
+     make a private copy of this string if you need  to  keep  it
+     around.
+
+
+</pre><h2>MISCELLANEOUS HISTORY CONFIGURATION</h2><pre>
+     If you wish to change the size of the  history  buffer  that
+     was  originally  specified in the call to new_GetLine(), you
+     can do so with the gl_resize_history() function.
+
+
+       int gl_resize_history(GetLine *gl, size_t histlen);
+
+
+     The histlen argument specifies the new size in bytes, and if
+     you specify this as 0, the buffer will be deleted.
+
+     As mentioned in the discussion of new_GetLine(), the  number
+     of  lines  that can be stored in the history buffer, depends
+     on the lengths of the individual lines. For example, a  1000
+     byte  buffer  could equally store 10 lines of average length
+     100 bytes, or 2 lines of average length 50  bytes.  Although
+     the  buffer  is  never  expanded when new lines are added, a
+     list of pointers into the  buffer  does  get  expanded  when
+     needed to accomodate the number of lines currently stored in
+     the buffer. To place an upper limit on the number  of  lines
+     in  the  buffer,  and thus a ceiling on the amount of memory
+     used in this  list,  you  can  call  the  gl_limit_history()
+     function.
+
+
+       void gl_limit_history(GetLine *gl, int max_lines);
+
+
+     The max_lines should either  be  a  positive  number  &gt;=  0,
+     specifying  an  upper  limit  on  the number of lines in the
+     buffer, or be -1 to cancel any previously  specified  limit.
+     When  a limit is in effect, only the max_lines most recently
+     appended lines are kept in the buffer. Older lines are  dis-
+     carded.
+
+     To  discard  lines  from  the  history   buffer,   use   the
+     gl_clear_history() function.
+
+       void gl_clear_history(GetLine *gl, int all_groups);
+
+     The all_groups argument tells the function whether to delete
+     just  the  lines  associated  with the current history group
+     (see gl_group_history()), or all  historical  lines  in  the
+     buffer.
+
+     The gl_toggle_history() function allows you to  toggle  his-
+     tory  on  and off without losing the current contents of the
+     history list.
+
+
+       void gl_toggle_history(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+
+     Setting the enable argument  to  0  turns  off  the  history
+     mechanism,  and  setting it to 1 turns it back on. When his-
+     tory is turned off, no new lines will be added to  the  his-
+     tory  list,  and  history  lookup  key-bindings  will act as
+     though there is nothing in the history buffer.
+
+
+</pre><h2>QUERYING HISTORY INFORMATION</h2><pre>
+     The configured state of the history list can be queried with
+     the gl_history_state() function.
+
+
+       typedef struct {
+         int enabled;     /* True if history is enabled */
+         unsigned group;  /* The current history group */
+         int max_lines;   /* The current upper limit on the */
+                          /*  number of lines in the history */
+                          /*  list, or -1 if unlimited. */
+       } GlHistoryState;
+
+       void gl_state_of_history(GetLine *gl,
+                                GlHistoryState *state);
+
+     On return, the status information is recorded in  the  vari-
+     able pointed to by the state argument.
+
+     The gl_range_of_history() function returns  the  number  and
+     range of lines in the history list.
+
+
+     typedef struct {
+       unsigned long oldest;  /* The sequential entry number */
+                              /*  of the oldest line in the */
+                              /*  history list. */
+       unsigned long newest;  /* The sequential entry number */
+                              /*  of the newest line in the */
+                              /*  history list. */
+       int nlines;            /* The number of lines in the */
+                              /*  history list. */
+     } GlHistoryRange;
+
+     void gl_range_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistoryRange *range);
+
+     The return values are recorded in the variable pointed to by
+     the  range  argument. If the nlines member of this structure
+     is greater than zero, then the  oldest  and  newest  members
+     report    the    range   of   lines   in   the   list,   and
+     newest=oldest+nlines-1.  Otherwise they are both zero.
+
+     The gl_size_of_history() function returns the total size  of
+     the  history  buffer  and  the  amount of the buffer that is
+     currently occupied.
+
+       typedef struct {
+         size_t size;      /* The size of the history buffer */
+                           /*  (bytes). */
+         size_t used;      /* The number of bytes of the */
+                           /*  history buffer that are */
+                           /*  currently occupied. */
+       } GlHistorySize;
+
+       void gl_size_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistorySize *size);
+
+     On return, the size information is recorded in the  variable
+     pointed to by the size argument.
+
+
+</pre><h2>CHANGING TERMINALS</h2><pre>
+     The new_GetLine() constructor function assumes that input is
+     to  be  read  from  stdin, and output written to stdout. The
+     following function allows you to switch to  different  input
+     and output streams.
+
+       int gl_change_terminal(GetLine *gl, FILE *input_fp,
+                              FILE *output_fp, const char *term);
+
+     The  gl  argument  is  the  object  that  was  returned   by
+     new_GetLine().   The  input_fp argument specifies the stream
+     to read from, and output_fp specifies the stream to be writ-
+     ten  to.  Only  if  both  of these refer to a terminal, will
+     interactive   terminal   input   be   enabled.     Otherwise
+     gl_get_line()  will  simply  call  fgets()  to  read command
+     input. If both streams refer to a terminal, then  they  must
+     refer  to  the  same terminal, and the type of this terminal
+     must be specified via the term argument. The  value  of  the
+     term argument is looked up in the terminal information data-
+     base (terminfo or termcap), in order to determine which spe-
+     cial control sequences are needed to control various aspects
+     of the  terminal.  new_GetLine()  for  example,  passes  the
+     return  value  of getenv("TERM") in this argument. Note that
+     if one or both of input_fp and output_fp don't  refer  to  a
+     terminal,  then it is legal to pass NULL instead of a termi-
+     nal type.
+
+     Note  that  if  you  want  to  pass  file   descriptors   to
+     gl_change_terminal(),  you  can  do  this  by creating stdio
+     stream wrappers using the POSIX fdopen() function.
+
+
+</pre><h2>EXTERNAL EVENT HANDLING</h2><pre>
+     While gl_get_line() is waiting for keyboard input  from  the
+     user, you can ask it to also watch for activity on arbitrary
+     file descriptors, such as network sockets,  pipes  etc,  and
+     have  it  call  functions  of your choosing when activity is
+     seen. This works on any system that has the select()  system
+     call, which is most, if not all flavors of unix. Registering
+     a file descriptor to be watched  by  gl_get_line()  involves
+     calling the gl_watch_fd() function.
+
+
+       int gl_watch_fd(GetLine *gl, int fd, GlFdEvent event,
+                       GlFdEventFn *callback, void *data);
+
+
+     If this returns non-zero, then it  means  that  either  your
+     arguments are invalid, or that this facility isn't supported
+     on the host system.
+
+     The fd argument is the file descriptor to  be  watched.  The
+     event  argument  specifies  what  type  of  activity  is  of
+     interest, chosen from the following enumerated values:
+
+
+       GLFD_READ   -  Watch for the arrival of data to be read.
+       GLFD_WRITE  -  Watch for the ability to write to the file
+                      descriptor without blocking.
+       GLFD_URGENT -  Watch for the arrival of urgent
+                      out-of-band data on the file descriptor.
+
+
+     The callback argument is  the  function  to  call  when  the
+     selected  activity  is  seen.  It should be defined with the
+     following macro, which is defined in libtecla.h.
+
+
+       #define GL_FD_EVENT_FN(fn) GlFdStatus (fn)(GetLine *gl, \
+                                           void *data, int fd, \
+                                           GlFdEvent event)
+
+     The data argument of the gl_watch_fd() function is passed to
+     the callback function for its own use, and can point to any-
+     thing you like, including NULL. The file descriptor and  the
+     event argument are also passed to the callback function, and
+     this potentially allows the same  callback  function  to  be
+     registered  to  more than one type of event and/or more than
+     one file descriptor. The return value of the callback  func-
+     tion should be one of the following values.
+
+
+       GLFD_ABORT    -  Tell gl_get_line() to abort with an
+                        error (errno won't be set, so set it
+                        appropriately yourself if you need it).
+       GLFD_REFRESH  -  Redraw the input line then continue
+                        waiting for input. Return this if
+                        your callback wrote to the terminal.
+       GLFD_CONTINUE -  Continue to wait for input, without
+                        redrawing the line.
+
+     Note that before calling the callback, gl_get_line()  blocks
+     most  signals, and leaves its own signal handlers installed,
+     so if you need to catch a particular signal you will need to
+     both  temporarily  install  your  own  signal  handler,  and
+     unblock the signal. Be sure to re-block the  signal  (if  it
+     was  originally  blocked)  and reinstate the original signal
+     handler, if any, before returning.
+
+     Your callback shouldn't try to read from the terminal, which
+     is  left  in  raw mode as far as input is concerned. You can
+     however write to the terminal as usual, since features  like
+     conversion  of  newline  to carriage-return/linefeed are re-
+     enabled while the callback  is  running.  If  your  callback
+     function  does  write  to  the terminal, be sure to output a
+     newline  first,  and  when  your  callback   returns,   tell
+     gl_get_line()  that  the  input line needs to be redrawn, by
+     returning the GLFD_REFRESH status code.
+
+     To remove a callback function that you previously registered
+     for   a   given  file  descriptor  and  event,  simply  call
+     gl_watch_fd() with the same file descriptor and event  argu-
+     ments,  but with a callback argument of 0. The data argument
+     is ignored in this case.
+
+
+</pre><h2>SIGNAL HANDLING DEFAULTS</h2><pre>
+     By default, the gl_get_line() function intercepts  a  number
+     of signals. This is particularly important for signals which
+     would by default terminate the process, since  the  terminal
+     needs  to be restored to a usable state before this happens.
+     In this section, the signals that are  trapped  by  default,
+     and how gl_get_line() responds to them, is described. Chang-
+     ing these defaults is the topic of the following section.
+
+     When  the  following   subset   of   signals   are   caught,
+     gl_get_line()  first restores the terminal settings and sig-
+     nal handling to  how  they  were  before  gl_get_line()  was
+     called,   resends   the   signal,   to   allow  the  calling
+     application's signal handlers to handle it, then if the pro-
+     cess still exists, gl_get_line() returns NULL and sets errno
+     as specified below.
+
+
+      SIGINT  -  This signal is generated both by the keyboard
+                 interrupt key (usually ^C), and the keyboard
+                 break key.
+
+                 errno=EINTR
+
+      SIGHUP  -  This signal is generated when the controlling
+                 terminal exits.
+
+                 errno=ENOTTY
+
+      SIGPIPE -  This signal is generated when a program attempts
+                 to write to a pipe who's remote end isn't being
+                 read by any process. This can happen for example
+                 if you have called gl_change_terminal() to
+                 redirect output to a pipe hidden under a pseudo
+                 terminal.
+
+                 errno=EPIPE
+
+      SIGQUIT -  This signal is generated by the keyboard quit
+                 key (usually ^\).
+
+                 errno=EINTR
+
+      SIGABRT -  This signal is generated by the standard C,
+                 abort() function. By default it both
+                 terminates the process and generates a core
+                 dump.
+
+                 errno=EINTR
+
+      SIGTERM -  This is the default signal that the UN*X
+                 kill command sends to processes.
+
+                 errno=EINTR
+
+     Note that in the case of all of  the  above  signals,  POSIX
+     mandates that by default the process is terminated, with the
+     addition of a core dump in the case of the  SIGQUIT  signal.
+     In  other words, if the calling application doesn't override
+     the default handler by supplying  its  own  signal  handler,
+     receipt  of  the  corresponding  signal  will  terminate the
+     application before gl_get_line() returns.
+
+     If gl_get_line() aborts with errno set  to  EINTR,  you  can
+     find out what signal caused it to abort, by calling the fol-
+     lowing function.
+
+       int gl_last_signal(const GetLine *gl);
+
+     This returns the numeric code (eg. SIGINT) of the last  sig-
+     nal  that  was  received  during  the  most  recent  call to
+     gl_get_line(), or -1 if no signals were received.
+
+     On systems that support it, when a SIGWINCH (window  change)
+     signal  is  received,  gl_get_line() queries the terminal to
+     find out its new size, redraws the  current  input  line  to
+     accomodate  the  new  size, then returns to waiting for key-
+     board input from the user. Unlike other signals, this signal
+     isn't resent to the application.
+
+     Finally, the following signals cause gl_get_line() to  first
+     restore  the  terminal  and signal environment to that which
+     prevailed before gl_get_line() was called, then  resend  the
+     signal to the application. If the process still exists after
+     the signal has been delivered, then gl_get_line()  then  re-
+     establishes  its  own signal handlers, switches the terminal
+     back to raw mode, redisplays the input line, and  goes  back
+     to awaiting terminal input from the user.
+
+      SIGCONT    -  This signal is generated when a suspended
+                    process is resumed.
+
+      SIGPWR     -  This signal is generated when a power failure
+                    occurs (presumably when the system is on a
+                    UPS).
+
+      SIGALRM    -  This signal is generated when a timer
+                    expires.
+      SIGUSR1    -  An application specific signal.
+
+      SIGUSR2    -  Another application specific signal.
+
+      SIGVTALRM  -  This signal is generated when a virtual
+                    timer expires (see man setitimer(2)).
+
+      SIGXCPU    -  This signal is generated when a process
+                    exceeds its soft CPU time limit.
+
+      SIGTSTP    -  This signal is generated by the terminal
+                    suspend key, which is usually ^Z, or the
+                    delayed terminal suspend key, which is
+                    usually ^Y.
+
+      SIGTTIN    -  This signal is generated if the program
+                    attempts to read from the terminal while the
+                    program is running in the background.
+
+      SIGTTOU    -  This signal is generated if the program
+                    attempts to write to the terminal while the
+                    program is running in the background.
+
+
+     Obviously not all of the above signals are supported on  all
+     systems,  so  code to support them is conditionally compiled
+     into the tecla library.
+
+     Note that if SIGKILL, which by definition can't  be  caught,
+     or  any of the hardware generated exception signals, such as
+     SIGSEGV, SIGBUS and SIGFPE, are received and unhandled while
+     gl_get_line() has the terminal in raw mode, the program will
+     be terminated without the terminal having been restored to a
+     usable  state. In practice, job-control shells usually reset
+     the terminal settings when a process relinquishes  the  con-
+     trolling  terminal,  so  this  is  only a problem with older
+     shells.
+
+
+</pre><h2>CUSTOMIZED SIGNAL HANDLING</h2><pre>
+     The previous section listed the signals  that  gl_get_line()
+     traps  by  default,  and  described how it responds to them.
+     This section describes how to both add  and  remove  signals
+     from  the  list  of  trapped signals, and how to specify how
+     gl_get_line() should respond to a given signal.
+
+     If you don't need gl_get_line() to do anything  in  response
+     to  a  signal  that  it  normally  traps,  you  can  tell to
+     gl_get_line()   to   ignore   that   signal    by    calling
+     gl_ignore_signal().
+
+       int gl_ignore_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo);
+     The signo argument is the number of the signal (eg.  SIGINT)
+     that you want to have ignored. If the specified signal isn't
+     currently one of those being  trapped,  this  function  does
+     nothing.
+
+     The gl_trap_signal() function allows you to either add a new
+     signal  to  the list that gl_get_line() traps, or modify how
+     it responds to a signal that it already traps.
+
+       int gl_trap_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo, unsigned flags,
+                          GlAfterSignal after, int errno_value);
+
+     The signo argument is the number of the signal that you wish
+     to  have trapped. The flags argument is a set of flags which
+     determine the environment in which the application's  signal
+     handler  is  invoked, the after argument tells gl_get_line()
+     what to do after the application's signal  handler  returns,
+     and  errno_value tells gl_get_line() what to set errno to if
+     told to abort.
+
+     The flags argument is a bitwise OR of zero or  more  of  the
+     following enumerators:
+
+       GLS_RESTORE_SIG  -  Restore the caller's signal
+                           environment while handling the
+                           signal.
+
+       GLS_RESTORE_TTY  -  Restore the caller's terminal settings
+                           while handling the signal.
+
+       GLS_RESTORE_LINE -  Move the cursor to the start of the
+                           line following the input line before
+                           invoking the application's signal
+                           handler.
+
+       GLS_REDRAW_LINE  -  Redraw the input line when the
+                           application's signal handler returns.
+
+       GLS_UNBLOCK_SIG  -  Normally, if the calling program has
+                           a signal blocked (man sigprocmask),
+                           gl_get_line() does not trap that
+                           signal. This flag tells gl_get_line()
+                           to trap the signal and unblock it for
+                           the duration of the call to
+                           gl_get_line().
+
+       GLS_DONT_FORWARD -  If this flag is included, the signal
+                           will not be forwarded to the signal
+                           handler of the calling program.
+
+     Two commonly useful flag combinations are also enumerated as
+     follows:
+       GLS_RESTORE_ENV   = GLS_RESTORE_SIG | GLS_RESTORE_TTY |
+                           GLS_REDRAW_LINE
+
+       GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT = GLS_RESTORE_ENV | GLS_RESTORE_LINE
+
+
+     If your signal handler, or the default system signal handler
+     for  this  signal, if you haven't overriden it, never either
+     writes to the terminal, nor suspends or terminates the  cal-
+     ling  program, then you can safely set the flags argument to
+     0.
+
+     If your signal handler always writes to the terminal,  reads
+     from  it,  or suspends or terminates the program, you should
+     specify the flags argument as GL_SUSPEND_INPUT, so that:
+
+     1. The cursor doesn't get left in the middle of the input
+        line.
+     2. So that the user can type in input and have it echoed.
+     3. So that you don't need to end each output line with
+        \r\n, instead of just \n.
+
+     The   GL_RESTORE_ENV   combination   is    the    same    as
+     GL_SUSPEND_INPUT,  except  that  it doesn't move the cursor,
+     and if your signal handler doesn't read or write anything to
+     the terminal, the user won't see any visible indication that
+     a signal was caught. This can be useful if you have a signal
+     handler that only occasionally writes to the terminal, where
+     using GL_SUSPEND_LINE would  cause  the  input  line  to  be
+     unnecessarily  duplicated  when  nothing had been written to
+     the terminal.  Such a signal handler, when it does write  to
+     the  terminal,  should  be  sure  to start a new line at the
+     start of its first write,  by  writing  a  new  line  before
+     returning.  If the signal arrives while the user is entering
+     a line that only occupies a signal terminal line, or if  the
+     cursor  is on the last terminal line of a longer input line,
+     this will have the same effect as  GL_SUSPEND_INPUT.  Other-
+     wise  it  will start writing on a line that already contains
+     part of the displayed input line.  This doesn't do any harm,
+     but  it  looks a bit ugly, which is why the GL_SUSPEND_INPUT
+     combination is better if you know that you are always  going
+     to be writting to the terminal.
+
+     The after argument, which determines what gl_get_line() does
+     after  the  application's  signal  handler  returns  (if  it
+     returns), can take any one of the following values:
+
+       GLS_RETURN   - Return the completed input line, just as
+                      though the user had pressed the return
+                      key.
+
+       GLS_ABORT    - Cause gl_get_line() to return NULL.
+       GLS_CONTINUE - Resume command line editing.
+
+     The errno_value argument is intended to be combined with the
+     GLS_ABORT  option,  telling  gl_get_line()  what  to set the
+     standard errno variable to before returning NULL to the cal-
+     ling  program.  It  can  also,  however,  be  used  with the
+     GL_RETURN option, in case you wish to have a way to  distin-
+     guish  between  an  input  line  that  was entered using the
+     return key, and one that was entered by  the  receipt  of  a
+     signal.
+
+
+</pre><h2>THE TERMINAL SIZE</h2><pre>
+     On most systems the combination of the TIOCGWINSZ ioctl  and
+     the  SIGWINCH signal is used to maintain an accurate idea of
+     the terminal size. The terminal size is newly queried  every
+     time  that  gl_get_line()  is called and whenever a SIGWINCH
+     signal is received.
+
+     On the few systems where this mechanism isn't available,  at
+     startup  new_GetLine() first looks for the LINES and COLUMNS
+     environment variables.  If these aren't found, or they  con-
+     tain  unusable  values, then if a terminal information data-
+     base like terminfo or termcap is available, the default size
+     of  the  terminal is looked up in this database. If this too
+     fails to provide the terminal size, a  default  size  of  80
+     columns by 24 lines is used. If this default isn't appropri-
+     ate for your system, gl_terminal_size() can be used to  sup-
+     ply a different fallback.
+
+     The gl_terminal_size() function  allows  you  to  query  the
+     current size of the terminal, and install an alternate fall-
+     back size for cases where the size isn't available.   Beware
+     that  the terminal size won't be available if reading from a
+     pipe or a file, so the default values can be important  even
+     on  systems that do support ways of finding out the terminal
+     size.
+
+       typedef struct {
+         int nline;        /* The terminal has nline lines */
+         int ncolumn;      /* The terminal has ncolumn columns */
+       } GlTerminalSize;
+
+       GlTerminalSize gl_terminal_size(GetLine *gl,
+                                       int def_ncolumn,
+                                       int def_nline);
+
+     This function first updates gl_get_line()'s idea of the ter-
+     minal size, then records its findings in the return value.
+
+     The def_ncolumn and def_nline specify the default number  of
+     terminal columns and lines to use if the terminal size can't
+     be determined.
+
+
+</pre><h2>HIDING WHAT YOU TYPE</h2><pre>
+     When entering sensitive information, such as  passwords,  it
+     is best not to have the text that you are entering echoed on
+     the terminal.  Furthermore, such text should not be recorded
+     in  the  history  list, since somebody finding your terminal
+     unattended  could  then  recall  it,  or  somebody  snooping
+     through  your directories could see it in your history file.
+     With this in mind, the gl_echo_mode() function allows you to
+     toggle  on and off the display and archival of any text that
+     is subsequently entered in calls to gl_get_line().
+
+
+       int gl_echo_mode(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+
+     The enable argument specifies whether entered text should be
+     visible  or not. If it is 0, then subsequently entered lines
+     will not be  visible  on  the  terminal,  and  will  not  be
+     recorded  in  the  history list. If it is 1, then subsequent
+     input lines will be displayed as they are entered, and  pro-
+     vided  that  history  hasn't  been  turned off via a call to
+     gl_toggle_history(), then they will also be archived in  the
+     history  list.  Finally,  if the enable argument is -1, then
+     the echoing mode is left  unchanged,  which  allows  you  to
+     non-destructively  query  the current setting via the return
+     value. In all cases, the return value of the function  is  0
+     if  echoing was disabled before the function was called, and
+     1 if it was enabled.
+
+     When echoing is turned off, note that although  tab  comple-
+     tion will invisibly complete your prefix as far as possible,
+     ambiguous completions will not be displayed.
+
+
+</pre><h2>CALLBACK FUNCTION FACILITIES</h2><pre>
+     Unless otherwise stated, callback  functions,  such  as  tab
+     completion callbacks and event callbacks should not call any
+     functions in this module. The following functions,  however,
+     are designed specifically to be used by callback functions.
+
+     Calling the gl_replace_prompt()  function  from  a  callback
+     tells  gl_get_line()  to display a different prompt when the
+     callback  returns.  It  has  no  effect   if   called   when
+     gl_get_line() is not being called.
+
+       void gl_replace_prompt(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt);
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SETS</h2><pre>
+     Since libtecla version 1.4.0, gl_get_line() has  been  8-bit
+     clean.  This means that all 8-bit characters that are print-
+     able in the user's current locale are now displayed verbatim
+     and  included in the returned input line.  Assuming that the
+     calling program correctly contains a call like  the  follow-
+     ing,
+
+       setlocale(LC_CTYPE, "");
+
+     then the current locale is determined by the  first  of  the
+     environment  variables  LC_CTYPE,  LC_ALL, and LANG, that is
+     found to contain a valid locale name. If none of these vari-
+     ables  are  defined,  or the program neglects to call setlo-
+     cale, then the default C locale is used, which is  US  7-bit
+     ASCII.  On  most  unix-like platforms, you can get a list of
+     valid locales by typing the command:
+
+       locale -a
+
+     at the shell prompt.
+
+
+</pre><h2>  Meta keys and locales</h2><pre>
+     Beware that in most locales other than the default C locale,
+     meta  characters  become  printable,  and  they  are then no
+     longer considered to match  M-c  style  key  bindings.  This
+     allows  international characters to be entered with the com-
+     pose key without unexpectedly triggering meta key  bindings.
+     You can still invoke meta bindings, since there are actually
+     two ways to do this. For example the binding M-c can also be
+     invoked  by pressing the escape key momentarily, then press-
+     ing the c key, and this  will  work  regardless  of  locale.
+     Moreover,  many  modern  terminal emulators, such as gnome's
+     gnome-terminal's and KDE's konsole terminals,  already  gen-
+     erate  escape  pairs  like  this  when you use the meta key,
+     rather than a real meta character, and other emulators  usu-
+     ally  have  a  way to request this behavior, so you can con-
+     tinue to use the meta key on most systems.
+
+     For example, although xterm terminal emulators generate real
+     8-bit  meta characters by default when you use the meta key,
+     they can be configured to output the equivalent escape  pair
+     by  setting their EightBitInput X resource to False. You can
+     either do this by placing a line like the following in  your
+     ~/.Xdefaults file,
+
+       XTerm*EightBitInput: False
+
+     or by starting an xterm with an -xrm '*EightBitInput: False'
+     command-line  argument.  In recent versions of xterm you can
+     toggle this feature on and off with the "Meta Sends  Escape"
+     option in the menu that is displayed when you press the left
+     mouse button and the control key within an xterm window.  In
+     CDE,  dtterms  can  be  similarly coerced to generate escape
+     pairs  in  place  of  meta  characters,   by   setting   the
+     Dtterm*KshMode resource to True.
+
+
+</pre><h2>  Entering international characters</h2><pre>
+     If you don't have a  keyboard  that  generates  all  of  the
+     international  characters  that you need, there is usually a
+     compose key that will allow you to enter special characters,
+     or  a  way  to  create  one. For example, under X windows on
+     unix-like systems, if your keyboard doesn't have  a  compose
+     key, you can designate a redundant key to serve this purpose
+     with the xmodmap command. For example, on many PC  keyboards
+     there is a microsoft-windows key, which is otherwise useless
+     under Linux. On my PC the xev program reports that  pressing
+     this  key  generates keycode 115, so to turn this key into a
+     compose key, I do the following:
+
+       xmodmap -e 'keycode 115 = Multi_key'
+
+     I can then enter an i with a umlaut over it by  typing  this
+     key, followed by ", followed by i.
+
+
+</pre><h2>THREAD SAFETY</h2><pre>
+     In a multi-threaded program, you should use the libtecla_r.a
+     version of the library. This uses reentrant versions of sys-
+     tem functions, where available. Unfortunately  neither  ter-
+     minfo  nor  termcap  were  designed  to be reentrant, so you
+     can't safely use the functions of the getline module in mul-
+     tiple  threads  (you can use the separate file-expansion and
+     word-completion  modules  in  multiple  threads,   see   the
+     corresponding man pages for details). However due to the use
+     of POSIX reentrant functions for looking up home directories
+     etc, it is safe to use this module from a single thread of a
+     multi-threaded program, provided  that  your  other  threads
+     don't use any termcap or terminfo functions.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILES</h2><pre>
+     libtecla.a      -    The tecla library
+     libtecla.h      -    The tecla header file.
+     ~/.teclarc      -    The personal tecla customization file.
+
+
+</pre><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><pre>
+     <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a>,    <a href="ef_expand_file.html">ef_expand_file(3)</a>,     <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a>,
+     <a href="pca_lookup_file.html">pca_lookup_file(3)</a>
+
+
+</pre><h2>AUTHOR</h2><pre>
+     Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+</body>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/index.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f75a90f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+<HEAD><TITLE>The tecla command-line editing library.</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY bgcolor=add8e6>
+<H1>The Tecla command-line editing library.</H1>
+
+The tecla library provides UNIX and LINUX programs with interactive
+command line editing facilities, similar to those of the UNIX tcsh
+shell. In addition to simple command-line editing, it supports recall
+of previously entered command lines, TAB completion of file names or
+other tokens, and in-line wild-card expansion of filenames.  The
+internal functions which perform file-name completion and wild-card
+expansion are also available externally for optional use by programs.
+<P>
+In addition, the library includes a path-searching module.  This
+allows an application to provide completion and lookup of files
+located in UNIX style paths. Although not built into the line editor
+by default, it can easily be called from custom tab-completion
+callback functions. This was originally conceived for completing the
+names of executables and providing a way to look up their locations in
+the user's PATH environment variable, but it can easily be asked to
+look up and complete other types of files in any list of directories.
+
+<P>
+Note that special care has been taken to allow the use of this library
+in threaded programs. The option to enable this is discussed in the
+Makefile, and specific discussions of thread safety are presented in
+the included man pages.
+<P>
+The current version is version 1.4.1. This may be obtained from:
+<P>
+  <a href="libtecla-1.4.1.tar.gz">http://www.astro.caltech.edu/~mcs/tecla/libtecla-1.4.1.tar.gz</a>
+<P>
+
+For the sake of automated scripts, the following URL always points to
+the latest version. Note that the version number can be found in the
+README file.
+
+<P>
+  <a href="libtecla.tar.gz">http://www.astro.caltech.edu/~mcs/tecla/libtecla.tar.gz</a>
+<P>
+
+The library is distributed under a permissive non-copyleft
+<a href="LICENSE.TERMS">free software license</a> (the X11 license with
+the name of the copyright holder changed). This is compatible with,
+but not as restrictive as the GNU GPL.
+
+<H2>Release notes</H2>
+
+The list of major changes that accompany each new release can be found
+<a href="release.html">here</a>.
+
+<H2>Modifications</H2>
+
+The gory details of changes in the latest and previous versions of the
+library can be found <a href="changes.html">here</a>.
+
+<H2>Library documentation</H2>
+
+The following are html versions of the libtecla man pages:
+
+<UL>
+<LI>  <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a>           -  An introduction to the tecla library.
+<LI>  <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>        -  The interactive line-input function.
+<LI>  <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a>  -  The word (eg. filename) completion function.
+<LI>  <a href="ef_expand_file.html">ef_expand_file(3)</a>     -  The filename expansion function.
+<LI>  <a href="pca_lookup_file.html">pca_lookup_file(3)</a>     -  A directory-list based filename lookup and completion module.
+<LI>  <a href="enhance.html">enhance(3)</a>     -  A  program that adds command-line editing to third party programs.
+</UL>
+
+<H2>Portability</H2>
+
+In principle, the standard version of the library should compile
+without any problems on any UNIX or UNIX like system. So far it has
+been reported to work on the following systems:
+
+<pre>
+  Sun Solaris 2.5,2.6,7,8, with any of gcc, Sun C, or g++.
+  Mandrake Linux 7.1 etc.., gcc
+  Red Hat Linux 7 etc.., gcc
+  Suse Linux 6.4, gcc
+  IBM AIX 4.3.3, gcc
+  HP-UX 10.20, HP-UX 11, gcc, c89
+  SCO UnixWare 7.1.1
+  FreeBSD, gcc
+  Alpha OSF1, cc, gcc
+  Mac OS X
+  Cygwin (running under Windows)
+  QNX
+</pre>
+
+There haven't been many reports concerning the POSIX reentrant
+version, so the absence of any of the above from the following list of
+systems on which the reentrant version is known to work, shouldn't be
+taken as an indication that the reentrant version doesn't work.
+
+<pre>
+  Sun Solaris 2.5,2.6,7,8, with any of gcc, Sun C, or g++.
+  Mandrake Linux 7.1, gcc
+  RedHat Linux 7.0,7.1, gcc
+  SuSe Linux 6.4, gcc
+  HP-UX 11, gcc
+  IBM AIX 4.3.3, gcc
+  Alpha OSF1, cc
+</pre>
+
+The only system that is known to have issues with the reentrant
+version of the library is SCO UnixWare 7.1.1. The problem is in the
+system provided signal.h, which breaks when POSIX_C_SOURCE is
+defined. It has been reported that this can be fixed by editing
+signal.h.
+
+<P>
+If you compile the library on a system that isn't mentioned above,
+please send E-mail to <b>mcs@astro.caltech.edu</b>.
+<HR>
+Martin Shepherd (25-May-2002)
+</BODY>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/libtecla.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/libtecla.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..914c1e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/libtecla.html
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+<head>
+<title>Manual Page</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+</pre><h2>NAME</h2><pre>
+     libtecla - An interactive command-line input library.
+
+</pre><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><pre>
+     gcc ... -ltecla -lcurses
+
+
+</pre><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><pre>
+     The tecla library provides programs with interactive command
+     line  editing  facilities, similar to those of the unix tcsh
+     shell. In addition to simple command-line editing,  it  sup-
+     ports  recall  of previously entered command lines, TAB com-
+     pletion of file names or other tokens, and in-line wild-card
+     expansion of filenames. The internal functions which perform
+     file-name completion and wild-card expansion are also avail-
+     able externally for optional use by the calling program.
+
+     The various parts of the library are documented in the  fol-
+     lowing man pages:
+
+       <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>        -  The interactive line-input module.
+       <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a>  -  The word completion module.
+       <a href="ef_expand_file.html">ef_expand_file(3)</a>     -  The filename expansion module.
+       <a href="pca_lookup_file.html">pca_lookup_file(3)</a>    -  A directory-list based filename
+                                lookup and completion module.
+
+     In addition there is one  optional  application  distributed
+     with the library:
+
+       <a href="enhance.html">enhance(3)</a>            -  Add command-line editing to third
+                                party applications.
+
+
+</pre><h2>THREAD SAFETY</h2><pre>
+     If the library is compiled  with  -D_POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L,
+     reentrant  versions  of  as  many  functions as possible are
+     used. This  includes  using  getpwuid_r()  and  getpwnam_r()
+     instead  of  getpwuid()  and  getpwnam() when looking up the
+     home directories of specific users in the password file (for
+     ~user/  expansion), and readdir_r() instead of readdir() for
+     reading directory entries when  doing  filename  completion.
+     The  reentrant  version  of  the  library  is usually called
+     libtecla_r.a instead of libtecla.a, so if only the latter is
+     available,  it  probably  isn't  the correct version to link
+     with threaded programs.
+
+     Reentrant functions for iterating through the password  file
+     aren't  available,  so  when  the  library is compiled to be
+     reentrant, TAB completion of incomplete usernames in  ~user-
+     name/  expressions  is disabled. This doesn't disable expan-
+     sion of complete ~username expressions, which  can  be  done
+     reentrantly,  or  expansion  of  the parts of filenames that
+     follow them, so this doesn't remove much functionality.
+
+     The terminfo functions setupterm(),  tigetstr(),  tigetnum()
+     and  tputs()  also  aren't  reentrant, but very few programs
+     will want to  interact  with  multiple  terminals,  so  this
+     shouldn't  prevent  this library from being used in threaded
+     programs.
+
+
+</pre><h2>LIBRARY VERSION NUMBER</h2><pre>
+     The version number of the library can be queried  using  the
+     following function.
+
+      void libtecla_version(int *major, int *minor, int *micro);
+
+
+     On return, this function records the three components of the
+     libtecla  version number in *major, *minor, *micro. The for-
+     mal meaning of the three components is as follows.
+
+
+      major - Incrementing this number implies that a change has
+              been made to the library's public interface, which
+              makes it binary incompatible  with programs that
+              were linked with previous shared versions of the
+              tecla library.
+
+      minor - This number is incremented by one whenever
+              additional functionality, such as new functions or
+              modules, are added to the library.
+
+      micro - This is incremented whenever modifications to the
+              library are made which make no changes to the
+              public interface, but which fix bugs and/or improve
+              the behind-the-scenes implementation.
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>TRIVIA</h2><pre>
+     In Spanish, a "tecla" is the key of a keyboard.  Since  this
+     library  centers  on  keyboard input, and given that I wrote
+     much of the library while working in Chile, this seemed like
+     a suitable name.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILES</h2><pre>
+     libtecla.a    -   The tecla library.
+     libtecla.h    -   The tecla header file.
+     ~/.teclarc    -   The tecla personal customization file.
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><pre>
+     <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>,   <a href="ef_expand_file.html">ef_expand_file(3)</a>,   <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a>,
+     <a href="pca_lookup_file.html">pca_lookup_file(3)</a>, <a href="enhance.html">enhance(3)</a>
+
+
+</pre><h2>AUTHOR</h2><pre>
+     Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
+
+
+</pre><h2>ACKNOWLEDGMENTS</h2><pre>
+     Markus Gyger  - Lots of assistance, including help with
+                     shared libraries, configuration information,
+                     particularly for Solaris; modifications to
+                     support C++ compilers, improvements for ksh
+                     users, faster cursor motion, output
+                     buffering, and changes to make gl_get_line()
+                     8-bit clean.
+     Mike MacFaden - Suggestions, feedback and testing that led
+                     to many of the major new functions that were
+                     added in version 1.4.0.
+     Tim Eliseo    - Many vi-mode bindings and fixes.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+</body>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/pca_lookup_file.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/pca_lookup_file.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40c9f2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/pca_lookup_file.html
@@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
+<head>
+<title>Manual Page</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+</pre><h2>NAME</h2><pre>
+     pca_lookup_file,       del_PathCache,       del_PcaPathConf,
+     new_PathCache,        new_PcaPathConf,       pca_last_error,
+     pca_path_completions,    pca_scan_path,    pca_set_check_fn,
+     ppc_file_start,  ppc_literal_escapes  -  lookup  a file in a
+     list of directories
+
+</pre><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><pre>
+     #include &lt;libtecla.h&gt;
+
+     PathCache *new_PathCache(void);
+
+     PathCache *del_PathCache(PathCache *pc);
+
+     int pca_scan_path(PathCache *pc, const char *path);
+
+     void pca_set_check_fn(PathCache *pc, CplCheckFn *check_fn,
+                           void *data);
+
+     char *pca_lookup_file(PathCache *pc, const char *name,
+                           int name_len, int literal);
+
+     const char *pca_last_error(PathCache *pc);
+
+     CPL_MATCH_FN(pca_path_completions);
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><pre>
+     The PathCache object is part of the tecla library  (see  the
+     <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a> man page).
+
+     PathCache objects allow an application to search  for  files
+     in any colon separated list of directories, such as the unix
+     execution  PATH  environment  variable.  Files  in  absolute
+     directories  are cached in a PathCache object, whereas rela-
+     tive directories are scanned as needed.  Using  a  PathCache
+     object,  you  can  look  up  the  full  pathname of a simple
+     filename, or you can obtain a list of the  possible  comple-
+     tions  of  a  given filename prefix. By default all files in
+     the list of directories are targets for lookup  and  comple-
+     tion, but a versatile mechanism is provided for only select-
+     ing specific types of files. The obvious application of this
+     facility  is to provide Tab-completion and lookup of execut-
+     able commands in the unix  PATH,  so  an  optional  callback
+     which rejects all but executable files, is provided.
+
+
+</pre><h2>AN EXAMPLE</h2><pre>
+     Under UNIX, the  following  example  program  looks  up  and
+     displays  the full pathnames of each of the command names on
+     the command line.
+       #include &lt;stdio.h&gt;
+       #include &lt;stdlib.h&gt;
+       #include &lt;libtecla.h&gt;
+
+       int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+       {
+         int i;
+       /*
+        * Create a cache for executable files.
+        */
+         PathCache *pc = new_PathCache();
+         if(!pc)
+           exit(1);
+       /*
+        * Scan the user's PATH for executables.
+        */
+         if(pca_scan_path(pc, getenv("PATH"))) {
+           fprintf(stderr, "%s\n", pca_last_error(pc));
+           exit(1);
+         }
+       /*
+        * Arrange to only report executable files.
+        */
+        pca_set_check_fn(pc, cpl_check_exe, NULL);
+       /*
+        * Lookup and display the full pathname of each of the
+        * commands listed on the command line.
+        */
+         for(i=1; i&lt;argc; i++) {
+           char *cmd = pca_lookup_file(pc, argv[i], -1, 0);
+           printf("The full pathname of '%s' is %s\n", argv[i],
+                  cmd ? cmd : "unknown");
+         }
+         pc = del_PathCache(pc);  /* Clean up */
+         return 0;
+       }
+
+     The following is an example of what this does on  my  laptop
+     under linux:
+
+       $ ./example less more blob
+       The full pathname of 'less' is /usr/bin/less
+       The full pathname of 'more' is /bin/more
+       The full pathname of 'blob' is unknown
+       $
+
+
+</pre><h2>FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2><pre>
+     In order to use the facilities  of  this  module,  you  must
+     first   allocate   a   PathCache   object   by  calling  the
+     new_PathCache() constructor function.
+
+       PathCache *new_PathCache(void)
+
+     This function creates the  resources  needed  to  cache  and
+     lookup  files  in  a list of directories. It returns NULL on
+     error.
+
+
+</pre><h2>POPULATING THE CACHE</h2><pre>
+     Once you have created a cache, it needs to be populated with
+     files.  To do this, call the pca_scan_path() function.
+
+       int pca_scan_path(PathCache *pc, const char *path);
+
+     Whenever this function is called, it  discards  the  current
+     contents  of  the  cache, then scans the list of directories
+     specified in its path argument for files. The path  argument
+     must be a string containing a colon-separated list of direc-
+     tories, such as "/usr/bin:/home/mcs/bin:.". This can include
+     directories   specified   by   absolute  pathnames  such  as
+     "/usr/bin", as well as sub-directories specified by relative
+     pathnames such as "." or "bin". Files in the absolute direc-
+     tories are immediately cached  in  the  specified  PathCache
+     object,  whereas sub-directories, whose identities obviously
+     change whenever the current working  directory  is  changed,
+     are  marked  to  be  scanned  on  the fly whenever a file is
+     looked up.
+
+     On success this function return 0. On error  it  returns  1,
+     and  a  description  of the error can be obtained by calling
+     pca_last_error(pc).
+
+
+</pre><h2>LOOKING UP FILES</h2><pre>
+     Once the cache has been populated with files, you  can  look
+     up  the  full  pathname  of a file, simply by specifying its
+     filename to pca_lookup_file().
+
+       char *pca_lookup_file(PathCache *pc, const char *name,
+                             int name_len, int literal);
+
+     To make it possible to pass this function a  filename  which
+     is  actually  part of a longer string, the name_len argument
+     can be used to specify the length of  the  filename  at  the
+     start  of  the  name[]  argument.  If  you  pass -1 for this
+     length, the length of the string  will  be  determined  with
+     strlen().  If  the  name[]  string might contain backslashes
+     that escape the special meanings of spaces and  tabs  within
+     the filename, give the literal argument, the value 0. Other-
+     wise, if backslashes should be treated as normal characters,
+     pass 1 for the value of the literal argument.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILENAME COMPLETION</h2><pre>
+     Looking up the potential completions of a filename-prefix in
+     the  filename  cache,  is  achieved  by passing the provided
+     pca_path_completions()    callback    function    to     the
+     cpl_complete_word()  function  (see the <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a>
+     man page).
+
+       CPL_MATCH_FN(pca_path_completions);
+
+     This callback requires that its data argument be  a  pointer
+     to  a PcaPathConf object. Configuration objects of this type
+     are allocated by calling new_PcaPathConf().
+
+       PcaPathConf *new_PcaPathConf(PathCache *pc);
+
+     This function returns an  object  initialized  with  default
+     configuration    parameters,   which   determine   how   the
+     cpl_path_completions() callback function behaves. The  func-
+     tions  which  allow you to individually change these parame-
+     ters are discussed below.
+
+     By default,  the  pca_path_completions()  callback  function
+     searches  backwards for the start of the filename being com-
+     pleted, looking for the first un-escaped space or the  start
+     of  the input line. If you wish to specify a different loca-
+     tion, call ppc_file_start() with  the  index  at  which  the
+     filename  starts  in  the input line. Passing start_index=-1
+     re-enables the default behavior.
+
+       void ppc_file_start(PcaPathConf *ppc, int start_index);
+
+     By default, when pca_path_completions() looks at a  filename
+     in  the input line, each lone backslash in the input line is
+     interpreted as being a special character which  removes  any
+     special significance of the character which follows it, such
+     as a space which should be taken as  part  of  the  filename
+     rather  than  delimiting  the  start  of the filename. These
+     backslashes are thus ignored while looking for  completions,
+     and  subsequently  added  before  spaces,  tabs  and literal
+     backslashes in the list of completions.  To  have  unescaped
+     backslashes    treated    as    normal    characters,   call
+     ppc_literal_escapes() with a non-zero value in  its  literal
+     argument.
+
+       void ppc_literal_escapes(PcaPathConf *ppc, int literal);
+
+     When you have finished with a PcaPathConf variable, you  can
+     pass  it  to  the  del_PcaPathConf()  destructor function to
+     reclaim its memory.
+
+       PcaPathConf *del_PcaPathConf(PcaPathConf *ppc);
+
+</pre><h2>BEING SELECTIVE</h2><pre>
+     If you are only interested in certain types or  files,  such
+     as,  for example, executable files, or files whose names end
+     in a particular suffix, you can arrange for the file comple-
+     tion  and  lookup functions to be selective in the filenames
+     that they return.  This is done by  registering  a  callback
+     function  with your PathCache object. Thereafter, whenever a
+     filename is found which  either  matches  a  filename  being
+     looked  up,  or  matches  a prefix which is being completed,
+     your callback function will be called with the full pathname
+     of  the  file,  plus  any application-specific data that you
+     provide, and if the callback returns 1 the filename will  be
+     reported  as  a  match,  and  if  it  returns  0, it will be
+     ignored.  Suitable callback functions and  their  prototypes
+     should  be declared with the following macro. The CplCheckFn
+     typedef is  also  provided  in  case  you  wish  to  declare
+     pointers to such functions.
+
+       #define CPL_CHECK_FN(fn) int (fn)(void *data, \
+                                         const char *pathname)
+       typedef CPL_CHECK_FN(CplCheckFn);
+
+     Registering one of  these  functions  involves  calling  the
+     pca_set_check_fn()  function.  In  addition  to the callback
+     function, passed via the check_fn argument, you can  pass  a
+     pointer to anything via the data argument. This pointer will
+     be passed on to your callback function,  via  its  own  data
+     argument,  whenever  it is called, so this provides a way to
+     pass appplication specific data to your callback.
+
+       void pca_set_check_fn(PathCache *pc, CplCheckFn *check_fn,
+                             void *data);
+
+     Note that these callbacks are passed the  full  pathname  of
+     each  matching file, so the decision about whether a file is
+     of interest can be based on any property of  the  file,  not
+     just   its   filename.   As   an   example,   the   provided
+     cpl_check_exe() callback function looks  at  the  executable
+     permissions  of  the  file and the permissions of its parent
+     directories, and only returns 1 if the user has execute per-
+     mission to the file. This callback function can thus be used
+     to lookup or complete command names found in the directories
+     listed  in the user's PATH environment variable. The example
+     program given earlier in this man page provides a demonstra-
+     tion of this.
+
+     Beware that if somebody tries to complete an  empty  string,
+     your  callback  will  get  called once for every file in the
+     cache, which could number in the thousands. If your callback
+     does  anything time consuming, this could result in an unac-
+     ceptable delay for the user, so  callbacks  should  be  kept
+     short.
+     To improve performance, whenever one of these  callbacks  is
+     called,  the  choice  that  it makes is cached, and the next
+     time the corresponding file is looked up, instead of calling
+     the  callback  again,  the  cached  record of whether it was
+     accepted or rejected is used. Thus if somebody tries to com-
+     plete an empty string, and hits tab a second time when noth-
+     ing appears to happen, there will only be  one  long  delay,
+     since  the second pass will operate entirely from the cached
+     dispositions of the files. These cached dipositions are dis-
+     carded  whenever  pca_scan_path()  is  called,  and whenever
+     pca_set_check_fn() is called with changed callback  function
+     or data arguments.
+
+
+</pre><h2>ERROR HANDLING</h2><pre>
+     If pca_scan_path() reports that an error occurred by return-
+     ing  1,  you  can obtain a terse description of the error by
+     calling pca_last_error(pc). This returns an internal  string
+     containing an error message.
+
+       const char *pca_last_error(PathCache *pc);
+
+
+
+</pre><h2>CLEANING UP</h2><pre>
+     Once you have finished using a  PathCache  object,  you  can
+     reclaim  its  resources by passing it to the del_PathCache()
+     destructor function. This takes a pointer to  one  of  these
+     objects, and always returns NULL.
+
+       PathCache *del_PathCache(PathCache *pc);
+
+
+</pre><h2>THREAD SAFETY</h2><pre>
+     In multi-threaded programs, you should use the  libtecla_r.a
+     version  of the library. This uses POSIX reentrant functions
+     where available (hence the _r suffix), and disables features
+     that  rely on non-reentrant system functions. In the case of
+     this module, the only disabled feature is  username  comple-
+     tion in ~username/ expressions, in cpl_path_completions().
+
+     Using the libtecla_r.a version of the library, it is safe to
+     use  the facilities of this module in multiple threads, pro-
+     vided that each thread uses a separately allocated PathCache
+     object.  In  other  words,  if  two  threads want to do path
+     searching, they should each call new_PathCache() to allocate
+     their own caches.
+
+
+</pre><h2>FILES</h2><pre>
+     libtecla.a    -    The tecla library
+     libtecla.h    -    The tecla header file.
+</pre><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><pre>
+     <a href="libtecla.html">libtecla(3)</a>,       <a href="gl_get_line.html">gl_get_line(3)</a>,        <a href="ef_expand_file.html">ef_expand_file(3)</a>,
+     <a href="cpl_complete_word.html">cpl_complete_word(3)</a>
+
+
+</pre><h2>AUTHOR</h2><pre>
+     Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+</body>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/html/release.html b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/release.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0d219c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/html/release.html
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+<HEAD><TITLE>The tecla library release notes</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY bgcolor=add8e6><PRE>
+This file lists major changes which accompany each new release.
+
+Version 1.4.1:
+
+  This is a maintenance release. It includes minor changes to support
+  Mac OS X (Darwin), the QNX real-time operating system, and Cygwin
+  under Windows. It also fixes an oversight that was preventing the
+  tab key from inserting tab characters when users unbound the
+  complete-word action from it.
+
+Version 1.4.0:
+
+  The contents of the history list can now be saved and restored with
+  the new gl_save_history() and gl_load_history() functions.
+
+  Event handlers can now be registered to watch for and respond to I/O
+  on arbitrary file descriptors while gl_get_line() is waiting for
+  terminal input from the user. See the gl_get_line(3) man page
+  for details on gl_watch_fd().
+
+  As an optional alternative to getting configuration information only
+  from ~/.teclarc, the new gl_configure_getline() function allows
+  configuration commands to be taken from any of, a string, a
+  specified application-specific file, and/or a specified
+  user-specific file. See the gl_get_line(3) man page for details.
+
+  The version number of the library can now be queried using the
+  libtecla_version() function. See the libtecla(3) man page.
+
+  The new gl_group_history() function allows applications to group
+  different types of input line in the history buffer, and arrange for
+  only members of the appropriate group to be recalled on a given call
+  to gl_get_line(). See the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  The new gl_show_history() function displays the current history list
+  to a given stdio output stream. See the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  new_GetLine() now allows you to specify a history buffer size of
+  zero, thus requesting that no history buffer be allocated. You can
+  subsequently resize or delete the history buffer at any time, by
+  calling gl_resize_history(), limit the number of lines that are
+  allowed in the buffer by calling gl_limit_history(), clear either
+  all history lines from the history list, or just the history lines
+  that are associated with the current history group, by calling
+  gl_clear_history, and toggle the history mechanism on and off by
+  calling gl_toggle_history().
+
+  The new gl_terminal_size() function can be used to query the
+  current terminal size. It can also be used to supply a default
+  terminal size on systems where no mechanism is available for
+  looking up the size.
+
+  The contents and configuration of the history list can now be
+  obtained by the calling application, by calling the new
+  gl_lookup_history(), gl_state_of_history(), gl_range_of_history()
+  and gl_size_of_history() functions. See the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  Echoing of the input line as it is typed, can now be turned on and
+  off via the new gl_echo_mode() function. While echoing is disabled,
+  newly entered input lines are omitted from the history list.  See
+  the gl_get_line(3) man page.
+
+  While the default remains to display the prompt string literally,
+  the new gl_prompt_style() function can be used to enable text
+  attribute formatting directives in prompt strings, such as
+  underlining, bold font, and highlighting directives.
+
+  Signal handling in gl_get_line() is now customizable. The default
+  signal handling behavior remains essentially the same, except that
+  the SIGTSTP, SIGTTIN and SIGTTOU are now forwarded to the
+  corresponding signal handler of the calling program, instead of
+  causing a SIGSTOP to be sent to the application.  It is now possible
+  to remove signals from the list that are trapped by gl_get_line(),
+  as well as add new signals to this list. The signal and terminal
+  environments in which the signal handler of the calling program is
+  invoked, and what gl_get_line() does after the signal handler
+  returns, is now customizable on a per signal basis. You can now also
+  query the last signal that was caught by gl_get_line(). This is
+  useful when gl_get_line() aborts with errno=EINTR, and you need to
+  know which signal caused it to abort.
+
+  Key-sequences bound to action functions can now start with printable
+  characters. Previously only keysequences starting with control or
+  meta characters were permitted.
+
+  gl_get_line() is now 8-bit clean. If the calling program has
+  correctly called setlocale(LC_CTYPE,""), then the user can select an
+  alternate locale by setting the standard LC_CTYPE, LC_ALL, or LANG
+  environment variables, and international characters can then be
+  entered directly, either by using a non-US keyboard, or by using a
+  compose key on a standard US keyboard. Note that in locales in which
+  meta characters become printable, meta characters no longer match
+  M-c bindings, which then have to be entered using their escape-c
+  equivalents.  Fortunately most modern terminal emulators either
+  output the escape-c version by default when the meta key is used, or
+  can be configured to do so (see the gl_get_line(3) man page), so in
+  most cases you can continue to use the meta key.
+
+  Completion callback functions can now tell gl_get_line() to return
+  the input line immediately after a successful tab completion, simply
+  by setting the last character of the optional continuation suffix to
+  a newline character (ie. in the call to cpl_add_completion()).
+
+  It is now safe to create and use multiple GetLine objects, albeit
+  still only from a single thread. In conjunction with the new
+  gl_configure_getline() function, this optionally allows multiple
+  GetLine objects with different bindings to be used to implement
+  different input modes.
+
+  The edit-mode configuration command now accepts the argument,
+  none. This tells gl_get_line() to revert to using just the native
+  line editing facilities provided by the terminal driver. This could
+  be used if the termcap or terminfo entry of the host terminal were
+  badly corrupted.
+
+  Application callback functions invoked by gl_get_line() can now
+  change the displayed prompt using the gl_replace_prompt() function.
+
+  Their is now an optional program distributed with the library. This
+  is a beta release of a program which adds tecla command-line editing
+  to virtually any third party application without the application
+  needing to be linked to the library. See the enhance(3) man page for
+  further details. Although built and installed by default, the
+  INSTALL document explains how to prevent this.
+
+  The INSTALL document now explains how you can stop the demo programs
+  from being built and installed.
+
+  NetBSD/termcap fixes. Mike MacFaden reported two problems that he
+  saw when compiling libtecla under NetBSD. Both cases were related to
+  the use of termcap.  Most systems use terminfo, so this problem has
+  gone unnoticed until now, and won't have affected the grand majority
+  of users.  The configure script had a bug which prevented the check
+  for CPP working properly, and getline.c wouldn't compile due to an
+  undeclared variable when USE_TERMCAP was defined. Both problems have
+  now been fixed. Note that if you successfully compiled version
+  1.3.3, this problem didn't affect you.
+
+  An unfortunate and undocumented binding of the key-sequence M-O was
+  shadowing the arrow-key bindings on systems that use ^[OA etc. I
+  have removed this binding (the documented lower case M-o binding
+  remains bound). Under the KDE konsole terminal this was causing the
+  arrow keys to do something other than expected.
+
+  There was a bug in the history list code which could result in
+  strange entries appearing at the start of the history list once
+  enough history lines had been added to the list to cause the
+  circular history buffer to wrap. This is now fixed.
+ 
+Version 1.3.3:
+
+  Signal handling has been re-written, and documentation of its
+  behaviour has been added to the gl_get_line(3) man page. In addition
+  to eliminating race conditions, and appropriately setting errno for
+  those signals that abort gl_get_line(), many more signals are now
+  intercepted, making it less likely that the terminal will be left in
+  raw mode by a signal that isn't trapped by gl_get_line().
+
+  A bug was also fixed that was leaving the terminal in raw mode if
+  the editing mode was changed interactively between vi and emacs.
+  This was only noticeable when running programs from old shells that
+  don't reset terminal modes.
+
+Version 1.3.2:
+
+  Tim Eliseo contributed a number of improvements to vi mode,
+  including a fuller set of vi key-bindings, implementation of the vi
+  constraint that the cursor can't backup past the point at which
+  input mode was entered, and restoration of overwritten characters
+  when backspacing in overwrite mode. There are also now new bindings
+  to allow users to toggle between vi and emacs modes interactively.
+  The terminal bell is now used in some circumstances, such as when an
+  unrecognized key sequence is entered. This can be turned off by the
+  new nobeep option in the tecla configuration file.
+
+  Unrelated to the above, a problem under Linux which prevented ^Q
+  from being used to resume terminal output after the user had pressed
+  ^S, has been fixed.
+
+Version 1.3.1:
+
+  In vi mode a bug was preventing the history-search-backward and
+  history-search-forward actions from doing anything when invoked on
+  empty lines. On empty lines they now act like up-history and
+  down-history respectively, as in emacs mode.
+
+  When creating shared libraries under Linux, the -soname directive
+  was being used incorrectly. The result is that Linux binaries linked
+  with the 1.2.3, 1.2.4 and 1.3.0 versions of the tecla shared
+  libraries, will refuse to see other versions of the shared library
+  until relinked with version 1.3.1 or higher.
+
+  The configure script can now handle the fact that under Solaris-2.6
+  and earlier, the only curses library is a static one that hides in
+  /usr/ccs/lib. Under Linux it now also caters for old versions of GNU
+  ld which don't accept version scripts.
+
+  The demos are now linked against the shared version of the library
+  if possible. Previously they were always linked with the static
+  version.
+
+Version 1.3.0:
+
+  The major change in this release is the addition of an optional vi
+  command-line editing mode in gl_get_line(), along with lots of new
+  action functions to support its bindings. To enable this, first
+  create a ~/.teclarc file if you don't already have one, then add the
+  following line to it.
+
+   edit-mode vi
+
+  The default vi bindings, which are designed to mimic those of the vi
+  editor as closely as possible, are described in the gl_get_line(3)
+  man page.
+
+  A new convenience function called ef_list_expansions() has been
+  added for listing filename expansions. See the ef_list_expansions(3)
+  man page for details. This is used in a new list-glob binding, bound
+  to ^Xg in emacs mode, and ^G in vi input mode.
+
+  A bug has been fixed in the key-binding table expansion code. This
+  bug would have caused problems to anybody who defined more than
+  about 18 personalized key-bindings in their ~/.teclarc file.
+
+Version 1.2.4:
+
+  Buffered I/O is now used for writing to terminals, and where
+  supported, cursor motion is done with move-n-positions terminfo
+  capabilities instead of doing lots of move-1-position requests. This
+  greatly improves how the library feels over slow links.
+
+  You can now optionally compile different architectures in different
+  directories, without having to make multiple copies of the
+  distribution. This is documented in the INSTALL file.
+
+  The ksh ~+ directive is now supported.
+
+  Thanks to Markus Gyger for the above improvements.
+
+  Documentation has been added to the INSTALL file describing features
+  designed to facilitate configuration and installation of the library
+  as part of larger packages. These features are intended to remove
+  the need to modify the tecla distribution's configuration and build
+  procedures when embedding the libtecla distribution in other package
+  distributions.
+
+  A previous fix to stop the cursor from warping when the last
+  character of the input line was in the last column of the terminal,
+  was only being used for the first terminal line of the input line.
+  It is now used for all subsequent lines as well, as originally
+  intended.
+  
+Version 1.2.3:
+
+  The installation procedure has been better automated with the
+  addition of an autoconf configure script. This means that installers
+  can now compile and install the library by typing:
+
+    ./configure
+    make
+    make install
+
+  On all systems this makes at least the normal static version of the
+  tecla library. It also makes the reentrant version if reentrant
+  POSIX functions are detected.  Under Solaris, Linux and HP-UX the
+  configuration script arranges for shared libraries to be compiled in
+  addition to the static libraries.  It is hoped that installers will
+  return information about how to compile shared libraries on other
+  systems, for inclusion in future releases, and to this end, a new
+  PORTING guide has been provided.
+
+  The versioning number scheme has been changed. This release would
+  have been 1.2c, but instead will be refered to as 1.2.3. The
+  versioning scheme, based on conventions used by Sun Microsystems, is
+  described in configure.in.
+
+  The library was also tested under HP-UX, and this revealed two
+  serious bugs, both of which have now been fixed.
+  
+  The first bug prevented the library from writing control codes to
+  terminals on big-endian machines, with the exception of those
+  running under Solaris. This was due to an int variable being used
+  where a char was needed.
+
+  The second bug had the symptom that on systems that don't use the
+  newline character as the control code for moving the cursor down a
+  line, a newline wasn't started when the user hit enter.
+
+Version 1.2b:
+
+  Two more minor bug fixes:
+
+  Many terminals don't wrap the cursor to the next line when a
+  character is written to the rightmost terminal column. Instead, they
+  delay starting a new line until one more character is written, at
+  which point they move the cursor two positions.  gl_get_line()
+  wasn't aware of this, so cursor repositionings just after writing
+  the last character of a column, caused it to erroneously go up a
+  line. This has now been remedied, using a method that should work
+  regardless of whether a terminal exhibits this behavior or not.
+
+  Some systems dynamically record the current terminal dimensions in
+  environment variables called LINES and COLUMNS. On such systems,
+  during the initial terminal setup, these values should override the
+  static values read from the terminal information databases, and now
+  do.  Previously they were only used if the dimensions returned by
+  terminfo/termcap looked bogus.
+
+Version 1.2a:
+
+  This minor release fixes the following two bugs:
+
+  The initial terminal size and subsequent changes thereto, weren't
+  being noticed by gl_get_line(). This was because the test for the
+  existence of TIOCWINSZ was erroneously placed before the inclusion
+  of termios.h. One of the results was that on input lines that
+  spanned more than one terminal line, the cursor occasionally jumped
+  unexpectedly to the previous terminal line.
+
+  On entering a line that wrapped over multiple terminal lines,
+  gl_get_line() simply output a carriage-return line-feed at the point
+  at which the user pressed return. Thus if one typed in such a line,
+  then moved back onto one of the earlier terminal lines before
+  hitting return, the cursor was left on a line containing part of the
+  line that had just been entered. This didn't do any harm, but it
+  looked a mess.
+
+Version 1.2:
+
+  A new facility for looking up and completing filenames in UNIX-style
+  paths has now been added (eg. you can search for, or complete
+  commands using the UNIX PATH environment variable). See the
+  pca_lookup_file(3) man page.
+
+  The already existing filename completion callback can now be made
+  selective in what types of files it lists. See the
+  cpl_complete_word(3) man page.
+
+  Due to its potential to break applications when changed, the use of
+  the publically defined CplFileArgs structure to configure the
+  cpl_file_completions() callback is now deprecated.  The definition
+  of this structure has been frozen, and its documentation has been
+  removed from the man pages.  It will remain supported, but if you
+  have used it, you are recommended to switch to the new method, which
+  involves a new opaque configuration object, allocated via a provided
+  constructor function, configured via accessor functions, and
+  eventually deleted with a provided destructor function. The
+  cpl_file_completions() callback distinguishes which structure type
+  it has been sent by virtue of a code placed at the start of the new
+  structure by the constructor.  It is assumed that no existing
+  applications set the boolean 'escaped' member of the CplFileArgs
+  structure to 4568.  The new method is documented in the
+  cpl_complete_word(3) man page.
+
+Version 1.1j
+
+  This was the initial public release on freshmeat.org.
+</PRE></BODY>
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/install-sh b/libtecla-1.4.1/install-sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..e9de238
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/install-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# install - install a program, script, or datafile
+# This comes from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh).
+#
+# Copyright 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
+#
+# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
+# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
+# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+# documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or
+# publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
+# written prior permission.  M.I.T. makes no representations about the
+# suitability of this software for any purpose.  It is provided "as is"
+# without express or implied warranty.
+#
+# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
+# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
+# when there is no Makefile.
+#
+# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
+# from scratch.  It can only install one file at a time, a restriction
+# shared with many OS's install programs.
+
+
+# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
+
+# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
+doit="${DOITPROG-}"
+
+
+# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
+
+mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
+cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
+chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
+chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
+chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
+stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
+rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
+mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
+
+transformbasename=""
+transform_arg=""
+instcmd="$mvprog"
+chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755"
+chowncmd=""
+chgrpcmd=""
+stripcmd=""
+rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+mvcmd="$mvprog"
+src=""
+dst=""
+dir_arg=""
+
+while [ x"$1" != x ]; do
+    case $1 in
+	-c) instcmd="$cpprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-d) dir_arg=true
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-s) stripcmd="$stripprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'`
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'`
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	*)  if [ x"$src" = x ]
+	    then
+		src=$1
+	    else
+		# this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug
+		:
+		dst=$1
+	    fi
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+    esac
+done
+
+if [ x"$src" = x ]
+then
+	echo "install:	no input file specified"
+	exit 1
+else
+	true
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then
+	dst=$src
+	src=""
+	
+	if [ -d $dst ]; then
+		instcmd=:
+		chmodcmd=""
+	else
+		instcmd=mkdir
+	fi
+else
+
+# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command
+# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad 
+# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
+
+	if [ -f $src -o -d $src ]
+	then
+		true
+	else
+		echo "install:  $src does not exist"
+		exit 1
+	fi
+	
+	if [ x"$dst" = x ]
+	then
+		echo "install:	no destination specified"
+		exit 1
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system
+# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic
+
+	if [ -d $dst ]
+	then
+		dst="$dst"/`basename $src`
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+fi
+
+## this sed command emulates the dirname command
+dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'`
+
+# Make sure that the destination directory exists.
+#  this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script
+
+# Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case.
+if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then
+defaultIFS='	
+'
+IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}"
+
+oIFS="${IFS}"
+# Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason.
+IFS='%'
+set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'`
+IFS="${oIFS}"
+
+pathcomp=''
+
+while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do
+	pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}"
+	shift
+
+	if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ;
+        then
+		$mkdirprog "${pathcomp}"
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+	pathcomp="${pathcomp}/"
+done
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]
+then
+	$doit $instcmd $dst &&
+
+	if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi
+else
+
+# If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now.
+
+	if [ x"$transformarg" = x ] 
+	then
+		dstfile=`basename $dst`
+	else
+		dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename | 
+			sed $transformarg`$transformbasename
+	fi
+
+# don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename
+
+	if [ x"$dstfile" = x ] 
+	then
+		dstfile=`basename $dst`
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+# Make a temp file name in the proper directory.
+
+	dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$#
+
+# Move or copy the file name to the temp name
+
+	$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp &&
+
+	trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 &&
+
+# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits
+
+# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing.  If we want to
+# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
+# errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command.
+
+	if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+
+# Now rename the file to the real destination.
+
+	$doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile &&
+	$doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile 
+
+fi &&
+
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2bab8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.c
@@ -0,0 +1,827 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+#include "keytab.h"
+#include "getline.h"
+#include "strngmem.h"
+
+static int _kt_extend_table(KeyTab *kt);
+static int _kt_parse_keybinding_string(const char *keyseq,
+				       char *binary, int *nc);
+static int _kt_compare_strings(const char *s1, int n1, const char *s2, int n2);
+static void _kt_assign_action(KeySym *sym, KtBinder binder, KtKeyFn *keyfn);
+static char _kt_backslash_escape(const char *string, const char **endp);
+static int _kt_is_emacs_meta(const char *string);
+static int _kt_is_emacs_ctrl(const char *string);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new key-binding symbol table.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  KeyTab *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+KeyTab *_new_KeyTab(void)
+{
+  KeyTab *kt;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  kt = (KeyTab *) malloc(sizeof(KeyTab));
+  if(!kt) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_KeyTab: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_KeyTab().
+ */
+  kt->size = KT_TABLE_INC;
+  kt->nkey = 0;
+  kt->table = NULL;
+  kt->actions = NULL;
+  kt->smem = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate the table.
+ */
+  kt->table = (KeySym *) malloc(sizeof(kt->table[0]) * kt->size);
+  if(!kt->table) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_KeyTab: Insufficient memory for table of size %d.\n",
+	    kt->size);
+    return _del_KeyTab(kt);
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate a hash table of actions.
+ */
+  kt->actions = _new_HashTable(NULL, KT_HASH_SIZE, IGNORE_CASE, NULL, 0);
+  if(!kt->actions)
+    return _del_KeyTab(kt);
+/*
+ * Allocate a string allocation object. This allows allocation of
+ * small strings without fragmenting the heap.
+ */
+  kt->smem = _new_StringMem("new_KeyTab", KT_TABLE_INC);
+  if(!kt->smem)
+    return _del_KeyTab(kt);
+  return kt;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a KeyTab object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt   KeyTab *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return KeyTab *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+KeyTab *_del_KeyTab(KeyTab *kt)
+{
+  if(kt) {
+    if(kt->table)
+      free(kt->table);
+    kt->actions = _del_HashTable(kt->actions);
+    kt->smem = _del_StringMem("del_KeyTab", kt->smem, 1);
+    free(kt);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Increase the size of the table to accomodate more keys.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt       KeyTab *  The table to be extended.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+static int _kt_extend_table(KeyTab *kt)
+{
+/*
+ * Attempt to increase the size of the table.
+ */
+  KeySym *newtab = (KeySym *) realloc(kt->table, sizeof(kt->table[0]) *
+				      (kt->size + KT_TABLE_INC));
+/*
+ * Failed?
+ */
+  if(!newtab) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+	    "getline(): Insufficient memory to extend keybinding table.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Install the resized table.
+ */
+  kt->table = newtab;
+  kt->size += KT_TABLE_INC;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Add, update or remove a keybinding to the table.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt           KeyTab *  The table to add the binding to.
+ *  binder     KtBinder    The source of the binding.
+ *  keyseq   const char *  The key-sequence to bind.
+ *  action         char *  The action to associate with the key sequence, or
+ *                         NULL to remove the action associated with the
+ *                         key sequence.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+int _kt_set_keybinding(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder, const char *keyseq,
+		       const char *action)
+{
+  KtKeyFn *keyfn; /* The action function */
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(kt==NULL || !keyseq) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "kt_set_keybinding: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Lookup the function that implements the specified action.
+ */
+  if(!action) {
+    keyfn = 0;
+  } else {
+    Symbol *sym = _find_HashSymbol(kt->actions, action);
+    if(!sym) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "getline: Unknown key-binding action: %s\n", action);
+      return 1;
+    };
+    keyfn = (KtKeyFn *) sym->fn;
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the action in the table.
+ */
+  return _kt_set_keyfn(kt, binder, keyseq, keyfn);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Add, update or remove a keybinding to the table, specifying an action
+ * function directly.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt       KeyTab *  The table to add the binding to.
+ *  binder KtBinder    The source of the binding.
+ *  keyseq     char *  The key-sequence to bind.
+ *  keyfn   KtKeyFn *  The action function, or NULL to remove any existing
+ *                     action function.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int    0 - OK.
+ *                    1 - Error.
+ */
+int _kt_set_keyfn(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder, const char *keyseq,
+		  KtKeyFn *keyfn)
+{
+  const char *kptr;  /* A pointer into keyseq[] */
+  char *binary;      /* The binary version of keyseq[] */
+  int nc;            /* The number of characters in binary[] */
+  int first,last;    /* The first and last entries in the table which */
+                     /*  minimally match. */
+  int size;          /* The size to allocate for the binary string */
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(kt==NULL || !keyseq) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "kt_set_keybinding: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Work out a pessimistic estimate of how much space will be needed
+ * for the binary copy of the string, noting that binary meta characters
+ * embedded in the input string get split into two characters.
+ */
+  for(size=0,kptr = keyseq; *kptr; kptr++)
+    size += IS_META_CHAR(*kptr) ? 2 : 1;
+/*
+ * Allocate a string that has the length of keyseq[].
+ */
+  binary = _new_StringMemString(kt->smem, size + 1);
+  if(!binary) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+	    "gl_get_line: Insufficient memory to record key sequence.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Convert control and octal character specifications to binary characters.
+ */
+  if(_kt_parse_keybinding_string(keyseq, binary, &nc)) {
+    binary = _del_StringMemString(kt->smem, binary);
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Lookup the position in the table at which to insert the binding.
+ */
+  switch(_kt_lookup_keybinding(kt, binary, nc, &first, &last)) {
+/*
+ * If an exact match for the key-sequence is already in the table,
+ * simply replace its binding function (or delete the entry if
+ * the new binding is 0).
+ */
+  case KT_EXACT_MATCH:
+    if(keyfn) {
+      _kt_assign_action(kt->table + first, binder, keyfn);
+    } else {
+      _del_StringMemString(kt->smem, kt->table[first].keyseq);
+      memmove(kt->table + first, kt->table + first + 1,
+	      (kt->nkey - first - 1) * sizeof(kt->table[0]));
+      kt->nkey--;
+    };
+    binary = _del_StringMemString(kt->smem, binary);
+    break;
+/*
+ * If an ambiguous match has been found and we are installing a
+ * callback, then our new key-sequence would hide all of the ambiguous
+ * matches, so we shouldn't allow it.
+ */
+  case KT_AMBIG_MATCH:
+    if(keyfn) {
+      fprintf(stderr,
+	      "getline: Can't bind \"%s\", because it's a prefix of another binding.\n",
+	      keyseq);
+      binary = _del_StringMemString(kt->smem, binary);
+      return 1;
+    };
+    break;
+/*
+ * If the entry doesn't exist, create it.
+ */
+  case KT_NO_MATCH:
+/*
+ * Add a new binding?
+ */
+    if(keyfn) {
+      KeySym *sym;
+/*
+ * We will need a new entry, extend the table if needed.
+ */
+      if(kt->nkey + 1 > kt->size) {
+	if(_kt_extend_table(kt)) {
+	  binary = _del_StringMemString(kt->smem, binary);
+	  return 1;
+	};
+      };
+/*
+ * Make space to insert the new key-sequence before 'last'.
+ */
+      if(last < kt->nkey) {
+	memmove(kt->table + last + 1, kt->table + last,
+		(kt->nkey - last) * sizeof(kt->table[0]));
+      };
+/*
+ * Insert the new binding in the vacated position.
+ */
+      sym = kt->table + last;
+      sym->keyseq = binary;
+      sym->nc = nc;
+      sym->user_fn = sym->term_fn = sym->norm_fn = sym->keyfn = 0;
+      _kt_assign_action(sym, binder, keyfn);
+      kt->nkey++;
+    };
+    break;
+  case KT_BAD_MATCH:
+    binary = _del_StringMemString(kt->smem, binary);
+    return 1;
+    break;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Perform a min-match lookup of a key-binding.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt          KeyTab *  The keybinding table to lookup in.
+ *  binary_keyseq char *  The binary key-sequence to lookup.
+ *  nc             int    the number of characters in keyseq[].
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  first,last     int *  If there is an ambiguous or exact match, the indexes
+ *                        of the first and last symbols that minimally match
+ *                        will be assigned to *first and *last respectively.
+ *                        If there is no match, then first and last will
+ *                        bracket the location where the symbol should be
+ *                        inserted.
+ *                      
+ * Output:
+ *  return  KtKeyMatch    One of the following enumerators:
+ *                         KT_EXACT_MATCH - An exact match was found.
+ *                         KT_AMBIG_MATCH - An ambiguous match was found.
+ *                         KT_NO_MATCH    - No match was found.
+ *                         KT_BAD_MATCH   - An error occurred while searching.
+ */
+KtKeyMatch _kt_lookup_keybinding(KeyTab *kt, const char *binary_keyseq, int nc,
+				 int *first, int *last)
+{
+  int mid;     /* The index at which to bisect the table */
+  int bot;     /* The lowest index of the table not searched yet */
+  int top;     /* The highest index of the table not searched yet */
+  int test;    /* The return value of strcmp() */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!kt || !binary_keyseq || !first || !last || nc < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "kt_lookup_keybinding: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return KT_BAD_MATCH;
+  };
+/*
+ * Perform a binary search for the key-sequence.
+ */
+  bot = 0;
+  top = kt->nkey - 1;
+  while(top >= bot) {
+    mid = (top + bot)/2;
+    test = _kt_compare_strings(kt->table[mid].keyseq, kt->table[mid].nc,
+			   binary_keyseq, nc);
+    if(test > 0)
+      top = mid - 1;
+    else if(test < 0)
+      bot = mid + 1;
+    else {
+      *first = *last = mid;
+      return KT_EXACT_MATCH;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * An exact match wasn't found, but top is the index just below the
+ * index where a match would be found, and bot is the index just above
+ * where the match ought to be found.
+ */
+  *first = top;
+  *last = bot;
+/*
+ * See if any ambiguous matches exist, and if so make *first and *last
+ * refer to the first and last matches.
+ */
+  if(*last < kt->nkey && kt->table[*last].nc > nc &&
+     _kt_compare_strings(kt->table[*last].keyseq, nc, binary_keyseq, nc)==0) {
+    *first = *last;
+    while(*last+1 < kt->nkey && kt->table[*last+1].nc > nc &&
+	  _kt_compare_strings(kt->table[*last+1].keyseq, nc, binary_keyseq, nc)==0)
+      (*last)++;
+    return KT_AMBIG_MATCH;
+  };
+/*
+ * No match.
+ */
+  return KT_NO_MATCH;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Convert a keybinding string into a uniq binary representation.
+ *
+ * Control characters can be given directly in their binary form,
+ * expressed as either ^ or C-, followed by the character, expressed in
+ * octal, like \129 or via C-style backslash escapes, with the addition
+ * of '\E' to denote the escape key. Similarly, meta characters can be
+ * given directly in binary or expressed as M- followed by the character.
+ * Meta characters are recorded as two characters in the binary output
+ * string, the first being the escape key, and the second being the key
+ * that was modified by the meta key. This means that binding to
+ * \EA or ^[A or M-A are all equivalent.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  keyseq   char *  The key sequence being added.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  binary   char *  The binary version of the key sequence will be
+ *                   assigned to binary[], which must have at least
+ *                   as many characters as keyseq[] plus the number
+ *                   of embedded binary meta characters.
+ *  nc        int *  The number of characters assigned to binary[]
+ *                   will be recorded in *nc.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    0 - OK.
+ *                   1 - Error.
+ */
+static int _kt_parse_keybinding_string(const char *keyseq, char *binary,
+				       int *nc)
+{
+  const char *iptr = keyseq;   /* Pointer into keyseq[] */
+  char *optr = binary;         /* Pointer into binary[] */
+/*
+ * Parse the input characters until they are exhausted or the
+ * output string becomes full.
+ */
+  while(*iptr) {
+/*
+ * Check for special characters.
+ */
+    switch(*iptr) {
+    case '^':        /* A control character specification */
+/*
+ * Convert the caret expression into the corresponding control
+ * character unless no character follows the caret, in which case
+ * record a literal caret.
+ */
+      if(iptr[1]) {
+	*optr++ = MAKE_CTRL(iptr[1]);
+	iptr += 2;
+      } else {
+	*optr++ = *iptr++;
+      };
+      break;
+/*
+ * A backslash-escaped character?
+ */
+    case '\\':
+/*
+ * Convert the escape sequence to a binary character.
+ */
+      *optr++ = _kt_backslash_escape(iptr+1, &iptr);
+      break;
+/*
+ * Possibly an emacs-style meta character?
+ */
+    case 'M':
+      if(_kt_is_emacs_meta(iptr)) {
+	*optr++ = GL_ESC_CHAR;
+	iptr += 2;
+      } else {
+	*optr++ = *iptr++;
+      };
+      break;
+/*
+ * Possibly an emacs-style control character specification?
+ */
+    case 'C':
+      if(_kt_is_emacs_ctrl(iptr)) {
+	*optr++ = MAKE_CTRL(iptr[2]);
+	iptr += 3;
+      } else {
+	*optr++ = *iptr++;
+      };
+      break;
+    default:
+
+/*
+ * Convert embedded meta characters into an escape character followed
+ * by the meta-unmodified character.
+ */
+      if(IS_META_CHAR(*iptr)) {
+	*optr++ = GL_ESC_CHAR;
+	*optr++ = META_TO_CHAR(*iptr);
+	iptr++;
+/*
+ * To allow keysequences that start with printable characters to
+ * be distinguished from the cursor-key keywords, prepend a backslash
+ * to the former. This same operation is performed in gl_interpret_char()
+ * before looking up a keysequence that starts with a printable character.
+ */
+      } else if(iptr==keyseq && !IS_CTRL_CHAR(*iptr) &&
+		strcmp(keyseq, "up") != 0 && strcmp(keyseq, "down") != 0 &&
+		strcmp(keyseq, "left") != 0 && strcmp(keyseq, "right") != 0) {
+	*optr++ = '\\';
+	*optr++ = *iptr++;
+      } else {
+	*optr++ = *iptr++;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * How many characters were placed in the output array?
+ */
+  *nc = optr - binary;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Add, remove or modify an action.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt     KeyTab *  The key-binding table.
+ *  action   char *  The name of the action.
+ *  fn    KtKeyFn *  The function that implements the action, or NULL
+ *                   to remove an existing action.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    0 - OK.
+ *                   1 - Error.
+ */
+int _kt_set_action(KeyTab *kt, const char *action, KtKeyFn *fn)
+{
+  Symbol *sym;   /* The symbol table entry of the action */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!kt || !action) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "kt_set_action: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If no function was provided, delete an existing action.
+ */
+  if(!fn) {
+    sym = _del_HashSymbol(kt->actions, action);
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the action already exists, replace its action function.
+ */
+  sym = _find_HashSymbol(kt->actions, action);
+  if(sym) {
+    sym->fn = (void (*)(void))fn;
+    return 0;
+  };
+/*
+ * Add a new action.
+ */
+  if(!_new_HashSymbol(kt->actions, action, 0, (void (*)(void))fn, NULL, 0)) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Insufficient memory to record new key-binding action.\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Compare two strings of specified length which may contain embedded
+ * ascii NUL's.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  s1       char *  The first of the strings to be compared.
+ *  n1        int    The length of the string in s1.
+ *  s2       char *  The second of the strings to be compared.
+ *  n2        int    The length of the string in s2.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    < 0 if(s1 < s2)
+ *                     0 if(s1 == s2)
+ *                   > 0 if(s1 > s2)
+ */
+static int _kt_compare_strings(const char *s1, int n1, const char *s2, int n2)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Find the first character where the two strings differ.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<n1 && i<n2 && s1[i]==s2[i]; i++)
+    ;
+/*
+ * Did we hit the end of either string before finding a difference?
+ */
+  if(i==n1 || i==n2) {
+    if(n1 == n2)
+      return 0;
+    else if(n1==i)
+      return -1;
+    else
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Compare the two characters that differed to determine which
+ * string is greatest.
+ */
+  return s1[i] - s2[i];
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Assign a given action function to a binding table entry.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sym       KeySym *  The binding table entry to be modified.
+ *  binder  KtBinder    The source of the binding.
+ *  keyfn    KtKeyFn *  The action function.
+ */
+static void _kt_assign_action(KeySym *sym, KtBinder binder, KtKeyFn *keyfn)
+{
+/*
+ * Record the action according to its source.
+ */
+  switch(binder) {
+  case KTB_USER:
+    sym->user_fn = keyfn;
+    break;
+  case KTB_TERM:
+    sym->term_fn = keyfn;
+    break;
+  case KTB_NORM:
+  default:
+    sym->norm_fn = keyfn;
+    break;
+  };
+/*
+ * Which of the current set of bindings should be used?
+ */
+  if(sym->user_fn)
+    sym->keyfn = sym->user_fn;
+  else if(sym->norm_fn)
+    sym->keyfn = sym->norm_fn;
+  else
+    sym->keyfn = sym->term_fn;
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Remove all key bindings that came from a specified source.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt        KeyTab *  The table of key bindings.
+ *  binder  KtBinder    The source of the bindings to be cleared.
+ */
+void _kt_clear_bindings(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder)
+{
+  int oldkey;   /* The index of a key in the original binding table */
+  int newkey;   /* The index of a key in the updated binding table */
+/*
+ * If there is no table, then no bindings exist to be deleted.
+ */
+  if(!kt)
+    return;
+/*
+ * Clear bindings of the given source.
+ */
+  for(oldkey=0; oldkey<kt->nkey; oldkey++)
+    _kt_assign_action(kt->table + oldkey, binder, 0);
+/*
+ * Delete entries that now don't have a binding from any source.
+ */
+  newkey = 0;
+  for(oldkey=0; oldkey<kt->nkey; oldkey++) {
+    KeySym *sym = kt->table + oldkey;
+    if(!sym->keyfn) {
+      _del_StringMemString(kt->smem, sym->keyseq);
+    } else {
+      if(oldkey != newkey)
+	kt->table[newkey] = *sym;
+      newkey++;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Record the number of keys that were kept.
+ */
+  kt->nkey = newkey;
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Translate a backslash escape sequence to a binary character.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string  const char *   The characters that follow the backslash.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  endp    const char **  If endp!=NULL, on return *endp will be made to
+ *                         point to the character in string[] which follows
+ *                         the escape sequence.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        char     The binary character.
+ */
+static char _kt_backslash_escape(const char *string, const char **endp)
+{
+  char c;  /* The output character */
+/*
+ * Is the backslash followed by one or more octal digits?
+ */
+  switch(*string) {
+  case '0': case '1': case '2': case '3':
+  case '4': case '5': case '6': case '7':
+    c = strtol(string, (char **)&string, 8);
+    break;
+  case 'a':
+    c = '\a';
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case 'b':
+    c = '\b';
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case 'e': case 'E': /* Escape */
+    c = GL_ESC_CHAR;
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case 'f':
+    c = '\f';
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case 'n':
+    c = '\n';
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case 'r':
+    c = '\r';
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case 't':
+    c = '\t';
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case 'v':
+    c = '\v';
+    string++;
+    break;
+  case '\0':
+    c = '\\';
+    break;
+  default:
+    c = *string++;
+    break;
+  };
+/*
+ * Report the character which follows the escape sequence.
+ */
+  if(endp)
+    *endp = string;
+  return c;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the next two characters are M- and a third character
+ * follows. Otherwise return 0.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string   const char *  The sub-string to scan.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    1 - The next two characters are M- and these
+ *                             are followed by at least one character.
+ *                         0 - The next two characters aren't M- or no
+ *                             character follows a M- pair.
+ */
+static int _kt_is_emacs_meta(const char *string)
+{
+  return *string++ == 'M' && *string++ == '-' && *string;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the next two characters are C- and a third character
+ * follows. Otherwise return 0.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string   const char *  The sub-string to scan.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    1 - The next two characters are C- and these
+ *                             are followed by at least one character.
+ *                         0 - The next two characters aren't C- or no
+ *                             character follows a C- pair.
+ */
+static int _kt_is_emacs_ctrl(const char *string)
+{
+  return *string++ == 'C' && *string++ == '-' && *string;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Merge an array of bindings with existing bindings.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  kt                    KeyTab *  The table of key bindings.
+ *  binder              KtBinder    The source of the bindings.
+ *  bindings  const KtKeyBinding *  The array of bindings.
+ *  n                        int    The number of bindings in bindings[].
+ * Output:
+ *  return                   int    0 - OK.
+ *                                  1 - Error.
+ */
+int _kt_add_bindings(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder, const KtKeyBinding *bindings,
+		     unsigned n)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!kt || !bindings) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_kt_add_bindings: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Install the array of bindings.
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<n; i++) {
+    if(_kt_set_keybinding(kt, binder, bindings[i].keyseq, bindings[i].action))
+      return 1;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9436e8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/keytab.h
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+#ifndef keytab_h
+#define keytab_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include "libtecla.h"
+#include "hash.h"
+#include "strngmem.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*
+ * This module defines a binary-search symbol table of key-bindings.     *
+ *-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*
+ * All key-binding functions are defined as follows.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl    GetLine *  The resource object of this library.
+ *  count     int    A positive repeat count specified by the user,
+ *                   or 1. Action functions should ignore this if
+ *                   repeating the action multiple times isn't
+ *                   appropriate.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    0 - OK.
+ *                   1 - Error.
+ */
+#define KT_KEY_FN(fn) int (fn)(GetLine *gl, int count)
+
+typedef KT_KEY_FN(KtKeyFn);
+
+/*
+ * Define an entry of a key-binding binary symbol table.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  char *keyseq;         /* The key sequence that triggers the macro */
+  int nc;               /* The number of characters in keyseq[] */
+  KtKeyFn *user_fn;     /* A user specified binding (or 0 if none) */
+  KtKeyFn *term_fn;     /* A terminal-specific binding (or 0 if none) */
+  KtKeyFn *norm_fn;     /* The default binding (or 0 if none) */
+  KtKeyFn *keyfn;       /* The function to execute when this key sequence */
+                        /*  is seen. This is the function above which has */
+                        /*  the highest priority. */
+} KeySym;
+
+/*
+ * When allocating or reallocating the key-binding table, how
+ * many entries should be added?
+ */
+#define KT_TABLE_INC 100
+
+/*
+ * Define the size of the hash table that is used to associate action
+ * names with action functions. This should be a prime number.
+ */
+#define KT_HASH_SIZE 113
+
+/*
+ * Define a binary-symbol-table object.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  int size;           /* The allocated dimension of table[] */
+  int nkey;           /* The current number of members in the table */
+  KeySym *table;      /* The table of lexically sorted key sequences */
+  HashTable *actions; /* The hash table of actions */
+  StringMem *smem;    /* Memory for allocating strings */
+} KeyTab;
+
+KeyTab *_new_KeyTab(void);
+KeyTab *_del_KeyTab(KeyTab *kt);
+
+/*
+ * Enumerate the possible sources of key-bindings.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  KTB_USER,         /* This is a binding being set by the user */
+  KTB_TERM,         /* This is a binding taken from the terminal settings */
+  KTB_NORM          /* This is the default binding set by the library */
+} KtBinder;
+
+int _kt_set_keybinding(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder,
+		       const char *keyseq, const char *action);
+int _kt_set_keyfn(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder, const char *keyseq,
+		  KtKeyFn *keyfn);
+
+int _kt_set_action(KeyTab *kt, const char *action, KtKeyFn *fn);
+
+typedef enum {
+  KT_EXACT_MATCH,   /* An exact match was found */
+  KT_AMBIG_MATCH,   /* An ambiguous match was found */
+  KT_NO_MATCH,      /* No match was found */
+  KT_BAD_MATCH      /* An error occurred while searching */
+} KtKeyMatch;
+
+KtKeyMatch _kt_lookup_keybinding(KeyTab *kt, const char *binary_keyseq,
+				 int nc, int *first,int *last);
+
+/*
+ * Remove all key bindings that came from a specified source.
+ */
+void _kt_clear_bindings(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder);
+
+/*
+ * When installing an array of keybings each binding is defined by
+ * an element of the following type:
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  const char *keyseq;   /* The sequence of keys that trigger this binding */
+  const char *action;   /* The name of the action function that is triggered */
+} KtKeyBinding;
+
+/*
+ * Merge an array of bindings with existing bindings.
+ */
+int _kt_add_bindings(KeyTab *kt, KtBinder binder, const KtKeyBinding *bindings,
+		     unsigned n);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f124dd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.h
@@ -0,0 +1,1194 @@
+#ifndef libtecla_h
+#define libtecla_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>   /* FILE * */
+#include <stdlib.h>  /* size_t */
+#include <time.h>    /* time_t */
+
+/*
+ * The following are the three components of the libtecla version number.
+ * Note that it is better to use the libtecla_version() function than these
+ * macros since the macros only tell you which version of the library your
+ * code was compiled against, whereas the libtecla_version() function
+ * tells you which version of the shared tecla library your program is
+ * actually linked to.
+ */
+#define TECLA_MAJOR_VER 1
+#define TECLA_MINOR_VER 4
+#define TECLA_MICRO_VER 1
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the version number of the tecla library.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  major    int *   The major version number of the library
+ *                   will be assigned to *major. This number is
+ *                   only incremented when a change to the library is
+ *                   made that breaks binary (shared library) and/or
+ *                   compilation backwards compatibility.
+ *  minor    int *   The minor version number of the library
+ *                   will be assigned to *minor. This number is
+ *                   incremented whenever new functions are added to
+ *                   the public API.
+ *  micro    int *   The micro version number of the library will be
+ *                   assigned to *micro. This number is incremented
+ *                   whenever internal changes are made that don't
+ *                   change the public API, such as bug fixes and
+ *                   performance enhancements.
+ */
+void libtecla_version(int *major, int *minor, int *micro);
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * The getline module provides interactive command-line input, recall
+ * and editing by users at terminals. See the gl_getline(3) man page for
+ * more details.
+ *-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*
+ * Provide an opaque handle for the resource object that is defined in
+ * getline.h.
+ */
+typedef struct GetLine GetLine;
+
+/*
+ * The following two functions are used to create and delete the
+ * resource objects that are used by the gl_getline() function.
+ */
+GetLine *new_GetLine(size_t linelen, size_t histlen);
+GetLine *del_GetLine(GetLine *gl);
+
+/*
+ * Read a line into an internal buffer of gl.
+ */
+char *gl_get_line(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt, const char *start_line,
+		  int start_pos);
+
+/*
+ * Configure the application specific and/or user-specific behavior of
+ * gl_get_line().
+ */
+int gl_configure_getline(GetLine *gl, const char *app_string,
+			 const char *app_file, const char *user_file);
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * The file-expansion module provides facilities for expanding ~user/ and
+ * $envvar expressions, and for expanding glob-style wildcards.
+ * See the ef_expand_file(3) man page for more details.
+ *-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*
+ * ExpandFile objects contain the resources needed to expand pathnames.
+ */
+typedef struct ExpandFile ExpandFile;
+
+/*
+ * The following functions are used to create and delete the resource
+ * objects that are used by the ef_expand_file() function.
+ */
+ExpandFile *new_ExpandFile(void);
+ExpandFile *del_ExpandFile(ExpandFile *ef);
+
+/*
+ * A container of the following type is returned by ef_expand_file().
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  int exists;       /* True if the files in files[] currently exist. */
+                    /*  This only time that this may not be true is if */
+                    /*  the input filename didn't contain any wildcards */
+                    /*  and thus wasn't matched against existing files. */
+                    /*  In this case the single entry in 'nfile' may not */
+                    /*  refer to an existing file. */
+  int nfile;        /* The number of files in files[] */
+  char **files;     /* An array of 'nfile' filenames. */
+} FileExpansion;
+
+/* 
+ * The ef_expand_file() function expands a specified pathname, converting
+ * ~user/ and ~/ patterns at the start of the pathname to the
+ * corresponding home directories, replacing $envvar with the value of
+ * the corresponding environment variable, and then, if there are any
+ * wildcards, matching these against existing filenames.
+ *
+ * If no errors occur, a container is returned containing the array of
+ * files that resulted from the expansion. If there were no wildcards
+ * in the input pathname, this will contain just the original pathname
+ * after expansion of ~ and $ expressions. If there were any wildcards,
+ * then the array will contain the files that matched them. Note that
+ * if there were any wildcards but no existing files match them, this
+ * is counted as an error and NULL is returned.
+ *
+ * The supported wildcards and their meanings are:
+ *  *        -  Match any sequence of zero or more characters.
+ *  ?        -  Match any single character.
+ *  [chars]  -  Match any single character that appears in 'chars'.
+ *              If 'chars' contains an expression of the form a-b,
+ *              then any character between a and b, including a and b,
+ *              matches. The '-' character looses its special meaning
+ *              as a range specifier when it appears at the start
+ *              of the sequence of characters.
+ *  [^chars] -  The same as [chars] except that it matches any single
+ *              character that doesn't appear in 'chars'.
+ *
+ * Wildcard expressions are applied to individual filename components.
+ * They don't match across directory separators. A '.' character at
+ * the beginning of a filename component must also be matched
+ * explicitly by a '.' character in the input pathname, since these
+ * are UNIX's hidden files.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  fe         ExpandFile *  The pathname expansion resource object.
+ *  path       const char *  The path name to be expanded.
+ *  pathlen           int    The length of the suffix of path[] that
+ *                           constitutes the filename to be expanded,
+ *                           or -1 to specify that the whole of the
+ *                           path string should be used.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  FileExpansion *  A pointer to a results container within the
+ *                           given ExpandFile object. This contains an
+ *                           array of the pathnames that resulted from
+ *                           expanding ~ and $ expressions and from
+ *                           matching any wildcards, sorted into lexical
+ *                           order.
+ *
+ *                           This container and its contents will be
+ *                           recycled on subsequent calls, so if you need
+ *                           to keep the results of two successive runs,
+ *                           you will either have to allocate a private
+ *                           copy of the array, or use two ExpandFile
+ *                           objects.
+ *
+ *                           On error, NULL is returned. A description
+ *                           of the error can be acquired by calling the
+ *                           ef_last_error() function.
+ */
+FileExpansion *ef_expand_file(ExpandFile *ef, const char *path, int pathlen);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Print out an array of matching files.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  result  FileExpansion *   The container of the sorted array of
+ *                            expansions.
+ *  fp               FILE *   The output stream to write to.
+ *  term_width        int     The width of the terminal.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int     0 - OK.
+ *                            1 - Error.
+ */
+int ef_list_expansions(FileExpansion *result, FILE *fp, int term_width);
+
+/*
+ * The ef_last_error() function returns a description of the last error
+ * that occurred in a call ef_expand_file(). Note that this message is
+ * contained in an array which is allocated as part of *ef, and its
+ * contents thus potentially change on every call to ef_expand_file().
+ */
+const char *ef_last_error(ExpandFile *ef);
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * The WordCompletion module is used for completing incomplete words, such
+ * as filenames. Programs can use functions within this module to register
+ * their own customized completion functions.
+ *-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*
+ * Ambiguous completion matches are recorded in objects of the
+ * following type.
+ */
+typedef struct WordCompletion WordCompletion;
+
+/*
+ * Create a new completion object.
+ */
+WordCompletion *new_WordCompletion(void);
+
+/*
+ * Delete a redundant completion object.
+ */
+WordCompletion *del_WordCompletion(WordCompletion *cpl);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Callback functions declared and prototyped using the following macro
+ * are called upon to return an array of possible completion suffixes
+ * for the token that precedes a specified location in the given
+ * input line. It is up to this function to figure out where the token
+ * starts, and to call cpl_add_completion() to register each possible
+ * completion before returning.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl  WordCompletion *  An opaque pointer to the object that will
+ *                         contain the matches. This should be filled
+ *                         via zero or more calls to cpl_add_completion().
+ *  data           void *  The anonymous 'data' argument that was
+ *                         passed to cpl_complete_word() or
+ *                         gl_customize_completion()).
+ *  line     const char *  The current input line.
+ *  word_end        int    The index of the character in line[] which
+ *                         follows the end of the token that is being
+ *                         completed.
+ * Output
+ *  return          int    0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+#define CPL_MATCH_FN(fn) int (fn)(WordCompletion *cpl, void *data, \
+                                  const char *line, int word_end)
+typedef CPL_MATCH_FN(CplMatchFn);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Optional callback functions declared and prototyped using the
+ * following macro are called upon to return non-zero if a given
+ * file, specified by its pathname, is to be included in a list of
+ * completions.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  data            void *  The application specified pointer which
+ *                          was specified when this callback function
+ *                          was registered. This can be used to have
+ *                          anything you like passed to your callback.
+ *  pathname  const char *  The pathname of the file to be checked to
+ *                          see if it should be included in the list
+ *                          of completions.
+ * Output
+ *  return           int    0 - Ignore this file.
+ *                          1 - Do include this file in the list
+ *                              of completions.
+ */
+#define CPL_CHECK_FN(fn) int (fn)(void *data, const char *pathname)
+typedef CPL_CHECK_FN(CplCheckFn);
+
+/*
+ * You can use the following CplCheckFn callback function to only
+ * have executables included in a list of completions.
+ */
+CPL_CHECK_FN(cpl_check_exe);
+
+/*
+ * cpl_file_completions() is the builtin filename completion callback
+ * function. This can also be called by your own custom CPL_MATCH_FN()
+ * callback functions. To do this pass on all of the arguments of your
+ * custom callback function to cpl_file_completions(), with the exception
+ * of the (void *data) argument. The data argument should either be passed
+ * NULL to request the default behaviour of the file-completion function,
+ * or be passed a pointer to a CplFileConf structure (see below). In the
+ * latter case the contents of the structure modify the behavior of the
+ * file-completer.
+ */
+CPL_MATCH_FN(cpl_file_completions);
+
+/*
+ * Objects of the following type can be used to change the default
+ * behavior of the cpl_file_completions() callback function.
+ */
+typedef struct CplFileConf CplFileConf;
+
+/*
+ * If you want to change the behavior of the cpl_file_completions()
+ * callback function, call the following function to allocate a
+ * configuration object, then call one or more of the subsequent
+ * functions to change any of the default configuration parameters
+ * that you don't want. This function returns NULL when there is
+ * insufficient memory.
+ */
+CplFileConf *new_CplFileConf(void);
+
+/*
+ * If backslashes in the prefix being passed to cpl_file_completions()
+ * should be treated as literal characters, call the following function
+ * with literal=1. Otherwise the default is to treat them as escape
+ * characters which remove the special meanings of spaces etc..
+ */
+void cfc_literal_escapes(CplFileConf *cfc, int literal);
+
+/*
+ * Before calling cpl_file_completions(), call this function if you
+ * know the index at which the filename prefix starts in the input line.
+ * Otherwise by default, or if you specify start_index to be -1, the
+ * filename is taken to start after the first unescaped space preceding
+ * the cursor, or the start of the line, which ever comes first.
+ */
+void cfc_file_start(CplFileConf *cfc, int start_index);
+
+/*
+ * If you only want certain types of files to be included in the
+ * list of completions, use the following function to specify a
+ * callback function which will be called to ask whether a given file
+ * should be included. The chk_data argument is will be passed to the
+ * callback function whenever it is called and can be anything you want.
+ */
+void cfc_set_check_fn(CplFileConf *cfc, CplCheckFn *chk_fn, void *chk_data);
+
+/*
+ * The following function deletes a CplFileConf objects previously
+ * returned by new_CplFileConf(). It always returns NULL.
+ */
+CplFileConf *del_CplFileConf(CplFileConf *cfc);
+
+/*
+ * The following configuration structure is deprecated. Do not change
+ * its contents, since this will break any programs that still use it,
+ * and don't use it in new programs. Instead use opaque CplFileConf
+ * objects as described above. cpl_file_completions() figures out
+ * what type of structure you pass it, by virtue of a magic int code
+ * placed at the start of CplFileConf object by new_CplFileConf().
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  int escaped;     /* Opposite to the argument of cfc_literal_escapes() */
+  int file_start;  /* Equivalent to the argument of cfc_file_start() */
+} CplFileArgs;
+/*
+ * This initializes the deprecated CplFileArgs structures.
+ */
+void cpl_init_FileArgs(CplFileArgs *cfa);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * When an error occurs while performing a completion, custom completion
+ * callback functions should register a terse description of the error
+ * by calling cpl_record_error(). This message will then be returned on
+ * the next call to cpl_last_error() and used by getline to display an
+ * error message to the user.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl  WordCompletion *  The string-completion resource object that was
+ *                         originally passed to the callback.
+ *  errmsg   const char *  The description of the error.
+ */
+void cpl_record_error(WordCompletion *cpl, const char *errmsg);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function can be used to replace the builtin filename-completion
+ * function with one of the user's choice. The user's completion function
+ * has the option of calling the builtin filename-completion function
+ * if it believes that the token that it has been presented with is a
+ * filename (see cpl_file_completions() above).
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ *  data             void *  This is passed to match_fn() whenever it is
+ *                           called. It could, for example, point to a
+ *                           symbol table that match_fn() would look up
+ *                           matches in.
+ *  match_fn   CplMatchFn *  The function that will identify the prefix
+ *                           to be completed from the input line, and
+ *                           report matching symbols.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_customize_completion(GetLine *gl, void *data, CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Change the terminal (or stream) that getline interacts with.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ *  input_fp         FILE *  The stdio stream to read from.
+ *  output_fp        FILE *  The stdio stream to write to.
+ *  term       const char *  The terminal type. This can be NULL if
+ *                           either or both of input_fp and output_fp don't
+ *                           refer to a terminal. Otherwise it should refer
+ *                           to an entry in the terminal information database.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_change_terminal(GetLine *gl, FILE *input_fp, FILE *output_fp,
+		       const char *term);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * The following functions can be used to save and restore the contents
+ * of the history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ *  filename   const char *  The name of the new file to write to.
+ *  comment    const char *  Extra information such as timestamps will
+ *                           be recorded on a line started with this
+ *                           string, the idea being that the file can
+ *                           double as a command file. Specify "" if
+ *                           you don't care. Be sure to specify the
+ *                           same string to both functions.
+ *  max_lines         int    The maximum number of lines to save, or -1
+ *                           to save all of the lines in the history
+ *                           list.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int     0 - OK.
+ *                            1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_save_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename, const char *comment,
+		    int max_lines);
+int gl_load_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename, const char *comment);
+
+/*
+ * Enumerate file-descriptor events that can be waited for.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  GLFD_READ,   /* Watch for data waiting to be read from a file descriptor */
+  GLFD_WRITE,  /* Watch for ability to write to a file descriptor */
+  GLFD_URGENT  /* Watch for urgent out-of-band data on the file descriptor */
+} GlFdEvent;
+
+/*
+ * The following enumeration is used for the return status of file
+ * descriptor event callbacks.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  GLFD_ABORT,    /* Cause gl_get_line() to abort with an error */
+  GLFD_REFRESH,  /* Redraw the input line and continue waiting for input */
+  GLFD_CONTINUE  /* Continue to wait for input, without redrawing the line */
+} GlFdStatus;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * While gl_get_line() is waiting for terminal input, it can also be
+ * asked to listen for activity on arbitrary file descriptors.
+ * Callback functions of the following type can be registered to be
+ * called when activity is seen. If your callback needs to write to
+ * the terminal or use signals, please see the gl_get_line(3) man
+ * page.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl       GetLine *  The gl_get_line() resource object. You can use
+ *                      this safely to call gl_watch_fd() or
+ *                      gl_watch_time(). The effect of calling other
+ *                      functions that take a gl argument is undefined,
+ *                      and must be avoided.
+ *  data        void *  A pointer to arbitrary callback data, as originally
+ *                      registered with gl_watch_fd().
+ *  fd           int    The file descriptor that has activity.
+ *  event  GlFdEvent    The activity seen on the file descriptor. The
+ *                      inclusion of this argument allows the same
+ *                      callback to be registered for multiple events.
+ * Output:
+ *  return GlFdStatus   GLFD_ABORT    - Cause gl_get_line() to abort with
+ *                                      an error (set errno if you need it).
+ *                      GLFD_REFRESH  - Redraw the input line and continue
+ *                                      waiting for input. Use this if you
+ *                                      wrote something to the terminal.
+ *                      GLFD_CONTINUE - Continue to wait for input, without
+ *                                      redrawing the line.
+ */
+#define GL_FD_EVENT_FN(fn) GlFdStatus (fn)(GetLine *gl, void *data, int fd, \
+					   GlFdEvent event)
+typedef GL_FD_EVENT_FN(GlFdEventFn);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Where possible, register a function and associated data to be called
+ * whenever a specified event is seen on a file descriptor.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of the command-line input
+ *                           module.
+ *  fd                int    The file descriptor to watch.
+ *  event       GlFdEvent    The type of activity to watch for.
+ *  callback  GlFdEventFn *  The function to call when the specified
+ *                           event occurs. Setting this to 0 removes
+ *                           any existing callback.
+ *  data             void *  A pointer to arbitrary data to pass to the
+ *                           callback function.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - OK.
+ *                           1 - Either gl==NULL, or this facility isn't
+ *                               available on the the host system
+ *                               (ie. select() isn't available). No
+ *                               error message is generated in the latter
+ *                               case.
+ */
+int gl_watch_fd(GetLine *gl, int fd, GlFdEvent event,
+		GlFdEventFn *callback, void *data);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Switch history streams. History streams represent separate history
+ * lists recorded within a single history buffer. Different streams
+ * are distinguished by integer identifiers chosen by the calling
+ * appplicaton. Initially new_GetLine() sets the stream identifier to
+ * 0. Whenever a new line is appended to the history list, the current
+ * stream identifier is recorded with it, and history lookups only
+ * consider lines marked with the current stream identifier.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  id     unsigned    The new history stream identifier.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_group_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned id);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Display the contents of the history list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  fp         FILE *  The stdio output stream to write to.
+ *  fmt  const char *  A format string. This containing characters to be
+ *                     written verbatim, plus any of the following
+ *                     format directives:
+ *                       %D  -  The date, formatted like 2001-11-20
+ *                       %T  -  The time of day, formatted like 23:59:59
+ *                       %N  -  The sequential entry number of the
+ *                              line in the history buffer.
+ *                       %G  -  The number of the history group that
+ *                              the line belongs to.
+ *                       %%  -  A literal % character.
+ *                       %H  -  The history line itself.
+ *                     Note that a '\n' newline character is not
+ *                     appended by default.
+ *  all_groups  int    If true, display history lines from all
+ *                     history groups. Otherwise only display
+ *                     those of the current history group.
+ *  max_lines   int    If max_lines is < 0, all available lines
+ *                     are displayed. Otherwise only the most
+ *                     recent max_lines lines will be displayed.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_show_history(GetLine *gl, FILE *fp, const char *fmt, int all_groups,
+		    int max_lines);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Resize or delete the history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  bufsize  size_t    The number of bytes in the history buffer, or 0
+ *                     to delete the buffer completely.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      int    0 - OK.
+ *                     1 - Insufficient memory (the previous buffer
+ *                         will have been retained). No error message
+ *                         will be displayed.
+ */
+int gl_resize_history(GetLine *gl, size_t bufsize);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Set an upper limit to the number of lines that can be recorded in the
+ * history list, or remove a previously specified limit.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  max_lines   int    The maximum number of lines to allow, or -1 to
+ *                     cancel a previous limit and allow as many lines
+ *                     as will fit in the current history buffer size.
+ */
+void gl_limit_history(GetLine *gl, int max_lines);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Discard either all historical lines, or just those associated with the
+ * current history group.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  all_groups  int    If true, clear all of the history. If false,
+ *                     clear only the stored lines associated with the
+ *                     currently selected history group.
+ */
+void gl_clear_history(GetLine *gl, int all_groups);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Temporarily enable or disable the gl_get_line() history mechanism.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl      GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  enable      int    If true, turn on the history mechanism. If
+ *                     false, disable it.
+ */
+void gl_toggle_history(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+/*
+ * Objects of the following type are returned by gl_terminal_size().
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  int nline;        /* The terminal has nline lines */
+  int ncolumn;      /* The terminal has ncolumn columns */
+} GlTerminalSize;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Update if necessary, and return the current size of the terminal.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  def_ncolumn       int    If the number of columns in the terminal
+ *                           can't be determined, substitute this number.
+ *  def_nline         int    If the number of lines in the terminal can't
+ *                           be determined, substitute this number.
+ * Output:
+ *  return GlTerminalSize    The current terminal size.
+ */
+GlTerminalSize gl_terminal_size(GetLine *gl, int def_ncolumn, int def_nline);
+
+/*
+ * The gl_lookup_history() function returns information in an
+ * argument of the following type.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  const char *line;    /* The requested history line */
+  unsigned group;      /* The history group to which the */
+                       /*  line belongs. */
+  time_t timestamp;    /* The date and time at which the */
+                       /*  line was originally entered. */
+} GlHistoryLine;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Lookup a history line by its sequential number of entry in the
+ * history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  id      unsigned long    The identification number of the line to
+ *                           be returned, where 0 denotes the first line
+ *                           that was entered in the history list, and
+ *                           each subsequently added line has a number
+ *                           one greater than the previous one. For
+ *                           the range of lines currently in the list,
+ *                           see the gl_range_of_history() function.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  line    GlHistoryLine *  A pointer to the variable in which to
+ *                           return the details of the line.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - The line is no longer in the history
+ *                               list, and *line has not been changed.
+ *                           1 - The requested line can be found in
+ *                               *line. Note that the string in
+ *                               line->line is part of the history
+ *                               buffer and will change, so a private
+ *                               copy should be made if you wish to
+ *                               use it after subsequent calls to any
+ *                               functions that take gl as an argument.
+ */
+int gl_lookup_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned long id, GlHistoryLine *line);
+
+/*
+ * The gl_state_of_history() function returns information in an argument
+ * of the following type.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  int enabled;     /* True if history is enabled */
+  unsigned group;  /* The current history group */
+  int max_lines;   /* The current upper limit on the number of lines */
+                   /*  in the history list, or -1 if unlimited. */
+} GlHistoryState;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the state of the history list. Note that any of the input/output
+ * pointers can be specified as NULL.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  state  GlHistoryState *  A pointer to the variable in which to record
+ *                           the return values.
+ */
+void gl_state_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistoryState *state);
+
+/*
+ * The gl_range_of_history() function returns information in an argument
+ * of the following type.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  unsigned long oldest;  /* The sequential entry number of the oldest */
+                         /*  line in the history list. */
+  unsigned long newest;  /* The sequential entry number of the newest */
+                         /*  line in the history list. */
+  int nlines;            /* The number of lines in the history list */
+} GlHistoryRange;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Query the number and range of lines in the history buffer.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl            GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  range  GlHistoryRange *  A pointer to the variable in which to record
+ *                           the return values. If range->nline=0, the
+ *                           range of lines will be given as 0-0.
+ */
+void gl_range_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistoryRange *range);
+
+/*
+ * The gl_size_of_history() function returns information in an argument
+ * of the following type.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  size_t size;      /* The size of the history buffer (bytes) */
+  size_t used;      /* The number of bytes of the history buffer */
+                    /*  that are currently occupied. */
+} GlHistorySize;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the size of the history buffer and the amount of the
+ * buffer that is currently in use.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  GlHistorySize size *  A pointer to the variable in which to return
+ *                        the results.
+ */
+void gl_size_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistorySize *size);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Specify whether text that users type should be displayed or hidden.
+ * In the latter case, only the prompt is displayed, and the final
+ * input line is not archived in the history list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The input-line history maintenance object.
+ *  enable         int     0 - Disable echoing.
+ *                         1 - Enable echoing.
+ *                        -1 - Just query the mode without changing it.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    The echoing disposition that was in effect
+ *                        before this function was called:
+ *                         0 - Echoing was disabled.
+ *                         1 - Echoing was enabled.
+ */
+int gl_echo_mode(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function can be called from gl_get_line() callbacks to have
+ * the prompt changed when they return. It has no effect if gl_get_line()
+ * is not currently being invoked.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl         GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  prompt  const char *  The new prompt.
+ */
+void gl_replace_prompt(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt);
+
+/*
+ * Enumerate the available prompt formatting styles.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  GL_LITERAL_PROMPT,   /* Display the prompt string literally */
+  GL_FORMAT_PROMPT     /* The prompt string can contain any of the */
+                       /* following formatting directives: */
+                       /*   %B  -  Display subsequent characters */
+                       /*          with a bold font. */
+                       /*   %b  -  Stop displaying characters */
+                       /*          with the bold font. */
+                       /*   %U  -  Underline subsequent characters. */
+                       /*   %u  -  Stop underlining characters. */
+                       /*   %S  -  Highlight subsequent characters */
+                       /*          (also known as standout mode). */
+                       /*   %s  -  Stop highlighting characters */
+                       /*   %%  -  Display a single % character. */
+} GlPromptStyle;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Specify whether to heed text attribute directives within prompt
+ * strings.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  style  GlPromptStyle    The style of prompt (see the definition of
+ *                          GlPromptStyle in libtecla.h for details).
+ */
+void gl_prompt_style(GetLine *gl, GlPromptStyle style);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Remove a signal from the list of signals that gl_get_line() traps.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  signo            int    The number of the signal to be ignored.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Error.
+ */
+int gl_ignore_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo);
+
+/*
+ * A bitwise union of the following enumerators is passed to
+ * gl_trap_signal() to specify the environment in which the
+ * application's signal handler is to be called.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  GLS_RESTORE_SIG=1,  /* Restore the caller's signal environment */
+                      /* while handling the signal. */
+  GLS_RESTORE_TTY=2,  /* Restore the caller's terminal settings */
+                      /* while handling the signal. */
+  GLS_RESTORE_LINE=4, /* Move the cursor to the start of the next line */
+  GLS_REDRAW_LINE=8,  /* Redraw the input line when the signal handler */
+                      /*  returns. */
+  GLS_UNBLOCK_SIG=16, /* Normally a signal who's delivery is found to */
+                      /*  be blocked by the calling application is not */
+                      /*  trapped by gl_get_line(). Including this flag */
+                      /*  causes it to be temporarily unblocked and */
+                      /*  trapped while gl_get_line() is executing. */
+  GLS_DONT_FORWARD=32,/* Don't forward the signal to the signal handler */
+                      /*  of the calling program. */
+  GLS_RESTORE_ENV = GLS_RESTORE_SIG | GLS_RESTORE_TTY | GLS_REDRAW_LINE,
+  GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT = GLS_RESTORE_ENV | GLS_RESTORE_LINE
+} GlSignalFlags;
+
+/*
+ * The following enumerators are passed to gl_trap_signal() to tell
+ * it what to do after the application's signal handler has been called.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  GLS_RETURN,      /* Return the line as though the user had pressed the */
+                   /*  return key. */
+  GLS_ABORT,       /* Cause gl_get_line() to return NULL */
+  GLS_CONTINUE     /* After handling the signal, resume command line editing */
+} GlAfterSignal;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Tell gl_get_line() how to respond to a given signal. This can be used
+ * both to override the default responses to signals that gl_get_line()
+ * normally catches and to add new signals to the list that are to be
+ * caught.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ *  signo            int    The number of the signal to be caught.
+ *  flags       unsigned    A bitwise union of GlSignalFlags enumerators.
+ *  after  GlAfterSignal    What to do after the application's signal
+ *                          handler has been called.
+ *  errno_value      int    The value to set errno to.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - Insufficient memory to record the
+ *                              new signal disposition.
+ */
+int gl_trap_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo, unsigned flags,
+		   GlAfterSignal after, int errno_value);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the last signal that was caught by the most recent call to
+ * gl_get_line(), or -1 if no signals were caught. This is useful if
+ * gl_get_line() returns errno=EINTR and you need to find out what signal
+ * caused it to abort.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  gl           GetLine *  The resource object of gl_get_line().
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    The last signal caught by the most recent
+ *                          call to gl_get_line(), or -1 if no signals
+ *                          were caught.
+ */
+int gl_last_signal(const GetLine *gl);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * This function is designed to be called by CPL_MATCH_FN() callback
+ * functions. It adds one possible completion of the token that is being
+ * completed to an array of completions. If the completion needs any
+ * special quoting to be valid when displayed in the input line, this
+ * quoting must be included in the string.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl      WordCompletion *  The argument of the same name that was passed
+ *                             to the calling CPL_MATCH_FN() callback function.
+ *  line         const char *  The input line, as received by the callback
+ *                             function.
+ *  word_start          int    The index within line[] of the start of the
+ *                             word that is being completed. If an empty
+ *                             string is being completed, set this to be
+ *                             the same as word_end.
+ *  word_end            int    The index within line[] of the character which
+ *                             follows the incomplete word, as received by the
+ *                             callback function.
+ *  suffix       const char *  The appropriately quoted string that could
+ *                             be appended to the incomplete token to complete
+ *                             it. A copy of this string will be allocated
+ *                             internally.
+ *  type_suffix  const char *  When listing multiple completions, gl_get_line()
+ *                             appends this string to the completion to indicate
+ *                             its type to the user. If not pertinent pass "".
+ *                             Otherwise pass a literal or static string.
+ *  cont_suffix  const char *  If this turns out to be the only completion,
+ *                             gl_get_line() will append this string as
+ *                             a continuation. For example, the builtin
+ *                             file-completion callback registers a directory
+ *                             separator here for directory matches, and a
+ *                             space otherwise. If the match were a function
+ *                             name you might want to append an open
+ *                             parenthesis, etc.. If not relevant pass "".
+ *                             Otherwise pass a literal or static string.
+ * Output:
+ *  return              int    0 - OK.
+ *                             1 - Error.
+ */
+int cpl_add_completion(WordCompletion *cpl, const char *line,
+		       int word_start, int word_end, const char *suffix,
+		       const char *type_suffix, const char *cont_suffix);
+
+/*
+ * Each possible completion string is recorded in an array element of
+ * the following type.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  char *completion;        /* The matching completion string */
+  char *suffix;            /* The pointer into completion[] at which the */
+                           /*  string was extended. */
+  const char *type_suffix; /* A suffix to be added when listing completions */
+                           /*  to indicate the type of the completion. */
+} CplMatch;
+
+/*
+ * Completions are returned in a container of the following form.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  char *suffix;            /* The common initial part of all of the */
+                           /*  completion suffixes. */
+  const char *cont_suffix; /* Optional continuation string to be appended to */
+                           /*  the sole completion when nmatch==1. */
+  CplMatch *matches;       /* The array of possible completion strings, */
+                           /*  sorted into lexical order. */
+  int nmatch;              /* The number of elements in matches[] */
+} CplMatches;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Given an input line and the point at which completion is to be
+ * attempted, return an array of possible completions.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl    WordCompletion *  The word-completion resource object.
+ *  line       const char *  The current input line.
+ *  word_end          int    The index of the character in line[] which
+ *                           follows the end of the token that is being
+ *                           completed.
+ *  data             void *  Anonymous 'data' to be passed to match_fn().
+ *  match_fn   CplMatchFn *  The function that will identify the prefix
+ *                           to be completed from the input line, and
+ *                           record completion suffixes.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     CplMatches *  The container of the array of possible
+ *                           completions. The returned pointer refers
+ *                           to a container owned by the parent Completion
+ *                           object, and its contents thus potentially
+ *                           change on every call to cpl_matches().
+ */
+CplMatches *cpl_complete_word(WordCompletion *cpl, const char *line,
+			      int word_end, void *data, 
+			      CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Print out an array of matching completions.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  result  CplMatches *   The container of the sorted array of
+ *                         completions.
+ *  fp            FILE *   The output stream to write to.
+ *  term_width     int     The width of the terminal.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int     0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+int cpl_list_completions(CplMatches *result, FILE *fp, int term_width);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the error that occurred on the last call to
+ * cpl_complete_word() or cpl_add_completion().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cpl   WordCompletion *  The string-completion resource object.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    const char *  The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *cpl_last_error(WordCompletion *cpl);
+
+/*
+ * PathCache objects encapsulate the resources needed to record
+ * files of interest from comma-separated lists of directories.
+ */
+typedef struct PathCache PathCache;
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create an object who's function is to maintain a cache of filenames
+ * found within a list of directories, and provide quick lookup and
+ * completion of selected files in this cache.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return     PathCache *  The new, initially empty cache, or NULL
+ *                          on error.
+ */
+PathCache *new_PathCache(void);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a given cache of files, returning the resources that it
+ * was using to the system.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc      PathCache *  The cache to be deleted (can be NULL).
+ * Output:
+ *  return  PathCache *  The deleted object (ie. allways NULL).
+ */
+PathCache *del_PathCache(PathCache *pc);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the last path-caching error that occurred.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc     PathCache *   The filename cache that suffered the error.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      char *   The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *pca_last_error(PathCache *pc);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Build the list of files of interest contained in a given
+ * colon-separated list of directories.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc         PathCache *  The cache in which to store the names of
+ *                          the files that are found in the list of
+ *                          directories.
+ *  path      const char *  A colon-separated list of directory
+ *                          paths. Under UNIX, when searching for
+ *                          executables, this should be the return
+ *                          value of getenv("PATH").
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - An error occurred.
+ */
+int pca_scan_path(PathCache *pc, const char *path);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If you want subsequent calls to pca_lookup_file() and
+ * pca_path_completions() to only return the filenames of certain
+ * types of files, for example executables, or filenames ending in
+ * ".ps", call this function to register a file-selection callback
+ * function. This callback function takes the full pathname of a file,
+ * plus application-specific data, and returns 1 if the file is of
+ * interest, and zero otherwise.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc         PathCache *  The filename cache.
+ *  check_fn  CplCheckFn *  The function to call to see if the name of
+ *                          a given file should be included in the
+ *                          cache. This determines what type of files
+ *                          will reside in the cache. To revert to
+ *                          selecting all files, regardless of type,
+ *                          pass 0 here.
+ *  data            void *  You can pass a pointer to anything you
+ *                          like here, including NULL. It will be
+ *                          passed to your check_fn() callback
+ *                          function, for its private use.
+ */
+void pca_set_check_fn(PathCache *pc, CplCheckFn *check_fn, void *data);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Given the simple name of a file, search the cached list of files
+ * in the order in which they where found in the list of directories
+ * previously presented to pca_scan_path(), and return the pathname
+ * of the first file which has this name.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc     PathCache *  The cached list of files.
+ *  name  const char *  The name of the file to lookup.
+ *  name_len     int    The length of the filename substring at the
+ *                      beginning of name[], or -1 to assume that the
+ *                      filename occupies the whole of the string.
+ *  literal      int    If this argument is zero, lone backslashes
+ *                      in name[] are ignored during comparison
+ *                      with filenames in the cache, under the
+ *                      assumption that they were in the input line
+ *                      soley to escape the special significance of
+ *                      characters like spaces. To have them treated
+ *                      as normal characters, give this argument a
+ *                      non-zero value, such as 1.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      char *  The pathname of the first matching file,
+ *                      or NULL if not found. Note that the returned
+ *                      pointer points to memory owned by *pc, and
+ *                      will become invalid on the next call.
+ */
+char *pca_lookup_file(PathCache *pc, const char *name, int name_len,
+		      int literal);
+
+/*
+ * Objects of the following type can be used to change the default
+ * behavior of the pca_path_completions() callback function.
+ */
+typedef struct PcaPathConf PcaPathConf;
+
+/*
+ * pca_path_completions() is a completion callback function for use directly
+ * with cpl_complete_word() or gl_customize_completions(), or indirectly
+ * from your own completion callback function. It requires that a PcaPathConf
+ * object be passed via its 'void *data' argument (see below).
+ */
+CPL_MATCH_FN(pca_path_completions);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Allocate and initialize a pca_path_completions() configuration object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc         PathCache *  The filename cache in which to look for
+ *                          file name completions.
+ * Output:
+ *  return   PcaPathConf *  The new configuration structure, or NULL
+ *                          on error.
+ */
+PcaPathConf *new_PcaPathConf(PathCache *pc);
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Deallocate memory, previously allocated by new_PcaPathConf().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ppc     PcaPathConf *  Any pointer previously returned by
+ *                         new_PcaPathConf() [NULL is allowed].
+ * Output:
+ *  return  PcaPathConf *  The deleted structure (always NULL).
+ */
+PcaPathConf *del_PcaPathConf(PcaPathConf *ppc);
+
+/*
+ * If backslashes in the prefix being passed to pca_path_completions()
+ * should be treated as literal characters, call the following function
+ * with literal=1. Otherwise the default is to treat them as escape
+ * characters which remove the special meanings of spaces etc..
+ */
+void ppc_literal_escapes(PcaPathConf *ppc, int literal);
+
+/*
+ * Before calling pca_path_completions, call this function if you know
+ * the index at which the filename prefix starts in the input line.
+ * Otherwise by default, or if you specify start_index to be -1, the
+ * filename is taken to start after the first unescaped space preceding
+ * the cursor, or the start of the line, whichever comes first.
+ */
+void ppc_file_start(PcaPathConf *ppc, int start_index);
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.map b/libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.map
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e774b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/libtecla.map
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+# This mapfile (or version script) lists the public symbols that are
+# publically exported by each version of the tecla library. This file
+# has the format required by the Sun and Linux linkers, and also acts
+# as a template from which map files for other systems can be derived
+# with awk or sed.
+#
+# Under Solaris and Linux, this map file is used by ld during shared
+# library creation. It has two purposes:
+#
+# 1. It specifies which symbols in the library are to be made visible
+#    to applications. This has the dual benefits of reducing namespace
+#    polution, and of preventing applications from using private
+#    internal library functions that might change or disappear in
+#    future releases.
+#
+# 2. The information listed in this file is recorded in the shared
+#    library, such that when an application is linked against it, the
+#    linker can record a dependency in the application which says
+#    which is the earliest library version which included all of the
+#    symbols that the application needs. This means that if the
+#    application is copied to another system that has an earlier
+#    version of the library, the linker can quickly determine whether
+#    the earlier version contains all of the symbols that it needs.
+#
+# Under Linux, mapfiles can also be used to allow multiple
+# incompatible versions of a given function to exist in a library,
+# thus supporting applications that were compiled against different
+# incompatible versions of the library. Since this feature (and the
+# inclusion of .symver directives) isn't supported by Solaris, it
+# can't be included in this file. Non backwards compatibility in the
+# ABI must instead be handled in the more traditional way, by
+# incrementing the major version number.
+#
+# When a new minor release is made, a new tecla_1.x specification
+# should be added which inherits the symbols of the previous release
+# and lists newly added functions. For example, below you will find
+# the following clause:
+#
+# tecla_1.3 {
+#    global:
+#	ef_list_expansions;
+# } tecla_1.2;
+#
+# This says that ef_list_expansions is the name of a public function
+# that was added in the 1.3 release, and that the symbols defined in
+# the previous tecla_1.2 clause have been inherited by tecla_1.3.
+#
+# For more details see the following URL:
+#
+# http://www.usenix.org/publications/library/proceedings/als2000/browndavid.html
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+tecla_1.2 {
+    global:
+	cfc_file_start;
+	cfc_literal_escapes;
+	cfc_set_check_fn;
+	cpl_add_completion;
+	cpl_check_exe;
+	cpl_complete_word;
+	cpl_file_completions;
+	cpl_init_FileArgs;
+	cpl_last_error;
+	cpl_list_completions;
+	cpl_record_error;
+	del_CplFileConf;
+	del_ExpandFile;
+	del_GetLine;
+	del_PathCache;
+	del_PcaPathConf;
+	del_WordCompletion;
+	ef_expand_file;
+	ef_last_error;
+	gl_change_terminal;
+	gl_customize_completion;
+	gl_get_line;
+	new_CplFileConf;
+	new_ExpandFile;
+	new_GetLine;
+	new_PathCache;
+	new_PcaPathConf;
+	new_WordCompletion;
+	pca_last_error;
+	pca_lookup_file;
+	pca_path_completions;
+	pca_scan_path;
+	pca_set_check_fn;
+	ppc_file_start;
+	ppc_literal_escapes;
+
+    local:
+	*;
+};
+
+tecla_1.3 {
+    global:
+	ef_list_expansions;
+} tecla_1.2;
+
+tecla_1.4 {
+    global:
+	gl_configure_getline;
+	gl_save_history;
+	gl_load_history;
+	gl_group_history;
+	gl_show_history;
+	gl_resize_history;
+	gl_limit_history;
+	gl_clear_history;
+	gl_toggle_history;
+	gl_watch_fd;
+	libtecla_version;
+	gl_terminal_size;
+	gl_state_of_history;
+	gl_range_of_history;
+	gl_size_of_history;
+	gl_lookup_history;
+	gl_echo_mode;
+	gl_replace_prompt;
+	gl_prompt_style;
+	gl_ignore_signal;
+	gl_trap_signal;
+	gl_last_signal;
+} tecla_1.3;
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_file_start.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_file_start.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_file_start.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_literal_escapes.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_literal_escapes.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_literal_escapes.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_set_check_fn.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_set_check_fn.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cfc_set_check_fn.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_add_completion.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_add_completion.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_add_completion.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_complete_word.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_complete_word.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae76439
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_complete_word.3
@@ -0,0 +1,405 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd
+.\" 
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+.\" distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+.\" to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+.\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+.\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+.\" 
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+.\" OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+.\" HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+.\" INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\" 
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+.\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+.\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+.\" of the copyright holder.
+.TH cpl_complete_word 3
+.SH NAME
+cpl_complete_word, cfc_file_start, cfc_literal_escapes, cfc_set_check_fn, cpl_add_completion, cpl_file_completions, cpl_last_error, cpl_list_completions, cpl_record_error, del_CplFileConf, del_WordCompletion, new_CplFileConf, new_WordCompletion \- lookup possible completions for a word
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <libtecla.h>
+
+WordCompletion *new_WordCompletion(void);
+
+WordCompletion *del_WordCompletion(WordCompletion *cpl);
+
+#define CPL_MATCH_FN(fn) int (fn)(WordCompletion *cpl, \\
+                                  void *data, \\
+                                  const char *line, \\
+                                  int word_end)
+typedef CPL_MATCH_FN(CplMatchFn);
+
+CPL_MATCH_FN(cpl_file_completions);
+
+CplMatches *cpl_complete_word(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                              const char *line,
+                              int word_end, void *data,
+                              CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+int cpl_list_completions(CplMatches *result, FILE *fp,
+                         int term_width);
+
+int cpl_add_completion(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                       const char *line, int word_start,
+                       int word_end, const char *suffix,
+                       const char *type_suffix,
+                       const char *cont_suffix);
+
+void cpl_record_error(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                      const char *errmsg);
+
+const char *cpl_last_error(WordCompletion *cpl);
+
+.fi
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+
+The \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1 function is part of the tecla library
+(see the libtecla(3) man page). It is usually called behind the scenes
+by \f3gl_get_line(3)\f1, but can also be called separately.
+
+Given an input line containing an incomplete word to be completed, it
+calls a user-provided callback function (or the provided
+file-completion callback function) to look up all possible completion
+suffixes for that word. The callback function is expected to look
+backward in the line, starting from the specified cursor position, to
+find the start of the word to be completed, then to look up all
+possible completions of that word and record them, one at a time by
+calling \f3cpl_add_completion()\f1.
+
+.sp
+Descriptions of the functions of this module are as follows:
+.sp
+.nf
+  CompleteWord *new_CompleteWord(void)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function creates the resources used by the \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1
+function. In particular, it maintains the memory that is used to
+return the results of calling \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  CompleteWord *del_CompleteWord(CompleteWord *cpl)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function deletes the resources that were returned by a previous
+call to \f3new_CompleteWord()\f1. It always returns \f3NULL\f1 (ie. a
+deleted object). It does nothing if the \f3cpl\f1 argument is
+\f3NULL\f1.
+.sp
+The callback functions which lookup possible completions should be
+defined with the following macro (which is defined in libtecla.h).
+.sp
+.nf
+  #define CPL_MATCH_FN(fn) int (fn)(WordCompletion *cpl, \\
+                                    void *data, \\
+                                    const char *line, \\
+                                    int word_end)
+.fi
+.sp
+Functions of this type are called by \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1, and
+all of the arguments of the callback are those that were passed to
+said function. In particular, the \f3line\f1 argument contains the
+input line containing the word to be completed, and \f3word_end\f1 is
+the index of the character that follows the last character of the
+incomplete word within this string. The callback is expected to look
+backwards from \f3word_end\f1 for the start of the incomplete
+word. What constitutes the start of a word clearly depends on the
+application, so it makes sense for the callback to take on this
+responsibility. For example, the builtin filename completion function
+looks backwards until it hits an unescaped space, or the start of the
+line.  Having found the start of the word, the callback should then
+lookup all possible completions of this word, and record each
+completion via separate calls to \f3cpl_add_completion()\f1. If the
+callback needs access to an application-specific symbol table, it can
+pass it and any other data that it needs, via the \f3data\f1
+argument. This removes any need for globals.
+.sp
+The callback function should return 0 if no errors occur. On failure
+it should return 1, and register a terse description of the error by
+calling \f3cpl_record_error()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void cpl_record_error(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                        const char *errmsg);
+.fi
+.sp
+The last error message recorded by calling \f3cpl_record_error()\f1,
+can subsequently be queried by calling \f3cpl_last_error()\f1, as
+described later.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int cpl_add_completion(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                         const char *line, int word_start,
+                         int word_end, const char *suffix,
+                         const char *type_suffix,
+                         const char *cont_suffix);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3cpl_add_completion()\f1 function is called zero or more times
+by the completion callback function to record each possible completion
+in the specified \f3WordCompletion\f1 object. These completions are
+subsequently returned by \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1, as described
+later. The \f3cpl\f1, \f3line\f1, and \f3word_end\f1 arguments should
+be those that were passed to the callback function. The
+\f3word_start\f1 argument should be the index within the input line
+string of the start of the word that is being completed. This should
+equal \f3word_end\f1 if a zero-length string is being completed. The
+\f3suffix\f1 argument is the string that would have to be appended to
+the incomplete word to complete it.  If this needs any quoting
+(eg. the addition of backslashes before special charaters) to be valid
+within the displayed input line, this should be included. A copy of
+the suffix string is allocated internally, so there is no need to
+maintain your copy of the string after \f3cpl_add_completion()\f1
+returns.
+.sp
+Note that in the array of possible completions which the
+\f3cpl_complete_word()\f1 function returns, the suffix recorded by
+\f3cpl_add_completion()\f1 is listed along with the concatentation of
+this suffix with the word that lies between \f3word_start\f1 and
+\f3word_end\f1 in the input line.
+.sp
+The \f3type_suffix\f1 argument specifies an optional string to be
+appended to the completion if it is displayed as part of a list of
+completions by \f3cpl_list_completions()\f1. The intention is that
+this indicate to the user the type of each completion. For example,
+the file completion function places a directory separator after
+completions that are directories, to indicate their nature to the
+user. Similary, if the completion were a function, you could indicate
+this to the user by setting \f3type_suffix\f1 to "()". Note that the
+\f3type_suffix\f1 string isn't copied, so if the argument isn't a
+literal string between speech marks, be sure that the string remains
+valid for at least as long as the results of \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1
+are needed.
+.sp
+The \f3cont_suffix\f1 is a continuation suffix to append to the
+completed word in the input line if this is the only completion. This
+is something that isn't part of the completion itself, but that gives
+the user an indication about how they might continue to extend the
+token.  For example, the file-completion callback function adds a
+directory separator if the completed word is a directory. If the
+completed word were a function name, you could similarly aid the user
+by arranging for an open parenthesis to be appended.
+.sp
+.nf
+  CplMatches *cpl_complete_word(WordCompletion *cpl,
+                                const char *line,
+                                int word_end, void *data,
+                                CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1 is normally called behind the scenes by
+\f3gl_get_line(3)\f1, but can also be called separately if you
+separately allocate a \f3WordCompletion\f1 object. It performs word
+completion, as described at the beginning of this section. Its first
+argument is a resource object previously returned by
+\f3new_CompleteWord()\f1.  The \f3line\f1 argument is the input line
+string, containing the word to be completed. The \f3word_end\f1
+argument contains the index of the character in the input line, that
+just follows the last character of the word to be completed. When
+called by \f3gl_get_line()\f1, this is the character over which the
+user pressed \f3TAB\f1. The \f3match_fn\f3 argument is the function
+pointer of the callback function which will lookup possible
+completions of the word, as described above, and the \f3data\f1
+argument provides a way for the application to pass arbitrary data to
+the callback function.
+.sp
+If no errors occur, the \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1 function returns a
+pointer to a \f3CplMatches\f1 container, as defined below. This
+container is allocated as part of the \f3cpl\f1 object that was passed
+to \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1, and will thus change on each call which
+uses the same \f3cpl\f1 argument.
+.sp
+.nf
+  typedef struct {
+    char *completion;        /* A matching completion */
+                             /*  string */
+    char *suffix;            /* The part of the */
+                             /*  completion string which */
+                             /*  would have to be */
+                             /*  appended to complete the */
+                             /*  original word. */
+    const char *type_suffix; /* A suffix to be added when */
+                             /*  listing completions, to */
+                             /*  indicate the type of the */
+                             /*  completion. */
+  } CplMatch;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    char *suffix;            /* The common initial part */
+                             /*  of all of the completion */
+                             /*  suffixes. */
+    const char *cont_suffix; /* Optional continuation */
+                             /*  string to be appended to */
+                             /*  the sole completion when */
+                             /*  nmatch==1. */
+    CplMatch *matches;       /* The array of possible */
+                             /*  completion strings, */
+                             /*  sorted into lexical */
+                             /*  order. */
+    int nmatch;              /* The number of elements in */
+                             /*  the above matches[] */
+                             /*  array. */
+  } CplMatches;
+.fi
+.sp
+If an error occurs during completion, \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1
+returns NULL. A description of the error can be acquired by calling
+the \f3cpl_last_error()\f3 function.
+.sp
+.nf
+  const char *cpl_last_error(WordCompletion *cpl);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3cpl_last_error()\f3 function returns a terse description of the
+error which occurred on the last call to \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1 or
+\f3cpl_add_completion()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int cpl_list_completions(CplMatches *result, FILE *fp,
+                           int terminal_width);
+.fi
+.sp
+When the \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1 function returns multiple possible
+completions, the \f3cpl_list_completions()\f1 function can be called
+upon to list them, suitably arranged across the available width of the
+terminal. It arranges for the displayed columns of completions to all
+have the same width, set by the longest completion. It also appends
+the \f3type_suffix\f1 strings that were recorded with each completion,
+thus indicating their types to the user.
+
+.SH THE BUILT-IN FILENAME-COMPLETION CALLBACK
+
+By default the \f3gl_get_line(3)\f1 function, passes the following
+completion callback function to \f3cpl_complete_word()\f1. This
+function can also be used separately, either by sending it to
+\f3cpl_complete_word()\f1, or by calling it directly from your
+own completion callback function.
+.sp
+.nf
+  CPL_MATCH_FN(cpl_file_completions);
+.fi
+.sp
+Certain aspects of the behavior of this callback can be changed via
+its \f3data\f1 argument. If you are happy with its default behavior
+you can pass \f3NULL\f1 in this argument. Otherwise it should be a
+pointer to a \f3CplFileConf\f1 object, previously allocated by calling
+\f3new_CplFileConf()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  CplFileConf *new_CplFileConf(void);
+.fi
+.sp
+\f3CplFileConf\f1 objects encapsulate the configuration parameters of
+\f3cpl_file_completions()\f1. These parameters, which start out with
+default values, can be changed by calling the accessor functions
+described below.
+.sp
+By default, the \f3cpl_file_completions()\f3 callback function
+searches backwards for the start of the filename being completed,
+looking for the first un-escaped space or the start of the input
+line. If you wish to specify a different location, call
+\f3cfc_file_start()\f1 with the index at which the filename starts in
+the input line. Passing start_index=-1 re-enables the default
+behavior.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void cfc_file_start(CplFileConf *cfc, int start_index);
+.fi
+.sp
+By default, when \f3cpl_file_completions()\f1 looks at a filename in
+the input line, each lone backslash in the input line is interpreted
+as being a special character which removes any special significance of
+the character which follows it, such as a space which should be taken
+as part of the filename rather than delimiting the start of the
+filename. These backslashes are thus ignored while looking for
+completions, and subsequently added before spaces, tabs and literal
+backslashes in the list of completions. To have unescaped backslashes
+treated as normal characters, call \f3cfc_literal_escapes()\f1 with a
+non-zero value in its \f3literal\f1 argument.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void cfc_literal_escapes(CplFileConf *cfc, int literal);
+.fi
+.sp
+By default, \f3cpl_file_completions()\f1 reports all files who's names
+start with the prefix that is being completed. If you only want a
+selected subset of these files to be reported in the list of
+completions, you can arrange this by providing a callback function
+which takes the full pathname of a file, and returns \f30\f1 if the
+file should be ignored, or \f31\f1 if the file should be included in
+the list of completions. To register such a function for use by
+\f3cpl_file_completions()\f1, call \f3cfc_set_check_fn()\f1, and pass
+it a pointer to the function, together with a pointer to any data that
+you would like passed to this callback whenever it is called. Your
+callback can make its decisions based on any property of the file,
+such as the filename itself, whether the file is readable, writable or
+executable, or even based on what the file contains.
+.sp
+.nf
+  #define CPL_CHECK_FN(fn) int (fn)(void *data, \\
+                                    const char *pathname)
+  typedef CPL_CHECK_FN(CplCheckFn);
+
+  void cfc_set_check_fn(CplFileConf *cfc,
+                        CplCheckFn *chk_fn, void *chk_data);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3cpl_check_exe()\f1 function is a provided callback of the above
+type, for use with \f3cpl_file_completions()\f1. It returns non-zero
+if the filename that it is given represents a normal file that the
+user has execute permission to. You could use this to have
+\f3cpl_file_completions()\f1 only list completions of executable
+files.
+.sp
+When you have finished with a \f3CplFileConf\f1 variable, you can pass
+it to the \f3del_CplFileConf()\f1 destructor function to reclaim its
+memory.
+.sp
+.nf
+  CplFileConf *del_CplFileConf(CplFileConf *cfc);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+.SH THREAD SAFETY
+
+In multi-threaded programs, you should use the \f3libtecla_r.a\f1
+version of the library. This uses POSIX reentrant functions where
+available (hence the \f3_r\f1 suffix), and disables features that rely
+on non-reentrant system functions. In the case of this module, the
+only disabled feature is username completion in \f3~username/\f1
+expressions, in \f3cpl_file_completions()\f1.
+
+Using the \f3libtecla_r.a\f1 version of the library, it is safe to use
+the facilities of this module in multiple threads, provided that each
+thread uses a separately allocated \f3WordCompletion\f1 object. In
+other words, if two threads want to do word completion, they should
+each call \f3new_WordCompletion()\f1 to allocate their own completion
+objects.
+
+.SH FILES
+.nf
+libtecla.a    -    The tecla library
+libtecla.h    -    The tecla header file.
+.fi
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+libtecla(3), gl_get_line(3), ef_expand_file(3), pca_lookup_file(3)
+  
+.SH AUTHOR
+Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_file_completions.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_file_completions.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_file_completions.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_last_error.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_last_error.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_last_error.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_list_completions.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_list_completions.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_list_completions.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_record_error.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_record_error.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/cpl_record_error.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_CplFileConf.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_CplFileConf.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_CplFileConf.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_ExpandFile.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_ExpandFile.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4299df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_ExpandFile.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/ef_expand_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_GetLine.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_GetLine.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_GetLine.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PathCache.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PathCache.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PathCache.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PcaPathConf.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PcaPathConf.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_PcaPathConf.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_WordCompletion.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_WordCompletion.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/del_WordCompletion.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_expand_file.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_expand_file.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88c2d54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_expand_file.3
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd
+.\" 
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+.\" distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+.\" to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+.\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+.\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+.\" 
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+.\" OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+.\" HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+.\" INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\" 
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+.\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+.\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+.\" of the copyright holder.
+.TH ef_expand_file 3
+.SH NAME
+ef_expand_file, del_ExpandFile, ef_last_error, ef_list_expansions, new_ExpandFile \- expand filenames containing ~user/$envvar and wildcard expressions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+#include <libtecla.h>
+
+ExpandFile *new_ExpandFile(void);
+
+ExpandFile *del_ExpandFile(ExpandFile *ef);
+
+FileExpansion *ef_expand_file(ExpandFile *ef,
+                              const char *path,
+                              int pathlen);
+
+int ef_list_expansions(FileExpansion *result, FILE *fp,
+                       int term_width);
+
+const char *ef_last_error(ExpandFile *ef);
+.fi
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+
+The \f3ef_expand_file()\f1 function is part of the tecla library
+(see the libtecla(3) man page). It expands a specified filename,
+converting \f3~user/\f1 and \f3~/\f1 expressions at the start of the
+filename to the corresponding home directories, replacing
+\f3$envvar\f1 with the value of the corresponding environment
+variable, and then, if there are any wildcards, matching these against
+existing filenames. Backslashes in the input filename are interpreted
+as escaping any special meanings of the characters that follow them.
+Only backslahes that are themselves preceded by backslashes are
+preserved in the expanded filename.
+.sp
+In the presence of wildcards, the returned list of filenames only
+includes the names of existing files which match the
+wildcards. Otherwise, the original filename is returned after
+expansion of tilde and dollar expressions, and the result is not
+checked against existing files. This mimics the file-globbing behavior
+of the unix \f3tcsh\f1 shell.
+.sp
+The supported wildcards and their meanings are:
+.nf
+  *        -  Match any sequence of zero or more characters.
+  ?        -  Match any single character.
+  [chars]  -  Match any single character that appears in
+              'chars'.  If 'chars' contains an expression of
+              the form a-b, then any character between a and
+              b, including a and b, matches. The '-'
+              character looses its special meaning as a
+              range specifier when it appears at the start
+              of the sequence of characters. The ']'
+              character also looses its significance as the
+              terminator of the range expression if it
+              appears immediately after the opening '[', at
+              which point it is treated one of the
+              characters of the range. If you want both '-'
+              and ']' to be part of the range, the '-'
+              should come first and the ']' second.
+              
+  [^chars] -  The same as [chars] except that it matches any
+              single character that doesn't appear in
+              'chars'.
+.fi
+
+Note that wildcards never match the initial dot in filenames that
+start with '.'. The initial '.' must be explicitly specified in the
+filename. This again mimics the globbing behavior of most unix shells,
+and its rational is based in the fact that in unix, files with names
+that start with '.' are usually hidden configuration files, which are
+not listed by default by the ls command.
+.sp
+The following is a complete example of how to use the file expansion
+function.
+
+.nf
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <libtecla.h>
+
+  int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+  {
+    ExpandFile *ef;      /* The expansion resource object */
+    char *filename;      /* The filename being expanded */
+    FileExpansion *expn; /* The results of the expansion */
+    int i;
+
+    ef = new_ExpandFile();
+    if(!ef)
+      return 1;
+
+    for(arg = *(argv++); arg; arg = *(argv++)) {
+      if((expn = ef_expand_file(ef, arg, -1)) == NULL) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Error expanding %s (%s).\\n", arg,
+                         ef_last_error(ef));
+      } else {
+        printf("%s matches the following files:\\n", arg);
+        for(i=0; i<expn->nfile; i++)
+          printf(" %s\\n", expn->files[i]);
+      }
+    }
+
+    ef = del_ExpandFile(ef);
+    return 0;
+  }
+.fi
+.sp
+Descriptions of the functions used above are as follows:
+.sp
+.nf
+  ExpandFile *new_ExpandFile(void)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function creates the resources used by the \f3ef_expand_file()\f1
+function. In particular, it maintains the memory that is used to record the
+array of matching filenames that is returned by \f3ef_expand_file()\f1. This
+array is expanded as needed, so there is no built in limit to the number of
+files that can be matched.
+.sp
+.nf
+  ExpandFile *del_ExpandFile(ExpandFile *ef)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function deletes the resources that were returned by a previous call to
+\f3new_ExpandFile()\f1. It always returns \f3NULL\f1 (ie a deleted object). It
+does nothing if the \f3ef\f1 argument is \f3NULL\f1.
+.sp
+A container of the following type is returned by \f3ef_expand_file()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  typedef struct {
+    int exists;   /* True if the files in files[] exist */
+    int nfile;    /* The number of files in files[] */
+    char **files; /* An array of 'nfile' filenames. */
+  } FileExpansion;
+.fi
+.sp
+.nf
+  FileExpansion *ef_expand_file(ExpandFile *ef,
+                                const char *path,
+                                int pathlen)
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3ef_expand_file()\f1 function performs filename expansion, as documented
+at the start of this section. Its first argument is a resource object returned
+by \f3new_ExpandFile()\f1. A pointer to the start of the filename to be matched
+is passed via the \f3path\f1 argument. This must be a normal \f3NUL\f1
+terminated string, but unless a length of -1 is passed in \f3pathlen\f1, only
+the first \f3pathlen\f1 characters will be used in the filename expansion.  If
+the length is specified as -1, the whole of the string will be
+expanded.
+.sp
+The function returns a pointer to a container who's contents are the
+results of the expansion. If there were no wildcards in the filename,
+the \f3nfile\f1 member will be 1, and the \f3exists\f1 member should
+be queried if it is important to know if the expanded file currently
+exists or not. If there were wildcards, then the contained
+\f3files[]\f1 array will contain the names of the \f3nfile\f1 existing
+files that matched the wildcarded filename, and the \f3exists\f1
+member will have the value 1. Note that the returned container belongs
+to the specified \f3ef\f1 object, and its contents will change on each
+call, so if you need to retain the results of more than one call to
+\f3ef_expand_file()\f1, you should either make a private copy of the
+returned results, or create multiple file-expansion resource objects
+via multiple calls to \f3new_ExpandFile()\f1.
+.sp
+On error, \f3NULL\f1 is returned, and an explanation of the error can
+be determined by calling \f3ef_last_error(ef)\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  const char *ef_last_error(ExpandFile *ef)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function returns the message which describes the error that
+occurred on the last call to \f3ef_expand_file()\f1, for the given
+\f3(ExpandFile *ef)\f1 resource object.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int ef_list_expansions(FileExpansion *result, FILE *fp,
+                         int terminal_width);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3ef_list_expansions()\f1 function provides a convenient way to
+list the filename expansions returned by \f3ef_expand_file()\f1. Like
+the unix \f3ls\f1 command, it arranges the filenames into equal width
+columns, each column having the width of the largest file. The number
+of columns used is thus determined by the length of the longest
+filename, and the specified terminal width. Beware that filenames that
+are longer than the specified terminal width are printed without being
+truncated, so output longer than the specified terminal width can
+occur. The list is written to the stdio stream specified by the
+\f3fp\f1 argument.
+
+.SH THREAD SAFETY
+
+In multi-threaded programs, you should use the \f3libtecla_r.a\f1
+version of the library. This uses POSIX reentrant functions where
+available (hence the \f3_r\f1 suffix), and disables features that rely
+on non-reentrant system functions. Currently there are no features
+disabled in this module.
+
+Using the \f3libtecla_r.a\f1 version of the library, it is safe to use
+the facilities of this module in multiple threads, provided that each
+thread uses a separately allocated \f3ExpandFile\f1 object. In other
+words, if two threads want to do file expansion, they should each call
+\f3new_ExpandFile()\f1 to allocate their own file-expansion objects.
+
+.SH FILES
+.nf
+libtecla.a    -    The tecla library
+libtecla.h    -    The tecla header file.
+.fi
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+libtecla(3), gl_get_line(3), cpl_complete_word(3), pca_lookup_file(3)
+  
+.SH AUTHOR
+Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_last_error.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_last_error.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4299df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_last_error.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/ef_expand_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_list_expansions.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_list_expansions.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4299df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ef_list_expansions.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/ef_expand_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/enhance.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/enhance.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..648ef34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/enhance.3
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd
+.\" 
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+.\" distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+.\" to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+.\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+.\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+.\" 
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+.\" OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+.\" HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+.\" INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\" 
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+.\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+.\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+.\" of the copyright holder.
+.TH libtecla 3
+.SH NAME
+enhance - A program that adds command-line editing to third party programs.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+enhance command [ argument ... ]
+.fi
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+
+The \f3enhance\f1 program provides enhanced command-line editing
+facilities to users of third party applications, to which one doesn't
+have any source code. It does this by placing a pseudo-terminal
+between the application and the real terminal. It uses the tecla
+command-line editing library to read input from the real terminal,
+then forwards each just completed input line to the application via
+the pseudo-terminal.  All output from the application is forwarded
+back unchanged to the real terminal.
+.sp
+Whenever the application stops generating output for more than a tenth
+of a second, the \f3enhance\f1 program treats the latest incomplete
+output line as the prompt, and redisplays any incompleted input line
+that the user has typed after it. Note that the small delay, which is
+imperceptible to the user, isn't necessary for correct operation of
+the program. It is just an optimization, designed to stop the input
+line from being redisplayed so often that it slows down output.
+
+.SH DEFICIENCIES
+
+The one major problem that hasn't been solved yet, is how to deal with
+applications that change whether typed input is echo'd by their
+controlling terminal. For example, programs that ask for a password,
+such as ftp and telnet, temporarily tell their controlling terminal
+not to echo what the user types. Since this request goes to the
+application side of the psuedo terminal, the \f3enhance\f1 program has
+no way of knowing that this has happened, and continues to echo typed
+input to its controlling terminal, while the user types their
+password.
+.sp
+Furthermore, before executing the host application, the \f3enhance\f1
+program initially sets the pseudo terminal to noecho mode, so that
+everything that it sends to the program doesn't get redundantly
+echoed. If a program that switches to noecho mode explicitly restores
+echoing afterwards, rather than restoring the terminal modes that were
+previously in force, then subsequently, every time that you enter a
+new input line, a duplicate copy will be displayed on the next line.
+
+.SH FILES
+.nf
+libtecla.a    -   The tecla library.
+~/.teclarc    -   The tecla personal customization file.
+.fi
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+libtecla(3)
+  
+.SH AUTHOR
+Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_change_terminal.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_change_terminal.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_change_terminal.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_clear_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_clear_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_clear_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_configure_getline.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_configure_getline.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_configure_getline.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_customize_completion.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_customize_completion.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_customize_completion.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_echo_mode.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_echo_mode.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_echo_mode.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_get_line.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_get_line.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51fc9d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_get_line.3
@@ -0,0 +1,2329 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd
+.\" 
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+.\" distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+.\" to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+.\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+.\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+.\" 
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+.\" OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+.\" HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+.\" INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\" 
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+.\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+.\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+.\" of the copyright holder.
+.TH gl_get_line 3
+.SH NAME
+gl_get_line, new_GetLine, del_GetLine, gl_customize_completion, gl_change_terminal, gl_configure_getline, gl_load_history, gl_save_history, gl_group_history, gl_show_history, gl_watch_fd, gl_terminal_size, gl_resize_history, gl_limit_history, gl_clear_history, gl_toggle_history, gl_lookup_history, gl_state_of_history, gl_range_of_history, gl_size_of_history, gl_echo_mode, gl_replace_prompt, gl_prompt_style, gl_ignore_signal, gl_trap_signal, gl_last_signal \- allow the user to compose an input line
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <libtecla.h>
+
+GetLine *new_GetLine(size_t linelen, size_t histlen);
+
+GetLine *del_GetLine(GetLine *gl);
+
+char *gl_get_line(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt,
+                 const char *start_line, int start_pos);
+
+int gl_customize_completion(GetLine *gl, void *data,
+                            CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+
+int gl_change_terminal(GetLine *gl, FILE *input_fp,
+                       FILE *output_fp, const char *term);
+
+int gl_configure_getline(GetLine *gl,
+                         const char *app_string,
+                         const char *app_file,
+                         const char *user_file);
+
+int gl_save_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                    const char *comment, int max_lines);
+
+int gl_load_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                    const char *comment);
+
+int gl_watch_fd(GetLine *gl, int fd, GlFdEvent event,
+                GlFdEventFn *callback, void *data);
+
+int gl_group_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned stream);
+
+int gl_show_history(GetLine *gl, FILE *fp,
+                    const char *fmt, int all_groups,
+                    int max_lines);
+
+int gl_resize_history(GetLine *gl, size_t bufsize);
+
+void gl_limit_history(GetLine *gl, int max_lines);
+
+void gl_clear_history(GetLine *gl, int all_groups);
+
+void gl_toggle_history(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+GlTerminalSize gl_terminal_size(GetLine *gl,
+                                int def_ncolumn,
+                                int def_nline);
+
+int gl_lookup_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned long id,
+                      GlHistoryLine *hline);
+
+void gl_state_of_history(GetLine *gl,
+                         GlHistoryState *state);
+
+void gl_range_of_history(GetLine *gl,
+                         GlHistoryRange *range);
+
+void gl_size_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistorySize *size);
+
+void gl_echo_mode(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+
+void gl_replace_prompt(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt);
+
+void gl_prompt_style(GetLine *gl, GlPromptStyle style);
+
+int gl_ignore_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo);
+
+int gl_trap_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo, unsigned flags,
+                   GlAfterSignal after, int errno_value);
+
+int gl_last_signal(const GetLine *gl);
+
+.fi
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+
+The \f3gl_get_line()\f1 function is part of the tecla library (see
+the libtecla(3) man page). If the user is typing at a terminal, it
+prompts them for an line of input, then provides interactive editing
+facilities, similar to those of the unix \f3tcsh\f1 shell. In addition
+to simple command-line editing, it supports recall of previously
+entered command lines, TAB completion of file names, and in-line
+wild-card expansion of filenames.
+.sp
+.SH AN EXAMPLE
+
+The following shows a complete example of how to use the
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 function to get input from the user:
+
+.nf
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <locale.h>
+  #include <libtecla.h>
+
+  int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+  { 
+    char *line;    /* The line that the user typed */
+    GetLine *gl;   /* The gl_get_line() resource object */
+
+    setlocale(LC_CTYPE, ""); /* Adopt the user's choice */
+                             /* of character set. */
+
+    gl = new_GetLine(1024, 2048);
+    if(!gl)
+      return 1;
+
+    while((line=gl_get_line(gl, "$ ", NULL, -1)) != NULL &&
+           strcmp(line, "exit\\n") != 0)
+      printf("You typed: %s\\n", line);
+
+    gl = del_GetLine(gl);
+    return 0;
+  }
+.fi
+.sp
+In the example, first the resources needed by the \f3gl_get_line()\f1 function
+are created by calling \f3new_GetLine()\f1. This allocates the memory used in
+subsequent calls to the \f3gl_get_line()\f1 function, including the history
+buffer for recording previously entered lines. Then one or more lines are read
+from the user, until either an error occurs, or the user types \f3exit\f1. Then
+finally the resources that were allocated by \f3new_GetLine()\f1, are returned
+to the system by calling \f3del_GetLine()\f1. Note the use of the \f3NULL\f1
+return value of \f3del_GetLine()\f1 to make \f3gl\f1 \f3NULL\f1. This is a
+safety precaution. If the program subsequently attempts to pass \f3gl\f1 to
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1, said function will complain, and return an error, instead of
+attempting to use the deleted resource object.
+
+.sp
+.SH THE FUNCTIONS USED IN THE EXAMPLE
+The descriptions of the functions used in the example are as follows:
+.sp
+.nf
+  GetLine *new_GetLine(size_t linelen, size_t histlen)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function creates the resources used by the \f3gl_get_line()\f1
+function and returns an opaque pointer to the object that contains
+them.  The maximum length of an input line is specified via the
+\f3linelen\f1 argument, and the number of bytes to allocate for
+storing history lines is set by the \f3histlen\f1 argument. History
+lines are stored back-to-back in a single buffer of this size. Note
+that this means that the number of history lines that can be stored at
+any given time, depends on the lengths of the individual lines.  If
+you want to place an upper limit on the number of lines that can be
+stored, see the \f3gl_limit_history()\f1 function described later. If
+you don't want history at all, specify \f3histlen\f1 as zero, and no
+history buffer will be allocated.
+.sp
+On error, a message is printed to \f3stderr\f1 and \f3NULL\f1 is returned.
+.sp
+.nf
+  GetLine *del_GetLine(GetLine *gl)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function deletes the resources that were returned by a previous
+call to \f3new_GetLine()\f1. It always returns \f3NULL\f1 (ie a
+deleted object). It does nothing if the \f3gl\f1 argument is
+\f3NULL\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  char *gl_get_line(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt,
+                   const char *start_line, int start_pos);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3gl_get_line()\f1 function can be called any number of
+times to read input from the user. The \f3gl\f1 argument
+must have been previously returned by a call to
+\f3new_GetLine()\f1. The \f3prompt\f1 argument should be a
+normal \f3NUL\f1 terminated string, specifying the prompt to
+present the user with. By default prompts are displayed
+literally, but if enabled with the \f3gl_prompt_style()\f1
+function (see later), prompts can contain directives to do
+underlining, switch to and from bold fonts, or turn
+highlighting on and off.
+
+If you want to specify the initial contents of the line, for
+the user to edit, pass the desired string via the
+\f3start_line\f1 argument. You can then specify which
+character of this line the cursor is initially positioned
+over, using the \f3start_pos\f1 argument. This should be -1
+if you want the cursor to follow the last character of the
+start line. If you don't want to preload the line in this
+manner, send \f3start_line\f1 as \f3NULL\f1, and set
+\f3start_pos\f1 to -1.
+
+The \f3gl_get_line()\f1 function returns a pointer to the line entered
+by the user, or \f3NULL\f1 on error or at the end of the input. The
+returned pointer is part of the specified \f3gl\f1 resource object,
+and thus should not be free'd by the caller, or assumed to be
+unchanging from one call to the next. When reading from a user at a
+terminal, there will always be a newline character at the end of the
+returned line.  When standard input is being taken from a pipe or a
+file, there will similarly be a newline unless the input line was too
+long to store in the internal buffer. In the latter case you should
+call \f3gl_get_line()\f1 again to read the rest of the line. Note that
+this behavior makes \f3gl_get_line()\f1 similar to \f3fgets()\f1.  In
+fact when \f3stdin\f1 isn't connected to a terminal,\f3gl_get_line()\f1
+just calls \f3fgets()\f1.
+
+.SH OPTIONAL PROMPT FORMATTING
+
+Whereas by default the prompt string that you specify is
+displayed literally, without any special interpretation of
+the characters within it, the \f3gl_prompt_style()\f1
+function can be used to enable optional formatting
+directives within the prompt.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void gl_prompt_style(GetLine *gl, GlPromptStyle style);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3style\f1 argument, which specifies the formatting
+style, can take any of the following values:
+.sp
+.nf
+  GL_FORMAT_PROMPT   -  In this style, the formatting
+                        directives described below, when
+                        included in prompt strings, are
+                        interpreted as follows:
+
+                          %B  -  Display subsequent
+                                 characters with a bold
+                                 font.
+                          %b  -  Stop displaying characters
+                                 with the bold font.
+                          %F  -  Make subsequent characters
+                                 flash.
+                          %f  -  Turn off flashing
+                                 characters.
+                          %U  -  Underline subsequent
+                                 characters. 
+                          %u  -  Stop underlining
+                                 characters.
+                          %P  -  Switch to a pale (half
+                                 brightness) font.
+                          %p  -  Stop using the pale font.
+                          %S  -  Highlight subsequent
+                                 characters (also known as
+                                 standout mode).
+                          %s  -  Stop highlighting
+                                 characters.
+                          %V  -  Turn on reverse video.
+                          %v  -  Turn off reverse video.
+                          %%  -  Display a single %
+                                 character.
+
+                        For example, in this mode, a prompt
+                        string like \f3"%UOK%u$ "\f1 would
+                        display the prompt \f3"OK$ "\f1,
+                        but with the \f3OK\f1 part
+                        underlined.
+
+                        Note that although a pair of
+                        characters that starts with a %
+                        character, but doesn't match any of
+                        the above directives is displayed
+                        literally, if a new directive is
+                        subsequently introduced which does
+                        match, the displayed prompt will
+                        change, so it is better to always
+                        use %% to display a literal %.
+
+                        Also note that not all terminals
+                        support all of these text
+                        attributes, and that some substitute
+                        a different attribute for missing
+                        ones.
+
+  GL_LITERAL_PROMPT  -  In this style, the prompt string is
+                        printed literally. This is the
+                        default style.
+.fi
+.sp
+
+.SH THE AVAILABLE KEY BINDING FUNCTIONS
+
+The \f3gl_get_line()\f1 function provides a number of functions which
+can be bound to key sequences. The names of these functions, and what
+they do, are given below.
+
+.nf
+  user-interrupt           -  Send a SIGINT signal to the
+                              parent process.
+  abort                    -  Send a SIGABRT signal to the
+                              parent process.
+  suspend                  -  Suspend the parent process.
+  stop-output              -  Pause terminal output.
+  start-output             -  Resume paused terminal output.
+  literal-next             -  Arrange for the next character
+                              to be treated as a normal
+                              character. This allows control
+                              characters to be entered.
+  cursor-right             -  Move the cursor one character
+                              right.
+  cursor-left              -  Move the cursor one character
+                              left.
+  insert-mode              -  Toggle between insert mode and
+                              overwrite mode.
+  beginning-of-line        -  Move the cursor to the
+                              beginning of the line.
+  end-of-line              -  Move the cursor to the end of
+                              the line.
+  delete-line              -  Delete the contents of the
+                              current line.
+  kill-line                -  Delete everything that follows
+                              the cursor.
+  backward-kill-line       -  Delete all characters between
+                              the cursor and the start of the
+                              line.
+  forward-word             -  Move to the end of the word
+                              which follows the cursor.
+  forward-to-word          -  Move the cursor to the start of
+                              the word that follows the
+                              cursor.
+  backward-word            -  Move to the start of the word
+                              which precedes the cursor.
+  goto-column              -  Move the cursor to the
+                              1-relative column in the line
+                              specified by any preceding
+                              digit-argument sequences (see
+                              ENTERING REPEAT COUNTS below).
+  find-parenthesis         -  If the cursor is currently
+                              over a parenthesis character,
+                              move it to the matching
+                              parenthesis character. If not
+                              over a parenthesis character
+                              move right to the next close
+                              parenthesis.
+  forward-delete-char      -  Delete the character under the
+                              cursor.
+  backward-delete-char     -  Delete the character which
+                              precedes the cursor.
+  list-or-eof              -  This is intended for binding
+                              to ^D. When invoked when the
+                              cursor is within the line it
+                              displays all possible
+                              completions then redisplays
+                              the line unchanged. When
+                              invoked on an empty line, it
+                              signals end-of-input (EOF) to
+                              the caller of gl_get_line().
+  del-char-or-list-or-eof  -  This is intended for binding
+                              to ^D. When invoked when the
+                              cursor is within the line it
+                              invokes forward-delete-char.
+                              When invoked at the end of the
+                              line it displays all possible
+                              completions then redisplays
+                              the line unchanged. When
+                              invoked on an empty line, it
+                              signals end-of-input (EOF) to
+                              the caller of gl_get_line().
+  forward-delete-word      -  Delete the word which follows
+                              the cursor.
+  backward-delete-word     -  Delete the word which precedes
+                              the cursor.
+  upcase-word              -  Convert all of the characters
+                              of the word which follows the
+                              cursor, to upper case.
+  downcase-word            -  Convert all of the characters
+                              of the word which follows the
+                              cursor, to lower case.
+  capitalize-word          -  Capitalize the word which
+                              follows the cursor.
+  change-case              -  If the next character is upper
+                              case, toggle it to lower case
+                              and vice versa.
+  redisplay                -  Redisplay the line.
+  clear-screen             -  Clear the terminal, then
+                              redisplay the current line.
+  transpose-chars          -  Swap the character under the
+                              cursor with the character just
+                              before the cursor.
+  set-mark                 -  Set a mark at the position of
+                              the cursor.
+  exchange-point-and-mark  -  Move the cursor to the last
+                              mark that was set, and move
+                              the mark to where the cursor
+                              used to be.
+  kill-region              -  Delete the characters that lie
+                              between the last mark that was
+                              set, and the cursor.
+  copy-region-as-kill      -  Copy the text between the mark
+                              and the cursor to the cut
+                              buffer, without deleting the
+                              original text.
+  yank                     -  Insert the text that was last
+                              deleted, just before the
+                              current position of the cursor.
+  append-yank              -  Paste the current contents of
+                              the cut buffer, after the
+                              cursor.
+  up-history               -  Recall the next oldest line
+                              that was entered. Note that
+                              in vi mode you are left in
+                              command mode.
+  down-history             -  Recall the next most recent
+                              line that was entered. If no
+                              history recall session is
+                              currently active, the next
+                              line from a previous recall
+                              session is recalled. Note that
+                              in vi mode you are left in
+                              command mode.
+  history-search-backward  -  Recall the next oldest line
+                              who's prefix matches the string
+                              which currently precedes the
+                              cursor (in vi command-mode the
+                              character under the cursor is
+                              also included in the search
+                              string).  Note that in vi mode
+                              you are left in command mode.
+  history-search-forward   -  Recall the next newest line
+                              who's prefix matches the string
+                              which currently precedes the
+                              cursor (in vi command-mode the
+                              character under the cursor is
+                              also included in the search
+                              string).  Note that in vi mode
+                              you are left in command mode.
+  history-re-search-backward -Recall the next oldest line
+                              who's prefix matches that
+                              established by the last
+                              invocation of either
+                              history-search-forward or
+                              history-search-backward.
+  history-re-search-forward - Recall the next newest line
+                              who's prefix matches that
+                              established by the last
+                              invocation of either
+                              history-search-forward or
+                              history-search-backward.
+  complete-word            -  Attempt to complete the
+                              incomplete word which
+                              precedes the cursor. Unless
+                              the host program has customized
+                              word completion, filename
+                              completion is attempted. In vi
+                              commmand mode the character
+                              under the cursor is also
+                              included in the word being
+                              completed, and you are left in
+                              vi insert mode.
+  expand-filename          -  Within the command line, expand
+                              wild cards, tilde expressions
+                              and dollar expressions in the
+                              filename which immediately
+                              precedes the cursor. In vi
+                              commmand mode the character
+                              under the cursor is also
+                              included in the filename being
+                              expanded, and you are left in
+                              vi insert mode.
+  list-glob                -  List any filenames which match
+                              the wild-card, tilde and dollar
+                              expressions in the filename
+                              which immediately precedes the
+                              cursor, then redraw the input
+                              line unchanged.
+  list-history             -  Display the contents of the
+                              history list for the current
+                              history group. If a repeat
+                              count of > 1 is specified,
+                              only that many of the most
+                              recent lines are displayed.
+                              See the "ENTERING REPEAT
+                              COUNTS" section.
+  read-from-file           -  Temporarily switch to reading
+                              input from the file who's
+                              name precedes the cursor.
+  read-init-files          -  Re-read teclarc configuration
+                              files.
+  beginning-of-history     -  Move to the oldest line in the
+                              history list. Note that in vi
+                              mode you are left in command
+                              mode.
+  end-of-history           -  Move to the newest line in the
+                              history list (ie. the current
+                              line). Note that in vi mode
+                              this leaves you in command
+                              mode.
+  digit-argument           -  Enter a repeat count for the
+                              next key-binding function.
+                              For details, see the ENTERING
+                              REPEAT COUNTS section.
+  newline                  -  Terminate and return the
+                              current contents of the
+                              line, after appending a
+                              newline character. The newline
+                              character is normally '\\n',
+                              but will be the first
+                              character of the key-sequence
+                              that invoked the newline
+                              action, if this happens to be
+                              a printable character. If the
+                              action was invoked by the
+                              '\\n' newline character or the
+                              '\\r' carriage return
+                              character, the line is
+                              appended to the history
+                              buffer.
+  repeat-history           -  Return the line that is being
+                              edited, then arrange for the
+                              next most recent entry in the
+                              history buffer to be recalled
+                              when \f3gl_get_line()\f1 is
+                              next called. Repeatedly
+                              invoking this action causes
+                              successive historical input
+                              lines to be re-executed. Note
+                              that this action is equivalent
+                              to the 'Operate' action in
+                              ksh.
+  ring-bell                -  Ring the terminal bell, unless
+                              the bell has been silenced via
+                              the \f3nobeep\f1 configuration
+                              option (see the THE TECLA
+                              CONFIGURATION FILE section).
+  forward-copy-char        -  Copy the next character into
+                              the cut buffer (NB. use repeat
+                              counts to copy more than one).
+  backward-copy-char       -  Copy the previous character
+                              into the cut buffer.
+  forward-copy-word        -  Copy the next word into the cut
+                              buffer.
+  backward-copy-word       -  Copy the previous word into the
+                              cut buffer.
+  forward-find-char        -  Move the cursor to the next
+                              occurrence of the next
+                              character that you type.
+  backward-find-char       -  Move the cursor to the last
+                              occurrence of the next
+                              character that you type.
+  forward-to-char          -  Move the cursor to the
+                              character just before the next
+                              occurrence of the next
+                              character that the user types.
+  backward-to-char         -  Move the cursor to the
+                              character just after the last
+                              occurrence before the cursor
+                              of the next character that the
+                              user types.
+  repeat-find-char         -  Repeat the last
+                              backward-find-char,
+                              forward-find-char,
+                              backward-to-char or
+                              forward-to-char.
+  invert-refind-char       -  Repeat the last
+                              backward-find-char,
+                              forward-find-char,
+                              backward-to-char, or
+                              forward-to-char in the
+                              opposite direction.
+  delete-to-column         -  Delete the characters from the
+                              cursor up to the column that
+                              is specified by the repeat
+                              count.
+  delete-to-parenthesis    -  Delete the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including
+                              the matching parenthesis, or
+                              next close parenthesis.
+  forward-delete-find      -  Delete the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including the
+                              following occurence of the
+                              next character typed.
+  backward-delete-find     -  Delete the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including the
+                              preceding occurence of the
+                              next character typed.
+  forward-delete-to        -  Delete the characters from the
+                              cursor up to, but not
+                              including, the following
+                              occurence of the next
+                              character typed.
+  backward-delete-to       -  Delete the characters from the
+                              cursor up to, but not
+                              including, the preceding
+                              occurence of the next
+                              character typed.
+  delete-refind            -  Repeat the last *-delete-find
+                              or *-delete-to action.
+  delete-invert-refind     -  Repeat the last *-delete-find
+                              or *-delete-to action, in the
+                              opposite direction.
+  copy-to-column           -  Copy the characters from the
+                              cursor up to the column that
+                              is specified by the repeat
+                              count, into the cut buffer.
+  copy-to-parenthesis      -  Copy the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including
+                              the matching parenthesis, or
+                              next close parenthesis, into
+                              the cut buffer.
+  forward-copy-find        -  Copy the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including the
+                              following occurence of the
+                              next character typed, into the
+                              cut buffer.
+  backward-copy-find       -  Copy the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including the
+                              preceding occurence of the
+                              next character typed, into the
+                              cut buffer.
+  forward-copy-to          -  Copy the characters from the
+                              cursor up to, but not
+                              including, the following
+                              occurence of the next
+                              character typed, into the cut
+                              buffer.
+  backward-copy-to         -  Copy the characters from the
+                              cursor up to, but not
+                              including, the preceding
+                              occurence of the next
+                              character typed, into the cut
+                              buffer.
+  copy-refind              -  Repeat the last *-copy-find
+                              or *-copy-to action.
+  copy-invert-refind       -  Repeat the last *-copy-find
+                              or *-copy-to action, in the
+                              opposite direction.
+  vi-mode                  -  Switch to vi mode from emacs
+                              mode.
+  emacs-mode               -  Switch to emacs mode from vi
+                              mode.
+  vi-insert                -  From vi command mode, switch to
+                              insert mode.
+  vi-overwrite             -  From vi command mode, switch to
+                              overwrite mode.
+  vi-insert-at-bol         -  From vi command mode, move the
+                              cursor to the start of the line
+                              and switch to insert mode.
+  vi-append-at-eol         -  From vi command mode, move the
+                              cursor to the end of the line
+                              and switch to append mode.
+  vi-append                -  From vi command mode, move the
+                              cursor one position right, and
+                              switch to insert mode.
+  vi-replace-char          -  From vi command mode, replace
+                              the character under the cursor
+                              with the the next character
+                              entered.
+  vi-forward-change-char   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the next character then enter
+                              insert mode.
+  vi-backward-change-char  -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the preceding character then
+                              enter insert mode.
+  vi-forward-change-word   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the next word then enter
+                              insert mode.
+  vi-backward-change-word  -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the preceding word then
+                              enter insert mode.
+  vi-change-rest-of-line   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              from the cursor to the end of
+                              the line, then enter insert
+                              mode.
+  vi-change-line           -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the current line, then enter
+                              insert mode.
+  vi-change-to-bol         -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              all characters between the
+                              cursor and the beginning of
+                              the line, then enter insert
+                              mode.
+  vi-change-to-column      -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the characters from the cursor
+                              up to the column that is
+                              specified by the repeat count,
+                              then enter insert mode.
+  vi-change-to-parenthesis -  Delete the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including
+                              the matching parenthesis, or
+                              next close parenthesis, then
+                              enter vi insert mode.
+  vi-forward-change-find   -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including the
+                              following occurence of the
+                              next character typed, then
+                              enter insert mode.
+  vi-backward-change-find  -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the characters from the
+                              cursor up to and including the
+                              preceding occurence of the
+                              next character typed, then
+                              enter insert mode.
+  vi-forward-change-to     -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the characters from the
+                              cursor up to, but not
+                              including, the following
+                              occurence of the next
+                              character typed, then enter
+                              insert mode.
+  vi-backward-change-to    -  From vi command mode, delete
+                              the characters from the
+                              cursor up to, but not
+                              including, the preceding
+                              occurence of the next
+                              character typed, then enter
+                              insert mode.
+  vi-change-refind         -  Repeat the last
+                              vi-*-change-find or
+                              vi-*-change-to action.
+  vi-change-invert-refind  -  Repeat the last
+                              vi-*-change-find or
+                              vi-*-change-to action, in the
+                              opposite direction.
+  vi-undo                  -  In vi mode, undo the last
+                              editing operation.
+  vi-repeat-change         -  In vi command mode, repeat the
+                              last command that modified the
+                              line.
+.fi
+
+.SH DEFAULT KEY BINDINGS IN EMACS MODE
+
+The following default key bindings, which can be overriden by
+the tecla configuration file, are designed to mimic most of
+the bindings of the unix \f3tcsh\f1 shell, when it is in
+emacs editing mode.
+.sp
+This is the default editing mode of the tecla library.
+.sp
+Note that a key sequence like \f3^A\f1 or \f3C-a\f1 means hold the control-key
+down while pressing the letter \f3A\f1, and that where you see \f3\\E\f1 or
+\f3M-\f1 in a binding, this represents the escape key or the Meta modifier
+key. Also note that to \f3gl_get_line()\f1, pressing the escape key before a
+key is equivalent to pressing the meta key at the same time as that key. Thus
+the key sequence \f3M-p\f1 can be typed in two ways, by pressing the escape
+key, followed by pressing \f3p\f1, or by pressing the Meta key at the same time
+as \f3p\f1.
+.sp
+Under UNIX the terminal driver sets a number of special keys for certain
+functions. The tecla library attempts to use the same keybindings to maintain
+consistency. The key sequences shown for the following 6 bindings are thus just
+examples of what they will probably be set to. If you have used the \f3stty\f1
+command to change these keys, then the default bindings should match.
+
+.nf
+  ^C     ->   user-interrupt
+  ^\\     ->   abort
+  ^Z     ->   suspend
+  ^Q     ->   start-output
+  ^S     ->   stop-output
+  ^V     ->   literal-next
+.fi
+
+The cursor keys are refered to by name, as follows. This is necessary
+because different types of terminals generate different key sequences
+when their cursor keys are pressed.
+
+  right  ->   cursor-right
+  left   ->   cursor-left
+  up     ->   up-history
+  down   ->   down-history
+
+The remaining bindings don't depend on the terminal setttings.
+
+.nf
+  ^F     ->   cursor-right
+  ^B     ->   cursor-left
+  M-i    ->   insert-mode
+  ^A     ->   beginning-of-line
+  ^E     ->   end-of-line
+  ^U     ->   delete-line
+  ^K     ->   kill-line
+  M-f    ->   forward-word
+  M-b    ->   backward-word
+  ^D     ->   del-char-or-list-or-eof
+  ^H     ->   backward-delete-char
+  ^?     ->   backward-delete-char
+  M-d    ->   forward-delete-word
+  M-^H   ->   backward-delete-word
+  M-^?   ->   backward-delete-word
+  M-u    ->   upcase-word
+  M-l    ->   downcase-word
+  M-c    ->   capitalize-word
+  ^R     ->   redisplay
+  ^L     ->   clear-screen
+  ^T     ->   transpose-chars
+  ^@     ->   set-mark
+  ^X^X   ->   exchange-point-and-mark
+  ^W     ->   kill-region
+  M-w    ->   copy-region-as-kill
+  ^Y     ->   yank
+  ^P     ->   up-history
+  ^N     ->   down-history
+  M-p    ->   history-search-backward
+  M-n    ->   history-search-forward
+  ^I     ->   complete-word
+  ^X*    ->   expand-filename
+  ^X^F   ->   read-from-file
+  ^X^R   ->   read-init-files
+  ^Xg    ->   list-glob
+  ^Xh    ->   list-history
+  M-<    ->   beginning-of-history
+  M->    ->   end-of-history
+  \\n     ->   newline
+  \\r     ->   newline
+  M-o    ->   repeat-history
+  M-^V   ->   vi-mode
+
+  M-0, M-1, ... M-9  ->  digit-argument  (see below)
+.fi
+
+Note that ^I is what the TAB key generates, and that ^@ can be
+generated not only by pressing the control key and the @ key
+simultaneously, but also by pressing the control key and the space bar
+at the same time.
+
+.SH DEFAULT KEY BINDINGS IN VI MODE
+
+The following default key bindings are designed to mimic the
+vi style of editing as closely as possible. This means that
+very few editing functions are provided in the initial
+character input mode, editing functions instead being
+provided by the vi command mode. Vi command mode is entered
+whenever the escape character is pressed, or whenever a
+key-sequence that starts with a meta character is entered. In
+addition to mimicing vi, libtecla provides bindings for tab
+completion, wild-card expansion of file names, and historical
+line recall.
+.sp
+To learn how to tell the tecla library to use vi mode instead
+of the default emacs editing mode, see the section entitled
+THE TECLA CONFIGURATION FILE.
+.sp
+As already mentioned above in the emacs section, Note that a
+key sequence like \f3^A\f1 or \f3C-a\f1 means hold the
+control-key down while pressing the letter \f3A\f1, and that
+where you see \f3\\E\f1 or \f3M-\f1 in a binding, this
+represents the escape key or the Meta modifier key. Also note
+that to \f3gl_get_line()\f1, pressing the escape key before a
+key is equivalent to pressing the meta key at the same time
+as that key. Thus the key sequence \f3M-p\f1 can be typed in
+two ways, by pressing the escape key, followed by pressing
+\f3p\f1, or by pressing the Meta key at the same time as
+\f3p\f1.
+.sp
+Under UNIX the terminal driver sets a number of special keys
+for certain functions. The tecla library attempts to use the
+same keybindings to maintain consistency, binding them both
+in input mode and in command mode. The key sequences shown
+for the following 6 bindings are thus just examples of what
+they will probably be set to. If you have used the \f3stty\f1
+command to change these keys, then the default bindings
+should match.
+
+.nf
+  ^C     ->   user-interrupt
+  ^\\     ->   abort
+  ^Z     ->   suspend
+  ^Q     ->   start-output
+  ^S     ->   stop-output
+  ^V     ->   literal-next
+  M-^C   ->   user-interrupt
+  M-^\\   ->   abort
+  M-^Z   ->   suspend
+  M-^Q   ->   start-output
+  M-^S   ->   stop-output
+.fi
+
+Note that above, most of the bindings are defined twice, once
+as a raw control code like \f3^C\f1 and then a second time as
+a meta character like \f3M-^C\f1. The former is the binding
+for vi input mode, whereas the latter is the binding for vi
+command mode. Once in command mode all key-sequences that the
+user types that they don't explicitly start with an escape or
+a meta key, have their first key secretly converted to a meta
+character before the key sequence is looked up in the key
+binding table. Thus, once in command mode, when you type the
+letter \f3i\f1, for example, the tecla library actually looks
+up the binding for \f3M-i\f1.
+
+The cursor keys are refered to by name, as follows. This is necessary
+because different types of terminals generate different key sequences
+when their cursor keys are pressed.
+
+  right  ->   cursor-right
+  left   ->   cursor-left
+  up     ->   up-history
+  down   ->   down-history
+
+The cursor keys normally generate a keysequence that start
+with an escape character, so beware that using the arrow keys
+will put you into command mode (if you aren't already in
+command mode).
+.sp
+The following are the terminal-independent key bindings for vi input
+mode.
+
+.nf
+  ^D     ->   list-or-eof
+  ^G     ->   list-glob
+  ^H     ->   backward-delete-char
+  ^I     ->   complete-word
+  \\r     ->   newline
+  \\n     ->   newline
+  ^L     ->   clear-screen
+  ^N     ->   down-history
+  ^P     ->   up-history
+  ^R     ->   redisplay
+  ^U     ->   backward-kill-line
+  ^W     ->   backward-delete-word
+  ^X*    ->   expand-filename
+  ^X^F   ->   read-from-file
+  ^X^R   ->   read-init-files
+  ^?     ->   backward-delete-char
+.fi
+
+The following are the key bindings that are defined in vi
+command mode, this being specified by them all starting with
+a meta character. As mentioned above, once in command mode
+the initial meta character is optional. For example, you
+might enter command mode by typing Esc, and then press h
+twice to move the cursor two positions to the left. Both h
+characters get quietly converted to M-h before being compared
+to the key-binding table, the first one because Escape
+followed by a character is always converted to the equivalent
+meta character, and the second because command mode was
+already active.
+
+.nf
+  M-\\     ->   cursor-right     (Meta-space)
+  M-$     ->   end-of-line
+  M-*     ->   expand-filename
+  M-+     ->   down-history
+  M--     ->   up-history
+  M-<     ->   beginning-of-history
+  M->     ->   end-of-history
+  M-^     ->   beginning-of-line
+  M-;     ->   repeat-find-char
+  M-,     ->   invert-refind-char
+  M-|     ->   goto-column
+  M-~     ->   change-case
+  M-.     ->   vi-repeat-change
+  M-%     ->   find-parenthesis
+  M-a     ->   vi-append
+  M-A     ->   vi-append-at-eol
+  M-b     ->   backward-word
+  M-B     ->   backward-word
+  M-C     ->   vi-change-rest-of-line
+  M-cb    ->   vi-backward-change-word
+  M-cB    ->   vi-backward-change-word
+  M-cc    ->   vi-change-line
+  M-ce    ->   vi-forward-change-word
+  M-cE    ->   vi-forward-change-word
+  M-cw    ->   vi-forward-change-word
+  M-cW    ->   vi-forward-change-word
+  M-cF    ->   vi-backward-change-find
+  M-cf    ->   vi-forward-change-find
+  M-cT    ->   vi-backward-change-to
+  M-ct    ->   vi-forward-change-to
+  M-c;    ->   vi-change-refind
+  M-c,    ->   vi-change-invert-refind
+  M-ch    ->   vi-backward-change-char
+  M-c^H   ->   vi-backward-change-char
+  M-c^?   ->   vi-backward-change-char
+  M-cl    ->   vi-forward-change-char
+  M-c\\    ->   vi-forward-change-char  (Meta-c-space)
+  M-c^    ->   vi-change-to-bol
+  M-c0    ->   vi-change-to-bol
+  M-c$    ->   vi-change-rest-of-line
+  M-c|    ->   vi-change-to-column
+  M-c%    ->   vi-change-to-parenthesis
+  M-dh    ->   backward-delete-char
+  M-d^H   ->   backward-delete-char
+  M-d^?   ->   backward-delete-char
+  M-dl    ->   forward-delete-char
+  M-d     ->   forward-delete-char    (Meta-d-space)
+  M-dd    ->   delete-line
+  M-db    ->   backward-delete-word
+  M-dB    ->   backward-delete-word
+  M-de    ->   forward-delete-word
+  M-dE    ->   forward-delete-word
+  M-dw    ->   forward-delete-word
+  M-dW    ->   forward-delete-word
+  M-dF    ->   backward-delete-find
+  M-df    ->   forward-delete-find
+  M-dT    ->   backward-delete-to
+  M-dt    ->   forward-delete-to
+  M-d;    ->   delete-refind
+  M-d,    ->   delete-invert-refind
+  M-d^    ->   backward-kill-line
+  M-d0    ->   backward-kill-line
+  M-d$    ->   kill-line
+  M-D     ->   kill-line
+  M-d|    ->   delete-to-column
+  M-d%    ->   delete-to-parenthesis
+  M-e     ->   forward-word
+  M-E     ->   forward-word
+  M-f     ->   forward-find-char
+  M-F     ->   backward-find-char
+  M--     ->   up-history
+  M-h     ->   cursor-left
+  M-H     ->   beginning-of-history
+  M-i     ->   vi-insert
+  M-I     ->   vi-insert-at-bol
+  M-j     ->   down-history
+  M-J     ->   history-search-forward
+  M-k     ->   up-history
+  M-K     ->   history-search-backward
+  M-l     ->   cursor-right
+  M-L     ->   end-of-history
+  M-n     ->   history-re-search-forward
+  M-N     ->   history-re-search-backward
+  M-p     ->   append-yank
+  M-P     ->   yank
+  M-r     ->   vi-replace-char
+  M-R     ->   vi-overwrite
+  M-s     ->   vi-forward-change-char
+  M-S     ->   vi-change-line
+  M-t     ->   forward-to-char
+  M-T     ->   backward-to-char
+  M-u     ->   vi-undo
+  M-w     ->   forward-to-word
+  M-W     ->   forward-to-word
+  M-x     ->   forward-delete-char
+  M-X     ->   backward-delete-char
+  M-yh    ->   backward-copy-char
+  M-y^H   ->   backward-copy-char
+  M-y^?   ->   backward-copy-char
+  M-yl    ->   forward-copy-char
+  M-y\\    ->   forward-copy-char  (Meta-y-space)
+  M-ye    ->   forward-copy-word
+  M-yE    ->   forward-copy-word
+  M-yw    ->   forward-copy-word
+  M-yW    ->   forward-copy-word
+  M-yb    ->   backward-copy-word
+  M-yB    ->   backward-copy-word
+  M-yf    ->   forward-copy-find
+  M-yF    ->   backward-copy-find
+  M-yt    ->   forward-copy-to
+  M-yT    ->   backward-copy-to
+  M-y;    ->   copy-refind
+  M-y,    ->   copy-invert-refind
+  M-y^    ->   copy-to-bol
+  M-y0    ->   copy-to-bol
+  M-y$    ->   copy-rest-of-line
+  M-yy    ->   copy-line
+  M-Y     ->   copy-line
+  M-y|    ->   copy-to-column
+  M-y%    ->   copy-to-parenthesis
+  M-^E    ->   emacs-mode
+  M-^H    ->   cursor-left
+  M-^?    ->   cursor-left
+  M-^L    ->   clear-screen
+  M-^N    ->   down-history
+  M-^P    ->   up-history
+  M-^R    ->   redisplay
+  M-^D    ->   list-or-eof
+  M-^I    ->   complete-word
+  M-\\r    ->   newline
+  M-\\n    ->   newline
+  M-^X^R  ->   read-init-files
+  M-^Xh   ->   list-history
+
+  M-0, M-1, ... M-9  ->  digit-argument  (see below)
+.fi
+
+Note that ^I is what the TAB key generates.
+
+.SH ENTERING REPEAT COUNTS
+
+Many of the key binding functions described previously, take
+an optional count, typed in before the target
+keysequence. This is interpreted as a repeat count by most
+bindings. A notable exception is the goto-column binding,
+which interprets the count as a column number.
+.sp
+By default you can specify this count argument by pressing
+the meta key while typing in the numeric count. This relies
+on the \f3digit-argument\f1 action being bound to Meta-0,
+Meta-1 etc.  Once any one of these bindings has been
+activated, you can optionally take your finger off the meta
+key to type in the rest of the number, since every numeric
+digit thereafter is treated as part of the number, unless it
+is preceded by the \f3literal-next\f1 binding. As soon as a
+non-digit, or literal digit key is pressed the repeat count
+is terminated and either causes the just typed character to
+be added to the line that many times, or causes the next
+key-binding function to be given that argument.
+.sp
+For example, in emacs mode, typing:
+.sp
+.nf
+  M-12a
+.fi
+.sp
+causes the letter 'a' to be added to the line 12 times,
+whereas
+.sp
+.nf
+  M-4M-c
+.fi
+.sp
+Capitalizes the next 4 words.
+.sp
+In vi command mode the Meta modifier is automatically added
+to all characters typed in, so to enter a count in vi
+command-mode, just involves typing in the number, just as at
+it does in the vi editor itself. So for example, in vi
+command mode, typing:
+.sp
+.nf
+  4w2x
+.fi
+.sp
+moves the cursor four words to the right, then deletes two characters.
+.sp
+You can also bind \f3digit-argument\f1 to other key sequences. If
+these end in a numeric digit, that digit gets appended to the current
+repeat count. If it doesn't end in a numeric digit, a new repeat count
+is started with a value of zero, and can be completed by typing in the
+number, after letting go of the key which triggered the digit-argument
+action.
+
+.SH THE TECLA CONFIGURATION FILE
+
+By default, the first call to \f3gl_get_line()\f1 looks for a file
+called \f3\&.teclarc\f1 in your home directory (ie. \f3~/.teclarc\f1).
+If it finds this file, it reads it, interpreting each line as defining
+a new key binding or an editing configuration option. Since the emacs
+keybindings are installed by default, if you want to use the
+non-default vi editing mode, the most important item to go in this
+file is the following line:
+
+.nf
+  edit-mode vi
+.fi
+
+This will re-configure the default bindings for vi-mode. The
+complete set of arguments that this command accepts are:
+.sp
+.nf
+  vi     -  Install key-bindings like those of the vi
+            editor.
+  emacs  -  Install key-bindings like those of the emacs
+            editor. This is the default.
+  none   -  Use just the native line editing facilities
+            provided by the terminal driver.
+.fi
+.sp
+To prevent the terminal bell from being rung, such as when
+an unrecognized control-sequence is typed, place the
+following line in the configuration file:
+
+.nf
+  nobeep
+.fi
+
+An example of a key binding line in the configuration file is
+the following.
+
+.nf
+  bind M-[2~ insert-mode
+.fi
+
+On many keyboards, the above key sequence is generated when one
+presses the \f3insert\f1 key, so with this keybinding, one can toggle
+between the emacs-mode insert and overwrite modes by hitting one
+key. One could also do it by typing out the above sequence of
+characters one by one. As explained above, the \f3M-\f1 part of this
+sequence can be typed either by pressing the escape key before the
+following key, or by pressing the Meta key at the same time as the
+following key. Thus if you had set the above key binding, and the
+insert key on your keyboard didn't generate the above key sequence,
+you could still type it in either of the following 2 ways.
+
+.nf
+  1. Hit the escape key momentarily, then press '[', then '2', then
+     finally '~'.
+
+  2. Press the meta key at the same time as pressing the '[' key,
+     then press '2', then '~'.
+.fi
+
+If you set a keybinding for a key-sequence that is already bound to a function,
+the new binding overrides the old one. If in the new binding you omit the name
+of the new function to bind to the key-sequence, the original binding becomes
+undefined.
+.sp
+Starting with versions of libtecla later than 1.3.3 it is now possible
+to bind keysequences that begin with a printable character. Previously
+key-sequences were required to start with a control or meta character.
+.sp
+Note that the special keywords "up", "down", "left" and "right" refer
+to the arrow keys, and are thus not treated as keysequences. So, for
+example, to rebind the up and down arrow keys to use the history
+search mechanism instead of the simple history recall method, you
+could place the following in your configuration file:
+
+.nf
+  bind up history-search-backwards
+  bind down history-search-backwards
+.fi
+.sp
+To unbind an existing binding, you can do this with the bind command
+by omitting to name any action to rebind the key sequence to.  For
+example, by not specifying an action function, the following command
+unbinds the default beginning-of-line action from the ^A key sequence:
+
+.nf
+  bind ^A
+.fi
+
+.SH ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION SOURCES
+
+As mentioned above, by default users have the option of configuring
+the behavior of \f3gl_get_line()\f1 via a configuration file called
+\f3\&.teclarc\f1 in their home directories. The fact that all
+applications share this same configuration file is both an advantage
+and a disadvantage.  In most cases it is an advantage, since it
+encourages uniformity, and frees the user from having to configure
+each application separately.  In some applications, however, this
+single means of configuration is a problem. This is particularly true
+of embedded software, where there's no filesystem to read a
+configuration file from, and also in applications where a radically
+different choice of keybindings is needed to emulate a legacy keyboard
+interface.  To cater for such cases, the following function allows the
+application to control where configuration information is read from.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_configure_getline(GetLine *gl,
+                           const char *app_string,
+                           const char *app_file,
+                           const char *user_file);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+It allows the configuration commands that would normally be read from
+a user's \f3~/.teclarc\f1 file, to be read from any or none of, a
+string, an application specific configuration file, and/or a
+user-specific configuration file. If this function is called before
+the first call to \f3gl_get_line()\f1, the default behavior of
+reading \f3~/.teclarc\f1 on the first call to \f3gl_get_line()\f1 is
+disabled, so all configuration must be achieved using the
+configuration sources specified with this function.
+
+If \f3app_string != NULL\f1, then it is interpreted as a string
+containing one or more configuration commands, separated from each
+other in the string by embedded newline characters. If \f3app_file !=
+NULL\f1 then it is interpreted as the full pathname of an
+application-specific configuration file. If \f3user_file != NULL\f1
+then it is interpreted as the full pathname of a user-specific
+configuration file, such as \f3~/.teclarc\f1. For example, in the
+following call,
+
+  gl_configure_getline(gl, "edit-mode vi \\n nobeep",
+                           "/usr/share/myapp/teclarc",
+                           "~/.teclarc");
+
+the \f3app_string\f1 argument causes the calling application to start
+in vi edit-mode, instead of the default emacs mode, and turns off the
+use of the terminal bell by the library. It then attempts to read
+system-wide configuration commands from an optional file called
+\f3/usr/share/myapp/teclarc\f1, then finally reads user-specific
+configuration commands from an optional \f3\&.teclarc\f1 file in the
+user's home directory. Note that the arguments are listed in ascending
+order of priority, with the contents of \f3app_string\f1 being
+potentially overriden by commands in \f3app_file\f1, and commands in
+\f3app_file\f1 potentially being overriden by commands in
+\f3user_file\f1.
+.sp
+You can call this function as many times as needed, the results being
+cumulative, but note that copies of any filenames specified via the
+\f3app_file\f1 and \f3user_file\f1 arguments are recorded internally
+for subsequent use by the \f3read-init-files\f1 key-binding function,
+so if you plan to call this function multiple times, be sure that the
+last call specifies the filenames that you want re-read when the user
+requests that the configuration files be re-read.
+
+.SH FILENAME AND TILDE COMPLETION
+
+With the default key bindings, pressing the TAB key (aka. ^I) results
+in \f3gl_get_line()\f1 attempting to complete the incomplete filename
+that precedes the cursor. \f3gl_get_line()\f1 searches backwards from
+the cursor, looking for the start of the filename, stopping when it
+hits either a space or the start of the line. If more than one file
+has the specified prefix, \f3gl_get_line()\f1 completes the filename
+up to the point at which the ambiguous matches start to differ, then
+lists the possible matches.
+.sp
+In addition to literally written filenames, \f3gl_get_line()\f1 can
+complete files that start with \f3~/\f1 and \f3~user/\f1 expressions
+and that contain \f3$envvar\f1 expressions. In particular, if you hit
+TAB within an incomplete \f3~user\f1, expression, \f3gl_get_line()\f1
+will attempt to complete the username, listing any ambiguous matches.
+.sp
+The completion binding is implemented using the
+\f3cpl_word_completions()\f1 function, which is also available
+separately to users of this library. See the
+\f3cpl_word_completions(3)\f1 man page for more details.
+
+.SH CUSTOMIZED WORD COMPLETION
+
+If in your application, you would like to have TAB completion complete
+other things in addition to or instead of filenames, you can arrange
+this by registering an alternate completion callback function, via a
+call to the \f3gl_customize_completion()\f1 function.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_customize_completion(GetLine *gl, void *data,
+                              CplMatchFn *match_fn);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3data\f1 argument provides a way for your application to pass
+arbitrary, application-specific information to the callback
+function. This is passed to the callback every time that it is
+called. It might for example, point to the symbol table from which
+possible completions are to be sought. The \f3match_fn\f1 argument
+specifies the callback function to be called. The \f3CplMatchFn\f1
+function type is defined in \f3libtecla.h\f1, as is a
+\f3CPL_MATCH_FN()\f1 macro that you can use to declare and prototype
+callback functions. The declaration and responsibilities of callback
+functions are described in depth in the \f1cpl_complete_word(3)\f1 man
+page.
+.sp
+In brief, the callback function is responsible for looking backwards
+in the input line, back from the point at which the user pressed TAB,
+to find the start of the word being completed. It then must lookup
+possible completions of this word, and record them one by one in the
+\f3WordCompletion\f1 object that is passed to it as an argument, by
+calling the \f3cpl_add_completion()\f1 function. If the callback
+function wishes to provide filename completion in addition to its own
+specific completions, it has the option of itself calling the builtin
+file-name completion callback. This also, is documented in the
+\f3cpl_complete_word(3)\f1 man page.
+.sp
+Note that if you would like \f3gl_get_line()\f1 to return the current
+input line when a successful completion is been made, you can arrange
+this when you call \f3cpl_add_completion()\f1, by making the last
+character of the continuation suffix a newline character. If you do
+this, the input line will be updated to display the completion,
+together with any contiuation suffix up to the newline character, then
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 will return this input line.
+
+.SH FILENAME EXPANSION
+
+With the default key bindings, pressing \f3^X*\f1 causes
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 to expand the filename that precedes the cursor,
+replacing \f3~/\f1 and \f3~user/\f1 expressions with the corresponding
+home directories, and replacing \f3$envvar\f1 expressions with the
+value of the specified environment variable, then if there are any
+wildcards, replacing the so far expanded filename with a
+space-separated list of the files which match the wild cards.
+.sp
+The expansion binding is implemented using the \f3ef_expand_file()\f1 function.
+See the \f3ef_expand_file(3)\f1 man page for more details.
+
+.SH RECALLING PREVIOUSLY TYPED LINES
+
+Every time that a new line is entered by the user, it is appended to a
+list of historical input lines maintained within the GetLine resource
+object. You can traverse up and down this list using the up and down
+arrow keys. Alternatively, you can do the same with the \f3^P\f1, and
+\f3^N\f1 keys, and in vi command mode you can alternatively use the k
+and j characters. Thus pressing up-arrow once, replaces the current
+input line with the previously entered line. Pressing up-arrow again,
+replaces this with the line that was entered before it, etc.. Having
+gone back one or more lines into the history list, one can return to
+newer lines by pressing down-arrow one or more times. If you do this
+sufficient times, you will return to the original line that you were
+entering when you first hit up-arrow.
+.sp
+Note that in vi mode, all of the history recall functions switch the
+library into command mode.
+.sp
+In emacs mode the \f3M-p\f1 and \f3M-n\f1 keys work just like the
+\f3^P\f1 and \f3^N\f1 keys, except that they skip all but those
+historical lines which share the prefix that precedes the cursor. In
+vi command mode the upper case \f3K\f1 and \f3J\f1 characters do the
+same thing, except that the string that they search for includes the
+character under the cursor as well as what precedes it.
+.sp
+Thus for example, suppose that you were in emacs mode, and you had
+just entered the following list of commands in the order shown:
+
+.nf
+  ls ~/tecla/
+  cd ~/tecla
+  ls -l getline.c
+  emacs ~/tecla/getline.c
+.fi
+
+If you next typed:
+
+.nf
+  ls
+.fi
+
+and then hit \f3M-p\f1, then rather than returning the previously
+typed emacs line, which doesn't start with "ls", \f3gl_get_line()\f1
+would recall the "ls -l getline.c" line. Pressing \f3M-p\f1 again
+would recall the "ls ~/tecla/" line.
+
+.SH HISTORY FILES
+
+To save the contents of the history buffer before quitting your
+application, and subsequently restore them when you next start the
+application, the following functions are provided.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+ int gl_save_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                     const char *comment, int max_lines);
+ int gl_load_history(GetLine *gl, const char *filename,
+                     const char *comment);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+The \f3filename\f1 argument specifies the name to give the history
+file when saving, or the name of an existing history file, when
+loading. This may contain home-directory and environment variable
+expressions, such as "~/.myapp_history" or "$HOME/.myapp_history".
+.sp
+Along with each history line, extra information about it, such as when
+it was entered by the user, and what its nesting level is, is recorded
+as a comment preceding the line in the history file. Writing this as a
+comment allows the history file to double as a command file, just in
+case you wish to replay a whole session using it. Since comment
+prefixes differ in different languages, the \f3comment\f1 argument is
+provided for specifying the comment prefix. For example, if your
+application were a unix shell, such as the bourne shell, you would
+specify "#" here. Whatever you choose for the comment character, you
+must specify the same prefix to \f3gl_load_history()\f1 that you used
+when you called \f3gl_save_history()\f1 to write the history file.
+.sp
+The \f3max_lines\f1 must be either -1 to specify that all lines in the
+history list be saved, or a positive number specifying a ceiling on
+how many of the most recent lines should be saved.
+.sp
+Both fuctions return non-zero on error, after writing an error message
+to stderr. Note that \f3gl_load_history()\f1 does not consider the
+non-existence of a file to be an error.
+
+.SH MULTIPLE HISTORY LISTS
+
+If your application uses a single \f3GetLine\f1 object for entering
+many different types of input lines, you may wish \f3gl_get_line()\f1
+to distinguish the different types of lines in the history list, and
+only recall lines that match the current type of line. To support this
+requirement, \f3gl_get_line()\f1 marks lines being recorded in the
+history list with an integer identifier chosen by the application.
+Initially this identifier is set to \f10\f3 by \f3new_GetLine()\f1,
+but it can be changed subsequently by calling
+\f3gl_group_history()\f1.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_group_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned id);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+The integer identifier \f3id\f1 can be any number chosen by the
+application, but note that \f3gl_save_history()\f1 and
+\f3gl_load_history()\f1 preserve the association between identifiers
+and historical input lines between program invokations, so you should
+choose fixed identifiers for the different types of input line used by
+your application.
+.sp
+Whenever \f3gl_get_line()\f1 appends a new input line to the history
+list, the current history identifier is recorded with it, and when it
+is asked to recall a historical input line, it only recalls lines that
+are marked with the current identifier.
+
+.SH DISPLAYING HISTORY
+
+The history list can be displayed by calling \f3gl_show_history()\f1.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_show_history(GetLine *gl, FILE *fp,
+                      const char *fmt,
+                      int all_groups,
+                      int max_lines);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+This displays the current contents of the history list to the stdio
+output stream \f3fp\f1. If the \f3max_lines\f1 argument is greater
+than or equal to zero, then no more than this number of the most
+recent lines will be displayed. If the \f3all_groups\f1 argument is
+non-zero, lines from all history groups are displayed. Otherwise just
+those of the currently selected history group are displayed. The
+format string argument, \f3fmt\f1, determines how the line is
+displayed. This can contain arbitrary characters which are written
+verbatim, interleaved with any of the following format directives:
+
+.nf
+  %D  -  The date on which the line was originally
+         entered, formatted like 2001-11-20.
+  %T  -  The time of day when the line was entered,
+         formatted like 23:59:59.
+  %N  -  The sequential entry number of the line in
+         the history buffer.
+  %G  -  The number of the history group which the
+         line belongs to.
+  %%  -  A literal % character.
+  %H  -  The history line itself.
+.fi
+
+Thus a format string like \f3"%D %T  %H\n"\f1 would output something like:
+
+.nf
+  2001-11-20 10:23:34  Hello world
+.fi
+
+Note the inclusion of an explicit newline character in the format
+string.
+
+.SH LOOKING UP HISTORY
+
+The \f3gl_lookup_history()\f1 function allows the calling application
+to look up lines in the history list.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  typedef struct {
+    const char *line;    /* The requested historical */
+                         /*  line. */
+    unsigned group;      /* The history group to which */
+                         /*  the line belongs. */
+    time_t timestamp;    /* The date and time at which */
+                         /*  the line was originally */
+                         /*  entered. */
+  } GlHistoryLine;
+
+  int gl_lookup_history(GetLine *gl, unsigned long id,
+                        GlHistoryLine *hline);
+.fi
+.sp  
+
+The \f3id\f1 argument indicates which line to look up, where the first
+line that was entered in the history list after \f3new_GetLine()\f1
+was called, is denoted by 0, and subsequently entered lines are
+denoted with successively higher numbers. Note that the range of lines
+currently preserved in the history list can be queried by calling the
+\f3gl_range_of_history()\f1 function, described later. If the
+requested line is in the history list, the details of the line are
+recorded in the variable pointed to by the \f3hline\f1 argument, and
+\f31\f1 is returned. Otherwise \f30\f1 is returned, and the variable
+pointed to by \f3hline\f1 is left unchanged.
+.sp
+Beware that the string returned in \f3hline->line\f1 is part of the
+history buffer, so it must not be modified by the caller, and will be
+recycled on the next call to any function that takes \f3gl\f1 as its
+argument. Therefore you should make a private copy of this string if
+you need to keep it around.
+
+.SH MISCELLANEOUS HISTORY CONFIGURATION
+
+If you wish to change the size of the history buffer that was
+originally specified in the call to \f3new_GetLine()\f1, you can do so
+with the \f3gl_resize_history()\f1 function.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_resize_history(GetLine *gl, size_t histlen);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+The \f3histlen\f1 argument specifies the new size in bytes, and if you
+specify this as 0, the buffer will be deleted.
+.sp
+As mentioned in the discussion of \f3new_GetLine()\f1, the number of
+lines that can be stored in the history buffer, depends on the lengths
+of the individual lines. For example, a 1000 byte buffer could equally
+store 10 lines of average length 100 bytes, or 2 lines of average
+length 50 bytes. Although the buffer is never expanded when new lines
+are added, a list of pointers into the buffer does get expanded when
+needed to accomodate the number of lines currently stored in the
+buffer. To place an upper limit on the number of lines in the buffer,
+and thus a ceiling on the amount of memory used in this list, you can
+call the \f3gl_limit_history()\f1 function.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  void gl_limit_history(GetLine *gl, int max_lines);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+The \f3max_lines\f1 should either be a positive number \f3>= 0\f1,
+specifying an upper limit on the number of lines in the buffer, or be
+\f3-1\f1 to cancel any previously specified limit. When a limit is in
+effect, only the \f3max_lines\f1 most recently appended lines are kept
+in the buffer. Older lines are discarded.
+.sp
+To discard lines from the history buffer, use the
+\f3gl_clear_history()\f1 function.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void gl_clear_history(GetLine *gl, int all_groups);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3all_groups\f1 argument tells the function whether to delete
+just the lines associated with the current history group (see
+\f3gl_group_history()\f1), or all historical lines in the buffer.
+.sp
+The \f3gl_toggle_history()\f1 function allows you to toggle history on
+and off without losing the current contents of the history list.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  void gl_toggle_history(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+Setting the \f3enable\f1 argument to 0 turns off the history
+mechanism, and setting it to 1 turns it back on. When history is
+turned off, no new lines will be added to the history list, and
+history lookup key-bindings will act as though there is nothing in the
+history buffer.
+
+.SH QUERYING HISTORY INFORMATION
+
+The configured state of the history list can be queried with the
+\f3gl_history_state()\f1 function.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  typedef struct {
+    int enabled;     /* True if history is enabled */
+    unsigned group;  /* The current history group */
+    int max_lines;   /* The current upper limit on the */
+                     /*  number of lines in the history */
+                     /*  list, or -1 if unlimited. */
+  } GlHistoryState;
+
+  void gl_state_of_history(GetLine *gl,
+                           GlHistoryState *state);
+.fi
+.sp
+On return, the status information is recorded in the variable pointed
+to by the \f3state\f1 argument.
+.sp
+The \f3gl_range_of_history()\f1 function returns the number and
+range of lines in the history list.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+typedef struct {
+  unsigned long oldest;  /* The sequential entry number */
+                         /*  of the oldest line in the */
+                         /*  history list. */
+  unsigned long newest;  /* The sequential entry number */
+                         /*  of the newest line in the */
+                         /*  history list. */
+  int nlines;            /* The number of lines in the */
+                         /*  history list. */
+} GlHistoryRange;
+
+void gl_range_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistoryRange *range);
+.fi
+.sp
+The return values are recorded in the variable pointed to by the
+\f3range\f1 argument. If the \f3nlines\f1 member of this structure is
+greater than zero, then the \f3oldest\f1 and \f3newest\f1 members
+report the range of lines in the list, and \f3newest=oldest+nlines-1\f1.
+Otherwise they are both zero.
+.sp
+The \f3gl_size_of_history()\f1 function returns the total size of the
+history buffer and the amount of the buffer that is currently
+occupied.
+.sp
+.nf
+  typedef struct {
+    size_t size;      /* The size of the history buffer */
+                      /*  (bytes). */
+    size_t used;      /* The number of bytes of the */
+                      /*  history buffer that are */
+                      /*  currently occupied. */
+  } GlHistorySize;
+
+  void gl_size_of_history(GetLine *gl, GlHistorySize *size);
+.fi
+.sp
+On return, the size information is recorded in the variable pointed to
+by the \f3size\f1 argument.
+
+.SH CHANGING TERMINALS
+
+The \f3new_GetLine()\f1 constructor function assumes that input is to
+be read from \f3stdin\f1, and output written to \f3stdout\f1. The
+following function allows you to switch to different input and output
+streams.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_change_terminal(GetLine *gl, FILE *input_fp,
+                         FILE *output_fp, const char *term);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3gl\f1 argument is the object that was returned by
+\f3new_GetLine()\f1.  The \f3input_fp\f1 argument specifies the stream
+to read from, and \f3output_fp\f1 specifies the stream to be written
+to. Only if both of these refer to a terminal, will interactive
+terminal input be enabled.  Otherwise \f3gl_get_line()\f1 will simply
+call \f3fgets()\f1 to read command input. If both streams refer to a
+terminal, then they must refer to the same terminal, and the type of
+this terminal must be specified via the \f3term\f1 argument. The value
+of the \f3term\f1 argument is looked up in the terminal information
+database (terminfo or termcap), in order to determine which special
+control sequences are needed to control various aspects of the
+terminal. \f3new_GetLine()\f1 for example, passes the return value of
+\f3getenv("TERM")\f1 in this argument. Note that if one or both of
+\f3input_fp\f1 and \f3output_fp\f1 don't refer to a terminal, then it
+is legal to pass \f3NULL\f1 instead of a terminal type.
+.sp
+Note that if you want to pass file descriptors to
+\f3gl_change_terminal()\f1, you can do this by creating stdio stream
+wrappers using the POSIX \f3fdopen()\f1 function.
+
+.SH EXTERNAL EVENT HANDLING
+
+While \f3gl_get_line()\f1 is waiting for keyboard input from the user,
+you can ask it to also watch for activity on arbitrary file
+descriptors, such as network sockets, pipes etc, and have it call
+functions of your choosing when activity is seen. This works on any
+system that has the \f3select()\f1 system call, which is most, if not
+all flavors of unix. Registering a file descriptor to be watched by
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 involves calling the \f3gl_watch_fd()\f1 function.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_watch_fd(GetLine *gl, int fd, GlFdEvent event,
+                  GlFdEventFn *callback, void *data);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+If this returns non-zero, then it means that either your arguments are
+invalid, or that this facility isn't supported on the host system.
+.sp
+The \f3fd\f1 argument is the file descriptor to be watched. The
+\f3event\f1 argument specifies what type of activity is of interest,
+chosen from the following enumerated values:
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  GLFD_READ   -  Watch for the arrival of data to be read.
+  GLFD_WRITE  -  Watch for the ability to write to the file
+                 descriptor without blocking.
+  GLFD_URGENT -  Watch for the arrival of urgent
+                 out-of-band data on the file descriptor.
+.fi
+.sp
+
+The \f3callback\f1 argument is the function to call when the selected
+activity is seen. It should be defined with the following macro, which
+is defined in libtecla.h.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  #define GL_FD_EVENT_FN(fn) GlFdStatus (fn)(GetLine *gl, \\
+                                      void *data, int fd, \\
+                                      GlFdEvent event)
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3data\f1 argument of the \f3gl_watch_fd()\f1 function is passed
+to the callback function for its own use, and can point to anything
+you like, including \f3NULL\f1. The file descriptor and the event
+argument are also passed to the callback function, and this
+potentially allows the same callback function to be registered to more
+than one type of event and/or more than one file descriptor. The
+return value of the callback function should be one of the following
+values.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  GLFD_ABORT    -  Tell gl_get_line() to abort with an
+                   error (errno won't be set, so set it
+                   appropriately yourself if you need it).
+  GLFD_REFRESH  -  Redraw the input line then continue
+                   waiting for input. Return this if
+                   your callback wrote to the terminal.
+  GLFD_CONTINUE -  Continue to wait for input, without
+                   redrawing the line.
+.fi
+.sp
+Note that before calling the callback, \f3gl_get_line()\f1 blocks most
+signals, and leaves its own signal handlers installed, so if you need
+to catch a particular signal you will need to both temporarily install
+your own signal handler, and unblock the signal. Be sure to re-block
+the signal (if it was originally blocked) and reinstate the original
+signal handler, if any, before returning.
+.sp
+Your callback shouldn't try to read from the terminal, which is left
+in raw mode as far as input is concerned. You can however write to the
+terminal as usual, since features like conversion of newline to
+carriage-return/linefeed are re-enabled while the callback is
+running. If your callback function does write to the terminal, be sure
+to output a newline first, and when your callback returns, tell
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 that the input line needs to be redrawn, by
+returning the \f3GLFD_REFRESH\f1 status code.
+.sp
+To remove a callback function that you previously registered for a
+given file descriptor and event, simply call \f3gl_watch_fd()\f1 with
+the same file descriptor and \f3event\f1 arguments, but with a
+\f3callback\f1 argument of \f30\f1. The \f3data\f1 argument is ignored
+in this case.
+
+.SH SIGNAL HANDLING DEFAULTS
+
+By default, the \f3gl_get_line()\f1 function intercepts a
+number of signals. This is particularly important for
+signals which would by default terminate the process, since
+the terminal needs to be restored to a usable state before
+this happens. In this section, the signals that are trapped
+by default, and how gl_get_line() responds to them, is
+described. Changing these defaults is the topic of the
+following section.
+.sp
+When the following subset of signals are caught, \f3gl_get_line()\f1
+first restores the terminal settings and signal handling to how they
+were before \f3gl_get_line()\f1 was called, resends the signal, to
+allow the calling application's signal handlers to handle it, then if
+the process still exists, \f3gl_get_line()\f1 returns \f3NULL\f1 and
+sets \f3errno\f1 as specified below.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+ SIGINT  -  This signal is generated both by the keyboard
+            interrupt key (usually ^C), and the keyboard
+            break key.
+
+            errno=EINTR
+
+ SIGHUP  -  This signal is generated when the controlling
+            terminal exits.
+
+            errno=ENOTTY
+
+ SIGPIPE -  This signal is generated when a program attempts
+            to write to a pipe who's remote end isn't being
+            read by any process. This can happen for example
+            if you have called \f3gl_change_terminal()\f1 to
+            redirect output to a pipe hidden under a pseudo
+            terminal.
+
+            errno=EPIPE
+
+ SIGQUIT -  This signal is generated by the keyboard quit
+            key (usually ^\\).
+
+            errno=EINTR
+
+ SIGABRT -  This signal is generated by the standard C,
+            abort() function. By default it both
+            terminates the process and generates a core
+            dump.
+
+            errno=EINTR
+
+ SIGTERM -  This is the default signal that the UN*X
+            kill command sends to processes.
+
+            errno=EINTR
+.fi
+.sp
+Note that in the case of all of the above signals, POSIX mandates that
+by default the process is terminated, with the addition of a core dump
+in the case of the \f3SIGQUIT\f1 signal. In other words, if the
+calling application doesn't override the default handler by supplying
+its own signal handler, receipt of the corresponding signal will
+terminate the application before \f3gl_get_line()\f1 returns.
+.sp
+If gl_get_line() aborts with errno set to EINTR, you can find out what
+signal caused it to abort, by calling the following function.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_last_signal(const GetLine *gl);
+.fi
+.sp
+This returns the numeric code (eg. \f3SIGINT\f1) of the last signal
+that was received during the most recent call to \f3gl_get_line()\f1,
+or \f3-1\f1 if no signals were received.
+.sp
+On systems that support it, when a SIGWINCH (window change) signal is
+received, \f3gl_get_line()\f1 queries the terminal to find out its new
+size, redraws the current input line to accomodate the new size, then
+returns to waiting for keyboard input from the user. Unlike other
+signals, this signal isn't resent to the application.
+.sp
+Finally, the following signals cause \f3gl_get_line()\f1 to first
+restore the terminal and signal environment to that which prevailed
+before \f3gl_get_line()\f1 was called, then resend the signal to the
+application. If the process still exists after the signal has been
+delivered, then \f3gl_get_line()\f1 then re-establishes its own signal
+handlers, switches the terminal back to raw mode, redisplays the input
+line, and goes back to awaiting terminal input from the user.
+.sp
+.nf
+ SIGCONT    -  This signal is generated when a suspended
+               process is resumed.
+
+ SIGPWR     -  This signal is generated when a power failure
+               occurs (presumably when the system is on a
+               UPS).
+
+ SIGALRM    -  This signal is generated when a timer
+               expires.
+
+ SIGUSR1    -  An application specific signal.
+
+ SIGUSR2    -  Another application specific signal.
+
+ SIGVTALRM  -  This signal is generated when a virtual
+               timer expires (see man setitimer(2)).
+
+ SIGXCPU    -  This signal is generated when a process
+               exceeds its soft CPU time limit.
+
+ SIGTSTP    -  This signal is generated by the terminal
+               suspend key, which is usually ^Z, or the
+               delayed terminal suspend key, which is
+               usually ^Y.
+
+ SIGTTIN    -  This signal is generated if the program
+               attempts to read from the terminal while the
+               program is running in the background.
+
+ SIGTTOU    -  This signal is generated if the program
+               attempts to write to the terminal while the
+               program is running in the background.
+.fi
+.sp
+
+Obviously not all of the above signals are supported on all systems,
+so code to support them is conditionally compiled into the tecla
+library.
+.sp
+Note that if \f3SIGKILL\f1, which by definition can't be caught, or
+any of the hardware generated exception signals, such as
+\f3SIGSEGV\f1, \f3SIGBUS\f1 and \f3SIGFPE\f1, are received and
+unhandled while \f3gl_get_line()\f1 has the terminal in raw mode, the
+program will be terminated without the terminal having been restored
+to a usable state. In practice, job-control shells usually reset the
+terminal settings when a process relinquishes the controlling
+terminal, so this is only a problem with older shells.
+
+.SH CUSTOMIZED SIGNAL HANDLING
+
+The previous section listed the signals that
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 traps by default, and described how it
+responds to them. This section describes how to both add and
+remove signals from the list of trapped signals, and how to
+specify how \f3gl_get_line()\f1 should respond to a given
+signal.
+.sp
+If you don't need \f3gl_get_line()\f1 to do anything in
+response to a signal that it normally traps, you can tell to
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 to ignore that signal by calling
+\f3gl_ignore_signal()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_ignore_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3signo\f1 argument is the number of the signal
+(eg. \f3SIGINT\f1) that you want to have ignored. If the
+specified signal isn't currently one of those being trapped,
+this function does nothing.
+.sp
+The \f3gl_trap_signal()\f1 function allows you to either add
+a new signal to the list that \f3gl_get_line()\f1 traps, or
+modify how it responds to a signal that it already traps.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_trap_signal(GetLine *gl, int signo, unsigned flags,
+                     GlAfterSignal after, int errno_value);
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3signo\f1 argument is the number of the signal that
+you wish to have trapped. The \f3flags\f1 argument is a set
+of flags which determine the environment in which the
+application's signal handler is invoked, the \f3after\f1
+argument tells \f3gl_get_line()\f1 what to do after the
+application's signal handler returns, and \f3errno_value\f1
+tells \f3gl_get_line()\f1 what to set \f3errno\f1 to if told
+to abort.
+.sp
+The \f3flags\f1 argument is a bitwise OR of zero or more of
+the following enumerators:
+.sp
+.nf
+  GLS_RESTORE_SIG  -  Restore the caller's signal
+                      environment while handling the
+                      signal.
+
+  GLS_RESTORE_TTY  -  Restore the caller's terminal settings
+                      while handling the signal.
+
+  GLS_RESTORE_LINE -  Move the cursor to the start of the
+                      line following the input line before
+                      invoking the application's signal
+                      handler.
+
+  GLS_REDRAW_LINE  -  Redraw the input line when the
+                      application's signal handler returns.
+
+  GLS_UNBLOCK_SIG  -  Normally, if the calling program has
+                      a signal blocked (man sigprocmask),
+                      gl_get_line() does not trap that
+                      signal. This flag tells gl_get_line()
+                      to trap the signal and unblock it for
+                      the duration of the call to
+                      gl_get_line().
+
+  GLS_DONT_FORWARD -  If this flag is included, the signal
+                      will not be forwarded to the signal
+                      handler of the calling program.
+.fi
+.sp
+Two commonly useful flag combinations are also enumerated as
+follows:
+.sp
+.nf
+  GLS_RESTORE_ENV   = GLS_RESTORE_SIG | GLS_RESTORE_TTY |
+                      GLS_REDRAW_LINE
+
+  GLS_SUSPEND_INPUT = GLS_RESTORE_ENV | GLS_RESTORE_LINE
+.fi
+.sp
+
+If your signal handler, or the default system signal
+handler for this signal, if you haven't overriden it, never
+either writes to the terminal, nor suspends or terminates
+the calling program, then you can safely set the \f3flags\f1
+argument to \f30\f1.
+.sp
+If your signal handler always writes to the terminal, reads
+from it, or suspends or terminates the program, you should
+specify the \f3flags\f1 argument as \f3GL_SUSPEND_INPUT\f1,
+so that:
+.sp
+.nf
+1. The cursor doesn't get left in the middle of the input
+   line.
+2. So that the user can type in input and have it echoed.
+3. So that you don't need to end each output line with
+   \f3\\r\\n\f1, instead of just \f3\\n\f1.
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3GL_RESTORE_ENV\f1 combination is the same as
+\f3GL_SUSPEND_INPUT\f1, except that it doesn't move the
+cursor, and if your signal handler doesn't read or write
+anything to the terminal, the user won't see any visible
+indication that a signal was caught. This can be useful if
+you have a signal handler that only occasionally writes to
+the terminal, where using \f3GL_SUSPEND_LINE\f1 would cause
+the input line to be unnecessarily duplicated when nothing
+had been written to the terminal.  Such a signal handler,
+when it does write to the terminal, should be sure to start
+a new line at the start of its first write, by writing a
+'\\n' character, and should be sure to leave the cursor on a
+new line before returning. If the signal arrives while the
+user is entering a line that only occupies a signal terminal
+line, or if the cursor is on the last terminal line of a
+longer input line, this will have the same effect as
+\f3GL_SUSPEND_INPUT\f1. Otherwise it will start writing on a
+line that already contains part of the displayed input line.
+This doesn't do any harm, but it looks a bit ugly, which is
+why the \f3GL_SUSPEND_INPUT\f1 combination is better if you
+know that you are always going to be writting to the
+terminal.
+.sp
+The \f3after\f1 argument, which determines what
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 does after the application's signal
+handler returns (if it returns), can take any one of the
+following values:
+.sp
+.nf
+  GLS_RETURN   - Return the completed input line, just as
+                 though the user had pressed the return
+                 key.
+
+  GLS_ABORT    - Cause gl_get_line() to return \f3NULL\f1.
+
+  GLS_CONTINUE - Resume command line editing. 
+.fi
+.sp
+The \f3errno_value\f1 argument is intended to be combined
+with the \f3GLS_ABORT\f1 option, telling \f3gl_get_line()\f1
+what to set the standard \f3errno\f1 variable to before
+returning \f3NULL\f1 to the calling program. It can also,
+however, be used with the \f3GL_RETURN\f1 option, in case
+you wish to have a way to distinguish between an input line
+that was entered using the return key, and one that was
+entered by the receipt of a signal.
+
+.SH THE TERMINAL SIZE
+
+On most systems the combination of the \f3TIOCGWINSZ\f1 ioctl and the
+\f3SIGWINCH\f1 signal is used to maintain an accurate idea of the
+terminal size. The terminal size is newly queried every time that
+\f3gl_get_line()\f1 is called and whenever a \f3SIGWINCH\f1 signal is
+received.
+.sp
+On the few systems where this mechanism isn't available, at
+startup \f3new_GetLine()\f1 first looks for the \f3LINES\f1
+and \f3COLUMNS\f1 environment variables.  If these aren't
+found, or they contain unusable values, then if a terminal
+information database like terminfo or termcap is available,
+the default size of the terminal is looked up in this
+database. If this too fails to provide the terminal size, a
+default size of 80 columns by 24 lines is used. If this
+default isn't appropriate for your system,
+\f3gl_terminal_size()\f1 can be used to supply a different
+fallback.
+.sp
+The \f3gl_terminal_size()\f1 function allows you to query
+the current size of the terminal, and install an alternate
+fallback size for cases where the size isn't available.
+Beware that the terminal size won't be available if reading
+from a pipe or a file, so the default values can be
+important even on systems that do support ways of finding
+out the terminal size.
+.sp
+.nf
+  typedef struct {
+    int nline;        /* The terminal has nline lines */
+    int ncolumn;      /* The terminal has ncolumn columns */
+  } GlTerminalSize;
+
+  GlTerminalSize gl_terminal_size(GetLine *gl,
+                                  int def_ncolumn,
+                                  int def_nline);
+.fi
+.sp
+This function first updates \f3gl_get_line()\f1's idea of
+the terminal size, then records its findings in the return
+value.
+.sp
+The \f3def_ncolumn\f1 and \f3def_nline\f1 specify the
+default number of terminal columns and lines to use if the
+terminal size can't be determined.
+
+.SH HIDING WHAT YOU TYPE
+
+When entering sensitive information, such as passwords, it is best not
+to have the text that you are entering echoed on the terminal.
+Furthermore, such text should not be recorded in the history list,
+since somebody finding your terminal unattended could then recall it,
+or somebody snooping through your directories could see it in your
+history file. With this in mind, the \f3gl_echo_mode()\f1
+function allows you to toggle on and off the display and archival of
+any text that is subsequently entered in calls to \f3gl_get_line()\f1.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+  int gl_echo_mode(GetLine *gl, int enable);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+The \f3enable\f1 argument specifies whether entered text
+should be visible or not. If it is \f30\f1, then
+subsequently entered lines will not be visible on the
+terminal, and will not be recorded in the history list. If
+it is \f31\f1, then subsequent input lines will be displayed
+as they are entered, and provided that history hasn't been
+turned off via a call to \f3gl_toggle_history()\f1, then
+they will also be archived in the history list. Finally, if
+the \f3enable\f1 argument is \f3-1\f1, then the echoing mode
+is left unchanged, which allows you to non-destructively
+query the current setting via the return value. In all
+cases, the return value of the function is \f30\f1 if
+echoing was disabled before the function was called, and
+\f31\f1 if it was enabled.
+.sp
+When echoing is turned off, note that although tab
+completion will invisibly complete your prefix as far as
+possible, ambiguous completions will not be displayed.
+
+.SH CALLBACK FUNCTION FACILITIES
+
+Unless otherwise stated, callback functions, such as tab
+completion callbacks and event callbacks should not call any
+functions in this module. The following functions, however,
+are designed specifically to be used by callback functions.
+.sp
+Calling the \f3gl_replace_prompt()\f1 function from a
+callback tells \f3gl_get_line() to display a different
+prompt when the callback returns. It has no effect if called
+when \f3gl_get_line()\f1 is not being called.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void gl_replace_prompt(GetLine *gl, const char *prompt);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+.SH INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SETS
+
+Since libtecla version 1.4.0, \f3gl_get_line()\f1 has been 8-bit
+clean. This means that all 8-bit characters that are printable in the
+user's current locale are now displayed verbatim and included in the
+returned input line.  Assuming that the calling program correctly
+contains a call like the following,
+.sp
+.nf
+  setlocale(LC_CTYPE, "");
+.fi
+.sp
+then the current locale is determined by the first of the environment
+variables \f3LC_CTYPE\f1, \f3LC_ALL\f1, and \f3LANG\f1, that is found
+to contain a valid locale name. If none of these variables are
+defined, or the program neglects to call setlocale, then the default
+\f3C\f1 locale is used, which is US 7-bit ASCII. On most unix-like
+platforms, you can get a list of valid locales by typing the command:
+.sp
+.nf
+  locale -a
+.fi
+.sp
+at the shell prompt.
+.sp
+.SS "Meta keys and locales"
+
+Beware that in most locales other than the default C locale, meta
+characters become printable, and they are then no longer considered to
+match \f3M-c\f1 style key bindings. This allows international
+characters to be entered with the compose key without unexpectedly
+triggering meta key bindings. You can still invoke meta bindings,
+since there are actually two ways to do this. For example the binding
+\f3M-c\f1 can also be invoked by pressing the escape key momentarily,
+then pressing the \f3c\f1 key, and this will work regardless of
+locale. Moreover, many modern terminal emulators, such as gnome's
+gnome-terminal's and KDE's konsole terminals, already generate escape
+pairs like this when you use the meta key, rather than a real meta
+character, and other emulators usually have a way to request this
+behavior, so you can continue to use the meta key on most systems.
+.sp
+For example, although xterm terminal emulators generate real 8-bit
+meta characters by default when you use the meta key, they can be
+configured to output the equivalent escape pair by setting their
+\f3EightBitInput\f1 X resource to \f3False\f1. You can either do this
+by placing a line like the following in your \f3~/.Xdefaults\f1 file,
+.sp
+.nf
+  XTerm*EightBitInput: False
+.sp
+.fi
+or by starting an xterm with an \f3-xrm '*EightBitInput: False'\f1
+command-line argument. In recent versions of xterm you can toggle this
+feature on and off with the \f3"Meta Sends Escape"\f1 option in the
+menu that is displayed when you press the left mouse button and the
+control key within an xterm window. In CDE, dtterms can be similarly
+coerced to generate escape pairs in place of meta characters, by
+setting the \f3Dtterm*KshMode\f1 resource to \f3True\f1.
+.sp
+.SS "Entering international characters"
+
+If you don't have a keyboard that generates all of the international
+characters that you need, there is usually a compose key that will
+allow you to enter special characters, or a way to create one. For
+example, under X windows on unix-like systems, if your keyboard
+doesn't have a compose key, you can designate a redundant key to serve
+this purpose with the xmodmap command. For example, on many PC
+keyboards there is a microsoft-windows key, which is otherwise useless
+under Linux. On my PC the \f3xev\f1 program reports that pressing this
+key generates keycode 115, so to turn this key into a compose key, I
+do the following:
+.sp
+.nf
+  xmodmap -e 'keycode 115 = Multi_key'
+.fi
+.sp
+I can then enter an i with a umlaut over it by typing this key,
+followed by \f3"\f1, followed by i.
+
+.SH THREAD SAFETY
+
+In a multi-threaded program, you should use the libtecla_r.a version
+of the library. This uses reentrant versions of system functions,
+where available. Unfortunately neither terminfo nor termcap were
+designed to be reentrant, so you can't safely use the functions of the
+getline module in multiple threads (you can use the separate
+file-expansion and word-completion modules in multiple threads, see
+the corresponding man pages for details). However due to the use of
+POSIX reentrant functions for looking up home directories etc, it is
+safe to use this module from a single thread of a multi-threaded
+program, provided that your other threads don't use any termcap or
+terminfo functions.
+
+.SH FILES
+.nf
+libtecla.a      -    The tecla library
+libtecla.h      -    The tecla header file.
+~/.teclarc      -    The personal tecla customization file.
+.fi
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+libtecla(3), ef_expand_file(3), cpl_complete_word(3), pca_lookup_file(3)
+  
+.SH AUTHOR
+Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_group_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_group_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_group_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_ignore_signal.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_ignore_signal.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_ignore_signal.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_last_signal.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_last_signal.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_last_signal.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_limit_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_limit_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_limit_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_load_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_load_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_load_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_lookup_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_lookup_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_lookup_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_prompt_style.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_prompt_style.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_prompt_style.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_range_of_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_range_of_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_range_of_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_resize_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_resize_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_resize_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_save_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_save_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_save_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_show_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_show_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_show_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_size_of_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_size_of_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_size_of_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_state_of_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_state_of_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_state_of_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_terminal_size.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_terminal_size.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_terminal_size.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_toggle_history.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_toggle_history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_toggle_history.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_trap_signal.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_trap_signal.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_trap_signal.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_watch_fd.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_watch_fd.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/gl_watch_fd.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..611eb57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla.3
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd
+.\" 
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+.\" distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+.\" to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+.\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+.\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+.\" 
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+.\" OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+.\" HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+.\" INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\" 
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+.\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+.\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+.\" of the copyright holder.
+.TH libtecla 3
+.SH NAME
+libtecla - An interactive command-line input library.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+gcc ... -ltecla -lcurses
+.fi
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+
+The \f3tecla\f1 library provides programs with interactive command
+line editing facilities, similar to those of the unix \f3tcsh\f1
+shell. In addition to simple command-line editing, it supports recall
+of previously entered command lines, TAB completion of file names or
+other tokens, and in-line wild-card expansion of filenames. The
+internal functions which perform file-name completion and wild-card
+expansion are also available externally for optional use by the
+calling program.
+.sp
+The various parts of the library are documented in the following man
+pages:
+
+.nf
+  gl_get_line(3)        -  The interactive line-input module.
+  cpl_complete_word(3)  -  The word completion module.
+  ef_expand_file(3)     -  The filename expansion module.
+  pca_lookup_file(3)    -  A directory-list based filename
+                           lookup and completion module.
+.fi
+
+In addition there is one optional application distributed
+with the library:
+
+.nf
+  enhance(3)            -  Add command-line editing to third
+                           party applications.
+.fi
+
+.SH THREAD SAFETY
+
+If the library is compiled with -D_POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L, reentrant
+versions of as many functions as possible are used. This includes
+using getpwuid_r() and getpwnam_r() instead of getpwuid() and
+getpwnam() when looking up the home directories of specific users in
+the password file (for ~user/ expansion), and readdir_r() instead of
+readdir() for reading directory entries when doing filename
+completion. The reentrant version of the library is usually called
+libtecla_r.a instead of libtecla.a, so if only the latter is
+available, it probably isn't the correct version to link with
+threaded programs.
+
+Reentrant functions for iterating through the password file aren't
+available, so when the library is compiled to be reentrant, TAB
+completion of incomplete usernames in \f3~username/\f1 expressions is
+disabled. This doesn't disable expansion of complete \f3~username\f1
+expressions, which can be done reentrantly, or expansion of the parts
+of filenames that follow them, so this doesn't remove much
+functionality.
+
+The terminfo functions setupterm(), tigetstr(), tigetnum() and tputs()
+also aren't reentrant, but very few programs will want to interact
+with multiple terminals, so this shouldn't prevent this library from
+being used in threaded programs.
+
+.SH LIBRARY VERSION NUMBER
+
+The version number of the library can be queried using the following
+function.
+.sp
+.nf
+ void libtecla_version(int *major, int *minor, int *micro);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+On return, this function records the three components of the libtecla
+version number in \f3*major\f1, \f3*minor\f1, \f3*micro\f1. The formal
+meaning of the three components is as follows.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+ major - Incrementing this number implies that a change has
+         been made to the library's public interface, which
+         makes it binary incompatible  with programs that
+         were linked with previous shared versions of the
+         tecla library.
+
+ minor - This number is incremented by one whenever
+         additional functionality, such as new functions or
+         modules, are added to the library.
+
+ micro - This is incremented whenever modifications to the
+         library are made which make no changes to the
+         public interface, but which fix bugs and/or improve
+         the behind-the-scenes implementation.
+.fi
+.sp
+
+.SH TRIVIA
+
+In Spanish, a "tecla" is the key of a keyboard. Since this library
+centers on keyboard input, and given that I wrote much of the library
+while working in Chile, this seemed like a suitable name.
+
+.SH FILES
+.nf
+libtecla.a    -   The tecla library.
+libtecla.h    -   The tecla header file.
+~/.teclarc    -   The tecla personal customization file.
+.fi
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+gl_get_line(3), ef_expand_file(3), cpl_complete_word(3),
+pca_lookup_file(3), enhance(3)
+  
+.SH AUTHOR
+Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
+
+.SH ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
+
+.nf
+Markus Gyger  - Lots of assistance, including help with
+                shared libraries, configuration information,
+                particularly for Solaris; modifications to
+                support C++ compilers, improvements for ksh
+                users, faster cursor motion, output
+                buffering, and changes to make gl_get_line()
+                8-bit clean. 
+Mike MacFaden - Suggestions, feedback and testing that led
+                to many of the major new functions that were
+                added in version 1.4.0.
+Tim Eliseo    - Many vi-mode bindings and fixes.
+.fi
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla_version.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla_version.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c9c2c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/libtecla_version.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/libtecla.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_CplFileConf.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_CplFileConf.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_CplFileConf.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_ExpandFile.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_ExpandFile.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4299df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_ExpandFile.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/ef_expand_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_GetLine.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_GetLine.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd3d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_GetLine.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/gl_get_line.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PathCache.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PathCache.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PathCache.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PcaPathConf.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PcaPathConf.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_PcaPathConf.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_WordCompletion.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_WordCompletion.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36c83a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/new_WordCompletion.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/cpl_complete_word.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_last_error.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_last_error.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_last_error.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_lookup_file.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_lookup_file.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..131394a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_lookup_file.3
@@ -0,0 +1,361 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd
+.\" 
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+.\" distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+.\" to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+.\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+.\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+.\" 
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+.\" OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+.\" HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+.\" INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\" 
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+.\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+.\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+.\" of the copyright holder.
+.TH pca_lookup_file 3
+.SH NAME
+pca_lookup_file, del_PathCache, del_PcaPathConf, new_PathCache, new_PcaPathConf, pca_last_error, pca_path_completions, pca_scan_path, pca_set_check_fn, ppc_file_start, ppc_literal_escapes \- lookup a file in a list of directories
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+#include <libtecla.h>
+
+PathCache *new_PathCache(void);
+
+PathCache *del_PathCache(PathCache *pc);
+
+int pca_scan_path(PathCache *pc, const char *path);
+
+void pca_set_check_fn(PathCache *pc, CplCheckFn *check_fn,
+                      void *data);
+
+char *pca_lookup_file(PathCache *pc, const char *name,
+                      int name_len, int literal);
+
+const char *pca_last_error(PathCache *pc);
+
+CPL_MATCH_FN(pca_path_completions);
+
+.fi
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+
+The \f3PathCache\f1 object is part of the tecla library (see the
+libtecla(3) man page).
+.sp
+\f3PathCache\f1 objects allow an application to search for files in
+any colon separated list of directories, such as the unix execution
+PATH environment variable. Files in absolute directories are cached in
+a \f3PathCache\f1 object, whereas relative directories are scanned as
+needed. Using a \f3PathCache\f1 object, you can look up the full
+pathname of a simple filename, or you can obtain a list of the
+possible completions of a given filename prefix. By default all files
+in the list of directories are targets for lookup and completion, but
+a versatile mechanism is provided for only selecting specific types of
+files. The obvious application of this facility is to provide
+Tab-completion and lookup of executable commands in the unix PATH, so
+an optional callback which rejects all but executable files, is
+provided.
+.sp
+.SH AN EXAMPLE
+
+Under UNIX, the following example program looks up and displays the
+full pathnames of each of the command names on the command line.
+.sp
+.nf
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <stdlib.h>
+  #include <libtecla.h>
+
+  int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+  {
+    int i;
+  /*
+   * Create a cache for executable files.
+   */
+    PathCache *pc = new_PathCache();
+    if(!pc)
+      exit(1);
+  /*
+   * Scan the user's PATH for executables.
+   */
+    if(pca_scan_path(pc, getenv("PATH"))) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s\\n", pca_last_error(pc));
+      exit(1);
+    }
+  /*
+   * Arrange to only report executable files.
+   */
+   pca_set_check_fn(pc, cpl_check_exe, NULL);
+  /*
+   * Lookup and display the full pathname of each of the
+   * commands listed on the command line.
+   */
+    for(i=1; i<argc; i++) {
+      char *cmd = pca_lookup_file(pc, argv[i], -1, 0);
+      printf("The full pathname of '%s' is %s\\n", argv[i],
+             cmd ? cmd : "unknown");
+    }
+    pc = del_PathCache(pc);  /* Clean up */
+    return 0;
+  }
+.fi
+.sp
+The following is an example of what this does on my laptop under
+linux:
+.sp
+.nf
+  $ ./example less more blob
+  The full pathname of 'less' is /usr/bin/less
+  The full pathname of 'more' is /bin/more
+  The full pathname of 'blob' is unknown
+  $ 
+.fi
+.sp
+.SH FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
+
+In order to use the facilities of this module, you must first allocate
+a \f3PathCache\f1 object by calling the \f3new_PathCache()\f1
+constructor function.
+.sp
+.nf
+  PathCache *new_PathCache(void)
+.fi
+.sp
+This function creates the resources needed to cache and lookup files
+in a list of directories. It returns \f3NULL\f1 on error.
+.sp
+.SH POPULATING THE CACHE
+Once you have created a cache, it needs to be populated with files.
+To do this, call the \f3pca_scan_path()\f1 function.
+.sp
+.nf
+  int pca_scan_path(PathCache *pc, const char *path);
+.fi
+.sp
+Whenever this function is called, it discards the current contents of
+the cache, then scans the list of directories specified in its
+\f3path\f1 argument for files. The \f3path\f1 argument must be a
+string containing a colon-separated list of directories, such as
+\f3"/usr/bin:/home/mcs/bin:."\f1. This can include directories
+specified by absolute pathnames such as \f3"/usr/bin"\f1, as well as
+sub-directories specified by relative pathnames such as \f3"."\f1 or
+\f3"bin"\f1. Files in the absolute directories are immediately cached
+in the specified \f3PathCache\f1 object, whereas sub-directories,
+whose identities obviously change whenever the current working
+directory is changed, are marked to be scanned on the fly whenever a
+file is looked up.
+.sp
+On success this function return \f30\f1. On error it returns \f31\f1,
+and a description of the error can be obtained by calling
+\f3pca_last_error(pc)\f1.
+.sp
+.SH LOOKING UP FILES
+
+Once the cache has been populated with files, you can look up the full
+pathname of a file, simply by specifying its filename to
+\f3pca_lookup_file()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  char *pca_lookup_file(PathCache *pc, const char *name,
+                        int name_len, int literal);
+.fi
+.sp
+To make it possible to pass this function a filename which is actually
+part of a longer string, the \f3name_len\f1 argument can be used to
+specify the length of the filename at the start of the \f3name[]\f1
+argument. If you pass \f3-1\f1 for this length, the length of the
+string will be determined with \f3strlen()\f1. If the \f3name[]\f1
+string might contain backslashes that escape the special meanings of
+spaces and tabs within the filename, give the \f3literal\f1 argument,
+the value \f30\f1. Otherwise, if backslashes should be treated as
+normal characters, pass \f31\f1 for the value of the \f3literal\f1
+argument.
+
+.SH FILENAME COMPLETION
+
+Looking up the potential completions of a filename-prefix in the
+filename cache, is achieved by passing the provided
+\f3pca_path_completions()\f1 callback function to the
+\f3cpl_complete_word()\f1 function (see the \f3cpl_complete_word(3)\f1
+man page).
+.sp
+.nf
+  CPL_MATCH_FN(pca_path_completions);
+.fi
+.sp
+This callback requires that its \f3data\f1 argument be a pointer to a
+\f3PcaPathConf\f1 object. Configuration objects of this type are
+allocated by calling \f3new_PcaPathConf()\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  PcaPathConf *new_PcaPathConf(PathCache *pc);
+.fi
+.sp
+This function returns an object initialized with default configuration
+parameters, which determine how the \f3cpl_path_completions()\f1
+callback function behaves. The functions which allow you to
+individually change these parameters are discussed below.
+.sp
+By default, the \f3pca_path_completions()\f1 callback function
+searches backwards for the start of the filename being completed,
+looking for the first un-escaped space or the start of the input
+line. If you wish to specify a different location, call
+\f3ppc_file_start()\f1 with the index at which the filename starts in
+the input line. Passing \f3start_index=-1\f1 re-enables the default
+behavior.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void ppc_file_start(PcaPathConf *ppc, int start_index);
+.fi
+.sp
+By default, when \f3pca_path_completions()\f1 looks at a filename in
+the input line, each lone backslash in the input line is interpreted
+as being a special character which removes any special significance of
+the character which follows it, such as a space which should be taken
+as part of the filename rather than delimiting the start of the
+filename. These backslashes are thus ignored while looking for
+completions, and subsequently added before spaces, tabs and literal
+backslashes in the list of completions. To have unescaped backslashes
+treated as normal characters, call \f3ppc_literal_escapes()\f1 with a
+non-zero value in its \f3literal\f1 argument.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void ppc_literal_escapes(PcaPathConf *ppc, int literal);
+.fi
+.sp
+When you have finished with a \f3PcaPathConf\f1 variable, you can pass
+it to the \f3del_PcaPathConf()\f1 destructor function to reclaim its
+memory.
+.sp
+.nf
+  PcaPathConf *del_PcaPathConf(PcaPathConf *ppc);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+.SH BEING SELECTIVE
+If you are only interested in certain types or files, such as, for
+example, executable files, or files whose names end in a particular
+suffix, you can arrange for the file completion and lookup functions
+to be selective in the filenames that they return.  This is done by
+registering a callback function with your \f3PathCache\f1
+object. Thereafter, whenever a filename is found which either matches
+a filename being looked up, or matches a prefix which is being
+completed, your callback function will be called with the full
+pathname of the file, plus any application-specific data that you
+provide, and if the callback returns \f31\f1 the filename will be
+reported as a match, and if it returns \f30\f1, it will be ignored.
+Suitable callback functions and their prototypes should be declared
+with the following macro. The \f3CplCheckFn\f1 \f3typedef\f1 is also
+provided in case you wish to declare pointers to such functions.
+.sp
+.nf
+  #define CPL_CHECK_FN(fn) int (fn)(void *data, \\
+                                    const char *pathname)
+  typedef CPL_CHECK_FN(CplCheckFn);
+.fi
+.sp
+Registering one of these functions involves calling the
+\f3pca_set_check_fn()\f1 function. In addition to the callback
+function, passed via the \f3check_fn\f1 argument, you can pass a
+pointer to anything via the \f3data\f1 argument. This pointer will be
+passed on to your callback function, via its own \f3data\f1 argument,
+whenever it is called, so this provides a way to pass appplication
+specific data to your callback.
+.sp
+.nf
+  void pca_set_check_fn(PathCache *pc, CplCheckFn *check_fn,
+                        void *data);
+.fi
+.sp
+Note that these callbacks are passed the full pathname of each
+matching file, so the decision about whether a file is of interest can
+be based on any property of the file, not just its filename. As an
+example, the provided \f3cpl_check_exe()\f1 callback function looks at
+the executable permissions of the file and the permissions of its
+parent directories, and only returns \f31\f1 if the user has execute
+permission to the file. This callback function can thus be used to
+lookup or complete command names found in the directories listed in
+the user's \f3PATH\f1 environment variable. The example program given
+earlier in this man page provides a demonstration of this.
+.sp
+Beware that if somebody tries to complete an empty string, your
+callback will get called once for every file in the cache, which could
+number in the thousands. If your callback does anything time
+consuming, this could result in an unacceptable delay for the user, so
+callbacks should be kept short.
+.sp
+To improve performance, whenever one of these callbacks is called, the
+choice that it makes is cached, and the next time the corresponding
+file is looked up, instead of calling the callback again, the cached
+record of whether it was accepted or rejected is used. Thus if
+somebody tries to complete an empty string, and hits tab a second time
+when nothing appears to happen, there will only be one long delay,
+since the second pass will operate entirely from the cached
+dispositions of the files. These cached dipositions are discarded
+whenever \f3pca_scan_path()\f1 is called, and whenever
+\f3pca_set_check_fn()\f1 is called with changed callback function or
+data arguments.
+
+.SH ERROR HANDLING
+
+If \f3pca_scan_path()\f1 reports that an error occurred by returning
+\f31\f1, you can obtain a terse description of the error by calling
+\f3pca_last_error(pc)\f1. This returns an internal string containing
+an error message.
+.sp
+.nf
+  const char *pca_last_error(PathCache *pc);
+.fi
+.sp
+
+.SH CLEANING UP
+
+Once you have finished using a \f3PathCache\f1 object, you can reclaim
+its resources by passing it to the \f3del_PathCache()\f1 destructor
+function. This takes a pointer to one of these objects, and always
+returns \f3NULL\f1.
+.sp
+.nf
+  PathCache *del_PathCache(PathCache *pc);
+.fi
+.sp
+.SH THREAD SAFETY
+
+In multi-threaded programs, you should use the \f3libtecla_r.a\f1
+version of the library. This uses POSIX reentrant functions where
+available (hence the \f3_r\f1 suffix), and disables features that rely
+on non-reentrant system functions. In the case of this module, the
+only disabled feature is username completion in \f3~username/\f1
+expressions, in \f3cpl_path_completions()\f1.
+
+Using the \f3libtecla_r.a\f1 version of the library, it is safe to use
+the facilities of this module in multiple threads, provided that each
+thread uses a separately allocated \f3PathCache\f1 object. In other
+words, if two threads want to do path searching, they should each call
+\f3new_PathCache()\f1 to allocate their own caches.
+
+.SH FILES
+.nf
+libtecla.a    -    The tecla library
+libtecla.h    -    The tecla header file.
+.fi
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+libtecla(3), gl_get_line(3), ef_expand_file(3), cpl_complete_word(3)
+  
+.SH AUTHOR
+Martin Shepherd  (mcs@astro.caltech.edu)
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_path_completions.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_path_completions.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_path_completions.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_scan_path.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_scan_path.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_scan_path.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_set_check_fn.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_set_check_fn.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/pca_set_check_fn.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_file_start.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_file_start.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_file_start.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_literal_escapes.3 b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_literal_escapes.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a136e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/man3/ppc_literal_escapes.3
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man3/pca_lookup_file.3
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..015504b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.c
@@ -0,0 +1,532 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+#include "pathutil.h"
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new PathName object.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  PathName *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+PathName *_new_PathName(void)
+{
+  PathName *path;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  path = (PathName *)malloc(sizeof(PathName));
+  if(!path) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_PathName: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_PathName().
+ */
+  path->name = NULL;
+  path->dim = 0;
+/*
+ * Figure out the maximum length of an expanded pathname.
+ */
+  path->dim = _pu_pathname_dim();
+  if(path->dim == 0)
+    return _del_PathName(path);
+/*
+ * Allocate the pathname buffer.
+ */
+  path->name = (char *)malloc(path->dim * sizeof(char));
+  if(!path->name) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+	  "_new_PathName: Insufficient memory to allocate pathname buffer.\n");
+    return _del_PathName(path);
+  };
+  return path;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a PathName object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  path   PathName *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return PathName *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+PathName *_del_PathName(PathName *path)
+{
+  if(path) {
+    if(path->name)
+      free(path->name);
+    free(path);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the pathname to a zero-length string.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  path     PathName *  The pathname container.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       char *  The cleared pathname buffer, or NULL on error.
+ */
+char *_pn_clear_path(PathName *path)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!path) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_pn_clear_path: NULL argument.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+  path->name[0] = '\0';
+  return path->name;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Append a string to a pathname, increasing the size of the pathname
+ * buffer if needed.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  path        PathName *  The pathname container.
+ *  string    const char *  The string to be appended to the pathname.
+ *                          Note that regardless of the slen argument,
+ *                          this should be a '\0' terminated string.
+ *  slen             int    The maximum number of characters to append
+ *                          from string[], or -1 to append the whole
+ *                          string.
+ *  remove_escapes   int    If true, remove the backslashes that escape
+ *                          spaces, tabs, backslashes etc..
+ * Output:
+ *  return          char *  The pathname string path->name[], which may
+ *                          have been reallocated, or NULL if there was
+ *                          insufficient memory to extend the pathname.
+ */
+char *_pn_append_to_path(PathName *path, const char *string, int slen,
+			int remove_escapes)
+{
+  int pathlen;     /* The length of the pathname */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!path || !string) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_pn_append_to_path: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the current length of the pathname.
+ */
+  pathlen = strlen(path->name);
+/*
+ * How many characters should be appended?
+ */
+  if(slen < 0 || slen > strlen(string))
+    slen = strlen(string);
+/*
+ * Resize the pathname if needed.
+ */
+  if(!_pn_resize_path(path, pathlen + slen))
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Append the string to the output pathname, removing any escape
+ * characters found therein.
+ */
+  if(remove_escapes) {
+    int is_escape = 0;
+    for(i=0; i<slen; i++) {
+      is_escape = !is_escape && string[i] == '\\';
+      if(!is_escape)
+	path->name[pathlen++] = string[i];
+    };
+/*
+ * Terminate the string.
+ */
+    path->name[pathlen] = '\0';
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Append the string directly to the pathname.
+ */
+    memcpy(path->name + pathlen, string, slen);
+    path->name[pathlen + slen] = '\0';
+  };
+  return path->name;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Prepend a string to a pathname, increasing the size of the pathname
+ * buffer if needed.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  path        PathName *  The pathname container.
+ *  string    const char *  The string to be prepended to the pathname.
+ *                          Note that regardless of the slen argument,
+ *                          this should be a '\0' terminated string.
+ *  slen             int    The maximum number of characters to prepend
+ *                          from string[], or -1 to append the whole
+ *                          string.
+ *  remove_escapes   int    If true, remove the backslashes that escape
+ *                          spaces, tabs, backslashes etc..
+ * Output:
+ *  return          char *  The pathname string path->name[], which may
+ *                          have been reallocated, or NULL if there was
+ *                          insufficient memory to extend the pathname.
+ */
+char *_pn_prepend_to_path(PathName *path, const char *string, int slen,
+			  int remove_escapes)
+{
+  int pathlen;     /* The length of the pathname */
+  int shift;       /* The number of characters to shift the suffix by */
+  int i,j;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!path || !string) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_pn_prepend_to_path: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the current length of the pathname.
+ */
+  pathlen = strlen(path->name);
+/*
+ * How many characters should be appended?
+ */
+  if(slen < 0 || slen > strlen(string))
+    slen = strlen(string);
+/*
+ * Work out how far we need to shift the original path string to make
+ * way for the new prefix. When removing escape characters, we need
+ * final length of the new prefix, after unescaped backslashes have
+ * been removed.
+ */
+  if(remove_escapes) {
+    int is_escape = 0;
+    for(shift=0,i=0; i<slen; i++) {
+      is_escape = !is_escape && string[i] == '\\';
+      if(!is_escape)
+	shift++;
+    };
+  } else {
+    shift = slen;
+  };
+/*
+ * Resize the pathname if needed.
+ */
+  if(!_pn_resize_path(path, pathlen + shift))
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Make room for the prefix at the beginning of the string.
+ */
+  memmove(path->name + shift, path->name, pathlen+1);
+/*
+ * Copy the new prefix into the vacated space at the beginning of the
+ * output pathname, removing any escape characters if needed.
+ */
+  if(remove_escapes) {
+    int is_escape = 0;
+    for(i=j=0; i<slen; i++) {
+      is_escape = !is_escape && string[i] == '\\';
+      if(!is_escape)
+	path->name[j++] = string[i];
+    };
+  } else {
+    memcpy(path->name, string, slen);
+  };
+  return path->name;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If needed reallocate a given pathname buffer to allow a string of
+ * a given length to be stored in it.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  path     PathName *  The pathname container object.
+ *  length     size_t    The required length of the pathname buffer,
+ *                       not including the terminating '\0'.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       char *  The pathname buffer, or NULL if there was
+ *                       insufficient memory (this isn't reported
+ *                       to stderr).
+ */
+char *_pn_resize_path(PathName *path, size_t length)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!path) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_pn_resize_path: NULL argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the pathname buffer isn't large enough to accomodate a string
+ * of the specified length, attempt to reallocate it with the new
+ * size, plus space for a terminating '\0'. Also add a bit of
+ * head room to prevent too many reallocations if the initial length
+ * turned out to be very optimistic.
+ */
+  if(length + 1 > path->dim) {
+    size_t dim =  length + 1 + PN_PATHNAME_INC;
+    char *name = (char *) realloc(path->name, dim);
+    if(!name)
+      return NULL;
+    path->name = name;
+    path->dim = dim;
+  };
+  return path->name;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Estimate the largest amount of space needed to store a pathname.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return size_t   The number of bytes needed, including space for the
+ *                  terminating '\0'.
+ */
+size_t _pu_pathname_dim(void)
+{
+  int maxlen;   /* The return value excluding space for the '\0' */
+/*
+ * If the POSIX PATH_MAX macro is defined in limits.h, use it.
+ */
+#ifdef PATH_MAX
+  maxlen = PATH_MAX;
+/*
+ * If we have pathconf, use it.
+ */
+#elif defined(_PC_PATH_MAX)
+  errno = 0;
+  maxlen = pathconf(FS_ROOT_DIR, _PC_PATH_MAX);
+  if(maxlen <= 0 || errno)
+    maxlen = MAX_PATHLEN_FALLBACK;
+/*
+ * None of the above approaches worked, so substitute our fallback
+ * guess.
+ */
+#else
+    maxlen = MAX_PATHLEN_FALLBACK;
+#endif
+/*
+ * Return the amount of space needed to accomodate a pathname plus
+ * a terminating '\0'.
+ */
+  return maxlen + 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the specified path name refers to a directory.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pathname  const char *  The path to test.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - Not a directory.
+ *                          1 - pathname[] refers to a directory.
+ */
+int _pu_path_is_dir(const char *pathname)
+{
+  struct stat statbuf;    /* The file-statistics return buffer */
+/*
+ * Look up the file attributes.
+ */
+  if(stat(pathname, &statbuf) < 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Is the file a directory?
+ */
+  return S_ISDIR(statbuf.st_mode) != 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the specified path name refers to a regular file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pathname  const char *  The path to test.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - Not a regular file.
+ *                          1 - pathname[] refers to a regular file.
+ */
+int _pu_path_is_file(const char *pathname)
+{
+  struct stat statbuf;    /* The file-statistics return buffer */
+/*
+ * Look up the file attributes.
+ */
+  if(stat(pathname, &statbuf) < 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Is the file a regular file?
+ */
+  return S_ISREG(statbuf.st_mode) != 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the specified path name refers to an executable.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pathname  const char *  The path to test.
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - Not an executable file.
+ *                          1 - pathname[] refers to an executable file.
+ */
+int _pu_path_is_exe(const char *pathname)
+{
+  struct stat statbuf;    /* The file-statistics return buffer */
+/*
+ * Look up the file attributes.
+ */
+  if(stat(pathname, &statbuf) < 0)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Is the file a regular file which is executable by the current user.
+ */
+  return S_ISREG(statbuf.st_mode) != 0 &&
+    (statbuf.st_mode & (S_IXOTH | S_IXGRP | S_IXUSR)) &&
+    access(pathname, X_OK) == 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Search backwards for the potential start of a filename. This
+ * looks backwards from the specified index in a given string,
+ * stopping at the first unescaped space or the start of the line.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string  const char *  The string to search backwards in.
+ *  back_from      int    The index of the first character in string[]
+ *                        that follows the pathname.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        char *  The pointer to the first character of
+ *                        the potential pathname, or NULL on error.
+ */
+char *_pu_start_of_path(const char *string, int back_from)
+{
+  int i, j;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!string || back_from < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_pu_start_path: Invalid argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Search backwards from the specified index.
+ */
+  for(i=back_from-1; i>=0; i--) {
+    int c = string[i];
+/*
+ * Stop on unescaped spaces.
+ */
+    if(isspace((int)(unsigned char)c)) {
+/*
+ * The space can't be escaped if we are at the start of the line.
+ */
+      if(i==0)
+        break;
+/*
+ * Find the extent of the escape characters which precedes the space.
+ */
+      for(j=i-1; j>=0 && string[j]=='\\'; j--)
+	;
+/*
+ * If there isn't an odd number of escape characters before the space,
+ * then the space isn't escaped.
+ */
+      if((i - 1 - j) % 2 == 0)
+	break;
+    };
+  };
+  return (char *)string + i + 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Find the length of a potential filename starting from a given
+ * point. This looks forwards from the specified index in a given string,
+ * stopping at the first unescaped space or the end of the line.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  string   const char *  The string to search backwards in.
+ *  start_from      int    The index of the first character of the pathname
+ *                         in string[].
+ * Output:
+ *  return         char *  The pointer to the character that follows
+ *                         the potential pathname, or NULL on error.
+ */
+char *_pu_end_of_path(const char *string, int start_from)
+{
+  int c;             /* The character being examined */
+  int escaped = 0;   /* True when the next character is escaped */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!string || start_from < 0) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_pu_end_path: Invalid argument(s).\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Search forwards from the specified index.
+ */
+  for(i=start_from; (c=string[i]) != '\0'; i++) {
+    if(escaped) {
+      escaped = 0;
+    } else if(isspace(c)) {
+      break;
+    } else if(c == '\\') {
+      escaped = 1;
+    };
+  };
+  return (char *)string + i;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the specified path name refers to an existing file.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pathname   const char *  The path to test.
+ * Output:
+ *  return            int    0 - The file doesn't exist.
+ *                           1 - The file does exist.
+ */
+int _pu_file_exists(const char *pathname)
+{
+  struct stat statbuf;
+  return stat(pathname, &statbuf) == 0;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f4ece5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/pathutil.h
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+#ifndef pathutil_h
+#define pathutil_h
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * The following object encapsulates a buffer designed to be used to
+ * store pathnames. The pathname member of the object is initially
+ * allocated with the size that _pu_pathname_dim() returns, and then
+ * if this turns out to be pessimistic, the pathname can be reallocated
+ * via calls to pb_append_to_path() and/or pb_resize_path().
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  char *name;         /* The path buffer */
+  size_t dim;         /* The current allocated size of buffer[] */
+} PathName;
+
+PathName *_new_PathName(void);
+PathName *_del_PathName(PathName *path);
+
+char *_pn_clear_path(PathName *path);
+char *_pn_append_to_path(PathName *path, const char *string, int slen,
+			int remove_escapes);
+char *_pn_prepend_to_path(PathName *path, const char *string, int slen,
+			  int remove_escapes);
+char *_pn_resize_path(PathName *path, size_t length);
+
+/*
+ * Search backwards for the potential start of a filename. This
+ * looks backwards from the specified index in a given string,
+ * stopping at the first unescaped space or the start of the line.
+ */
+char *_pu_start_of_path(const char *string, int back_from);
+
+/*
+ * Find the end of a potential filename, starting from a given index
+ * in the string. This looks forwards from the specified index in a
+ * given string, stopping at the first unescaped space or the end
+ * of the line.
+ */
+char *_pu_end_of_path(const char *string, int start_from);
+
+
+/*
+ * Return an estimate of the the length of the longest pathname
+ * on the local system.
+ */
+size_t _pu_pathname_dim(void);
+
+/*
+ * Return non-zero if the specified path name refers to a directory.
+ */
+int _pu_path_is_dir(const char *pathname);
+
+/*
+ * Return non-zero if the specified path name refers to a regular file.
+ */
+int _pu_path_is_file(const char *pathname);
+
+/*
+ * Return non-zero if the specified path name refers to an executable.
+ */
+int _pu_path_is_exe(const char *pathname);
+
+/*
+ * Return non-zero if a file exists with the specified pathname.
+ */
+int _pu_file_exists(const char *pathname);
+
+/*
+ * If neither the POSIX PATH_MAX macro nor the pathconf() function
+ * can be used to find out the maximum pathlength on the target
+ * system, the following fallback maximum length is used.
+ */
+#define MAX_PATHLEN_FALLBACK 1024
+
+/*
+ * If the pathname buffer turns out to be too small, it will be extended
+ * in chunks of the following amount (plus whatever is needed at the time).
+ */
+#define PN_PATHNAME_INC 100
+
+/*
+ * Define the special character-sequences of the filesystem.
+ */
+#define FS_ROOT_DIR "/"     /* The root directory */
+#define FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN (sizeof(FS_ROOT_DIR) - 1)
+#define FS_PWD "."          /* The current working directory */
+#define FS_PWD_LEN (sizeof(FS_PWD_LEN) - 1)
+#define FS_DIR_SEP "/"      /* The directory separator string */
+#define FS_DIR_SEP_LEN (sizeof(FS_DIR_SEP) - 1)
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/pcache.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/pcache.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbea916
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/pcache.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1688 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+#include "libtecla.h"
+#include "pathutil.h"
+#include "homedir.h"
+#include "freelist.h"
+#include "direader.h"
+#include "stringrp.h"
+
+/*
+ * The new_PcaPathConf() constructor sets the integer first member of
+ * the returned object to the following magic number. This is then
+ * checked for by pca_path_completions() as a sanity check.
+ */
+#define PPC_ID_CODE 4567
+
+/*
+ * A pointer to a structure of the following type can be passed to
+ * the builtin path-completion callback function to modify its behavior.
+ */
+struct PcaPathConf {
+  int id;          /* This is set to PPC_ID_CODE by new_PcaPathConf() */
+  PathCache *pc;   /* The path-list cache in which to look up the executables */
+  int escaped;     /* If non-zero, backslashes in the input line are */
+                   /*  interpreted as escaping special characters and */
+                   /*  spaces, and any special characters and spaces in */
+                   /*  the listed completions will also be escaped with */
+                   /*  added backslashes. This is the default behaviour. */
+                   /* If zero, backslashes are interpreted as being */
+                   /*  literal parts of the file name, and none are added */
+                   /*  to the completion suffixes. */
+  int file_start;  /* The index in the input line of the first character */
+                   /*  of the file name. If you specify -1 here, */
+                   /*  pca_path_completions() identifies the */
+                   /*  the start of the file by looking backwards for */
+                   /*  an unescaped space, or the beginning of the line. */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Prepended to each chached filename is a character which contains
+ * one of the following status codes. When a given filename (minus
+ * this byte) is passed to the application's check_fn(), the result
+ * is recorded in this byte, such that the next time it is looked
+ * up, we don't have to call check_fn() again. These codes are cleared
+ * whenever the path is scanned and whenever the check_fn() callback
+ * is changed.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+  PCA_F_ENIGMA='?', /* The file remains to be checked */
+  PCA_F_WANTED='+', /* The file has been selected by the caller's callback */
+  PCA_F_IGNORE='-'  /* The file has been rejected by the caller's callback */
+} PcaFileStatus;
+
+/*
+ * Encapsulate the memory management objects which supply memoy for
+ * the arrays of filenames.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  StringGroup *sg;       /* The memory used to record the names of files */
+  size_t files_dim;      /* The allocated size of files[] */
+  char **files;          /* Memory for 'files_dim' pointers to files */
+  size_t nfiles;         /* The number of filenames currently in files[] */
+} CacheMem;
+
+static CacheMem *new_CacheMem(void);
+static CacheMem *del_CacheMem(CacheMem *cm);
+static void rst_CacheMem(CacheMem *cm);
+
+/*
+ * Lists of nodes of the following type are used to record the
+ * names and contents of individual directories.
+ */
+typedef struct PathNode PathNode;
+struct PathNode {
+  PathNode *next;   /* The next directory in the path */
+  int relative;     /* True if the directory is a relative pathname */
+  CacheMem *mem;    /* The memory used to store dir[] and files[] */
+  char *dir;        /* The directory pathname (stored in pc->sg) */
+  int nfile;        /* The number of filenames stored in 'files' */
+  char **files;     /* Files of interest in the current directory, */
+                    /*  or NULL if dir[] is a relative pathname */
+                    /*  who's contents can't be cached. This array */
+                    /*  and its contents are taken from pc->abs_mem */
+                    /*  or pc->rel_mem */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Append a new node to the list of directories in the path.
+ */
+static int add_PathNode(PathCache *pc, const char *dirname);
+
+/*
+ * Set the max length of the error-reporting string. There is no point
+ * in this being longer than the width of a typical terminal window.
+ * In composing error messages, I have assumed that this number is
+ * at least 80, so you don't decrease it below this number.
+ */
+#define ERRLEN 200
+
+/*
+ * Set the maximum length allowed for usernames.
+ * names.
+ */
+#define USR_LEN 100
+
+/*
+ * PathCache objects encapsulate the resources needed to record
+ * files of interest from comma-separated lists of directories.
+ */
+struct PathCache {
+  FreeList *node_mem;    /* A free-list of PathNode objects */
+  CacheMem *abs_mem;     /* Memory for the filenames of absolute paths */
+  CacheMem *rel_mem;     /* Memory for the filenames of relative paths */
+  PathNode *head;        /* The head of the list of directories in the */
+                         /*  path, or NULL if no path has been scanned yet. */
+  PathNode *tail;        /* The tail of the list of directories in the */
+                         /*  path, or NULL if no path has been scanned yet. */
+  PathName *path;        /* The fully qualified name of a file */
+  HomeDir *home;         /* Home-directory lookup object */
+  DirReader *dr;         /* A portable directory reader */
+  CplFileConf *cfc;      /* Configuration parameters to pass to */
+                         /*  cpl_file_completions() */
+  CplCheckFn *check_fn;  /* The callback used to determine if a given */
+                         /*  filename should be recorded in the cache. */
+  void *data;            /* Annonymous data to be passed to pc->check_fn() */
+  char usrnam[USR_LEN+1];/* The buffer used when reading the names of */
+                         /*  users. */
+  char errmsg[ERRLEN+1]; /* Error-report buffer */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Empty the cache.
+ */
+static void pca_clear_cache(PathCache *pc);
+
+/*
+ * Read a username from string[] and record it in pc->usrnam[].
+ */
+static int pca_read_username(PathCache *pc, const char *string, int slen,
+			     int literal, const char **nextp);
+
+/*
+ * Extract the next component of a colon separated list of directory
+ * paths.
+ */
+static int pca_extract_dir(PathCache *pc, const char *path,
+			   const char **nextp);
+
+/*
+ * Scan absolute directories for files of interest, recording their names
+ * in mem->sg and recording pointers to these names in mem->files[].
+ */
+static int pca_scan_dir(PathCache *pc, const char *dirname, CacheMem *mem);
+
+/*
+ * A qsort() comparison function for comparing the cached filename
+ * strings pointed to by two (char **) array elements. Note that
+ * this ignores the initial cache-status byte of each filename.
+ */
+static int pca_cmp_matches(const void *v1, const void *v2);
+
+/*
+ * A qsort() comparison function for comparing a filename
+ * against an element of an array of pointers to filename cache
+ * entries.
+ */
+static int pca_cmp_file(const void *v1, const void *v2);
+
+/*
+ * Initialize a PcaPathConf configuration objects with the default
+ * options.
+ */
+static int pca_init_PcaPathConf(PcaPathConf *ppc, PathCache *pc);
+
+/*
+ * Make a copy of a completion suffix, suitable for passing to
+ * cpl_add_completion().
+ */
+static int pca_prepare_suffix(PathCache *pc, const char *suffix,
+			      int add_escapes);
+
+/*
+ * Return non-zero if the specified string appears to start with a pathname.
+ */
+static int cpa_cmd_contains_path(const char *prefix, int prefix_len);
+
+/*
+ * Return a given prefix with escapes optionally removed.
+ */
+static const char *pca_prepare_prefix(PathCache *pc, const char *prefix,
+				      size_t prefix_len, int escaped);
+
+/*
+ * If there is a tilde expression at the beginning of the specified path,
+ * place the corresponding home directory into pc->path. Otherwise
+ * just clear pc->path.
+ */
+static int pca_expand_tilde(PathCache *pc, const char *path, int pathlen,
+			    int literal, const char **endp);
+
+/*
+ * Clear the filename status codes that are recorded before each filename
+ * in the cache.
+ */
+static void pca_remove_marks(PathCache *pc);
+
+/*
+ * Specify how many PathNode's to allocate at a time.
+ */
+#define PATH_NODE_BLK 30
+
+/*
+ * Specify the amount by which the files[] arrays are to be extended
+ * whenever they are found to be too small.
+ */
+#define FILES_BLK_FACT 256
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new object who's function is to maintain a cache of
+ * filenames found within a list of directories, and provide quick
+ * lookup and completion of selected files in this cache.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return     PathCache *  The new, initially empty cache, or NULL
+ *                          on error.
+ */
+PathCache *new_PathCache(void)
+{
+  PathCache *pc;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  pc = (PathCache *)malloc(sizeof(PathCache));
+  if(!pc) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_PathCache: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_PathCache().
+ */
+  pc->node_mem = NULL;
+  pc->abs_mem = NULL;
+  pc->rel_mem = NULL;
+  pc->head = NULL;
+  pc->tail = NULL;
+  pc->path = NULL;
+  pc->home = NULL;
+  pc->dr = NULL;
+  pc->cfc = NULL;
+  pc->check_fn = 0;
+  pc->data = NULL;
+  pc->usrnam[0] = '\0';
+  pc->errmsg[0] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Allocate the freelist of directory list nodes.
+ */
+  pc->node_mem = _new_FreeList("new_PathCache", sizeof(PathNode),
+			       PATH_NODE_BLK);
+  if(!pc->node_mem)
+    return del_PathCache(pc);
+/*
+ * Allocate memory for recording names of files in absolute paths.
+ */
+  pc->abs_mem = new_CacheMem();
+  if(!pc->abs_mem)
+    return del_PathCache(pc);
+/*
+ * Allocate memory for recording names of files in relative paths.
+ */
+  pc->rel_mem = new_CacheMem();
+  if(!pc->rel_mem)
+    return del_PathCache(pc);
+/*
+ * Allocate a pathname buffer.
+ */
+  pc->path = _new_PathName();
+  if(!pc->path)
+    return del_PathCache(pc);
+/*
+ * Allocate an object for looking up home-directories.
+ */
+  pc->home = _new_HomeDir();
+  if(!pc->home)
+    return del_PathCache(pc);
+/*
+ * Allocate an object for reading directories.
+ */
+  pc->dr = _new_DirReader();
+  if(!pc->dr)
+    return del_PathCache(pc);
+/*
+ * Allocate a cpl_file_completions() configuration object.
+ */
+  pc->cfc = new_CplFileConf();
+  if(!pc->cfc)
+    return del_PathCache(pc);
+/*
+ * Configure cpl_file_completions() to use check_fn() to select
+ * files of interest.
+ */
+  cfc_set_check_fn(pc->cfc, pc->check_fn, pc->data);
+/*
+ * Return the cache, ready for use.
+ */
+  return pc;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a given cache of files, returning the resources that it
+ * was using to the system.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc      PathCache *  The cache to be deleted (can be NULL).
+ * Output:
+ *  return  PathCache *  The deleted object (ie. allways NULL).
+ */
+PathCache *del_PathCache(PathCache *pc)
+{
+  if(pc) {
+/*
+ * Delete the memory of the list of path nodes.
+ */
+    pc->node_mem = _del_FreeList(NULL, pc->node_mem, 1);
+/*
+ * Delete the memory used to record filenames.
+ */
+    pc->abs_mem = del_CacheMem(pc->abs_mem);
+    pc->rel_mem = del_CacheMem(pc->rel_mem);
+/*
+ * The list of PathNode's was already deleted when node_mem was
+ * deleted.
+ */
+    pc->head = NULL;
+    pc->tail = NULL;
+/*
+ * Delete the pathname buffer.
+ */
+    pc->path = _del_PathName(pc->path);
+/*
+ * Delete the home-directory lookup object.
+ */
+    pc->home = _del_HomeDir(pc->home);
+/*
+ * Delete the directory reader.
+ */
+    pc->dr = _del_DirReader(pc->dr);
+/*
+ * Delete the cpl_file_completions() config object.
+ */
+    pc->cfc = del_CplFileConf(pc->cfc);
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(pc);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If you want subsequent calls to pca_lookup_file() and
+ * pca_path_completions() to only return the filenames of certain
+ * types of files, for example executables, or filenames ending in
+ * ".ps", call this function to register a file-selection callback
+ * function. This callback function takes the full pathname of a file,
+ * plus application-specific data, and returns 1 if the file is of
+ * interest, and zero otherwise.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc         PathCache *  The filename cache.
+ *  check_fn  CplCheckFn *  The function to call to see if the name of
+ *                          a given file should be included in the
+ *                          cache. This determines what type of files
+ *                          will reside in the cache. To revert to
+ *                          selecting all files, regardless of type,
+ *                          pass 0 here.
+ *  data            void *  You can pass a pointer to anything you
+ *                          like here, including NULL. It will be
+ *                          passed to your check_fn() callback
+ *                          function, for its private use.
+ */
+void pca_set_check_fn(PathCache *pc, CplCheckFn *check_fn, void *data)
+{
+  if(pc) {
+/*
+ * If the callback or its data pointer have changed, clear the cached
+ * statuses of files that were accepted or rejected by the previous
+ * calback.
+ */
+    if(check_fn != pc->check_fn || data != pc->data)
+      pca_remove_marks(pc);
+/*
+ * Record the new callback locally.
+ */
+    pc->check_fn = check_fn;
+    pc->data = data;
+/*
+ * Configure cpl_file_completions() to use the same callback to
+ * select files of interest.
+ */
+    cfc_set_check_fn(pc->cfc, check_fn, data);
+  };
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return a description of the last path-caching error that occurred.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc     PathCache *   The filename cache that suffered the error.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      char *   The description of the last error.
+ */
+const char *pca_last_error(PathCache *pc)
+{
+  return pc ? pc->errmsg : "NULL PathCache argument";
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Discard all cached filenames.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc   PathCache *  The cache to be cleared.
+ */
+static void pca_clear_cache(PathCache *pc)
+{
+  if(pc) {
+/*
+ * Return all path-nodes to the freelist.
+ */
+    _rst_FreeList(pc->node_mem);
+    pc->head = pc->tail = NULL;
+/*
+ * Delete all filename strings.
+ */
+    rst_CacheMem(pc->abs_mem);
+    rst_CacheMem(pc->rel_mem);
+  };
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Build the list of files of interest contained in a given
+ * colon-separated list of directories.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc         PathCache *  The cache in which to store the names of
+ *                          the files that are found in the list of
+ *                          directories.
+ *  path      const char *  A colon-separated list of directory
+ *                          paths. Under UNIX, when searching for
+ *                          executables, this should be the return
+ *                          value of getenv("PATH").
+ * Output:
+ *  return           int    0 - OK.
+ *                          1 - An error occurred. A description of
+ *                              the error can be acquired by calling
+ *                              pca_last_error(pc).
+ */
+int pca_scan_path(PathCache *pc, const char *path)
+{
+  const char *pptr; /* A pointer to the next unprocessed character in path[] */
+  PathNode *node;   /* A node in the list of directory paths */
+  char **fptr;      /* A pointer into pc->abs_mem->files[] */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!pc)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Clear the outdated contents of the cache.
+ */
+  pca_clear_cache(pc);
+/*
+ * If no path list was provided, there is nothing to be added to the
+ * cache.
+ */
+  if(!path)
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Extract directories from the path list, expanding tilde expressions
+ * on the fly into pc->pathname, then add them to the list of path
+ * nodes, along with a sorted list of the filenames of interest that
+ * the directories hold.
+ */
+  pptr = path;
+  while(*pptr) {
+/*
+ * Extract the next pathname component into pc->path->name.
+ */
+    if(pca_extract_dir(pc, pptr, &pptr))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Add a new node to the list of paths, containing both the
+ * directory name and, if not a relative pathname, the list of
+ * files of interest in the directory.
+ */
+    if(add_PathNode(pc, pc->path->name))
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * The file arrays in each absolute directory node are sections of
+ * pc->abs_mem->files[]. Record pointers to the starts of each
+ * of these sections in each directory node. Note that this couldn't
+ * be done in add_PathNode(), because pc->abs_mem->files[] may
+ * get reallocated in subsequent calls to add_PathNode(), thus
+ * invalidating any pointers to it.
+ */
+  fptr = pc->abs_mem->files;
+  for(node=pc->head; node; node=node->next) {
+    node->files = fptr;
+    fptr += node->nfile;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Extract the next directory path from a colon-separated list of
+ * directories, expanding tilde home-directory expressions where needed.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc      PathCache *   The cache of filenames.
+ *  path   const char *   A pointer to the start of the next component
+ *                        in the path list.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  nextp  const char **  A pointer to the next unprocessed character
+ *                        in path[] will be assigned to *nextp.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int     0 - OK. The extracted path is in pc->path->name.
+ *                        1 - Error. A description of the error will
+ *                            have been left in pc->errmsg.
+ */
+static int pca_extract_dir(PathCache *pc, const char *path, const char **nextp)
+{
+  const char *pptr;         /* A pointer into path[] */
+  const char *sptr;         /* The path following tilde expansion */
+  int escaped = 0;          /* True if the last character was a backslash */
+/*
+ * If there is a tilde expression at the beginning of the specified path,
+ * place the corresponding home directory into pc->path. Otherwise
+ * just clear pc->path.
+ */
+  if(pca_expand_tilde(pc, path, strlen(path), 0, &pptr))
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the current location in the path.
+ */
+  sptr = pptr;
+/*
+ * Locate the end of the directory name in the pathname string, stopping
+ * when either the end of the string is reached, or an un-escaped colon
+ * separator is seen.
+ */
+  while(*pptr && (escaped || *pptr != ':'))
+    escaped = !escaped && *pptr++ == '\\';
+/*
+ * Append the rest of the directory path to the pathname buffer.
+ */
+  if(_pn_append_to_path(pc->path, sptr, pptr - sptr, 1) == NULL) {
+    strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to record directory name");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * To facilitate subsequently appending filenames to the directory
+ * path name, make sure that the recorded directory name ends in a
+ * directory separator.
+ */
+  {
+    int dirlen = strlen(pc->path->name);
+    if(dirlen < FS_DIR_SEP_LEN ||
+       strncmp(pc->path->name + dirlen - FS_DIR_SEP_LEN, FS_DIR_SEP,
+	       FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) != 0) {
+      if(_pn_append_to_path(pc->path, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN, 0) == NULL) {
+	strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to record directory name");
+	return 1;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Skip the separator unless we have reached the end of the path.
+ */
+  if(*pptr==':')
+    pptr++;
+/*
+ * Return the unprocessed tail of the path-list string.
+ */
+  *nextp = pptr;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Read a username, stopping when a directory separator is seen, a colon
+ * separator is seen, the end of the string is reached, or the username
+ * buffer overflows.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc   PathCache *   The cache of filenames.
+ *  string    char *   The string who's prefix contains the name.
+ *  slen       int     The max number of characters to read from string[].
+ *  literal    int     If true, treat backslashes as literal characters
+ *                     instead of escapes.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  nextp     char **  A pointer to the next unprocessed character
+ *                     in string[] will be assigned to *nextp.
+ * Output:
+ *  return     int     0 - OK. The username can be found in pc->usrnam.
+ *                     1 - Error. A description of the error message
+ *                         can be found in pc->errmsg.
+ */
+static int pca_read_username(PathCache *pc, const char *string, int slen,
+			     int literal, const char **nextp)
+{
+  int usrlen;         /* The number of characters in pc->usrnam[] */
+  const char *sptr;   /* A pointer into string[] */
+  int escaped = 0;    /* True if the last character was a backslash */
+/*
+ * Extract the username.
+ */
+  for(sptr=string,usrlen=0; usrlen < USR_LEN && (sptr-string) < slen; sptr++) {
+/*
+ * Stop if the end of the string is reached, or a directory separator
+ * or un-escaped colon separator is seen.
+ */
+    if(!*sptr || strncmp(sptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN)==0 ||
+       (!escaped && *sptr == ':'))
+      break;
+/*
+ * Escape the next character?
+ */
+    if(!literal && !escaped && *sptr == '\\') {
+      escaped = 1;
+    } else {
+      escaped = 0;
+      pc->usrnam[usrlen++] = *sptr;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Did the username overflow the buffer?
+ */
+  if(usrlen >= USR_LEN) {
+    strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Username too long");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Terminate the string.
+ */
+  pc->usrnam[usrlen] = '\0';
+/*
+ * Indicate where processing of the input string should continue.
+ */
+  *nextp = sptr;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new CacheMem object.
+ *
+ * Output:
+ *  return  CacheMem *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+static CacheMem *new_CacheMem(void)
+{
+  CacheMem *cm;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  cm = (CacheMem *)malloc(sizeof(CacheMem));
+  if(!cm) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "new_CacheMem: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_CacheMem().
+ */
+  cm->sg = NULL;
+  cm->files_dim = 0;
+  cm->files = NULL;
+  cm->nfiles = 0;
+/*
+ * Allocate a list of string segments for storing filenames.
+ */
+  cm->sg = _new_StringGroup(_pu_pathname_dim());
+  if(!cm->sg)
+    return del_CacheMem(cm);
+/*
+ * Allocate an array of pointers to filenames.
+ * This will be extended later if needed.
+ */
+  cm->files_dim = FILES_BLK_FACT;
+  cm->files = (char **) malloc(sizeof(*cm->files) * cm->files_dim);
+  if(!cm->files) {
+    fprintf(stderr,
+        "new_CacheMem: Insufficient memory to allocate array of files.\n");
+    return del_CacheMem(cm);
+  };
+  return cm;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a CacheMem object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cm   CacheMem *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return CacheMem *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+static CacheMem *del_CacheMem(CacheMem *cm)
+{
+  if(cm) {
+/*
+ * Delete the memory that was used to record filename strings.
+ */
+    cm->sg = _del_StringGroup(cm->sg);
+/*
+ * Delete the array of pointers to filenames.
+ */
+    cm->files_dim = 0;
+    if(cm->files) {
+      free(cm->files);
+      cm->files = NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(cm);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Re-initialize the memory used to allocate filename strings.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  cm     CacheMem *  The memory cache to be cleared.
+ */
+static void rst_CacheMem(CacheMem *cm)
+{
+  _clr_StringGroup(cm->sg);
+  cm->nfiles = 0;
+  return;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Append a new directory node to the list of directories read from the
+ * path.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc        PathCache *  The filename cache.
+ *  dirname  const char *  The name of the new directory.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    0 - OK.
+ *                         1 - Error.
+ */
+static int add_PathNode(PathCache *pc, const char *dirname)
+{
+  PathNode *node;  /* The new directory list node */
+  int relative;    /* True if dirname[] is a relative pathname */
+/*
+ * Have we been passed a relative pathname or an absolute pathname?
+ */
+  relative = strncmp(dirname, FS_ROOT_DIR, FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN) != 0;
+/*
+ * If it's an absolute pathname, ignore it if the corresponding
+ * directory doesn't exist.
+ */
+  if(!relative && !_pu_path_is_dir(dirname))
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Allocate a new list node to record the specifics of the new directory.
+ */
+  node = (PathNode *) _new_FreeListNode(pc->node_mem);
+  if(!node) {
+    sprintf(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to cache new directory.");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Initialize the node.
+ */
+  node->next = NULL;
+  node->relative = relative;
+  node->mem = relative ? pc->rel_mem : pc->abs_mem;
+  node->dir = NULL;
+  node->nfile = 0;
+  node->files = NULL;
+/*
+ * Make a copy of the directory pathname.
+ */
+  node->dir = _sg_store_string(pc->abs_mem->sg, dirname, 0);
+  if(!node->dir) {
+    strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to store directory name.");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Scan absolute directories for files of interest, recording their names
+ * in node->mem->sg and appending pointers to these names to the
+ * node->mem->files[] array.
+ */
+  if(!node->relative) {
+    int nfile = node->nfile = pca_scan_dir(pc, node->dir, node->mem);
+    if(nfile < 1) {  /* No files matched or an error occurred */
+      node = (PathNode *) _del_FreeListNode(pc->node_mem, node);
+      return nfile < 0;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Append the new node to the list.
+ */
+  if(pc->head) {
+    pc->tail->next = node;
+    pc->tail = node;
+  } else {
+    pc->head = pc->tail = node;
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Scan a given directory for files of interest, record their names
+ * in mem->sg and append pointers to them to the mem->files[] array.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc        PathCache *  The filename cache.
+ *  dirname  const char *  The pathname of the directory to be scanned.
+ *  mem        CacheMem *  The memory in which to store filenames of
+ *                         interest.
+ * Output:
+ *  return          int    The number of files recorded, or -1 if a
+ *                         memory error occurs. Note that the
+ *                         inability to read the contents of the
+ *                         directory is not counted as an error.
+ */
+static int pca_scan_dir(PathCache *pc, const char *dirname, CacheMem *mem)
+{
+  int nfile = 0;        /* The number of filenames recorded */
+  const char *filename; /* The name of the file being looked at */
+/*
+ * Attempt to open the directory. If the directory can't be read then
+ * there are no accessible files of interest in the directory.
+ */
+  if(_dr_open_dir(pc->dr, dirname, NULL))
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Record the names of all files in the directory in the cache.
+ */
+  while((filename = _dr_next_file(pc->dr))) {
+    char *copy;        /* A copy of the filename */
+/*
+ * Make a temporary copy of the filename with an extra byte prepended.
+ */
+    _pn_clear_path(pc->path);
+    if(_pn_append_to_path(pc->path, " ", 1, 0) == NULL ||
+       _pn_append_to_path(pc->path, filename, -1, 1) == NULL) {
+      strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to record filename");
+      return -1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Store the filename.
+ */
+    copy = _sg_store_string(mem->sg, pc->path->name, 0);
+    if(!copy) {
+      strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to cache file name.");
+      return -1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Mark the filename as unchecked.
+ */
+    copy[0] = PCA_F_ENIGMA;
+/*
+ * Make room to store a pointer to the copy in mem->files[].
+ */
+    if(mem->nfiles + 1 > mem->files_dim) {
+      int needed = mem->files_dim + FILES_BLK_FACT;
+      char **files = (char **) realloc(mem->files, sizeof(*mem->files)*needed);
+      if(!files) {
+	strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to extend filename cache.");
+	return 1;
+      };
+      mem->files = files;
+      mem->files_dim = needed;
+    };
+/*
+ * Record a pointer to the copy of the filename at the end of the files[]
+ * array.
+ */
+    mem->files[mem->nfiles++] = copy;
+/*
+ * Keep a record of the number of files matched so far.
+ */
+    nfile++;
+  };
+/*
+ * Sort the list of files into lexical order.
+ */
+  qsort(mem->files + mem->nfiles - nfile, nfile, sizeof(*mem->files),
+	pca_cmp_matches);
+/*
+ * Return the number of files recorded in mem->files[].
+ */
+  return nfile;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * A qsort() comparison function for comparing the cached filename
+ * strings pointed to by two (char **) array elements. Note that
+ * this ignores the initial cache-status byte of each filename.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  v1, v2   void *  Pointers to the pointers of two strings to be compared.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    -1 -> v1 < v2.
+ *                    0 -> v1 == v2
+ *                    1 -> v1 > v2
+ */
+static int pca_cmp_matches(const void *v1, const void *v2)
+{
+  const char **s1 = (const char **) v1;
+  const char **s2 = (const char **) v2;
+  return strcmp(*s1+1, *s2+1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Given the simple name of a file, search the cached list of files
+ * in the order in which they where found in the list of directories
+ * previously presented to pca_scan_path(), and return the pathname
+ * of the first file which has this name. If a pathname to a file is
+ * given instead of a simple filename, this is returned without being
+ * looked up in the cache, but with any initial ~username expression
+ * expanded, and optionally, unescaped backslashes removed.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc     PathCache *  The cached list of files.
+ *  name  const char *  The name of the file to lookup.
+ *  name_len     int    The length of the filename string at the
+ *                      beginning of name[], or -1 to indicate that
+ *                      the filename occupies the whole of the
+ *                      string.
+ *  literal      int    If this argument is zero, lone backslashes
+ *                      in name[] are ignored during comparison
+ *                      with filenames in the cache, under the
+ *                      assumption that they were in the input line
+ *                      soley to escape the special significance of
+ *                      characters like spaces. To have them treated
+ *                      as normal characters, give this argument a
+ *                      non-zero value, such as 1.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      char *  The pathname of the first matching file,
+ *                      or NULL if not found. Note that the returned
+ *                      pointer points to memory owned by *pc, and
+ *                      will become invalid on the next call to any
+ *                      function in the PathCache module.
+ */
+char *pca_lookup_file(PathCache *pc, const char *name, int name_len,
+		      int literal)
+{
+  PathNode *node;   /* A node in the list of directories in the path */
+  char **match;     /* A pointer to a matching filename string in the cache */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!pc || !name || name_len==0)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * If no length was specified, determine the length of the string to
+ * be looked up.
+ */
+  if(name_len < 0)
+    name_len = strlen(name);
+/*
+ * If the word starts with a ~username expression, the root directory,
+ * of it contains any directory separators, then treat it isn't a simple
+ * filename that can be looked up in the cache, but rather appears to
+ * be the pathname of a file. If so, return a copy of this pathname with
+ * escapes removed, if requested, and any initial ~username expression
+ * expanded.
+ */
+  if(cpa_cmd_contains_path(name, name_len)) {
+    const char *nptr;
+    if(pca_expand_tilde(pc, name, name_len, literal, &nptr) || 
+       _pn_append_to_path(pc->path, nptr, name_len - (nptr-name),
+			  !literal) == NULL)
+      return NULL;
+    return pc->path->name;
+  };
+/*
+ * Look up the specified filename in each of the directories of the path,
+ * in the same order that they were listed in the path, and stop as soon
+ * as an instance of the file is found.
+ */
+  for(node=pc->head; node; node=node->next) {
+/*
+ * If the directory of the latest node is a relative pathname,
+ * scan it for files of interest.
+ */
+    if(node->relative) {
+      rst_CacheMem(node->mem);
+      if(pca_scan_dir(pc, node->dir, node->mem) < 1)
+	continue;
+      node->files = node->mem->files;
+      node->nfile = node->mem->nfiles;
+    };
+/*
+ * Copy the filename into a temporary buffer, while interpretting
+ * escape characters if needed.
+ */
+    _pn_clear_path(pc->path);
+    if(_pn_append_to_path(pc->path, name, name_len, !literal) == NULL)
+      return NULL;
+/*
+ * Perform a binary search for the requested filename.
+ */
+    match = (char **)bsearch(pc->path->name, node->files, node->nfile,
+		             sizeof(*node->files), pca_cmp_file);
+    if(match) {
+/*
+ * Prepend the pathname in which the directory was found, which we have
+ * guaranteed to end in a directory separator, to the located filename.
+ */
+      if(_pn_prepend_to_path(pc->path, node->dir, -1, 0) == NULL)
+	return NULL;
+/*
+ * Return the matching pathname unless it is rejected by the application.
+ */
+      if(!pc->check_fn || (*match)[0] == PCA_F_WANTED ||
+	 ((*match)[0]==PCA_F_ENIGMA && pc->check_fn(pc->data, pc->path->name))){
+	(*match)[0] = PCA_F_WANTED;
+	return pc->path->name;
+      } else {
+	*(match)[0] = PCA_F_IGNORE;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * File not found.
+ */
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * A qsort() comparison function for comparing a filename string to
+ * a cached filename string pointed to by a (char **) array element.
+ * This ignores the initial code byte at the start of the cached filename
+ * string.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  v1, v2   void *  Pointers to the pointers of two strings to be compared.
+ * Output:
+ *  return    int    -1 -> v1 < v2.
+ *                    0 -> v1 == v2
+ *                    1 -> v1 > v2
+ */
+static int pca_cmp_file(const void *v1, const void *v2)
+{
+  const char *file_name = (const char *) v1;
+  const char **cache_name = (const char **) v2;
+  return strcmp(file_name, *cache_name + 1);
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * The PcaPathConf structure may have options added to it in the future.
+ * To allow your application to be linked against a shared version of the
+ * tecla library, without these additions causing your application to
+ * crash, you should use new_PcaPathConf() to allocate such structures.
+ * This will set all of the configuration options to their default values,
+ * which you can then change before passing the structure to
+ * pca_path_completions().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc         PathCache *  The filename cache in which to look for
+ *                          file name completions.
+ * Output:
+ *  return   PcaPathConf *  The new configuration structure, or NULL
+ *                          on error. A descripition of the error
+ *                          can be found by calling pca_last_error(pc).
+ */
+PcaPathConf *new_PcaPathConf(PathCache *pc)
+{
+  PcaPathConf *ppc;  /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!pc)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  ppc = (PcaPathConf *)malloc(sizeof(PcaPathConf));
+  if(!ppc) {
+    strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory.");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to del_PcaPathConf().
+ */
+  if(pca_init_PcaPathConf(ppc, pc))
+    return del_PcaPathConf(ppc);
+  return ppc;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Initialize a PcaPathConf configuration structure with defaults.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ppc   PcaPathConf *  The structre to be initialized.
+ *  pc      PathCache *  The cache in which completions will be looked up.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int    0 - OK.
+ *                       1 - Error. A description of the error can be
+ *                           obtained by calling pca_last_error(pc).
+ */
+static int pca_init_PcaPathConf(PcaPathConf *ppc, PathCache *pc)
+{
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!pc)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Set the default options.
+ */
+  ppc->id = PPC_ID_CODE;
+  ppc->pc = pc;
+  ppc->escaped = 1;
+  ppc->file_start = -1;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a PcaPathConf object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ppc    PcaPathConf *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return PcaPathConf *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+PcaPathConf *del_PcaPathConf(PcaPathConf *ppc)
+{
+  if(ppc) {
+    ppc->pc = NULL;  /* It is up to the caller to delete the cache */
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(ppc);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * pca_path_completions() is a completion callback function for use
+ * directly with cpl_complete_word() or gl_customize_completions(), or
+ * indirectly from your own completion callback function. It requires
+ * that a CpaPathArgs object be passed via its 'void *data' argument.
+ */
+CPL_MATCH_FN(pca_path_completions)
+{
+  PcaPathConf *ppc;       /* The configuration arguments */
+  PathCache *pc;          /* The cache in which to look for completions */
+  PathNode *node;         /* A node in the list of directories in the path */
+  const char *filename;   /* The name of the file being looked at */
+  const char *start_path; /* The pointer to the start of the pathname */
+                          /*  in line[]. */
+  int word_start;         /* The index in line[] corresponding to start_path */
+  const char *prefix;     /* The file-name prefix being searched for */
+  size_t prefix_len;      /* The length of the prefix being completed */
+  int bot;                /* The lowest index of the array not searched yet */
+  int top;                /* The highest index of the array not searched yet */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!cpl)
+    return 1;
+  if(!line || word_end < 0 || !data) {
+    cpl_record_error(cpl, "pca_path_completions: Invalid arguments.");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the configuration arguments.
+ */
+  ppc = (PcaPathConf *) data;
+/*
+ * Check that the callback data is a PcaPathConf structure returned
+ * by new_PcaPathConf().
+ */
+  if(ppc->id != PPC_ID_CODE) {
+    cpl_record_error(cpl,
+		     "Invalid callback data passed to pca_path_completions()");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the filename cache.
+ */
+  pc = ppc->pc;
+/*
+ * Get the start of the file name. If not specified by the caller,
+ * identify it by searching backwards in the input line for an
+ * unescaped space or the start of the line.
+ */
+  if(ppc->file_start < 0) {
+    start_path = _pu_start_of_path(line, word_end);
+    if(!start_path) {
+      cpl_record_error(cpl, "Unable to find the start of the file name.");
+      return 1;
+    };
+  } else {
+    start_path = line + ppc->file_start;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get the index of the start of the word being completed.
+ */
+  word_start = start_path - line;
+/*
+ * Work out the length of the prefix that is bein completed.
+ */
+  prefix_len = word_end - word_start;
+/*
+ * If the word starts with a ~username expression or the root directory,
+ * of it contains any directory separators, then completion must be
+ * delegated to cpl_file_completions().
+ */
+  if(cpa_cmd_contains_path(start_path, prefix_len)) {
+    cfc_file_start(pc->cfc, word_start);
+    return cpl_file_completions(cpl, pc->cfc, line, word_end);
+  };
+/*
+ * Look up the specified file name in each of the directories of the path,
+ * in the same order that they were listed in the path, and stop as soon
+ * as an instance of the file is found.
+ */
+  for(node=pc->head; node; node=node->next) {
+/*
+ * If the directory of the latest node is a relative pathname,
+ * scan it for files of interest.
+ */
+    if(node->relative) {
+      rst_CacheMem(node->mem);
+      if(pca_scan_dir(pc, node->dir, node->mem) < 1)
+	continue;
+      node->files = node->mem->files;
+      node->nfile = node->mem->nfiles;
+    };
+/*
+ * If needed, make a copy of the file-name being matched, with
+ * escapes removed. Note that we need to do this anew every loop
+ * iteration, because the above call to pca_scan_dir() uses
+ * pc->path.
+ */
+    prefix = pca_prepare_prefix(pc, start_path, prefix_len, ppc->escaped);
+    if(!prefix)
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * The directory entries are sorted, so we can perform a binary
+ * search for an instance of the prefix being searched for.
+ */
+    bot = 0;
+    top = node->nfile - 1;
+    while(top >= bot) {
+      int mid = (top + bot)/2;
+      int test = strncmp(node->files[mid]+1, prefix, prefix_len);
+      if(test > 0)
+	top = mid - 1;
+      else if(test < 0)
+	bot = mid + 1;
+      else {
+	top = bot = mid;
+	break;
+      };
+    };
+/*
+ * If we found a match, look to see if any of its neigbors also match.
+ */
+    if(top == bot) {
+      while(--bot >= 0 && strncmp(node->files[bot]+1, prefix, prefix_len) == 0)
+	;
+      while(++top < node->nfile &&
+	    strncmp(node->files[top]+1, prefix, prefix_len) == 0)
+	;
+/*
+ * We will have gone one too far in each direction.
+ */
+      bot++;
+      top--;
+/*
+ * Add the completions to the list after checking them against the
+ * callers requirements.
+ */
+      for( ; bot<=top; bot++) {
+	char *match = node->files[bot];
+/*
+ * Form the full pathname of the file.
+ */
+	_pn_clear_path(pc->path);
+	if(_pn_append_to_path(pc->path, node->dir, -1, 0) == NULL ||
+	   _pn_append_to_path(pc->path, match+1, -1, 0) == NULL) {
+	  strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to complete file name");
+	  return 1;
+	};
+/*
+ * Should the file be included in the list of completions?
+ */
+	if(!pc->check_fn || match[0] == PCA_F_WANTED ||
+	   (match[0]==PCA_F_ENIGMA && pc->check_fn(pc->data, pc->path->name))) {
+	  match[0] = PCA_F_WANTED;
+/*
+ * Copy the completion suffix into the work pathname pc->path->name,
+ * adding backslash escapes if needed.
+ */
+	  if(pca_prepare_suffix(pc, match + 1 + prefix_len,
+				ppc->escaped))
+	    return 1;
+/*
+ * Record the completion.
+ */
+	  if(cpl_add_completion(cpl, line, word_start, word_end, pc->path->name,
+				"", " "))
+	    return 1;
+/*
+ * The file was rejected by the application.
+ */
+	} else {
+	  match[0] = PCA_F_IGNORE;
+	};
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * We now need to search for subdirectories of the current directory which
+ * have matching prefixes. First, if needed, make a copy of the word being
+ * matched, with escapes removed.
+ */
+  prefix = pca_prepare_prefix(pc, start_path, prefix_len, ppc->escaped);
+  if(!prefix)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Now open the current directory.
+ */
+  if(_dr_open_dir(pc->dr, FS_PWD, NULL))
+    return 0;
+/*
+ * Scan the current directory for sub-directories whos names start with
+ * the prefix that we are completing.
+ */
+  while((filename = _dr_next_file(pc->dr))) {
+/*
+ * Does the latest filename match the prefix, and is it a directory?
+ */
+    if(strncmp(filename, prefix, prefix_len) == 0 && _pu_path_is_dir(filename)){
+/*
+ * Record the completion.
+ */
+      if(pca_prepare_suffix(pc, filename + prefix_len, ppc->escaped) ||
+	 cpl_add_completion(cpl, line, word_start, word_end, pc->path->name,
+			    FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP))
+	return 1;
+/*
+ * The prefix in pc->path->name will have been overwritten by
+ * pca_prepare_suffix(). Restore it here.
+ */
+      prefix = pca_prepare_prefix(pc, start_path, prefix_len, ppc->escaped);
+      if(!prefix)
+	return 1;
+    };
+  };
+  _dr_close_dir(pc->dr);
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Using the work buffer pc->path, make a suitably escaped copy of a
+ * given completion suffix, ready to be passed to cpl_add_completion().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc      PathCache *  The filename cache resource object.
+ *  suffix       char *  The suffix to be copied.
+ *  add_escapes   int    If true, escape special characters.
+ * Output:
+ *  return        int    0 - OK.
+ *                       1 - Error.
+ */
+static int pca_prepare_suffix(PathCache *pc, const char *suffix,
+			      int add_escapes)
+{
+  const char *sptr; /* A pointer into suffix[] */
+  int nbsl;         /* The number of backslashes to add to the suffix */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * How long is the suffix?
+ */
+  int suffix_len = strlen(suffix);
+/*
+ * Clear the work buffer.
+ */
+  _pn_clear_path(pc->path);
+/*
+ * Count the number of backslashes that will have to be added to
+ * escape spaces, tabs, backslashes and wildcard characters.
+ */
+  nbsl = 0;
+  if(add_escapes) {
+    for(sptr = suffix; *sptr; sptr++) {
+      switch(*sptr) {
+      case ' ': case '\t': case '\\': case '*': case '?': case '[':
+	nbsl++;
+	break;
+      };
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Arrange for the output path buffer to have sufficient room for the
+ * both the suffix and any backslashes that have to be inserted.
+ */
+  if(_pn_resize_path(pc->path, suffix_len + nbsl) == NULL) {
+    strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to complete file name");
+    return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * If the suffix doesn't need any escapes, copy it directly into the
+ * work buffer.
+ */
+  if(nbsl==0) {
+    strcpy(pc->path->name, suffix);
+  } else {
+/*
+ * Make a copy with special characters escaped?
+ */
+    if(nbsl > 0) {
+      const char *src = suffix;
+      char *dst = pc->path->name;
+      for(i=0; i<suffix_len; i++) {
+	switch(*src) {
+	case ' ': case '\t': case '\\': case '*': case '?': case '[':
+	  *dst++ = '\\';
+	};
+	*dst++ = *src++;
+      };
+      *dst = '\0';
+    };
+  };
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return non-zero if the specified string appears to start with a pathname.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  prefix  const char *  The filename prefix to check.
+ *  prefix_len     int    The length of the prefix.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         int    0 - Doesn't start with a path name.
+ *                        1 - Does start with a path name.
+ */
+static int cpa_cmd_contains_path(const char *prefix, int prefix_len)
+{
+  int i;
+/*
+ * If the filename starts with a ~, then this implies a ~username
+ * expression, which constitutes a pathname.
+ */
+  if(*prefix == '~')
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * If the filename starts with the root directory, then it obviously
+ * starts with a pathname.
+ */
+  if(prefix_len >= FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN && 
+     strncmp(prefix, FS_ROOT_DIR, FS_ROOT_DIR_LEN) == 0)
+    return 1;
+/*
+ * Search the prefix for directory separators, returning as soon as
+ * any are found, since their presence indicates that the filename
+ * starts with a pathname specification (valid or otherwise).
+ */
+  for(i=0; i<prefix_len; i++) {
+    if(prefix_len - i >= FS_DIR_SEP_LEN &&
+       strncmp(prefix + i, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) == 0)
+      return 1;
+  };
+/*
+ * The file name doesn't appear to start with a pathname specification.
+ */
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If needed make a new copy of the prefix being matched, in pc->path->name,
+ * but with escapes removed. If no escapes are to be removed, simply return
+ * the original prefix string.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc      PathCache *   The cache being searched.
+ *  prefix const char *   The prefix to be processed.
+ *  prefix_len size_t     The length of the prefix.
+ *  escaped       int     If true, return a copy with escapes removed.
+ * Output:
+ *  return const char *   The prepared prefix, or NULL on error, in
+ *                        which case an error message will have been
+ *                        left in pc->errmsg.
+ */
+static const char *pca_prepare_prefix(PathCache *pc, const char *prefix,
+				      size_t prefix_len, int escaped)
+{
+/*
+ * Make a copy with escapes removed?
+ */
+  if(escaped) {
+    _pn_clear_path(pc->path);
+    if(_pn_append_to_path(pc->path, prefix, prefix_len, 1) == NULL) {
+      strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory to complete filename");
+      return NULL;
+    };
+    return pc->path->name;
+  };
+  return prefix;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * If backslashes in the filename should be treated as literal
+ * characters, call the following function with literal=1. Otherwise
+ * the default is to treat them as escape characters, used for escaping
+ * spaces etc..
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ppc    PcaPathConf *  The pca_path_completions() configuration object
+ *                        to be configured.
+ *  literal        int    Pass non-zero here to enable literal interpretation
+ *                        of backslashes. Pass 0 to turn off literal
+ *                        interpretation.
+ */
+void ppc_literal_escapes(PcaPathConf *ppc, int literal)
+{
+  if(ppc)
+    ppc->escaped = !literal;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Call this function if you know where the index at which the
+ * filename prefix starts in the input line. Otherwise by default,
+ * or if you specify start_index to be -1, the filename is taken
+ * to start after the first unescaped space preceding the cursor,
+ * or the start of the line, which ever comes first.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  ppc    PcaPathConf *  The pca_path_completions() configuration object
+ *                        to be configured.
+ *  start_index    int    The index of the start of the filename in
+ *                        the input line, or -1 to select the default.
+ */
+void ppc_file_start(PcaPathConf *ppc, int start_index)
+{
+  if(ppc)
+    ppc->file_start = start_index;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Expand any ~user expression found at the start of a path, leaving
+ * either an empty string in pc->path if there is no ~user expression,
+ * or the corresponding home directory.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc     PathCache *  The filename cache.
+ *  path  const char *  The path to expand.
+ *  pathlen      int    The max number of characters to look at in path[].
+ *  literal      int    If true, treat backslashes as literal characters
+ *                      instead of escapes.
+ * Input/Output:
+ *  endp  const char *  A pointer to the next unprocessed character in
+ *                      path[] will be assigned to *endp.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       int    0 - OK
+ *                      1 - Error (a description will have been placed
+ *                                 in pc->errmsg[]).
+ */
+static int pca_expand_tilde(PathCache *pc, const char *path, int pathlen,
+			    int literal, const char **endp)
+{
+  const char *pptr = path;  /* A pointer into path[] */
+  const char *homedir=NULL; /* A home directory */
+/*
+ * Clear the pathname buffer.
+ */
+  _pn_clear_path(pc->path);
+/*
+ * If the first character is a tilde, then perform home-directory
+ * interpolation.
+ */
+  if(*pptr == '~') {
+/*
+ * Skip the tilde character and attempt to read the username that follows
+ * it, into pc->usrnam[].
+ */
+    if(pca_read_username(pc, ++pptr, pathlen-1, literal, &pptr))
+      return 1;
+/*
+ * Attempt to lookup the home directory of the user.
+ */
+    homedir = _hd_lookup_home_dir(pc->home, pc->usrnam);
+    if(!homedir) {
+      strncpy(pc->errmsg, _hd_last_home_dir_error(pc->home), ERRLEN);
+      pc->errmsg[ERRLEN] = '\0';
+      return 1;
+    };
+/*
+ * Append the home directory to the pathname string.
+ */
+    if(_pn_append_to_path(pc->path, homedir, -1, 0) == NULL) {
+      strcpy(pc->errmsg, "Insufficient memory for home directory expansion");
+      return 1;
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * ~user and ~ are usually followed by a directory separator to
+ * separate them from the file contained in the home directory.
+ * If the home directory is the root directory, then we don't want
+ * to follow the home directory by a directory separator, so we should
+ * skip over it so that it doesn't get copied into the output pathname
+ */
+  if(homedir && strcmp(homedir, FS_ROOT_DIR) == 0 &&
+     (pptr-path) + FS_DIR_SEP_LEN < pathlen &&
+     strncmp(pptr, FS_DIR_SEP, FS_DIR_SEP_LEN) == 0) {
+    pptr += FS_DIR_SEP_LEN;
+  };
+/*
+ * Return a pointer to the next unprocessed character.
+ */
+  *endp = pptr;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Clear the filename status codes that are recorded before each filename
+ * in the cache.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  pc     PathCache *  The filename cache.
+ */
+static void pca_remove_marks(PathCache *pc)
+{
+  PathNode *node;         /* A node in the list of directories in the path */
+  int i;
+/*
+ * Traverse the absolute directories of the path, clearing the
+ * filename status marks that precede each filename.
+ */
+  for(node=pc->head; node; node=node->next) {
+    if(!node->relative) {
+      for(i=0; i<node->nfile; i++)
+	*node->files[i] = PCA_F_ENIGMA;
+    };
+  };
+  return;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe7d875
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "freelist.h"
+#include "stringrp.h"
+
+/*
+ * StringSegment objects store lots of small strings in larger
+ * character arrays. Since the total length of all of the strings can't
+ * be known in advance, an extensible list of large character arrays,
+ * called string-segments are used.
+ */
+typedef struct StringSegment StringSegment;
+struct StringSegment {
+  StringSegment *next; /* A pointer to the next segment in the list */
+  char *block;         /* An array of characters to be shared between strings */
+  int unused;          /* The amount of unused space at the end of block[] */
+};
+
+/*
+ * StringGroup is typedef'd in stringrp.h.
+ */
+struct StringGroup {
+  FreeList *node_mem;  /* The StringSegment free-list */
+  int block_size;      /* The dimension of each character array block */
+  StringSegment *head; /* The list of character arrays */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Specify how many StringSegment's to allocate at a time.
+ */
+#define STR_SEG_BLK 20
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a new StringGroup object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  segment_size    int    The length of each of the large character
+ *                         arrays in which multiple strings will be
+ *                         stored. This sets the length of longest
+ *                         string that can be stored, and for efficiency
+ *                         should be at least 10 times as large as
+ *                         the average string that will be stored.
+ * Output:
+ *  return  StringGroup *  The new object, or NULL on error.
+ */
+StringGroup *_new_StringGroup(int segment_size)
+{
+  StringGroup *sg;    /* The object to be returned */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(segment_size < 1) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_StringGroup: Invalid segment_size argument.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  sg = (StringGroup *) malloc(sizeof(StringGroup));
+  if(!sg) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "_new_StringGroup: Insufficient memory.\n");
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize the
+ * container at least up to the point at which it can safely be passed
+ * to _del_StringGroup().
+ */
+  sg->node_mem = NULL;
+  sg->head = NULL;
+  sg->block_size = segment_size;
+/*
+ * Allocate the free list that is used to allocate list nodes.
+ */
+  sg->node_mem = _new_FreeList("_new_StringGroup", sizeof(StringSegment),
+			       STR_SEG_BLK);
+  if(!sg->node_mem)
+    return _del_StringGroup(sg);
+  return sg;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a StringGroup object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sg     StringGroup *  The object to be deleted.
+ * Output:
+ *  return StringGroup *  The deleted object (always NULL).
+ */
+StringGroup *_del_StringGroup(StringGroup *sg)
+{
+  if(sg) {
+    StringSegment *node;
+/*
+ * Delete the character arrays.
+ */
+    for(node=sg->head; node; node=node->next) {
+      if(node->block)
+	free(node->block);
+      node->block = NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Delete the list nodes that contained the string segments.
+ */
+    sg->node_mem = _del_FreeList("_del_StringGroup", sg->node_mem, 1);
+    sg->head = NULL; /* Already deleted by deleting sg->node_mem */
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(sg);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Make a copy of a string in the specified string group, and return
+ * a pointer to the copy. 
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sg      StringGroup *  The group to store the string in.
+ *  string   const char *  The string to be recorded.
+ *  remove_escapes  int    If true, omit backslashes which escape
+ *                         other characters when making the copy.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         char *  The pointer to the copy of the string,
+ *                         or NULL if there was insufficient memory.
+ */
+char *_sg_store_string(StringGroup *sg, const char *string, int remove_escapes)
+{
+  char *copy;           /* The recorded copy of string[] */
+/*
+ * Check the arguments.
+ */
+  if(!sg || !string)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * Get memory for the string.
+ */
+  copy = _sg_alloc_string(sg, strlen(string));
+  if(copy) {
+/*
+ * If needed, remove backslash escapes while copying the input string
+ * into the cache string.
+ */
+    if(remove_escapes) {
+      int escaped = 0;             /* True if the next character should be */
+                                   /*  escaped. */
+      const char *src = string;    /* A pointer into the input string */
+      char *dst = copy;            /* A pointer into the cached copy of the */
+                                   /*  string. */
+      while(*src) {
+	if(!escaped && *src == '\\') {
+	  escaped = 1;
+	  src++;
+	} else {
+	  escaped = 0;
+	  *dst++ = *src++;
+	};
+      };
+      *dst = '\0';
+/*
+ * If escapes have already been removed, copy the input string directly
+ * into the cache.
+ */
+    } else {
+      strcpy(copy, string);
+    };
+  };
+/*
+ * Return a pointer to the copy of the string (or NULL if the allocation
+ * failed).
+ */
+  return copy;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Allocate memory for a string of a given length.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sg      StringGroup *  The group to store the string in.
+ *  length          int    The required length of the string.
+ * Output:
+ *  return         char *  The pointer to the copy of the string,
+ *                         or NULL if there was insufficient memory.
+ */
+char *_sg_alloc_string(StringGroup *sg, int length)
+{
+  StringSegment *node;  /* A node of the list of string segments */
+  char *copy;           /* The allocated string */
+/*
+ * If the string is longer than block_size, then we can't record it.
+ */
+  if(length > sg->block_size || length < 0)
+    return NULL;
+/*
+ * See if there is room to record the string in one of the existing
+ * string segments.
+ */
+  for(node=sg->head; node && node->unused <= length; node=node->next)
+    ;
+/*
+ * If there wasn't room, allocate a new string segment.
+ */
+  if(!node) {
+    node = (StringSegment *) _new_FreeListNode(sg->node_mem);
+    if(!node)
+      return NULL;
+/*
+ * Initialize the segment.
+ */
+    node->next = NULL;
+    node->block = NULL;
+    node->unused = sg->block_size;
+/*
+ * Attempt to allocate the string segment character array.
+ */
+    node->block = (char *) malloc(sg->block_size);
+    if(!node->block)
+      return NULL;
+/*
+ * Prepend the node to the list.
+ */
+    node->next = sg->head;
+    sg->head = node;
+  };
+/*
+ * Get memory for the string.
+ */
+  copy = node->block + sg->block_size - node->unused;
+  node->unused -= length + 1;
+/*
+ * Return a pointer to the string memory.
+ */
+  return copy;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete all of the strings that are currently stored by a specified
+ * StringGroup object.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sg   StringGroup *   The group of strings to clear.
+ */
+void _clr_StringGroup(StringGroup *sg)
+{
+  StringSegment *node;   /* A node in the list of string segments */
+/*
+ * Mark all of the string segments as unoccupied.
+ */
+  for(node=sg->head; node; node=node->next)
+    node->unused = sg->block_size;
+  return;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b15ce9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/stringrp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+#ifndef stringrp_h
+#define stringrp_h
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * StringGroup objects provide memory for modules that need to
+ * allocate lots of small strings without needing to free any of them
+ * individually, but rather is happy to free them all at the same
+ * time. Taking advantage of these properties, StringGroup objects
+ * avoid the heap fragmentation that tends to occur when lots of small
+ * strings are allocated directly from the heap and later free'd. They
+ * do this by allocating a list of large character arrays in each of
+ * which multiple strings are stored. Thus instead of allocating lots
+ * of small strings, a few large character arrays are allocated. When
+ * the strings are free'd on mass, this list of character arrays is
+ * maintained, ready for subsequent use in recording another set of
+ * strings.
+ */
+typedef struct StringGroup StringGroup;
+
+/*
+ * The following constructor allocates a string-allocation object.
+ * The segment_size argument specifies how long each string segment
+ * array should be. This should be at least 10 times the length of
+ * the average string to be recorded in the string group, and
+ * sets the length of the longest string that can be stored.
+ */
+StringGroup *_new_StringGroup(int segment_size);
+
+/*
+ * Delete all of the strings that are currently stored by a specified
+ * StringGroup object.
+ */
+void _clr_StringGroup(StringGroup *sg);
+
+/*
+ * Make a copy of the specified string, returning a pointer to
+ * the copy, or NULL if there was insufficient memory. If the
+ * remove_escapes argument is non-zero, backslashes that escape
+ * other characters will be removed.
+ */
+char *_sg_store_string(StringGroup *sg, const char *string, int remove_escapes);
+
+/*
+ * Allocate memory for a string of a given length.
+ */
+char *_sg_alloc_string(StringGroup *sg, int length);
+
+/*
+ * Delete a StringGroup object (and all of the strings that it
+ * contains).
+ */
+StringGroup *_del_StringGroup(StringGroup *sg);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fedf4ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.c
@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+#include "strngmem.h"
+#include "freelist.h"
+
+struct StringMem {
+  unsigned long nmalloc;  /* The number of strings allocated with malloc */
+  FreeList *fl;           /* The free-list */
+};
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Create a string free-list container and the first block of its free-list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  caller     const char *  The name of the calling function, or NULL
+ *                           to not report errors to stderr.
+ *  blocking_factor   int    The blocking_factor argument specifies how
+ *                           many strings of length SM_STRLEN
+ *                           bytes (see stringmem.h) are allocated in each
+ *                           free-list block.
+ *                           For example if blocking_factor=64 and
+ *                           SM_STRLEN=16, then each new
+ *                           free-list block will take 1K of memory.
+ * Output:
+ *  return      StringMem *  The new free-list container, or NULL on
+ *                           error.
+ */
+StringMem *_new_StringMem(const char *caller, unsigned blocking_factor)
+{
+  StringMem *sm;    /* The container to be returned. */
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(blocking_factor < 1) {
+    if(caller) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "_new_StringMem (%s): Bad blocking factor (%d).\n",
+	      caller, blocking_factor);
+    };
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Allocate the container.
+ */
+  sm = (StringMem *) malloc(sizeof(StringMem));
+  if(!sm) {
+    if(caller)
+      fprintf(stderr, "_new_StringMem (%s): Insufficient memory.\n", caller);
+    return NULL;
+  };
+/*
+ * Before attempting any operation that might fail, initialize
+ * the container at least up to the point at which it can safely
+ * be passed to _del_StringMem().
+ */
+  sm->nmalloc = 0;
+  sm->fl = NULL;
+/*
+ * Allocate the free-list.
+ */
+  sm->fl = _new_FreeList(caller, SM_STRLEN, blocking_factor);
+  if(!sm->fl)
+    return _del_StringMem(caller, sm, 1);
+/*
+ * Return the free-list container.
+ */
+  return sm;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Delete a string free-list.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  caller  const char *  The name of the calling function, or NULL to
+ *                        not report errors to stderr.
+ *  sm       StringMem *  The string free-list to be deleted, or NULL.
+ *  force          int    If force==0 then _del_StringMem() will complain
+ *                         and refuse to delete the free-list if any
+ *                         of nodes have not been returned to the free-list.
+ *                        If force!=0 then _del_StringMem() will not check
+ *                         whether any nodes are still in use and will
+ *                         always delete the list.
+ * Output:
+ *  return   StringMem *  Always NULL (even if the list couldn't be
+ *                        deleted).
+ */
+StringMem *_del_StringMem(const char *caller, StringMem *sm, int force)
+{
+  if(sm) {
+/*
+ * Check whether any strings have not been returned to the free-list.
+ */
+    if(!force && (sm->nmalloc > 0 || _busy_FreeListNodes(sm->fl) > 0)) {
+      if(caller)
+	fprintf(stderr, "_del_StringMem (%s): Free-list in use.\n", caller);
+      return NULL;
+    };
+/*
+ * Delete the free-list.
+ */
+    sm->fl = _del_FreeList(caller, sm->fl, force);
+/*
+ * Delete the container.
+ */
+    free(sm);
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Allocate an array of 'length' chars.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sm      StringMem *  The string free-list to allocate from.
+ *  length     size_t    The length of the new string (including '\0').
+ * Output:
+ *  return       char *  The new string or NULL on error.
+ */
+char *_new_StringMemString(StringMem *sm, size_t length)
+{
+  char *string;   /* The string to be returned */
+  int was_malloc; /* True if malloc was used to allocate the string */
+/*
+ * Check arguments.
+ */
+  if(!sm)
+    return NULL;
+  if(length < 1)
+    length = 1;
+/*
+ * Allocate the new node from the free list if possible.
+ */
+  if(length < SM_STRLEN) {
+    string = (char *)_new_FreeListNode(sm->fl);
+    if(!string)
+      return NULL;
+    was_malloc = 0;
+  } else {
+    string = (char *) malloc(length+1); /* Leave room for the flag byte */
+    if(!string)
+      return NULL;
+/*
+ * Count malloc allocations.
+ */
+    was_malloc = 1;
+    sm->nmalloc++;
+  };
+/*
+ * Use the first byte of the string to record whether the string was
+ * allocated with malloc or from the free-list. Then return the rest
+ * of the string for use by the user.
+ */
+  string[0] = (char) was_malloc;
+  return string + 1;
+}
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Free a string that was previously returned by _new_StringMemString().
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  sm      StringMem *  The free-list from which the string was originally
+ *                       allocated.
+ *  s            char *  The string to be returned to the free-list, or NULL.
+ * Output:
+ *  return       char *  Always NULL.
+ */
+char *_del_StringMemString(StringMem *sm, char *s)
+{
+  int was_malloc;  /* True if the string originally came from malloc() */
+/*
+ * Is there anything to be deleted?
+ */
+  if(s && sm) {
+/*
+ * Retrieve the true string pointer. This is one less than the one
+ * returned by _new_StringMemString() because the first byte of the
+ * allocated memory is reserved by _new_StringMemString as a flag byte
+ * to say whether the memory was allocated from the free-list or directly
+ * from malloc().
+ */
+    s--;
+/*
+ * Get the origination flag.
+ */
+    was_malloc = s[0];
+    if(was_malloc) {
+      free(s);
+      s = NULL;
+      sm->nmalloc--;
+    } else {
+      s = (char *) _del_FreeListNode(sm->fl, s);
+    };
+  };
+  return NULL;
+}
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.h b/libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5737ae0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/strngmem.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+#ifndef stringmem_h
+#define stringmem_h
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Martin C. Shepherd.
+ * 
+ * All rights reserved.
+ * 
+ * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+ * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ * "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ * without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ * distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
+ * to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
+ * the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
+ * permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
+ * 
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+ * OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
+ * HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
+ * INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
+ * FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ * WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ * 
+ * Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
+ * shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
+ * or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
+ * of the copyright holder.
+ */
+
+typedef struct StringMem StringMem;
+
+/*
+ * Applications that dynamically allocate lots of small strings
+ * run the risk of significantly fragmenting the heap. This module
+ * aims to reduce this risk by allocating large arrays of small fixed
+ * length strings, arranging them as a free-list and allowing
+ * callers to allocate from the list. Strings that are too long
+ * to be allocated from the free-list are allocated from the heap.
+ * Since typical implementations of malloc() eat up a minimum of
+ * 16 bytes per call to malloc() [because of alignment and space
+ * management constraints] it makes sense to set the free-list
+ * string size to 16 bytes. Note that unlike malloc() which typically
+ * keeps 8 bytes per allocation for its own use, our allocator will
+ * return all but one of the 16 bytes for use. One hidden byte of overhead
+ * is reserved for flagging whether the string was allocated directly
+ * from malloc or from the free-list.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Set the length of each free-list string. The longest string that
+ * will be returned without calling malloc() will be one less than
+ * this number.
+ */
+#define SM_STRLEN 16
+
+/*
+ * Create a string free-list container and the first block of its free-list.
+ */
+StringMem *_new_StringMem(const char *caller, unsigned blocking_factor);
+
+/*
+ * Delete a string free-list.
+ */
+StringMem *_del_StringMem(const char *caller, StringMem *sm, int force);
+
+/*
+ * Allocate an array of 'length' chars.
+ */
+char *_new_StringMemString(StringMem *sm, size_t size);
+
+/*
+ * Free a string that was previously returned by _new_StringMemString().
+ */
+char *_del_StringMemString(StringMem *sm, char *s);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/update_html b/libtecla-1.4.1/update_html
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..35625a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/update_html
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+# Convert man pages to html files.
+
+cd man3
+for page in *.3;do
+  if [ "`wc -l $page | awk '{print $1}'`" -gt 1 ]; then
+    html="../html/`echo $page | sed -e 's/.3$/.html/'`"
+    man2html $page > $html
+    for ref in "libtecla(3)" "cpl_complete_word(3)" "ef_expand_file(3)" "gl_get_line(3)" "pca_lookup_file(3)" "enhance(3)"; do
+      link="`echo $ref | sed 's/(3)/.html/'`"
+      ed -s $html << EOF
+	1,\$s|$ref|<a href="$link">&</a>|g
+	w
+	q
+EOF
+    done
+  fi
+done
+
+# Convert the change log into a web page.
+
+cd ../html
+echo '<HEAD><TITLE>The tecla library change log</TITLE></HEAD>' > changes.html
+echo '<BODY bgcolor=add8e6><PRE>' >> changes.html
+cat ../CHANGES >> changes.html
+echo '</PRE></BODY>' >> changes.html
+
+# Do the same to the release-notes file.
+
+cd ../html
+echo '<HEAD><TITLE>The tecla library release notes</TITLE></HEAD>' > release.html
+echo '<BODY bgcolor=add8e6><PRE>' >> release.html
+cat ../RELEASE.NOTES >> release.html
+echo '</PRE></BODY>' >> release.html
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/update_version b/libtecla-1.4.1/update_version
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..c18f714
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/update_version
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Change the version number of the library. This changes the number in
+# every file that it is known to appear in.
+#
+# Usage:
+#  update_version major minor micro
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+usage="$0 major minor micro"
+
+if [ $# -ne 3 ]; then
+  echo $usage
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+# Get the three components of the version number.
+
+major="$1"
+minor="$2"
+micro="$3"
+
+# Everything will need to be reconfigured after this change, so
+# discard any existing configuration.
+
+make distclean 2>/dev/null
+
+# Check that the version components are all positive integers.
+
+for c in $major $minor $micro; do
+  if echo "$c" | awk '{exit $1 ~ /^[0-9]+$/}'; then
+    echo 'Version number components must all be positive integers.'
+    exit 1
+  fi
+done
+
+#
+# Update the version number in the configure.in script.
+#
+ed -s configure.in << EOF
+/^MAJOR_VER=\"[0-9][0-9]*\"/ s/^.*$/MAJOR_VER=\"$major\"/
+/^MINOR_VER=\"[0-9][0-9]*\"/ s/^.*$/MINOR_VER=\"$minor\"/
+/^MICRO_VER=\"[0-9][0-9]*\"/ s/^.*$/MICRO_VER=\"$micro\"/
+w
+q
+EOF
+
+if which autoconf 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  autoconf
+else
+  echo 'Note that autoconf needs to be run.'
+fi
+
+#
+# Update the version number in the libtecla header file script.
+#
+ed -s libtecla.h << EOF
+/^#define TECLA_MAJOR_VER [0-9][0-9]*/ s/^.*$/#define TECLA_MAJOR_VER $major/
+/^#define TECLA_MINOR_VER [0-9][0-9]*/ s/^.*$/#define TECLA_MINOR_VER $minor/
+/^#define TECLA_MICRO_VER [0-9][0-9]*/ s/^.*$/#define TECLA_MICRO_VER $micro/
+w
+q
+EOF
+
+#
+# Update the version number in the README file.
+#
+ed -s README << EOF
+/version [0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]* / s/version [0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*/version $major.$minor.$micro/
+w
+q
+EOF
+
+#
+# Update the version number in the html index file.
+#
+ed -s html/index.html << EOF
+/version [0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\./ s/version [0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*/version $major.$minor.$micro/g
+/libtecla-[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\./ s/libtecla-[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\.[0-9][0-9]*\./libtecla-$major.$minor.$micro./g
+w
+q
+EOF
diff --git a/libtecla-1.4.1/version.c b/libtecla-1.4.1/version.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e1275e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtecla-1.4.1/version.c
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+#include "libtecla.h"
+
+/*.......................................................................
+ * Return the version number of the tecla library.
+ *
+ * Input:
+ *  major    int *   The major version number of the library
+ *                   will be assigned to *major. This number is
+ *                   only incremented when a change to the library is
+ *                   made that breaks binary (shared library) and/or
+ *                   compilation backwards compatibility.
+ *  minor    int *   The minor version number of the library
+ *                   will be assigned to *minor. This number is
+ *                   incremented whenever new functions are added to
+ *                   the public API.
+ *  micro    int *   The micro version number of the library will be
+ *                   assigned to *micro. This number is incremented
+ *                   whenever internal changes are made that don't
+ *                   change the public API, such as bug fixes and
+ *                   performance enhancements.
+ */
+void libtecla_version(int *major, int *minor, int *micro)
+{
+  if(major)
+    *major = TECLA_MAJOR_VER;
+  if(minor)
+    *minor = TECLA_MINOR_VER;
+  if(micro)
+    *micro = TECLA_MICRO_VER;
+}
author	cvs2git <rtems-devel@rtems.org>	2008-08-21 14:34:48 +0000
committer	cvs2git <rtems-devel@rtems.org>	2008-08-21 14:34:48 +0000
commit	5a4a15a5c7e2320e083fd1767dfceb41813a7d21 (patch)
tree	210dd35969b617b4b2284f27b3cb402f4c7edac4 /libtecla-1.4.1
parent	Latest ncurses add-on (diff)
download	rtems-addon-packages-5a4a15a5c7e2320e083fd1767dfceb41813a7d21.tar.bz2